A Complete Setup by Setup Guide For Embroidery Digitizing

User Manual
Onscreen Manual
Copyright 1998-2010 Wilcom Pty Ltd. All rights reserved.

No parts of this publication or the accompanying software may
be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any human or computer
language, in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to
any third party without the express written permission of:
Wilcom Pty Ltd. (A.B.N. 43 001 971 919)
146-156 Wyndham Street, Alexandria (Sydney)
New South Wales, 2015, Australia
PO Box 581, Alexandria, 1435
Phone: +61 2 9578 5100
Fax: +61 2 9578 5108
Email: wilcom@wilcom.com.au
Web: http://www.wilcom.com.au
TrueView and Point & Stitch are trademarks of Wilcom
Pty Ltd. Portions of the imaging technology of this Product are
copyrighted by AccuSoft Corporation. The EPS File
Import/Export Convertor used in this Product is copyrighted
by Access Softek, Inc. All rights reserved.
Wilcom Pty Ltd makes no representation or warranties with
respect to the contents of this publication and specifically
disclaims any implied warranties of merchantable quality or
fitness for any particular purpose.
Further, Wilcom Pty Ltd reserves the right to revise this
publication and to make changes in it from time to time
without obligation of Wilcom Pty Ltd to notify any person or
organization of such revisions or changes.
The screen illustrations in this publication are intended as
representations, not exact duplicates of screen layouts
generated by the software. The samples used to illustrate
software features and capabilities may not be exactly
duplicable, depending on inclusions provided with your
software model or product level.
The Product Differentiation Table which appears in the
appendices of this manual indicates which features are
relevant to each level of product. While every effort has been
made to maintain this table up to the current release, late
changes may not be exactly reflected. For further advice, refer
to your Wilcom sales representative.
Some artwork for design samples in the User Manual and
Help File kindly provided by Digital Art Solutions.
2010 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved. Corel,
CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, Corel CAPTURE,
PowerTRACE, the Corel logo and the CorelDRAW balloon
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation
and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the U.S. and/or other
countries. AMD Athlon and AMD Opteron are trademarks of
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. clicknlearn.com is the
trademark of Click-N-Learn PTY LTD of Australia. Microsoft,
OpenType, VisualStudio for applications, the VisualStudio for
applications logo, Windows, the Windows 7 logo and Internet
Explorer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Intel and
Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
PANTONE, PANTONE Hexachrome, the PANTONE
Hexachrome logo and the PANTONE Digital Color logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Pantone, Inc.
Bitstream and the Bitstream logo are trademarks or registered
Rev 1
Nov
2010
trademarks of Bitstream Inc. SWiSH miniMax2 and the

SWiSHzone logo are trademarks of SWiSHzone.com Pty. Ltd.
PhotoZoom Pro 2 is copyright 2006-2010 BenVista ltd.
iStockphoto and the iStockphoto logo are registered
trademarks of iStockphoto Inc. ConceptShare and the
ConceptShare logo are trademarks or registered trademarks
of ConceptShare Inc. in Canada, the U.S and/or other
countries. Other product, font and company names and logos
may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies. This Product is provided under an
enclosed license agreement that defines what you may do
with this product and contains limitations on warranties and
your remedies.
Subject to any warranties implied by law which are incapable
of limitation or exclusion, the software is purchased as is
without any warranty as to its performance, accuracy, freedom
from error or to any results generated through its use and
without any implied warranty of merchantability or of fitness
for any particular purpose for which the software is being
acquired. The purchaser relies on its own skill and judgement
in selecting the software for its own use and assumes the
entire risk as to the results and performance of the software.
Wilcom Pty Ltd specifically does not warrant that the software
will meet the purchasers requirements or operate without
interruption or error.
Introduction
Welcome to Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0, the

leading embroidery design software application
for the decorated goods industry. No other
product on the market provides the flexibility of
EmbroideryStudio in creating designs for both
embroidery and multi-decoration.
upon the others to provide for the whole gamut

of stitching and digitizing requirements of
professional digitizers.
Level 1 Powerful Digitizing
EmbroideryStudio Level 1 introduces you to
professional embroidery digitizing. Incorporating
advanced lettering and editing features, Level 1
provides a suite of integrated digitizing tools for
the creation of reliable, quality embroidery
designs. Using scanned or imported artwork,
create embroidery shapes with turning or parallel
stitching plus advanced stitch types like Program
Split or Motif Fill. Ideal for companies that do
corporate, sports and fashion embroidery,
Level 1 supports all common embroidery
industry formats.
Level 2 Creative Digitizing
While EmbroideryStudio supports

multi-decoration design, it is tailored to the
requirements of the embroidery specialist who
requires a powerful and complete toolset to edit
and create high-quality, production-ready
embroidery. EmbroideryStudio users are often
full-time digitizers or power-users who
understand embroidery, its possibilities as well as
limitations, and require full control of design and
editing processes. Such users generally want to
invest time in creating a perfect design to their
standards) which is as efficient as possible for
bulk production.
In short, EmbroideryStudio provides a complete
embroidery design solution for embroidery
professionals, but one which also integrates with
existing printing processes, enabling swift
inter-conversion of printing and embroidery
designs, as well as full integration of
multi-decoration designs.
EmbroideryStudio product range

Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 is available in
three product levels. Each is designed to fulfil the
needs of a specific market segment and to build
Incorporating a blend of powerful digitizing tools

and creative stitch effects,
EmbroideryStudio Level 2 is Wilcoms most
popular professional embroidery design system.
Import and convert vector files to embroidery
using Wilcoms powerful conversion technology.
Advanced stitch effects such as Florentine Effect,
3D Warp, Trapunto and Stipple stitch will bring
your embroidery to life. Smart Branching
sequences your embroidery design, eliminating
trims, while Offset Object automatically create
borders around lettering and other design
objects. EmbroideryStudio Level 2 gives you
the competitive edge to create superior
embroidery designs faster and more simply than
ever before.
Level 3 Advanced Digitizing
To give yourself the full power of
EmbroideryStudio, Level 3 is the only choice for
the advanced digitizer. Encompassing Wilcoms
complete range of embroidery lettering, editing
and digitizing tools, Level 3 contains, as
standard, superior Chenille embroidery and
automated Sequin design tools. Productivity and
efficiency is the main focus of Level 3. Crafted to
support high-volume embroidery, time-saving
tools such as Mirror-Merge, Fusion Fill and Color
Blending complement the easy-to-use interface
Wil com Embroider yStudio e 2.0 Onscreen Manual
to give you maximum power. Take charge of your

embroidery design process with the powerful
capabilities of EmbroideryStudio Level 3.
selected, see Product Differentiation Table in the

EmbroideryStudio Onscreen Manual.
Onscreen documentation
Note For a complete feature listing, see Product
Differentiation Table in the EmbroideryStudio
Onscreen Manual.
Registering the product

Dont forget to register your copy of Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0. By registering, youll
have access to:
Wilcom support
Live and recorded online training (as it
becomes available)
Information about product updates, events

and special offers.
You will need to be connected to the internet in
order to complete the registration process. See
Installation & Setup for details.
Resources and support

EmbroideryStudio provides various ways to
access information about the software and how
to use it.
Note Screen illustrations in the user
documentation are intended to be
representations, not exact duplicates of the
screen layouts generated by the software.
Procedural descriptions may vary slightly from
particular installations depending on which
default system settings are activated.
Printed documentation
With your Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0
installation CD you will have received the
following printed documentation:
Quick Start Guide
This EmbroideryStudio Quick Start Guide
contains an overview of the application together
with introductory tutorial material and quick
reference. For detailed procedures covering all
features of the software applications, refer to the
EmbroideryStudio Onscreen Manual which can
be accessed via the Wilcom program group. To
identify sources of information relevant to your
specific model and any options you may have
Onscreen documentation is provided in two

formats HTML Onscreen Help and Adobe
Acrobat. Components include Release Notes,
Quick Reference, Onscreen Manual, Onscreen
Help, as well as various User Manual
Supplements.
Release Notes
Onscreen Release Notes provide you with details
of new features and major and minor
improvements to the software release, as well as
known limitations and workarounds. Release
Notes also provide an itemized listing of new and
improved features for each product level.
Onscreen Manual
The Onscreen Manual contains hundreds of
step-by-step instructions together with samples
and screen images. These are intended to be
used as a reference, not a tutorial. Before you
begin working with the product, read Creating
Embroidery with EmbroideryStudio. This chapter
outlines the basic concepts of digitizing with
EmbroideryStudio and provides important
guidelines on how to use the software for best
results.
In the Onscreen Manual, you should also
familiarize yourself with Basic Procedures. This
chapter explains how to start the application and
how to use some of the essential tools and
features that EmbroideryStudio provides. The
chapters Viewing Designs and Selecting
Embroidery Objects contain essential information
about the many ways of viewing designs in the
software as well as selecting and manipulating
design objects.
The Onscreen Manual can be accessed from the
EmbroideryStudio programs folder. You can
read it with Adobe Acrobat Reader which can be
downloaded from the Adobe website. Quickly
search for the information you need using
standard Acrobat Reader features.
Note EmbroideryStudio includes as standard
the entire suite of CorelDRAW drawing tools
which offer many techniques for drafting outlines
and shapes on screen. You will also need to
calibrate the monitor for the drawing tools. For a
detailed description of the CorelDRAW
I nt ro d u c t i o n
interface, refer to the electronic User Guide

available via the Windows Start > Programs
group. Alternatively, use the onscreen help
available from the Graphics mode Help menu.
Wilcom ES Chenille Supplement
Onscreen Help
EmbroideryStudio
ES Chenille machines, including chain, moss,
needle height
ES Chenille stitch types and effects.
Onscreen Help provides quick access to general

information on EmbroideryStudio features and
step-by-step instructions. There are two types
available Embroidery Help and Graphics Help.
See Accessing onscreen help for details.
User Manual supplements

installation CD you will have also received the
following onscreen supplements:
Wilcom ES Machine Manager Supplement
This supplement documents the following
product capabilities:
ES Machine Manager Direct Connect

Feedback from machines
Machine activity reporting
Technical details of machine network setup.
The supplement must be used in conjunction with
the EmbroideryStudio Onscreen Manual.
Wilcom ES Cross Stitch Supplement
Manual and automatic cross stitch digitizing

Cross stitch editing
Cross stitch lettering
Handling cross stitch design files.
This supplement is supplied with the ES Cross
Stitch Option. It must be used in conjunction with
the EmbroideryStudio Onscreen Manual.
Wilcom ES Sequin Supplement
Setting up sequin mode

Creating sequin runs and fills
Converting objects to sequins
Setting up twin-sequin designs
Modifying sequin designs
Digitizing individual sequins

ES Chenille features within
This supplement is supplied with the ES Chenille

Option. It must be used in conjunction with the
Wilcom ES Schiffli User Manual
This manual documents the following product
capabilities:
ES Schiffli features within EmbroideryStudio

Read/output to Schiffli files
ES Schiffli disk utilities, Fixpat, Defced.
The manual is supplied with the ES Schiffli
Viewing onscreen documentation

Onscreen documentation can be accessed from
the Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 Programs
folder. You can read it with Adobe Acrobat
Reader which can be downloaded from the Adobe
website. Quickly search for the information you
need using standard Adobe Acrobat Reader
features.
Note EmbroideryStudio includes as standard
the entire suite of CorelDRAW drawing tools
which offer many techniques for drafting outlines
and shapes on screen. For a detailed description
of the CorelDRAW interface, refer to the
electronic User Guide available via the Windows
Start > Programs group. Alternatively, use the
onscreen help available from the Graphics mode
Help menu.
To view onscreen documentation
1 From Windows Start, go to the All Programs
> Wilcom > Documentation folder.
This supplement is supplied with the ES Sequin

You will find the following onscreen

documents:
Document
Purpose
Help Topics
EmbroideryStudio Help. See

Accessing onscreen help for
details.
Wilcom
Contains hundreds of
EmbroideryStu step-by-step instructions together
dio Onscreen
with samples and screen images.
Manual
Alternatively, access onscreen documentation

via the Help menu.
Access onscreen
documentation
Click the Reader Zoom dropdown and

select a setting try 200% if you want to
look closely at screen diagrams.
5 Use the page turning controls at the bottom of
the window to scroll backwards and forwards
through the book or return to previous views.
Tip Select Help > Reader Guide from the
top of the Reader screen for comprehensive
information about using Reader.
Accessing onscreen help

Onscreen Help provides quick access to general
information on EmbroideryStudio features and
step-by-step instructions. Two types are
available Embroidery Help and Graphics Help.
To access onscreen help
1 Select Help from the menu bar.
Depending on which mode you are in
Graphics or Embroidery different options
are available:
2 Select the EmbroideryStudio Onscreen

Manual to open in Adobe Reader.
In Graphics mode you have sub-menus

Embroidery Help and Graphics Help:
Fit in Window
Zoom tool
Fit Width
Access onscreen
help in Graphics
mode
In Embroidery mode you are presented

with Embroidery Help only:
Bookmarks
Paging settings
Access
onscreen help
in Embroidery
mode
3 Select the topic you want by clicking on its

Bookmark.
4 Change the view magnification in any of the
following ways:
Click the Actual Size, or Fit in Window,

or Fit Width buttons.
Select the Zoom In tool, then click

anywhere on the page each click
increases the magnification.
2 Choose Help Topics from the dropdown list.

The EmbroideryStudio Help window opens.
3 Click Contents to display the main list of topics.
Topics are grouped under high-level headings

with book icons.
Alternatively, select Help > Wilcom on the

Web for the same set of options.
4 Double-click a book to view the list of topics,

then double-click a topic.
Alternatively, click Index or Search and enter
keywords to search on a specific subject.
Access online
support
Tip Context-Sensitive Help is available for

dialogs by pressing the 1 key.
Accessing online support

You can access sales and support information
easily from within the software.
To access online support
Note You must have a correctly configured

web browser on your system together with
web access.
Click the Quick Launch button on the

Universal toolbar.
Conventions used in the documentation

The documentation adopts the following
conventions:
Access online
support
Select an option from the dropdown list:

Resource Center: Launches the Wilcom

Resource Center web page which includes

links to various help resources.
Wilcom.com.au: Launches the Wilcom web
page.
Corel.com: Launches the Corel web page.
EmbroideryStartup.com: Launches the
Embroidery Startup web page. This
valuable resource provides registered users
with embroidery discussion forums for
digitizing, software, machines, suppliers,
pricing, marketing, and much more. It also
provides valuable information about setting
up and running your business.
DecoNETWORK.com: Launches the
DecoNetwork web page. This is another
extremely valuable resource for
decorations industry professionals.
Commands
Commands on a submenu are referred to by both
the submenu and command name. For example
the command Open on the submenu
Embroidery Disk is referred to as Embroidery
Disk > Open.
Dialog boxes
Dialog boxes are referred to as dialogs and are
displayed only if they provide important
information on using EmbroideryStudio. The
screen images provided may differ slightly to the
layouts generated by the software and operating
system you are using.
Mouse conventions
Instruction
Description
Click
[
Right-click ]
Double- click .
Shift-click
Click OK
Click the left mouse button.

Click the right mouse button.
Click the mouse button twice
without moving the mouse.
V + [ Hold down Shift and click left
mouse button.
[ or j Click OK with the mouse or
press the Enter key on the
keyboard to complete the
action.
Keyboard conventions
Shortcut
Description
C+S
While holding down the Control key

(Ctrl), press the lowercase letter S key.
C+V+H While holding down the Control key
(Ctrl), press Shift and the H key.
See also Keyboard Shortcuts.
Installation & Setup
If you havent yet installed Wilcom

EmbroideryStudio e2.0, read through this
section. There are two major options available to
you:
Wilcom EmbroideryStudio
Wilcom DesignWorkflow
There are also sub-components of these two
applications which you can install or remove
separately as required.
Dos and Donts
The current EmbroideryStudio installation

does not uninstall previous versions of the
software. If you wish to preserve user-defined
settings, motifs and program splits, and
custom alphabets, you need to install
EmbroideryStudio before removing any
previous version. This will allow the
installation to copy the necessary files to the
new location.
After successfully installing the current
EmbroideryStudio, you can then uninstall the
previous version via the Windows Control
Panel.
Never remove EmbroideryStudio manually
by selecting program file folders and pressing
the Delete key. This is true for all Windows
applications.
Do not attach your dongle until prompted to
do so. If for any reason you do attach the
dongle before EmbroideryStudio is installed
or the PC rebooted, you should cancel the
Windows Auto Detect Hardware wizard if
it appears.
After you install the EmbroideryStudio

software, your computer will reboot
automatically to ensure successful installation
of the software. Make sure that you save any
files and close all applications before you
install.
When you install EmbroideryStudio software,
the pre-existing normal.emt template file is
compared with the new normal.emt. If the
two files are different, the software renames
the pre-existing template file as
normalold.emt. This file is then available as
a template file for use with the new software if
required. The normal.emt and
normalold.emt files can be found in the
Template folder under your
EmbroideryStudio program folder. The
default location is C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\T
emplate.
System requirements
Before you install, or if you experience operating
problems of any sort, make sure that your
computer meets the system requirements.
PC requirements
Check that your PC meets the system
requirements required of EmbroideryStudio.
Check CPU/RAM as well as hard disk space. The
table below provides minimum and
recommended system requirements.
Item
Minimum
CPU
Intel Pentium 4, AMD Athlon 64 or

2 GHz + Latest Intel or AMD 32-bit (x86) or
AMD Opteron
64-bit (x64) multi core processor
Microsoft Windows 7, Windows Vista, Microsoft Windows 7 with latest service
Windows XP, with latest service packs
packs installed (32-bit or 64-bit editions)
installed (32-bit or 64-bit editions)
I.E. 7.0 or Later
I.E. 7.0 or Later
Required for product registration and access to software updates. For latest operating
system information, visit the Wilcom Support Center at www.wilcom.com.au/support.
1GB
2GB (More if running multiple apps)
40GB
80GB or more
At least 10GB after installation
20GB after installation
Operating system
Browser
Internet connection
Memory
Hard disk size
Free disk space
Recommended
Item
Minimum
Graphics card
Support for Highest Color (32bit) and

resolution (1024 X 768)
Monitor
Scanner, printer and
plotter
USB ports
Mouse
Data drives
Sound card
Recommended
Support for DirectX 9 graphics with:

WDDM driver
512MB or higher of graphics memory
(non-integrated)
Pixel Shader 2.0 in hardware
32 bits per pixel
Dual monitor capable
17" at 1024 X 768
Dual monitors capable of displaying 1280 X
1024 or higher
Windows-compatible (any connection method e.g. parallel, USB)
Dedicated USB port for a USB dongle
PS/2 or USB mouse
DVD-ROM drive for software installation Backup device e.g. CD/DVD burner, tape
Dual layer DVD-ROM for extras DVD
backup, removable hard drive
Required for multimedia training
Supported operating systems
EmbroideryStudio does not support Win98 or To check your hard disk space
Windows NT/2000.
EmbroideryStudio requires IE 7.0 or higher.
Free hard disk space
EmbroideryStudio occupies up to 1Gb of hard
disk space, depending on the options installed.
Screen resolution
Some controls may be hidden on the user
interface if you run your monitor at low
resolutions. The physical size of your monitor will
have a bearing on the optimum screen
resolution.
1 Double-click the My Computer icon on your

Windows Desktop.
The My Computer window opens.
2 Right-click the hard-disk drive icon (usually
C:) and select Properties.
The Properties > General dialog opens.
This tab shows the hard-disk capacity as well
as any free space.
Installation kit and components
Check your CPU and RAM specifications, and the

version of Windows you are running to ensure
they meet EmbroideryStudio requirements.
When you install EmbroideryStudio and/or

DesignWorkflow, the installation will install
programs and associated files to your C: or
nominated drive as well as program icons to your
Windows Desktop and Start Menu Programs
Group. The Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 kit
includes some or all of the following components.
To check CPU/RAM specifications
Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 installation

disk
Check CPU/RAM specifications
1 On the Windows desktop, right-click the My

Computer icon and select Properties.
The System Properties > General dialog
opens.
2 Check the Windows version, the CPU and the
amount of RAM.
Check your hard disk space

Check that your hard disk has enough space to
run EmbroideryStudio effectively. See PC
requirements for details.
The Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 installation

disk includes software for all products, including
EmbroideryStudio, ES Machine Manager,
ES Cross Stitch, ES Chenille, and ES Schiffli. The
same installation disk includes software for
DesignWorkflow software.
Note CorelDRAW is also installed as standard
with EmbroideryStudio. CorelDRAW is
integrated with EmbroideryStudio to a provide a
rich suite of drawing tools which offer many
sophisticated techniques for drafting outlines and
shapes on screen. Vector graphics so created can
be directly converted to embroidery objects or
I n stallatio n & S etup
even entire designs. For a full description of the

CorelDRAW tools, refer to the electronic User
Guide available via the Windows Start >
Programs group. Alternatively, use the
onscreen help available from the Help menu in
Graphics mode. See also Accessing onscreen
help.
M&D kit languages
The M&D kits are available in the following
languages: English, Japanese, Spanish, Italian,
French, and German.
Printed and onscreen documentation
installation disk you will have received a set of
documentation. Onscreen documentation is
provided in two formats HTML Onscreen Help
and Adobe Acrobat. See Resources and support
for details.
and a replacement purchased for the cost of the

dongle alone. However, in case of loss or theft,
you will need to purchase an entire
EmbroideryStudio replacement system. For this
reason, you should consider insuring your
dongle.
Each dongle has its own serial number and
identity code so your system can be uniquely
recognized. Security codes enable access to
features within the software. When updating or
upgrading your software, you re-program your
dongle by entering access codes via the software.
See Changing security device options for details.
Note You will need Acrobat Reader to read, print

and search your onscreen documentation. This
can be downloaded from the Adobe website.
Caution When you attach the security device

(dongle) and run EmbroideryStudio, the system
will normally launch the software if the device is
detected properly. However, if you attached the
device before installing EmbroideryStudio or
restarting PC, it may have been added to
Windows as an Unknown USB Device.
EmbroideryStudio will then not be able to detect
it. See Correcting security device driver problems
for details.
Security device
Installation options
All purchases of EmbroideryStudio software,

whether new, updates, or upgrades, are shipped
with a USB type dongle. The software will not
work properly if the dongle is unplugged from the
computer while EmbroideryStudio is open. In
the event, the application may hang or crash and
any open files may be corrupted.
The installation provides the following options:

Wilcom EmbroideryStudio
Select the EmbroideryStudio option to install a
copy of EmbroideryStudio software to your
system. This option lets you choose:
Option
Purpose
Complete
Program will be installed with the most

common options recommended for
most users.
Select the options you want to install
recommended for advanced users only.
Custom
If you are running a multi-language installation,

you also have the option of adding more
languages as required.
The dongle is the most important and valuable
part of your system and should be treated with
care. Always store it in a safe place when not in
use. Wilcom Pty Ltd guarantees the dongle
against defects in material and workmanship
under normal use and service when properly
installed, for a period of 12 months from the date
of delivery. If it is faulty, it may be exchanged. If
it is physically damaged, it can be sent to Wilcom
DesignWorkflow
Use this option if you want to install
DesignWorkflow. See the DesignWorkflow User
Manual for details.
Other installation requirements

EmbroideryStudio requires additional software
for correct operation:
Adobe Acrobat Reader
Desktop icons
You need a recent edition of Acrobat Reader not

installed with this kit to read, print and search
your Onscreen Manual, Quick Reference Guide,
and Release Notes. This can be easily
downloaded from the Adobe website.
After installation, shortcut icons to the product

will be placed on the Windows Desktop. These
may include some or all of the following:
Internet Explorer 7
Icon
Description
EmbroideryStudio, the main
EmbroideryStudio CAD/CAM application.
See the EmbroideryStudio for details.
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or higher not

installed with this kit is essential for the correct
operation of DesignWorkflow and ES Design
Explorer. Internet Explorer is standard with most
installations of Microsoft Windows.
ES Design Explorer provides a way for

viewing and browsing embroidery designs
on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or
floppy disk. See Design Management in the
EmbroideryStudio for details.
DesignWorkflow is a design centralization
and management system for embroidery
and screen-print designers and
manufacturers. See the DesignWorkflow
User Manual for details.
The Schiffli Disk Converter utility also comes
bundled with ES Schiffli. Sometimes you will
need to convert basic stitch files to the
specific disk format required. For the most
part, this can be done directly through
EmbroideryStudio. Sometimes you may
need to use the ES Schiffli Disk Converter.
See the ES Schiffli Onscreen Manual for
details.
SQL Server 2005

EmbroideryStudio uses SQL Server 2005 to
store its data. SQL Server 2005 is a Microsoft
database application for large and small
businesses. MS SQL Server 2005 Express Edition
is installed as standard unless SQL Server 2005
or later is already installed. A variant of
SQL Server 2005, Express Edition is designed for
smaller businesses. You may want to consider
upgrading to a higher edition. See Microsoft
website for details.
Cost options
Program group icons
Each EmbroideryStudio product model can be

further enhanced with cost options. These
include:

will be placed in an EmbroideryStudio Start
Menu Program Group.
Option
Design
Workflow
ES Machine
Manager
ES Cross
Stitch
ES Chenille
ES Schiffli
Description
This option is available for all levels
of product.
This is a cost option for 5 or more
machines. It is standard, however, for
all levels of product with support for
up to 4 machines.
This option is available for Level 21D
and Level 45.
of product. Only limited Chenille
support is available, however, in
Level 21E.
of product.
This may include some or all of the following:

Application Description
Embroidery
Studio
Standard with Level 3

Design
Workflow
EmbroideryStudio, the main Wilcom

EmbroideryStudio e2.0 CAD/CAM
application. See the EmbroideryStudio
Onscreen Manual for details.
See the DesignWorkflow User Manual
for details.
Note Other options are available for different

product models. See Product Differentiation
Table for details.
10
Application Description
Application
Description
Design
Explorer
Switch to
English
If you have installed multi-lingual

versions of the software, use this utility
to switch between them.
Use this to uninstall DesignWorkflow
rather than the Windows Control Panel.
Machine
Manager
ES Design Explorer provides a way for

viewing and browsing embroidery
designs on your computer hard disk,
CD-ROM, or floppy disk. See Design
Management in the EmbroideryStudio
Onscreen Manual for details.
Note: if DesignWorkflow is installed,
ES Design Explorer will not be installed
with EmbroideryStudio.
ES Machine Manager is a tool for
controlling the workflow of multiple
embroidery machines. Its main tasks
are to download designs to machines,
manage queues, monitor machine and
job status, and collect productivity and
maintenance statistics. See ES
Machine Manager Onscreen
Supplement for details.
A Wilcom Tools submenu may include some or

all of the following:
Application
Description
Purge
Recovery
Delete corrupt files from your system

folders using the Purge Recovery
utility. See Troubleshooting in the
EmbroideryStudio Onscreen Manual
for details.
If you have made changes to the
default settings or they have become
corrupted, use the Revert utility to
revert to factory settings. See
Troubleshooting in the
EmbroideryStudio Onscreen Manual
for details.
Occasionally you may need to
customize the ES Schiffli default
settings according to your own
requirements, notably when converting
to RCC format using the ES Schiffli
Disk Converter. The default settings
are stored on your local hard drive and
you can use the ES Schiffli DEFCED
utility to change them. See ES Schiffli
User Manual for details.
Revert
Defced
Design
See the DesignWorkflow User Manual
Workflow
Administration for details.
Fixpat
The ES Schiffli FIXPAT (Fix Pattern)
utility is used for safety-checking
designs and can be useful as a fast
editor for known problem patterns as
well as direct function editing. The
program also provides search
capabilities to find and change
machine functions or insert new ones.
See ES Schiffli User Manual for details.
Schiffli Disk The ES Schiffli Disk Converter is used
Converter
to convert older designs to and from
the formats required for newer Schiffli
machines. Some formats, notably
RCC, cannot be directly converted in
EmbroideryStudio, but can be
converted using the ES Schiffli Disk
Converter. See ES Schiffli User
Manual for details.
Uninstall
Design
Workflow
Uninstall
Embroidery
Studio
Use this to uninstall EmbroideryStudio

rather than the Windows Control Panel.
Note A Documentation submenu will contain

various help files depending on the options you
have chosen to install.
Merging software versions

You may choose to merge with an already
installed version of software. If you choose to do
so, the installation procedure handles assets as
follows:
Alphabets
Packaged (factory) alphabets are installed.
User-defined alphabets are copied to the new
installation. User-refined alphabets are
preserved.
Borders
You cannot currently create your own borders for
use with the Borders tool so the new Borders file
is installed, overwriting the currently
installed one.
Motifs
In EmbroideryStudio, you are able to add motifs
to any of the pre-defined motif sets and may also
create new ones. There may be changes to the
latest factory versions of these files so the
installation examines all motifs in the system and
treats them as follows:
If there is a motif in the new version which

does not appear in the old, it is installed.
If there is a motif in the old version which

does not appear in the new, it is installed.
If there is a motif in the old version which
does appear in the new, it is discarded in
favor of the newer motif.
If there is an entire motif set in the old version
which is not in the new, the whole set is
copied to the new installation.
11
Program splits and templates

Program Splits are contained in the template files
which are examined and treated as follows:
If there is a template in the new version

whose name is different from any in the old
software, it is installed.
If there is a template in the old version whose
name is different from any in the new
software, it is installed.
If there is a template in the old version whose
name is the same as one in the new version,
only program splits are considered, and then:
If there is a program split in the new
version whose name does not appear in the
old, it is installed.
If there is a program split in the old version
whose name does not appear in the new, it
is installed.
If there is a program split in the old version
whose name does appear in the new, it is
overwritten by the new version.
Sample designs
The sample designs from the new installation are
installed to an entirely new folder. Previous
designs are preserved.
Team names
The sample group from the new installation is
installed. Any user-defined groups of names from
the old installation are copied to the new.
Thread charts
If you have adjusted any settings in the thread
charts, these are preserved. Each thread chart in
the old and new installation is treated as follows:
If there is a thread chart in the new installation

whose name does not appear in the old, it is
copied to the new.
If there is a thread chart in the old installation
whose name does not appear in the new, it is
copied to the new.
If there is thread chart in the old installation
whose name does appear in the new, the one
with the most recent date is used.
Note If you choose to merge with an older
installation and install it into the same folder, the
new installation is installed over top of the old
and simultaneously merged.
Performing a typical installation

The Typical installation option installs the
program with the most common options. This is
recommended for most users. If you are running
a multi-language installation, you can install
other languages and options later using Custom
installation. Any existing user-defined settings
for digitizers, machines, etc will be transferred
to the new installation. See also Making a custom
installation.
Caution The current EmbroideryStudio
installation does not uninstall previous versions
of the software. If you wish to preserve
user-defined settings, motifs and program splits,
and custom alphabets, you need to install
EmbroideryStudio before removing any
previous version. This will allow the installation to
copy the necessary files to the new location.
To perform a typical installation
1 Ensure your computer meets the technical
requirements for Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0 software. See
System requirements for details.
Note Ensure too that your login has Windows
administrator level privileges.
2 Close all Windows programs but leave
Windows running.
Caution Do not attach your dongle until
prompted to do so. If for any reason you do
attach the dongle before EmbroideryStudio
is installed or the PC rebooted, you should
cancel the Windows Auto Detect Hardware
wizard if it appears. See Correcting security
device driver problems for details.
3 Insert the Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0
installation disk.
The installation program should start within 30
seconds and the Welcome dialog appear.
Note If the installation dialog does not appear
by default, use Windows Explorer or My
Computer to access the DVD drive and run the
setup.exe program.
4 Click Next to proceed.
5 Accepting the terms of the license agreement,
click Next.
12
You are prompted to attach your dongle.
The Setup Type dialog opens.
8 Choose an installation type:

Note If you are updating from an earlier
version of the software, you will be supplied
with a new dongle. See Updating an existing
system for details.
6 Attach the dongle and click Next.
The Choose Products dialog opens
prompting you to install EmbroideryStudio
and/or DesignWorkflow. The typical
installation defaults to EmbroideryStudio
only.
Option
Purpose
Complete All program features will be installed

recommended for most users.
Custom
Selected program features installed
recommended for advanced users
only.
Note You can install other languages and

options later using Custom installation. See
Making a custom installation for details.
The Installation Location dialog opens.
7 To accept the typical installation, click Next.

Tip If you have purchased the
DesignWorkflow cost option, and you intend
to install this application to the same
computer, tick the DesignWorkflow option as
well. See the DesignWorkflow User Manual
for details.
10 Click the Browse button if you want to change

the installation location.
The installation displays a standard file
browser, allowing you to choose and if
necessary create a destination folder for your
installation.
11 If you are installing a multi-language version
of the software, choose the Install extra
languages checkbox as required and click
Next.
13
An Extra Languages dialog opens. This

option does not appear in English-only
versions.
12 Choose any extra languages required and click
Next.
The Samples Location dialog opens. Like the
Installation Location dialog, this gives you
the option of customizing the installation
location, in this case, of the sample designs
folder.
Caution Your SQL password is important and

will be required. Please write it down.
If the computer already contains one or more
installations of EmbroideryStudio, the
Merge Version screen opens. This dialog
shows all previous version installations found
on the hard disk plus the option not to merge.
See also Merging software versions.
15 Choose a previous version or choose not to
merge and click Next.
You are prompted to proceed with the
installation.
16 Click Install to proceed.
A status screen keeps you informed of the
progress of the installation. CorelDRAW is
also installed as standard with
EmbroideryStudio. For a full description of
the CorelDRAW tools, refer to the electronic
User Guide available via the Windows Start >
Programs group.
Note Your existing sample designs in the

default folder are neither removed nor
overwritten during the installation but old
sample designs may be overwritten by new
sample designs of the same name.
13 Change the design folder location if required
and click Next.
The System Admin Security dialog opens. If
SQL Server 2005 is already installed, you will
be prompted to provide a user password.
17 After the installation has run, an Installation

Complete dialog appears.
Note If SQL Server 2005 is not already

installed, MS SQL Server 2005 Express
Edition is installed by default. You will be
prompted to enter a valid user name and
password of your choice.
18 Click Finish to restart your computer.
14
Caution Make sure you log back onto your PC

after the reboot in order to complete
installation and configuration. Do NOT remove
your dongle during this process.
wizard if it appears. See Correcting security

device driver problems for details.

are placed on the Windows Desktop and in the
EmbroideryStudio Start Menu Program
Group. See also Installation kit and
components.
3 Attach your new dongle and click Next.
Updating an existing system

If you are updating from an earlier version of the
software, you will be supplied with a new dongle.
This needs to be matched with your existing
dongle so your system can be recognized.
The system attempts to locate the dongle to

run your EmbroideryStudio product. If the
system detects a generic dongle, a Dongle
Update dialog appears.
Note If you are using a pre-V7 version of the

software, the old device will need to be returned
to Wilcom on an RMA (Return Merchandise
Agreement) in order to obtain permanent codes.
To update an existing system
1 Install the EmbroideryStudio program. See
Performing a typical installation for details.
2 Attach the dongle when prompted to do so and
click Next.
Caution Do not attach your dongle until
prompted to do so. If for any reason you
attach the dongle before EmbroideryStudio
is installed or the PC rebooted, you should
cancel the Windows Auto Detect Hardware
4 Attach old and new dongles as shown and click

OK.
If the system detects that a valid old dongle is
present, the new generic dongle is updated
with your details.
Upon successful update, a confirmation
message will appear. A red light comes on
inside the dongle when it has been attached
and detected properly. The Choose Products
15
dialog opens prompting you to install

EmbroideryStudio and/or DesignWorkflow.
Schiffli files at any time after installing

EmbroideryStudio.
Tip You can also use it later to add more
languages and components from the installation
disk.
To make a custom installation
1 Follow exactly the same steps as for a typical
or compact installation. See Performing a
typical installation for details.
5 Proceed with the normal installation. See

Performing a typical installation for details.
6 After installation, remove the old dongle.
Registering the product

Dont forget to register your copy of
EmbroideryStudio. By registering, youll have
access to:
Wilcom support
Live and recorded online training (as it
becomes available)
Information about product updates, events
and special offers.
2 When the Setup Type dialog appears, choose

the Custom installation type.
The Select Features dialog opens. The
EmbroideryStudio checkbox is selected and
disabled so it cannot be deselected.
To register the product

1 Open EmbroideryStudio.
2 Go to Help and click Online Registration.
You will then be directed to enter your details.
You will need to be connected to the internet
in order to complete the registration process.
Note EmbroideryStudio is protected by a
dongle security device. If this is not detected
when you attempt to launch the application,
the system will not run. See System
Making a custom installation

The Custom installation option gives you the
greatest control over which EmbroideryStudio
software components are installed and where
they will be stored on your PC or network. You
can also use this option to add more components
e.g. more languages, more onscreen
documents, Design Explorer and options such as
Note The option to install DesignWorkflow is

also available on this dialog. See the Design
Workflow User Manual for details.
3 Choose the features to install, and click Next.
A status screen keeps you informed of the
progress of the installation. After the
installation has run, an Installation
Complete dialog appears.
16
Modifying an existing installation

Whether you are updating your current Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0 software or wanting to
uninstall it, you follow the same procedure. When
you run the installation program again, it will
automatically detect if there is an existing copy of
EmbroideryStudio on your system and give you
to option to modify, repair or remove it. This will
prevent the installation of more than one release
version of EmbroideryStudio on your computer.
If you choose to modify your current

installation, the Select Features screen will
appear.
To modify an existing installation

1 Close all Windows programs but leave
Windows running.
2 Insert the EmbroideryStudio installation
disk.
If EmbroideryStudio software is already
installed on the computer, the following
Welcome screen will appear.
4 Select features and languages to add or

deselect to remove.
5 Click Next.
The Ready to Install screen appears.
6 Click Install.
Upon successful installation of the software
and any additional Windows files that need
updating, the Installation Complete screen
appears.
Note If you have selected Repair as your
installation option, currently installed
components will be reinstalled, requiring a
reboot at the end.
7 Click Finish.
3 Choose the option you require Modify,

Repair, Remove and click Next.
Option
Purpose
Modify
Install additional components and/or

remove others.
Reinstall components already installed.
Uninstall the software.
Repair
Remove
Changing security device options

All purchases of EmbroideryStudio software,
whether new, updates, or upgrades, are shipped
with a USB type dongle. Each security device has
a serial number and identity code. Security codes
enable access to features within the software.
New options can be added and products
upgraded by changing the security device
options. To do this you need to enter new security
access codes. These are sent by fax or email. You
can enter codes manually, or import them from a
text file. See also Security device problems.
Caution The dongle is the most important and
valuable part of your system and should be
treated with care. Always store it in a safe place
when not in use. In case of loss or theft, you will
need to purchase an entire EmbroideryStudio
replacement system. For this reason, you should
consider insuring your dongle.
17
Identifying your security device

You need to be able to identify your systems
access codes, and enter new codes for upgrades.
When referring to your system in correspondence
or by telephone, you need to quote the serial
number and identity code. This information is
found in the Security Device dialog.
Tip If you need to send your security device
information to Wilcom Support or your reseller,
send a screen-grab of the Security Device
dialog to save you writing down the information
and ensure that accurate details are sent. It also
reassures Wilcom that the correct information
has been supplied.
To enter access codes manually

1 Select Special > Security.
The Security Device dialog opens.
2 Click Set Options to open the Set Security

Device Options dialog.
To identify your security device

3 Enter the access codes in the fields using Tab

or Enter to move between them.
Note Do not type spaces as these are entered
for you automatically.
4 Click OK.
The Serial Number and Identity Code of

your security device display at the top of the
dialog. The options supplied with your current
system are listed in the Enabled Options list.
2 Press Alt and Print Screen at the same time.
3 Start MS Paint.
4 Select Edit > Paste.
A dump of the dialog box is pasted into MS
Paint.
5 Select File > Save and save the image as a
BMP file.
6 E-mail this file to Wilcom as necessary.
A message displays indicating that the access

codes were successfully entered. If there is
more than one pair of access codes, enter
them now, one pair at a time.
5 Compare the Identity Code displayed in the
Security Device dialog with the one supplied
with the access codes.
The two codes must be identical. If they are
not, do not enter any more codes.
Caution If you continue to enter access codes
when the Identity Code does not match, your
EmbroideryStudio system may cease to
function. If in any doubt, contact your reseller
before proceeding.
6 Click OK.
Entering access codes manually
7 Restart EmbroideryStudio.
You can enter security access codes manually to

upgrade to new options or software releases.
8 When you have confirmed that all access

codes have been entered correctly, discard the
access codes.
Tip You can also enter access codes by importing

them from a text file. See Importing access codes
for details.
Caution Access codes should not be entered

more than once. EmbroideryStudio will not
normally allow you to enter incorrect codes
after a successful update. If in any doubt,
contact your reseller as your system can
18
become inoperable if codes are entered more

than once.
Importing access codes

You can import security access codes from a text
file. This saves time when a large number of
access codes are required for example for an
upgrade to multiple new options. Text files are
usually supplied by email.
To import access codes
1 Copy the access codes text file into your
EmbroideryStudio design folder.
For easy recognition and identification, the file
name is the same as the serial number of your
security device which is printed on the label.
Check that the Serial Number and Identity

Code match those in the email containing the
new access codes text file.
3 Click Import Codes.
The Open dialog opens, defaulting to the
design folder where you saved the file.
4 Select the text file containing the new access
codes and click Open.
The codes are automatically updated.
5 Restart EmbroideryStudio.
6 When you have confirmed that all access
codes have been entered correctly, discard the
access codes text file.
Caution Access codes should not be entered
more than once. EmbroideryStudio will not
normally allow you to enter incorrect codes
after a successful update. If in any doubt,
contact your reseller as your system can
become inoperable if codes are entered more
than once.
19
Creating Embroidery with EmbroideryStudio
Embroidery design with EmbroideryStudio

consists of turning basic artwork shapes into
embroidery designs. EmbroideryStudio gives
you the flexibility of creating embroidery objects
using artwork as backdrops, or of directly
converting digital artwork. You can take a
mixed-mode approach as well, doing the bulk of
the design by means of automatic conversion,
followed by touch-ups and edits using the suite of
EmbroideryStudio embroidery digitizing tools.
digitizing your design and assessing the final

output:
Planning designs
High quality embroidery starts with good design
and forward planning.
Artwork
Electronic artwork in both bitmap and vector
formats can be inserted, pasted or scanned into
The stitched-out design should also have the
EmbroideryStudio for use as digitizing
templates or backdrops. Likely sources include: following characteristics:
Design looks good shapes, colors, balance
Internet and CD clipart libraries
Shapes are filled with correct fill and outline
Business cards, post cards and wrapping
stitches
paper

Details are clearly defined
Samples in the EmbroideryStudio Samples Stitches are neat, smooth and even
EmbroideryStudio_e2.0 folder
Stitches angles follow design shapes
Books of embroidery patterns
Lettering is clear and easy to read
Childrens story books
The design stitches out efficiently on the
Printed table cloths or tea towels
machine
Original artwork e.g. childrens drawings.
Shapes are stitched correctly no unwanted
gaps
Caution Unless you are an experienced digitizer,
The fabric has not puckered around the
do not use complicated artwork. Also, be sure to
stitched areas
check the copyright of any images you have not
created yourself. If unsure, contact the relevant The design is free of loose ends.
supplier to seek their permission.
Characteristics of good design

Good design is enhanced by the use of correct
backing, tension and a good quality embroidery
machine. Keep the following points in mind when
Embroidery creation techniques

There are two fundamental design modes in
EmbroideryStudio:
Graphics: This mode allows you to create or

edit graphic designs using the CorelDRAW
toolset.
Embroidery: This mode allows you to create
and edit embroidery designs using an
embroidery digitizing toolset.
Creating Embroider y with Embroider yStudio
20
Note For a full description of the CorelDRAW

tools, refer to the electronic User Guide available
via the Windows Start > Programs group.
Alternatively, use the onscreen help available
from the Help menu.
tablet, except that everything is done on screen.

See Embroidery digitizing methods for details.
Using electronic artwork

There are two broad categories of artwork file,
both of which can be imported into
EmbroideryStudio for use as digitizing
backdrops vector and bitmap. Graphics mode
supports the automatic and semi-automatic
digitizing of both bitmap images and vector
graphics. The quality of the resulting embroidery
greatly depends on the type and quality of the
original artwork.
Converting artwork to embroidery

EmbroideryStudio lets you convert vector
objects directly to embroidery objects. In fact,
entire vector designs can be converted to
embroidery. You can modify these designs as you
wish. You can also convert embroidery to vector
graphics. See Converting vector and embroidery
objects for details.
Preparing images for digitizing

Generally speaking, vector graphics preserve the
picture quality when resized, whereas bitmap
images cause problems of pixelation and image
degradation when enlarged or scaled down. In
order to make bitmap images more suitable for
automatic digitizing, EmbroideryStudio
provides image processing capabilities. See
Digitizing with Bitmaps for details.
Tip CorelDRAW lets you trace bitmaps to

convert them to fully editable and scalable vector
graphics. You can trace scanned sketches,
artwork, digital photos, and logos and easily
integrate them into your designs.
Object-based design
Digitizing shapes manually

You trace shapes and lines over electronic
artwork using various digitizing on input
methods. Using a bitmap image in this way is like
using an enlargement drawing on a digitizing
In EmbroideryStudio, you build designs from

basic shapes or embroidery objects. They are
called objects because they are discrete entities
which can be manipulated independently of each
other. These are like ordinary vector objects in
that they have certain defining characteristics or
properties such as color, size, position, and so
on. They also have properties unique to
embroidery such as stitch type and density.
Note In EmbroideryStudio, vector and
embroidery objects are in fact inter-convertible
since they share many of the same
characteristics. See also Converting vector and
embroidery objects.
21
Design shapes and stitching sequence

The embroidery objects comprising a design form
a stitching sequence. Before creating an
embroidery design, it is good practice to analyze
and plan shapes and stitching sequence in
advance. Shapes need to be clearly defined to
make them easy to embroider. The best ones
have relatively constant width, with smooth
edges, no sharp turns and no small, protruding
details. Outlines and details should always be
stitched last.
Show or hide outlines, stitches themselves, or

view designs in TrueView.
Understanding stitching sequence
1
5
2
3
4
If you are digitizing manually, objects are

stitched out in the order they were created. In
other words, the digitizing sequence defines the
stitching sequence. If you have converted an
electronic design, EmbroideryStudio uses
automatic sequencing to create the optimum
stitching sequence. Auto-sequencing attempts to
generate embroidery designs which are
economical to produce, with minimal down time,
and accurate registration of textures and colors.
Mixed-mode approach
If you take a mixed-mode approach, you may do
the bulk of the design by means of automatic
conversion, and touch-ups and edits using the
suite of EmbroideryStudio embroidery digitizing
tools. In addition, you can always manually
adjust the stitching sequence to improve the
stitchout, for example, to minimize color
changes. See also Semi-automated digitizing.
Object viewing and selection

EmbroideryStudio provides many viewing
modes to make it easier to work with your
designs. View a design at actual size or zoom in
for more detail. Pan a design instead of scrolling,
or quickly change between one view and the last.
When working with embroidery designs, you can

check the stitching sequence by traveling
through it by means of color blocks, embroidery
objects, or even stitch-by-stitch. Alternatively,
simulate the actual embroidery design stitchout
on screen. You can also preview designs in
different colors on different backgrounds by
selecting from pre-defined colorways. See
Viewing stitching sequence for details.
Selecting embroidery objects
EmbroideryStudio
provides various ways to
select embroidery
objects. Modify the
design as a whole or
select individual objects
for more precise
modification. The
Color-Object List
provides an easy way to
select objects and colors in a design and access
their properties. Use it also to group and
ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide
objects. See Selecting Embroidery Objects for
details.
Digitizing embroidery shapes

In addition to the automated and
semi-automated techniques EmbroideryStudio
provides for creating embroidery designs, it also
contains a suite of manual digitizing tools. These
are similar to graphics tools except that the end
result are embroidery rather than vector objects.
It is important to be familiar with manual
digitizing methods in order to fully understand
the process, the types of objects created, and the
problems associated with embroidery digitizing.
22
Digitizing simple and complex shapes
Threads and colorways
There are tools for digitizing filled shapes with

turning stitches and fixed stitch angles, with or
without holes. There are also tools for creating
columns and borders of fixed or varying width.
See Digitizing Embroidery Shapes for details.
When digitizing, you select thread colors for

objects from the color palette. This contains a
selection of colors tailored to each design or color
scheme. The particular colorway represents the
actual thread colors in which a design will be
stitched. You can define multiple color schemes
and switch between them. See Threads &
Colorways for details.
Large irregular
shape (Complex Fill)
Details (Run)
Borders (Input C)
Digitizing outlines and details

EmbroideryStudio provides tools for creating
outline stitching of varying thicknesses and
styles. They are typically used to add outlines
and details to designs. There are tools for
creating simple run stitching as well as
decorative outlines using pre-defined motifs.
Backstitch is an older-style, adaptable stitch
which can be used for delicate outlines.
Stemstitch is thicker and can be used to mimic
hand-sewn embroidery. Occasionally you may
even need to digitize individual stitches. See
Digitizing Outlines & Details for details.
Stitch types
For each colorway you define, you can select

colors from commercial thread charts or define
your own. Search for particular threads by
specific code. Automatic thread color matching
helps you locate thread colors based on closest
match across one or several thread charts. You
can also match thread colors from imported
graphics vector or bitmap.
Design backgrounds
EmbroideryStudio also lets you set the
background color, fabric, or product of the
current colorway for more realistic previews and
presentations. The background is saved with the
The most important property of all embroidery

objects is their stitch type. The software uses
object outlines and the associated stitch type to
generate stitches. Whenever you reshape,
transform or scale an object, stitches are
automatically regenerated. See Embroidery Fills
for details.
23
colorway. See Customizing backgrounds for

details.
even placement of stitches, and the elimination

of gaps in designs.
For an object to sew out correctly, it must have

correct stitch spacing, sufficient pull
compensation, together with a suitable underlay
for the particular combination of cover stitch
type, object type, object shape, and fabric. See
Underlays & Pull Compensation for details.
Embroidery connectors
Properties, fabrics, styles and templates
Object properties are stored with each object
whenever you save a design. These properties
determine how stitches will be regenerated
whenever you reshape, transform or scale an
object or entire design.
Default properties are stored with the design

template and form the basis of all new designs.
These may be overridden by fabric settings which
are automatically adjusted to suit different fabric
types. These in turn may be overridden by
individual property settings determined by the
digitizer. See Properties, Fabrics, Styles &
Templates for details.
Underlays and pull compensation
Embroidery stitches pull fabric inward where
needles penetrate. This can cause fabric to
pucker, stitch bunching, and/or unsightly gaps to
appear in the embroidery. EmbroideryStudio
includes many techniques for achieving smooth,
Connectors link objects

in a design. They can be
run stitches or jumps.
Travel runs are typically
used to connect
segments within filled
objects. You can use
automatic settings to
generate connectors,
trims and tie-offs, or add them manually. You can
change connector settings for a whole design or
selected objects. If you prefer to add tie-offs and
trims as you digitize, you can turn off automatic
connectors altogether. See Embroidery
Connectors for details.
EmbroideryStudio also allows you to
automatically connect first and last stitches of a
design. This makes it easy to position the needle
before stitching, and reduces the chance of it
hitting the frame. See Setting automatic start
and end points for details.
Semi-automated digitizing
Depending on your product level,
EmbroideryStudio offers a variety of
complementary tools and techniques for
semi-automatically digitizing suitably prepared
artwork.
Auto Trace
Use Auto Trace to create vector outlines from
bitmap images. You can then convert these to
embroidery objects using a variety of input
methods. Auto Trace can find holes in shapes
24
both inside and outside boundaries are detected.

See Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto
Trace for details.
bitmap images. See Creating embroidery from

photographs for details.
Point & Stitch
Advanced digitizing
Point & Stitch tools provide everything

necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images
and vector graphics automatically without using
manual digitizing methods. See Digitizing
shapes with Point & Stitch for details.
EmbroideryStudio provides specialized

productivity features as well as special effects
and digitizing techniques.
Smart Design
Smart Design automatically converts whole
bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery. See
Semi-Automatic Digitizing for details.
Specialized digitizing techniques

Specialized digitizing features
help to save digitizing time.
EmbroideryStudio provides
special input tools for circles,
stars, and rings, as well as
methods for creating repeated
or backtracked outlines.
Remove underlying layers of
stitching in overlapping
objects to reduce stitch counts
and prevent a build-up of
stitches.
EmbroideryStudio also provides tools for
quickly creating outlines based on existing filled
shapes, and vice versa. Add decorative borders
such as rectangles, ovals, and shields to designs
or selected objects using the Borders library.
See Special Digitizing Techniques for details.
Textured and patterned fills
Photo Flash
Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs
directly from photographs and other grayscale
EmbroideryStudio provides special tools for

creating textured effects from needle
penetrations. Apply offset fractions and partition
lines to tatami fills to create split-line patterns.
Alternatively, use Program Split or Flexi Split
to create decorative fills from pre-defined
25
patterns of needle penetrations. Select from the

library or create your own.
The Carving Stamp feature allows you to define

a pattern of needle penetrations using a carving
stamp as a template. With User-Defined Split,
create your own split lines when you want to add
detail to filled objects. See Textured & Patterned
Fills for details.
Artistic stitch effects
EmbroideryStudio provides many artistic
effects and stitch types to create textured and
contoured fill stitching. Create designs with a
hand-drawn appearance, something which is
difficult to achieve through conventional
digitizing methods.
open fill, producing shading and color effects

which are difficult to achieve manually. Create
interesting perspective, shading and color effects
by blending two colored layers. Add cross
stitching to fill large areas with low stitch counts.
Create interesting curved effects by shaping

needle penetrations to follow the contour of
digitized lines. See Artistic Stitch Effects for
details.
Motif runs and fills
Motifs are pre-defined design elements, such as
hearts, leaves or border patterns. They generally
consist of one or more simple objects, and are
stored in a special motif set. The
EmbroideryStudio Motif tools allow you to use
motifs to create ornamental runs and textured
fills. Use the ones provided with the software or
create your own. Motifs can be scaled, rotated
and mirrored in the same way as other objects.
You can even use them to create interesting
three dimensional effects. See Motif Runs & Fills
for details.
Create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate

fur and other fluffy textures. Stippling provides a
method for creating textured fills of run stitching
which meanders more or less randomly within a
border.
Move underlying travel runs to the edges of an

object so that they cant be seen through open
stitching. Vary stitch spacing between dense and
26
Appliqu digitizing
Bling digitizing
Automatically create all

the stitching you need for
appliqu using the Auto
Appliqu tool. Up to four
layers of stitching guide
runs, cutting lines, tack
stitches and cover
stitches can be
generated for any
appliqu object,
depending on current
settings. You can also extract appliqu shapes
from a design to output to a cutter or separate
file. See Cutting appliqu shapes for details. See
Appliqu Digitizing for details.
Bling refers to decorative

objects placed on
garments or templates,
either on their own or in
combination with other
design elements. Bling is
supplied in varying sizes,
shapes, colors and
materials. It goes under
various names such as
diamante, rhinestones,
eyelets, ribbons, charms,
crystals, glitz, nailheads,
studs, etc.
EmbroideryStudio lets
you create bling and
embroidery
multi-decoration designs
with the Bling! toolset. This tool lets you create
and visualize bling embellishments in
combination with other decorative elements. See
Bling Digitizing for details.
Sequin digitizing
Some embroidery
machines are equipped
with a sequin dispenser
that drops sequins onto the
garment as it stitches.
EmbroideryStudio allows
you to digitize sequined
designs for compatible
machines. A dedicated set
of sequin tools lets you
digitize sequin fills,
outlines, or individual
sequin drops.
EmbroideryStudio also
supports the creation of
twin-sequin designs for
twin-sequin-capable
machines.
provides a dedicated tool
for automatically
converting sequin artwork in the form of a vector
file to sequin runs. See Sequin Digitizing for
details.
Chenille digitizing
EmbroideryStudio also has an option which
adds special chenille embroidery capabilities to a
lockstitch embroidery digitizing system. These
ES Chenille features include chenille embroidery
machine formats, stitch types and effects, as well
as chenille-specific object properties. ES Chenille
can be added to all levels of product. See
separate ES Chenille Supplement for details.
Embroidery lettering
Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply.
EmbroideryStudio provides a large range of
scalable closest-join alphabet styles and
27
multi-color and fancy stitching alphabets to

choose from.
and legibility by fine-tuning spacings between

character pairs.
Creating embroidery lettering

Create high-quality embroidery lettering quickly
and simply. EmbroideryStudio provides a large
range of scalable alphabets to choose from. Add
embroidery lettering directly to designs or
convert from Graphics mode. Apply formatting
just like a word processor, including italics,
bolding, and right/left justification. Change
values for the whole text or individual letters. See
Creating Embroidery Lettering for details.
Alternatively, fine-tune letter spacing according
to the number of characters per lettering object.
This is particularly useful for use with Asian
alphabets. Lettering appearance and quality can
be improved by the correct selection of underlay.
See Advanced Embroidery Lettering for details.
Editing embroidery lettering

EmbroideryStudio gives you interactive and
precise numeric control over many settings
affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual
letters and lettering objects as a whole. Apply
horizontal, vertical, and curved baselines. Modify
baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well
as position. You can even define the rotation
angle of letters relative to the baseline or the
design itself. See Editing Embroidery Lettering
for details.
Apply Envelope effects to lettering objects to

make them bulge or arch, stretch or compress.
See Creating special effects with envelopes for
details.
Team lettering
The Team Names feature lets you create
designs with multiple names. For example, you
can use the same logo with different names for
sports teams or corporate uniforms, without
having to create multiple copies of the same
design. Names are stored in lists that can be
accessed from any design. You can add to these
lists, or remove names at any time.
Advanced embroidery lettering

EmbroideryStudio provides a variety of
advanced editing techniques for fine-tuning your
lettering designs. Add special characters and
symbols to your lettering as desired. By default,
lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch.
Apply other basic fill stitch types as with all
embroidery objects.
Specify the sequence in which letters are stitched
to minimize registration problems. The automatic
kerning feature improves lettering appearance
Depending on how you want to stitch out, you

can choose to save and stitch names and designs
separately, or together. See also Team Lettering.
28
Monograms
designs to minimize color changes and optimize

production.
A monogram is a design
composed of one or more
letters, typically the
initials of a name, used as
an identifying mark. The
Monogramming feature
offers a simple way to
create personalized
monograms using a
selection of pre-defined
monogram styles, border
shapes and ornaments, together with a set of
tools to help you place these elements in creative
and decorative ways. See Monograms for details. The stitching sequence naturally occurs in the
order in which an embroidery design is digitized
Custom alphabets
or assembled. When converting a graphic design
Turn any TrueType font installed on your system to an embroidery design, EmbroideryStudio
into an embroidery alphabet. The automatic
decides the stitching sequence according to its
kerning feature improves lettering appearance
own internal logic. Either way, you may, for
and legibility by fine-tuning spacings between
reasons of aesthetics or production efficiency,
character pairs. Sometimes you find that you
want to adjust it. The Color-Object List displays
want to reshape a letter to improve its
a sequential list of objects grouped by object and
appearance, perhaps to suit a particular lettering color. It provides an easy way to group, cut, copy
height. EmbroideryStudio lets you save the
and paste, and resequence selected objects and
letter as an alternative version. In fact you can
color blocks. EmbroideryStudio also allows you
save multiple versions of the same letter within to create branched objects. Like-objects are
the same alphabet. You can even create your
thereby resequenced, connectors minimized,
own custom alphabets or modify an existing
components grouped, and stitches regenerated.
alphabet for special applications. Even merge
Underlay can be applied to all. See Combining &
letters from two or more alphabets. See Custom Sequencing Objects for details.
Alphabets for details.
Arranging, scaling and transforming objects
Modifying designs
You can change the position, size and orientation

of objects in a design by moving, scaling and
transforming them. Group objects together to
apply universal changes, or lock them to avoid
unintentional modification. Modify objects
directly on screen or via their object properties.
Access commonly used functions via the
Color-Object List. See Arranging, Scaling &
Transforming Objects for details.
After digitizing a design, you can modify it as a

whole, edit individual objects or even individual
stitches.
Combining and resequencing objects
EmbroideryStudio provides various techniques
for combining and sequencing objects. You can
add to designs by duplicating and copying
objects. Combine designs. Resequence objects in
Reshaping and converting objects

EmbroideryStudio offers a number of
techniques for reshaping embroidery objects, all
29
with the one tool. Sometimes you may need to

cut, split or break up complex or compound
objects in order to fine-tune them. Various tools
are available for this purpose. As well as
reshaping object outlines, you can add and
adjust stitch angles, a property unique to
embroidery objects. You can also change the
entry and exit points of individual objects which
is important if you are digitizing manually or
resequencing embroidery objects. See Reshaping
& Converting Objects for details.
Optimizing stitch quality

When it comes to embroidery production, the
current stitch density may not be perfect for
certain fabrics or threads. Or you may want to
make production cheaper by reducing overall
stitch count. After scaling operations, for
example, designs may contain small stitches
which can damage fabric and cause thread or
needle breakage. Sharp corners may cause stitch
bunching which can create hard spots in the
embroidery and damage fabric or needle.
Embroidery machines have a maximum possible
stitch length which is determined by the physical
frame movement. If long Satin stitches exceed
this, they are broken into smaller stitches.
EmbroideryStudio helps you resolve these
issues with a number of specialized techniques
for optimizing stitching quality for different
design types and production requirements. See
Optimizing Stitch Quality for details.
However,
lets you edit individual
stitches. You may need to
do this, for example, when
working with stitch files
which do not contain
outline data. Like stitches,
machine functions are
inserted automatically whenever you digitize
objects and specify object properties. They are
stored with the embroidery object and updated
whenever it is modified. However,
EmbroideryStudio also lets you manually insert
machine functions and modify them. This
flexibility allows you to adapt designs to almost
any machine requirement. See Stitches &
Machine Functions for details.
Files, machines, and design processing

Design processing and encoding involve all the
important, back-end operations of embroidery
design and manufacture. This is where you
actually output your designs to machine, disk,
printer, cutter, and so on. For this, you will need
an understanding of embroidery file types as well
as different machine formats. Depending on your
setup, you will also need an understanding of
traditional storage media such as embroidery
disks.
Printing designs
From the same design file, you can output a
production worksheet for the embroidery
machine operator. Designers frequently want to
distribute their designs for viewing in real colors,
in TrueView or otherwise, with or without fabric
or product backgrounds. EmbroideryStudio
allows you to customize information in the format
you require for production worksheets and/or
approval sheets. You can specify the data to
print, graphics to include, zoom factor, and
general options such as company name. You can
Editing stitches and machine functions

EmbroideryStudio automatically generates
stitches from design outlines and properties. This
means you can scale, transform, and reshape
native designs without compromising stitch
density or quality.
30
use a color printer or plotter to produce your

worksheets. See Printing Designs for details.
list of corresponding file types to choose from.

See Multi-Decoration File Export for details.
Outputting designs
You can output embroidery designs for actual
stitchout in a variety of ways sending directly
to machine for stitching, or saving to specific
machine formats and/or to embroidery disk. See
Outputting Designs for details.
Reading files of different formats

By default EmbroideryStudio saves to its native
file format, EMB. This format contains all
information necessary both for stitching a design
and for later modification. When opening designs
created or saved in other formats,
EmbroideryStudio converts them internally to
EMB format. They can then be modified using the
full range of EmbroideryStudio features.
Depending on the file type, you may need to
provide additional information to assist
EmbroideryStudio in the conversion process.
See Reading Files of Different Formats for details.
Multi-decoration export
The Multi-Decoration File Export (MDFE)
capability allows you to export the different file
formats involved in a multi-decoration design
production with a single command option. The
system recognizes whether a design element is
embroidery, graphics, appliqu, or bling. It
displays each element in an export dialog with a
Hooping designs
Devices made from wood, plastic, or steel, hoops
are used to tightly grip fabric and stabilizer
between an inner and outer ring. Designed to
hold fabric taut against the machine bed for
embroidering, they attach to the machines
frame. Fabrics must be hooped before stitching
out on the machine. EmbroideryStudio allows
31
you to select from a wide range of standard

factory-supplied hoops. If you are using a hoop
which does not appear in the hoop library, you
can define your own from scratch or based on a
standard hoop. See Hooping Designs for details.
Setting up hardware
You will need to connect peripheral devices for
use with EmbroideryStudio. These may include
digitizing tablets, plotters, printers, appliqu
cutters, scanners and embroidery machines.
Different devices are set up in different ways
some in Windows, via the Control Panel, others
within EmbroideryStudio itself. See Setting up
Hardware for details.
Multi-Port
Serial Card
UTP or STP
cables
Machine formats
Different embroidery machines speak different
languages. They have their own control
commands for the various machine functions.
Before you can stitch a design, it must be in a
format which can be understood by the
embroidery machine. When you select a machine
format, EmbroideryStudio uses it to translate
digitized designs into a specific
machine-readable form. If required, you can
customize machine formats to meet specific
machine requirements. See Machine Formats for
details.
Changing system settings

EmbroideryStudio lets you adjust various
system settings controlling the appearance of
designs on screen, display of design information,
the behavior of the design window, and other
settings. See Changing System Settings for
details.
Design management
EmbroideryStudio provides a number of ways of
viewing and browsing embroidery designs and
design elements for reuse. With these tools, you
can browse design files stored on your computer
hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk.
Hardware and software setup

In order to work with your particular equipment,
EmbroideryStudio needs to be properly
configured. You may also want to configure the
software to your particular design requirements.
32
Embroidery Clipart
The Embroidery Clipart
feature is a powerful productivity
tool which allows you to recycle
commonly used elements and
improve the process of creating
new designs. Use the clipart
library to permanently store
useful elements and assign
keywords to them. Summary
information such as width and
height, number of stitches and
colors is automatically recorded.
See Embroidery Clipart for
details.
ES Design Explorer
ES Design Explorer provides an
efficient way for viewing and managing
embroidery designs. With this design
management tool, you can browse design files
stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or
floppy disk, as well as cut, copy, paste and delete
them. It recognizes all design file formats used
by EmbroideryStudio.
Designs in ES Design Explorer folders can be
sorted in various ways, for example, when you
want to find designs for stitch-out, printing,
archiving, and so on. Use it also to batch-convert
your EMB and other design files to and from other
file formats. Create design catalogs containing
thumbnail images and/or summary information.
These can be sent to printer, published on a
website or internet, and exported for
spreadsheet or database use, or integration with
third-party e-commerce solutions. Archive
design files in folders with the built-in WinZip
utility. See Design Management for details.
Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage

designs in folders. It is not a multi-user database
for company-wide design management. For this
type of requirement, refer to the
DesignWorkflow User Manual.
33
PART I
OBJECT-BASED EMBROIDERY
Embroidery design with EmbroideryStudio consists of turning basic artwork
shapes into embroidery designs. EmbroideryStudio gives you the flexibility of
creating embroidery objects using artwork as backdrops, or of directly
converting digital artwork. You can take a mixed mode approach as well, doing
the bulk of the design by means of automatic conversion, followed by touch-ups
and edits using the suite of EmbroideryStudio embroidery digitizing tools.
Basic procedures
This section describes how to open EmbroideryStudio and start using the
commands and tools. It also explains how to open designs as well as create new
ones. It describes how to display the grid and rulers, and measure distances on
screen. And it also covers how to select machine formats for different output.
See Basic Procedures for details.
Viewing designs
This section explains design viewing modes as well as the various design viewing
settings, including design colorways. Techniques for viewing the stitching
sequence are described as well as how to selectively view design color blocks.
Viewing design information, including production worksheets, is also covered.
See Viewing Designs for details.
Selecting embroidery objects
This section describes how to select objects using the selection tools and
keyboard. It also shows how to select while traveling through designs and by
means of the Color-Object List. See Selecting Embroidery Objects for details.
34
Chapter 1
Basic Procedures
Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 software is an MS Windows-based product

incorporating many of the conventions with which most PC users are already
familiar. To start using EmbroideryStudio, you need to understand something
about the organization of the graphical user interface (GUI) as well as a few
basic procedures such as opening and saving designs, displaying the grid, and
selecting machine formats.
Caution You need to calibrate your monitor so that designs at 1:1 scale appear
at real size. Do this when you first install EmbroideryStudio or whenever you
change your monitor. See Calibrating the monitor for details.
This section describes how to open EmbroideryStudio and start using the
commands and tools. It also explains how to open designs as well as create new
ones. It describes how to display the grid and rulers, and measure distances on
screen. And it also covers how to select machine formats for different output.
Starting EmbroideryStudio
Double-click to start EmbroideryStudio.
Wilcom Embroid er y Studi o e2.0 Onscreen Manual
35
There are two fundamental design modes in EmbroideryStudio:
Embroidery: This mode allows you to create and edit embroidery objects
using an embroidery digitizing toolset. See also Embroidery digitizing
methods.
Graphics: This mode allows you to create and edit vector objects using the
CorelDRAW toolset. See also Converting vector and embroidery objects.
Open EmbroideryStudio using the desktop icon or the Windows Start menu.
Alternatively, select All Programs > Wilcom > Wilcom EmbroideryStudio
from the Start menu.
Embroidery mode
When you open EmbroideryStudio, it appears by default in Embroidery mode
with a new, blank design (Design1) displayed.
Menu bar
Universal toolbar
Standard toolbar
View toolbar
Floating toolbar
Toolbox
Modeless dialog
Design window
Docker tabs
Toolbox flyout
Color palette
Status / Prompt bars
EmbroideryStudio has a multiple document interface (MDI), meaning that it

allows more than one document to be opened at a time. If multiple documents
are open, the current design mode Graphics or Embroidery is maintained
when switching between designs.
Interface elements
Embroidery mode contains the following important interface elements. Toolbars
provide quick and easy access to most EmbroideryStudio commands. To
increase your working area, you can show or hide them at your convenience.
See also Quick Reference.
Element
Description
Menu bar
This contains the application menus such as File, Edit, View, etc.
Chapter 1 Basic Procedures
36
Element
Description
Universal
toolbar
This contains the universal tools and icons which are visible in both
Embroidery and Graphics modes. It also contains tools which are only
available in a particular mode but in some way influence how objects
behave in the alternate mode.
Standard
toolbar
This contains commonly used tools and commands which are specific to
and only visible in Embroidery mode.
View toolbar
This contains commands for viewing embroidery designs e.g. as design

outlines, by stitches, by machine functions, as they will stitch out on the
fabric either separately or in combination. See Viewing Designs for
details.
Stitch Types
toolbar
This contains tools which determine the stitch types which can be applied
to embroidery objects, including Satin, Tatami, Motif Fill, etc. See
Embroidery Fills for details.
Stitch Effects
toolbar
This contains tools for modifying or improving stitch quality, including

applying automatic underlay to selected objects. See Optimizing Stitch
Quality for details.
Toolbox
This contains the embroidery digitizing/editing tools specific to and visible

only in Embroidery mode. Related tools are grouped into flyouts. By
default, the Toolbox docks vertically to the left of screen but can be
floated, reconfigured, and docked like any other toolbar. See Digitizing
Embroidery Shapes for details.
Color Palette
This contains the embroidery color palette which is specific to and visible
only in Embroidery mode. See Threads & Colorways for details.
Status Bar /
Prompt Bar
This contains current status information and prompts which are visible
only in Embroidery mode. See below.
Docker
In Embroidery mode, the docker area to the right of screen is used to dock
modeless dialogs, including Object Properties, Color-Object List, Color
Palette Editor, and others. These can be open at the same time (tiled) and
viewed interchangeably via tab controls. See Working with modeless
dialogs for details.
Design window This contains the main work area where you create and edit embroidery
objects as well as graphics objects when you switch to Graphics mode.
The Status and Prompt bars provide continuous display of current cursor
position status as well as instructions for use of selected tools. See also
Accessing object properties.
Coordinates of current
needle position
Stitch count
Length and angle of

current stitch
Stitch type and
current settings
Current object
Current fabric type
Status Bar
Prompt Bar
Current Function
Tip By default, rulers and guides are switched on. When they are switched off,
guides are hidden but are stored in the design and will reappear when switched
back on. See Displaying grids, rulers and guides for details.
Graphics mode
EmbroideryStudio Graphics mode includes the entire suite of CorelDRAW
drawing tools which offer many techniques for drafting outlines and shapes on
screen. Vector objects can then be converted to embroidery designs.
37
Alternatively, using Graphics mode, you can insert or paste third-party vector
graphics such as clipart for use in embroidery designs. See also Converting
vector and embroidery objects.
Graphics mode is accessed by means of the Universal toolbar which contains

tools and icons which are visible in both Embroidery and Graphics modes.
Depending on how your installation is configured, when the application is
switched to Graphics mode, it looks like this:
Menu bar
Universal toolbar
Standard toolbar
Properties bar
Toolbox
Modeless dialog
Docker tabs
Design window
Status bar
Graphics mode includes some of the following important interface elements:

Element
Description
Menu bar
This contains application menus such as File, Edit, View, etc.
Universal
toolbar
This contains the universal tools and icons which are visible in both
Embroidery and Graphics modes. It also contains tools which are only
available in a particular mode but in some way influence how objects
behave in the alternate mode.
Standard
toolbar
This contains commonly used tools and commands which are specific to
and only visible in Graphics mode.
Properties bar
This contains the commands and controls that relate to the active tool in
the Toolbox or active object in the design window in Graphics mode.
38
Element
Description
Toolbox
This contains the drawing/editing tools specific to and visible only in

Graphics mode.
Design window This contains the main work area where you create and edit graphics
objects as well as embroidery objects when you switch to Embroidery
mode.
Color Palette
This contains the graphics color palette which is specific to and only
visible in Graphics mode.
Docker
In Graphics mode, this contains graphics-specific modeless dialogs.
Status Bar
This contains current status information visible only in the Graphics

mode.
Note EmbroideryStudio includes as standard the entire suite of CorelDRAW

screen. For a detailed description of the CorelDRAW interface, refer to the
electronic User Guide available via the Windows Start > Programs group.
Alternatively, use the onscreen help available from the Graphics mode Help
menu.
Switching design modes

Use Universal > Graphics Mode to switch to Graphics mode.
Use Universal > Embroidery Mode to switch to Embroidery mode.
The two design modes in EmbroideryStudio are accessed by clicking the
Graphics Mode or Embroidery Mode buttons:
Click to switch to Embroidery mode
Click to switch to Graphics mode
EmbroideryStudio also lets you convert between vector and embroidery

objects of different types at all stages of the design. For example, you can
convert vector graphics directly to embroidery objects and vice versa. You can
also convert between embroidery object types. See Converting vector and
embroidery objects for details.
Embroidery > Graphics mode
When changing from Embroidery to Graphics mode, the following rules apply:
Any existing embroidery objects are displayed as TrueView embroidery

objects.
Tip You can turn off embroidery objects by toggling off the Show
Embroidery button on the Universal toolbar.
Any existing vector objects are displayed.
39
You are able to create and edit vector objects.
Graphics > Embroidery mode

When changing from Graphics to Embroidery mode, the following rules apply:
Any existing vector objects or bitmap images are displayed.

Tip You can turn off vector objects by toggling off the Show Graphics
button in the Universal toolbar.
Any existing embroidery objects are displayed.
If a document in Graphics mode contains more than one page, when

switching to Embroidery mode, the design window will only display the
contents of the currently active page.
Creating and opening designs

Whenever you start EmbroideryStudio, a new file Design1 is automatically
created. By default, Design1 is based on the NORMAL template. Templates
contain pre-set styles, default settings or objects, to make digitizing quicker and
easier. EmbroideryStudio also provides a set of optimized fabric settings so that
the software will take into account the type of fabric you are stitching on. You
can choose to work with or without pre-defined fabric settings.
40
Opening designs
Use Standard > Open to open an existing design.
EmbroideryStudio opens a comprehensive range of both outline and stitch
files. You can also open designs from proprietary embroidery disks, or read them
from paper tape. See Embroidery design formats for details. See also Reading
and writing to embroidery disk.
To open a design
1 Click the Open icon.
The Open dialog opens.
Preview panel
Design data
Preview on/off
Caution You cannot open EMB files created with a later version of the
software than the one you are currently running.
2 Select a folder from the Look In list.
3 If the design is not in EMB format, select a file type from the Files of Type
list.
4 Select a design or designs.
To select a range of items, hold down Shift then select the first and last in
the range.
To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select.
Tip For file types other than EMB or ESD, click Options and change the
recognition options. See Reading Files of Different Formats for details.
5 Select the Preview checkbox to preview the design (for supported file
formats) together with the design data. This includes stitch and color
numbers, design height and width, and software version number (V6.0
onwards).
41
Tip For more information about a selected file, right-click and select
Properties from the popup menu. See Viewing design information for
details.
6 Click Open.
If the Auto-Fabric Assistant option is activated, the Auto-Fabric
Assistant dialog opens. See also Creating designs based on fabrics.
Activate
Auto-Fabrics as
required
Choose the
required frabric
type
Deactivate
Auto-Fabric
dialog display
Creating designs based on templates

Use Standard > New to start a new design with the NORMAL template.
When you create a file based on a template, the templates values are copied to
the new design. By default, you create designs based on the NORMAL template,
unless you choose to use predefined fabric settings. Alternatively, you can set
up your own custom templates for use with your own preferred settings. The
advantage of templates is that they provide full control over all design settings.
If you want to apply frabric settings at a later stage, you can. See also Working
with design templates.
To create a design based on a template
1 Click the New icon or select File > New from Template.
If there exist other templates in addition to the default NORMAL template, the
New dialog opens.
Select a
template
2 Select a template from the list and click OK.

A blank design opens in the design window based on the selected template.
See also Working with design templates.
42
Note If there exist no other templates apart from the default NORMAL
template, a blank design opens in the design window based on it.
Tip Whenever you create a new design, save it with a new name. See Saving
designs for details.
Creating designs based on fabrics

Use Standard > New to start a new design with the NORMAL template or with a
predefined template.
EmbroideryStudio provides a set of optimized fabric settings to take into
account the type of fabric you are stitching on. If you are not using a template,
you normally choose a fabric when first setting up the design. Choose from a set
of predefined fabrics aimed at minimizing stitching defects when designs are
sewn out. If you want to apply frabric settings at a later stage, you can. All
existing settings are wiped. From then on, any fine-tuning is handled smartly.
In other words, if you subsequently change fabrics for a different output, any
adjustments you have made to default settings are extrapolated to the new
fabric. See also Working with fabrics.
Note While colorways allow you to set up different colors for a given fabric,
these have no bearing on fabric settings. Conversely, if you change fabrics, all
colorways are updated to include the new fabric. See also Setting up colorways.
To create a design based on a fabric
1 Click the New icon or select File > New.
If the Show Auto-Fabric Assistant option is activated, the Auto-Fabric
Assistant dialog opens. See also Setting other general options.
Choose the
required frabric
type
Activate
Auto-Fabrics as
required
Deactivate
Auto-Fabric
dialog display
Tip When the Use Auto-Fabric Assistant checkbox is unticked, the Fabric
panel is disabled and the Required Stabilizer panel does not show any
values for topping or backing.
2 Tick the Use Auto-Fabric Assistant checkbox to use pre-defined fabric
settings as required.
43
3 From the list, choose a fabric type matching or nearest to the fabric you
intend to work with this will ensure optimum quality for your embroidery.
See Changing fabrics for details.
4 Click OK to accept.
Pre-defined settings for the selected fabric will apply to all newly created
embroidery objects. They are also applied to all objects already in the design.
The selected fabric is displayed in the Status Bar.
Tip The Show Auto-Fabric Assistant option is activated by default. Turn it
off if you prefer work without pre-defined fabric settings. See also Changing
fabrics.
Saving designs
Use Standard > Save to save the current design. Right-click to open the Save As
dialog.
Saving an embroidery design in Embroidery mode records its file name,
location and format, and updates it with any changes you make. When you save
a design under a new name, to a different location or format, you create a copy
of the original. EmbroideryStudio lets you save designs in EMB as well as other
outline and stitch file formats. You can also save designs to proprietary
embroidery disk. See Embroidery design formats and Reading and writing to
embroidery disk in the Online Manual. See also Saving designs for machine.
Tip Save your design early and often. Do not wait until you finish working. You
can also set EmbroideryStudio to save automatically while you work. See
Setting automatic save and backup options for details.
To save a design
1 Click the Save icon in Embroidery mode.
If this is the first time you have saved the design, the Save As dialog opens.
Tip To save changes to an existing file but preserve the original, use Save
As.
Folder containing
designs
Design name
Format list
2 Select the folder where you want to save the design from the Save In list.
3 Enter a name for the design in the File name field.
44
4 Select a file format from the Save as type list. See Supported embroidery
file formats for details.
5 Click Save.
Tip Files saved in EMB format are automatically compressed when saved and
decompressed when re-opened. This reduces the storage space required, and
makes it possible to save large files to floppy disk, or send them as email
attachments.
Displaying grids, rulers and guides

EmbroideryStudio provides a set of grid lines to help accurately align or size
embroidery objects. The Show Rulers and Guides feature improves usability
by allowing you to accurately position stitches and align objects in the design.
Displaying the grid

Click View > Show Grid to show or hide the grid. Right-click to change the Grid
settings.
Use grid lines to help accurately align or size embroidery objects. You can show
or hide the grid at any time. Default grid spacing is 10 mm x 10 mm. See also
Setting grid display.
To display the grid
Toggle grid display by any of the following means:

Toggle on the Show Grid icon.
Select View > Design Options > Grid and Guides tab and select the
Show Grid option.
Show Grid
Select View > Grid and Guides and select the Show Grid option.
Press Shift+G.
To turn off the grid, toggle off the Show Grid icon or press Shift+G again.
Tip You can change grid spacing, select a reference point and turn Snap to
Grid on or off in the Options dialog. You can also change the color of the grid
lines. See Changing display colors for details.
Displaying rulers and guides

Click View > Show Rulers and Guides to show or hide rulers and guides.
Right-click to change the Guides settings.
Drag the Ruler Zero Point to reset a new ruler zero point.
Rulers are located to the top and left side of the design window. The unit of
measurement mm or inches depends on the regional settings in the Windows
Control Panel. The ruler scale, illustrated with numbers and ticks, depends on
45
the zoom setting. Guides are dotted vertical and horizontal lines placed across
the design window to help you align objects. Each guide has a yellow guide
handle on the ruler that can be used to move or delete it. Guides are displayed
on top of the grid, if present, but beneath vector objects and embroidery
objects. Rulers must be displayed before a guide can be created. See also
Setting ruler and guides display.
Note By default, rulers and guides are switched on. When they are switched
off, guides are hidden but are stored in the design and will reappear when
switched back on.
To display rulers and guides
Toggle ruler display by any of the following means:

Click the Show Rulers and Guides icon or press Ctrl+R.
Select View> Design Options > Grid and Guides tab and select the
Show Rulers and Guides option.
Show Rulers and
Guides
Select View > Grid and Guides and select the Show Rulers and Guides
option.
Click-and-drag to
reset ruler zero
point
Click-and-drag to
reposition guides
Click ruler to
create new guide
Drag guide off
ruler to remove
Reset the ruler zero point by clicking and dragging the box in the top left-hand
corner of the design window to the required point in the design.
The point where you release the mouse becomes the new zero point X,Y
(0,0). The grid always lines up with the rulers. Whenever the ruler zero is
changed, the Set Reference Point checkbox in Options > Grid and Guides
tab is deselected. See Setting grid display options for details.
To create a guide, click on either ruler horizontal or vertical and

click-and-drag it into position. Multiple guides can be created and just as
easily removed.
46
For more accurate positioning of guides, double-click the yellow handle. In

the Guide Position dialog, enter a precise distance from the zero point, and
click OK.
Enter precise
position
Note The ruler zero and the design zero are not the same and in general do
not coincide. When the zero point of the rulers is changed, the guides
maintain their current displacement from the zero point of the design, not the
zero point of the rulers.
To remove a guide, drag the yellow guide handle off the design window.
Tip You can turn Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide on or off in the Options
dialog. You can also change the color of grid and guidelines. See Changing
display colors for details. See also Setting grid display options.
Measuring distances on screen

Click Color Palette > Display Options split arrrow to quickly change the design
background of the current colorway.
Measure the distance between two points on screen using the Measure
command. This command displays coordinates, distance and angle of the mouse
pointer from a point corresponding to the center of a hoop in an empty design.
View the measurements in the Status bar or in a tooltip.
Tip For more accurate results, zoom in before you measure. The measurement
is always the actual size, and is not affected by the zoom factor.
To measure a distance on screen
1 Select View > Measure or press M.
2 Optionally, open the Display Options popup to toggle Show Measure
Tooltip on or off. See also Setting other general options.
Click arrow to invoke
popup menu
Toggle on/off
measure tooltip
3 Click the start point.

4 Move the pointer to the end point and hold the mouse still.
The mouse pointer changes with a small ruler and a straight line is connected
to the mouse from the point you clicked. The following information displays
in the Status Bar:
Position coordinates of the end point (X=, Y=)

Length of the measured line (L=)
47
Angle of the line relative to the horizontal (A=).
Measurements are shown in millimeters or inches, depending on the option

selected in the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for
more information.
Tip If activated, length and angle measurements also appear in a tooltip. See
Setting other general options for details.
Measurements
appear as tooltip
5 Press Esc.
The connecting line disappears but the mouse still shows the measurements
from the center of the design in a tooltip.
6 Press Esc again to exit the command.
Setting measurement units

You can use different measurement units within EmbroideryStudio without
having to exit and change system settings. This is useful, for example, if you
receive orders from places that use a different measurement system. The most
common scenario is where a US customer orders lettering in inches say "
and the digitizing is to be done in metric. The digitizer can then easily enter
3/4" without having to first do any mathematical conversion to mm.
Accessing the feature
The measurement system may be changed via a dropdown list on the View
toolbar:
Select desired
measurement unit
Note Technically, when you select U.S., you will get the imperial measurement
system inches, feet, and yards.
Ripple-on effects
Changing the measurement system will change the units used by most (but not
all) controls e.g. Design Properties dialog as well as some fields in
48
Production Worksheet. See Viewing design information in EmbroideryStudio

for details.
Total Thread and Total

Bobbin measurement
units reflect selected
measurement system
The first time you run EmbroideryStudio, the measurement system will default
to whatever the operating system is using. If you change it in the software, the
selected measurement system will default the next time you run it. There are,
however, some exceptions to this rule:
Stitch List: this used to be displayed in inches for U.S. systems. But these are
stitch lengths, so must always be in mm.
Motif Run Spacing: this used to be in mm, but now toggles between
mm/inches. This allows you to match spacing with the motif size, as you can
with Motif Fill, which allows spacing in both mm and inches. See Motif Runs
& Fills for details.
Stitch length and density controls remain in mm regardless of measurement
system. These controls reflect the machine functions as industrial machines
are always in mm.
Stitch length and

density controls remain
in mm
49
Specifying measurement units on-the-fly

As an alternative to changing the overall measurement system used in
EmbroideryStudio, you can specify units of measurement when typing values
into a measurement control. When you include the unit of measurement, the
software automatically converts the entered value into the units of the control.
Say, for example, you are using the metric measurement system so your lettering
heights are in mm. And say you get an order for " lettering. Simply enter
3/4in or 3/4 in into the Lettering Height field and it is automatically
converted to 19.05mm. See also Creating lettering with Object Properties.
Note EmbroideryStudio supports both proper and improper fractions e.g.

1 1/3 as well as 4/3. It does not, however, support mixed units e.g. 1'3". Nor
does it display values as fractions after they are entered, only during.
Supported units
Supported units include:
millimeters, mm
inches, in
feet, ft
yards, yd
centimeters, cm
meters, m
Tip EmbroideryStudio also allows entering units in text form, both English and
the language the software is currently running in.
Using commands and tools

Once you start EmbroideryStudio, you use commands or tools and dialogs to
complete your tasks. You select commands in EmbroideryStudio in the same
way as other Windows applications from menus, toolbars, or popup menus.
Dialogs provide the other principal way of engaging with the system. They come
in two forms modal and modeless. Modal dialogs effectively lock the system
until you have finished with them. The idea of the modeless dialog is that you
can keep it open as long as you need to while working interactively with different
settings. Keyboard shortcuts are also available for the most frequently used
commands. See also Quick Reference.
50
Selecting commands from menus

Menus provide access to most EmbroideryStudio commands. Some commands
are toggles which turn on or off related functions.
To select commands from menus
Click a menu to access a dropdown list of commands.

Alternatively, press Alt+ the access key indicated for each menu by an
underlined character e.g. Alt+F invokes the File menu.
Keyboard shortcut
Invoke a menu command by any of the following means:

Scroll down the list and select it.
If you are using the Alt+ access key method, press the underlined
character associated with the command e.g. Alt+F+S invokes the Save
function.
Without opening the menu, use the keyboard shortcut associated with the
command e.g. Ctrl+P invokes the Print function. See Keyboard
Shortcuts for details.
Tip Menu items for which there exist corresponding toolbar icons display the
associated icon next to them e.g. the New command.
For access to information about any of the menu commands, toolbar tools, or
dialogs, use the Help menu. See Resources and support for details.
Access onscreen
documentation
Access online
support
Using popup menus

Generally speaking, popup menus of context-specific commands can be
accessed from the design window as well as some modeless dialogs.
51
To use popup menus

1 Right-click a selected object or objects in the design window or modeless
dialog such as the Color-Object List.
A popup menu opens.
Design window
popup menu
Color-Object List
popup menu
2 Select a command from the menu.

Tip A frequently used command is Object Properties. This opens the
Object Properties dialog for selected objects. See Accessing object
properties for details.
Selecting commands from toolbars

Toolbars provide quick and easy access to EmbroideryStudio commands. Click
a toolbar button to activate a command or, where applicable, right-click to set
its properties. Some icons are toggles which turn on or off associated functions.
To select commands from toolbars
Rest the pointer over a tool icon to invoke its tooltip.
Click the icon to activate the command.

Right-click to adjust settings or activate any secondary command.
If the icon has both left and right-click commands, the name is split with a
slash (/). For example, the Reshape Object / Values tool lets you reshape
52
selected objects when you click it, or invokes Options > Reshape dialog to
change reshape options when you right-click.
Adjust Object Properties

for current settings or
selected objects
Note For most stitch type and input tools, both left-clicking and right-clicking
simultaneously activate the tool itself and invoke the associated tab of the
Object Properties dialog. See also Accessing object properties.
Reposition toolbars and change between the docked and floated statuses by
doing the following:
Float toolbars individually by clicking and dragging the left-hand edge

away from the docked position.
Click and drag title bar
to position toolbar
Double-click title bar to
return to docked state
Click and drag edges to
reshape toolbar
Click and drag title bars to position floating toolbars or dock them in any
of the four quadrants of the design window.
Click and drag the edges of the toolbar to reshape it as required.
53
Using Toolbox flyouts

EmbroideryStudio includes by default,a vertical
Toolbox. Related tools are grouped into flyouts.
Flyouts can be dragged away from the Toolbox using
grab handles along the top of the flyout. When dragged
away, flyouts function like toolbars. Each has a Close
button on the title bar.
Toggling toolbars on or off

Toolbars provide quick and easy access to most EmbroideryStudio commands.
To increase your working area, you can show or hide them at your convenience.
As you get more familiar with the system, you may prefer to use the menu and
keyboard commands. See also Quick Reference.
To toggle toolbars on or off
1 Select View > Toolbars or right-click the toolbar docking area at the top of
the design window.
The Toolbars menu opens.
Select toolbars
to display
2 Select the toolbars you want to display.
54
Working with modeless dialogs

Click View > Color-Object List to display the Color-Object List dialog. Use this tool
to select and view objects in a design.
Click View > Object Properties to display the Object Properties dialog. Use this tool
to adjust properties of selected objects.
Click Color Palette > Color Palette Editor to display the Color Palette Editor dialog.
Use this tool to assign thread colors to color blocks in the design.
In EmbroideryStudio, there are three important modeless dialogs which stay
open as long as you need them.
Dialog
Description
Object
Properties
The most important dialog in EmbroideryStudio is the Object Properties

dialog. Use it together with the General Properties toolbar to adjust
properties of selected embroidery objects. See Accessing object
Color-Object
List
The Color-Object List provides a sequential list of embroidery objects as

digitized, grouped by color block. It offers an easy way to selectively view
color blocks and objects. See Viewing color blocks with the Color-Object
List for details.
Color Palette
Editor
When you create a new design, it includes a single default colorway called
Colorway 1. This contains 15 default colors, unassigned to any thread
chart. The Color Palette Editor allows you to edit these default colors, add
extra color slots as required, and set up additional colorways. See Setting
up colorways for details.
To work with modeless dialogs
Access these by means of their respective toolbar toggles or via the View
menu. By default, these dialogs dock to the right side of the screen.
Object Properties
Color-Object List
Color Palette Editor
55
Click the tabs at the side to toggle between dialogs. The tabs only appear
when more than one dialog is open.
Enable/disable
auto-hide
Close dialog
window
Click tab to
view dialog
Click and drag

tab to float
dialog
Click the X button in the top right corner to close the dialog.
Toggle the auto-hide function by clicking the Auto Hide button next to the X
button docking panes automatically retract when not in use, freeing up
more design window space.
Float dialogs individually by clicking and dragging the tab panel away from
the docking area.
Alternatively, float dialogs as a docked group by clicking and dragging the title
bar away from the docking area.
Double-click title bar
to return to docked
state
Click tabs to toggle

between dialogs
Double-click the title bar of a dialog to toggle between floating and docked
states.
56
Drag and drop a floating dialog over the title bar of either a floating or docked
one.
Hover another dialog
over title bar
Shadow tab
indicates dialog is
ready to be
tabbed
Shadow outline
indicates window
is ready to be
tiled
Floating dialog
Docked dialog
If you want to tab dialogs, adjust until a shadow tab appears. If you want to
tile dialogs side-by-side, adjust until the shadow outline only partially covers
the window.
Floating dialogs tabbed
Docked dialogs tiled
Accessing object properties

Use View > Object Properties to set properties of selected objects.
The most important dialog in EmbroideryStudio is Object Properties. This is
a modeless dialog, meaning that it stays open as long as you need it. Use it
together with the Properties toolbar to view and adjust properties of selected
embroidery objects. See also Working with object properties.
To access object properties
1 Open the Object Properties dialog by any of the following means:
57
Select View > Object Properties.

Click the Object Properties icon.
Double-click an object in the design window.
Right-click an object in the design window and select Properties from the
popup menu.
Right-click an object in the Color-Object List and select Properties from

the popup menu.
Click to close
Object Properties tabs
Dropdown list
Adjust settings as
required
2 Select a tab to access the object properties you want to adjust. See also
Working with object properties.
3 Close the Object Properties dialog by either of the following means:
Click the Object Properties icon.

Click the X icon in the top right corner of the Object Properties dialog.
4 Adjust general object properties width, height, position by means of the
Property Bar. Changes to the values are applied by pressing Enter on the
keyboard. They are discarded when you press Esc or click anywhere outside
the fields.
Adjust general properties
and press Enter
Undoing and redoing commands

Use Standard > Undo icon to undo an action and Undo Arrow to undo a range of
actions.
Use Standard > Redo icon to redo an action and Redo Arrow to redo a range of
actions.
You can undo the effects of most commands. If you change your mind, you can
redo them again.
To undo and redo commands
To undo a previous command, simply click the Undo icon or press Ctrl+Z.
58
When EmbroideryStudio cannot remember more commands, Undo is

dimmed.
Click Redo or press Ctrl+Y to re-apply an undone command.
Selecting machine formats

You normally decide which machine format to use before you start digitizing.
However, machine formats can be changed at any time in order to stitch a design
to another machine type or save to embroidery disk. See also Writing designs to
embroidery disk.
To select a machine format
1 Select Machine > Select Machine Format.
The Select Machine Format dialog opens.
Select machine
format
2 Select a machine format from the list.

Note You can customize or add formats to suit the embroidery machine you
will use to stitch the design. See Machine Formats for details.
3 Click OK.
59
Chapter 2
Viewing Designs
EmbroideryStudio provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with

your designs. View a design at actual size or zoom in for more detail. Pan a
design instead of scrolling, or quickly change between one view and the last.
Show or hide outlines, stitches themselves, or view designs in TrueView.
When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching
sequence. You can check a designs stitching sequence by traveling through it
by color blocks, embroidery objects, or even stitch-by-stitch. Alternatively,
simulate the actual embroidery design stitchout on screen. You can also preview
a design in different colors on different backgrounds by selecting from
pre-defined colorways.
EmbroideryStudio gives you comprehensive information about your designs.
Even before opening a design, you can check the software version number and
other design information for EMB files directly from Windows Explorer. View
stitching details in the Design Properties dialog. The production worksheet
also provides essential production information, including a design preview, the
size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions.
Showing and hiding designs

EmbroideryStudio provides techniques to selectively activate or deactivate the
display of embroidery, vector and/or bitmap artwork.
Displaying graphics and embroidery

Use Universal > Show Graphics to show and hide vector objects in
Embroidery mode.
Use Universal > Show Embroidery to show and hide vector objects in
Graphics mode.
60
In EmbroideryStudio, artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned for use as

digitizing backdrops via Graphics mode. You can show or hide artwork
temporarily in Embroidery mode. Depending on the view options set up in the
Options dialog, the image displays in full color, or dimmed. Conversely, in
Graphics mode, you have the option of turning on or off the embroidery display.
To display graphics and embroidery
Toggle on or off the Show Graphics icon in Embroidery mode.

Embroidery objects
showing with vector
objects
Only embroidery
objects showing
Toggle on or off the Show Embroidery icon in Graphics mode.

Vector objects
showing with
embroidery objects
Only vector
objects showing
Showing and hiding backdrops

Use View > Show Bitmaps to show and hide bitmap images. Right-click to set
image display options.
Use View > Show Vectors to show and hide vector graphics. Right-click to set
Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into EmbroideryStudio for use as
digitizing templates or backdrops. You can show or hide backdrops temporarily
while you digitize. Depending on the view options set up in the Options dialog,
the image displays in full color, or dimmed. See Setting image viewing options
for details.
Note A design may include both bitmap images and vector graphics which can
be selectively turned on or off.
61
To show or hide backdrops
Click the Show Bitmaps and/or Show Vectors icons.

When selected, backdrop images are visible.
To hide images, click the icons again.
Vector graphic
together with bitmap
image
Tip So you dont accidentally move or delete the backdrop, select it and press
K on the keyboard to lock it down. See Locking & unlocking objects for details.
Design viewing modes

EmbroideryStudio provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with
your design. View a design at actual size or zoom in for more details. Pan across
the design instead of scrolling, or quickly change between one view and the last.
EmbroideryStudio also allows you to show or hide design elements with a

variety of display settings. Show or hide object outlines, needle penetration
points, connectors, stitch angles, machine function symbols and the stitches
themselves. You can also show or hide selected colors.
Note To make sure your design is being displayed at the correct size, you might
need to calibrate your monitor. See Calibrating the monitor for details.
Viewing outlines and stitches

Use View > TrueView to change between normal view and TrueView.
Chapte r 2 View ing Designs
62
Click View > Show Outlines to show or hide object outlines.

Click View > Show Stitches to show or hide stitches.
You can show or hide design elements with a variety of display settings show
or hide outlines, or view designs in TrueView. TrueView offers a graphical
representation of what the final embroidery will look like.
Note Show Outlines will not work with stitch files that have been read
without stitch recognition. See Opening stitch files in EmbroideryStudio for
details.
To view outlines and stitches
Click the TrueView icon to switch between TrueView and Normal view. See
also Setting TrueView options.
Normal view
TrueView ON
Tip Use TrueView together with a background fabric to see how your design
will look when stitched out. See Displaying backgrounds for details.
In Normal view, click the Show Outlines icon to turn outlines on or off.
Outlines OFF
Outlines ON
Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab. See
Viewing selected parts of a design for details.
63
Click the Show Stitches icon (or press S) to turn stitches on or off.
Stitches and
outlines ON
Stitches OFF
Tip Depending on the color of your background, you can change display
colors for Unsewn (stitches), Selected (objects), Object Outline, Grid and
Guide. See Changing display colors for details.
Zooming and panning designs

Click Standard > Zoom to All Design to display the whole design in the design
window.
Click Standard > Zoom 1:1 to display a design at actual size.
Click Standard > Zoom to invoke zoom mode zoom in or out via left and right
mouse clicks.
Select Standard > Zoom Factor from the dropdown list to display the
design at a particular scale.
Magnify your view of the design by zooming in on individual stitches or details,
or zoom out to view more of the design. In addition to the scroll bars, panning
provides a quick way to view design elements which are not currently visible in
the design window.
Tip Use Auto Scroll to scroll the design automatically while you are digitizing.
This can be more convenient than using panning or the scroll bars. See Setting
scrolling options for details.
To zoom and pan a design
To display a design at twice its current size, select View > Zoom In 2X or
press Z or F9.
64
To display a design at half its current size, select View > Zoom Out 2X or
press Shift+Z or F10.
To display a design at actual size, click the Zoom 1:1 icon or press 1.
To invoke Zoom mode, click the Zoom icon the cursor changes to a
magnifying glass. Alternatively, select View > Zoom or press B. Left-click to
zoom in, right-click to zoom out.
While in Zoom mode, drag a selection marquee around an area to zoom in.
Drag selection marquee
around area to zoom
To view the entire design in the design window, click the Zoom to All icon or
press 0 (zero).
Tip To fit selected embroidery objects in the window, select View > Show
All > Selected Objects. Alternatively, press Shift+0 on the keyboard.
To return to the previous view, select View > Previous View or press V.
Select a Zoom Factor from the dropdown list to display the design at a
particular scale or key it directly into the field. Alternatively, select View >
Zoom Factor or press F on the keyboard. In the Zoom Factor dialog, enter
a viewing scale and click OK.
Enter viewing
scale
To pan across a design in the design window, use the scroll bars. Alternatively,
select View > Pan or press P. Move the pan box over the part of the design
65
you want to view and left-click to center the design window around the point
you clicked.
To view a design in multiple views, select Window > Split Window and click
a point where you want to split the view. Zoom, pan, and adjust viewing
options in each window pane as required. Double-click split lines to return to
normal view.
Double-clilck to
remove split bars
Working with the Overview Window

Use View > Overview Window to toggle Overview window display on/off. Use it to
view a thumbnail of the design.
Use the Overview Window to view a thumbnail of the design. The window
updates whenever you make a change and can be used to zoom in or pan across
the design window. See also Zooming and panning designs.
Note To change the view settings for the Overview window, click it to make it
the active window. See Viewing outlines and stitches for details.
To work with the Overview Window
1 Click the Overview Window icon.
66
The Overview Window opens.
Click for
zoom box
2 To zoom in or out, click the Zoom button at the bottom of the window and
drag a bounding box around the area to zoom.
Drag bounding box

around area to zoom
3 To pan across the design, move the cursor inside the zoom box it changes
to a four-way arrow cursor and drag it.
Drag zoom box

to area to pan
Viewing selected parts of a design

EmbroideryStudio provides many techniques for quickly hiding or showing
selected embroidery objects in the design window. You can set your system to
display all objects, or hide all but selected objects. You can also turn off all
objects in order to see backdrop images more clearly. You can also switch quickly
67
between current and last selected views. After certain operations, such as
editing thread colors, you may also redraw the screen for clearer display.
Note Display settings apply to both the design window and production
worksheet. See also Design viewing modes and Previewing production
worksheets.
To view selected parts of a design
To view a selected object in isolation, press Shift+S.
Press
Shift+S
Tip The Color-Object List and Color Palette Editor also provide
techniques for the selective viewing of color blocks. See Selectively viewing
color blocks for details.
To display the selected object full-screen, press Shift+0 (zero).

To return to the previous view, select View > Previous View or press V.
To re-display the entire design, press Esc followed by press Shift+S.
To redraw the screen, select View > Redraw or press R.
Select View > Design Options > View Design tab.
Select viewing
options
This tab also provides options for selective display of embroidery objects:
Option
Description
No Change
The display remains the same as before.
Show Whole Design
All embroidery objects in the design are visible.
Show Selected Objects
Only objects that are currently selected are visible. This

option is only available when objects are selected.
Show Unselected
Objects
The reverse of the above option. This option is only

available when objects are selected.
Hide Whole Design
All embroidery objects in the design are hidden.
68
Tip From this dialog you can also control the display of design elements such
as stitches, outlines, etc. See Setting design element view options for details.
See also Setting TrueView options.
Viewing design objects by color

To help you isolate individual design elements for checking or manipulation, the
View By Color function lets you view embroidery objects by color. This is
particularly useful when you are reseqencing objects by color. See also
Resequencing objects by color.
To view design objects by color
1 Create or open a design.
2 Select View > View By Color.
The Select By Color dialog opens.
Tip The Color-Object List provides another way to view color blocks. See
Selecting objects by Color-Object List for details.
3 Select the colors you want to view.
To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select.

4 Click OK.
The design appears with only those colors you selected in view.
Note The View By Color command will not work with grouped objects.
69
Tip To see all other objects again press Esc followed by press Shift+S or
select Unhide All from the popup menu in the Color-Object List. See
Viewing color blocks with the Color-Object List for details.
Viewing needle points, connectors and functions

Click View > Show Needle Points to show or hide the needle points in a design.
Click View > Show Connectors to show or hide the connectors.
Click View > Show Functions to show or hide the function symbols.
You can show or hide design elements such as needle points, connectors and
machine function symbols in your design. For example:
View needle points to select stitches for editing

View functions to check color changes or trims
View connectors to help position entry and exit points.
See Embroidery Connectors for details. See also Stitches & Machine Functions.
Note You can display or hide design elements in any combination. None,
however, displays while viewing in TrueView.
To view needle points, connectors and functions
To show or hide needle points, click the Show Needle Points icon.
Needle Points ON
Functions ON
Connectors ON
To show or hide connectors, click the Show Connectors icon. See also Types
of connectors.
To show or hide machine functions, click the Show Functions icon. See also
Machine function types.
Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab. See
Viewing selected parts of a design for details. See also Setting design element
view options.
Viewing design colorways

In EmbroideryStudio, you can define multiple colorways for the one design.
This means you can preview or stitch out the same design in different colors to
different fabrics. Background colors and fabrics are treated as part of the
colorway rather than design window settings. In addition, display colors for
70
borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, outlines and grid are part of the
colorway definition. See also Threads & Colorways.
Changing colorways
Use Color Palette > Current Colorway dropdown to select a new color
scheme for design.
Use Color Palette > Color Palette Editor to assign thread colors to slots in the color
palette.
A colorway is a color scheme or palette of thread colors. It may also include a
background color or fabric sample. This means you can preview or stitch out the
same design in different colors to different fabrics. In EmbroideryStudio, you
can also print multiple colorways, icons of color blocks, and design backgrounds
with the production worksheet.
Tip When you start a new design, Colorway 1 appears as the default color
palette. You can change it by selecting from among any number of pre-defined
colorways saved to the current template.
To change colorways
Open or create a design with multiple colorways. See also Setting up

colorways.
Select
colorway
71
Select a colorway from the Colorways dropdown list.
Tip Select View > Redraw to refresh your screen.
Alternatively, click the Color Palette Editor icon.

The Color Palette Editor dialog opens. See also Setting up colorways.
Click header to
change colorway
Click to toggle single

or multiple colorway
display
Select a colorway by clicking the associated column header or anywhere

within the column.
Tip Change background colors or fabrics by clicking the Display Options
icon in the Colorways toolbar. See Displaying backgrounds for details.
Displaying backgrounds
Click Color Palette > Display Options split arrrow to quickly change the design
background of the current colorway.
Click Standard > Zoom to Product to view entire product in the design window.
Click View > Show Hoop to turn hoop display on or off. Right-click to change hoop
settings.
Click Standard > Zoom To Hoop to view entire hoop in the design window.
EmbroideryStudio lets you set the background color, fabric, or product of the
current colorway for more realistic previews and presentations. The Display
72
Options icon is a split popup button clicking it directly invokes the associated
dialog but clicking the split arrow opens a popup menu. The available popup
menu items vary with the current background selection in the Display Options
dialog. See also Presetting backgrounds.
Note Default settings are stored in the template as Colorway 1. If you change
the background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display
like this at start up. See also Setting up colorways.
To display the background
Open the design and select the desired colorway (if available) from the Color
Palette droplist. See also Viewing design colorways.
Choose desired
colorway
Click the split arrow next to the Display Options icon on the Color Palette
toolbar.
Use the popout color menu to select a color for the background, fabric, or
product in use.
The Fabric Color menu item and its submenu are only available if the
Fabric option is selected in the Display Options dialog.

popup menu
Select background
color
The Background Color menu item and its submenu are only available if
the Show Background Image option is deselected and/or the Custom
option is selected in the Display Options dialog.

popup menu
Select fabric
color
73
The Product Color menu item and its submenu are only available if the
Product option and associated product have been selected in the Display
Options dialog. See Visualizing products for details.
Select product
color
popup menu
Tip To preset any of these options, click the Display Options icon. See
Presetting backgrounds for details.
Click More Colors in the popout menu to select from a greater range.
The Colors dialog opens this may vary slightly with the operating system
you are using.
Click an area to
select color
Drag arrow to adjust

brightness
Enter exact values if

known
Select from the standard (pre-defined) colors or mix your own.

To turn off display of background fabrics or products altogether, deselect the
Show Background Image option.
74
Tip Use the Shown Hoop and Zoom to Hoop tools to display the currently
selected hoop. See Selecting and centering hoops for details.
Viewing stitching sequence

When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the stitching
sequence. You can check a designs stitching sequence by traveling through it
by color blocks, embroidery objects, or even stitch-by-stitch. Alternatively,
simulate the actual embroidery design stitchout on screen. Use it to view design
stitching and color sequence in slow motion.
Note The stitching sequence can only be viewed in stitch view, not TrueView.
You can change the display color of unsewn stitches. See Changing display colors
for details.
Traveling through designs

Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Start/End Design to travel to start
or end of the design.
Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Travel by Object to travel to
previous or next object.
Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Travel by Segment to travel to
previous or next segment.
Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Travel by Color to travel to previous
or next color change.
75
Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Travel by Function to travel to
previous or next machine function.
Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Travel by Trim to travel to previous
or next trim function.
Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Travel 1000 Stitches to travel
backwards or forwards 1000 stitches at a time.
Left/right-click Toolbox > Travel Tools Flyout > Travel 1 Stitch to travel backwards
or forwards 1 stitch at a time.
It is useful to be able to view the stitching sequence of a design color-by-color,
object-by-object, or even stitch-by-stitch. Traveling can be initiated from any
stitch in the design. Travel quickly to the start or end of the stitching sequence.
The current needle position is marked by a white cross or needle position
marker as you travel through stitches. The current stitch number is displayed in
the Status Bar.
Tip You can also use the Stitch List to help locate stitches and machine
functions for editing. See also Editing machine functions with Stitch List.
To travel through a design
Press the Esc to ensure no object is selected.

To travel to the start/end of the design, click/right-click Start/End Design,
or press Home or End keys.
To travel forwards/backwards by 1000 stitches, click/right-click Travel 1000

Stitches.
Travel by
individual stitches
76
Tip Slow Redraw lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a design
in slow motion. See Simulating design stitchouts for details.
To travel forwards/backwards by 10 stitches, click/right-click Travel 10

Stitches, or press t or b arrow keys.
To travel to the previous/next stitch, click/right-click Travel 1 Stitch, or press

l or r keys.
Travel to previous stitch
Travel to next stitch
Tip You can select the object you are currently traveling through by pressing
Shift+O or clicking the Select Current tool. See also Selecting objects
individually.
To travel by color
To travel by color, click/right-click Travel by Color.

This is useful if you need to locate a specific color change in order to insert
an object or delete it from the stitching sequence. See also Selectively
viewing color blocks.
Note When you travel by color, the system looks for the next or previous
color change function. Both automatically and manually inserted color change
functions are recognized.
To travel by object
To travel by object, click/right-click Travel by Object.

Alternatively, press Tab or Shift+Tab to travel forwards and backwards by
object.
This is useful if you need to locate a specific object to delete it from the
stitching sequence, or in order to insert another object. Use it in conjunction
with the stitch travel tools if you want to nest an object. See also Nesting
objects.
Tip You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On
activated. See Selecting objects with Selects On for details.
77
To travel to the next/previous object segment, click/right-click Travel by

Segment.
To travel by function
To travel to the next/previous machine function, click/right-click Travel by

Function.
This is useful, for example, if you are looking for an extra trim that should not
be there. Note, however, that the needle point will stop at every jump, trim,
and color change.
To travel to the next/previous trim function, click/right-click Travel by Trim.

Trim is a machine function. However, it is sometimes easier, especially when
working with sequin designs, to travel by trim function alone e.g. when
cleaning up unnecessary trims in a design.
Note Both manually and automatically inserted functions are recognized.

See Selecting machine formats for details.
Simulating design stitchouts

Use View > Slow Redraw to simulate embroidery design stitchout on screen.
The Slow Redraw tool lets you simulate the actual embroidery design stitchout
on screen. Use it to view design stitching and color sequence in slow motion.
Redrawing can be started from any stitch in the design. Hide previously stitched
78
parts of the design as required. With larger designs, you can choose to scroll
automatically so that the area being stitched remains on screen.
Because Slow Redraw emulates the movements of the embroidery machine, you
are able to make decisions about how to optimize your design in order to lessen
the load on the machine. This is particularly important if you intend to make
multiple stitchouts of the same design. It is good practice to perform Slow
Redraw on completed designs for this reason.
Note Slow Redraw cannot be used with TrueView.
To simulate the design stitchout
1 Click Slow Redraw or press Shift+R.
The Slow Redraw dialog opens.
Adjust display
options
Go
Back to Start
Pause
Stop
Tip To redraw only a section of the design, travel to the point where you want
to start Slow Redraw. See Traveling through designs for details.
2 Use the slider bar to adjust the redraw speed.
3 Select the options as required:
Hide Before: Hide all sections of the design prior to the current cursor
position.
Only areas being
redrawn are displayed,
the rest are hidden
Travel to middle of
design, then start Slow
Redraw
Auto Scroll: With larger designs, scroll automatically so that the area
being stitched remains on screen.
4 Click Go.
79
The design is redrawn on screen according to stitching sequence and selected

speed.
5 Adjust control buttons as required:
Button
Function
Speed
Use the slider bar to adjust the redraw speed in real time.
Pause
Pauses the redraw, letting you resume where you left off.
Stop
Stops the redraw and returns to the beginning of the design.
Back to Start Redraws from the beginning of the design.
Tip Depending on the color of your background, you can change display
colors for Unsewn (stitches), Selected (objects), Object Outline, Grid and
Guide. See Changing display colors for details.
Selectively viewing color blocks

EmbroideryStudio provides techniques with both its Color-Object List and
Color Palette Editor for selectively view color blocks in a design and naming
them. You can assign names to color blocks of sequential, same-color
embroidery objects, also known as elements. Element names appear on
production worksheets. See also Printing reports in Embroidery mode.
Viewing color blocks with the Color-Object List

Use View > Color-Object List to toggle the Color-Object List display on and off. Use
it to select and view objects in a design.
digitized, grouped by color block. It offers an easy way to selectively view color
blocks and objects. See also Selecting objects by Color-Object List. See also
Viewing color blocks with the Color Palette Editor.
Note You can use the Color-Object List to group and lock objects. Use it also to
cut, copy and paste, as well as resequence objects. See also Grouping & locking
with the Color-Object List, Copying & pasting objects, and Resequencing colors
& objects with the Color-Object List in the Online Manual.
To view color blocks with the Color-Object List
1 Click the Color-Object List icon.
80
The Color-Object List opens. It can be docked to the right side of the design
window, or floated in any position.
Total color block count

Total objects in design
Object icon
Color block node
Consecutive objects
in color block
2 Select the items you want to view in isolation, and hold down Locate.
Hold down
Locate to quickly
view selected
items
Select color
block to view
3 Hide selected color blocks and embroidery objects via the popup menu
commands.
81
To view selected items only, select Hide Others from the popup menu.
Select to view only

selected color
blocks
Right-click a color block or object icon and apply Hide from the popup
menu.
To show all items, right-click any object or color block, and select Unhide
All from the popup menu.
Viewing color blocks with the Color Palette Editor

Use Color Palette > Color Palette Editor to assign thread colors to color blocks in
the design.
You can assign names to color blocks of sequential, same-color embroidery
objects, also known as elements. Element names appear on production
worksheets. The Usage field in the Color Palette Editor shows a list of selected
color blocks which correspond to design elements. By default, the number in the
stop sequence is displayed. However, each color block can also be given a
descriptive name for easy identification. See also Printing reports in Embroidery
mode.
To view color blocks with the Color Palette Editor
1 Use the Color Palette Editor to set up a new palette or edit an existing
colorway. See Assigning threads to color palettes for details.
82
The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the current colorway.
Select color
block
Enter descriptive
name for selected
color
Click and hold to locate

selected color block
2 Select a color slot.

3 To view the color block, click Locate and hold.
Tip When more than one element appears in the Usage list, you can select
and locate them singly or as a group.
4 To name the design element, click the Usage field and key in a descriptive
name e.g. Angel Legs.
5 To check the naming of all design elements, select File > Design Properties
> Stop Sequence.
Named design
elements listed
here
Tip You can also name design elements in this dialog. See Naming design
elements for details.
83
Viewing design information

You can obtain design information in a variety of ways and formats before
opening the EMB file via Windows Explorer and from the Design Properties
dialog. See also Previewing production worksheets.
Viewing design information in Windows Explorer

Before opening EMB files, you can check the software version number and other
design information through Windows Explorer. The Properties dialog displays a
design preview together with design information such as stitch count, number
of stops and color changes, as well as machine format. You can also view general
file information, such as file size and modification dates.
Note This same dialog can be accessed from within the Open dialog in
EmbroideryStudio. See also Opening designs.
To view design information in Windows Explorer
1 In Windows Explorer, select a file.
2 Right-click the file and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Properties dialog opens and displays the EMB tab.
Dedicated EMB
properties tab
3 Check the design information, or click the other tabs for general file
information.
Use Custom tab to

provide additional file
information
84
Tip The Custom tab provides some of the same information entered in the
Design Properties > Summary dialog in EmbroideryStudio. See Viewing
design information in EmbroideryStudio for details.
4 Click OK.
Viewing design information in EmbroideryStudio

You can check the software version number and other design information
through the Design Properties dialog. Stitching details are also provided. Most
of the fields cannot be modified directly except for stitch counts, summary
information, Colorways, and Elements.
Note An element, in software terms, is a color block consisting of sequential,
same-color objects. You can assign names to elements which then appear on the
production worksheet. The operator generally uses these to make sure colors
are correct during production. See Naming design elements for details.
To view design information in EmbroideryStudio
1 Select a file to view.
2 Select File > Design Properties.

The Design Properties > Information dialog opens.
Design properties
extracted from file
not editable
85
This tab contains information about the design height, width, stitch count and
colors. The data is extracted from the design and, except for stitch count,
cannot be modified.
Field
Description
Design name
The file name of the current design.
Design source
Files are internally tagged as belonging to one of four types

Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported
Stitches.
Version
Indicates which version of the software in which the design was last
saved.
Machine
Indicates current machine format for this design. See also Machine
Formats.
Stitches
Indicates total stitch count for design.
Color changes
Indicates number of color changes required to stitch out design.
Colors
Indicates number of thread colors involved in the design.
Stops
Normally color changes are associated with Stop functions.

Depending on machine format, however, the design may include an
additional last stop to ensure the machine returns to the starting
needle for the next run.
Total thread
Indicates total meterage of top thread required to stitch out the

design.
Total bobbin
Indicates total meterage of bottom (bobbin) thread required to stitch

out the design. These firgures may be required for inventory control
depending on business practices.
Length
calculation
Allows you to revise stitch counts according to target fabric

thickness. See below.
Trims
Indicates total number of trims in the design. Generally, you will try
to minimize the number of trims. See Using automatic connectors
for details.
Objects
Indicates total number of objects in a design.
Max/min stitch /
jump length
The maximum and minimum stitch lengths, and maximum jump

stitch length in the design.
Sequins
Indicates number of sequins in current design.
Auto-style fabric
Pre-defined fabric settings used in current design. See Working

with fabrics for details.
Required
stabilizers
Indicates recommended stabilizer(s) for selected fabric type. See

Managing fabrics for details.
Left / right / up /
down
Depending on where the design start/end point has been set, these
figures indicate the distance from that point. See also Hooping
Designs.
End X / Y
The coordinates of the last stitch. See also Setting automatic start
and end points.
Height / width
Indicates total height and width of design. See also Hooping

Designs.
Note This tab also provides important information about the file source
Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported
Stitches. See Embroidery design formats for details.
86
3 Click Length Calculation to revise stitch counts according to target fabric

thickness. See Estimating total thread usage for details.
4 Select the Stop Sequence tab to view the color sequence and stitch counts
for each design element.
The data in this tab is extracted from the design and, except for Element,
cannot be modified. See also Naming design elements.
This tab provides the following details:

Field
Description
Needle number
The needle number stitching each color block.
Color
Indicates color slot number of the color in color palette.
Element
User-defined name to identify each color block. See Naming design

elements for details.
Stitches
Number of stitches per color.
Length
Metrage of thread required per color.
Description
Color description derived from color palette.
Code
Color code as registered in the color chart. See also Setting up

color palettes.
Brand
Brand name of threads used.
Note There is a stitch count for each element in the design. You can show
this as a stitch count for each element or a cumulative stitch count. See
Setting other general options for details.
87
5 Select the Summary tab to view or enter summary information about the
design.
Ai Matsamura
Canary, Birds, Clipart
This design is based on copyright free clipart
Bird in multiple colorways
6 Click a field and enter any text which will help you identify the design at a
later date.
This tab allows you to record the following details:
Field
Description
Author
Name of digitizer appears in production worksheet footer.
Keywords
Keywords for potential database searches appears in worksheet.
Comments
Worksheet information.
Title
Defaults to filename.
Subject
Worksheet information.
Note Information from this tab is included on the production worksheet. See
Previewing production worksheets for details.
7 Click OK.
Estimating total thread usage

In order to get more precise thread usage estimates, you can adjust the fabric
thickness setting to suit the target fabric.
To estimate total thread usage
Click to calculate thread

and bobbin length
88
2 Click Length Calculation.

The Length Calculation dialog opens.
Enter target fabric

thickness in mm
Enter bobbin thread
length as a %
3 Enter the thickness of the target fabric in millimeters.

4 Adjust the bobbin thread length according to the mixture of thread types in
the design.
This factor provides a simple mechanism for a more accurate bobbin thread
length estimate. The default value (100%) is suitable for a design with a
mixture of stitch types. If the design is all Run stitches or all Tatami, more
bobbin thread will be used and the factor can be increased say to 125%. If
the design is all Satin stitch, the factor can be reduced to say 65%.
5 Click OK.
The Total Thread and Total Bobbin values are adjusted to take into account
fabric thickness on total thread requirement.
Tip Click Save to save the revised settings to the current template.
Naming design elements

You can assign names to color blocks of sequential, same-color embroidery
objects, also known as elements. Each color block can be given a descriptive
name for easy identification. Element names appear on the production
worksheet. See also Printing reports in Embroidery mode.
Tip The Usage field in the Color Palette Editor shows a list of selected color
blocks which correspond to design elements. See Viewing color blocks with the
Color Palette Editor for details. See Naming color blocks for details.
To name design elements
2 Select the Stop Sequence tab.
Enter element
names for each
color block
89
3 In the Element fields, enter names for each color block as required. To do so,
click the field, type the name, and press Enter.
Note This information may be included on the production worksheet. See
Customizing worksheet information for details.
4 Click OK.
Previewing production worksheets

Click Standard > Print Preview to preview the production worksheet on screen.
The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the embroidery
machine operator. It contains a design preview and essential production
information, including the size of the design, color sequence and any special
instructions. See also Printing reports in Embroidery mode.
To preview a production worksheet
1 Click the Print Preview icon.
The production worksheet displays in a preview window.
Click to display one or
two pages
Click Close to return to

design window
Click to print
production
worksheet
Production
information and
threadup details
2 Adjust the view as required:
To change the orientation of the paper, click Landscape or Portrait.

To change the information that displays, and set printing/plotting
preferences, click Options. See also Customizing worksheet print options.
To print the design, click Print.

To close the production worksheet preview, click Close.
Tip Zoom in to read the production information or view the design preview
more closely. Large designs may be displayed over a number of pages.
90
91
Chapter 3
Selecting Embroidery Objects
EmbroideryStudio provides various ways to select

embroidery objects. Modify the design as a whole
or select individual objects for more precise
modification. The Color-Object List provides an
easy way to select objects and colors in a design
and access their properties. Use it also to group
and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide
objects.
Note In EmbroideryStudio, vector and
embroidery objects are in fact inter-convertible
since they share many of the same characteristics.
See also Converting vector and embroidery objects.
means of the Color-Object List.
Selecting and deselecting objects

EmbroideryStudio provides various means for selecting embroidery objects.
You can select all embroidery objects in a design, cancel all selections, or remove
individual objects from a selected group. EmbroideryStudio supports point &
click, selection marquee selection and, in conjunction with Shift and Ctrl keys,
multiple object selection. EmbroideryStudio also allows precise selection of
object outlines or fill stitches. See also Quick Reference.
Tip Depending on the color of your background, you can change display colors
for Unsewn (stitches), Selected (objects), Object Outline, Grid and Guide. See
Changing display colors for details.
Selecting multiple objects

Select all embroidery objects to apply changes to a whole design. You can cancel
all selections or remove individual embroidery objects from a group of selected
objects. See also Quick Reference.
92
Tip EmbroideryStudio also provides a method for you to select individual

objects within object groupings. See Selecting objects within groups for details.
To select multiple objects
Select Edit > Select All or press Ctrl+A.

Selection handles appear around the entire design.
No objects
selected
All objects
selected
Deselect an object/s by any of the following means:

Click an empty area of the background.
Select a different object.
Press Esc or X to deselect all.
Select Edit > Deselect All to deselect all.
Remove an object from a group of selection by holding down Ctrl and clicking
the object to deselect.
Selecting objects individually

Use Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object to select individual objects as
well as groups or ranges of objects.
Cick Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Current to select the object associated
with the current cursor position.
The simplest way to select an embroidery object is by pointing and clicking with
the mouse with the Select Object tool activated. Using Shift and Ctrl keys, you
can select multiple objects. Both outlines and/or filled areas can be selected.
Clicking an outline selects an object even if another is above it. Where you have
a mixture of closed-curve objects, you can select object outlines or fill stitches.
Note EmbroideryStudio allows a degree of selection tolerance around
stitches and outlines when selecting. Selection tolerance does not apply to color
or fabric fills. With low-density stitching and/or at high zooms, it is actually
possible to click between stitches and not select the object.
To select objects individually
Click the Select Object icon or press 0.

Click the object you want to select.
Selection handles appear around it. You can move the cursor anywhere within
these extents to click-and-drag the object.
93
To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click.
OR
Click first object
Ctrl +
Hold down Ctrl and

click another object
Shift +
Hold down Shift and

click last object
To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click.

Tip It helps to know the design stitching sequence for this method. See
Viewing stitching sequence for details.
Note Clicking within the objects extent box but outside its outline does not
select it.
Where you have a mixture of closed-curve objects with or without fills, you
can select outlines or fill stitches.
Clicking fill selects the object

even if it is within the bounds
of a larger object
Clicking fill behind an object

without fill selects the object
Clicking outline of object

selects the object
While traveling through a design or editing stitches, click the Select Current
icon or press Shift+0 to select the object associated with the current cursor
position. See also Traveling through designs. See also Selecting and
deselecting stitches.
Tip To select an object which is sitting behind another object, zoom in and
position the cursor over the area where they overlap, and holding down the
2 key, click until the second object is selected. Each click selects the next
overlapping object.
Selecting objects by selection marquee

Click Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object and drag a selection marquee
around the object to select.
With the Select Object tool activated, you can select embroidery objects by
dragging a selection marquee around them. The selection tool is generally
activated by default.
Cha pter 3 Se lec ting Embroider y Objec ts
94

To select objects by selection marquee

Drag a selection marquee around the objects you want to select.
Objects are selected when you release the mouse button.
Drag a selection marquee

around the objects
Objects are selected
Note Only objects completely within the selection marquee will be selected
when you release the mouse button. See also Grouping & ungrouping objects.
Selecting objects with Polygon/Polyline Select

Click Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Polygon Select to select objects with a
bounding box.
Click Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Polyline Select to draw a line through the
object to select.
With the Polygon Select tool you can select a specific object by drawing a
bounding box around it. With the Polyline Select tool you can select a specific
object by drawing a line through it.
To select objects with Polygon Select
1 Click the Polygon Select icon.
2 Mark reference points around the object/s you want to select.
The objects you want to select must be completely within the outline.
Mark reference
points around
object/s to select
3 Press Enter to select.
95
To select objects with Polyline Select

1 Click the Polyline Select icon.
2 Mark two or more reference points to create a line touching all objects you
want to select.
Any object intersected by the line is selected.
Mark two
reference points
3 Press Enter to select.
Selecting objects on the fly

You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On
activated, or using the Select Object tool in conjunction with Shift, Ctrl and
Tab keys.
Selecting objects while traveling

Click Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object together with the Ctrl key to
select objects as you travel through a design.
You can select objects as you travel through the design using the Ctrl key.
Traveling is usually associated with checking the stitching sequence.
To select objects while traveling
1 Click the Select Object icon.
2 Use the Travel by Object tool or Tab and Shift+Tab buttons to travel
forwards or backwards by object. See Traveling through designs for details.
Stop before the first

object
3 Hold down the Ctrl key to select an object as you travel through it.
Hold down Ctrl and

travel by object
4 Add or remove objects from the selection as required:
To select more objects, continue traveling with Ctrl held down.

To leave an object out of the selection, release Ctrl before you travel
through it.
96
Note If an object is already selected, it is deselected when you travel through

it.
Selecting next or previous object

Click Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout >Select Object and press Tab or Shift+Tab to
select next or previous objects.
If an object is already selected, you can select the object before or after it in the
stitching sequence using Tab or Shift+Tab with the Select Object tool
activated. With no object selected, you can select the first or last object in the
design sequence.
To select next or previous object
2 Select an object as required.
3 Do one of the following:
Press Tab to select the next object in the stitching sequence.

Press Shift+Tab to select the previous object in the stitching sequence.
Press Shift
+Tab keys
Press Tab key
Tip Hold down Ctrl and press Tab or Shift+Tab to add the next or previous
objects to the selection.
Selecting objects with Selects On

Click Generate >Selects On to select a range of objects as you travel through the
design.
The Selects On tool adds objects to the selection as you travel through the
stitching sequence.
To select objects with Selects On
1 Click the Selects On icon.
Note If the Select Object tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.
3 Travel through the design. See Traveling through designs for details.
As you travel, objects are added to the selection.
97
Selecting related objects

You can select all embroidery objects of the same color or stitch type with a
single command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the
same type.
Selecting objects by color

You can select all embroidery objects of the same color with a single command.
Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same color. See also
Selectively viewing color blocks.
To select objects by color
1 Select Edit > Select By > Color.
The Select By Color dialog opens.
2 Select a thread color from the list.
To select a range of colors, hold down Shift as you click.

To select multiple colors, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3 Click OK.
Objects using the selected thread colors are selected in the design.
Selecting objects by stitch type

You can select all embroidery objects of the same stitch type with a single
command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same
stitch type.
To select objects by stitch type
1 Select Edit > Select By > Stitch type.
98
The Select By Stitch Type dialog opens.
Select stitch type
2 Select a stitch type from the list.
To select a range of stitch types, hold down Shift as you click.

To select multiple stitch types, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3 Click OK.
Objects using the selected stitch types are selected in the design.
Selecting objects by Color-Object List

Use View > Color-Object List to toggle the Color-Object List on/off. Use it to view
and select objects in a design.
digitized, grouped by color block. It offers an easy way to select objects and
selectively view them. It is synchronized with the design window, dynamically
updating whenever you manipulate objects. It is normally docked on the right
but can be dragged to any position you require.
Note You can use the Color-Object List to group and lock objects. Use it also to
cut, copy and paste, resequence, as well as branch objects. See also Grouping
& locking with the Color-Object List, Copying & pasting objects and
Resequencing colors & objects with the Color-Object List in the Online Manual.
To select objects by Color-Object List
99
The Color-Object List opens. It can be docked to the right side of the design
window, or floated in any position. A separate icon for each color block and
each object in the design appears in order of stitching sequence.
Total color block count

Total objects in design
Object icon
Color block node
Consecutive objects
in color block
2 Click a node icon to open or close a color block and see its component
objects.
Click to
open/close all
color block nodes
Right-click any object or

color block, and select
Select All
Click to open/close
individual color
block node
Blue border
appears around
selected objects
3 Click an icon to select a color block and/or individual objects.

When a color block is selected, all of its component objects are selected as
well. A blue border appears around each.

To select all items, right-click any object or color block, and choose Select
All from the popup menu.
To deselect all objects, click away from objects and color blocks.
100
means of the Color-Object List.
101
PART II
EMBROIDERY DIGITIZING
In EmbroideryStudio, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery
objects. These are like ordinary vector objects in that they have certain defining
characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They also
have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density.
Digitizing embroidery shapes
This section discusses the automatic conversion of vector to embroidery objects.
It also deals with manual digitizing methods, including digitizing free shapes,
simple borders, and complex column shapes. See Digitizing Embroidery Shapes
for details.
Digitizing outlines and details
This section described techniques for creating outlines such as simple and motif
runs, as well as decorative outlines. See Digitizing Outlines & Details for details.
Embroidery fills
This section explains how to select stitch types for your various fills, including
how to create Satin fills, Tatami, Motif, and Contour fills, and how to adjust stitch
settings for best results. It also describes how to create Zigzag and E Stitch fills
and borders. See Embroidery Fills for details.
Threads and colorways
This section describes how to select colors from the color palette as well as how
to set up color palettes, including matching image colors to threads. It also
describes how to set up multiple colorways. It explains how to name elements
within color blocks as well as how to split them across multiple colorways. It also
explains how to customize and create your own thread colors and charts. It
describes how to change backgrounds, including colors, fabrics, or products, as
well as the display of display elements such as unsewn and sewn stitching to suit
different colorways. See Threads & Colorways for details.
Properties, fabrics, styles and templates
This section explains how to change property settings in a design, as well as how
to apply and adjust fabric settings. It also explains how to create and maintain
styles and templates in EmbroideryStudio. See Properties, Fabrics, Styles &
Templates for details.
Underlays and pull compensation
This section describes how to set and adjust automatic underlays. It also deals
compensating for fabric stretch with automatic pull compensation. See
Underlays & Pull Compensation for details.
102
Embroidery connectors
This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your designs.
It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors, including the stitch
length for travel runs. It also deals with setting automatic start and end points.
See Embroidery Connectors for details.
103
Chapter 4
Digitizing Embroidery Shapes
In EmbroideryStudio, you build designs

from basic shapes or embroidery objects.
These are like ordinary vector graphics in
that they have certain defining
characteristics or properties such as color,
size, position, and so on. They also have
properties unique to embroidery such as
stitch type and density. The most important
property of an embroidery object is in fact its
stitch type. Different stitch types are suited
to different shapes. See also Embroidery
Fills.
EmbroideryStudio contains an entire suite of digitizing tools which are similar
to drawing tools except that the end result are embroidery rather than vector
objects. There are tools for digitizing complex shapes with turning stitches and
fixed stitch angles, with or without holes. There are also tools for creating
columns and borders of fixed or varying width.
Tip EmbroideryStudio also lets you convert vector objects directly to
embroidery objects. In fact, entire vector designs can be converted to
embroidery. See Converting vector and embroidery objects for details.
This section discusses the automatic conversion of vector to embroidery objects.
It also deals with manual digitizing methods, including digitizing free shapes,
simple borders, and complex column shapes.
Embroidery digitizing methods

The process of creating embroidery objects on screen is called digitizing. Like
design creation in Graphics mode, this involves the use of certain input or
digitizing methods. These are similar to drawing tools except that the end result
are embroidery objects rather than vector objects. See also Corresponding
object and stitch types.
104
Note When you create an embroidery object, you can accept default settings
for a particular tool, or apply new ones. Default settings are based on the
selected fabric. See Creating designs based on fabrics for details.
Digitizing tools
Different digitizing methods or tools are suited to creating different shapes or
design elements. Digitizing methods divide into three main categories free
shapes, column shapes, and outlines. There are also some input methods for
specialized functions. When you create an embroidery object, you can accept
default settings or apply new ones. Default settings are stored in the design
template. You can also define current properties to influence the objects you
create in the current design. You change settings of most tools by right-clicking
the tool icon and adjusting values in the Object Properties dialog. See also
Properties, Fabrics, Styles & Templates.
Tip Use the prompts in the Prompt Bar to help you digitize. If you make a
mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo all new
points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
Free shape tools
Use the Toolbox to access the Free Shape Tools Flyout. See Using Toolbox
flyouts for details.
This flyout contains tools which can be used to create free-form shapes with or
without turning stitching. See Digitizing free shapes for details.
Tool
Description
Fusion Fill /
Values
Use to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch angles. Right-click

to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Complex Fill /
Values
Use to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch angle. Right-click

Circle tools
Use the Toolbox to access the Circle Tools Flyout. See Using Toolbox flyouts
for details.
This flyout contains tools which can be used to create circular and oval-shaped
objects of various types. See Digitizing circles, stars and rings for details.
Tool
Description
Circle
Use to digitize filled circles and ovals.
105
Tool
Description
Star
Use to digitize circle or oval shapes using turning Zigzag stitches to create
stars or French dots.
Ring
Use to digitize circle- and oval-shaped rings.
Column Shape tools

Use the Toolbox to access the Column Shape Tools Flyout. See Using
Toolbox flyouts for details.
This flyout contains tools which can be used to create column shapes for borders
of fixed or varying width. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected
objects. See Digitizing simple borders for details.
Tool
Description
Shortcut
Input A/ Values Use to create columns of varying width and stitch

angle.
Shift+A
Input B/ Values Use to create asymmetrical columns of turning stitches,

where opposite sides are different shapes.
Input C /
Values
Use to digitize columns or borders of fixed width.
Outline tools
Use the Toolbox to access the Outline Tools Flyout. See Using Toolbox
This flyout contains tools which can be used to create outline stitching of varying
thicknesses and styles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
See Digitizing Outlines & Details for details.
Tool
Description
Shortcut
Run / Values
Use to place a row of single run stitches along a

digitized line.
Shift+N
Triple Run /
Values
Use to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized

line.
Motif Run /
Values
Use to create a string of motifs along a digitized line.
Backstitch /
Values
Use to place a row of backstitches along a digitized

line.
Stemstitch /
Values
Use to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized

line.
Chapter 4 D igitiz ing Embroid er y Shapes
106
Note Run stitch, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are
considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Other digitizing methods
may use different fill stitch types depending on the particular application. See
also Embroidery Fills.
Manual tools
Use the Toolbox to access the Manual Tools Flyout. See Using Toolbox
This flyout contains tools which can be used to add individual stitches, either
singly or three stitch layers at a time. See also Digitizing individual stitches.
Tool
Description
Manual
Use Manual (Manual Tools Flyout) to enter individual stitches.
Triple Manual
Use Triple Manual (Manual Tools Flyout) to enter triple stitches.
Caution Manual stitches are not well suited to scaling and transforming actions
as the stitches have no associated properties. Use them sparingly, for example
to add a few stitches to a finished design.
Control points
Once you have selected a digitizing method, you create shapes by marking
points along an outline. EmbroideryStudio uses automatic Bzier curves to
create object outlines. This produces objects much faster than traditional Bzier
methods.
1
14
Click for
corner points
8
2
13
Right-click for
curve points
12
10
11
Unlike the traditional method, you do not need to click-and-drag to create a

curved line. Simply use the left mouse button for a cusp or corner point or right
mouse button for a smooth curve point EmbroideryStudio automatically
107
curves the line for you. Bzier control handles are available, however, when you
come to modify a shape. See Reshaping & Converting Objects for details.
2
Curve
point
1
Curve
point
90
Connect corners and

curves with a corner point
60
45
30
180
Curve
point
270
Hold down Ctrl to

constrain the line to
15 increments
A few general rules apply:
To constrain the line to 15 increments, hold down Ctrl as you digitize. This
is useful for digitizing straight lines.
For a perfect circular arc, mark three points with a right-click.

Where curves connect either to a straight line or another curve click to
mark the connection point.
Entry point
Exit point
Corner reshape node
Curve reshape node
Control handle
Stitch angle points
The reference points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control
points. These vary slightly with the object type. You use them to edit or
transform objects. Most points can be added, deleted, or moved. Corner and
curve points can be interchanged. Some control points such as entry and exit
points have a specific function and cannot be deleted. See Reshaping
Join method
When you are digitizing closed objects, the Closest Join method automatically
calculates the closest join between them, saving you having to think about entry
and exit points. When activated (the default), all newly digitized objects are
joined by this method. When deactivated, all newly digitized objects are joined
by the As Digitized method. This means that you manually specify entry and
exit points while digitizing. Objects are thus joined from the exit point of the last
digitized object to the entry point of the new object. See Setting other general
options for details.
Closest Join on
Closest Join off
108
Switching between fill and outline

You can quickly switch from a fill stitch digitizing method to Run or Manual
digitizing methods using keyboard shortcuts.
Note After digitizing, you can convert between Run and Input C objects, as
well as between Fusion Fill and Auto Appliqu. Of course, you can also convert
between vector objects and embroidery objects. See Converting vector and
To switch between fill and outline
Press Enter to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Manual
digitizing method.
Press Spacebar to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Run
digitizing method.
Generating stitches
Use Generate > Generate Stitches to generate stitches for new or selected
objects.
With EmbroideryStudio designs, stitches are automatically generated from
design outlines and properties. You can either generate stitches as you digitize,
or wait until you have defined the outlines. With Generate Stitches on (the
default), stitches are calculated for new objects whenever you press Enter. They
are also updated whenever you scale, transform or move the object. If speed is
an issue, you can digitize objects with Generate Stitches off. You can also
select objects and remove all generated stitches. With Generate Stitches off,
only object outlines appear. See also Setting reshape options.
To generate stitches
To generate stitches for new or selected objects, click the Generate Stitches
icon or press G.
If any objects are selected, stitches are generated for them automatically. If
no objects are currently selected, stitches are generated for new objects as
soon as you press Enter.
To remove stitches, or digitize without generating stitches, deselect

Generate Stitches icon or press G again.
Tip Make sure Show Outlines is selected, and the colors of background and
object(s) when selected contradict each other, otherwise the objects will not
be visible in the design window. See Displaying backgrounds for details.
Digitizing free shapes

In EmbroideryStudio, you digitize free shapes with turning stitches with the
all-purpose Fusion Fill tool. Use the Complex Fill tool for free shapes with
109
fixed stitch angles. By digitizing further internal boundaries, you can create
shapes with holes in them.
Note Boundaries in complex objects should not overlap or intersect. The shapes
below, for example, cannot be successfully digitized with free shape tools.
Where they occur, overlaps are ignored and stitches generated in the largest
area defined by the boundaries.
Boundaries overlap
Boundary overlaps itself
Hole within hole
Tip Use the Shaping tools to join, trim or split selected vector or embroidery
objects to make different shapes. See Shaping vector and embroidery objects
for details.
Creating shapes with fixed stitch angles

Use Toolbox > Free Shape Tools Flyout > Complex Fill to digitize filled shapes with
a single stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Digitize complex shapes with the Complex Fill tool. Create objects using left
and right clicks to mark points to form the boundary outlines. See also
Corresponding object and stitch types.
To create shapes with fixed stitch angles

1 Create a new design with a graphic or open an existing one. See Creating and
opening designs for details.
2 Switch to Embroidery mode. See Switching design modes for details.
Tip Make sure Show Graphics on the Universal toolbar is toggled on or
press 0 (zero) to see the all vector objects on screen.
110
3 Select a color and stitch type. See Selecting thread colors for details. See also
Selecting stitch types.
4 Click Complex Fill and mark points around the outline of the shape. See
Embroidery digitizing methods for details.
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make a
5 Close the shape.
4
8
5
6
ht
ig
ra e
t
s lin
7
10
11
12
Press Enter the object is

closed automatically
r
cu
ve 12
10
11
Last point marked on top of

first with right button
1
13
To close the shape with the same type of point as the last one entered
i.e. corner or curve simply press Enter.
To close the shape using a different type of point, mark the last on top of
the first and press Enter.
6 Digitize any additional (internal) boundaries in the same way and press
Enter.
Internal boundaries will create holes in the object. They should not overlap.
See also Adding holes to free shapes.
7 Mark the entry and exit position by clicking outside the object boundary.
Note The Closest Join method (the default) automatically calculates closest
join between objects while digitizing. When deactivated, entry and exit points
of all newly digitized objects are set manually. See Setting other general
options for details. See also Smoothing curves.
8 Define the stitch angle by marking two points.
13
15
14
12
1
14
Stitch angle
direction
13
Stitch angle
direction
Tip If you choose to digitize entry/exit points manually, place them opposite
each other on the boundary in order to minimize segments and gaps in the
embroidery. Then define the stitch angle so it is perpendicular to the line
between the entry and exit points.
111
9 Press Enter.
Note Complex Fill objects generally stitch out in several segments, joined by
travel runs. However, all segments and boundaries are part of the same
object. See also Stabilizing with automatic underlays.
Creating shapes with turning stitches

Use Toolbox > Free Shape Tools Flyout > Fusion Fill to digitize filled shapes with
turning stitch angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Eliminate the need to digitize multiple objects with Fusion Fill. This tool allows
you to create a single complex object with multiple stitch angles and even holes.
It is best used with designs containing complicated, turning columns such as
trees, animals, or large filled areas. See also Corresponding object and stitch
types.
Tip You can quickly switch from Fusion Fill digitizing method to Run by
pressing the Spacebar. See also Keyboard Shortcuts.
To create shapes with turning stitches

Tip Make sure Show Graphics on the Universal toolbar is toggled on or
press 0 (zero) to see the all vector objects on screen.
3 Select a color and stitch type. See Using the color palette for details. See also
112
4 Click Fusion Fill and mark points around the outline of the shape. See
5 Close the shape by pressing Enter.
To close the shape, you dont need to mark the last point on top of the first.
Simply press Enter after marking the last point and the shape automatically
closes itself. Depending on the type of first and last points i.e. corner or
curve the closing line is either curved or straight.
4
8
5
7
6
ht
ig
ra e
t
S lin
1
10
11
Press Enter the object is

closed automatically
7
6
12
8
5
10
11
e
rv 12
Cu
Last point marked on top of
1
first with right button
13
Tip Digitize any additional holes in the same way. See Adding holes to free
shapes for details.
6 Press Enter to confirm.
You are prompted to accept or discard calculated stitch angles.
7 Press Enter to accept stitch angles.
Alternatively, press Spacebar to discard these stitch angles and accept a
single default stitch angle.
Stitch
angle 2
Stitch angle
Stitch angle 1
Press Enter to accept
stitch angles
Press Spacebar to accept

single default angle
113
Tip You can adjust and/or add stitch angles to embroidery objects using the
Reshape Object tool. See Adding stitch angles in Reshape mode for details.
Stitches are generated.
Stitches with artwork
Artwork toggled off
8 To view stitches better, turn off vector objects by toggling off Show Graphics
in the Universal toolbar. See Displaying graphics and embroidery for details.
Note Fusion Fill objects generally stitch out in several segments, joined by
travel runs. However, all segments and boundaries are part of the same
object. See also Stabilizing with automatic underlays.
Adding holes to free shapes

Use Toolbox > Free Shape Tools Flyout > Fusion Fill to digitize complex shapes
with holes in them.
holes in them.
EmbroideryStudio lets you quickly add holes to Fusion Fill objects.
Tip You can also create new objects from existing boundaries using the Fill
Holes feature. Alternatively, you can use other objects to cut holes. See Filling
holes in objects and Removing underlying stitching for details.
To add holes to free shapes
1 Select the object to modify and click the free-shape tool.
114
Points display around the object outline.
2 Digitize additional holes making sure they do not overlap. Press Enter each
time. See Embroidery digitizing methods for details.
3 When you have digitized all additional holes, press Enter again.
Stitches are regenerated. To view stitches better, turn off vector objects by
toggling off Show Graphics in the Universal toolbar. See Displaying
graphics and embroidery for details.
Artwork toggled off
Tip To remove unwanted holes, select the object and use the Reshape
Object tool to delete control points around the hole. See Reshaping
Adjusting stitch angle properties

Use Toolbox > Free Shape Tools Flyout > Fusion Fill to digitize complex shapes
with holes in them.
holes in them.
You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object properties.
By definition, Fusion Fill objects contain multiple stitch angles. However, they
also have a property called the nominal angle. This has two functions. First, if
115
a Fusion Fill object fails to stitch correctly for instance, if the stitch angles are
irreconcilable it will revert to parallel stitching in the direction of the nominal
angle. Second, the nominal angle affects certain underlay styles. See also
Stabilizing with automatic underlays.
Tip You can adjust the stitch angle of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects
interactively using the Stitch Angles tool. See Adding stitch angles in Reshape
mode for details.
To adjust stitch angle properties
1 Select an object.
2 Right-click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon.
The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.
Adjust stitch
angle
3 In the Angle or Nominal Angle field, enter the required stitch angle.
Angle: 90
Angle: 0
Note The nominal angle in a Fusion Fill object only takes effect if multiple
stitch angles are irreconcilable it then reverts to parallel stitching in the
direction of the nominal angle. The nominal angle also affects certain
underlay styles.
4 Press Enter or click Apply. See also Setting Object Property apply options.
Adjusting segment overlaps

116
Where segments within an object meet, the push-pull effect on the fabric during
stitching may cause gaps to appear. These gaps can be prevented by adding
overlapping rows. An overlap of 1 row means no real overlap. An overlap of 2
rows means that the first segment is extended by the addition of one extra row
of stitches.
To adjust segment overlaps
1 Select a Fusion Fill object.
2 Double-click the object or right-click Fusion Fill.
Enter required
number of rows
3 Adjust the number of overlapping rows where segments join.
No overlap row
Overlap rows 5
Adjusting travel margins

When dealing with complex shapes with multiple segments, you may want to
keep travel runs away from the boundary of the filled shape for various reasons.
If, for instance, you are using Jagged Edge effect, the travel might become
visible through the shortened stitches. For this reason, you can specify a margin
for the travel stitches. As you increase the travel margin, the travels are
positioned more towards the center. Where the filled area becomes very narrow,
however, travel stitches do not necessarily remain at the specified distance from
the boundary.
117
To adjust travel margins

1 Select an object.
Travel run too

close to edge
2 Right-click the Fusion Fill icon.

Adjust travel margin

distance
3 Adjust the travel margin distance in the Distance field.

The greater the distance, the more the travels are positioned towards the
center of the shape.
Travel run closer to

center of shape
Digitizing simple borders

Use Input C to digitize columns and borders of fixed width. This tool is typically
used to digitize borders and outlines of larger shapes. Input C is usually used
118
with Satin stitch but you can use any fill stitch type except Motif Fill. See
Embroidery Fills for details.
Tip You can switch from Input C to Run by pressing the Spacebar. You can
also convert between Input C and Run objects. See Converting vector and
Creating columns and borders

Use Toolbox > Column Shape Tools Flyout > Input C to digitize columns or borders
of fixed width. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Digitize columns and borders of fixed width with the Input C tool. You can leave
the shape open, or create an enclosed border by joining the first and last points.
Left and right mouse clicks create reference points corner points and curve
points respectively. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.
Tip EmbroideryStudio also provides tools for quickly creating outlines and
filled areas based on existing boundaries. See also Creating outlines and filling
holes.
To create columns and borders
2 Select a color and stitch type. See Using the color palette for details. See also
3 Click Input C.
119
4 Digitize the shape of the column by marking points. See Embroidery digitizing
methods for details.
4
2
5
3
6
1
Tip The Show Input C Width Guide setting in the Options dialog activates
a special cursor. This is useful when digitizing a border based on a background
image. The width guide shows you where the two sides of the border will be
located when the final stitching is generated. See Setting ruler and guides
display for details.
5 Press Enter to finish the line.
Tip To make a border, close the shape by entering the last point exactly on
top of the first. If points do not align, stitches will not turn smoothly around
the corner.
6 Specify the column width.
To use the default width (as set in the Object Properties > Special >
Input C dialog), press Enter.
Digitize column
width anywhere in
design window
To specify the width, mark two additional points. The distance between
these points is the width of the column. (You can mark the column width
anywhere on the screen.)
8
Digitize column width

anywhere in design
window
Tip You can offset stitches by right-clicking the column-width points (rather
than left-clicking) exactly where you want the offset to be in relation to the
center line. See also Setting offsets.
Left-click
reference points
Right-click
reference points
120
Artwork toggled off
Tip To view stitches better, turn off vector objects by toggling off Show
Graphics in the Universal toolbar. See Displaying graphics and embroidery
for details.
Adjusting column width

You can set an exact width for Input C objects via their properties.
Tip A Show Input C Width Guide setting in the Options dialog activates a
special cursor displayed only with the Input C tool. When digitizing an Input C
shape, a circle appears at the cursor position corresponding to the current width
setting in the Object Properties dialog. This is useful when digitizing a border
based on a background image. The width guide shows you where the two sides
of the border will be located when the final stitching is generated. See Setting
ruler and guides display for details.
To adjust column width
1 Select an Input C object.
2 Double-click the object or right-click Input C.
The Object Properties > Special > Input C dialog opens.
Adjust column width
3 Enter a width in the Column Width field.

121
Stitches are regenerated.
Tip You can also change the width of Input C objects by adjusting control
points with the Reshape tool. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Setting offsets
By default, stitches are positioned around the center of a digitized line. Set an
exact offset value via Object Properties. See also Creating columns and
borders.
Tip You can offset stitches by right-clicking the column-width points (rather
than left-clicking) exactly where you want the offset to be in relation to the
center line. See Creating columns and borders for details.
To set offsets
1 Right-click the Input C icon.
Select Offset
Set offsets in either

Side 1 or Side 2 fields
2 In the Input Side panel, select Offset.

3 Set an offset in either Side 1 or Side 2 field, either as an exact measurement
(in mm) or a percentage.
Input C offset: 25%
Input C offset: 75%
122
Note You only need to enter the value for one side as EmbroideryStudio
automatically calculates the other, based on the Column Width value.
Setting corner fractions

You can control the way stitches turn at the corners of Input C objects by
changing the distance over which they turn. This distance is set by the corner
fraction. The larger the fraction, the greater the distance.
Tip Round Sharp Corners is also available for Input C objects to give you the
option of sharp or round points. See Rounding sharp corners for details.
To set corner fractions
Adjust corner
fraction
2 Enter a new corner fraction in the Corner Fraction field.

Corner
fraction 0.8
Corner
fraction 0.5
Corner
fraction 0.25
Increasing the fraction spreads the turn over more stitches.

Decreasing the fraction reduces the number of stitches that turn.
Digitizing complex column shapes

In addition to Input C, the Column Shape Tools Flyout provides additional
tools for creating column shapes and borders of varying shape. Use the Input A
tool to digitize columns of varying width and stitch angle. Use the Input B tool
to digitize shapes where one side is different to the other, especially where one
side requires more points than the other. See also Corresponding object and
stitch types.
123
Digitizing columns of varying width

UseToolbox > Column Shape Tools Flyout > Input A to create columns of varying
width and stitch angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use the Input A tool to digitize columns of varying
width and stitch angle. Digitized pairs of points define
the outline, while lines connecting the pairs define
the stitch angles. See also Corresponding object and
stitch types.
Tip The Continuous Input feature provides you
with a simple and efficient way of digitizing a single Input A object comprised of
separately stitched sections. See Creating smooth joins for details.
Note EmbroideryStudio lets you convert between Complex Fill and
Input A or Input B objects. See Converting between embroidery objects for
details.
To digitize columns of varying width
1 Select the stitch type you want to use e.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types
for details.
2 Click the Input A icon.
3 Digitize the column by marking points on alternate sides of the column.
Click to enter corner points.

Right-click to enter curve points.
Mark a pair of points wherever the outline changes, and wherever you want
the stitch angle to change.
Stitches change their
angle gradually
through the entire
shape
Stitches remain parallel

between parallel stitch
angles
Note The control points in a pair do not have to be the same type. For
example, one can be a corner point, the other a curve.
4 When you have finished digitizing the column, either:
Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last point
you digitized, or
124
Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the
opposite side of the column.
Start
Start
Press Enter
Finish
Press Spacebar
OR
Finish
Tip If you are joining two columns, omit the last stitch on the first column
so that the exit point is close to the entry point of the next column.
Creating smooth joins

Use Toolbox > Column Shape Tools Flyout > Input A together with Continuous
Input to create single objects comprising separately stitched sections.
The Continuous Input feature provides a simple and efficient way of digitizing
a single Input A object comprised of separately stitched sections. You can also
create two smoothly joined objects with different cover stitch parameters in
each.
Note Continuous Input applies only to Input A. The objects so created can be
deleted or edited using standard reshape tools.
To create smooth joins
1 Select View > Design Options and click the General tab.
Select continuous
input style
2 Select a continuous input style:
Normal: Use this for non-continuous input.

Continuous Replace: Use this to continue digitizing the same object after
each Enter keypress. Any properties you change during digitizing will
affect the entire object, not just the section you are working on.
Second section
smooth joined to first
two sections become
a single object
First section created
125
Continuous Add: Use this to join objects of different size where different
stitch types are used e.g. a narrow section of Satin stitch joining to a
larger section of Tatami.
Second section
smooth joined to
first two sections
become separate
objects
First section created
3 Click OK.
4 Digitize the Input A object. See Digitizing columns of varying width for details.
When you press Enter, the digitized object fills with stitches. The input tool
is still active.
5 If you are using Continuous Add mode, you can select another stitch type
at this point.
Tip To stop the screen scrolling while moving the mouse, hold down Shift
and click the stitch type button you require.
6 Recommence digitizing where you left off and press Enter when you have
finished.
The new section fills with stitches and joins to the previous one. If you are
using Continuous Add mode, the new section actually comprises a new
object. This means that, while the two sections (objects) are smoothly joined,
they can have quite different property settings.
7 To start a new object without joining to the previous object, click the Input A
icon again.
Digitizing asymmetrical columns of turning stitches

Use Toolbox > Column Shape Tools Flyout > Input B to create asymmetrical
columns of turning stitches, where opposite sides are different shapes. Right-click
Use the Input B tool to digitize shapes where one side is different to the other,
especially where one side requires more points than the other. Stitches turn
evenly throughout the entire shape. See also Corresponding object and stitch
types.
Tip EmbroideryStudio lets you convert between Complex Fill and

Input A or Input B objects. See Converting between embroidery objects for
details.
To digitize asymmetrical columns of turning stitches
1 Select the stitch type you want to use e.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch types
for details.
126
2 Click the Input B icon.

3 Digitize the first side of the shape i.e. top or left by marking points.
Click to enter corner points.

Right-click to enter curve points.
2
5
3
4 Press Enter.
An elastic line attaches to the pointer, ready for you to digitize the second side
of the shape.
5 Digitize the second i.e. bottom or right side of the object.
Press Enter or
Spacebar
Stitches turn
evenly
10
Tip Stitch angles vary from tightly turning fills to parallel fills, depending on
the ends of the shape the more pointy, the tighter the stitch angles.
90
Turning fill
Sloping fill
Parallel fill
6 When you have finished digitizing the shape, either:
Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last point
you digitized, or
Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the
opposite side of the column.
127
Chapter 5
Digitizing Outlines & Details
EmbroideryStudio provides tools for creating

outline stitching of varying thicknesses and styles.
They are typically used to add outlines and pickout
runs to designs. There are tools for creating simple
run stitching as well as decorative outlines using
motifs from the motif library. Backstitch is an
older-style, adaptable stitch which can be used for
delicate outlines. Stemstitch is thicker and can be
used to mimic hand-sewn embroidery.
Tip EmbroideryStudio also provides tools for
quickly creating outlines and filled areas based on
existing boundaries. See also Creating outlines and
filling holes.
This section described techniques for creating
outlines such as simple and motif runs, as well as decorative outlines.
Creating outlines and details

Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Run to place a row of single run stitches
along a digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Triple Run to place a triple row of run stitches
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to place a row of motifs along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Backstitch to place a row of backstitches
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Stemstitch to place a row of stemstitches
The Outline Tools Flyout contains tools which for creating outline stitching of
varying thicknesses and styles. These tools place a row of run stitches along a
digitized line. They are typically used to add outlines and pickout runs to
designs. They can also be used for decorative effect.
Length
1
Run
Triple Run
2
3
128
To create outlines
1 Choose an input tool:
Use Run to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized line. See Creating
simple runs for details.
Use Triple Run to place a triple row of run stitches along a digitized line. See
Creating simple runs for details.
Use Motif Run to place a row of motifs along a digitized line. See Motif Runs &
Fills for details.
Use Backstitch to place a row of backstitches along a digitized line. See
Creating decorative outlines for details.
Use Stemstitch to place a row of stemstitches along a digitized line. See
Creating decorative outlines for details.
2 Digitize a line by marking points:
Left-click for corner points.

Right-click for curve points.
1
14
Click for
corner points
8
2
13
9
Right-click for
curve points
12
10
11
To constrain the line to 15 increments, hold down Ctrl as you digitize. This
is useful for digitizing straight lines.
For a perfect circular arc, mark three points with a right-click.
Where curves connect either to a straight line or another curve click to
mark the connection point.
Connect corners and
curves with a corner point
90 60
curve
point
1
curve
point
45
30
3
curve
point
180
270
Hold down Ctrl to

constrain the line to
15 increments
3 Press Enter to finish digitizing the line.
Graphics in the Universal toolbar. See Displaying graphics and embroidery
for details.
129
Note If you decide to close the object, use the Arrange > Close Object >
... command with the option of using straight or curved points.
Open object
Close object Curve Line
Close object Straight Line
Creating simple runs

Use the Run and Triple Run tools to digitize lines of simple run stitching. You
can adjust stitch length, chord gap and number of stitch repetitions (Triple Run
only) via the object properties. See also Modifying current settings.
Graphics in the Universal toolbar. See Displaying graphics and embroidery for
details.
Digitizing simple runs

Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Run to place a row of single run stitches
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Triple Run to place a triple row of run stitches
Use the Run tool to digitize lines of Run stitching. Left and right mouse clicks
create reference points corner points and curve points respectively.
Tip EmbroideryStudio lets you convert between Run and Input C objects. See
Converting between embroidery objects for details.
C hapter 5 Digitizing Outlines & Details
130
To digitize a simple run

1 Select a Run tool and digitize a line by marking points. See Creating outlines
and details for details.
2 Press Enter to finish the line.
Tip Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines while specifying the
direction of the stitching. See Reinforcing outlines for details.
Setting run stitch length

Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Run to adjust settings for new or
selected objects.
Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Triple Run to adjust settings for new
or selected objects.
For both Run and Triple Run stitches, set the stitch length to suit the digitized
shape. Where the object has tight curves, select a shorter stitch length. To
reduce the stitch count for flatter curves, increase the stitch length.
Note These values only apply to objects created with the Run or Triple Run
tools. They do not affect travel runs, or underlay stitching.
To set run stitch length
1 Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon.
131
The Object Properties > Outlines dialog opens.
Select stitch type
Adjust stitch length
2 Select a stitch type from the list.

3 Enter a stitch length in the Length field.
Run length
Run length
Stitches follow the curve

more closely
Not enough stitches to

follow tight curve
If a line has tight, sharp curves, reduce the length, for example to 1.8 mm,
so that the stitches follow the line. Alternatively, activate Variable Run
Length. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details.
Tip Mimic hand-made embroidery by setting the Triple Run length to 4.0 mm.
Setting variable run stitch lengths

Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Run to adjust settings for new or
selected objects.
Automatically shorten stitches to follow tight curves with the Variable Run
Length option.
To set variable stitch lengths
1 Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon.
Select variable run length
Adjust variable run length

values
132
2 Select the Variable Run Length checkbox.

3 In the Min Len field, enter the minimum stitch length to allow.
4 In the Chord Gap field, enter the maximum distance to allow between the
digitized outline and the stitches. When this value is exceeded the stitch
length is reduced to follow the outline more closely.
Chord
gap
Run
length
Fixed Run Length
Variable Run Length:

2 mm
Variable Run Length:

0.07 mm (default)
Note Stitches will not be reduced to less than the specified minimum length,
even if the chord gap value is exceeded.
Setting Triple Run stitch count

By default, Triple Run repeats each stitch three times.
You can change the number of repetitions by adjusting
the Run Count value.
Tip Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines
while specifying the direction of the stitching. See
Reinforcing outlines for details.
To set Triple Run stitch count
1 Right-click the Triple Run icon.
133
Select stitch type
Select # repetitions
2 Select Triple Run from the list.

3 Enter the number of repetitions in the Run Count field.
Creating motif runs

Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to create a string of motifs along a
digitized line.
Use the Motif Run tool to create a string of motifs along a digitized line. Create
decorative outlines using any motif from the motif library. You can modify the
rotation angle, orientation and scale, and vary the space between motifs. See
also Motif Runs & Fills.
Tip You can also apply Motif Run to other selected run objects such as Run,
Stemstitch, etc. See Converting between embroidery objects for details.
To create a motif run
1 Click the Motif Run icon.
2 Digitize the line along which you want the motif to appear by entering
reference points. See Creating outlines and details for details.
3 When you have finished, press Enter.
134
An outline of the current motif attaches to your cursor.
Resize motif
outline to scale
To use the original size and orientation of the motif press Enter.
To scale the motif, move the pointer until the motif is the required size,
click, then press Enter.
To mirror the motif, right-click then press Enter.
Creating decorative outlines

For thicker, decorative lines, use Backstitch or Stemstitch tools. Backstitch is
an older-style, adaptable stitch which can be used for delicate outlines. This
stitch follows intricate curves well. Stemstitch is thicker and can be used to
mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other
decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills.
Tip EmbroideryStudio lets you convert between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run,
Backstitch, Stemstitch and Input C objects. See Converting between embroidery
135
Adjusting Backstitch settings

Adjust Backstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify the
exact stitch length, chord gap, thickness and overlap values as well as the
number of strokes.
To set Backstitch settings

1 Right-click the Backstitch icon.
The Object Properties > Outlines > Backstitch dialog opens.
Adjust backstitch values
2 Enter minimum and maximum run lengths in the Length and Min Length
fields.
Run Length: 1.5 mm
Run Length: 2.5 mm
Run Length: 4.5 mm
3 Adjust the Chord Gap setting as required. See Setting variable run stitch
lengths for details.
4 Adjust stitch thickness in the Thickness field.
136
Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker stitches.
Stitch Thickness: 0.30 mm
5 Adjust the backstitch overlap percentage in the Overlap field.
Overlap: 10%
Overlap: 50%
Overlap: 90%
6 Select the number of strokes 3 or 5.

Strokes: 3
Strokes: 5
8 Digitize Backstitch outlines as you would a Run stitch outline. See Creating
Adjusting Stemstitch settings

Adjust Stemstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify the
exact stitch and line thickness, spacing and overlap values as well as the number
of strokes.
To adjust Stemstitch settings

1 Right-click the Stemstitch icon.
137
The Object Properties > Outlines > Stemstitch dialog opens.
Adjust stemstitch values
Select type and adjust thickness
2 Adjust the line thickness in the Thickness field.
Line Thickness: 1.0 mm
Line Thickness: 1.5 mm
3 Adjust stitch spacing in the Spacing field.
Spacing: 1.2 m
Spacing: 0.8 mm
4 Enter a stitch angle in the Angle field.
Angle: 90
Angle: 45
5 Select either Single or Triple.
Type: Triple
Type: Single
Note For Triple only, you can also adjust stitch thickness in the Stitch
Thickness field. Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker
stitches.
138
7 Digitize Stemstitch outlines as you would a Run stitch outline. See Creating
139
Chapter 6
Embroidery Fills
All embroidery objects in EmbroideryStudio contain defining settings or

properties. Some properties, such as size and position, are common to all
objects, while others are specific to object type.
The most important property of all embroidery objects is stitch type. The
software uses object outlines and the associated stitch type to generate stitches.
Whenever you reshape, transform or scale an object, stitches are regenerated
according to stitch type and other settings.
This section explains how to select stitch types for your various fills, including
how to create Satin fills, Tatami, Motif, and Contour fills, and how to adjust stitch
settings for best results. It also describes how to create Zigzag and E Stitch fills
and borders.
Selecting stitch types

Use Stitch Types > Satin for narrow columns and shapes.
Use Stitch Types > Tatami for large, irregular shapes.
Use Stitch Types > Zigzag for long, narrow columns of slanted, side-by-side
stitches in a zigzag pattern.
Use Stitch Types > E Stitch for a comb effect with long, narrow columns.
Use Stitch Types > Motif Fill to apply Motif Fill to objects using current settings.
Right-click to change settings.
Use Stitch Types > Contour to create curved fills where stitches follow the contours
of the shape. Right-click to change settings.
Stitch types divide broadly into two categories outlines and fills. Different
stitch types are suited to different shapes. When you digitize an embroidery
object, it uses the currently selected stitch type. However, you can change stitch
types at any stage. Satin fills are generally suited to columns and borders.
140
Tatami stitch is used to fill larger shapes with solid fields of stitching. Both Zigzag
and E Stitch are used as outline stitches. Zigzag is frequently used for tacking
down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover stitch. Both can also be used
for decorative effect.
Note Run stitch is considered both a digitizing method and a stitch type. See
Digitizing Outlines & Details for details.
To select a stitch type
1 Select the digitizing method you want to use e.g. Input C. See Embroidery
digitizing methods for details.
2 Select an available stitch type:
Use Satin for narrow columns and shapes. See Creating Satin fills for details.
Use Tatami for large, irregular shapes. See Creating Tatami fills for details.
Use Zigzag for long, narrow columns of slanted, side-by-side stitches in a
zigzag pattern. See Creating Zigzag borders for details.
Use E Stitch for a comb effect with long, narrow columns. See Creating E
Stitch borders for details.
Use Motif Fill to apply Motif Fill to objects using current settings. Right-click to
change settings. See Creating Motif fills for details.
Use Contour to create curved fills where stitches follow the contours of the
shape. See Creating Contour fills for details.
3 Create the embroidery object.
Alternatively, select a suitable existing embroidery object and select an

available stitch type for that object.
The new stitch type is applied to the object.
141
Creating Satin fills

Satin stitch is well-suited to stitching narrow columns and shapes, where the
length of each stitch forms the width of the column. Satin stitches are almost
parallel, with every second stitch slightly slanted. Because there are generally
no needle penetrations breaking up the fill, Satin stitch creates a glossy,
high-quality effect. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.
If a column is too wide, stitches may be loose and not cover the fabric properly.
Conversely, in very narrow columns, stitch density may be too high and needle
penetrations damage the fabric. Adjust stitch density by setting a fixed spacing
value, or let Auto Spacing calculate spacings for you wherever columns change
width.
Tip The Auto Split and Auto Jump features help you to control long Satin
stitches. See Optimizing long Satin stitches for details.
Applying Satin stitch with auto-spacing

Use Stitch Types > Satin to apply Satin stitch to new or selected narrow columns
and shapes. Right-click to adjust Satin settings.
Stitch spacing is the distance in millimeters between two needle penetrations on
the same side of a column. Where a column is narrow, stitches are tight, thus
requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric. Too many needle penetrations can
damage the fabric. The Auto Spacing option automatically adjusts stitch
spacing according to column width. For columns of varying width, Auto Spacing
automatically adjusts the stitch spacing wherever the column changes width.
Note Thread thickness values are added to or subtracted from values used in
the Auto Spacing table for specific stitch lengths. See also Adding details to
thread charts.
To apply Satin stitch with auto-spacing
2 Click the Satin stitch icon.
Chapter 6 Embroid er y Fills
142
Alternatively, select a suitable existing embroidery object and click the Satin
stitch icon.
4 Right-click the Satin icon.

The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens.
Select Auto Spacing

Adjust density
percentage
5 If Auto Spacing checkbox is not selected by default according to current

fabric settings, click the checkbox.
6 Adjust Stitch Density as required.
>100% fewer stitches
100% no adjustment
<100% more stitches
Density is given as a percentage of the preset values:
To decrease stitch density, increase the percentage e.g. to 110-115%.

To increase stitch density, decrease the percentage e.g. to 90-85%.
Tip 75% generally produces high quality embroidery. An increased stitch
count means the design will take longer and be more expensive to stitch.
Note For even more precise results, you can adjust Auto Spacing settings.
See Adjusting auto-spacing settings for details.
Applying Satin stitch with fixed spacing

Right-click Stitch Types > Satin to adjust Satin spacing.
In EmbroideryStudio, the Auto Spacing option is turned on by default. For
most purposes, this option avoids thread breaks and creates visually appealing
columns of Satin stitches. Sometimes, however, you may want to control the
exact spacing of Satin columns. Fixed spacing is sometimes used, for example,
143
for decorative effects e.g. very open spacing over, say, a Tatami background.
These effects cannot be achieved with Auto Spacing. You change stitch density
in Satin fills by adjusting the stitch spacing setting in the Object Properties
dialog. The larger the spacing between stitches, the lower the density. The
smaller the spacing, the higher the density.
Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between preset
styles with different spacing settings. Each button on the puck accesses the next
preset style. For example, clicking button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>.
To apply Satin stitch with fixed spacing
2 Click the Satin stitch icon.
Alternatively, select a suitable existing embroidery object and click the Satin
stitch icon.

Adjust stitch spacing

Deselect Auto Spacing
5 Deselect the Auto Spacing checkbox.

Note If Auto Spacing is selected, the Adjust field is not available. See
Applying Satin stitch with auto-spacing for details.
6 In the Adjust Spacing field, enter the fixed spacing.
To increase stitch density, enter a smaller value.
144
To reduce the density for more open stitching, enter a larger value.
Stitch Spacing 0.5 mm
Adjusting auto-spacing settings

Right-click Stitch Types > Satin to adjust Auto Spacing settings.
Adjust Auto Spacing settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify
how rapidly spacing changes, and by how much, by changing the stitch length
and spacing settings. You can also specify spacing offsets to automatically adjust
spacing for different thread types.
Tip Take a note of the default settings before you start. You will usually want to
save modified settings to a template. See Working with design templates for
details.
Spacing 2
Spacing 1
Length 2
Length 1
Auto spacing
Fixed spacing
To adjust auto-spacing settings

Select Auto Spacing

Click to adjust Auto
Spacing values
145
2 Click Values in the Auto Spacing panel.
Enter spacing
offsets for each
thread type
Adjust stitch
length values
Adjust spacing
values
3 Adjust stitch settings in the Stitch panel:

Setting
Purpose
Length
These values define the increments by which spacing is adjusted. The

smaller the distance between each length, the more rapidly stitching
changes from open to dense. Each length value must be greater than
the previous one.
Spacing
These values define the spacing corresponding to each stitch length.
Default spacing values
Custom spacing values
4 Adjust spacing offsets for different thread types.

The offset determines the compensatory amount by which stitch settings will
be adjusted for different thread thicknesses.
Thickness Description
A
Normal thread: generally uses default value, 0.01 mm.
Thicker than normal: and requires a larger offset value e.g. 0.03 mm
in order to slightly increase stitch spacing (decrease density).
Finer than normal: requires a negative value e.g. -0.03 mm to

decrease stitch spacing (increase density).
Very fine: requires an even greater negative value e.g. -0.06 mm to

decrease stitch spacing.
Note You assign the thread type in the Add Thread dialog. Stitch spacing
of the assigned thread type is automatically adjusted according to the values
set here. See Customizing thread charts for details.
5 Click OK to confirm.
146
Tip If you change your mind, click Reset to revert to the factory default
settings.
Caution If you want to restore the default settings and have not kept a
record of them, use the Revert utility in the Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0
folder to revert to factory settings. See Reverting to factory settings for
details.
Adjusting Satin stitch count

Right-click Stitch Types > Satin to adjust the Satin stitch count.
Triple Satin is often used for folk designs to
mimic handmade embroidery that uses
thicker thread. If you require thicker stitches,
set the Satin stitch to repeat itself multiple
times. You set the number of repetitions of
each stitch in the Satin Count field. Every odd
(forward) stitch of a Triple Satin column can
be stitched up to 15 times.
To adjust Satin stitch count
Enter number of
repetitions
2 Enter the number of repetitions in the Satin Count field.

Caution Using a value higher than 10 may cause thread breaks, depending
on the design, fabric, or thread tension.
Tip When you increase the Satin stitch count, you should also increase the
stitch spacing to avoid bunching of stitches and thread breaks. See Applying
Satin stitch with fixed spacing for details.
147
Creating Tatami fills

Tatami stitch consists of rows of run stitches and is suitable for filling large,
irregular shapes. Stitches are laid in rows going back and forth across the shape.
Stitch offsets in each row are used to eliminate horizontal split lines. See also
Corresponding object and stitch types.
You can control stitch density in Tatami objects by adjusting the backstitch type,
stitch length, and row spacing. With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is
offset in order to control the patterns formed by needle penetrations. See
Creating textures with Tatami offsets for details.
Setting Tatami density

Right-click Stitch Types > Tatami to adjust Tatami spacing and length.
Tatami stitch density is determined by the distance between each row of
stitches. The spacing setting is the distance between two forward rows. Specify
the optimum and minimum stitch lengths to be generated for Tatami objects.
The stitch length varies slightly in Tatami fills to ensure that small stitches are
not generated at the edges of the shape. See also Adjusting stitch densities.
Row spacing
Offset fraction
Stitch length
Row direction
Tip Sometimes row spacing is increased to create more open stitching for
backgrounds and special effects. In such instances, Auto Underlay should be
turned off. If too open, you may also find that travel runs and overlapping
segments spoil the effect. The Trapunto effect automatically moves underlying
travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen. See Creating
open stitching with trapunto for details.
To set Tatami density
1 Select the digitizing method you want to use e.g. Fusion Fill. See
148
2 Click the Tatami stitch icon.

Alternatively, select a suitable existing embroidery object and click the
Tatami stitch icon.
4 Right-click the Tatami icon.

The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens.

Adjust stitch length
5 In the Spacing field, enter a spacing value.

For increased density, enter a smaller value. For more open stitching, enter a
larger value.
Spacing: 0.4 mm
Spacing: 0.6 mm
Spacing: 0.8 mm
6 Enter a stitch length in the Length field.
Length: 4.5 mm
Length: 2 mm
Length: 1 mm
149
7 In the Min Stitch Length field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to be
generated.
Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm
Length: 4 mm
Length: 4 mm
Selecting a Tatami backstitch

Right-click Stitch Types > Tatami to select a Tatami backstitch.
Click to apply Standard backstitch.
Click to apply Borderline backstitch.
Click to apply Diagonal backstitch.
Tatami backstitch is the term used for every second row of stitches in a Tatami
fill. There are three types available Standard, Borderline, and Diagonal.
.
Minimum stitch
Stitch spacing
Connecting stitches
are adjusted
Connecting stitches
follow the boundary
Standard backstitch
The rows are approximately parallel, with every backstitch row slightly shorter
than the forward row. Because the rows are different lengths, there are fewer
small stitches at the edge of the shape, reducing possible damage to the fabric.
Standard backstitch is suitable for high density fills.
Borderline backstitch
The rows are approximately parallel. With lower density fills, borderline
backstitch creates a smooth, well-defined edge. Borderline backstitch is also
called Trapunto style. See Creating open stitching with trapunto for details.
Note Borderline backstitches may not follow the outline of the shape if the
stitch spacing is less than the minimum stitch length. Where the stitch rows are
perpendicular to the boundary, connecting stitches are adjusted to be longer
than the minimum stitch.
150
Diagonal backstitch
The backward rows are diagonal, directly connecting the forward rows. Diagonal
backstitch is suitable for turning shapes, and gives good results with Jagged
Edge. See Creating jagged or fluffy edges for details.
To select a Tatami backstitch
Select backstitch type
2 Select a backstitch type in the Backstitch panel.
Standard backstitch
Borderline backstitch
Diagonal backstitch
Creating Motif fills

Motif Fill is a decorative stitch suitable for filling large, irregular shapes. It is
generally used for backgrounds and for special effects. Motifs are repeated in
parallel rows to fill a shape. They can only be applied to Fusion Fill objects. Auto
Underlay is deactivated with this feature and stitch angle has no effect on motif
layout. Select from a wide range of motifs in the Object Properties dialog.
To create a Motif fill

1 Select the Fusion Fill tool. See Digitizing free shapes for details.
2 Click the Motif Fill stitch icon.
151
Alternatively, select a suitable existing embroidery object and click the Motif
Fill stitch icon.
Note The stitch angle has no effect on motif layout.

4 Right-click the Motif Fill icon.
The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens.
Select motif
Adjust width
and height
5 Select a motif from the motif library.
6 Adjust the width and height settings of the selected motif as required.
Width increased
Width & Height increased
Height increased
152
Tip You can generate layers of colored motifs by duplicating an object and
selecting a different color and/or motif.
Creating Contour fills

Contour is a curved fill stitch type stitches follow the contours of a shape,
creating a curved, light and shade effect. It only works on columnar shapes.
There are two types Standard and Spiral both of which can be applied to
a variety of objects. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.
Standard Contour
Standard Contour creates rows of stitches across the shape, perpendicular to
the digitized stitch angle. The number of stitch lines is constant, so the stitching
is denser where the shape is narrower, and more open where the shape is wider.
Standard Contour
Spiral Contour
Spiral Contour creates a single, continuous line of stitching that spirals around
to fill the shape. Typically, it is used for rings and borders, but it is also suitable
for other closed shapes.
Spiral Contour
Circle with Spiral Contour

created from a ring
Spiral Contour can only be used with closed shapes with two outlines such as
rings. If a shape is not properly closed, it will be filled with Standard Contour
instead. You cannot use Spiral Contour with Circle objects.
153
Tip To fill a solid shape with Spiral Contour, create a closed object with a very
small hole at the center. For example, to create a circle filled with Spiral Contour,
digitize a thick ring with a very small inner boundary.
Applying Contour stitch to filled objects

Use Stitch Types > Contour to create curved fills where stitches follow the contours
of the shape. Right-click to change settings.
Apply Contour to filled objects in the same way as other stitch types by
selecting it from the toolbar either before or after digitizing.
To apply Contour stitch to filled objects
Click the Contour icon.

Contour stitch is applied to selected objects based on the settings in the
Object Properties dialog. See Adjusting Contour stitch settings for details.
Tip When you digitize shapes with pointed ends e.g. leaves, diamonds,
stars cut the ends to prevent the stitches from bunching.
2
1
6
Input B
7
8
2
10
9
3
4
Input B
5
6
Stitch bunching at
sharp ends
8
7
Selecting Contour stitch types

Right-click Stitch Types > Contour to select Contour stitch types.
Apply Standard or Spiral Contour to new or existing objects in a design.
To select Contour stitch types
1 Right-click the Contour icon.
The Object Properties > Fills > Contour dialog opens.
Select contour type
Select backstitch type
154
2 In the Type panel, click a contour type icon:

Option
Purpose
Standard
Lays rows of stitches back and forth along the shape.
Spiral
Fills the shape with a continuous spiral of stitches.
Standard
Spiral
3 In the Backstitch panel, click a backstitch type icon:

Option
Purpose
Standard
Creates backstitch rows that are slightly shorter than the forward rows,
reducing small stitches. Suitable for high density fills.
Borderline
Creates parallel backstitch rows to give a smooth, well-defined edge.

Suitable for lower density fills.
Standard
Borderline
Note If the spacing is small, Borderline backstitch will not be applied. This is
to prevent damage to the fabric from the large number of small stitches that
are generated.
4 If required, adjust the Contour stitch settings. See Adjusting Contour stitch
settings for details.
Adjusting Contour stitch settings

Right-click Stitch Types > Contour to adjust Contour stitch settings.
Set the stitch settings for Contour fills to adjust the stitch length, spacing and
offset fraction.
To adjust Contour stitch settings
1 Right-click the Contour icon.
155
The Object Properties > Fills > Contour dialog opens.
Adjust stitch values
Adjust offset setting
Adjust variable stitch

settings
2 In the Length field, enter an approximate stitch length.

Each stitch is adjusted to distribute the stitches evenly throughout the shape.
See Setting Tatami density for details.
Stitch length:
3.6 mm
Stitch length:
1.5 mm
3 In the Spacing field, enter the maximum spacing value.

This value is used at the widest part of the shape. As the shape narrows, the
spacing decreases. See Setting Tatami density for details.
Stitch spacing:
3.0 mm
Stitch spacing:
1.5 mm
4 In the Offset Fraction field, enter the required offset value.

The offset fraction controls the pattern of needle penetrations to achieve even
distribution of stitches and prevent needle penetrations from forming
unwanted lines.
Default offset: 0.25 mm,

stitches evenly distributed
Too big offset: 1 mm,

unwanted lines
156
5 In the Vary Stitch Length panel, set the variable stitch length values, if
required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details.
Variable Length selected,

stitch values vary
Variable Length not selected,

stitch values fixed
Creating Zigzag and E Stitch fills and borders

The Stitch Types toolbar includes Zigzag and E Stitch stitch types. These can
be used both as fills, usually of a decorative nature, and borders. Zigzag is
frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover
stitch. Both can also be used for decorative effect or where fewer stitches are
required. See also Appliqu Digitizing.
Creating Zigzag borders

Click Stitch Types > Zigzag to apply Zigzag stitch to new or selected objects.
Right-click to adjust Zigzag settings.
Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle
penetrates each side of the column. But while
Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal,
Zigzag produces two diagonal lines, thereby
producing a more open stitch. See also Appliqu
Digitizing.
Tip Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitches are
frequently used as underlays. See Adjusting
Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings for
details.
To create Zigzag borders
2 Click the Zigzag stitch icon.
Zigzag stitch icon.
157
4 Right-click the Zigzag icon.

The Object Properties > Fills > Zigzag dialog opens.
5 Enter a spacing value in the Spacing field.

This determines the distance between needle penetrations on the same side
of the column.
Stitch spacing: 2.0 mm
Creating E Stitch borders

Click Stitch Types > E Stitch to apply E Stitch stitch to new or selected objects.
Right-click to adjust E Stitch settings.
E Stitch, sometimes referred to as blanket stitch,
produces long, narrow columns with a comb effect.
It is often used to stitch borders around appliqus.
The needle penetrates both sides of the column, and
then penetrates the second side again, laying the
thread along the side. E stitches are usually more
open than Satin or Zigzag stitches. See also
Appliqu Digitizing.
To create E Stitch borders
1 Select the digitizing method you want to use
e.g. Input C. See Embroidery digitizing methods for details.
2 Click the E Stitch stitch icon.
E Stitch stitch icon.
4 Right-click the E Stitch icon.
158
The Object Properties > Fills > E Stitch dialog opens.
Adjust stitch
spacing
5 Adjust the spacing value as required.

This determines the distance between each perpendicular stitch.
Stitch Spacing: 1.0 mm
6 In the Number of Runs field, enter the number of run stitches between each
E Stitch.
3 runs
1 run
E Stitch spacing
E Stitch spacing
159
Chapter 7
Threads & Colorways
When digitizing, you select thread colors for objects from the color palette. This
contains a selection of colors tailored to each design or color scheme. The
particular colorway represents the actual thread colors in which a design will be
stitched. In fact you can define multiple color schemes and switch between
them.
For each colorway you define, you can select colors from commercial thread
charts or define your own. Search for particular threads by specific code.
Automatic thread color helps you locate thread colors based on closest match
across one or several thread charts. You can also match thread colors from
imported graphics vector or bitmap.
EmbroideryStudio also lets you set the background color, fabric, or product of
the current colorway for more realistic previews and presentations. The
background is saved with the colorway.
Tip You can also print multiple colorways, design backgrounds, and icons of
color blocks in the production worksheet. See Printing reports in Embroidery
mode for details.
different colorways.
Using the color palette

When digitizing, you select thread colors for objects from the color palette. This
contains a selection of colors tailored to each design or color scheme. New
objects are digitized using the currently selected color. You can change colors
160
before or after digitizing. Color change machine functions are automatically

inserted in the stitching sequence whenever you assign a color. If the color you
want is not available, you can add it at any stage.
Selecting thread colors

Use Color Palette > Display Options (or Color Palette Editor dialog) to change
design background presets for the current colorway.
palette.
Use Color Palette > Compact Palette to remove all unused colors from palette.
When you digitize a new object, it automatically takes the color currently
selected in the Color Palette. You can change the current color at any time. You
can also change the color of any objects. If the color you want is not available
in the palette, add it to the colorway. See also Using the color palette.
Tip If the color palette itself does not appear, you need to select it from the
Toolbars dialog. See Toggling toolbars on or off for details.
To select thread colors
To set the current color, deselect all objects, and then select a color from the
palette.
This color becomes current for all new objects.
Current colorway
Current color
To change the color of an object, select it and choose a new color from the
palette.
Note While selected object/s change color, the current color does not
change.
161
To change the current colorway, select from the dropdown list. See Viewing
design colorways for details. See also Setting up colorways.
To assign threads to color slots, click the Color Palette Editor icon. See
Assigning threads to color palettes for details.
Click Compact Palette to display only those colors actually used in the
design once all colors have been assigned. See also Viewing color blocks with
the Color Palette Editor.
Palette colors compacted
Note Because needle numbering changes when a palette is compacted, the

Compact Palette function is disabled for machine formats which support
needle addressing. See Machine Formats for details.
Recoloring consecutive objects

You can change the color of consecutive objects of the same color at the same
time. Consecutive objects follow each other in the stitching sequence. See also
Selecting objects by Color-Object List.
To recolor consecutive objects
1 Select the first object in the sequence to recolor.
Blue
Blue
Green
2 Select Machine > Set Color.

The Set Color dialog opens.
Change color of
consecutive objects
Select color
Chapter 7 Th reads & Color ways
162
3 Select the All consecutive objects of the same color option.

Note If you selected more than one object, this option is not available.
4 Select a color from the list.
Only colors in the colorway are available.
5 Click OK.
Red
Red
Green
Setting up color palettes

Colorway 1. This contains default colors, unassigned to any thread chart.
EmbroideryStudio lets you assign threads from actual thread charts and set up
multiple colorways as required. You can manually match colors to your artwork
or use automatic color matching. You can edit display colors and details of your
threads at any stage.
Assigning threads to color palettes

Use Color Palette > Add Color To Palette to add a new color slot to the palette.
This can be edited by means of the Color Palette Editor.
Use Color Palette > Remove Color From Palette to remove the unused last color
slot from the palette.
palette.
Colorway 1. This contains default colors, unassigned to any thread chart. The
Color Palette Editor allows you to edit these default colors, add extra color
slots as required, assign threads from actual thread charts, as well as set up
additional colorways. See also Viewing color blocks with the Color Palette Editor.
163
To assign threads to a color palette

1 Open a design.
The default color palette displays 56 when the Color Palette is floated. The
maximum number of colors the color palette can contain is actually 128.
2 Click the Color Palette Editor icon to access the Color Palette Editor.
If no threads are currently assigned, the Color Palette Editor will appear
with nothing showing in the Available Threads task pane and a single,
default colorway displayed in the Colorways task pane.
Click to select
thread chart/s
Click to expand or
contract task
pane
Default colorway
3 Click the Thread Charts button.

The Active Thread Charts dialog opens.
Select tread
chart/s to use
4 Select the thread chart/s to use and click OK.
164
All color definitions from the selected chart/s are transferred to the Color
Palette Editor.
Click Match to match

selected color
Selected color
displayed for visual
comparision with
nearest matching
thread colors
Search color list manually

for desired colors
Click to assign
color to selected
color slot
Enter exact color

code if known
Select color to match
5 If you are using more than one colorway, select the colorway you want to
assign threads to. See Setting up colorways for details.
6 Select a color slot in the colorway list and match it to a suitable thread by one
of the following means:
Simply click the Match button at the top of the color list to find the nearest
equivalent thread color in the selected charts.
Enter an exact color code in the Find Code field.

In the color list at the right, click-and-drag the selection handle and scroll
to locate a color you want to use.
Click the arrow buttons at top or bottom of the color list to scroll through
the available selection.
Tip You can match thread colors from imported graphics vector or bitmap.
See also Matching palette colors to an image.
7 Select the desired thread color and click Assign.
The thread is assigned to the current color slot and the next slot automatically
selected.
8 Repeat for all other color slots you require.
Click Add Color To Palette or Remove Color From Palette to add or
remove color slots as required.
Tip Click Compact Palette to display only those colors actually used in the
design once all colors are assigned to objects. See also Viewing color blocks
with the Color Palette Editor.
Palette colors compacted
165
Note The Compact Palette tool is disabled for machine formats that use
needle addressing i.e. that have Color Change set as Needle No in the
Machine Format Values dialog. See also Setting color change functions.
Matching image colors to threads

You can manually match colors from an inserted bitmap or vector graphic to
thread colors in a selected chart. But the quicker way is by using automatic color
matching. See also Matching palette colors to an image.
To match image colors to threads
1 Insert a bitmap image of the required format for use as a digitizing backdrop.
See Inserting bitmap images for details.
Click to assign
color to selected
color slot
2 Right-click the image and select Match Bitmap Color from the popup menu.
All colors used in the image appear in the Match Bitmap Color dialog.
Select color
to match
Click to
assign
Matched
colors listed
Select thread
chart/s
Click to
match
166
3 Select the thread chart/s to include in the search from the Thread Charts
list.
Note To automatically match the image colors to available threads, simply
click OK. The system automatically assigns thread colors from the selected
chart/s to the current colorway.
4 To make your own color selections, first select the color to match.
5 Click Match.
The system searches for the closest match across all selected charts and
displays them in the thread color list below.
6 Select a thread and assign to the color palette by double-clicking or clicking
Assign.
7 Repeat until all the colors you intend to use in the design have been matched.
Note Each search negates the previous results.
8 Click OK.
The selected thread colors are assigned to the current colorway. If the
number of available thread colors is less than the number of colors in the
image, the system will increase the number of slots in the color palette
accordingly.
Note The maximum number of new thread colors which can be added to the
color palette from a bitmap is 128.
Editing thread colors

Use Color Palette > Color Palette Editor to modify threads in existing charts.
Use Color Palette Editor > Edit Thread to modify thread information about the
palette color currently selected in the colorway list.
You can always change the code, description, brand, thickness or display color
of existing threads by means of the Color Palette Editor. For example, in
Schiffli work, you may want to change the text labels of thread colors to Parts
A, B and C to reflect the pattern arrangements when printing. These labels
appear on the production worksheet both in the stop sequence, and in Color
Film printout which shows the different color blocks of the original design. See
also Printing reports in Embroidery mode.
To edit thread colors
1 Click the Color Palette Editor icon.
167
The Color Palette Editor dialog opens.
Click to edit
thread details
Select thread
to edit
2 If you are using more than one colorway, select the colorway you want to
assign threads to. See Setting up colorways for details.
3 Import new thread charts and reassign thread colors as desired. See
Assigning threads to color palettes for details.
4 Select the corresponding color slot and click the Edit Thread button, or
double-click the selected color slot to access the Edit Thread dialog.
Click to select
or mix color
Edit thread
details
5 Edit thread details as required. See Adding details to thread charts for details.
6 Click Mix to mix your own thread color. See Mixing thread colors for details.
Setting up colorways
EmbroideryStudio lets you define multiple color schemes, or colorways, for
the one design. Change them to preview an existing design in different colors on
different fabrics. When you start a design, Colorway 1 appears as the default
color palette. Colorways are saved automatically with the design when saving in
EMB format. Colorways cannot, however, be saved with stitch files. See also
Viewing design colorways.
Tip You can save colorways as an EMT template file for use in future designs.
See Working with design templates for details.
168
While colorways give you different color schemes for a given fabric, these have
no bearing on the fabric settings. As dark-colored threads cover light-colored
fabrics better than vice versa, different densities may be required when
changing from one colorway to another. Colorways do not automatically
compensate for different densities. These have to be adjusted manually to
compensate for light or dark fabrics. See Optimizing Stitch Quality for details.
Adding colorways
Use Color Palette > Color Palette Editor to add or edit colorways.
Use Color Palette Editor > New Colorway to access the New Colorway dialog.
Use Color Palette Editor > Delete Colorway to access the Delete Colorway dialog.
It is often difficult to imagine designs stitched out on different fabric colors and
textures, using different combinations of thread colors. When you create a new
design, it contains a single default colorway called Colorway 1. You can define
up to 100 colorways for each design.
Tip Certain other settings are included as part of the colorway definition
background color or fabric, as well as display colors for borer symbols, unsewn
stitches, selected objects, object outlines and the grid. See Viewing design
colorways for details.
To add a colorway
1 Create a new design or open an existing one.
Click to create
new colorway
Click to toggle single

or multiple colorway
display
3 Click the New Colorway icon.
169
The New Colorway dialog opens.
Red
Enter new colorway name
Purple
Select colorway to base on
4 Select a colorway to base on and enter a new colorway name.

Tip By default, the Based on Colorway field contains the current colorway.
Select from the dropdown list to change colorways. If you want to base the
new colorway on default settings, select the blank in the list.
5 Click OK.
The new colorway displays with the colorway you selected to base on.
New colorway added

based on selected
colorway
6 Assign colors from the current thread chart to selected color slots of the new
colorway as required. See Assigning threads to color palettes for details.
Tip Select a colorway in the list to view. This has the same effect as selecting
the colorway from the dropdown list on the Color Palette.
Note To delete a colorway, select it and click the Delete Colorway icon. You
are prompted to confirm the deletion.
Editing colorways
Use Color Palette Editor > Rename Colorway to access the Rename Colorway
dialog.
Use Color Palette Editor > Delete Colorway to access the Delete Colorway dialog.
170
You can modify colorways by renaming or deleting them. You can add or change
colors within colorways, or change colorway backgrounds. New colors can be
selected from any associated thread chart. Any modifications to thread colors
only affect the selected colorway. All others remain unchanged. The modified
colorway is saved with the design.
Note The default settings are stored as Colorway 1. If you change the
background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display like
this at start up. All defined colorways are saved in the template. See also
Working with design templates.
To edit colorways
With a design open, click the Color Palette Editor icon.

Click to change
colorway
background
Rename selected
colorway
Select colorway
to edit
Select the colorway you want to edit.

To edit the colorway name, click the Rename Colorway icon to access the
Rename Colorway dialog.
Red
Russet
Enter new
colorway name
To delete a colorway, select it and click the Delete Colorway icon. You are
prompted to confirm the deletion.
To modify colorway thread colors, click Color Palette Editor. See Editing
thread colors for details.
171
Optionally, click Compact Palette to display only those colors used in the
design once all colors are assigned to objects. See also Viewing color blocks
with the Color Palette Editor.
To change the colorway background, click Display Options. See Displaying

backgrounds for details.
Note Background or fabric colors and are treated as part of the colorway
rather than design window settings. In addition, display colors for Unsewn
(stitches), Selected (objects), Object Outline, Grid and Guide are part of the
colorway definition. See Viewing design colorways for details. See also
Changing display colors.
Naming color blocks

You can assign names to blocks of sequential, same-color objects, known as
elements. Element names appear on the production worksheet. The Usage
field in the Color Palette Editor shows a list of selected color blocks which
correspond to design elements. By default, the number in the stop sequence is
displayed. However, each color block can be given a descriptive name for easy
identification.
Tip You can also name design elements via the Design Properties dialog. See
Naming design elements for details.
To name color blocks
1 Use the Color Palette Editor to set up a new palette or edit an existing
colorway. See Assigning threads to color palettes for details.
Select color
slot
Click and hold to
locate selected
color
Enter descriptive
name for selected
element
2 Select a color slot and click and hold Locate to view that color block in
isolation.
172
Tip When more than one element appears in the Stop # Element list, you
can select and locate them singly or as a group.
3 To name a design element, double-click the field and key in a descriptive title
e.g. Planet.
Tip Check the naming of design elements via the File > Design Properties
> Stop Sequence tab. You can also name design elements via this dialog.
See Naming design elements for details.
Enter element
names for each
color block
Note The information on this tab may be included in total or in part on the
production worksheet. See Customizing worksheet information for details.
Splitting color blocks

palette.
Use Color Palette > Split Palette Color to create a new color slot with the same
thread specification as the selected slot.
A color block corresponds to a color stop in the design. It may be comprised of
a single object or group of like-objects e.g. ropes or more e.g. ropes and
birds. In one colorway you may want to assign the same thread color to all items
in the color block, while in another you may want to assign different colors. The
Split Palette Color tool makes this easy simply create a new color slot with
the same thread specification as the selected slot. This is added to the palettes
of all colorways. Selected objects are assigned to the new palette position. See
also Selectively viewing color blocks.
Note The design needs to contain at least two colorways and two objects. The
button is disabled when objects of different colors are selected.
173
To split a color block

1 With a design open, click Color Palette Editor.
The Color Palette Editor opens.
Select colorway
to edit
2 Select the colorway you want to modify.

3 Select the object/s within the color block which you want to split away and
recolor.
The Split Palette Color button is activated.
Select object/s to change
4 Click the Split Palette Color icon.
174
A new color slot of the same color is added to the palette in all colorways.
Selected objects are assigned to the new palette position.
Color block
split
New color slot added to

all colorways based on
selected color (#4)
5 Via the Color Palette Editor, assign a new thread color to the new color slot
in the selected colorway. See Assigning threads to color palettes for details.
The colors of the other colorways remain unaffected.
New color assigned

to slot in selected
colorway
175
Note By default, the new color slot is placed at the end of the color palette.
This, however, does not affect the stitching sequence.
Consecutive
blocks of same
color remain
separate
Customizing thread charts

Thread charts are lists of pre-defined thread colors. They may be based on
commercially available thread charts, or charts you define yourself. When you
create a thread chart, you are creating a store of colors to use in future use. You
may use pre-defined thread colors from existing charts or define your own. You
may also want to update existing thread charts by modifying thread details or
removing threads.
Creating new thread charts

Use Color Palette > Color Palette Editor to create new thread charts.
EmbroideryStudio lets you define your own thread charts. When you create a
thread chart, you are creating a store of colors to use in future use.
To create a new thread chart
176
Click to select
thread chart/s
Click to modify thread charts
2 Click the Thread Charts button.

The Active Thread Charts dialog opens.
3 Click Modify.
The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens displaying the current thread chart.
Click to create new chart
4 Click New.
The New Thread Chart dialog opens.
My Thread Chart
Enter new name
5 Enter a name for the chart and click OK.

You return to the Modify Thread Chart dialog. The new chart is created,
ready for you to add thread colors.
My Thread Chart
Click to add your

own threads
Click to copy
threads from
other chart
6 Click Add to add your own colors. See Adding details to thread charts for
details.
7 Click Copy From to add colors from an existing chart. See Copying colors
between charts for details.
8 Click Close to finish.
The new chart is created and ready for use.
177
Modifying existing thread charts

Use Color Palette > Color Palette Editor to modify existing charts.
Use the Modify Thread Chart dialog to rename existing thread charts and
remove them entirely from the system. Select names that will help you
remember the charts you need or to help you sort frequently-used charts to the
top of the list.
Caution Be careful when deleting thread charts. If you delete the wrong chart
you will need to reinstall EmbroideryStudio to restore it.
To modify an existing thread chart
1 Open the Active Thread Charts dialog. See Creating new thread charts for
details.
Select
thread chart
Click to modify
selected thread chart
2 Click Modify.
My Thread Chart
Click to rename
Click to delete
3 From the Name list, select the chart to modify.

4 Click Delete to remove the entire chart.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
5 Click Rename to change names.
The Rename Thread Chart dialog opens.
My Thread Chart
My New Thread Chart
Enter new thread

chart name
6 Enter the new name for the thread chart and click OK.
Modifying threads in charts

178
Remove obsolete thread colors from a thread chart using the Modify Thread
Chart dialog. Change the code, description, brand, thickness or display color of
existing threads.
To modify threads in charts
1 Open the Active Thread Charts dialog. See Creating new thread charts for
details.
2 Select the required thread chart and click Modify.
Select
thread chart
Select color
to modify
Click to remove
selected thread color
Click to edit selected
thread details
Click to remove ALL
colors from chart
3 From the Name list, select the chart to modify.

4 In the Threads list, select the thread to modify.
5 Click Remove to remove the selected thread from the chart.
Tip To delete all the threads from the thread chart, click Clear All.
6 Click Edit to change thread details.
The Edit Thread dialog opens.
Click to select
or mix color
Edit thread
details
7 Edit thread details as required. See Adding details to thread charts for details.
8 Click OK.
Copying colors between charts

You can copy colors between different thread charts to create your own charts
from existing colors.
179
To copy colors between charts

1 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts for
details.
Click to create
new chart
Select
existing chart
Click to copy
threads from
other charts
2 Create a new chart or open an existing one from the Name list.
3 Click Copy From.
The Copy From dialog opens.
Select
thread chart
Select color
to copy
4 Select the source thread chart from the Name list.

5 Select the color/s you want to copy.
Tip Use Ctrl or Shift keys to copy a group or range of colors.
6 Click OK.
All colors are copied to the new thread chart.
Adding details to thread charts

You can add colors to thread charts using colors from other charts or colors you
mix yourself. You can also set the code, description, brand, and thickness of
existing threads.
180
To add details to a thread chart

1 Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts for
details.
Click to create
new chart
Select
existing chart
Click to add
own colors to
thread chart
2 Create a new chart or open an existing one from the Name list.
3 Click Add to add your own colors.
The Add Thread dialog opens.
Click to select
or mix color
Enter thread
details
1234
My Brand
Deep Purple
Select thread
thickness
4 Enter code, brand, and description details for the new thread color.
Code is the identification number of a thread color in a brand.
5 Select the appropriate thread thickness.
These values are added to or subtracted from values used in the Auto Spacing
table for specific stitch lengths. See also Applying Satin stitch with
auto-spacing.
Thickness Description
Default
Normal embroidery thread (approx. denier 40)
0.01
Thicker than normal (approx. denier 30)
0.03
Finer than normal (approx. denier 80)
-0.03
Very fine (approx. denier 100)
-0.06
Tip Lighter weight threads do not run so well in a production environment as

the machines need to be slowed down in order to avoid thread breaks.
However, lighter weight threads are good for very small lettering and
fine-detail designs.
6 Click More Colors in the dropdown menu to see more colors or to mix your
own thread color. See Mixing thread colors for details.
7 Click OK.
The new color appears in the Threads list.
181
Mixing thread colors

You can change the color that displays for a particular thread, or create new
thread colors using the Colors dialog.
To mix thread colors
1 Add your own colors to a thread chart or modify threads in an existing chart.
See Adding details to thread charts or Modifying threads in charts for details.
2 Click More Colors in the dropdown menu.
you are using.
Click an area to
select color

brightness

known
3 Select from the standard (pre-defined) colors or mix your own.

4 From the Basic colors palette, select a color that approximates the one you
require.
5 To further refine your color choice, drag the crosshairs on the color spectrum.
6 To adjust color brightness, drag the arrow on the slider bar.
7 Alternatively, set the exact HLS or RGB values you require.
8 Click OK.
182
Customizing backgrounds
EmbroideryStudio lets you set the background color, fabric, or product of the
current colorway for more realistic previews and presentations. The background
is saved with the colorway. See also Displaying backgrounds.
Note While you can change background colors, fabrics, and even products to
suit the garment you will be stitching out on, this does not automatically affect
the current fabric settings. Fabrics are a critical element of designs and are
controlled separately from template values. See Working with fabrics for details.
Presetting backgrounds
EmbroideryStudio lets you set the background color of the current colorway for
more realistic previews and presentations. The background color is saved with
the colorway.
Note Default settings are stored in the template as Colorway 1. If you change
the background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display
like this at start up. See also Setting up colorways.
To preset the background
Open the design.
Click the Display Options icon.
183
The Display Options dialog opens for the selected colorway.
Preset background
color
Click link to select

from greater range
Use the dropdown color menu to preset the background color for the current
colorway.
Click More Colors to select from a greater range.

To select a background fabric for the current colorway, tick Show
Background Image and the Fabric option.
Activate
background image
Choose desired
fabric
Choose fabric
color
184
Click the Fabric droplist for a swatch of fabrics to choose from.
Select background
fabric and color as
desired
To choose from an assortment of custom swatches, or if you have suitable

images of your own fabric swatches, tick Custom and use the Browse button
to locate the one you want to use.
Textured backgrounds can be imported into EmbroideryStudio. Almost any
artwork can be used photos, magazine pictures, clipart images, and even
fabric samples. See also Scanning artwork into EmbroideryStudio.
Tick Custom to
choose your own
fabric swatch
Click Browse to locate

custom fabric swatch
185
Note The Fabric option is aware of the Auto-Style fabric selection.

Consequently, the Browse button takes you to an assortment of swatches
relevant to your current fabric selection. See also Working with fabrics.
To choose from an assortment of product templates, click the Product

droplist for a library of products to choose from. See Visualizing products for
details.
Click OK.
Note The background is saved with the colorway. See also Setting up
colorways.
Visualizing products
Use Standard > Zoom to Product to view the entire product in the design window.
EmbroideryStudio lets you to choose a garment or product template on which
to position your decoration in order to display location, size and overall
appearance for visualization of concepts and approval purposes. The Product
feature provides a library of garments of common brands and styles included in
the default DecoNetwork product library. Set colors, including multi-color
garments, for each product type. Even use different product images for different
colorways within the same design. Production worksheets provide an option to
186
print approval sheets with or without garment template and description. See
also Printing reports in Embroidery mode.
Tip If you are also an owner of a DecoNetwork store, you will be able to pull
down garment templates (additional to the ones included in the software) when
logged into your online store.
To visualize a product
Open the design and select the desired colorway (if available) from the Color
Palette droplist. See also Viewing design colorways.
Choose desired
colorway
Click the Display Options icon.

The Display Options dialog opens for the selected colorway.
To select a product, tick Show Background Image and Product.
187
With the Product option selected, the product dropdown list, the Scale
control (default 100%), and the product color control (default white) are
enabled.
Select background
product and color as
desired
Choose product and color from the dropdown menus. For custom product
images, click Browse.
Scale product image

as required
If a two- or three-layer
product image is selected,
customize colors for each
layer
If need be, scale the product size up or down to suit your design size (rather
than vice versa).
Scale should be adjusted according to the size of garment to be produced
i.e. XS,S,M,L,XL,XXL. For example, for a small size garment, scale down to
approximately 70%. Rule of thumb: L = 100%.
Click OK.
The product image is centered in the design window at the selected scale. It
will not move regardless of where stitched objects are placed. Meanwhile, the
opened Current Colorway droplist will show the product image/s, if any,
together with associated background color/s.
188
To toggle the product background on/off, click the split arrow next to the
Display Options icon and choose Show Background Image.
Toggle product
template on/off
Select product
color
If a two- or three-layer product image is displayed in the design window, the

Product Layer 2/3 Color menu item/s and submenus are available.
Choose colors for

each layer
Note The Show Background Image toggle menu item is always available
in the Display Options droplist. This allows you to toggle on or off any
currently selected fabric, product, or custom background image.
Changing display colors

display colors for the current colorway.
In addition to background color or fabric, display colors for borer holes, unsewn
and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part of the colorway definition.
189
You may want to change them if the default display color is not visible against
the current colorway background.
Cyan outline against burgundy

background
Black outline against blue

background
To change display colors

1 Select a colorway and click the Display Options icon.
The Display dialog opens for the selected colorway.
Select item to
change
Choose color
2 Select an item from the Selection list:

Display item
Description
Selected
Selected objects or stitches.
Unsewn
Unsewn stitches as they appear when traveling through the design.
Object Outline Object outlines as they appear when Show Outlines is activated. See
Viewing outlines and stitches for details.
Grid
Depending on the colorway, you may need to adjust grid display colors
in order to view them against the background color. See also
Displaying grids, rulers and guides.
Guides
Depending on the colorway, you may need to adjust guide display

colors in order to view them against the background color. See also
Displaying grids, rulers and guides.
Borer
Borer points. These are machine functions which only appear when
Show Functions is activated. See Viewing needle points, connectors
and functions for details.
3 Select a suitable color for the current colorway from the popout color menu.
190
Color controls on the dialog all behave the same way. Clicking a control brings
up a menu of standard colors and a More Colors link. Clicking the link brings
up a color picker dialog as shown.
Choose or mix
color for display
colors
4 Click More Colors in the dropdown menu to select or mix a new display color.
5 Click OK to close the Display Opition dialog.
191
Chapter 8
Properties, Fabrics, Styles & Templates
Every object you create in EmbroideryStudio has a unique set of properties

that are stored with it whenever you save the design. These properties define
general characteristics such as size and position, as well as embroidery-specific
characteristics such as stitch type and density. The stitch properties determine
how stitches will be regenerated when you reshape, transform or scale the
object.
Base properties or defaults are stored with the design template and form the
basis of all new designs. These may be overridden by fabric settings which are
adjusted to suit different fabric types. These in turn may be overridden by
individual property settings.
Default properties
Default or starting property settings are the ones stored with the design
template and/or selected fabric (if activated). These are automatically applied
to any newly created objects in the design.
Current properties
Current property settings override defaults. Unless you deliberately change
them, however, they take default values. You generally change them to save
time when digitizing. For example, you may preset Tatami stitch spacing to use
a specific density for all new Tatami objects you create.
Note When you close a design, current settings are not automatically saved to
the template. You can save them as the new default settings of the current
template or to another template altogether. Or you may be able to save them as
a custom fabric.
Object properties
Each object has its own unique set of properties. You can set properties of a
selected object to be current properties. You can also apply current property
settings to existing objects.
192
Fabric settings
Matching object properties to the intended fabric is critical for good quality
designs. Fabric settings are a subset of settings stored in the template which are
fine-tuned to different fabric types. Although the NORMAL template settings are
suitable for a range of fabrics, selecting a matching fabric automatically
customizes object properties to the intended fabric.
Styles
A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save
any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings
to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an
object, style settings replace current properties. Any properties not specified by
the style, retain their current settings.
Templates
Templates are special files used to store styles, default properties, as well as
default fabric settings. Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design
types to save time re-adjusting current property settings.
This section explains how to change property settings in a design, as well as how
to apply and adjust fabric settings. It also explains how to create and maintain
styles and templates in EmbroideryStudio.
Working with object properties

Properties of embroidery objects include general characteristics such as size and
position together with embroidery-specific ones such as stitch type and density.
The particular stitch settings determine how stitches will be regenerated when
you reshape, transform or scale an object. When you start a new design,
EmbroideryStudio uses the default settings associated with the chosen fabric
(if activated). Other default property settings are stored with the design
template. You can override most settings on an object-by-object basis. For this
reason, EmbroideryStudio distinguishes three sets of object properties
default, actual and current.
Properties Description
Default
Default properties are those values stored with the fabric and/or template and
become the initial settings used when creating new objects in a design. You
can, however, change an objects properties at any time without affecting
those of any other object.
Actual
Actual object properties are those settings stored with each object in the
design. These may or may not be the same as the defaults.
Current
You can also define current settings to influence all the objects you create in
the current design. Simply change property settings in the Object Properties
dialog with no objects selected. These settings then apply to all new objects.
You can even save these settings to the current template as the new default
property settings. Alternatively, you can make a selected objects actual
properties current for all new objects. You can also apply current settings to
existing objects.
Tip You can save any combination of settings to custom styles. See Working
with styles for details.
193
Modifying current settings

Use View > Object Properties to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off. Use it
to set properties for the current design.
Whenever you change current property settings, these automatically apply to
any new objects you create. If you know which settings you require before
digitizing, you can preset them.
Note Some properties, such as Auto Underlay, are applied by means of
toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools settings are current.
To modify current settings
1 With no objects selected, click the Object Properties icon.
The Object Properties dialog opens. Tabs providing access to all possible
object property settings appear at the top of the Object Properties dialog.
Click to close
Select stitch type
Modify settings as
required
Click to save modified settings

to the current template
Click to access
another set of tabs
2 Select a tab to view current settings.

3 Select an item from the dropdown list e.g. Special > Appliqu to access
the object properties you want to adjust.
C hapter 8 Proper ti es, Fabrics, Styles & Templates
194
4 Use dropdown lists, radio buttons and checkboxes to choose options. Adjust
settings by keying in precise values or by using the popup slider control.
Radio buttons are

mutually exclusive
After clicking
swivel button, drag
popup slider to set
Click swivel button

to invoke slider
control
Tip The slider control has two operating modes Normal and Accelerated.
Holding down the Ctrl key puts it in Accelerated mode.
5 Click the FX button to access a further set of tabs and modify settings as
required.
Modified settings are current for all newly created objects. You can apply
them to existing objects by means of the Make Properties Current tool.
See Making selected properties current for details.
Changing object properties

You can change an objects properties at any time without affecting those of any
other object not currently selected. Some properties can be modified on screen
for example, you can change size by scaling an object with selection handles.
Other properties, such as stitch spacing or length, are modified via the Object
Properties dialog. If you select more than one object, the Object Properties
dialog only displays a panel that includes settings relevant to all selected
objects. For example, if you select a Complex Fill object together with an Input C
object, neither of these tabs will display as the settings do not apply to both. If
selected objects have different values for the same setting e.g. stitch length
the field will be blank. If you enter a new value, it applies to all selected objects.
195
To change object properties

1 Select the object/s whose properties you want to change.
2 Use any of the interactive technique for arranging, scaling and transforming
selected object/s. See Arranging, Scaling & Transforming Objects for details.
3 Use any of the interactive technique for reshaping the selected object/s. See
Reshaping & Converting Objects for details.
Tip Some properties, such as Auto Underlay, are applied by means of
toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools settings are current.
4 Adjust general object properties width, height, position by means of the
Property Bar. Changes to the values are applied by pressing Enter on the
keyboard. They are discarded when you press Esc or clicks anywhere outside
the fields.
Adjust general properties
and press Enter
196
5 Open the Object Properties dialog corresponding to a selected object. See

Accessing object properties for details.
Click to close
Dropdown list
Modify settings as
required
Click to access
another set of tabs

6 Select a tab and item from the dropdown list e.g. Special > Appliqu to
access the object properties you want to adjust. See also Modifying current
settings.
7 Click the FX button to access a further set of tabs.
8 Press Enter to apply changes to the selected object/s.
Note Changing the properties of existing objects does not affect the default
settings, nor the properties of objects not currently selected. See also Making
selected properties current.
Making selected properties current

Click Styles > Make Properties Current to make the properties of a selected object
current for the design.
Use Styles > Apply Current Properties to apply current settings to selected objects.
197
When you change the current property settings, these apply to all new objects
you create but not automatically to any existing objects. However, you can make
a selected objects actual properties current for all new objects or apply them
to existing objects.
Note Only settings applicable to a selected object change. Other settings retain
their current values. For example, if you make the properties of a selected
Input C object current, settings specific to Complex Fill will not change.
To make selected properties current
1 Select the object on which you want to base current properties.
2 Click the Make Properties Current icon.
The properties of the selected object become the current ones. You can now
create new objects with these settings or apply them to existing objects.
Tip To check that the now current settings are as you intended, open the
Object Properties dialog.
To apply current settings to existing objects
1 Select the object (or objects) whose properties you want to change.
2 Click the Apply Current Properties icon.
Alternatively, right-click a selected object and copy its properties using the
Make Properties Current command in the popup menu. Paste the
properties to another selected object via the Apply Current Properties
command.
Copy and paste object

properties from one
object to another using
these commands
198
The current values are immediately updated.
Changing default properties

to set change default property settings for the current template.
You can change default property settings at any time by saving the current
settings in the Object Properties dialog to the current template. If the settings
you are saving are based on a selected object, only these values are updated in
the template.
Note All changes affect any new designs created using this template. If you only
want the changes to apply to the design you are working in, change the current
not the default properties. See Modifying current settings for details.
To change default properties
1 With or without any objects selected, click the Object Properties icon.
The Object Properties dialog opens.
Click to close
Dropdown list
Modify settings as
required
Click to access
another set of tabs

199
2 Select the tab you want and change the settings as required.
3 Click Save.
The object properties are saved to the current template. These will apply to
any new objects in any design based on this template.
Tip You may wish to save your modified property settings to a custom
template for specialized purposes. See Working with design templates for
details.
Working with fabrics

Embroidery stitches pull fabric inward where the needle penetrates. This can
cause fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery. For an object to
sew out correctly, it must have correct stitch spacing, sufficient pull
compensation together with a suitable underlay for the combination of cover
stitch type, object type, object shape and fabric. EmbroideryStudio provides a
set of customized fabric settings so that the software will take into account the
type of fabric you are stitching on.
Fabrics are a critical element of designs and are controlled separately from
template values. Fabric settings are fewer in number than those contained in
templates. Templates set global values for designs but each design requires its
own fabric settings which are saved with the design.
Note Because fabrics are not part of the template, when you create a new
design and possibly change templates, Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 uses
the current fabric. You can continue to use that fabric, change it immediately or
change it later. See also Working with design templates.
Changing fabrics
EmbroideryStudio provides a set of optimized fabric settings so that the
software will take into account the type of fabric you are stitching on. Normally
you choose a fabric when you first set up a design although you can change
fabric settings at any stage. Choose from a set of pre-defined fabrics aimed at
minimizing stitching defects when designs are sewn out. These make any
necessary changes to object properties such as stitch spacing and pull
compensation. Changed settings affect all object types other than motif fills,
appliqu, and run stitches. Where properties are different to fabric defaults,
these are not cancelled by the new settings but are adjusted intelligently in
accordance with the new fabric. Some properties can be manually adjusted. See
also Working with styles. See also Working with fabrics.
200
Note While colorways allow you to set up different colors for a given fabric,
these have no bearing on fabric settings. Conversely, if you change fabrics, all
colorways are updated to include the new fabric. See also Setting up colorways.
To change fabrics
1 Select Edit > Auto-Fabric Assistant.
The Auto-Fabric Assistant dialog opens.
Deactivate
Auto-Fabrics as
required
Choose a
fabric type
Tip When the Use Auto-Fabric checkbox is unticked, the Fabric panel is
disabled and the Required Stabilizer panel does not show any values for
topping or backing.
intend to work with. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.
3 Click OK.
Pre-defined settings for the selected fabric will apply to all newly created
objects in the design. They are also intelligently applied to all embroidery
objects already in the design. The selected fabric is displayed in the Status
bar.
Note Changing the current Auto-Fabric will affect all colorways in the design.
Managing fabrics
In addition to pre-defined fabric settings, you can create your own custom fabric
settings to suit particular needs. You can also modify, rename or delete any
custom fabrics you create.
To define a new fabric
1 Select Edit > Manage Auto-Fabrics.
201
The Manage Auto-Fabrics dialog opens.
Create new
fabric type
Note If you already have custom fabrics defined, you have the option of
editing, renaming, or deleting.
2 To create a new fabric type, click New.
The New Fabric dialog opens.
Enter fabric
name
Custom Pure Cotton
Pure Cotton
3 Change the Based on Fabric setting as required.

4 Enter a descriptive name for the fabric type in the New Fabric Name field.
To set tatami/program split object values
1 Click OK.
The Fabric Settings dialog opens. This dialog allows you to set the fabric
values for four object groups Tatami/Program Split, Wide Satin, Narrow
Satin, and Lettering as well as enter details of any recommended
stabilizers.
Adjust Tatami/Prog
Split values for new
fabric
2 Adjust the Stitch Length and Stitch Spacing settings for your Tatami /
Program Split Fill objects as required:
Tatami stitch consists of rows of run stitches and is suitable for filling large,
irregular shapes. See Creating Tatami fills for details.
202
Program Split is a decorative stitch type. Use it to fill wide and large areas
with unique artistic effects while keeping the appearance of a solid field of
stitching. See Creating textures with Program Split for details.
3 Set a suitable underlay type for Tatami/Program Split objects. See Stabilizing
with automatic underlays for details.
4 Set a pull compensation allowance for these objects. See Compensating for
fabric stretch for details.
Fabric: Denim
Pull Comp: Low
Fabric: Silk
Pull Comp: Medium
Fabric: Terry Toweling

Pull Comp: High
To set satin object values

1 Click the tab to access the Wide Satin settings.
These settings will become the defaults for larger Satin objects.
Adjust Wide Satin

values for new
fabric
2 Adjust the Wide Satin settings as you did for Weave / Embossed Fill objects.
See Creating Satin fills for details.
Note Instead of Stitch Length and Stitch Spacing settings, you have a
single density setting which is controlled by a slider bar.
203
3 Click the tab to access the Narrow Satin settings and adjust as you did for
Wide Satin objects. See Creating Satin fills for details.
Adjust Narrow Satin

values for new
fabric
To set lettering object values

1 Click the tab to access the Lettering settings.
Adjust Lettering
values for new
fabric
2 Adjust settings as you did for Satin objects. See Setting lettering stitch types
for details.
To set stabilizer settings
1 Click the tab to access the Stabilizer settings.
Adjust stabilizer
values for new
fabric
2 Key in one or more recommended stabilizer(s) in the Required Stabilizer

field, together with a description or any other relevant information on the
204
stabilizer for the custom fabric. This information will be displayed in the
Choose Fabric dialog. See Changing fabrics for details.
3 Click OK.
Applying fabric settings to selected objects

Use the Apply Fabric Settings command to apply fabric settings to selected
objects in order to return them to default values. This may be necessary if you
are not sure what values are currently applied to a certain object or objects.
To apply fabric settings to selected objects
1 Select the object to which you want to apply settings.
2 Select Edit > Apply Fabric Settings.
The Apply Fabric Settings dialog opens.
Click OK to apply
fabric settings to
selected object
intend to work with.
4 Click OK.
Pre-defined settings for the selected fabric will apply only to selected object/s
in the design. See also Working with styles.
Working with styles

A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can save
any combination of settings to your styles. This makes it easy to apply them to
selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style to an object,
the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties not specified in
the style, retain their current settings. Styles are stored with the design
template. The NORMAL template provides a selection of preset styles for you to
use. You can modify these as required and save them back to the NORMAL
template or to your own custom templates. Each template may contain specific
styles for different types of embroidery. See also Working with design templates.
205
Styles toolbar
Use the Styles toolbar to apply pre-defined styles to a design. The tools let you:
Apply current settings to selected objects

Change current settings, and
Apply styles to selected objects.
The styles you select as favorites are each assigned a tool icon on the toolbar.
Applying styles
Click Styles > Apply Style to apply a style from the template to new or selected
objects.
Use the Styles to apply favorite styles to new or selected objects.
When you select a style, the settings overwrite the current property settings.
You can apply a style to current property settings before you digitize, or to a
selected object. See also Working with object properties.
Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between preset
styles. Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style with different
spacing settings. For example, clicking Button 1 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_1>.
To apply styles
1 Click the Apply Style icon.
The Use Object Style dialog opens.
My Style
Select style
2 Select a style from the dropdown list, then click OK.
If an object is selected, the style settings are applied to it alone.

If no object is selected, the style settings become the current property
settings, and apply to any new objects you create.
Any settings that are not specified in the style will remain unchanged.
Style 1, E stitch spacing

0.75 mm

1.25 mm

1.75 mm
206
Tip To apply a favorite style, click the Favorite Style icon assigned to it. See
also Assigning favorite styles.
Defining styles
Define new styles for a template, either from scratch, or based on an existing
style or object. You can create styles in the Object Properties box by specifying
settings in any or all of the tabs. New styles are saved to the current template.
Note The stitch type, settings and effects you specify for the new style do not
automatically change the current property settings. See also Making selected
properties current.
To define a style
1 To base the new style on an existing object, select it now. To base it on the
current settings, make sure no objects are selected.
2 Select Stitch > Define Style.
The Organize Styles dialog opens.
My Style
Click to define
new style
3 Click New.
The New Object Style dialog opens.
Enter name for
new style
Select style to
base it on
My New Style
My Style
4 Enter a name in the Style Name field.

5 To base the new style on an existing style, select it from the Based On Style
dropdown list.
Tip If you want the new style to be added to the Style toolbar, select the
Add to Favorites checkbox.
6 Click OK.
The Object Properties dialog opens. If you selected a style to base the new
style on, those settings will display.
7 Update the Object Properties tabs for the new style.
Note You do not have to enter values in all fields, only those you specifically
wish to store.
8 Press Enter or click Apply. See also Setting Object Property apply
options.The new style is saved to the current template.
207
Assigning favorite styles

You can assign up to ten favorite styles to tool icons on the Styles toolbar. To
apply the style, you then simply select the tool.
To assign favorite styles
Select style
My New Style
My Style
Organize favorite styles
2 Click Favorites.
The Organize Favorites dialog opens.
My New Style
Click Add
3 Click Add.
The Add To Favorites dialog opens.
Select style
My New Style
4 Select a style from the list.

5 Click OK.
6 Change the order in which the favorites will appear on the Styles toolbar
using Move Up and Move Down.
7 Click OK and then Close.
The styles are assigned in the order they appear in the Organize Favorites
box. The tool tip for each button shows the style name.
Merging styles
You can merge settings from one style to another. When you merge, the settings
from the second style overwrite the first.
208
To merge styles
Select style
My New Style
My Style
Click to merge styles
2 Select a style to merge to.

3 Click Merge.
The Merge With Style dialog opens.
Select style
My Old Style
4 Select a style to merge from and click OK.

5 Close the dialogs.
The first selected style is updated and saved to the current template.
Modifying styles
You can modify all styles, including the preset styles in the NORMAL template.
Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in the
NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.
To modify a style
209
My New Style
My Style
Select style
Click to edit style
2 Select a style and click Edit.

3 Change the settings in the tabs as required. See Modifying current settings
for details.
A warning message asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite the
existing style settings.
The modified style is updated and saved to the current template.
Note Changes apply only to future uses of the style. Existing objects based
on the style are not affected.
Renaming styles
You can rename a style without affecting its settings.
To rename a style
Select style
My Style
My New Style
Click to rename style
2 Select a style to rename.
210
3 Click Rename.
The Rename Object Style dialog opens.
Enter new style name
My Style 1
4 Enter a new style name and OK.

The style is renamed.
Deleting styles
You can remove any unwanted styles from a template.
To delete styles
My Style 1
My New Style
Select style
Click to remove style
2 Select a style to delete and click Remove.

A warning message asks you to confirm the deletion.
The style is deleted from the current template and removed from the list of
style names.
Note To remove all styles from a template click Remove All.
Working with design templates

Templates are special files used to store styles and default settings. Use
templates when digitizing frequently-used design types so that you do not have
to set the current property settings every time. For example, a template may
include standard objects and sample lettering. It may simply have preferred
stitch settings, lettering font and size, and colors set as current settings. Or it
211
may have special density, pull compensation or underlay settings to suit

different fabrics.
The NORMAL template
The NORMAL template is the default template supplied with the software. It
contains current property settings as well as a selection of preset styles. These
styles include variations on the current property settings. For example,
<PRESET_SATIN_1> and <PRESET_SATIN_2> contains different stitch spacing
settings for Satin stitches. You can view and modify the settings for these styles
at any time. See Modifying styles for details.
Note If necessary, you can revert to the original NORMAL template after
modifying it. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.
Using design templates
When you start a new design from the File > New menu, a list of the available
templates appears in the New dialog. See Creating designs based on templates
for details.
Note The template list only appears when you start a design from the File
menu. If you select the New tool on the Standard toolbar, the NORMAL template
is applied by default. See also Creating designs based on templates.
Saving current properties to a template

Use View > Object Properties to change current properties.
You can easily save current property settings to the current template. See also
Working with object properties.
To save current properties to a template
1 Access the Object Properties dialog.
To use the current property settings, deselect all objects, then click the
Object Properties icon.
To use the properties for a particular object, select the object, then
double-click it.
212

Click to close
Dropdown list
Modify settings as
required
Click to access
another set of tabs

2 Change property settings as required. See Modifying current settings for

details.
3 Click Save.
The modified settings are saved to the current template.
Note Only the current property settings not the objects or other settings
in the design are saved to the template.
Tip To save more than one set of property settings to the template, save
them as styles. See Defining styles for details.
Modifying design templates

You can modify templates in the same way as a normal design. Changes apply
only to future uses of the template. Existing designs based on the template are
not affected.
To modify design templates
1 Select File > Open.
2 Navigate to the ESWin\Template folder, then select Templates (EMT)
from the Files of type list.
The available template files display.
3 Select the template you want to modify and click Open.
4 Modify property settings, styles and other settings as required.
5 Select File > Save As.
The Save As dialog opens.
6 From the Save as type list, select Templates (EMT).
213
7 Enter the name of the template and click Save.

Tip To create a new template based on the modified one, type a new file
name and click Save.
8 Click Yes to confirm.
The modified template is ready for use.
Note Delete templates in the same way as you would any other Windows
file, using Windows Explorer. Templates are located in the ESWin\Template
folder.
Creating design templates

You create templates from designs containing the required objects and property
settings. Simply save the design, or elements of it, as a template. Templates
look the same as design files, but use the file extension EMT.
Note You cannot overwrite templates by accident. Each time you create a new
design from a template, EmbroideryStudio opens a duplicate. When you save
the design the first time, the Save As dialog opens so you can save the template
under a new name.
To create a design template
1 Start a new design or open an existing one.
2 Adjust the property settings, styles, and effects as required.
3 Add the objects and lettering to be included in the template.
For instance, you may want to include sample lettering using different
baselines. Simply overtype the sample text when using the template. See
Working with lettering baselines for details.
Enter template name

Select Design
Templates (EMT)
5 Select Design Templates (EMT) from Save as type list.

EmbroideryStudio automatically opens the ESWin\Template folder.
Design templates must be saved here or they will not appear in the template
list when you start a new design.
6 Enter a name for the template in the File name field.
214
7 Click Save.
Reverting to the NORMAL template

If you modify the NORMAL template supplied with EmbroideryStudio, you can
revert to the original version. A factory copy is always maintained so that the
NORMAL template can be restored.
To revert to the NORMAL template
1 Close EmbroideryStudio.
2 Click the Windows Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES>
Revert.
The Revert to Factory Template dialog opens.
Click OK
Select Templates
3 Select the Templates checkbox and click OK.

The original settings for the NORMAL template are restored.
215
Chapter 9
Underlays & Pull Compensation
Embroidery stitches pull fabric inward where needles penetrate. This can cause
fabric to pucker, stitch bunching, and/or unsightly gaps to appear in the
embroidery. EmbroideryStudio includes many techniques for achieving
smooth, even placement of stitches, and the elimination of gaps in designs.
For an object to sew out correctly, it must have correct stitch spacing, sufficient
pull compensation, together with a suitable underlay for the particular
combination of cover stitch type, object type, object shape, and fabric.
Note EmbroideryStudio provides a set of optimized fabric settings that take
into account the type of fabric you are stitching on. These settings are all object
properties, some of which are entirely automated and some which you have
control over. See Properties, Fabrics, Styles & Templates for details.
This section describes how to set and adjust automatic underlays. It also deals
compensating for fabric stretch with automatic pull compensation.
Stabilizing with automatic underlays

Embroidery appearance and quality depends a lot on underlay which serves as
a foundation for the cover stitching. Without an underlay, embroidery lies flat on
the underlying fabric which can often show through. New digitizers might be
tempted to increase stitch density but it is much more effective to apply an
underlay. Although it increases the stitch count, underlay helps to stabilize
fabrics and reduce puckering and pulling especially on larger designs. It also
provides loft, raising cover stitches and preventing them from sinking into soft
fabrics. It can also prepare a napped fabric by flattening it.
216
Larger areas and stretchy fabrics such as knits and pique generally need more
underlay than smaller areas and firm fabrics such as drill or leather.
EmbroideryStudio lets you set values to suit different fabrics, lettering
appearance and size. Underlay settings are stored with each object in the same
way as other object properties. They are regenerated whenever the object is
scaled or transformed.
Applying automatic underlay

Use Stitch Effects > Auto Underlay to strengthen and stabilize embroidery designs
with automatic underlays. Right-click to adjust underlay settings.
EmbroideryStudio provides a wide selection of underlay types to choose from.
Use a single layer of underlay, or for more support, combine two underlay types.
The Auto Underlay feature lets you set first and second underlays together.
Different object types support different underlay types since not all underlays
are appropriate to all shapes. The type of underlay you choose is determined by
the shape and size of object, the fabric type, and the purpose it is to serve. See
also Working with fabrics.
To apply automatic underlay
1 Click the Auto Underlay icon with or without objects selected.
For both new or selected objects, automatically generated underlay stitches
are based on current properties. See also Working with object properties.
Note Click again to turn off the effect.
2 Again with or without objects selected, right-click the Auto Underlay icon to
change current settings.
The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.
Select 1st
underlay
Select 2nd
underlay
Select 1st
underlay type
Select 2nd
underlay type
Adjust 1st
underlay settings
Adjust 2nd
underlay settings
Adjust 1st
underlay margins
Adjust 2nd
underlay margins
217
3 Select the First Underlay checkbox, and from the first Type field, select an
underlay type.
First underlay: Edge Run

(Input B object)

(Complex Fill object)

(Fusion Fill object)
4 Select the Second Underlay checkbox as required, and from the second
Type field, select an underlay type.
2nd underlay: Zigzag
2nd underlay: Tatami
2nd underlay: Double Zigzag
5 If the option becomes available, choose whether you want to apply underlay
by segment or by shape.
With the exception of lettering objects, underlay is normally applied
segment-by-segment before any cover stitches are sewn. By Shape
underlay can be applied to objects such as Fusion Fill as well as branched
column shape objects. This has the effect of calculating an underlay for the
whole shape rather than each segment comprising it. This in turn reduces
bunching, travel runs, and overall stitch count. Depending on the size of
object, however, registration issues may come into play.
Branched Fusion Fill

with Edge + Center Run
underlay by segment
Stitch count: 1060
Branched Fusion Fill

with Edge + Center
Run underlay by
shape
Stitch count: 957
Chapter 9 U nd erlays & Pu ll Co mpensation
218
Note By shape underlay can also be applied to lettering objects. See also
Setting lettering underlay.
6 Adjust settings as required and Press Enter or click Apply. See also Setting
Object Property apply options.
Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Auto Underlay to adjust Center Run and Edge Run
underlay settings.
Center Run places a row of stitches along the center of a column. It is used to
stabilize narrow columns e.g. 2-3 mm wide. Edge Run places stitches around
the edge of an object. Use Edge Run together with the Zigzag or Tatami
underlays when digitizing large shapes.
Center Run and

Edge Run underlays
used together
Adjust the stitch length for Center Run and Edge Run underlays to ensure the
underlay stitches follow the shape of curves and are not visible in the final
embroidery. Set a specific run stitch length, or use a variable stitch length
calculated by EmbroideryStudio. If you use a variable length, enter a chord gap
value to control how closely the stitches follow the digitized lines. The chord gap
is the distance between the digitized curve and the underlay stitch. See also
Setting variable run stitch lengths.
Note Stitch settings for Center and Edge Run underlays are stored separately
from and do not affect Run and Triple Run objects.
To adjust Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings
1 Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.
Select 1st
underlay
Select 2nd
underlay
Select Center
Run
Select Edge
Run
Adjust underlay
settings
Adjust 2nd
underlay settings
Adjust underlay
margins
Adjust 2nd
underlay margins
219
2 Select the first and second (as required) Underlay checkbox and select
Center Run or Edge Run as the First or Second underlay type.
Edge Run and Center Run underlay

with 2.5 mm stitch length
Edge Run and Center Run underlay

with variable run length
3 Enter the required length values for each underlay type:

Field
Purpose
Length
Sets the maximum length of each stitch.
Vary Run
Length
If enabled, specify minimum stitch length and chord gap values as

required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details.
4 Adjust underlay margins as required. See Setting underlay margins for

details.
Adjusting Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Auto Underlay to adjust Zigzag and Double Zigzag
underlay settings.
Use Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay stitching to support wide columns. You
can combine Zigzag or Double Zigzag with Center Run or Edge Run underlays.
These underlays are best used under Satin cover stitching.
You can set spacing and stitch length properties for Zigzag and Double Zigzag
underlay.
Note Zigzag underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not
affect, zigzag cover stitch settings.
To adjust Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings
220
Select Zigzag or
Double Zigzag
Adjust underlay
settings
Adjust underlay
margins
2 Select the first and second (if required) Underlay checkbox and select
Zigzag or Double Zigzag as the First or Second underlay type.
Spacing: 3.0 mm
Spacing: 4.0 mm
3 Enter the required spacing and length for each underlay type:
Field
Purpose
Spacing
Sets the required distance between two needle penetrations on the

same side of the column.
Length

details.
Adjusting Tatami underlay settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Auto Underlay to adjust Tatami underlay settings.
Tatami underlay is used to stabilize large, filled shapes. It resembles an
extremely open Tatami fill stitch, where rows of stitches are placed across the
object to create the underlay. Tatami underlay is often used together with Edge
Run, especially for Complex Fill objects under Tatami cover stitching.
Tatami stitch with
Edge Run and
Tatami underlay
Direction of underlay
Direction of cover
stitching
221
Change stitch spacing and length settings for Tatami underlay in the same way
as for Tatami fill stitches. Select the backstitch type you require and, for
Complex Fill objects, set the angle of the underlay stitches.
Note Tatami underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not
affect, Tatami cover stitch settings.
To adjust Tatami underlay settings
Select Tatami
underlay
Adjust underlay
settings
Adjust underlay
margins
2 Select first or second Underlay checkbox as required and select Tatami.

Spacing: 3mm
Spacing: 2mm
3 Adjust spacing and length settings as required:

Field
Purpose
Spacing
Sets the distance between each row of stitching.
Length
4 For Complex Fill objects, you can also set the stitch angle for Tatami
underlays.
Angle: 45
Angle: 135
5 Select a backstitch. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details.
222

details.
Setting underlay margins

Right-click Stitch Effects > Auto Underlay to adjust underlay margins.
The underlay margin is the distance between an object outline and the edge of
the underlay. Increase this margin to prevent underlay stitches from extending
outside the cover stitches.
Underlay margin
For Complex Fill objects, you can enter a single margin value which is used for
all edges in the shape. For objects created with the Input A, Input B, Input C or
Lettering tools, you can set three different margins one for the sides of the
column and one for each end.
To set underlay margins
Adjust underlay
margins
2 In the Margins panels, set the required margins.
For Input A, Input B, Input C and Lettering objects, enter margins in the
1:, 2: and 3: fields, using the diagram as a guide.
For Complex Fill objects, enter a margin in the 1: field only. Values in the
other fields will be ignored.
Mgn 1: 0.8 mm, Mgn 2: 0.2 mm,

Mgn 3: 0.4 mm
All margins: 0.1 mm
223
Tip If you are joining two columns, use a negative value at the joining end.
The underlay will extend outside the cover stitching, allowing for smooth
joining of the columns.
Two columns joined
Compensating for fabric stretch

Embroidery stitches tend to pull fabric inwards where the needle penetrates.
This can cause fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery.
Experienced digitizers can manually compensate for pull by overlapping objects
as they digitize. Automatic pull compensation, however, counters the pull effect
by overstitching outlines of filled shapes on the sides where the needle
penetrates. See also Adjusting stitch densities.
Digitized outline
Calculated outline
Pull compensation
Adjust the amount of overstitching you need by varying the pull compensation
setting in the Object Properties dialog. This is handy if you want to stitch a
design on fabrics with varying degrees of stretch.
Tip Applying underlay stitching, and using appropriate backing and topping
when stitching out can also reduce the push-pull effect.
Applying automatic pull compensation

Use Stitch Effects > Pull Compensation to automatically compensate for fabric
stretch. Right-click to adjust pull compensation settings.
Apply automatic pull compensation to objects in your design, either before or
after you digitize.
To apply automatic pull compensation
Click the Pull Compensation icon with or without objects selected.
224
With no objects selected, pull compensation is applied to all new objects. For
both new or selected objects, pull compensation is based on current
properties.
Click again to turn off the effect.
Adjusting pull compensation settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Pull Compensation to adjust pull compensation settings.
Appropriate pull compensation settings vary with the type of fabric stretchy,
pile, etc hooping method tight or loosely hooped and size of embroidery
object wide or narrow columns. Use the following table as a guideline.
Fabric
Pull compensation (mm)
drills, cotton
0.20
T-shirt
0.35
fleece, jumper
0.40
lettering
0.2 - 0.3
To adjust pull compensation settings

1 Right-click the Pull Compensation icon.
The Object Properties > Pull Comp dialog opens.
Select Pull Compensation

and enter overstitch
allowance
2 Select the Pull Compensation checkbox.

3 Enter the amount (in millimeters) by which you want to overstitch.
Pull Compensation: 0.3 mm
Pull Compensation: 0.6 mm
Adjusting column width

Right-click Stitch Effects > Pull Compensation to adjust column width setting.
The Column Width setting adjusts the width of columnar shapes, allowing you
to change the column width at every point by a constant amount in the direction
225
of stitching. The purpose is to fatten or thin a column, for example, in order

to create bold lettering. See also Formatting lettering.
Tip Reduce column width if you need to allow the underlay to extend outside
the object boundary.
To adjust column width
1 Right-click the Pull Compensation icon.
The Object Properties > Pull Comp dialog opens.
Select Column Width and

enter column width
adjustment
2 Select the Column Width checkbox.

3 Enter the amount (mm) by which you want to adjust column widths.
Column width: -1
No adjustment
Column width: +1
226
Chapter 10
Embroidery Connectors
Connectors link objects in a design. They

can be run stitches or jumps. Travel runs
are typically used to connect segments
within filled objects. You can use automatic
settings to generate connectors, trims and
tie-offs, or add them manually. You can
change connector settings for a whole
design or selected objects. If you prefer to
add tie-offs and trims as you digitize, you
can turn off automatic connectors
altogether. For Schiffli work, for example,
you are advised to add connectors manually
rather than rely on automatic settings.
EmbroideryStudio also allows you to automatically connect first and last
stitches of a design. This makes it easy to position the needle before stitching,
and reduces the chance of it hitting the frame.
This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your designs.
It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors, including the stitch
length for travel runs. It also deals with setting automatic start and end points.
Types of connectors
The type of connector you use depends on whether you want it to be visible in
the final design. The default connector setting in EmbroideryStudio is for
jumps.
Jumps
Jumps move the frame from one part of the design to another without needle
penetrations. You can use automatic jumps as connectors between embroidery
objects. The connecting thread generally needs to be tied-off and trimmed. The
default connector jump length is the same as that set for Auto Jump.
Tip You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function or
with Manual stitch. See Adding jumps with penetrations off and Digitizing
individual stitches for details.
Runs
Travel runs are typically used to connect segments of complex shapes. They can
also connect adjacent objects. Because runs are not trimmed, they may be
visible in the final embroidery. For this reason, they are less commonly used as
connectors between objects than jumps. If objects are adjacent and connectors
will be hidden, they can be used. You can change the stitch length of travel runs
to ensure they do not protrude from the cover stitching. You may also adjust the
travel run length to reduce the stitch count. See also Adjusting travel run stitch
length.
227
Note While you can control the properties of run connectors between objects,
you generally cannot control connectors within objects. Lettering and motif run
objects are the exception.
Tie-ins
Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from
unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You
generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed.
Tie-offs
Tie-offs are generally placed before trims to prevent stitches from unraveling.
You can adjust connector settings to automatically add tie-offs under certain
conditions, or add them manually. You can also include trim functions so
machines with trimmers cut the thread automatically.
Trims
If you are using a machine with an automatic trimmer, the trim function causes
the thread to be cut after a tie-off. In the software, trims are represented by a
triangle with a small circle at the point where stitching starts again. The trimmed
connector appears as a dotted line. You can adjust connector settings to
automatically add trims, or add them yourself.
Connector
Trim
Stitching starts
Using automatic connectors

EmbroideryStudio lets you generate automatic connectors in your design
based on settings in the Object Properties > Connectors dialog. You can
change connector settings for a whole design or selected objects. If you prefer
to add tie-offs and trims as you digitize, you can turn off automatic connectors
altogether. For Schiffli work, you are advised to add connectors manually rather
than rely on the automatic settings. Automatic connectors are turned off in the
Schiffli template. See Adding connectors manually for details.
Note The Branching feature lets you digitize like-objects e.g. the fingers of
a hand without having to think about the most efficient stitching sequence and
joins. See Resequencing with automatic branching for details.
Using jumps as connectors

to set jumps as connectors.
Chapter 10 Embroider y Connec tors
228
You can use automatic jumps as connectors between embroidery objects. Jumps
move the frame from one part of the design to another without needle
penetrations. You generally need to tie-off and trim the connecting thread.
You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function. See
Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.
To use jumps as connectors
1 Click the Object Properties icon.
2 Select the Connectors tab.
Select connector method
Select Jump and
enter distance
Adjust Trim
After settings
Adjust tie-in /
tie-off settings
3 Select a connector method:

Connection
Description
After Object
Allows you to adjust settings of connectors immediately following the

current object.
Inside Object
Allows you to adjust settings of connectors joining letters within a

lettering object, and motifs within motif runs. This setting also applies
to disconnected parts of branched objects.
Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also
Adjusting travel run stitch length.
4 Select Jump and enter a distance for each frame movement.
5 In the Trim After panel, adjust the trim settings. See Adjusting automatic
trim after settings for details.
6 Select Tie In from the list to adjust tie-in settings. See Adjusting automatic
tie-in settings for details.
229
7 Select Tie Off from the list to adjust tie-off settings. See Adjusting automatic
tie-off settings for details.
Using runs as connectors

to set runs as connectors.
You can use runs of single stitches to connect objects in a design. Because runs
cannot be trimmed, they are visible on the final embroidery, unless another
object is digitized to cover them. For this reason, runs are less commonly used
as connectors than jumps.
To use runs as connectors

Select connector method
Select Run and

adjust stitch length
Adjust tie-in
settings
3 Select a connector method:

Connection
Description
After Object
Allows you to adjust settings of connectors immediately following the

current object.
Inside Object
Allows you to adjust settings of connectors joining letters within a

lettering object, and motifs within motif runs. This setting also applies
to disconnected parts of branched objects.
230
Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also
Adjusting travel run stitch length.
4 Select Run and enter a length for the connecting run stitches.
The Tie Off and Trim After options are disabled as they do not apply to
travel runs.
5 Select Tie In from the list to adjust tie-in settings. See Adjusting automatic
tie-in settings for details.
Adjusting automatic tie-in settings

Use View > Object Properties to toggle the Object Properties dialog on/off.
Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of
objects to prevent stitches from unraveling.
They are inserted inside the shape on the
second stitch. You generally use them when
the previous connector is trimmed.
Tie-in with
four stitches
To adjust tie-in settings

Adjust tie-in settings
3 Select Tie In from the list and select a tie-in option:

Tie-in Option
Description
Off
No tie-ins are inserted.
Always tie in
Tie-ins are inserted before the object.
After Trim/CC
Tie-ins are inserted after trims and color changes.
Previous
Connector
Tie-ins are inserted when the previous connector exceeds the

length you specify.
4 Set tie-in values:

Tie-in Value
Description
Length
Determines length of tie-in stitches.
Number
Determines number of tie-in stitches to generate.
231
Adjusting automatic tie-off settings

With trims, stitches need to be tied off so the thread can be trimmed without
unraveling. Select between two automatic tie-off methods.
Method 2 with four
stitches
Method 1 with four

stitches
Method 2 with
two stitches
Method 1 is generally more visually pleasing on smaller objects and Satin

columns. With this method, however, stitches sew on top of each other with the
consequent risk of thread breakage. On larger areas, the safer alternative is
Method 2.
Tip For narrow shapes or columns e.g. small lettering use only one tie-off
stitch. You may also decrease the stitch length.
To adjust tie-off settings
Adjust tie-off
settings
232
3 In the Tie Off panel, select a tie-off option:

Tie-off Option
Description
Off
No tie-off is inserted. By selecting this option, you need to add

tie-off functions manually. See Adding tie-offs for details.
Always tie off
A tie-off is inserted after the object.
Before
Trim/Color Change
A tie-off is inserted before a trim or color change.
Always Tie Off Last
A tie-off is inserted if the object is the last one in the design.
Next Connector
Longer Than
A tie-off is inserted if the next connector exceeds the specified

length.
4 Select a tie-off method:

Method Description
1
Inserts tie-off stitches along the last stitch. This hides well and prevents
stitches from bulging. It is suitable for Satin columns and lettering objects.
Inserts tie-off stitches between the last two stitches. This is suitable for larger
Tatami-filled shapes.
5 Set the tie-off values:

Tie-in Value
Description
Length
Determines length of tie-off stitches.
Number
Determines number of tie-off stitches to generate.
Adjusting automatic trim after settings

You can choose to turn off automatic trimming, to always trim connecting
stitches, or to trim only when the connecting stitch is longer than a specified
value.
To adjust automatic trim settings
Adjust trim after

settings
233
3 In the Trim After panel, select a trim option:

Trim Option
Description
Off
No trims are inserted. This feature is useful if trimming causes

your machine to slow down, or the needle to lose the thread. You
can either add trim functions yourself, or trim the final embroidery
by hand.
Always Trim
Trims are inserted after the object.
Trim If Next
Trims are inserted if the next connector exceeds the length you
Connector Is Longer specify.
Than
Tip Usually, connectors shorter than 3 mm are not visible on the final
embroidery. You may sometimes require a smaller value e.g. if the thread
color contrasts with the background color.
Adding connectors manually

You can add tie-offs and trims to a design manually using the Tie Off, Trim and
Empty Stitch tools. While generally not recommended and less efficient than
using automatic connectors, this method does give you more control over the
final design. For example, some machine formats are unable to read functions
that appear on a normal stitch. For these machines, you need to add trim, tie-off
and other machine functions to an Empty Stitch or Empty Jump. You may also
need to add one or more empty stitches or empty jumps to either side of a
function for the machine to read it correctly.
Note For Schiffli work, you are advised to add connectors manually rather than
rely on the automatic settings. Automatic connectors are turned off by default
in the Schiffli template.
Adding tie-offs
Click Toolbox > Stitch/Function Tools Flyout > Tie Off to insert a tie-off.
You can add tie-offs in your design using the Tie Off tool. This provides a
semi-automated technique for adding tie-offs as an alternative to digitizing them
with manual stitches. Tie-offs are usually added before a trim at the end of an
object.
Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine
Function dialog. See also Inserting machine functions manually.
To add a tie-off
1 Travel to the object you want to tie-off. See Viewing stitching sequence for
details.
2 Click the Tie-off icon.
234
A Tie-off function is inserted.
Tie-off
function start
Tie-off
function end
Tie-off function inserted, needle

backtracks and returns
The default number of tie-off stitches is two. This means the needle
backtracks twice and returns at the insertion point. Adjust this value in the
Object Properties > Connectors dialog. See Adjusting automatic tie-off
Note Generally you will follow a tie-off with a trim. See Adding trims for
details.
Adding trims
Click Toolbox > Stitch/Function Tools Flyout > Trim to insert a trim.
You can add trims in your design, using the Trim tool. When you add a trim in
this way, the trim function is added to the current stitch. Some machines require
empty stitches or empty jumps on either side of the trim. If this is the case for
the machine you want to stitch to, you will need to insert them.
Tip Make sure that all stitches you trim have been tied in and tied off, otherwise
the stitches will not be secured.
To add a trim
1 Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See Traveling
through designs for details.
2 Click the Trim icon.
A trim function is inserted at the current needle position.
Tie-in symbol
Trim symbol
235
Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert
Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for
details.
Adding empty stitches and empty jumps

Click Toolbox > Stitch/Function Tools Flyout > Empty Stitch Function to insert an
empty stitch.
Click Toolbox > Stitch/Function Tools Flyout > Empty Jump Function to insert an
empty jump.
Empty stitch is a tight (zero length) lockstitch, used together with, or as an
alternative to, tie-in and tie-off stitches. Use empty stitches instead of tie-ins or
tie-offs for objects filled with light density stitching where standard tie-ins and
tie-offs may be visible. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps when required
by the selected machine format.
Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert Machine
Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.
To add empty stitches and empty jumps
1 Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See Traveling
2 Click the Empty Stitch Function icon to insert an empty stitch.
3 Click the Empty Jump Function icon to insert an empty jump.
Empty functions added to

stitching sequence
Adding jumps with penetrations off

Deselect Generate > Penetrations to create jumps with needles or borers out.
You can create jump connectors manually in a design by digitizing with
penetrations off. The Penetrations tool prevents the needle from penetrating
the fabric, forcing the machine to move across the design in a series of jumps.
You can use Penetrations with any input method.
236
To add a jump with penetrations off

1 Select an input method.
2 Deselect Penetrations.
3 Digitize the connector (or row of jumps) in the usual way for the selected
input method.
The jumps are saved together as an embroidery object.
Penetrations off jump stitches
Satin
Jumps
Tatami
Adjusting travel run stitch length

to set the travel run stitch length.
Travel runs are usually used to connect segments within filled objects. They are
usually covered by fill stitches when the object is stitched out. You can adjust
the travel run length to reduce the stitch count.
To adjust travel run stitch length
2 Select the Special tab and Travel Run from the list.
Adjust travel run

length
3 Enter a value in the Length field as required.
Travel Run length: 1 mm
Travel Run length: 3 mm
237
Tip Increase stitch length to reduce the stitch count. Travel Run
automatically varies the stitch length on tight curves.
Keeping or omitting last stitches

Click Toolbox > Stitch/Function Tools Flyout > Keep Last Stitch to keep the last
stitch in a column.
Click Toolbox > Stitch/Function Tools Flyout > Omit Last Stitch to omit the last stitch
in a column.
If you are digitizing adjoining columns, you can keep or omit the last stitch in
the first column to achieve a smoother join or shorter connecting stitches.
Columns smoothly
joined
Columns with
unwanted space
Note This feature only applies when the exit point is at the end of the column
i.e. the default exit point. Moving the exit point using the Reshape Object
tool overrides the Keep Last Stitch/Omit Last Stitch command. See
Sequencing entry/exit points for details.
To keep or omit the last stitch
To keep the last stitch, select the object and click the Keep Last Stitch icon.
To omit the last stitch, select the object and right-click the Omit Last Stitch
icon.
Press Spacebar last
stitch omitted
Press Enter last stitch kept
Tip Alternatively press Spacebar to omit the last stitch or Enter keep it.
Setting automatic start and end points

Use Generate > Use Auto Start and End to toggle the Auto Start and End function
on/off according to the current settings. Right-click to adjust settings.
Before stitching, some embroidery machines require you to position the starting
needle exactly above the first needle penetration point. The Auto Start and
238
End feature is available to connect first and last stitches in a design. This makes
it easy to position the needle before stitching, and reduces the chance of the
needle hitting the side of the frame.
Tip Problems may occur when you try to set a common start and end point for
team names. See also Outputting teamname designs.
To set automatic start and end points
1 Right-click Use Auto Start and End.
The Auto Start and End dialog opens.
Select Use Auto

Start and End
Select centering
method
Select preset end

point
Click to enter
separate start and
end points
Specify how to
match connecting
stitches
Specify the
connector type
2 Select the Use Auto Start and End checkbox to connect the first and last
stitches in the design.
3 Select the Maintain Automatically checkbox to maintain the design center
after modifying the design.
4 Select a centering method:
Method
Description
Auto Start and

End
By default, connecting stitches are created from the start and end
points to the center of the design. Select one of the nine preset end
points.
Return to Start
Point
Creates a connecting stitch from the end point to the start point.
Digitize Auto
Start/End Point
Creates connecting stitches from the start and end points to a point
you define. If you select this, you are prompted to select the point
after clicking OK. Tick the Separately checkbox to enter separate
start and end points.
Tip The Digitize Auto Start/End Point is primarily used with

multi-decoration designs where you want to strictly define the start/end point
of the embroidery component.
239
5 Select to match connecting stitches on the Horizontal plane, Vertical plane

or both in the Match On panel.
Match on vertical
Match on horizontal
Match on both
6 Select the type and length of the connecting stitches in the Connectors
panel. See Embroidery Connectors for details.
7 Click OK.
Connectors travel runs or jumps are inserted as specified before first and
after last stitches of the design.
240
PART III
ELECTRONIC ARTWORK
There are two broad categories of artwork file, both of which can be imported
into EmbroideryStudio for use as digitizing backdrops vector and bitmap. To
create good quality embroidery, you need to choose or create suitable artwork
of either format.
Digitizing with vectors
This section describes how to create drawing objects using the drawing tools as
well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains how
to merge, trim and split overlapping drawing or embroidery objects using the
shaping tools. See Digitizing with Vectors for details.
Digitizing with bitmaps
This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It explains
how to insert bitmap images as well as how to edit them, including cropping,
editing in third-party applications, and smoothing. It also explains how to
prepare both outlined and non-outlined images. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for
details.
Automatic digitizing
This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to
embroidery objects and complete designs, as well as how to create embroidery
from grayscale images. See Semi-Automatic Digitizing for details.
241
Chapter 11
Digitizing with Bitmaps
EmbroideryStudio Graphics mode supports the automatic and semi-automatic

digitizing of both bitmap images and vector graphics. The quality of the resulting
designs greatly depends on the type and quality of the original artwork.
Generally speaking, vector graphics preserve the picture quality when resized,
whereas bitmap images cause problems of pixelation and image degradation
when enlarged or scaled down. You can insert or paste third-party vector
graphics such as clipart for use in embroidery designs. Alternatively, insert,
paste or scan bitmap artwork for use as digitizing templates or backdrops. In
order to make bitmap images more suitable for automatic digitizing,
EmbroideryStudio provides image processing capabilities.
Note EmbroideryStudio Graphics mode includes the entire suite of

CorelDRAW drawing tools which offer many sophisticated techniques for
drafting outlines and shapes on screen. Vector graphics so created can be
directly converted to embroidery objects or even entire designs. For a full
description of the CorelDRAW tools, refer to the electronic User Guide available
via the Windows Start > Programs group. Alternatively, use the onscreen help
available from the Help menu.
This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It explains
how to insert bitmap images as well as how to edit them, including cropping,
editing in third-party applications, and smoothing. It also explains how to
prepare both outlined and non-outlined images.
Choosing suitable artwork

For both manual and automatic embroidery digitizing purposes, clean images,
sometimes referred to as cartoons, work best. Such images have a limited
number of solid colors which in turn have well-defined outlines. Ideally, they are:
Well defined, where each shape is made up of pixels of the same color
Clearly blocked, where each shape is a stitchable size, at least 1 sq mm
242
Saved at a color depth of at least 256 colors (8 bit), or preferably millions of

colors (16 bit). (Images are automatically reduced to 256 colors or less when
loaded into EmbroideryStudio.)
Clean image with

well-defined outlines
Clean image with

well-defined color blocks
Complex image, needs editing

to remove background and
improve outlines
Best results are produced with images of the type found in clipart libraries or
created from scratch in CorelDRAW. EmbroideryStudio can work with images
from other sources but they require some preparation. This is because most
commonly available images are not made up of solid colors. Scanners introduce
noise, while graphics packages perform dithering and anti-aliasing to improve
image print quality. Embroidery digitizing works least effectively with
photographic images which may contain many dithered colors and complex
forms. With photographs, however, you can pick out shapes that you want to
embroider, leaving out unnecessary detail.
Scanned images
Images scanned from hardcopy drawings or existing
embroidery typically contain a lot of introduced noise.
While they can be used as input to embroidery
digitizing, once again, best results are achieved with
relatively clean images consisting of solid color blocks.
Typically, logos and simple drawings scanned from
business cards, letterheads, books, magazines, cards
all fall into this category.
Noisy images typically need to be prepared by reducing
the color count and sharpening the outlines. See also
Scanning artwork into EmbroideryStudio.
Image containing a lot of
scanner noise
Dithered images
Dithering is a software technique which combines

existing colors in a checkerboard arrangement of pixels. It is typically used to
simulate colors that are missing from an image palette.
Dithered color blocks
243
Like noisy images, dithered images need to be color-reduced before use. Be

aware, however, that while EmbroideryStudio can process dithered colors
within a defined outline, it does not work so well with non-outlined images.
Anti-aliased images
Anti-aliasing is a software technique similar to
dithering which is used to soften hard outlines where
color blocks intersect. It produces smoother outlines
by blurring the pixels where colors join.
Where anti-aliasing is deliberately used to blur
outlines, these need to be sharpened before use
with automatic digitizing.
Scanning artwork into EmbroideryStudio

If you have existing artwork, you can scan it in Graphics mode with a
TWAIN-compatible scanner using the CorelDRAW scanning function. It is
important to scan your artwork properly if you intend to use one of the automatic
digitizing techniques the scanned image quality will affect the quality of the
final embroidered design.
Note For a full description of how to scan images into CorelDRAW, refer to
the electronic User Guide available via the Windows Start > Programs group.
Alternatively, use the onscreen help available from the Help menu.
Preparing artwork for scanning
With embroidery design, less is more. You dont need every detail in an image
to create a design. You use the structure of the image rather than the fine
details of texture and color. To simplify artwork, you can cover it with tracing
paper and draw only the essential shapes and lines which will be filled with
stitches. When scanning, take away the original artwork and put white paper
behind the tracing paper. Shiny surfaces, such as glossy photographs, may not
scan well. Cover them with tracing paper. If the artwork has very light colors,
highlight outlines with a fine black felt-tip pen.
Scanning resolution
Most scanners require you to enter scanning resolution information. Resolution
determines the number of dots per inch (DPI) used to create an image.
Generally speaking, the smaller the source image and/or more detail it contains,
the higher the resolution needs to be. Use the following table as a guide.
Type of artwork
Scanning resolution
Business cards, letter heads
150 - 300 dpi
Hand sketches
150 - 300 dpi
Photos and images
150 - 300 dpi
Commercial art, line drawing
72 - 150 dpi
Color mode
Most scanners also require you to enter color mode information. First decide
whether your image is line art (black and white drawing), sketch, color picture,
Chapter 1 1 Digitizing with Bitmaps
244
or black and white or color photograph, then choose an appropriate mode. Black
and white mode produces the smallest files. Color photograph and grayscale
modes generate 256 color images and produce similar sized files. RGB, True
Color or millions of colors modes generate 16.7 million colors and produce the
biggest files. Use the table below to decide which mode is suitable for use with
your image.
Source image
Example
Description
Recommended
color mode *
No. of colors in
scanned image
Line art
Two colors
Black/white
usually black and drawing
white
Line art
2
2
Drawing/sketch
Sketch or
drawing with
shades of gray
Grayscale
Line art
256
2
Black & white

photograph
Shades of gray
Black/white photo
Grayscale
256
256
Color photograph
Many colors
Color RGB
Color photo
16 million
256
Color picture
Two colors or
more
Color RGB
Millions of colors
Color drawing
16 million
16 million
2 - 256
* Different scanning software uses different terms for the equivalent mode.
Scanning tips
Do not scan line art images in grayscale mode grayscale scanning produces
fuzzy edges.
Scan color images in RGB mode (millions of colors) rather than 256 color
mode. You may not notice any difference on screen. The color count can be
reduced once the image is loaded into the software. EmbroideryStudio can
245
use the extra information to produce a better image than one scanned at 256
colors.
Scanned in 256
color mode
Scanned in RGB color

mode (millions of
colors)
Do not scan color images in CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) mode
as this is only used for images that will be printed colors may be different
to RGB colors.
If the image needs to be rotated, do so while scanning. Rotating afterwards
may distort the image.
Sharpening
Some scanning software lets you apply what is called sharpening as you scan.
Sharpening compensates for the slight blurring in a scanned image by looking
for any differences between colors in the image. Sharpening accentuates these
differences which makes the image edges more defined. It does not increase
image details but makes them more obvious. In general, use sharpening with
images that have well-defined outlines. Dont use it with non-outlined images.
Scanned with
sharpening
Scanned without
sharpening
Image preparation techniques

Before converting artwork to vector graphics, you frequently need to clean it up.
To work effectively, the Convert function requires solid color images as input.
You can improve artwork with the bitmap editing tools.
Note For a full description of the editing tools in CorelDRAW, refer to the
Alternatively, use the onscreen help available from the Help menu.
Outlined vs non-outlined images
Before preparing your image you need to know what type you are using. For the
purposes of automatic digitizing, there are two categories outlined and
non-outlined. Outlined images ideally have a solid black outline around each
246
colored area. Non-outlined images ideally consist of solid areas of color. Outlined
and non-outlined images require different methods of preparation.
Image with outlines
Image without outlines
Image clean up
In practice, cleaning up scanned images may involve any one or a combination
of the following techniques:
Reducing the number of colors

Adding or emphasizing outlines
Removing noise, dithering or anti-aliasing
Eliminating unnecessary detail
Cropping sections
Eliminating backgrounds.
Color reduction
Sometimes an image looks clean but extra colors have been introduced during
scanning or in a graphics package. Color reduction means reducing the actual
number of image colors in order to eliminate unnecessary detail and reduce
each block to a single color. Color reduction also cleans the image, removing any
noise and anti-aliasing present. This in turn helps minimize the number of trims
and color changes required in the resulting embroidery design. Color reduction
should only be applied if the loss of detail does not affect the image shapes.
Before reduction, the colored areas in the image below include many colors.
After reduction, each area is reduced to a single color. The detail is preserved.
Before color reduction
After color reduction
247
If you are scanning images, make sure you scan them correctly for best results.
See also Scanning artwork into EmbroideryStudio.
Image scanned in
RGB color mode, then
colors reduced to 6
Image scanned in 256

color mode, then
colors reduced to 6
Be aware that some techniques are better for removing noise and anti-aliasing
but not so good for processing dithering in non-outlined images. See also
Choosing suitable artwork.
Non-outlined image
dithered color blocks not
completely cleaned, edges fuzzy
Outlined image
dithered color blocks cleaned,
edges sharp
Outline sharpening
Outline sharpening means more clearly defining the outlines bordering distinct
color blocks or shapes in the artwork. These may have been indistinct in the
original or made so by the scanning process. Outline sharpening is important for
vectorizing because it makes it easier for EmbroideryStudio to identify the
areas to become embroidery objects in the resulting design.
Image before outline
sharpening
Image after outline

sharpening
Some images have solid outlines but they may be indistinct or incomplete. These
need to be rectified with the CorelDRAW bitmap editing tools prior to vector
tracing. Refer to the electronic User Guide available via the Windows Start >
Programs group. Alternatively, use the onscreen help available from the Help
menu.
248
Noise filtering
Noise filtering means restoring the solid color blocks of the original artwork in
scanned images. This is achieved by merging different shades into one solid
color. Noise filtering is important for vectorization because it makes it easier for
EmbroideryStudio to identify solid color blocks to become embroidery objects
in the resulting design. It also cleans up blurred or mottled areas of color.
Image before noise
filtering, mottled
color
Image after noise

filtering, single colors
Image preparation tools

Use the artwork preparation tools to prepare images for automatic digitizing.
Your choice of tool depends on the artwork. There are three tools:
Tool
Purpose
Capabilities
Edit Bitmap
using...
Link to a graphics package

e.g. Paint Shop Pro for
editing an image outside
EmbroideryStudio.
Lets you crop, sharpen, re-color, add outlines,

remove noise from an image.
Reduce Colors
Prepare any non-outlined

image.
Lets you reduce colors to a specified number. It

automatically:
reduces each block to a single color
removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering
removes colors smaller than specified area.
Sharpen Edges Prepare outlined images.
Lets you adjust lightness or darkness of outlines.

It automatically:
blends each outlined block into a single color
removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering
sharpens outlines.
Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software,
it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let
you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary
image-processing.
Using image preparation tools
It is important to use the correct preparation tools for your artwork. The
example below shows an image with indistinct outlines. If the Sharpen Edges
tool is used, outlines can be made darker and more distinct, improving stitching.
249
By contrast, using the Reduce Colors tool before stitching produces a poorly
stitched design.
Reduce Colors used

outlines not
sharpened, poor
stitching
Image with
indistinct
outlines
Sharpen Edges used

improved stitching
Image with solid

outlines
Before using the Sharpen Edges tool, make sure that the image contains solid
outlines. If there are gaps, separate color areas will be blended into one.
Sharpen Edges
used
Image partially outlined,
some areas not closed
Image colors blended
If you need to add outlines, close gaps, or reinforce an outline, you may need to
draw it in by hand before scanning. Or you might add it in a graphics package
after scanning. See Editing bitmap images for details.
Sharpen Edges
used
Image outline completed in
graphics package
Outlines sharpened
Tip Try darkening the outlines using the Outline Appearance slider. See
Preparing outlined images for details.
Image preparation summary
Action
Outlined image
Non-outlined image
Photograph
Scan artwork
Scan in RGB mode

Use sharpening
Scan in RGB mode

No sharpening
Scan in RGB mode
250
Action
Outlined image
Scan line drawing
Scan in two color mode -
Touch up in graphics
package
Use Sharpen Edges

tool
Adjusts lightness or
darkness of outlines.
Automatically:
blends each outlined
block into a single
color
removes
anti-aliasing, noise
and dithering
sharpens outlines.
Crop
Add or edit outlines
Edit colors
Remove noise
Use Reduce Colors tool -
Vectorize
Non-outlined image
Photograph
-
Crop
Edit image shapes
Edit colors
Remove noise
Crop
Convert to grayscale
Remove background
Lighten or darken
Adjust contrast
Reduces colors to a
specified number.
Automatically:
reduces each block to
a single color
removes
anti-aliasing, noise
and dithering
removes colors less
than specified area.
EmbroideryStudio Graphics mode provides the entire suite of

CorelDRAW drawing tools which offer many sophisticated techniques for
drafting outlines and shapes on screen. Refer to the electronic User Guide
available via the Windows Start > Programs group. Alternatively, use the
onscreen help available from the Help menu.
Convert vectors directly EmbroideryStudio provides techniques for both converting vectors
directly to embroidery as well as manual digitizing of prepared artwork.
See Digitizing Embroidery Shapes for details.
Digitize
semi-automatically
Manual
Point & Stitch
Smart Design
Manual
Point & Stitch
Smart Design
Photo Flash
251
Inserting bitmap images

Bitmap images can be inserted or pasted into EmbroideryStudio for use as
digitizing backdrops. You can insert bitmap images of various formats for use as
digitizing backdrops. See Supported graphics formats for details.
Note You can also insert vector graphic files. See Inserting vector graphics for
details.
To insert a bitmap image
1 Select Image > Insert File.
Select folder
Select file
Select required
format
2 Select a folder from the Look In list.

3 Select a file type from the Files of Type list (e.g. BMP).
4 Select the file you want to insert.
Tip Select the Preview checkbox to preview the selected file.
5 Click Open.
Editing bitmap images

EmbroideryStudio allows you to crop bitmap images prior to use. From within
EmbroideryStudio you can also open images directly in third-party bitmap
editing packages. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into
EmbroideryStudio. Within EmbroideryStudio you can set general properties
such as size and position. You can also scale and transform bitmap images
although it may be best to do this during scanning. Scaling after scanning can
distort the image. However, EmbroideryStudio allows you to smooth an image
252
before and after scaling or transforming, making it easy to digitize. See also
Arranging, Scaling & Transforming Objects.
Cropping bitmap images

Before using bitmap images for design purposes, crop them to remove
unnecessary detail and save processing time.
To crop a bitmap image
1 Select the image. See also Inserting bitmap images.
2 Select a cropping tool.
Select Image > Crop Bitmap to crop the image in rectangular form.
Click-and-drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image you
require.
Select Image > Crop Bitmap With Polygon to crop the image in free
form.
Mark points to create a cropping shape around the part of the image you
require and press Enter.
Crop bitmap
Crop bitmap with

polygon
253
EmbroideryStudio crops the area inside the cropping rectangle or polygon

selection. This process may take some time.
Bitmap cropped along
marked points
Bitmap cropped in
rectangular form
Editing bitmap images in third-party applications

Sometimes you need to edit bitmap images directly in a third-party graphics
package. You would normally do this in order to eliminate backgrounds, flood-fill
solid areas with color, add or reinforce outlines, or close gaps. From within
EmbroideryStudio you can open images directly in MS Paint, Corel
PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are
automatically re-imported into EmbroideryStudio.
To edit a bitmap image in a third-party application
1 Select the image. See also Inserting bitmap images.
Background may be
cleaned and eyes
added
2 Select Image > Edit Bitmap Using and select a graphics package.
The image opens in the graphics package.
3 Edit the image and save.
Background cleaned
Eyes added
254
Note If you return to EmbroideryStudio before closing the image in the

graphics package, it appears in EmbroideryStudio overlaid with stripes.
File still open in the

graphics package
Return to the graphics package and select either File > Close or File > Exit
& Return <Filename>. In EmbroideryStudio, the stripes will disappear.
Smoothing bitmap images

When you scale or transform backdrops, the quality is sometimes reduced e.g.
thin straight lines become jagged or distorted. By smoothing an image before
and after scaling and transforming, you can preserve its quality, making it easy
to digitize.
To smooth a bitmap image
1 Select the image and double-click. See also Inserting bitmap images.
Select required
smoothing option
2 Select the required smoothing option, depending on whether the majority of

lines in the image are light or dark.
Option
Purpose
None
Turned off.
Dark lines
Dark lines on the image are smoothed.
Light lines
Light lines on the image are smoothed.
3 If required, set the scaling or transforming options in the General tab. You
can scale and transform objects both here and on-screen.
255
No smoothing
Light lines smoothed
Dark lines smoothed
Note Scaling and transforming takes longer than usual when smoothing is
applied.
Preparing non-outlined images

Use Toolbox > Smart Design Tools Flyout > Reduce Colors to reduce the number
of colors and remove image noise in non-outlined images.
Use the Reduce Colors tool to prepare non-outlined images for automatic
digitizing. The tool automatically reduces color blocks in bitmap images to a
single color, removing anti-aliasing and noise. You can let the software reduce
the color count automatically or specify a precise number. The latter is useful if
you want to match design colors to an exact number of thread colors.
Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch it
up manually before processing in EmbroideryStudio. You would normally do
this in order to eliminate backgrounds, or flood-fill solid areas with color. See
Editing bitmap images for details.
To prepare non-outlined images
1 Select Image > Insert File to load an image.
2 Select the image.
Image scanned in RGB color mode

converted to 256 colors upon loading
3 Click the Reduce Colors icon.
256
The Reduce Colors dialog opens.
Zoom in and out of

image preview
Set color
reduction options
Set noise filtering
options
Save Image after
processing
The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows the
number of image colors.
4 Click Zoom In to view the image more closely.
5 Set the color reduction options you require:
Option
Description
By Number
Use this option to enter the number you require.

EmbroideryStudio suggests a number and shows how the image
will look. You can accept this number or change it.
Automatic
Selection
Use this option if you want the software to reduce the color count
automatically.
The slider increases or decreases the effect moving the slider towards
100% gives you more colors, moving the other way gives you fewer.
Reduced to 13 colors
Reduced to 6 colors
Reduced to 3 colors
6 Check how many colors are in the image.

This is indicated by Color Count. If there appear to be too many, the image
probably contains noise.
257
7 Set the noise filtering options you require:

Option
Description
Minimum color
area
This defines the smallest area recognized in the conversion. The

default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight pixels). Increase this
value if your image has a lot of out-of-color pixels. The minimum
color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total area.
Minimum line
length
This defines the smallest line length recognized as an object. The

default is 2 mm. The minimum line length should not exceed 25%
of the smallest dimension.
8 Experiment with the settings to obtain the best result.
Min. color area: 0.5 sq mm

Min. line length: 2 mm
Min. Color area: 1 sq mm

Min. color area: 5 sq mm

9 Click Save Image As to save changes.

10 Click OK to apply the changes.
Preparing outlined images

Use Toolbox > Smart Design Tools Flyout > Sharpen Edges to sharpen outlines
and reduce noise in outlined images.
Use the Sharpen Edges tool to prepare outlined images for automatic
digitizing. The tool automatically sharpens outlines and reduces noise. Areas
enclosed by a black outline are reduced to a single color. Outline sharpening
makes it easier for the software to recognize distinct areas in the artwork. These
areas then become the embroidery objects of the finished design. Use it
particularly if the outlines are blurry, fuzzy or indistinct.
Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch it
up manually before processing in EmbroideryStudio. You would normally do
this in order to eliminate backgrounds, flood-fill solid areas with color, add or
reinforce outlines, or close gaps. See Editing bitmap images for details.
To prepare outlined images
1 Select Image > Insert File to load an image.
258
2 Select the image.
Zoomed
area
3 Click the Sharpen Edges icon.

The Sharpen Outlines dialog opens.
Zoom in and out

of image preview
Set outline
appearance
Click to see
colored areas
Save image after

processing
The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows the
number of image colors.
4 Click Zoom In to view the image more closely.
5 Set the outline contrast tolerance by dragging the slider control.
259
This produces a black and white preview of the detected outlines.
Set outline
appearance
6 Set the Noise reduction options you require:

Option
Description
Minimum color
area
This defines the smallest area recognized in the conversion. The

default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight pixels). Increase this
value if your image has a lot of out-of-color pixels. The minimum
color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total area.
Minimum line
length
This defines the smallest line length recognized as an object. The

default is 2 mm. The minimum line length should not exceed 25%
of the smallest dimension.
Tip Move the slider to the right until there is too much black, then move it
slowly back to the left. Stop when the image shows all the outlines you need.
7 Click Show Color Areas to see the updated image.
Outlines not sharpened
Slider moved to left
Slider moved to right
8 Click Save Image As to save changes.
260
9 Click OK to apply the changes.

Outlines sharpened
and noise reduced
261
Chapter 12
Digitizing with Vectors
There are two fundamental design modes in EmbroideryStudio:
Graphics: This mode allows you to create and edit vector objects using the
CorelDRAW toolset.
Embroidery: This mode allows you to create and edit embroidery objects
using an embroidery digitizing toolset.
Graphics mode includes the entire suite of CorelDRAW drawing tools which
offer many sophisticated techniques for drafting outlines and shapes on screen.
Vector graphics so created can be directly converted to embroidery objects or
even entire designs. Alternatively, you can insert or paste third-party vector
graphics such as clipart for use in embroidery designs. Or, insert, paste or scan
bitmap artwork for use as digitizing templates or backdrops.
Embroidery mode also provides tools for drawing shapes and outlines directly
on screen. In this mode, you can also import or paste third-party vector graphics
such as clipart for use as digitizing backdrops. Scale and transform them in the
same way as embroidery objects. You can also select colors for vector object
outlines and fills. When working with overlapping vector or embroidery objects,
merge, trim or split them using special shaping tools.
Tip For a full description of the CorelDRAW tools, refer to the electronic User
Guide available via the Windows Start > Programs group. Alternatively, use
the onscreen help available from the Help menu.
This section describes how to create vector objects using the drawing tools as
well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains how
to merge, trim and split overlapping vector or embroidery objects using the
shaping tools.
Creating vector outlines

EmbroideryStudio drawing tools let you draft shapes and outlines on screen.
Vector objects can then be converted to embroidery objects with the application
262
of manual input methods and stitch types. See Converting vector and
Tip EmbroideryStudio lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills.
These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See Coloring
vector objects for details.
Drawing straight lines

Use Toolbox > Drawing Tools Flyout > Line to create straight line vector objects.
Draw straight lines in your design using the Line
drawing tool.
Note You can convert line vector objects to
embroidery objects using an outline input method
e.g. Run, Triple Run, or Motif Run or Input C. See
Converting vector and embroidery objects for
details.
To draw straight lines
1 Click the Line icon.
2 Click the start point of the line.
3 Click the end point.
Tip To constrain the line vertically, horizontally or in 15 angles, press Ctrl
as you mark the end point.
Drawing open shapes

Use Toolbox > Drawing Tools Flyout > Polyline to create open-ended vector
objects.
Draw lines of any shape using the Polyline tool. Enter reference
points to create the shape you want.
Note You can convert polyline vector objects to embroidery
objects using Input C or an outline input method e.g. Run,
Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting
vector and embroidery objects for details.
To draw open shapes
1 Click the Polyline icon.
2 Mark reference points to draw the shape of the line.
Click to enter a corner point.
263
Right-click to enter a curve point.

Curve point
Corner point
3 Press Enter.
Tip EmbroideryStudio lets you select colors for vector object outlines and
fills. These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See
Coloring vector objects for details.
Drawing polygons
Use Toolbox > Drawing Tools Flyout > Polygon to create closed vector objects.
Draw closed shapes using the Polygon tool. Enter reference
points to create the shape you want.
Note You can convert polygon vector objects to embroidery
objects using Input C, Complex Fill, Fusion Fill, or an outline
input method e.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or
Stemstitch. See Converting vector and embroidery objects for
details.
To draw polygons
1 Click the Polygon icon.
2 Digitize the shape by marking reference points on screen.
Click to enter a corner point.

Right-click to enter a curve point.
Curve point
Corner point
Tip To constrain the line between two points to 15 increments, press Ctrl
as you mark the second point.
3 Press Enter to close the shape.
Chapter 12 D igitizing with Vec tors
264
Drawing rectangles and squares

Use Toolbox > Drawing Tools Flyout > Rectangle to create rectangular or square
vector objects.
Draw rectangles and squares using the Rectangle
tool.
Note You can convert rectangle vector objects to
embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill,
Fusion Fill, or an outline input method e.g. Run,
Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See
Converting vector and embroidery objects for details.
To draw rectangles and squares
1 Click the Rectangle icon.
2 Click to mark the corner of the rectangle.
An outline attaches to the mouse pointer.
3 Move the pointer until the outline is the size and shape you require, then click
again.
Click to enter
corner point
Drag pointer,
click again
Note To draw a square, hold down Ctrl as you move the pointer.
Drawing circles and ellipses

Use Toolbox > Drawing Tools Flyout > Ellipse to create circular or elliptical vector
objects.
Draw circles and ellipses using the Ellipse tool.
Note You can convert ellipse vector objects to embroidery objects using
Input C, Complex Fill, Fusion Fill, or an outline input method e.g. Run, Triple
Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector and
To draw circles and ellipses
1 Click the Ellipse icon.
2 Click to mark the center of the circle or ellipse.
The outline of a circle attaches to the mouse pointer.
265
3 Move the pointer until the outline is the diameter you require, then click
again.
To draw a perfect circle, press Enter.

To draw an ellipse, move the pointer again, then mark a second radius
point when the outline is the required size. Press Enter.
Click to enter
center point
Drag pointer
Press Enter for circle

OR
Mark a point for ellipse
Inserting vector graphics

Vector graphics from third-party applications can be inserted into
EmbroideryStudio in a variety of native and interchange vector formats. You
can choose to remove overlapping objects in vector graphics by flattening
them. This eliminates overlapping areas of stitching when vector objects are
converted to embroidery objects. You can also import vector graphics (not DXF)
as bitmaps. You can convert vector graphics to embroidery objects using a
variety of input methods or with the Point & Stitch tools. See Converting vector
and embroidery objects for details. See also Digitizing shapes with
Point & Stitch.
Tip You can also paste vectors directly into EmbroideryStudio through the
Windows clipboard.
To insert a vector graphic
1 Create a new file in EmbroideryStudio or open the design file into which you
want to insert the vector graphic.
2 Select Image > Insert File.
Select to insert as
bitmap rather than
vector
Select to remove
overlapping
objects
266
3 From the Look In list, select the folder where you keep your vector files.
4 From the Files of Type list, select a suitable vector graphic format and select
the file you want to insert. See also Supported graphics formats.
5 If you are working with DXF files:
Click Options.
The DXF File Options dialog opens.
Select Inches or Millimeters from the Units of Measurement list and

click OK.
If this information is not specified, the vector graphic may not display at
the correct size.
6 Select the As Bitmap checkbox to insert the vector graphic as a bitmap
image.
Imported as vector graphic

individual objects can be selected
Imported as bitmap image individual

objects cannot be selected
Note DXF files cannot be imported as bitmaps.

7 Select the Flatten checkbox to remove any overlapping areas from the vector
graphic.
Hidden areas
removed
Vector objects flattened
Hidden areas
preserved
Vector objects not flattened
Note If a vector graphic is imported as a bitmap, it is flattened automatically.

8 Select the Preview checkbox to see a preview of the vector graphic.
9 Click Open to insert the vector graphic into the design window.
Tip The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector
objects. See Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace for details.
267
Manipulating vector graphics

Vector graphics may consist of grouped vector objects. You can ungroup these
to work with them individually. EmbroideryStudio lets you remove unnecessary
reshape nodes by applying smoothing to individual ungrouped objects. You can
select colors for outlines as well as fills. The Make Complex Shape feature lets
you combine any number of vector curves into a single complex shape i.e. a
shape with holes in it. You can also show or hide vector graphics in the design.
Tip You can scale and transform vector graphics in the same way as embroidery
objects. Unlike bitmap images, any changes you make to vector objects are
updated and saved with the design file. See also Arranging, Scaling &
Transforming Objects.
Coloring vector objects

to select colors for vector outlines and fills.
Vector graphics may be composed of outlines only. EmbroideryStudio lets you
select colors for outlines as well as fills. These can be different to the embroidery
objects you may create. Coloring makes vector objects easier to interpret. For
example, a solid fill color might suggest Satin or Tatami, while a fill pattern may
be interpreted as Motif Fill or Program Split.
Tip Colored vector outlines are also important for appliqu cutting. If appliqu
objects are digitized in EmbroideryStudio, they can be ungrouped, duplicated,
and sent to the laser or other type of cutter. Some can cut several layers of fabric
at the same time. The cutting depth is controlled by object colors. These can be
set within EmbroideryStudio without having to export the shapes to a graphics
package. See also Printing appliqu patterns.
To color a vector object
1 Insert a vector graphic into the design file. See Inserting vector graphics for
details.
Inserted vector
graphic
2 Ungroup the vector objects as necessary.

3 Select a vector object, right-click and select Properties from the popup
menu.
The Object Properties > Special > Vector dialog opens.
4 To change the outline color of the selected object, adjust the settings in the
Line panel:
268
Select an outline style from the Style list.

Select an outline width from the Width field.
Click Color and select an outline color from the Color dialog.
Select outline style

Select outline width
Select outline color
No fill currently
selected
5 To fill the selected object with a solid color, select the Solid Fill icon and click
the Color button to access the Color dialog.
Select solid fill

Click to
choose color
6 To fill the selected object with a pattern fill, select the Pattern Fill icon and
adjust the settings:
Select a pattern style from the dropdown list.

Select a foreground color via the Front button.
Make the background transparent as required or choose a color via the
Back button.
Select pattern fill
Select pattern style
Select colors for pattern
foreground and
background
269
7 To fill the selected object with a bitmap e.g. a fabric texture select the
Bitmap Fill icon and click the Load button to insert an image file via the
Open dialog.
Select bitmap fill
Click to load
image file
Note To view the changes in the production worksheet, select File > Print
Preview. Then click Options and select the Drawings checkbox.
Combining vector curves into complex shapes

The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of vector
curves into a single complex shape i.e. a shape with holes in it. This can then
be converted directly to an embroidery object. See also Shaping vector and
embroidery objects.
Tip You can convert complex vector shapes directly to embroidery using a
number of different input methods. See Converting between embroidery objects
for details. See also Digitizing fills with Point & Stitch.
To combine vector curves in complex shapes
1 Insert a vector graphic or create one using the drawing tools.
2 Select the objects you want to combine.
270
Tip Ungroup any imported vector object in order to select the required
component objects.
3 Select Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift+H.
The selected objects become a single Complex Shape vector object.
4 You can use the Offset Object feature to digitize the complex shape. See
Creating outlines and filling holes for details.
Complex shape object

created and colored
Input C applied
Run applied
Motif Run applied
Tip You can select any number of curves. Different selections create different
complex shapes.
Tip By copying the original vector objects, you can also create borders and
filled holes. See also Creating outlines and filling holes.
Creating overlapped complex shapes

If vector objects are overlapping, Make Complex Shape selects the largest
area and clips off the remaining shape. Depending on the shapes you use, you
can create combined or clipped shapes. See also Shaping vector and embroidery
objects.
271
To create overlapped complex shapes

1 Insert a vector graphic or create one using the drawing tools.
2 Decide how you want to combine the shapes.
If you want to combine the overlapping shapes, draw a box around them
and select all objects.
If you want to clip the overlapping shapes, simply select them.
3 Select Image > Make Complex Shape.

The selected objects become a single vector object. Make Complex Shape
selects the largest area and clips off the remaining shape. See also Trimming
Shaping vector and embroidery objects

When working with overlapping vector or embroidery objects, you can merge,
trim or split them using the Shaping tools. All shaped embroidery objects
convert to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill. Vector objects remain as vector objects
unless combined with embroidery objects. You have the option of preserving the
272
source objects of shaping operations. You also have the option of adding
overlaps to objects resulting from Flatten or Divide operations.
Shaping tools summary table

Source
Apply Tool
Result
Description
Weld
Selected objects are combined into

a single object. The resulting object
takes the properties stitch color
and type, etc of the topmost
object.
Flatten
Only areas unique to each selected

object are retained. All overlapping
areas are removed.
Intersect
Only areas common to all selected

objects are retained. All
non-overlapping areas are
removed.
Exclude
Areas where pairs of selected

objects overlap are removed,
starting from the topmost object.
273
Source
Apply Tool
Result
Description
Front-Back
The topmost object is retained, but

all of the areas overlapping with
other selected objects are
removed.
Back-Front
The bottommost object is retained,

but all of the areas overlapping with
other selected objects are
removed.
Divide
The objects are split wherever

overlaps occur and all hidden areas
are removed.
Combine
Areas where pairs of selected

objects overlap are removed,
starting from the topmost object. All
resulting objects share the
properties stitch color and type,
etc of the topmost object.
Tip The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of vector
curves into a single complex shape. This can then be converted to an
embroidery object. See Combining vector curves into complex shapes for
details.
Merging vector and embroidery objects

Use Shaping > Weld to merge overlapping objects into a single flattened object.
Use Shaping > Combine to merge the properties of overlapping objects and trim
overlapping areas.
Merge selected objects using the Weld or Combine tools.
To merge vector and embroidery objects
Select the vector or embroidery objects to shape.
274
Click Weld to merge overlapping objects into a single flattened object.
Weld applied
(petals only)
Tip Make symmetrical shapes by digitizing one half, duplicating and

reflecting, then welding the duplicate shapes.
Weld
applied
Click Combine to convert embroidery objects into multiple objects sharing

the properties stitch color and type, etc of the topmost selected object.
Combine applied
(petals only)
If drawing tools are used as the input method, Combine converts vector
objects to a single complex shape.
Combine applied
(petals only)
If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when

Combine is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number, the
topmost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the Exclude tool.
See Trimming vector and embroidery objects for details.
275
Tip Cut objects in half by drawing a line through them and applying Divide.
Apply Combine to create closed objects or Weld to fuse two objects.
Weld + Run
applied to
resulting objects
Weld + Run +
Combine applied to
resulting objects
Divide
applied
Trimming vector and embroidery objects

Use Shaping > Intersect to trim overlapping areas so that only those intersected
by all selected objects remain.
Use Shaping > Exclude to trim overlapping objects and preserve their individual
properties.
Use Shaping > Front-Back to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped
areas of the topmost object remain.
Use Shaping > Back-Front to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped
areas of the bottommost object remain.
Trim selected objects using the Intersect, Exclude, Front-Back or
Back-Front tools.
Note Use the Remove Overlaps feature to maintain shapes but remove the
underlying layer of stitching. See Removing underlying stitching for details.
To trim vector and embroidery objects

Click Intersect to trim overlapping areas so that only those intersected by
all selected objects remain.
Intersect
applied
276
Click Exclude to trim overlapping objects and preserve their individual

properties. The result is similar to Combine except that object properties are
not merged.
Exclude applied
(petals only)
If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when

Exclude is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number, the
bottommost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the Combine
tool. See Merging vector and embroidery objects for details.
Tip Use Exclude to cut holes in Complex Fill objects.
Use Front-Back to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped

areas of the topmost object remain.
Front-Back
applied
Tip Use Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift+H to trim
overlapping shapes in unfilled vector objects.
Use Back-Front to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped

areas of the bottommost object remain.
Back-Front
applied
Splitting vector and embroidery objects

Use Shaping > Flatten to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects.
Use Shaping > Divide to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects
wherever they intersect with other selected objects.
277
Split selected objects using the Flatten or Divide tools. These tools preserve
the outlines of the original shapes.
To split vector and embroidery objects

Click Flatten to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects.
Flatten
applied
Click Divide to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects. All
overlapped areas become discrete objects.
Divide applied
(petals only)
Preserving original objects

Use Shaping > Keep Source Objects to keep the source objects after shaping.
The Keep Source Objects is a toggle which affects the behavior of all the other
shaping tools. While it is active, all selected source objects of all shaping
operations are preserved. The resultant objects are inserted after the last
source object in the stitching sequence.
278
To preserve original objects

1 Select the source objects.
2 Click the Keep Source Objects icon.

3 Apply a shaping operation to the selected objects.
All source objects of the shaping operation are preserved. The resultant
objects are inserted after the last source object in the stitching sequence.
Overlapping shaped objects

Use Shaping > Overlap to adjust the overlaps of objects resulting from
Flatten or Divide shaping operations.
Use Shaping > Flatten to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects.
Use Shaping > Divide to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects
wherever they intersect with other selected objects.
The Overlap feature allows you to add overlaps to the objects resulting from
Flatten or Divide shaping operations.
To overlap shaped objects
1 Select the source objects.
279
2 Adjust the overlap amount using the Overlap control on the Shaping
toolbar.
Note The Overlap range is from 0.00 to 5.00 mm with increments of
0.01 mm. The default overlap is 0.50 mm.
3 Click Flatten or Divide to apply shaping to the selected objects.
The border of the uppermost object the last one in the stitching order is
left unchanged. The border of the next object is extended where it touches
the uppermost fragment by the specified amount.
Source objects
Flatten: 0.00 mm
Flatten: 2.00 mm
The border of a third object in the stitching order is extended where it touches
the other two layers of objects. And so on.
Source objects
Flatten: 0.00 mm
Flatten: 2.00 mm
280
Chapter 13
Semi-Automatic Digitizing
EmbroideryStudio provides a variety of complementary tools and techniques

for semi-automatically digitizing suitably prepared artwork.
The Convert feature lets you convert vector objects directly to embroidery

objects. In fact, entire vector designs can be converted to embroidery.

The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector objects.
You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input
methods.
The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in
bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods.
The Smart Design feature automatic digitizing is intended for people
working at all levels of the embroidery industry. Smart Design automatically
converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery.
Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from photographs
and other grayscale bitmap images. The effect resembles the output of a line
printer.
This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to

embroidery objects and complete designs using a variety of techniques, as well
as how to create embroidery from grayscale images.
Converting vector and embroidery objects

Use Universal > Tag as Turning Satin to convert vector objects to Satin
embroidery objects with turning stitching.
Use Universal > Convert to convert between vector and embroidery objects.
Use Universal > Retain Graphics to retain the original vector objects during
conversion.
EmbroideryStudio lets you convert vector objects directly to embroidery
objects. In fact, entire vector designs can be converted to embroidery. The
resulting objects take the current stitch type, color and object properties set for
the particular object type (usually Fusion Fill). You can modify these properties
281
as required. You can also convert embroidery to vector objects. See also
Digitizing with Bitmaps. See also Semi-Automatic Digitizing.
menu.
To convert vector and embroidery objects
2 Prepare the artwork as necessary. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for details. See
also the CorelDRAW User Guide.
The Convert tool is located on the Universal toolbar as shown:
Graphics mode
Convert tool
Click to keep
originals
Embroidery mode
The tool behavior depends on the mode in which it is invoked and objects
selected in the design window:
In Graphics mode, selected vector objects are converted to embroidery

and displayed in Embroidery mode. Unselected objects are displayed but
cant be selected.
In Embroidery mode, selected embroidery objects are converted to
vector objects and displayed in Graphics mode. Unselected objects are
displayed but cant be selected.
Note You can hide embroidery objects in Graphics mode or vector objects
in Embroidery mode by toggling off Show Embroidery or Show Graphics
in the Universal toolbar. See Displaying graphics and embroidery for details.
3 If you want to keep a copy of the original vector objects, click the Retain
Graphics toggle in Graphics mode.
4 Select the vector objects you want to convert and click Convert.
Chapter 13 S emi-Au tomatic D igitizing
282
Embroidery mode opens in a few moments and the converted embroidery

objects display.
Tip Optionally, you can tag objects selected for conversion as turning satin
by activating the Tag as Turning Satin button. This produces a branched
object as shown below.
With turning satin
Without turning satin
5 To convert embroidery objects to vectors, simply do the reverse select the

embroidery objects and click Convert.
Graphics mode opens in a few moments and the converted vector objects
display.
Tip Vectors can also be converted to appliqu as well as to lettering. See also
Converting vector graphics to appliqu. See also Creating lettering in
Graphics mode.
Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace

Use Toolbox > Smart Design Tools Flyout > Auto Trace to convert artwork to vector
objects for conversion to embroidery objects.
Use Auto Trace to create vector outlines from bitmap images. You can then
convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. Auto
Trace can find holes in shapes both inside and outside boundaries are
detected. See also Converting vector and embroidery objects.
283
To convert a bitmap to outlines with Auto Trace

1 Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into EmbroideryStudio
for details. See also Inserting bitmap images.
2 Select the image and process it. See Image preparation techniques for
details.
Tip Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the
software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See Digitizing
with Bitmaps for details.
3 Click the Auto Trace icon.
EmbroideryStudio will prompt you to click an image to select a
single-colored area.
4 Click the shape you want to vectorize.

The vector object is immediately created and selected.
284
Note At this point you are able to convert the created vector objects directly
into embroidery. See also Converting vector and embroidery objects.
Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch

Use Point & Stitch > Turning Satin to digitize narrow column shapes.
Use Point & Stitch > Tatami Fill to digitize large areas, preserving any holes.
Use Point & Stitch > Tatami Fill without Holes to digitize large areas, ignoring any
holes.
Use Point & Stitch > Pickout Run to digitize centerlines.
Use Point & Stitch > Outline Run to digitize boundaries of shapes.
Use Point & Stitch > Match to Palette to find the nearest match between the
selected image color and the color palette.
The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to automatically digitize
shapes in electronic artwork, both bitmap and vector, without using manual
input methods. These tools are useful for quickly creating embroidery objects
from scanned images that do not require particular artistic effects or
embroidery-specific knowledge. This in turn frees you to spend more time on the
artistic or inherently complicated areas of your designs.
Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed

before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing
techniques without preliminary image-processing. See Digitizing with Bitmaps
for details.
285
Matching palette colors to an image

Use Point & Stitch > Match to Palette to find the nearest match between the
selected image color and the color palette.
Use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest match between a selected
image color block and a palette color. If Match to Palette is not selected, the
color block is digitized in the current palette color.
Note If your artwork contains colors which are very different to those in the
colorway, you can use the Match Bitmap Color function to first add those
colors. See Matching image colors to threads for details.
To match palette colors to an image
1 Select the artwork:
Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into

EmbroideryStudio for details.See also Inserting bitmap images.
Insert or create a vector graphic. See Inserting vector graphics or Creating

vector outlines for details.
Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed
before conversion. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for details.
2 Click the Match to Palette icon.
3 Select a Point & Stitch digitizing method.
4 Click the shape you want to digitize.
The object is digitized in the nearest palette color.
Original image
Digitized in current color
Matched to palette
Note If Match to Palette is not selected, the object is digitized in the

current palette color.
Digitizing fills with Point & Stitch

Use Point & Stitch > Turning Satin to digitize narrow column shapes.
Use Point & Stitch > Tatami Fill to digitize large areas, preserving any holes.
Use Point & Stitch > Tatami Fill without Holes to digitize large areas, ignoring any
holes.
286
Point & Stitch can be used to create closed Tatami fill objects, as well as objects
with turning Satin fills. Use Tatami Fill to digitize large areas in your artwork
with Tatami stitch, preserving any holes within them. If you are using a vector
graphic, it must include a fill color. If you want holes ignored, use the Tatami
Fill without Holes tool. Use Turning Satin to digitize narrow column shapes
with Satin stitch. Current properties are applied. You can modify these as
required before or after using the tools.
To digitize fills with Point & Stitch

EmbroideryStudio for details. See also Inserting bitmap images.
Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be

image-processed before conversion. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for details.
2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar.
Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching
thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details.
3 Select the required Point & Stitch fill input method.
4 Click the shape you want to digitize.
The shape is immediately filled with stitches.
Turning Satin leaf and

stem filled with turning
stitches
Tatami Fill hole in

apple ignored
Tatami Fill without Holes

hole in apple preserved
Note Stitches are generated according to current stitch settings. Jumps may
occur if stitch length exceeds the default setting. These can be modified.
287
Digitizing outlines with Point & Stitch

Use Point & Stitch > Pickout Run to digitize centerlines.
Use Point & Stitch > Outline Run to digitize boundaries of shapes.
Use Point & Stitch to digitize boundaries and details with run stitching. Use
Pickout Run to digitize centerlines in your artwork with run stitches. Use
Outline Run to digitize boundaries of shapes with run stitching. Current
properties are applied. You can modify these as required before or after using
the tools.
To digitize outlines with Point & Stitch

EmbroideryStudio for details. See also Inserting bitmap images.

Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be

image-processed before conversion. See Image preparation tools for details.
2 Select a thread color from the color toolbar.
Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching
thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details.
3 Select the required Point & Stitch outline input method.
4 Click the centerline or outline you want to digitize.
The line is traced with Run stitches.
Pickout lines
digitized
Outlines
digitized
Note Stitches are generated according to current stitch settings. These can
be modified.
288
Digitizing designs with Smart Design

Smart Design automatically converts whole bitmap images to fully digitized
embroidery. With Smart Design, novice embroiderers can create simple designs
quickly and easily. Similarly, experienced embroiderers can improve productivity
when working with simple designs. Sales people can estimate stitches quickly
and accurately for price quotations.
An extension of Point & Stitch technology, Smart Design recognizes shapes in
bitmap images and makes decisions about the most suitable input methods and
stitch types to use. It also determines the stitching sequence based on closest
join. Artwork is effectively batch processed to create the many embroidery
objects that make up a design.
Smart Design gives you some control over how an image is interpreted during
conversion. You can choose to omit selected colors as well as select colors for
stitching in front or behind. There are options to add image colors to the color
palette, or match them to the existing palette. You can choose to ignore lines or
shapes under a specified width. Once created, you can always edit the final
result using the available digitizing techniques. See also Embroidery digitizing
methods.
Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the software,
it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The software will not let
you apply automatic digitizing techniques without preliminary
image-processing. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for details.
Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design

Use Toolbox > Smart Design Tools Flyout > Smart Design to create embroidery
designs directly from imported images.
In essence, creating an embroidery design with Smart Design is simply a
matter of selecting the image you want to convert, and clicking the Smart
Design tool. There are, however, many settings you can adjust to optimize the
conversion process for a particular image.
Note Only one image may be selected at a time. The command is disabled if
the selection contains anything other than an image. The display mode of the
image for example, dimmed will not affect the embroidery object colors.
To create embroidery designs with Smart Design
1 Scan or load an image. See Scanning artwork into EmbroideryStudio for
details.
2 Select the image and process it. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for details.
3 Select the image and click the Smart Design icon.
289
The Smart Design dialog opens. Image colors are distributed among the
Omit, Fill, and Details fields depending on how the software interprets the
source image.
Select color
conversion
method
Click-and-drag
colors between
fields
Note Image information is given in the top panel, including width and height
values as well as the number of image colors.
4 Click-and-drag any colors you want to omit from automatic stitch processing
into the Omit column.
White
background
color omitted
All colors
omitted except
black
5 Similarly, click-and-drag or leave any colors you want to be treated as filled

areas in the Fill column.
Fill color pink
only, the rest
omitted
Fill colors pink
and yellow, the
rest omitted
Note You can adjust stitching styles and other settings for fill colors. See
Adjusting fill color settings for details.
290
6 Click-and-drag any colors you want to be treated as details i.e. any

outlines, borders or small areas you want to stitch out last into the Details
column.
Detail color
black only
Detail color
green only
Note You can adjust stitching styles for detail colors. See Adjusting detail
colors settings for details.
7 Select a Thread Colors conversion method for image processing.
By default, image colors are matched to the nearest thread colors in the
current colorway.
Select the Add Colors to Palette option to add image colors to the
palette.
Image colors added
to palette
Image colors matched

to nearest thread colors
8 Click OK.
Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates
stitches.
Note Click Save to save the dialog settings to the template.
Adjusting detail colors settings

Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for the colors of
anything in the design you identify as a detail. A detail may be an outline, a
border, a pickout run, or a small area of the design you want to be stitched out
last.
Tip If an image color is both a fill and a detail, you can either recolor the fill
color in a graphics package, or omit the color for later editing.
To adjust detail colors settings
1 Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon.
The Smart Design dialog opens.
291
2 Click-and-drag any colors you want to be treated as details i.e. any

outlines, borders or small areas you want to stitch out last into the Details
column. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for details.
Choose a suitable line
thickness for details
3 Select a stitching style for colors in the Details column:

Detail
Description
Double Run
Most suited for use with thin lines.
Input C
Suited for use with thicker lines of constant width.
Satin
Most suited for use with thicker lines or small shapes of varying width.
4 Click OK.
stitches.
Details: black outlines
with Double Run
Details: black
outlines with Satin
Adjusting fill color settings

Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for fill colors, giving
you control over stitch types, stitch angles, and sequencing settings.
To adjust fill color settings
1 Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon.
The Smart Design dialog opens.
Adjust fill color

settings
2 Click-and-drag or leave any colors you want to be treated as filled areas in

the Fill field. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for details.
3 Click Values.
292
The Automatic Stitching Values dialog opens.
Select style to
apply to each
object type
Adjust max.
widths for
each object
type
Adjust settings
for recognition
of Complex Fill
objects
Adjust settings
for automatic
object
sequencing
4 Select the Detect lines in objects checkbox if you want areas defined up to
maximum width set to be interpreted as lines.
The sample below, for example, shows narrow linear shapes being
interpreted as Satin Input C rather than Tatami Complex Fill objects.
Yellow and green in Details with

Satin larger areas also
stitched in Satin
Detect Lines selected, Satin

used fills stitched in Tatami,
lines in Satin
Detect Lines not selected, default

values used most objects
stitched in Tatami
5 Adjust the maximum width for each object type.

These rows determine the way in which graphic elements of specified
thicknesses are to be interpreted.
Note A value entered in the Maximum Width field becomes the Minimum
Width value for the next graphic element.
6 Select a style to apply to each object e.g. Run , Satin, Tatami, etc.
Satin styles selected
with Auto Split
Tatami styles
selected
293
7 Adjust settings for the recognition of Complex Fill objects in the Object
Options panel.
Stitch angle 90
Stitch angle 0
8 Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing in the Object Sequence

panel. See Adjusting object sequencing settings for details.
9 Click OK.
stitches.
Adjusting object sequencing settings

Smart Design lets you adjust settings for the automatic object sequencing of
recognized embroidery objects.
To adjust object sequencing settings
1 From the Smart Design dialog, access the Automatic Stitching Values
dialog. See Adjusting fill color settings for details.
Adjust settings for

automatic object
sequencing
2 Enter the length of the maximum travel run connector in the Maximum
travel path length field. You may enter a large value to avoid trims that may
cause production problems.
3 Enter the maximum width of foreground objects to overlap background
objects in the Stitch under objects below width field.
Original image
Below width: 1.5 mm
Below width: 4.0 mm
4 Enter the minimum stitch length you want to keep in the Filter small
objects below width field. See Eliminating small stitches for details.
5 Click OK.
stitches.
294
Creating embroidery from photographs

Use Toolbox > Smart Design Tools Flyout > Photo Flash to create embroidery
designs directly from photographs.
Use Photo Flash to create embroidery from photographs or other images, color
or grayscale. Grayscale images are made up of different shades of gray pixels.
Color images are automatically converted to grayscale when you apply Photo
Flash.
Photo Flash designs consist of rows of stitches of varying spacing settings. The
effect resembles the output of a line printer. Adjust the angle of the rows and/or
the stitches themselves.
Tip For best results, use images with well-defined subjects or constantly
varying shades.
To create embroidery from photographs
1 Insert the bitmap image in your design and scale it to the required size. See
Inserting bitmap images for details.
2 With the bitmap still selected, click the Photo Flash icon.
The Object Properties > Special > Photo Flash dialog opens.
Select resolution
option
Select background
option
Enter angle
295
3 In the Resolution panel, select a resolution option Coarse, Medium, or

Fine.
Fine resolution
Medium resolution
Coarse resolution
Note The coarser the resolution the more spacing between rows.
4 In the Row panel, enter a new angle as required.
Row Angle: 0
Row Angle: 90
5 In the Background panel, select a background option:

Option
Description
Light
Applies the maximum row width value to the lightest part of the image.
Dark
Applies the maximum row width to the darkest part of the image.
Tip The option you select usually depends on whether the fabric is light or
dark. The Dark option produces a negative of the image.
Light background
Dark background
296
6 Select the Fills tab and adjust the stitch spacing and skew angle as required.
Adjust stitch
values
Adjust skew
angle
The Skew Angle determines the angle of the stitches. See Applying Satin
stitch with fixed spacing for details.
Skew
Angle: 0
Skew
Angle: 45
7 Fine-tune Auto Spacing and Auto Split settings as required.
The Auto Spacing option automatically adjusts stitch spacing according

to column width. For columns of varying width, Auto Spacing
automatically adjusts the stitch spacing wherever the column changes
width. See Applying Satin stitch with auto-spacing for details.
Auto Split breaks long Satin stitches into shorter ones. It also distributes
needle penetrations in a random pattern so that they do not form a line
down the middle of the shape. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split
for details.
You are prompted to select the part of the image you want to convert.
9 Click-and-drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image you require.
EmbroideryStudio generates stitches for the area within the cropping
rectangle. This process may take some time.
Tip Use TrueView for a more accurate representation of the stitching.
297
PART IV
EMBROIDERY LETTERING
Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. EmbroideryStudio provides a
large range of scalable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy
stitching alphabets to choose from.
Creating embroidery lettering
This section describes how to add lettering, apply lettering baselines, change
letter formatting, and adjust letter size and spacing. See Creating Embroidery
Lettering for details.
Editing embroidery lettering
This section describes how to edit lettering text. It also explains how to scale
and transform lettering objects. It also covers adjusting individual letters as well
as reshaping baselines on screen. See Editing Embroidery Lettering for details.
Advanced embroidery lettering
This section shows you how to add special characters and symbols. It describes
changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects, and adjusting lettering stitch
angles. It also explains how to adjust the lettering stitching sequence as well as
lettering join method. Automatic letter kerning and letter spacing are discussed.
Lettering underlay is also discussed. It also describes how to create special
effects with envelopes. See Advanced Embroidery Lettering for details.
Team lettering
This section shows you how to set up name groups and create team name
designs. It also describes how to modify team name designs and output them in
a variety of ways. See Team Lettering for details.
Monograms
This section details the creation of monogram lettering with initials or with a
name, how to add ornaments to monograms, and how to create ornament
layouts. See Monograms for details.
Custom alphabets
This section describes how to create new alphabets from TrueType fonts.
Automatic letter kerning and user-refined alphabets are explained. The section
also describes how to create and modify your own custom alphabets and letters.
Alphabet merging is also explained. See Custom Alphabets for details.
298
Chapter 14
Creating Embroidery Lettering
Create high-quality embroidery lettering quickly and simply. EmbroideryStudio

provides a large range of scalable alphabets to choose from. Add embroidery
lettering directly to designs or convert from Graphics mode. Apply formatting
just like a word processor, including italics, bolding, and right/left justification.
Change values for the whole text or individual letters.
letter formatting, and adjust letter size and spacing.
Creating lettering in Graphics mode

Use Universal > Tag as Turning Satin Lettering to convert vector lettering to
Satin embroidery lettering with turning stitching.
Use Universal > Tag as Parallel Tatami Lettering to convert vector lettering to
Tatami embroidery lettering with parallel stitching.
Use Universal > Tag as Wilcom Lettering to convert vector lettering to native
Wilcom embroidery lettering.
Use Universal > Convert to convert vector objects to embroidery objects.
EmbroideryStudio includes as standard the entire suite of CorelDRAW
drawing tools which also allow you to add and format TrueType lettering on
screen. Vector lettering can then be converted to embroidery lettering with the
aid of the Convert tool located on the Universal toolbar. Conversion to
embroidery lettering can involve one of three types:
Turning Satin lettering

Parallel Tatami lettering
Native (Wilcom) embroidery lettering.
299
Note For a detailed description of the CorelDRAW interface, refer to the

menu.
To create lettering in Graphics mode
1 Switch to Graphics mode. See Switching design modes for details.
2 Create a CorelDRAW text object and select it.
A set of icons appears on the Universal toolbar.
Lettering objects selected
Set of icons appears
3 Click one of the tools:
For turning Satin lettering, click Tag as Turning Satin Lettering.

For straight Tatami lettering, click Tag as Parallel Tatami Lettering.
For native embroidery lettering, click Tag as Wilcom Lettering and select
an embroidery alphabet from the dropdown list.
The text object is now tagged for conversion.
Note When a text object is tagged for conversion to a Wilcom embroidery

alphabet, a red dotted outline is added to the text object.
4 Click Convert.
Chapter 14 Cre ating Embroid er y Lettering
300
Embroidery mode opens in a few moments and the converted embroidery

lettering displays.
Turning Satin
lettering
Parallel Tatami
lettering
Native Wilcom
lettering
Tip You can create lettering along any shape of baseline in Graphics mode
and convert to embroidery lettering. See also Adjusting baselines.
Tip If you are not satisfied with the results of lettering conversion and want
to preserve the precise appearance of the original text, try converting to
curves first. This technique, however, causes the lettering properties to be
lost.
Creating lettering in Embroidery mode

You can add lettering to a design by typing it directly on screen or entering it via
the Object Properties dialog.
Tip The size of your lettering will determine the type of underlay you need to
apply. Apart from stabilizing, underlay helps give loft or to raise your lettering
off the fabric. Lettering with heights under 5 mm should not have underlay.
Letters 6 mm to 10 mm can have a center-run underlay applied. Lettering larger
than 10 mm is large enough for edge-run underlay. See Stabilizing with
automatic underlays for details.
301
Adding embroidery lettering on-screen

Use Toolbox > Lettering to add lettering directly on screen.
objects.
If it is not essential to fit letters precisely to a certain area, you can type them
directly on screen as with a word processor. Current lettering settings are used.
You can change these before or after you digitize. You can also modify lettering
objects directly on screen to achieve various artistic effects.
To add embroidery lettering on-screen
1 Click the Lettering icon.
2 Select a color from the color palette.
3 Click where you want to insert the text and start typing.
Tip To start a new line, press Shift+Enter.
4 Press Enter to complete.
5 Click the Generate Stitches icon or press G.
Note Appearance and layout depend on current settings in the Object

Properties dialog. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a
design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve
lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline. See Working
with lettering baselines for details.
Creating lettering with Object Properties

Right-click Toolbox > Lettering to enter text in the dialog and adjust settings for
embroidery lettering.
objects.
Using the Object Properties dialog, you can specify letter formatting before
adding it to the design. This is the more traditional method and is useful with
more complex designs. EmbroideryStudio provides an alphabet range suitable
for many applications. Select from the supplied alphabets or convert any
TrueType font installed on your system. See also Standard Alphabets.
To create lettering with Object Properties
1 Right-click the Lettering icon.
302
The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.
Edit text
Click to create text

Select alphabet
Adjust formatting
Set justification
2 Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel in Text Options.
To start a new line of lettering, press Enter.
Tip You can insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret (^)
symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette.
3 Select an alphabet from the dropdown list. See Selecting alphabets and fonts
for details.
A sample character of the chosen alphabet appears in the preview window.
See also Standard Alphabets.
Scroll to preview
available alphabets
4 Click the Use saved version checkbox if you want to use saved user-refined
lettering in preference to the default. See User-refined alphabets for details.
Use user-refined
lettering
User-refined letter
a used for
smaller sizes
303
Note User-refined lettering lets you use multiple versions of the same
character. Each version can have a unique height range.
6 Adjust formatting and baseline settings for the lettering as required. See
Working with lettering baselines for details. See Formatting lettering for
details.
7 Click Create Text and click in the design window to create the text on screen.
8 Click the Generate Stitches icon or press G.
Note Appearance and layout depend on current settings in the Object

Properties dialog. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a
design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve
lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline. See Working
with lettering baselines for details.
Selecting alphabets and fonts

EmbroideryStudio offers a range of purpose-built embroidery alphabets
optimized for embroidery design work. A table in the appendix includes all
alphabets that are standard with your EmbroideryStudio software. See
Standard Alphabets for details.
Scroll to preview
available alphabets
Tip Consider letter size before you change alphabets. Some alphabets look best
in a smaller size. Others can be stitched at a larger size. See also Adjusting letter
height and width.
Recommended sizes
For best results when stitching, do not exceed the recommended maximum or
minimum sizes. Note, however, that recommended maximum and minimum
heights refer to UPPER CASE letters. Most embroidery fonts are digitized from
an original TrueType Font (TTF), some of which have lower-case letters e.g. a
and c which are about 70% the height of a capital letter. As a result, these
letters may be too small to embroider neatly. You may need to increase the size
of the lower-case characters to suit the embroidery. See also Standard
Alphabets.
Special characters
You can create special characters in each alphabet by holding down the Alt key
on your keyboard and typing 0 (zero), its code, using the numbers on the
keypad. For example, to type with the code 234, type Alt+0234. The
304
accented letter will appear when you release the Alt key. See also Adding special
characters and symbols.
Note Not all characters are available in all alphabets.
Conversion of TrueType fonts
In addition to dedicated embroidery alphabets, EmbroideryStudio also
converts any TrueType font installed on your system on-the-fly into an
embroidery alphabet. This is an important feature for Asian alphabets which may
contain several thousands of characters.
Scroll to preview
available TrueType
fonts
The process is fully automatic. The result is similar to manually digitized

alphabets although the quality may not be quite as high. The quality greatly
depends on the original shapes, narrower serif type alphabets producing better
results than blocked alphabets.
It is also possible to select TrueType fonts in CorelDRAW and convert them

on-the-fly via Convert mode. See Creating lettering in Graphics mode for
details.
Working with lettering baselines

Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a design. You can place
lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve lettering around a circle
or arc, or digitize your own baseline. Different reference points are needed
305
depending on the baseline you use. You can digitize baselines on-screen or, if
you are working from an enlargement drawing, on a digitizing tablet.
Baselines use default settings to determine their size, spacing and angles.
EmbroideryStudio gives you both interactive and precise numerical control
over many baseline settings. Techniques are available to modify baseline type,
length, radius and angle, as well as baseline position. You can numerically define
the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself.
Applying baselines
Right-click Toolbox > Lettering to select baselines and adjust baseline settings.
You can select different baselines through the Object Properties > Special
dialog. You can also adjust baseline settings. You can apply baselines to existing
objects or pre-set a baseline for new lettering objects.
To apply a baseline
1 Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon.
Select baseline
2 Select a baseline from the list.

The baseline you choose depends on the effect you want to achieve. Options
include:
306
Horizontal (Free Line and Fixed Line): See Applying horizontal baselines
for details.
Vertical (Free Line Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical): See Applying
vertical baselines for details.
Arc (Arc CW and Arc CCW): See Applying arc baselines for details.
Circle (Circle CW and Circle CCW): See Applying circular baselines for
details.
Custom (Any Shape): See Applying custom baselines for details.
307
Predefined: See Using predefined baselines for details.
3 Adjust baseline settings in the Layout dialog. See Adjusting baselines for
details.
Applying horizontal baselines

Free Line and Fixed Line baselines are straight, horizontal baselines. Free Line
does not have a fixed or pre-determined length the baseline extends as long
as you keep adding letters. Fixed Line has a fixed length which you can digitize
or specify numerically. If the text extends beyond the baseline, letter spacing is
reduced and letters may overlap. The letter width, however, does not change.
To apply horizontal baselines

1 Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object Properties
for details.
2 Select the horizontal baseline you want to apply.
For variable-length horizontal lines, enter your text in the Object

Properties dialog and select Free Line. Click the screen to establish the
start-point of the baseline.
Free Line Click
on-screen to mark start
point
Fixed Line Click on-screen

to mark start and end points
For fixed-length horizontal lines, enter your text in the Object Properties
dialog and select Fixed Line. Click the screen to establish the start and
end points of the baseline.
4 Define lettering orientation by marking reference points.
308
Tip You can adjust baseline settings at any stage. See Adjusting fixed-width
baseline settings for details.
Applying vertical baselines

Vertical baselines are effective for embroidering on sleeves, as a
decorative effect, and for Asian text. There are two types Free Line
Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical. Free Line Vertical baselines do not have
a fixed length, and extend to fit the letters you enter. Fixed Line Vertical
baselines are a fixed length. Letter spacing may be compressed to make
the letters fit.
Line spacing is calculated horizontally while letter spacing is calculated
vertically. Letters, by default, are centered along vertical lines. New lines
are placed by default from right to left to suit Asian languages.
Tip For Western languages, vertical lettering is best suited to uppercase
because descenders in lowercase letters are not accommodated in the
letter spacing.
To apply a vertical baseline
for details.
2 Select the vertical baseline you want to apply.
For variable-length vertical lines, enter your text in the Object Properties
dialog and select Free Line Vertical. Click the screen to establish the
start-point of the baseline.
Free Line Vertical

click the screen to
mark mid-point
Fixed Line Vertical click

the screen to mark start and
end points
For fixed-length vertical lines, enter your text in the Object Properties
dialog and select Fixed Line Vertical. Click the screen to establish the
start and end points of the baseline.
You can define any angle depending on where you mark the reference
points.
309
Note You can adjust baseline settings at any stage. See Adjusting
fixed-width baseline settings for details.
Applying arc baselines

Use Arc Clockwise (Arc CW) and Arc Counter-Clockwise (Arc CCW)
baselines to place lettering objects in a curved arc. You can place the lettering
clockwise (CW) or counter-clockwise (CCW) along the arc. By default, letters are
positioned above the Arc CW and below the Arc CCW baseline. They are also
centered by default.
To apply arc baselines

for details.
2 Select Arc CW or Arc CCW as a baseline.
4 Mark the start and end points of the arc.
Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments.
5 Move the pointer up or down to increase the radius of the arc.
6 Mark a third point above the first two points for Arc CW, and below them for
Arc CCW baseline.
3
Arc clockwise
Arc anti-clockwise
7 Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches.

Depending on the order in which you mark the reference points, the text will
be placed left to right, or right to left.
310
Applying circular baselines

Use Circle Clockwise (Circle CW) or Circle Counter-Clockwise (Circle CCW)
baseline to place letters around a full circle or oval.
To apply circular baselines

for details.
2 Select Circle CW or Circle CCW as a baseline.
4 Mark the center of the circle.
5 Mark a point on the circumference to define the radius.
6 Mark a third point to define an ellipse or press Enter directly for a perfect
circle.
As soon as Enter is pressed, the letters of your text are distributed around
the circle. See Formatting lettering for details.
311
Applying custom baselines

Use Any Shape baselines to shape lettering around elements in your design.
Digitize Any Shape baselines by marking reference points to form the required
line. The number of reference points and length of baseline are practically
unlimited.
Tip If the baseline has tight curves, or sharp corners, the letters may overlap.
For best results, only mark curve points, and digitize lines which have shallow,
gentle curves.
To apply custom baselines
for details.
2 Select Any Shape as a baseline.
4 Mark the baseline reference points.
Mark curve points with the right mouse button.

Mark corner points with the left mouse button.
3
1
5 Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches.
Using predefined baselines

Use Predefined baselines to quickly create three rows of
lettering, or two rows surrounding a design object. This
technique is typically used for creating logos.
To use a predefined baseline
1 With no objects selected, right-click the Lettering
icon.
312
Enter two or three

lines of text
Select options
and adjust
settings
2 Enter two or three lines of text in the text entry panel.

To start a new line of lettering, press Enter.
Tip If you want to insert a logo or design between the top and bottom lines,
leave the middle line of text blank.
3 Select the alphabet and adjust other settings you require. See Selecting
alphabets and fonts and Formatting lettering for details.
Select Predefined
baseline
4 Select Predefined from the baseline list.

5 Click OK.
6 Click where you want to place the lettering and drag the cursor downward.
7 Click to enter a point on the circumference of the circle.
8 Mark another point if you want to create an oval, or press Enter for a circular
baseline.
9 Press G to generate stitches.
313
The lines of text are generated and dispersed around the baseline you have
defined. Each line of text becomes a separate lettering object.
Formatting lettering
You can control lettering appearance by changing formatting settings in the
Object Properties dialog. Change current formatting settings before or after
adding lettering. You can slant letters to left or right for an italic effect. Use the
justification setting left, right, center, or fully justified to align lettering along
the baseline.
To format lettering
1 Create a new lettering object and select it. See Creating lettering with Object
Properties for details.
2 If not already open, open the Object Properties > Special > Lettering
dialog.
Adjust lettering height
in millimeters
Adjust lettering width
as percentage
Enter italic angle
Set lettering justification
314
3 Adjust lettering height and width using the slider controls.
Tip Say, for example, you are using the metric measurement system so your
lettering heights are in mm. And say you get an order for " lettering. Simply
enter 3/4in or 3/4 in into the Lettering Height field and it is automatically
converted to 19.05mm. See also Setting measurement units.
4 Enter an angle, 45, in the Italic field to create slanted lettering 0 is
equivalent to no italics.
Italic angle 25
Italic angle 0
Italic angle -10
5 Select a justification setting as required Left, Centered, Right or Full.
Left
Centered
Right
6 To make bold lettering, select the Pull Comp tab.

Select Pull Comp tab
Increase pull compensation

or column width
7 Select Column Width or Pull Compensation as required. See

Compensating for fabric stretch for details.
315
letter formatting, and adjust letter size and spacing.
Adjusting letter spacing

Letter, word and line spacings can be determined before or after creating
lettering objects and placing them in your design. You can edit spacing directly
on screen or via the dialog. Letter spacing is calculated automatically according
to justification left, right, centered, or fully justified. See also Formatting
lettering.
Note When the justification setting is Full, letters are evenly distributed along
the baseline. To change the spacing for fully justified lettering, simply change
the length of the baseline.
Adjusting overall letter spacing on screen

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to change letter spacing.
The spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of the
letter height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes,
however, you may want to change the overall letter spacing.
To adjust overall letter spacing on screen
1 Select the lettering object and click the Reshape Object icon.
Drag letter spacing

control point
2 Drag the letter spacing control point left or right to adjust the spacing of all
letters along the baseline.
316
3 Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc.
Adjusting individual letter spacings

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to change individual letter
spacing.
Spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of letter
height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes, however,
spacing between certain letters may appear too large or too small, depending
on the shape of neighboring letters. To compensate for this visual effect, you can
move one or several selected letters closer or further apart along the baseline
to improve spacing.
To adjust individual letter spacings
1 Select the lettering object and click the Reshape Object icon.
2 Click the diamond control point in the center of the letter.
Hold down Ctrl and

click diamond
control points
Tip To select multiple letters or a range of letters, hold down Ctrl or Shift as
you select.
3 Drag selected letter/s along the baseline or use arrow keys to adjust the
spacing.
Tip Alternatively, to move multiple letters, right-click the diamond control

point of the first letter and drag. All letters to the end of the line move as one.
Adjusting line spacing on screen

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to change line spacing.
317
Change the space between lines in a multiple-line lettering object using the
Reshape Object tool.
To adjust line spacing on screen
1 Select the lettering object and click Reshape Object.
2 Drag the line spacing control point up or down to change line spacing.
Drag line spacing

control point
Line spacing
increased
Adjusting spacing settings

You can adjust letter, word and line spacings in lettering objects at any stage via
To adjust spacing settings
1 Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon.
Enter values as
absolutes (mm) or
percentages
2 Enter Spacing values as absolute values (mm) or percentages of the height.
Letter Spacing: the space between letters.
318
Word Spacing: the space between words.
Line Spacing: the space between lines.
Note Whether you enter a percentage or absolute value, the other updates
automatically.
Tip If you want to remove spacing between words, set Word Spacing to
0%.
319
Chapter 15
Editing Embroidery Lettering
EmbroideryStudio gives you interactive and precise numeric control over many
settings affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual letters and lettering
objects as a whole. Apply horizontal, vertical, and curved baselines. Modify
baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as position. You can even define
the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design itself.
This section describes how to edit lettering text. It also explains how to scale
and transform lettering objects. It also covers adjusting individual letters as well
as reshaping baselines on screen.
Editing lettering text

When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make changes
to it directly on screen or by adjusting object properties.
Editing lettering text on screen

Use Toolbox > Lettering to edit lettering on screen.
With EmbroideryStudio you have the option of editing lettering directly on
screen.
To edit lettering text on screen
1 Click Lettering and then click inside the lettering object.
320
An I-beam appears where you click.

I-beam
2 Edit the text as required.

The lettering shows its wire frame.
Tip Press Shift+Enter to start a new line.

Editing lettering object properties

When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make changes
to it by adjusting object properties.
To edit lettering object properties
1 Double-click the lettering object.
321
Edit text
Click to update text

Select alphabet
Adjust formatting
Set justification
2 Make any other adjustments you require. See Formatting lettering for details.
3 Click the Update Text button.
Letters are updated according to current settings. See also Setting lettering
stitch types.
Scaling lettering
When you first create lettering, it may be too big or too small. Size can be
adjusted in three ways:
By scaling on screen with the Select Object or Reshape Object tools

By adjusting width and height settings in the Object Properties > Special
> Lettering dialog
By adjusting width and height settings in the General Properties bar.
Chapte r 15 Editing Embroider y Lettering
322
Tip The size of your lettering will determine the type of underlay you need to
apply. Apart from stabilizing, underlay helps give loft or to raise your lettering
off the fabric. Lettering with heights under 5 mm should not have underlay.
Letters 6 mm to 10 mm can have a center-run underlay applied. Lettering larger
than 10 mm is large enough for edge-run underlay. See Stabilizing with
automatic underlays for details.
Scaling lettering with Select Object

Use Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object to scale lettering objects on
screen.
You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally
with the Select Object tool. See also Transforming lettering with Select Object.
To scale lettering with Select Object
1 Click Select Object and select the lettering object.
Selection handles appear around the lettering object.
Drag to resize
Proportionally
Drag to resize Vertically
Drag to resize
Horizontally
2 Click-and-drag one of the selection handles to resize the object horizontally,

vertically or proportionally.
A shadow outline shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag.
Drag
3 Release the mouse to complete.
Scaling lettering with Reshape Object

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to scale lettering objects
on screen.
with the Reshape Object tool. See also Rotating lettering with Reshape Object.
To scale lettering with Reshape Object
1 Select the lettering object.
323
2 Click Reshape Object.

Drag to resize Vertically
Drag to resize Proportionally
Drag to resize Horizontally
3 Click-and-drag one of the dark triangular control points to resize the object
horizontally, vertically or proportionally.
A bounding box shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag.
Drag
4 Release the mouse to complete and press Esc.
Adjusting letter height and width

Use Toolbox > Lettering to adjust letter height and width.
You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and proportionally via
the Special tab of the Object Properties.
To adjust letter height and width
1 Double-click the lettering object.
Adjust lettering height
in millimeters
Adjust lettering width
as percentage
2 In the Height field enter the height of your lettering object in millimeters.
Note Letter height can vary between roughly 5mm and 200mm. For
recommended sizes, see Standard Alphabets.
3 Enter the width of your lettering object in the Width field as a percentage of
the height.
324
For wide letters, increase the percentage e.g. 140%.

For narrow letters, decrease the percentage e.g. 70%.
Width 100%
Width 70%
Width 140%
Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in

proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.
Adjusting lettering dimensions

using the general properties.
To adjust lettering dimensions
The current dimensions of the selected object appear in the Property Bar.
Adjust width and
height settings
2 Adjust width and height settings either as absolute values (mm) or as a

percentage of the current settings.
Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in
proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.
3 Press Enter.
Original
Width and height
125%
Tip When you enter a value in either width or height fields, the percentage
is automatically calculated. To resize proportionally, copy this value to the
other field and press Enter.
325
Transforming lettering objects

Apart from scaling, you can use the Select Object and Reshape Object tools
to skew and rotate lettering objects. See also Scaling lettering.
Transforming lettering with Select Object

Use Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object to transform lettering objects on
screen.
You can transform lettering objects by manipulating control points on screen
with the Select Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.
To transform lettering with Select Object
1 Click Select Object and select the lettering object.
The selection handles appear. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.
2 Click the lettering object again.
Another set of control points appears. These let you rotate and skew the
lettering object.
Rotation point
Drag to skew
Drag to rotate
3 Click-and-drag one of the diamond-shaped control points to skew the

lettering object horizontally.
A shadow outline shows the skewed lettering object as you drag.
Drag
4 Click-and-drag one of the hollow square control points to rotate the lettering
object.
326
A shadow outline shows the rotated lettering object as you drag.

Rotation
point
Drag
Tip Click-and-drag the rotation point itself to a new position before rotating.
Drag
Rotation
point
5 Release the mouse to complete.
Rotating lettering with Reshape Object

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to rotate lettering objects
on screen.
You can rotate lettering objects by manipulating control points on screen with
the Reshape Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.
To rotate lettering with Reshape Object
Control points appear around the lettering object.
3 Click-and-drag up or down one of the solid square control points on the
baseline to rotate the lettering object.
A baseline shows the rotated position of the lettering object as you drag.
Click and drag up or down
327
Adjusting individual letters

As well as scaling and rotating lettering objects,
the Reshape Object tool is used to manipulate
individual letters. You can reposition letters in
relation to each other, scale, rotate and skew
them, as well as reshape them. You can also
recolor letters individually.
Repositioning letters on screen

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reposition individual
letters on screen.
You can reposition individual letters in a lettering object using the Reshape
Object tool. See also Adjusting individual letter spacings.
To reposition letters on screen
Click diamond control points
Tip To select multiple or a range of letters, hold down Ctrl or Shift as you
select.
4 Click-and-drag the letter to the new position:
To move the letter horizontally, drag it along the baseline. See Adjusting
individual letter spacings for details.
To move the letter vertically, hold down Shift as you drag.

To move the letter freely, hold down Ctrl as you drag.
328
Transforming individual letters on screen

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to transform individual
letters on screen.
You can transform individual letters by manipulating control points on screen
with the Reshape Object tool.
To transform individual letters on screen
Control points appear.
3 Click the diamond control point of a letter.

Another set of reshape nodes appear around the letter.
Drag to scale
letter height
Drag to scale letter proportionally
Drag to skew
Drag to scale letter width
Drag to rotate
4 Click-and-drag a reshape node around the letter to transform it.

Drag to
skew
5 Press Esc to finish.
Reshaping individual letters

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape individual
letters on screen.
329
Create special lettering effects by reshaping letter outlines with the Reshape
Object tool.
To reshape individual letters
1 Select the lettering object and click Reshape Object.
Control points appear around the lettering object along with the Reshape
toolbar.
2 Click the letter outline.
Control points appear around the outline. You can turn on or off reshape
nodes, control handles, stitch angles, and entry/exit points as required.
Click letter outline
3 Select reshape nodes by any of the following means:
Drag a selection marquee around the reshape nodes you require.

Holding down Ctrl, select individual nodes.
Holding down Shift, left- or right-click start and end nodes.
Draw selection marquee

to select group of nodes
Hold down Ctrl and click to

select individual nodes
Hold down Shift and left- or

right-click to select range
4 Reshape the letter by adding, deleting and dragging the reshape nodes, and
press Enter. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Reshape by adding,
deleting and dragging
reshape nodes
5 Modify control handles by clicking-and-dragging. See Reshaping objects with

Bzier controls for details.
330
6 Adjust the stitch angles as required and press Enter. See Adding stitch angles
in Reshape mode for details.
Tip Holding down the Ctrl key, click the outline wherever you want to place
an additional stitch angle line.
7 Adjust the entry/exit points as required and press Enter. See Smoothing
curves for details.
Adjust
entry/exit points
Tip You can select and delete multiple nodes on a single segment. If there
are fewer than four nodes remaining, the segment itself is deleted. However,
if the letter includes more than one segment, those remaining are still viable.
Tip The Stitch Angle and Reshape Object tools let you add, delete, or
adjust stitch angles in lettering objects. See Adding stitch angles in Reshape
mode for details.
Recoloring letters on screen

Use Toolbox > Lettering to recolor letters on screen.
EmbroideryStudio lets you change the color of individual letters within a
lettering object.
Tip You can also insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret
(^) symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette. See
Creating lettering with Object Properties for details.
331
To recolor letters on screen

1 Click Lettering then click within the lettering object.
2 Select a letter (or letters) by dragging the cursor over the letter.
Drag cursor over

letter to select
3 Click a color on the color palette.

4 Press Enter.
Adjusting baselines
Baselines can be modified after placement either directly on-screen or via the
Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. With the exception of Free
Line, baselines allow you to set the final length of the finished lettering. Once
you have placed a baseline, EmbroideryStudio attempts to fit all the letters
without altering the baseline length.
Tip As a baseline is filled with letters, letter spacing decreases. Eventually,
letters may overlap. If so, you can adjust the baseline length to accommodate
them, or change the lettering width in the Object Properties > Special >
Lettering dialog.
Reshaping baselines on-screen

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape lettering
baselines.
Baselines can be adjusted on-screen after they have been placed in the design
with the Reshape Object tool. Depending on the baseline type you are working
with, you can adjust baseline angles, lengths, and sizes. You can change curve
radii and justification points. You can completely reshape Any Shape baselines.
332
Tip For more precise numeric control over lettering layout, use the Layout
dialog. See Adjusting fixed-width baseline settings and Adjusting curved
baseline settings for details.
To reshape a baseline on-screen
Select the lettering object and click the Reshape Object icon.
Different control points display for different baselines.
Baseline control
points
Tip The large diamond and cross represent stitching start and end points.
You may need to move them to access baseline control points. See Reshaping
individual letters for details.
Change angles of straight baselines by dragging the solid square control

points at either end.
Drag up/down to change

baseline angle
Create an arc baseline from a circular one by dragging the hollow square
control point apart.
Drag left or right to change

circle baseline to arc
333
Change lettering orientation of arc baselines by dragging the solid square

control points at either end.
Drag along circumference to

change baseline length
Tip The exact letter positions depend on the justification left, center, right
or justified. If the baseline becomes too short, letter spacing is reduced, and
letters may overlap.
Change the radius of curved baselines by dragging the solid square control
point in the center of the circle.
Drag up or down to
change radius of
curve
Alternatively, change the radius of curved baselines by dragging the solid

square control point in the center of the baseline.
Drag up or down to
change radius of
curve
334
Adjust Any Shape baselines by adding, deleting, changing or moving

reference points like any embroidery object. See also Reshaping embroidery
objects.
Left or right-click on the

baseline to add
Drag any control

point up or down
To reshape, left-click to bend the line at an angle, right-click to bend into

a curve.
To re-position, drag any one of the baseline control points up or down.
Drag to change curvature
To delete, select a control point and press Delete.

To change straight to curve, or curve to straight, select the control point
and press Spacebar.
Press Esc to finish.
Adjusting fixed-width baseline settings

Use Toolbox > Lettering to adjust baseline settings.
A free-line baseline does not have a fixed or pre-determined length the
baseline extends as long as you keep adding letters. A fixed-line baseline has a
fixed length which you can digitize or specify numerically. Various options are
available to handle text that extends beyond the baseline. See also Applying
horizontal baselines and Applying vertical baselines.
Tip Precise control over baseline width is important when combined with Team
Names when you want to ensure all names fit within the same area such as a
pocket. See also Creating teamname designs.
To adjust fixed-width baseline settings
1 Double-click a selected lettering object/s.
335
Click to lay out

baseline
2 Click Layout.
The Layout dialog opens. The baseline options depend on the type of
baseline selected.
Adjust length and

angle values
Select auto
frame style
3 Select a horizontal, vertical, or arc baseline from the list.

Free-line baselines only allow you to adjust the Line Angle value. Fixed-line
baselines allow control over line length as well as options for handling text
which does not fit the baseline. This is particularly useful for multiple team
names. See Team Lettering for details.
4 For fixed-line baselines, select an auto-frame style:
Spacing: Letter size and width stays the same and letters are spaced
evenly along the baseline. Letters may overlap if the text is too wide.
Width: The width of each letter is reduced and the original spacing kept.
Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width and height is reduced

proportionally but the original spacing remains.
Spacing and Width: Letter width and spacing is reduced.
336
Spacing and Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width, height and spacing
is reduced proportionally.
5 Adjust the Length and Line Angle values as required.
Length: Enter the default length of fixed-line baselines. For free-line

baselines this is not available.
Line Angle: Enter the exact angle of the baseline to the horizontal axis.
6 Select a baseline position.

Baseline
below
Baseline
centered
Baseline
above
When creating lettering for a badge, for example:
For lettering above the badge, select a baseline below.

For lettering below the badge, select a baseline above.
For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a centered
baseline.
7 Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting letter
spacing for details.
8 Select a letter orientation. See Changing letter orientation for details.
9 Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special.
Adjusting curved baseline settings

Use Toolbox > Lettering to adjust baseline settings.
Adjust circle and arc baseline settings for more precise numeric control over
radius (X and Y), as well as tilt, justification, and arc angles.
337
Tip For interactive control over lettering layout, see Reshaping baselines
on-screen.
To adjust curved baseline settings
1 Double-click a selected lettering object/s.
Click to lay out

baseline
2 Click Layout.
The Layout dialog opens. The baseline options depend on the type of
baseline selected.
Adjust Tilt, Radius X,

Radius Y, Justification and
Arc Angle values
3 Select a circle or arc baseline type from the list.

The Tilt, Radius X, Radius Y, Justification Angle and Arc Angle fields are
activated.
4 Adjust these values as required:
Radius X: default radius of the baseline arc (X-axis).

Radius Y: default radius of the baseline arc (Y-axis).
Radius X: 50
Radius Y: 50
Radius X: 100
Radius Y: 50
Radius X: 50
Radius Y: 100
338
Tilt: angle of the baseline relative to the horizontal axis.
Tilt angle 0
Tilt angle 45
Note The Tilt field is activated when Radius X and Radius Y values are
different.
Justification Angle: angle of the vertical axis through the lettering object
relative to the horizontal axis.
Justification
angle 90
Justification
angle 45
Arc Angle: angle between radii connecting ends of baseline to center of

arc. This constrains the baseline so the text falls within the arc specified.
Arc angle 100
Arc angle 70
Tip Precise control over baseline width is important when combined with
Team Names when you want to ensure all names fit within the same area
such as a pocket. A fixed width on arch baselines can be set by adjusting Arch
Angle value in the Baseline panel. See also Creating teamname designs.
5 Select a baseline position.
Baseline
below
Baseline
centered
Baseline
above
When digitizing lettering for a badge, for example:
For lettering above the badge, select a clockwise circle or arc with baseline
below.
For lettering below the badge, select a counterclockwise circle or arc with
baseline above.
For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a fixed line
with baseline centered.
339
6 For fixed-line baselines, select an auto-frame style. See Adjusting

fixed-width baseline settings for details.
7 Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting letter
spacing for details.
8 Select a letter orientation. See Changing letter orientation for details.
9 Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
Changing letter orientation

You can define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design
itself. The latter lets you keep letters vertical regardless of baseline angle in
order to achieve a staircase effect.
To change letter orientation

1 Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.
Click to lay out

baseline
2 Click Layout to open the Layout dialog.

3 Select an Orientation setting.
Select orientation
relative to baseline
or design
Set orientation
angle
Baseline: orients letters relative to the lettering baseline.

Design: orients letters relative to the horizontal.
4 Enter an orientation angle.
Baseline angle: 0
Orientation: 10 to baseline
Baseline angle: 0
Orientation: 60 to design
340
5 Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.

341
Chapter 16
Advanced Embroidery Lettering
EmbroideryStudio provides a variety of

advanced editing techniques for
fine-tuning your lettering designs. Add
special characters and symbols to your
lettering as desired. By default, lettering
objects are filled with Satin stitch. Apply
other basic fill stitch types as with all
embroidery objects.
Specify the sequence in which letters are
stitched to minimize registration
problems. The automatic kerning feature
improves lettering appearance and
legibility by fine-tuning spacings between
character pairs. Alternatively, fine-tune
letter spacing according to the number of
characters per lettering object. This is particularly useful for use with Asian
alphabets. Lettering appearance and quality can be improved by the correct
selection of underlay. Apply Envelope effects to lettering objects to make them
bulge or arch, stretch or compress.
This section shows you how to add special characters and symbols. It describes
changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects, and adjusting lettering stitch
angles. It also explains how to adjust the lettering stitching sequence as well as
lettering join method. Automatic letter kerning and letter spacing are discussed.
Lettering underlay is also discussed. It also describes how to create special
effects with envelopes.
Adding special characters and symbols

Embroidery and TrueType fonts generally contain many more characters than
are available via your keyboard. In EmbroideryStudio, you can add special
characters and symbols directly through the Select Symbols dialog or by
means of the Windows Character Map.
Inserting symbols
Use Toolbox > Lettering to add special characters and symbols. Right-click to
select lettering options.
You can quickly add special characters and symbols to your lettering designs.
342
Tip If you know the keyboard shortcut for a symbol, add it to your lettering by
entering the combination on-screen or in the Object Properties > Special >
Lettering dialog.
To insert symbols
Click to insert
symbols
Tip If you already know the keyboard shortcut for a symbol, you can add it
to your lettering by entering the combination on screen or in the Object
Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
2 Click Insert Symbol.
The Symbol Selection dialog opens.
Show characters
Show pictures
Show pictures and

characters
Select alphabet
or symbol set
Select
symbols
Selected symbols
displayed
Click to add
Click to close
Click to delete
3 Select an alphabet or symbol set from the Symbol Set list.

4 Select the symbols you want to use.
The selected symbols are displayed in the Selection field.
5 Click OK.
The selected symbols are displayed in the text entry panel of the Object
Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
Note Click Delete to remove symbols displayed in the Selection field as
required.
343
7 Continue creating the lettering object in the normal way. See Creating
lettering with Object Properties for details.
Using the Character Map

Use the Windows Character Map to provide quick access to common symbols
and letters. The Character Map is usually installed as part of the Windows setup.
See your Windows documentation for more details.
To use the Character Map
1 Open the Windows Character Map.
By default, you will find it under Start > Programs > Accessories >
System Tools > Character Map.
Select font
Select symbols
or double-click
Click to
copy
Selected symbols
displayed
Click to
select
2 Select a font from the Font list.

3 Double-click a character, or select it and press Select.
The character/s appear in the Characters to copy field.
4 Click Copy to copy the character to the clipboard.
5 Paste it into the text entry panel of the Object Properties > Special >
Lettering dialog.
To do this, click inside the text entry panel and press Ctrl+V.
Tip You can also paste characters and symbols into an external graphics
program to use as the basis for creating your own custom characters. See
Digitizing custom letters for details.
Chapter 1 6 Advanced Embroid er y Lettering
344
Setting lettering stitch types

By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. You can also apply other
basic fill stitch types, such as Tatami or Zigzag, as with other embroidery
objects. See Selecting stitch types for details.
Note Lettering values are stored in the <PRESET_LETTERING> style in the

Normal template. Changing these does not affect the values of other objects. Do
not delete or rename this style. See Working with styles for details.
Adjusting Satin settings for lettering

Right-click Stitch Types > Satin to adjust Satin values for lettering objects.
By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. Where a letter is narrow,
stitches are tight, thus requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric. Where a
column is very narrow, stitches need to be less dense because too many needle
penetrations can damage the fabric. See also Creating Satin fills.
To adjust Satin settings for lettering
1 Double-click the selected lettering object.
2 Select the Fills tab and Satin stitch from the Stitch Type list.
345
Alternatively, right-click the Satin icon with the lettering object selected.
Select Satin
Adjust stitch settings

as required
3 Select the type of stitch spacing you want for your lettering.
For Fixed Spacing, clear the Auto Spacing checkbox and select a value (in
millimeters) in the Stitch Spacing field. For more open stitching, select a
higher value for decreased stitch density. See Applying Satin stitch with
fixed spacing for details.
For Auto Spacing, select the Auto Spacing checkbox and specify the
amount of adjustment to make to the spacings as a % value. See Applying
Satin stitch with auto-spacing for details.
Auto Spacing ON
Stitch Density 100 %
Auto Spacing OFF
Auto Spacing ON
Stitch Density 60 %
Adjusting Tatami settings for lettering

Right-click Stitch Types > Tatami to adjust Tatami values for lettering objects.
You can fill lettering shapes with Tatami stitching. It is suitable for filling large,
irregular lettering shapes. See also Creating Tatami fills.
To adjust Tatami settings for lettering
1 Double-click the selected lettering object.
346
2 Select the Fills tab and Tatami stitch from the Stitch Type list.
Alternatively, right-click the Tatami icon with the lettering object selected.
Select Tatami
Adjust stitch values

as required
3 Adjust stitch spacing to increase or decrease density.

4 Adjust stitch length to increase or decrease needle penetrations. See Creating
Tatami fills for details.
Stitch Length 5 mm
Stitch Length 2 mm

Stitch Length 3 mm
Adjusting Zigzag settings for lettering

Right-click Stitch Types > Zigzag to adjust Zigzag values for lettering objects.
Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle penetrates each side of the
column. But while Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal, Zigzag
produces two diagonal lines, thereby producing a more open stitch. It is
generally used for decorative effect or where fewer stitches are required. The
347
density is determined by the stitch spacing setting. See also Creating Zigzag
borders.
To adjust Zigzag settings for lettering
1 Double-click a selected lettering object.
2 Select the Fills tab and Zigzag stitch from the Stitch Type list.
Alternatively, right-click the Zigzag icon with the lettering object selected.
Select Zigzag
3 Enter a value in the Stitch Spacing field.

Stitch Spacing 1 mm
Stitch Spacing 3 mm
Stitch Spacing 2 mm
Setting stitching sequence and join method

You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize
registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. While the Closest Join
method is recommended in most cases to minimize trims, you may sometimes
348
want to use the As Digitized setting with alphabets which include multiple
colors, multiple stitch types, or special effects.
Adjusting letter sequencing

Click Toolbox > Lettering to adjust the lettering stitching sequence.
You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize
registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. For example, the
Center Out option is especially useful when stitching on caps. There are also
options for multiple lines of lettering which are useful for machines without
trimmers.
To adjust letter sequencing
Click Sequence
2 Click Sequence.
The Sequence dialog opens.
Adjust single line

stitching sequence
Adjust multiple line

stitching sequence
3 Select a stitching sequence. Options include:
In Line: Select whether you want the lettering to be stitched left-to-right

or right-to-left in each line.
Stitched right-to-left
Stitched left-to-right
Center Out: Select this checkbox if you want the lettering stitched from
the center out. You can specify that one side of the center is stitched
349
followed by the other, or that each letter is stitched alternatively on either

side of the center.
Right side stitched first
Left side stitched first
Line by Line: Choose whether you want multiple lines of lettering to stitch
top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top. You can also specify that the first line
should be stitched left-to-right, and the second right-to-left.
Stitched
top-to-bottom
Stitched
bottom-to-top
Note You can combine both In Line and Line by Line sequencing options.
4 Click OK to return to the Special tab.
Tip Travel through your design to check the stitching sequence. See Traveling
Changing lettering join method

Use Toolbox > Lettering to change the lettering join stitch method.
The lettering stitch method is preset to give the best results for each alphabet.
In most cases, Closest Join is recommended in order to minimize trims. See
Standard Alphabets for details.
The As Digitized setting is used with alphabets which include multiple colors or
special effects. Such alphabets may include machine functions, as for two-color
alphabets, or run stitches as part of the cover stitching.
Lettering objects normally consist of one stitch type only. However, the As
Digitized join method together with Original Stitch Values setting can be
350
used with special fonts which combine several stitch types e.g. Satin with
Run, or Tatami, or Motifs.
To adjust lettering join method
2 Click Sequence.
The Sequence dialog opens.
Select join method
Select Original Stitch
Values
3 Select a Stitch Method from the list:

Join
Purpose
Bottom Join
Letters are joined along the baseline. Use it when stitching on towelling
joins are hidden in the pile.
Closest Join
Letters are joined at the closest point. Use it to minimize trims.
As Digitized
Letters are stitched out the same way they were originally digitized.
Use it with alphabets combining different fill stitch types or special
effects.
Bottom Join
Closest Join
As Digitized
4 Select the Original Stitch Values checkbox as required.

This setting is only available if the As Digitized join type is selected. Select
it when using special fonts which combine several stitch types. If not selected,
these letters will be stitched with a single stitch type.
Closest Join
As Digitized Original Stitch

Values not selected
As Digitized Original
Stitch Values selected
Tip For the recommended stitch and join methods, see Standard Alphabets.
5 Click OK to return to the Special tab.
351
Setting automatic letter kerning

The automatic kerning feature improves lettering appearance and legibility by
fine-tuning spacings between character pairs. Typically spacing between certain
pairs looks uneven due to the optical illusion formed by mixing straight lines with
curves. Automatic kerning optimizes spacing between lettering pairs according
to preset values. While it works very well without customization, advanced users
can customize these values as they wish. Kerning tables can even be copied from
similar Windows fonts.
Applying automatic kerning

Right-click Toolbox > Lettering to adjust automatic kerning for selected lettering
objects.
The automatic kerning option is accessed by means of the Object Properties
dialog.
To apply automatic kerning
1 Double-click a lettering object.
Select or deselect
auto kerning
2 Scroll down to the Spacing panel.

If a kerning table exists for the selected alphabet or TrueType font, the Auto
Kerning checkbox is enabled and selected by default.
Note The Special > Alphabet > Update Kerning Values menu item is
disabled when the Auto Letter Spacing checkbox is enabled and checked.
See also Setting automatic letter spacing.
352
3 Select or deselect Auto Kerning as required and click Apply.
Note If the Auto Kerning checkbox is disabled, no kerning table exists for
the selected alphabet or TrueType font, or all the kerning values are set to
zero. See Managing user-refined letters for details.
Managing kerning tables

Use View > Object Properties to access kerning tables.
A kerning table is an array of kerning values for every possible pair of letters in
the alphabet. The Kerning Table command accesses a dialog used to manage
kerning tables. You can copy tables from one alphabet or TrueType font to an
embroidery alphabet or remove its kerning table altogether.
Note TrueType kerning tables cannot be replaced, added to, or modified in any
way. You can, however, convert a TrueType font to an embroidery alphabet and
add or modify a kerning table as required.
To manage kerning tables
1 Open the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
Select alphabet
Click to access
kerning table
2 Select an alphabet from the dropdown list.

3 Scroll down to the Spacing panel and click the Kerning Table button.
353
The Kerning Table dialog opens with the current (target) embroidery
alphabet displayed.
Current (target)
alphabet
Choose similar
alphabet or font
Copy kerning
table to current
alphabet
The Choose Source dropdown list displays all alphabets and TrueType fonts
that contain kerning tables.
Note The Zero Table command is enabled if the current (target) alphabet
already has a kerning table. If you click this button, you are prompted to
confirm removal of kerning information.
4 Choose a suitable alphabet or TrueType font from the list and click Copy
Source to Table to load its kerning table to the current embroidery alphabet.
If the current alphabet already contains a kerning table, you are prompted to
overwrite it.
Editing kerning values

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape selected
objects, edit stitch angles, and adjust start/end points.
You have created a lettering object which has Automatic Kerning toggled ON.
To edit kerning values
1 Select a lettering object with automatic kerning and click the Reshape icon.

3 Drag selected letter/s along the baseline or use arrow keys to adjust the
spacing. See Adjusting individual letter spacings for details.
Tip Alternatively, to move multiple letters, right-click the diamond control
point of the first letter and drag. All letters to the end of the line move as one.
4 Repeat as many times as necessary to fine-tune all letter spacings in the
object.
5 Select one or more blocks of contiguous letters by Ctrl-clicking their diamond
control points or dragging a selection box around them.
354
Each block may contain two or more letters.
6 Select Special > Alphabet > Update Kerning Values.

You are prompted with a confirmation message box stating that the operation
will affect letter spacing of new lettering objects.
7 Click OK.
A new kerning value is generated for each contiguous pair of selected letters
of the same alphabet or font, and written to the associated kerning table.
Setting automatic letter spacing

The Auto Letter Spacing feature allows you to fine-tune letter spacing
according to the number of characters per lettering object. EmbroideryStudio
automatically set the spacing according to a pre-defined spacing table. For
example, in a five-character lettering object, spacing may be set to 2mm, while
in a three-character lettering object, it may be increased to, say, 3mm.
Without Auto Letter

Spacing
With Auto Letter

Spacing
Tip The Auto Letter Spacing feature also works with the Team Names
feature. Any name frame can have a specified letter spacing just as it can
assume any other lettering property. See also Creating teamname designs.
To apply automatic letter spacing
1 Create or select a lettering object and double-click.
355
The Auto Letter Spacing checkbox is unticked by default in the Lettering

panel of the Object Properties dialog.
Auto Letter Spacing

checkbox unticked by
default
2 Select a baseline for use with Auto Letter Spacing.

Automatic letter spacing is available for all baselines. However, with fixed-line
and arch baselines, if the Fit Text options set in the Layout dialog employ
Spacing, Spacing and Width, or Spacing and Size options, then any
automatic spacing set by the user is ignored. With Width and Size options
selected, automatic letter spacing works normally. See also Adjusting
baselines.
Note Automatic Letter Spacing and Auto Kerning controls are mutually
exclusive. When one is selected, the other is disabled. See also Setting
automatic letter kerning.
3 Tick the Auto Letter Spacing checkbox.
The Letter Spacing height percentage and actual spacing value fields are
disabled but will still show the current percentage and actual values for the
selected lettering object(s), if possible.
4 Click the Letter Spacing Table button.
The Letter Spacing Table dialog is displayed. The dialog displays a table of
five length-value controls for lettering objects of two to six or more
characters.
5 Adjust spacings for each character grouping.

The topmost field for two characters will have a range of 0.10mm to
100.00mm. For the other fields, each will have its maximum value set the
same as the value immediately preceeding it.
6 Click OK.
With the Auto Letter Spacing checkbox checked:
356
For a lettering object with more than one line of text, the system will use
the longest line of text for the letter spacing.
Single line of text uses pre-defined

charactor length for letter spacing
Multiple lines of text uses character length

of longest line for letter spacing, in this case, 3
The letter spacing will remain fixed when resizing a lettering object. The
letter spacing table will not change even if individual letters are resized in
Reshape mode.
Letter resized - spacing stays the same
Setting lettering underlay

Right-click Stitch Effects > Auto Underlay to adjust lettering underlay settings.
Lettering appearance and quality depends a lot on underlay which serves as a
foundation for cover stitching. As well as stabilizing, underlay also provides loft,
raising cover stitches and preventing them from sinking into soft fabrics. It can
also prepare a napped fabric by flattening it.
Most lettering used in designs is 15 mm high or less. The columns at such sizes
are less than 3 mm wide for normal not heavy or block fonts. Such objects
are best served with a single Center Run or Edge Run underlay. Center Run
places a row of stitches along the center of a column. Edge Run places stitches
around the edge of each column. Large letters for jacket backs and so on, can
357
of course use a second layer of underlay. Double-zigzag is sometimes used to

give added loft. See also Underlays & Pull Compensation.
With most embroidery objects, underlay is stitched segment-by-segment before
cover stitches are sewn. Lettering underlay, however, defaults to a single By
Shape > Edge Run underlay, except in the case of As Digitized lettering. This
has the effect of calculating an underlay for the entire shape rather than each
segment comprising it. This in turn reduces bunching, travel runs, and overall
stitch count.
To set lettering underlay
1 Select a lettering object.
Select 1st underlay and

optionally select by shape
Select Edge Run
(or Center Run)
Adjust fixed or
variable run length
3 Select the First Underlay checkbox and select Center Run or Edge Run as
the First underlay type.
If you select Edge Run, a further By Shape option becomes available. When
activated, underlay is applied to the lettering object as a whole. This means
there is no duplication where segments join.
4 Select the By Segment or By Shape option as required.
Segments comprising letter
Underlay by segment
Underlay by shape
5 Enter the required length values for each underlay type. See Adjusting Center
Run and Edge Run underlay settings for details.
Tip Run Slow Redraw to see how the underlay will stitch out. See Simulating
design stitchouts for details.
358
Creating special effects with envelopes

Apply Envelope effects to lettering objects to make them bulge or arch, stretch
or compress.
Distorting lettering objects

Four types of Envelope effect are available Bridge, Pennant, Perspective
and Diamond.
Tip Envelopes are typically applied to lettering objects, but they can also be
applied to other types of embroidery object.
To distort lettering objects
1 Select the lettering object you want to distort.
Tip To apply an envelope to several objects, group them first, then apply the
envelope. See Grouping & ungrouping objects for details.
2 Select Edit > Envelope.
3 Select an envelope type from among the following alternatives:
Bridge
Pennant
Perspective
Diamond
Different handles display around the object outline depending on the

envelope type.
Bridge reshape
handles
4 Drag one or more handles up or down to distort the object.

Drag
359
To move two handles in opposite directions, hold the Shift key down while
dragging a handle.
Shift + drag
To move the handles in the same direction, hold down the Ctrl key while
dragging a handle.
Ctrl + drag
Editing text in envelopes

Use Toolbox > Lettering to edit letters in envelopes on-screen.
You can edit the lettering text in envelopes on-screen in the same way as normal
lettering. When you click inside the lettering, a duplicate displays below the
envelope.
To edit text in envelopes
1 Click the Lettering icon with the lettering object in an envelope selected.
Duplicate letters appear below the selected shape in their original form. The
cursor changes to an I-beam and appears after the last letter.
2 Click inside the duplicate lettering object and edit text as required.
Add letters at
I-beam cursor
Press Enter

The lettering in the envelope is updated.
Removing envelopes
Use Edit > Envelope > Delete to return an object to its original shape by removing the
envelope.
Return an object to its original shape by removing the envelope.
360
To remove envelopes
Select the lettering object.

Select Edit > Envelope > Delete.
The envelope is removed and the letters return to their original shape.
361
Chapter 17
Team Lettering
The Team Names feature lets you create designs with multiple names. For
example, you can use the same logo with different names for sports teams or
corporate uniforms, without having to create multiple copies of the same design.
Names are stored in lists that can be accessed from any design. You can add to
these lists, or remove names at any time.
Depending on how you want to stitch out, you can choose to save and stitch
names and designs separately, or together.
This section shows you how to set up teams and create teamname designs. It
also describes how to modify teamname designs and output them in a variety of
ways.
Setting up teams
When you use Team Names, names are stored in lists that can be accessed
from any design. You can add to these lists, or remove names at any time. To
associate a list of names with teamname objects, you first need to create a
team. Once created, names are available to all designs. Add members to a team
one-by-one or as a entire group.
Gaelic Football Club
Michael
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Henry
Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Fitzgerald
Fitzroy
Fitzjohn
Fitzmaurice
Fitzhenry
362
Creating teams
Use Toolbox > Team Names Flyout > Team Names to associate multiple names
with a design.
Create a new team to set up a list of associated names. Once you create a team,
the names in it are available to all designs.
Note Teams are stored in the Namedrop.emn file in your installations ..\res
folder. If the file becomes corrupted, copy ..\bin\namedrop.emn to
..\res\namedrop.emn. This will restore teams to default settings.
To create a team
1 Click the Team Names icon.
The Team Names dialog opens.
Add new
team
2 Click Add in the Team panel.

The Add Team dialog opens.
Enter team
name
3 Enter a name for the team and click OK.

The new name appears in the Teamname List. The Team Members panel
remains empty until you add names to it.
New team
4 Add members to the team as required:
See Adding individual members to teams for details.

See Adding multiple members to teams for details.
5 Click OK.
Adding individual members to teams

with a design.
You can add members to a team one-by-one or as a entire group. See also
Adding multiple members to teams.
363
To add individual members to a team

1 click the Team Names icon.
Select team
Add new
member
2 Select a team from the Teamname List, or create a new one. See Creating
teams for details.
3 Use the +Column or -Column buttons to establish the number of names for
each team member the default is three (3).
4 Click Add in the Team Members panel.
The Add Team Member dialog opens.
Michael
Add names
Patrick
Fitzpatrick
5 Enter the first name of the member in the Name 1 field.

6 Enter second, third, or more names as required.
7 Click OK.
Chapter 17 Team Lettering
364
The name is added to the Team Members list.
Name added
Michael
Patrick
Fitzpatrick
8 Add more names by the same method.

Alternatively, use the Quick Names feature to add an entire group. See
Adding multiple members to teams for details.
9 Edit the list as necessary by use of the Add, Delete and Edit buttons.
Adding multiple members to teams

with a design.
You can add members to a team one-by-one or as a entire group. Use this
procedure to add an entire group of names. See also Adding individual members
to teams.
To add multiple members to a team
Select team
Select Quick
Names
2 Select a team from the Teamname List, or create a new one. See Creating
teams for details.
3 Click Quick Names.
365
The Quick Names dialog opens.
Michael,Patrick,Fitzpatrick
Patrick,Simon,Fitzsimons
Simon,Gerald,Fitzgerald
Gerald,Roy,Fitzroy
Roy,John,Fitzjohn
John,Maurice,Fitzmaurice
Maurice,Henry,Fitzhenry
Enter names
4 Enter names in the format Name 1, Name 2, Name 3.

You can type in the names, or paste them in from a text file. Each name must
be separated by a comma. There is no need to add a space. Each complete
name must be on a new line.
5 Click OK.
The new names are added to the Team Members list.
Names added
Michael
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Henry
Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Fitzgerald
Fitzroy
Fitzjohn
Fitzmaurice
Fitzhenry
Add/edit/delete
names
6 Edit the list as necessary by means of Add, Delete and Edit buttons.
Creating teamname designs

with a design.
To associate team members with a design, you create a variable teamname
object. The teamname object may contain all the names in the selected team,
or a subset of those names. You can even combine members from different
teams is so desired.
366
To create a teamname design

1 Open the design you want to use.

Select team
Set naming
order
Add all or
selected names
Michael
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Henry
Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Fitzgerald
Fitzroy
Fitzjohn
Fitzmaurice
Fitzhenry
Michael
Patrick
Patrick
Simon
Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Click column
header to sort
names
alphabetically
Remove all or
selected names
3 Select a team from the Teamname List.

The names display in the Team Members list. See also Creating teams and
Adding multiple members to teams.
4 Select names to associate with the design from the Team Members list.
To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select.

To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select.
5 Click Add to add them to the Teamname List.
Alternatively, to add all names to the list, click Add All.
Selected names are copied to the Teamname List. The Naming Order
defaults to Name 1, Name 2, Name 3, etc.
Tip When you click Add, names are appended to list. Names may be added
more than once.
6 Select a layout for your team names via the Layout button. See Creating
teamname layouts for details.
7 Edit Teamname List members as required:
To sort a name within a list, select it and click Up or Down buttons.
367
To remove a name from the list, select it, and click Remove. To clear all
names from the Members Selected list, click Remove All.
To sort team names in ascending or descending order, click a column
header.
Tip If your layout contains more than one frame, you can sort the contents
of each frame in the same way as name columns. See also Creating
teamname layouts.
8 Optionally, click the Name Order button if you want to change the default
naming order.
The Name Order dialog opens. Use this option, for example, if you want to
put surnames before first and second names. You can also use this dialog to
limit which names are included e.g only first and third names. See also
Creating teamname layouts.
Change name order

as desired
9 Click OK.
Depending on your baseline selection, you may be prompted to enter
reference points. See Applying baselines for details.
EmbroideryStudio generates stitches for all selected names. The associated
Teamname List opens automatically.
Simon
Fitzgerald
Patrick
Fitzsimons
Roy
Fitzjohn
Gerald
Fitzroy
Maurice
Fitzhenry
John
Fitzmaurice
Roy
Fitzjohn
Select name to
view on-screen
10 Select names one-by-one to view them with the design. See also Viewing
teamname lists.
This section shows you how to set up teams and create teamname designs. It
also describes how to modify teamname designs and output them in a variety of
ways.
368
Creating teamname layouts

Use Toolbox > Team Names Flyout > Create Teamname Layout to save team
name layouts to a re-usable library.
The Team Names feature allows you to create multiple lines of text based on
pre-defined layouts. The layout library includes frames similar to WordArt
frames. Based on layout selection, team names will be formatted to fit within the
selected frame. You can set the number of lines a team name will appear on.
Once set, a filtered list of applicable frames from the library is displayed for
selection.
Applying layouts to teamname designs

Use Toolbox > Team Names Flyout > Team Names to select a layout for your
teamname design.
When creating your teamname designs, you can use a pre-set layout or a
custom layout based on artwork you may have received. See also Creating
teamname layouts.
To apply a layout to a teamname design
1 Open or create a teamname design. See Creating teamname designs for
details.
369
In the sample below, we are using two names on a single line Standard
layout.
Access
teamname
layouts
Jack Jones
Sydney
Atlanta
William Brown
London
David Johnson
Delhi
Mark Roberts
Sheffield
John Smith
2 Open the Team Names dialog via the Team Names Flyout or Teamname
List.
Select layout
3 Click the Layouts.

The Layouts dialog opens showing the currently selected layout.
Choose layout
set
370
4 Choose a layout set from the droplist which suits your design and the number
of name frames you are using.
Choose suitable
layout
5 Click OK to apply the selected layout.
6 Press G to generate stitching and use arrow keys to nudge the lettering into
position.
7 Use the Teamname List to select and view separate team members. See
Viewing teamname lists for details.
Jack Jones
Sydney
Atlanta
William Brown
London
David Johnson
Delhi
Mark Roberts
Sheffield
John Smith
Select name to
view on-screen
371
8 To reposition or modify a lettering object within a frame, first hold down the
Alt key and click to select it. See also Positioning objects.
Hold down Alt key

and click
Reposition as
necessary
Tip Holding down the Alt key to select objects within a group applies to any
group of objects, not just lettering. Individually tweak any of the objects
properties as desired. See Selecting objects within groups for details.
9 Edit lettering object properties and apply to all as desired. See Changing
teamname properties for details.
Edit properties and

apply to all
Creating teamname layouts

Use Toolbox > Team Names Flyout > Create Teamname Layout to save team name
layouts to a re-usable library.
Once you have created a team lettering design, you can save it as a layout for
future use with same or similar projects.
372
To create a teamname layout

1 Open the design you want to base your custom layout on.
2 Holding down the Ctrl key, select the lettering objects which will comprise the
layout.
In this case, we are saving the team name WILDCATS together with the
sport FOOTBALL.
Select lettering
for team name
layout
3 Click the Create Teamname Layout icon.

The Create Teamname Layout dialog opens.
Select a
layout set
Schools
Zetland High
373
4 Select a Layout Set from the dropdown or click New to create a new layout
set.
If you choose New, you will be prompted to enter a name in the New Layout
Set dialog.
Enter name
for layout set
Schools
5 Enter a name for you layout set as required and click OK.
6 Enter a name for the actual layout e.g. Zetland High and click OK.
7 Adjust the name order as required.
Use this option, for example, if you want to put surnames before first and
second names. You can also use it to limit which names are included e.g
only first and third names.
Adjust name
order
Tip Name order can also be set at design creation time via the Team Names
dialog. See also Creating teamname designs.
8 Click OK.
The last-saved layout becomes the default for subsequent teamname
projects.
Tip Add to the current project or create new projects based on this same
layout. See Applying layouts to teamname designs for details.
FOOTBALL
WILDCATS
BASEBALL
EAGLES
BASKETBALL
ALLEY CATS
Select team
member to view
374
Modifying teamname designs

You can preview individual team names in the design window and set properties
such as font, size or color for each name. You can also set properties for an
entire column of names.
Viewing teamname lists

Use Toolbox > Team Names Flyout > Teamname List to toggle team members
display on/off. Use it to view and edit individual team names.
You can preview individual team names in the design window as they will be
stitched out with the design. Add names, delete names, sort teamname lists,
change properties of some or all team members.
To view a teamname list
1 Open the teamname design you want to use. See also Creating teamname
designs.
2 Click the Teamname List icon.
The Teamname List dialog opens. By default all names are selected.
Select all team
members
Simon
Fitzgerald
Patrick
Fitzsimons
Michael
Fitzpatrick
Gerald
Fitzroy
Maurice
Fitzhenry
John
Fitzmaurice
Roy
Fitzjohn
375
3 Adjust positioning of the teamname group as required. See also Positioning

objects.
4 View team names in any of the following ways:
Select a team member name. The selected name displays on-screen with
the current lettering properties.
Use the arrows keys to scroll up and down the list to view each name in
turn.
Select name to
view on-screen
Simon
Fitzgerald
Patrick
Fitzsimons
Roy
Fitzjohn
Gerald
Fitzroy
Maurice
Fitzhenry
John
Roy
Fitzmaurice
Fitzjohn
5 Click list header to select a column of names use the Sort buttons to sort
lists in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Click to sort column

alphabetically
Click to select
column
Gerald
John
Fitzroy
Fitzmaurice
Maurice
Fitzhenry
Michael
Patrick
Roy
Fitzpatrick
Simon
Fitzgerald
Fitzsimons
Fitzjohn
376
6 Use the Teamname List tools to add names, delete names, change
properties, as required:
Tool Description
Use Team Names to add names to the design. See Creating teamname designs
for details.
Use Remove to delete either selected rows or the entire member list.
Use Select All to selected all list members for modification or positioning.
Use Sort Ascending to sort a selected column of names in ascending order.
Use Sort Descending to sort a selected column of names in descending order.
Use Object Properties to edit properties of selected rows, columns or all list
members. See Changing teamname properties for details.
Having modified a team members properties, use Apply To All to copy
properties to all teamname list members.
Use Create Designs to create individual designs for each teamname list
member. See Creating individual designs for details.
Changing teamname properties

You can preview individual team names in the design window as they will be
stitched out with the design. Set individual properties for each name.
To change teamname properties
designs.
The Team Members dialog opens. By default all names are selected.
View properties
of selected
names
Select name to
view on-screen
Simon
Fitzgerald
Patrick
Fitzsimons
Roy
Fitzjohn
Gerald
Fitzroy
Maurice
Fitzhenry
John
Fitzmaurice
Roy
Fitzjohn
Tip By default a space is inserted between names. To remove this space, set
the Word Spacing value in the Layout dialog to 0%. See Adjusting
individual letter spacings for details.
377
3 To view and/or edit member properties, select a name then click Show
Properties.
Roy Fitzjohn
Edit text for

individual name
Change alphabet
Adjust name settings
Note Properties can be viewed and edited by individual team member, name
column, or entire member list. See also Modifying teamname designs.
4 Adjust settings as required. See Editing lettering object properties for details.
The lettering updates automatically. See Creating lettering with Object
Properties for details.
6 For additional reshaping on-screen, do one of the following:
Edit a selected name on-screen as you would any other lettering object.
Team Names lets you do this without having to save the name as
separate design. Most important is the ability to manually adjust lettering
kerning. See Editing Embroidery Lettering for details.
Adjust the lettering baseline as you would any other lettering object.
Most important is the ability to select an auto-frame style for fixed line
baselines. See Adjusting fixed-width baseline settings for details.
7 To copy the object properties of one selected team member to all team
members, click Apply to All.
8 To add members to the list, click Team Names.
The Team Names dialog opens. You can add further names to the list from
the current team or any other team. See Creating teamname designs for
details.
9 To delete members from the list, click Delete.
10 Click X in the top corner of the dialog to close.
All team member names

visible only the one on
top selected
378
Note When the Team Members dialog is closed, all team member names
become visible but the one on top is selected in the design window.
Modifying team names by column

Right-click Toolbox > Lettering to edit lettering on-screen.
You can easily set properties, such as font, size or color for an entire column of
names. For example, you might want to highlight the given name in a particular
way.
To modify team names by column

designs.
The Teamname List dialog opens. By default all member names are
selected.
Click to access
object properties
Click to select
column
Simon
Fitzgerald
Patrick
Fitzsimons
Michael
Fitzpatrick
Gerald
Fitzroy
Maurice
Fitzhenry
John
Fitzmaurice
Roy
Fitzjohn
3 Click the tab at the top of a column and click the Object Properties icon.
379
Select alphabet
Adjust settings for all

names in column
4 Adjust the settings as required.

The lettering for the entire column updates accordingly. See Creating
lettering with Object Properties for details.
Outputting teamname designs

You can create individual designs from each name in a teamname design.
Alternatively, you can create a matrix of all names in a teamname object
together with their corresponding design. When you output a teamname design,
you can define how it will be generated as a stitch file: both the design and the
names, design in one file and names in another, or design and names in
individual files.
Creating individual designs

You can create individual designs from each name in a teamname design. The
name will still be included in the original.
380
To create individual designs

1 Open the design you want to use. See also Creating teamname designs.
The Teamname List dialog opens. By default all member names are
selected.
Click to create
individual designs
Select names
to output
Simon
Fitzgerald
Patrick
Fitzsimons
Michael
Fitzpatrick
Gerald
Fitzroy
Maurice
Fitzhenry
John
Fitzmaurice
Roy
Fitzjohn
3 Select names you want to output:
To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select.

To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select.
To select all names in the list, click Select All.
4 To create individual embroidery designs for each selected team member, click
Create Designs.
A new design is created for each selected name. The name is now a normal
lettering object.
5 Click the Save icon to open the Save As dialog.
6 Enter a new name for the design and click Save.
Creating a matrix of designs

Use Toolbox > Team Names Flyout > Teamname Matrix to automatically create a
matrix of all names in a teamname object together with their corresponding design.
The Teamname Matrix feature allows you to automatically create a matrix of
all names in a teamname object together with their corresponding design. You
have the option to minimize the number of color changes created by the matrix
operation. The operation also attempts to minimize the number of jumps. A
teamname object must be present in the design to activate the feature.
381
To create a matrix of designs

designs.
2 Select the entire design if you want to process the design together with the
teamname object.
3 Click the Teamname Matrix icon.
The Teamname Matrix dialog opens.
Adjust hoop width

and height
Adjust row and

column settings
Calculated fields
based on hoop size,
and row and column
settings
Select stitching
sequence
Select to minimize
color changes
The Team Names field derives from the actual number of names included
in the design.
The Rows field is calculated from Hoop Height divided by Row Height.
Similarly the Columns field is calculated from Hoop Width divided by
Column Width.
The Output Files field is calculated from the number of team names
divided by rows X columns, rounded up to the nearest whole number.
Note All calculated fields are updated when you change any of the height
and width settings.
4 Set the hoop height and width to suit the requirements of the hoop you are
using.
These settings are remembered within a session but the defaults are loaded
whenever you launch EmbroideryStudio.
5 Set the row height and column width within the selected hoop settings.
382
These settings are based on the design height and width properties. Increase
them if you want to enlarge the gap between designs. Minimum and
maximum settings: 2.50 mm and 999.99 mm.
6 Select a Sequence option.
Each option indicates a possible stitch sequence for the entire matrix. The red
square indicates the starting point and the arrow shows the direction of the
stitching sequence.
7 Select the Minimize Color Changes checkbox as required.
When selected, provided the teamname object has more than one color, the
entire matrix is resequenced by color.
8 Click OK.
A new file is created containing the number of team names that will fit into
the specified hoop i.e. the number of rows multiplied by the number of
columns, or less. If the number of team names exceeds this value, another
file is created to accommodate the additional names. The total number of files
created is given by the Output Files field.
Saving out teamname designs

When you output a teamname design, you need to define how it is to be
generated as a stitch file. You can generate files that include:
Both the design and the names

Design in one file and names in another, or
Design and names in individual files.
You set these options whenever you save the file in stitch format or output it to
machine. The procedure assumes that a teamname object, optionally with
another design, exists in the design window.
To access the feature
Select File > Save As, choose a stitch file format e.g. DST from the Save
as type dropdown list, and click Options.
Select File > Record In Database, choose a stitch file format e.g. DST
from the Save as type dropdown list, and click Options.
Select
Select
Select
Select
File > Embroidery Disk > Save As > Options.

File > Stitch to Machine Manager > Options.
File > Stitch to Stitch Manager > Options.
File > Stitch to Connection Manager > Options.
383
To save out designs

1 Create a teamname design or open an existing one.
2 Access the Save Options > Team Names dialog. See above.
3 Select File > Save As and select a stitch format from the Save As Type list.
The Options button becomes available.
Note It is also available when you output designs. See also Stitching designs
with Stitch Manager.
4 Click Options.
The Save Options > Team Names dialog opens.
Auto start/end method

options enabled for all
output options
Note The options available in the Auto Start/End Method panel are
available for all output types. They are the same as those in the Method
panel of the Auto Start and End dialog. Their purpose is to allow you to
choose a different auto-start/end value for team name output to the one
encoded in the design.
5 Select a Save option:
Option
Purpose
Design and Team Creates a single stitch file including one copy of the design and all
Names with stops names. Stops are inserted after the design, and between the
names i.e. Design Stop TeamMember1 Stop TeamMember2
Stop, etc.
Repeated Design Creates a single stitch file with multiple copies of the design, and
and Team Names all names. Stops are inserted after each static design/name
with stops
combination e.g. Design + TeamMember1 Stop Design +
TeamMember2 Stop.
Create multiple
output files
Creates separate files for each name, each of which includes a

copy of the static part of the design. When stitching to ES Machine
Manager, each file is queued separately.
Design part only
Creates a file containing only the static part of the design.
384
Option
Purpose
Team Names only Creates a single file containing only the names, separated by
with stops
stops. This means that after each machine stop, you can change
frames.
6 Select a centering method for your output type.
The default Auto Start/End Method is the same as the current values in the
design.
Method
Description
Auto Start and

End
By default, connecting stitches are created from the start and end
points to the center of the design. Select one of the nine preset end
points.
Note that even if you have deselected Use Auto Start and End in
the Auto Start and End dialog, it is automatically turned on during
Team Names output, defaulting to Center-Center.
Return to Start
Point
Creates a connecting stitch from the end point to the start point.
Use Digitized
Auto Start/End
Point
Creates connecting stitches from the start and end points to a

defined point. This option is only available if there are already
digitized start and end points in the design. See Setting automatic
start and end points for details.
Note that this option is primarily used with multi-decoration designs
where you want to strictly define the start/end point of the
embroidery component.
Note If you change the Auto Start/End Method in the Save Options >
Team Names dialog, the auto start/end positions of the original design will
be automatically changed accordingly.
7 Click OK to return to the Save As dialog.
8 Click Save.
The system creates output file(s) according to specified start and end points
using current connector settings in the Auto Start and End dialog. See
Setting automatic start and end points for details.
Auto-aligning design and team names

Before stitching, some embroidery machines require you to position the starting
needle exactly above the first needle penetration point. The Auto Start and
End feature is available to connect first and last stitches in a design. This makes
it easy to position the needle before stitching, and reduces the chance of the
385
needle hitting the side of the frame. See Setting automatic start and end points
for details.
Select preset end

point
The trouble comes when you try to set a common start and end point for team
names. When you set a start/end point for a teamname design via the Auto
Start and End dialog, the point is calculated according the entire design,
including all names. EmbroideryStudio allows you to auto-align designs and
team names when using a single stitch file to output the design. The purpose of
auto-alignment is to allow name frame layouts and optional repeated designs
to be stitched in a consistent location on the garment where names are of
varying lengths.
To auto-align design and team names
1 Create a teamname design or open an existing one.
Auto alignment off
2 Access the Save Options > Team Names dialog. See Saving out teamname
386
3 Select either of the following output options:
Repeated Design and Team Names, with stops, or

Team Names only, with stops.
Select suitable
output option
4 Select the Auto Start and End option.

5 Click OK.
Designs can now be stitched in a consistent location on the garment where
names are of varying lengths.
Auto alignment on
Note Auto-alignment of designs and team names is not applicable to the any
of the other output options. Nor can alignment be performed when using
Return to Start Point or Use Digitized Auto Start/End Point methods.
387
Chapter 18
Monograms
A monogram is a design composed of one or

more letters, typically the initials of a name,
used as an identifying mark. The
Monogramming feature offers a simple
way to create personalized monograms
using a selection of pre-defined monogram
styles, border shapes and ornaments,
together with a set of tools to help you place
these elements in creative and decorative
ways.
This section details the creation of
monogram lettering with initials or with a
name, how to add ornaments to
monograms, and how to create ornament
layouts.
Creating monogram designs

Use Toolbox > Monogramming to create personalized monograms using a
selection of pre-defined monogramming styles, border shapes and ornaments.
The Monogramming feature offers a simple way to create personalized
monograms with minimal manual digitizing, using a selection of pre-defined
monogramming styles, border shapes and ornaments, together with a set of
tools to help you place these elements. The Monogramming feature creates a
single monogramming object comprising some or all of the following elements:
Lettering: a single lettering object (initials or name)

Ornaments: up to ten ornament sets (each of which may comprise multiple
copies of a motif or embroidery design)
388
Borders: up to four concentric borders.

Borders stitched
first 1, 2, 3
Ornaments
stitched next
Lettering
stitched last
Assuming that all elements are present, the monogram is stitched in the
following order: borders (1, 2, 3, and 4), ornament sets, and lettering object(s).
To create a monogram design
1 Click the Monogramming icon.
The Monogramming dialog opens with the Lettering tab selected. This tab
allows you to specify the characters in the lettering component of a
monogram. Two options are available: Initials and Name.
Zoom and Undo/Redo buttons
The Monogramming dialog is modal meaning that you are not able to
select objects or operate any controls outside the dialog while it is open.
However, elements specified in the dialog are displayed instantly in the design
window, and any changes made to settings inside the dialog are immediately
visible. The dialog also contains Undo, Redo and Zoom buttons. Undo
reverses any changes made since the dialog was opened. The normal
shortcut keys Ctrl+Z, Ctrl+Y, Z, Shift+Z can also be used while the
dialog is open.
389
2 Select the type of lettering object you want to make:
Initials: Up to three initials can be entered, including special characters

and symbols. See Creating monogram lettering with initials for details.
Name: This option allows unlimited lines of characters to be entered. See

Creating monogram lettering with names for details.
Select Name
option
3 Click the Ornaments tab and specify the type of ornamentation you want by
clicking Add.
You can add up to ten ornament sets around a monogram. See Adding
ornaments to monograms for details.
4 Click the Borders tab and specify the type of border you want by clicking
Add.
You can add up to four borders of the same shape to a monogram design. See
Adding borders to monograms for details.
5 Click OK to complete.
Tip You can modify selected monograms at any time by adjusting their
settings in the Monogramming dialog. The dialog can be opened with a
single monogram, and no other object, selected. Any modifications to the
settings are applied directly to the selected monogram.
Chapter 18 Monograms
390
Creating monogram lettering

The Monogramming tool allows you to create personalized monograms with up
to three initials, including special characters and symbols, or unlimited lines of
characters.
Creating monogram lettering with initials

Up to three initials can be entered into your monogramming design, including
special characters and symbols. Change settings for each one or all together, or
apply pre-defined layout styles.
To create monogram lettering with initials
The Monogramming dialog opens with the Lettering tab selected. The
Initials option is selected by default.
Enter initials in
each field
Note The All Letters option is selected by default. This means that any
changes to lettering properties will affect all initials in the monogram. If you
want to specify different settings for each one, select the button
corresponding to the letter you want to modify before proceeding. This step
is repeated for each letter.
2 Enter the first initial for the monogram in the Letter #1 field.
The letter simultaneously appears in the design window.
Note When using a single letter, it should be placed in the Letter #1 field.
3 Tab to the next fields and enter second and third initials as required.
391
These letters appear in the design window.

Enter initials in
each field
Select layout style

from flyout menu
4 Optionally, click the Style button and select the style you want from the flyout
menu drag mouse to the desired item and release the mouse button.
The current height of Letter #1 is used as the base setting for the style.
Style 15
Style 1
Style 7
Note The Style button is only applicable to initials. (Style 1 is applied by

default.) When the Name option is selected, this button is disabled. See also
Creating monogram lettering with names.
5 Select a thread color from the Color palette.
Select alphabet
Adjust letter height
Select thread color
6 Use the Alphabet dropdown list to change alphabets and adjust the Letter
Height as required.
Note The default values for monogram lettering Alphabet and Height are
distinct from those for conventional lettering.
7 Define any ornaments and/or borders you want:
Click the Ornaments tab to specify monogram ornamentation. See

Adding ornaments to monograms for details.
Click the Borders tab to specify a monogram border or borders. See
Creating monogram lettering with names

392
The monogram Name option allows unlimited lines of characters to be entered.
To create monogram lettering with a name

The Monogramming dialog opens with the Lettering tab selected. The
Initials option is selected by default.
2 Click the Name option.
The Initials option is disabled.
Select Name
option
3 Enter your text in the Name field.

Pressing Enter starts a new line. When more than one line is created, the
default baseline type is used.
4 Click the Insert Symbols button if you want to add special characters and
symbols. See Adding special characters and symbols for details.
5 Select a thread color from the Color palette.
Click to create lettering
Click to add special character
Select alphabet
Click to adjust lettering settings
6 Use the Alphabet dropdown list to change alphabets and adjust the Letter
Height as required.
Note The default values for monogram lettering Alphabet and Height are
distinct from those for conventional lettering.
7 Click Create Text.
The monogram lettering object is added to the design window, replacing any
that might already be there.
393
8 Define any ornaments and/or borders you want:
Click the Ornaments tab to specify monogram ornamentation. See

Adding ornaments to monograms for details.
Click the Borders tab to specify a monogram border or borders. See
Adding ornaments to monograms

Ornaments can be added to a monogram either from pre-defined patterns or
from any design file.
Adding ornament patterns or designs

You can add up to ten ornament sets to a monogram design and change them
at any time. There is a dedicated monogram ornaments pattern set although any
available pattern set can be used.
To add ornament patterns or designs
1 Create the lettering object you want to use in your monogram:
Initials: Up to three initials can be entered, including special characters

and symbols. See Creating monogram lettering with initials for details.

2 Click the Ornaments tab.
Click to add
ornament set
3 Click the Add button.
394
The Select Source dialog opens.
Add pre-defined
ornamental pattern
Add design ornament
Note Up to ten ornaments can be added to the selection list. Any

combination of positions can be used.
4 Choose an ornament source:
If you choose the From Motifs option, the Select Motif dialog opens
offering a library of pre-defined ornamental patterns. Select a motif set
from the dropdown list.
Select motif
set
Select motif
If you choose the From Design option, the Open dialog opens onto the
Designs folder.
Choose design
as ornament
395
5 Select a motif, ornament or design and click OK.

A new ornament set is created using the selected pattern and a new entry
added to the list box.
6 Use the Positions checkboxes to add up to eight instances of a selected

ornament.
The checkboxes are arranged to illustrate ornament placements relative to
the lettering. Excluding Position #5, any combination of checkboxes can be
used.
1
Anchor position
Note The first position selected serves as the anchor position (highlighted
in bold). All settings in the dialog relate to this ornament and all other
ornaments are sized, rotated and mirrored in relation to it. See also Creating
single ornament layouts and Creating multi-ornament layouts.
7 Use the Width and Height fields to change ornament dimensions.
Tip A Resize Proportionally checkbox (selected by default), forces width

and height settings to resize in proportion to each other.
8 Use the Rotate By field to specify a rotation angle for the anchor object.
396
All other ornaments are sized, rotated and mirrored in relation to this object.
See also Creating multi-ornament layouts.
9 Use the Color Blocks palette to change ornament colors.

The colors in the palette are shown in the sequence they occur in the
ornaments. To change colors, select a slot in the Color Blocks list and select
a color from the Color palette.
Note The Sequence this Set by Color checkbox is enabled whenever the
current ornament set has two or more color blocks. When checked, the
current ornament set is sequenced so that all corresponding colors are
stitched together. When unchecked, each ornament is stitched out completely
before the next. This will result in a lot of thread color changes. See also
Viewing color blocks with the Color-Object List.
Two or more color

slots filled
Sequenced so that all same

colors are stitched together
10 Add other ornament sets and repeat the process.
397
Note If you choose a pattern for the ornament set, the Pattern Set and
Pattern fields give you the pattern identity. If you choose a design as the
ornament set, the Design Name field appears.
11 Change any ornament set any time by clicking the ornament set and the
Change button.
12 Click the Borders tab if you want to specify a border or borders for your
monogram. See Adding borders to monograms for details.
Creating single ornament layouts

You can insert an ornament as a standalone element within an ornament set.
This single ornament can be used on its own or combined with other ornaments
or patterns. See also Creating multi-ornament layouts.
To create a single ornament layout

1 Create the lettering object you want to use in your monogram. See Creating
monogram lettering with initials and Creating monogram lettering with
names for details.
2 Add the ornament you want to use. See Adding ornaments to monograms for
details.
Tip Usually for a single ornament layout, you will want to use one of the
ornamental designs included in the Designs folder.
Choose design
as ornament
398
3 Select Position #5 to insert an ornament as a standalone element within a

set.
All other checkboxes are unchecked automatically. Width, Height, and
Rotate By fields remain available and an Offset panel appears.
Select Position #5
4 Size, rotate or flip the ornament as required. See Adding ornaments to

monograms for details.
5 Use the X and Y fields in the Offset panel to position the ornament
horizontally or vertically relative to the lettering object.
These settings specify the position of the ornament center relative to the
center of the lettering object.
Adjust settings
Creating multi-ornament layouts

You can add up to eight instances of a selected ornament to your monogram.
Any combination of ornaments and ornament positions can be used.
Choose from a range of pre-defined layout styles, including Mirrors,

Duplicates, and Cycle. You also have the option of flipping the anchor
ornament horizontally or vertically.
399
To create a multi-ornament layout

1 Create the lettering object you want to use in your monogram. See Creating
monogram lettering with initials and Creating monogram lettering with
names for details.
2 Add the ornaments you want to use. See Adding ornaments to monograms
for details.
3 Use the Positions checkboxes to add up to eight instances of a selected
ornament.
The checkboxes are arranged to illustrate ornament placements relative to
the lettering. Excluding Position #5, any combination of checkboxes can be
used.
Adjust
settings
Distance from
lettering
Anchor
position
1
Note The first position selected serves as the anchor position (highlighted
in bold). All settings in the dialog relate to this ornament and all other
ornaments are sized, rotated and mirrored in relation to it.
4 Size, rotate or flip the anchor ornament as required. See Adding ornaments
to monograms for details.
5 Use the Distance From Lettering field to specify the distance ornaments
are offset from the lettering object.
Tip The software allows you to enter a negative offset.
6 Use the Layout Style dropdown list to select a style for the ornament
arrangement Mirrors, Duplicates, or Cycle.
400
Positions are laid out for each layout style in relation to the anchor object,
regardless of any positions omitted from the set.
Mirrors
Cycle
Duplicates
7 Flip the entire configuration horizontally and/or vertically as required.
Flip horizontally or vertically
Horizontally flipped
Vertically flipped
Adding borders to monograms

You can add up to four borders of the same shape
to a monogram design. The Select Border dialog
offers a list of pre-defined border shapes.
To add borders
1 Create the lettering object you want to use in
your monogram:
Initials: Up to three initials can be entered,

including special characters and symbols.
See Creating monogram lettering with
initials for details.
401

2 Add any ornaments you want. See Adding ornaments to monograms for
details.
3 Click the Borders tab.
4 Click the Add button.

The Select Border dialog opens offering a library of pre-defined border
shapes.
Select border
5 Choose a border from the dialog and click OK.

A new entry is added to the border list box and the selected border appears
in the design window.
Note Borders completely enclose the lettering object but not ornaments. Edit
borders as required.
6 Use the Offset field to adjust space between lettering and border.
Adjust border
offset
Offset from
lettering object
Tip The software allows you to enter a negative offset. This allows you to
create multiple overlapping borders.
402
7 Click the Add button again to add up to four more borders.

Each time you click, a new entry is added to the list box and another border
of the same shape is added to your design.
Click to add
more borders
Click to change
border shapes
Adjust offset and
aspect ratio
Tip If you want to change the border shape, click the Change button and
select a different border from the Select Border dialog. Any change affects
all borders in the design.
8 Use the Offset field to adjust spacing between borders.
2nd border offset: 4 mm

3rd border offset: 6 mm
2nd border offset: 4 mm

3rd border offset: 2 mm
9 Use the Color palette to adjust the colors of selected borders.
Change stitch type

of each border
Change color of
each border
10 Use the Outline and Fill tool buttons to change outline or fill stitch type for
selected borders.
403
By default, Satin Outline is the default stitch type. When Fill is selected,
Tatami is selected as the default fill stitch. All outline and fill stitch types
available in the software can be used as borders.
Fourth border:
Motif Run
First border:
Motif Fill
11 Use the Aspect Ratio field to change the ratio of height to width for all
borders.
By adjusting this value, you adjust height and width in relation to one another
and thereby make the border fatter or taller. The default is 1.00 which means
that the border height and width are as per the original.
Aspect Ratio: 1.30
Aspect Ratio: 0.70
404
Chapter 19
Custom Alphabets
Turn any TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet.
Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve its appearance,
perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. EmbroideryStudio lets you save
the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple versions of the
same letter within the same alphabet. You can even create your own custom
alphabets or modify an existing alphabet for special applications. Even merge
letters from two or more alphabets.
Alphabet merging is also explained.
Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets

The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any TrueType font
installed on your system to an embroidery alphabet. You can do this on-the-fly
or convert entire fonts for later use. This is an important feature for Asian
alphabets which may contain several thousands of characters.
405
The process is fully automatic. Lettering shapes are cut into Input A or Input B
embroidery objects. Overlaps and stroke order are detected and stitch angles
defined. The result is similar to manually digitized alphabets although the quality
may not be quite as high. The quality greatly depends on the original shapes,
narrower serif type alphabets producing better results than blocked alphabets.
Converting individual TrueType letters

Use Toolbox > Lettering to add TrueType lettering directly on-screen. Right-click
to set the formatting values for new or selected lettering objects.
You can convert individual TrueType letters on-the-fly and add them directly to
a design through the Object Properties dialog.
To convert individual TrueType letters
Enter text
Select TT font
Set conversion values
2 Select a TrueType font from the Alphabet list.

3 Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel.
Alternatively, type it directly on-screen after adjusting the conversion
settings.
Note The more letters you enter, the more time needed to convert them.
4 Click TTF Conversion.
Chapter 1 9 Custo m Alphab e ts
406
The Conversion Values dialog opens.
Select lettering
style
Select Turning
Strokes for variable
stitch angle
Select Complex Fill

for fixed stitch angle
Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select. Values
are automatically set according to the selected alphabet.
5 Select the lettering style you want to create from the Styles list Regular,
Bold, Bold Italic or Italic.
Note The Style panel is not available for some fonts.
6 If you want the stitching to follow the contours of the letters, select Turning
Strokes. Otherwise select Complex Fill.
The Turning Strokes option has preset values adjusted for the particular
alphabet style. The Complex Fill option lets you adjust the stitch angle.
Turning Strokes
Complex Fill
stitch angle 0
Complex Fill
stitch angle 30
7 Select the Match Ends checkbox to keep stitch angles parallel to the end of
the stroke.
Note This option will override any corner detection and corner fraction where
parallel stitching applies.
Match Ends OFF
Match Ends ON
stitches parallel to
baseline
407
Tip Stitch angles in strokes should normally be perpendicular to the stroke,

but the exceptions are letters like K, X, Y with short slanted strokes. In these
cases it is better to keep the stitch angle parallel to the end of the stroke.
8 Select the Break Angle checkbox to apply a cap to sharp angles.
This effect is similar to Smart Corners if the stroke bends sharply, like the
letter A or V, it will be split or capped.
Break Angle OFF

no split
Break Angle 87
9 Select the Create Overlaps checkbox to prevent gaps forming between

segments.
You can fine-tune the overlaps by setting values in the T junctions and O
junctions fields.
Create Overlaps
OFF
Create Overlaps
ON
10 Select the Separate Serifs checkbox if you are converting a serif font.
Separate Serifs
OFF
Separate Serifs
ON
Tip As the serifs are made into separate strokes, this option is better used
with larger lettering where serifs are greater than 0.8 mm in breadth.
11 Fine-tune processing of corners with these settings:
Corner Detection Angle specifies the angle which will identify a corner
in the letter. This is more important for getting well-defined small letters.
Note, however, that EmbroideryStudio automatically inserts stitch angles
where needed in order to obtain smooth turning stitches. These generally
occur at locations where the shape changes significantly in direction or
width.
408
Corner Fraction specifies fractional spacing at corners. It is used to

create smooth transitions of stitch angle at corners, shape ends, or where
a shape changes in width or curvature significantly.
Corner Detection Angle 150

Corner Fraction 0.6 mm
Corner Detection Angle 30

Corner Fraction 1.0 mm
12 Click OK to return to the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
14 Click the entry point.
If you have already entered text in the Lettering dialog, lettering outlines
are created directly.
If not, type the letters on-screen and press Enter to create the lettering
outlines.
15 Select Stitch > Generate Stitches or press G.
Converting complete TrueType fonts

Use Special > Alphabet > Convert True Type Font to convert a TrueType font into an
embroidery alphabet.
The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any suitable TrueType
font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet. Converted letters can
be filled with parallel or turning stitches.
Note The conversion usually only takes a few minutes, although Asian fonts
may take longer.
To convert a complete TrueType font
1 Select Special > Alphabet > Convert TrueType Font.
409
The Convert TrueType Font dialog opens.
Select font
Select font style
Set values
Enter font
name
Choose
character set
2 Select the font to be converted and font style.
Arial Regular
Arial Bold
Arial Italic
3 Click Conversion Values.

The Conversion Values dialog opens. See Converting individual TrueType
letters for details.
Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select. Values
are automatically set according to the selected alphabet.
4 Enter a Font Name if you want to overwrite the default.
5 Choose whether to convert All Characters or Extended ASCII character
sets.
The standard character set contains alphanumeric characters only. It
excludes punctuation marks and other special characters. Click OK.
When the font has been converted, the Convert TrueType Font dialog
confirms.
6 Click OK.
7 To check that the alphabet has been created, right-click the Lettering icon
to open the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
The newly converted TrueType font will be selected by default. You can now
use it in the same way as other embroidery alphabets.
Converting between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes

Right-click Toolbox > Lettering to convert between Complex Fill and Turning
Strokes.
410
When you convert TrueType fonts to embroidery lettering, the letters can be
filled with parallel or turning stitches. You can convert between Complex Fill
and Turning Strokes at any stage.
To convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes

1 Digitize a lettering object using Convert TrueType Font. See Converting
individual TrueType letters for details.
Complex Fill with

stitch angle of 0

TrueType font appears
in Alphabet list
Set conversion
values
4 Click TTF Conversion.

The Conversion Values dialog opens.
Select Turning
Strokes for variable
stitch angle
Select Complex Fill

for fixed stitch angle
411
5 Specify whether the letters will be converted as Turning Strokes or

Complex Fill.
If Turning Strokes is selected, select the required options.

If Complex Fill is selected, enter the stitch angle.
See Converting individual TrueType letters for details.
6 Click OK to return to the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
Letters converted to
Turning Strokes
User-refined alphabets
Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve its appearance,
perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. EmbroideryStudio lets you save
the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple versions of the
same letter within the same alphabet. Each version can have a unique height
range. When using the letter in a design, the height setting will automatically
determine which version is used. The feature thereby allows you to permanently
record fixes to particular lettering problems and thereafter automatically apply
them.
Note The software preserves all user-refined alphabet letters when a new
version is installed. Only factory default letters are overwritten. Similarly all
user-refined alphabets are preserved unchanged.
Saving user-refined letters

objects, edit stitch angles, and adjust start/end points.
User-refined letters are saved via the Save Letter option. This is enabled only
if an alphabet letter or converted and/or reshaped TrueType font letter is
currently highlighted in the design window or selected in Reshape mode. One
and only one letter may be saved at a time. In the example below, the letter a
tends to close over at reduced sizes. You may want to open it up. By saving it
412
as a user-refined letter, any changes made will be automatically applied to new

lettering objects using the alphabet in the specified size range.
Letter a opened up at
smaller size
Default a too narrow at smaller size
To save a user-refined letter

1 Create a lettering object with an embroidery alphabet. See Creating
Embroidery Lettering for details.
2 Size the lettering object and reshape the letter as required. See Reshaping
individual letters for details.
Select modified letter
Tip The Stitch Angle and Reshape Object tools let you add, delete, or
adjust stitch angles in lettering objects. See Adding stitch angles in Reshape
mode for details.
3 With the letter selected (by clicking the diamond control point), select
Special > Alphabet > Save Letter.
The Save User-Refined Letter dialog opens.
Specify the
height range
Name the new

version
413
4 Set the height range for the letter:

Range
Description
All
The letter will be used at all letter heights (effectively replacing the
factory default).
Greater than
The letter will only be at heights greater than that specified.
Less than
The letter will only be at heights less than that specified.
5 Give the new letter a unique name that you can easily identify by default,
the new version is given the name User 1.
If the name has already been used for that letter, you will be prompted to
overwrite the existing saved letter. You can use the same name for other
letters.
6 Click OK.
A confirmation message appears when the letter has been saved. Note that
changes to the selected letter are not automatically applied to the current
lettering object.
Default letter a
Modified
letter a
Changes applied to
both letters
Select to use
user-refined letters
7 To apply changes to all the same letters in the selected object, select the Use
saved version checkbox in the Object Properties > Special > Lettering
dialog. See also Selecting alphabets and fonts.
Managing user-refined letters

User-refined letters are managed via the Manage User-Refined Letters
option. This menu item is only enabled when a lettering object with an alphabet
containing user-refined letters is currently selected.
To manage user-refined letters
1 While the letter is selected, select Special > Alphabet > Manage
User-Refined Letters.
414
The Manage User-Refined Lettering dialog opens.
Scroll to next or
previous letter
Click and
rename version
as required
Swap height ranges

by moving selected
version up or down
Select letter version to

include in alphabet
Adjust height range for the

selected letter version
The name of the alphabet is shown at the top of the dialog. If the alphabet is
a TrueType font, the TT font symbol is shown before the name.
The original factory default letter is identified by the name Factory. For
converted TrueType font letters, the word Convert appears instead of
Factory. These labels cannot be edited.
With embroidery alphabets generated entirely by you, the original digitized
letter is named User 1 by default. Every version of the letter, including the
original, is editable.
2 Use the left and right arrow buttons or dropdown list to select a user-refined
letter in the current alphabet.
3 Make any of the following modifications:
Click and rename any of the versions, except Factory or Convert, as

required.
Delete any selected version name except Factory by clicking Delete. If

the letter is a TrueType font conversion, all versions may be deleted. If the
letter is user-defined i.e. non-Wilcom you can delete all versions except
one.
Deselect the Use checkbox of any version if you dont want to include it in
the alphabet but dont want to delete it. When deselected, the size range
formerly occupied by the letter is distributed evenly between the closest
neighboring versions which have their Use checkbox checked.
4 Adjust the height range for the selected version of the letter by moving the
slider bars.
The height is shown in the current units set in the Regional Options of your
PC. These can only be changed via the Control Panel.
5 Swap height ranges of the selected version of the letter with the Move Up
and Move Down buttons.
6 Click OK to confirm changes.
Creating custom alphabets

You digitize letters for a custom alphabet just like other embroidery objects.
Custom letters can be made up of multiple objects, and may be letters,
numbers, symbols or pictures. You can use artwork from sources such as
calligraphy books to create alphabet letters.
415
Note You can also create new alphabets by converting TrueType fonts. See also
Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets.
Choosing artwork to create custom alphabets

You can use artwork to create alphabet letters in the same way you do other
objects. Before digitizing, however, establish whether the letter shapes are
suitable for embroidery, and determine reference height and baseline for the
alphabet.
Caution Because of copyright laws, you cannot simply select letters from an
existing embroidery alphabet and save them directly to another alphabet.
Letter shapes
For best results, letter columns should be of similar width, without tight curves
or sharp corners, or very fine, very wide, or curved serifs.
Differences in column
width too great
Serifs too long and fine
Corners too sharp
Reference height and baseline

Reference height is the maximum height of capital letters. Although there may
be subtle differences between upper and lower case letters, it is a useful guide
for digitizing. See also Saving custom alphabets.
Tip Place letters along a standard baseline to help digitize at a standard height.
Draw in the baseline if you are digitizing from artwork, or use a grid line as your
guide. Descenders in letters such as y or g generally fall below the baseline.
Letter height
Baseline
Tip Use E or H as reference letters to determine the height and baseline for the
alphabet. These letters work well because they sit on the baseline and do not
extend above the standard cap-height.
416
Letter spacing and width

Letter width varies with the letter shape and spacing. When you digitize letters,
you enter two reference points to mark the width, and a third to mark the height.
Letter width
Letter width
Spacing
increased
Default spacing affects kerning or spacing across all letters. Additional width
can be added as spacing around individual letters.
Tip For italic styles, you may need some overlap between letter extents.
Digitizing custom letters

You can digitize letters from backdrop images, convert vector objects, or digitize
freehand using any of the input method tools. You can also copy characters and
symbols from the Windows Character Map into an external graphics program.
Here you can modify them as you like, save them to a graphics file, and use it
as a design backdrop. See also Using the Character Map.
Letter stitching sequence is based on the alphabet join type you select when
saving it. If you save using the Closest Join or Bottom Join methods,
EmbroideryStudio applies automatic branching to the letters. In this case, you
dont need to worry about the direction individual letter strokes will stitch in.
When branching is applied, EmbroideryStudio determines where each stroke
starts and ends, adding travel runs as necessary. However, it is good discipline
to digitize the strokes in the direction they are most likely to be stitched in. It is
also important to specify the stroke order as this is maintained when sequencing
is calculated. See also Saving custom alphabets.
If you want to specify the stitching sequence and connectors yourself, digitize
the letter in sequence and manually digitize the connecting stitching. You then
need to select As Digitized as the alphabet join method. See also Changing
lettering join method.
To digitize custom letters
1 Select an input method.
If you are digitizing the sequence and connectors manually, use any input
method. If you want the letter to be automatically resequenced with Closest
Join or Bottom Join, use Input A, Input B, Input C and Complex Fill objects.
2 Select the stitch type.
Tip Most letters use Satin or Tatami.
3 Digitize each section of the letter.
417
Where one stroke butts up against the side or end of another, create an
underlap to bind the two strokes together. Underlaps should be about a
third of the stroke width or less, but may be half for thin strokes.
Underlaps
Try to avoid having more than two strokes on top of each other as this
causes thread buildup and can lead to thread breaks. Sometimes
modifying the shape can improve it.
Sometimes it is helpful to angle the ends of underlaps so that a few
stitches are caught by the overlapping stroke. This prevents a gap
appearing if the stitches of the top stroke pull back.
Overlap / underlap
Where a stroke crosses another stroke, such as in the letter t, one stroke
is commonly broken into two parts. For thin objects, you may digitize the
above stroke in one piece, crossing over or under the other.
4 Adjust outlines using the Reshape Object tool if necessary.

When the letter is the correct shape, save it as a custom letter. See also
Saving custom letters.
Saving custom letters

When you create a new letter, you need to select an alphabet for it, give it a
name, specify its height, and indicate whether to preserve any machine
functions. You also need to indicate its spacing settings by digitizing reference
points on-screen.
Caution Do not use the tilde (~) symbol when naming letters. This is a special
character for entering letters with multiple-character names. See Selecting
custom alphabets for details.
418
To save custom letters

1 Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them. See
Select whole
character
2 Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter.

The Make Letter dialog opens.
Select alphabet
Enter letter name
Enter reference height
Select to set height on-screen
Deselect to include functions
3 Select an alphabet from the Alphabet Name list. See also Saving custom
alphabets.
4 Enter a name for the letter in the Letter field.
For example, if you digitized the letter H, enter H in the Letter field.
Tip You can create names with multiple characters to identify special letters
e.g. Star for a star symbol, or e-acute for . See also Selecting custom
alphabets.
5 In the Reference Height field, enter a height for the letter.
The letter is recorded at this height regardless of its original size. You can also
set height on-screen by selecting the Digitize Reference Height checkbox.
When you return to the design window, you are prompted to digitize the
height. If you select Digitize Reference Height, the value in the Reference
Height field is ignored.
Tip Letters are generally 20 to 40 mm in height. See also Standard
Alphabets.
6 Deselect Remove Functions only if you want to keep any machine functions
in the object.
The letter may, for example, include deliberate color changes or other
machine functions. Such letters require the As Digitized join type. See also
Changing lettering join method.
7 Click OK.
8 Click to mark two reference points for letter width and the baseline.
419
The distance between reference points determines the letter width, including
any spacing either side of the letter. This then determines standard spacing
between letters. See also Letter spacing and width.
1
1
Note The reference points you digitize also determine where the letter sits
on the baseline.
9 If you selected Digitize Reference Height in the Make Letter dialog, you
are prompted to digitize a third reference point to mark letter height. See also
Reference height and baseline.
A message confirms that the letter has been saved to current alphabet.
10 Click OK.
Saving custom alphabets

Use custom alphabets to store any letters you create. To make a new alphabet,
you name it and set the default spacing and join type for adjacent letters. You
also specify the file type.
To save custom alphabets
1 Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them. See
Select whole letter

Click to create
new alphabet
3 Click New.
420
The New Alphabet dialog opens.
Enter alphabet name

Enter default spacing
Select join method
4 Enter a name for the alphabet in the Alphabet Name field.

5 Enter the default spacing in the Default Letter Spacing field.
Tip Use 8-10% for standard alphabets such as block and serif styles and 0%
for script-style alphabets.
6 Select a default method of joining adjacent letters from the Default Join
Type list. See also Changing lettering join method.
Join Method
Description
As Digitized
Preserves the original stitching sequence of each letter as it was

digitized, as well as any stitch types and machine functions used in its
creation.
Closest Join
Resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters to join them at

the closest point.
Bottom Join
Resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters to create a

connector along the lettering baseline.
7 Click OK.
8 Enter additional values for the selected letter in the Make Letter dialog.
See Saving custom letters for details.
9 Click OK.
Selecting custom alphabets

Right-click Toolbox > Lettering to select a custom alphabet.
To use a custom alphabet, select it like any other alphabet. If a letter has a
multi-character name, you can only access it from the Lettering dialog using
the special tilde (~) symbol.
To select custom alphabets

421
Select custom
alphabet
My alphabet
2 Select a custom alphabet from the Alphabet list.

3 Enter the names of the letters you want to use in the text box.
If the letter name is a single character e.g. A enter that character.

If the letter name consists of more than one character e.g. Star enter
a tilde (~) followed by the letter name.
Tip Combine letters that use single or multiple characters in their name by
prefacing the single character with two tildes e.g. ~Star~~A~Star. See
also Saving custom letters.
4 Set the formatting values as you would for other lettering objects. See
Formatting lettering for details.
6 Add the lettering to your design. See Adding embroidery lettering on-screen
for details.
Modifying custom alphabets

You can modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter spacings
and join types. If an alphabet is no longer required you can delete it. You can
also rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.
Modifying alphabets
Modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter spacings and join
types. If an alphabet is no longer required, delete it.
To modify alphabets
1 Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet.
422
The Modify Alphabet dialog opens.
Select
alphabet
Click to rename
alphabet
My Alphabet
2 Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list.
To rename the alphabet, click Rename. Enter a new name in the Rename
Alphabet dialog and click OK.
Enter new name
New Alphabet
To delete an alphabet, click Delete. A message prompts you for

confirmation.
To change default letter spacing, enter a new value in the Default Letter
Spacing field. See also Adjusting letter spacing.
To change the default join type, select a new one from the Default Join
Type list. See also Setting stitching sequence and join method.
3 Click OK.
Modifying custom letters

Rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.
To modify custom letters
1 Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet.
The Modify Alphabet dialog opens.
Select
alphabet
Select letter
2 Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list.

3 Select a letter from the Letter > Name list.
To delete a letter, click Delete. A message prompts you for confirmation.
423
To rename a letter, click Rename. Enter a new name in the Rename

Letter dialog and click OK.
My New Letter
Enter new name
Tip You can use names with more than one character.
4 Click OK.
Reshaping custom letters

Use Arrange > Ungroup to ungroup a letter into its component objects.
Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape custom letters.
Use Special > Alphabet > Make Letter to create a new letter.
To change the shape of letters in custom alphabets, ungroup them and change
their outlines and stitch angles using the Reshape Object tool.
Caution When you ungroup, the letter is converted back to objects, and letter
details such as alphabet and baseline are lost. When you have finished
reshaping, you have to enter these details again.
To reshape custom letters
1 Select a letter and ungroup.
424
2 Click the Reshape Object icon and reshape the objects as required.
Reshape objects
3 When you have finished reshaping, select the objects.

Select alphabet
Select letter name
5 Select the alphabet to which the letter belongs from the Alphabet Name list.
6 Select the letter name from the Name list.
Note To save the letter under a different name, enter a new name.
7 Click OK.
8 Confirm you want to replace the old letter with the new.
Merging alphabets
You can merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet
merging utility. Files to be merged must be placed in the EmbroideryStudio
userletw folder of your installation.
To merge alphabets
1 Select Start > Programs > MS-DOS Prompt.
2 When the command prompt appears, change to the BIN directory of your
EmbroideryStudio installation. This is usually:
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\BIN
3 Choose whether to automatically overwrite or receive prompt.
To automatically overwrite the letters in the first file with letters of the
same name from the other file(s), type:
alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA.
To receive a prompt message before a letter is overwritten, type:
alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA /Y.
Press Y or N to confirm whether to overwrite.
425
4 Click Yes to merge.

Alphabet merging is also explained.
426
PART V
MODIFYING DESIGNS
After digitizing a design, you can modify it as a whole, edit individual objects or
even individual stitches.
Combining and resequencing objects
This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and
pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to
resequence objects by cut-and-paste, by color, and with the Color-Object List.
Automatic branching of grouped objects is also covered. See Combining &
Sequencing Objects for details.
Arranging, scaling and transforming objects
This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align and
space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects in a
design. See Arranging, Scaling & Transforming Objects for details.
Reshaping and converting objects
This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, how to break
up objects, how to adjust and add stitch angles, as well as how to change entry
and exit points of objects in a stitching sequence. It also covers conversion of
one embroidery object to another. See Reshaping & Converting Objects for
details.
Optimizing stitch quality
This section describes how to adjust stitch density as well as eliminate small
stitches. It also explains controlling corner stitching and reducing stitch
bunching. Optimizing long Satin stitches is also covered. See Optimizing Stitch
Quality for details.
Stitches and machine functions
This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting selected
stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting, checking, editing
and clearing manually-inserted functions. How to edit stitches and functions
using the Stitch List is also covered. It also explains manual digitizing
techniques. See Stitches & Machine Functions for details.
427
Chapter 20
Combining & Sequencing Objects
EmbroideryStudio provides various techniques for combining and sequencing

objects. You can add to designs by duplicating and copying objects. Combine
designs. Resequence objects in designs to minimize color changes and optimize
production.
The stitching sequence naturally occurs in the order in which an embroidery

design is digitized or assembled. When converting a graphic design to an
embroidery design, EmbroideryStudio decides the stitching sequence
according to its own internal logic. Either way, you may, for reasons of aesthetics
or production efficiency, want to adjust it. The Color-Object List displays a
sequential list of objects grouped by object and color. It provides an easy way
to group, cut, copy and paste, and resequence selected objects and color blocks.
EmbroideryStudio also allows you to create branched objects. Like-objects are
thereby resequenced, connectors minimized, components grouped, and stitches
regenerated. Underlay can be applied to all.
This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and
pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to
resequence objects by cut-and-paste, by color, and with the Color-Object List.
Automatic branching of grouped objects is also covered.
Combining objects & designs

You can copy or cut a design or design objects to the Windows clipboard for
temporary storage. These can then be pasted any number of times to the same
428
or another design until replaced on the clipboard. You can also cut, copy, paste
and clone objects within and between designs.
Inserting designs
EmbroideryStudio lets you insert one design into
another. The two (or more) designs can then be
saved as a combined design. When you insert a
design into another, the two color palettes are
combined. Colors with the same RGB values are
automatically identified as having the same thread
color. If you want to preserve these as separate
colors, you need to change one or other before
merging. See Editing colorways for details.
To insert designs
1 Open the first design.
2 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert the
design. See Viewing stitching sequence for details.
You can insert a design between objects in the sequence, or nest the design
within an object. See Nesting objects for details.
3 Select an Insert Embroidery File option as required. See Setting inserted
embroidery file options for details.
By default, when you insert a design, colors are matched to the current color
palette.
Colors added to
palette
Colors matched to
palette
4 Select File > Import Embroidery.
429
Folder containing
designs
Design name
Format list
5 From the Look In list, select the folder where the design you want to insert
is stored, and select the required format from the Files of type list.
6 Select the design file to insert, and click Open.
The design is inserted at the current needle position.
7 Move the second design into the required position. See Moving objects for
details.
Tip To ensure that all the objects in the inserted design stay together, group
the design while working with it. See Grouping & ungrouping objects for
details.
8 Save the combined design under the original or different name.
The designs you have inserted are now combined into one design.
Copying & pasting objects

Click Standard > Cut to remove selected objects to the clipboard.
Click Standard > Copy to copy selected objects to the clipboard.
Click Standard > Paste to paste copied objects to a design.
You can copy objects to create multiple, identical objects, or to insert objects
from other designs.
Note Cut-and-paste changes the stitching sequence in the design. See

Resequencing objects with cut-and-paste for details.
Chapte r 20 Co mbining & S eq uencing Obje c ts
430
To copy and paste objects

1 Select the object (or objects) to copy.
2 Click the Copy icon.
The selected object is copied to the clipboard.
3 Select an Insert Embroidery File option as required. See Setting inserted
embroidery file options for details.
By default, when you insert a design, colors are matched to the current color
palette.
Colors added
to palette
Colors matched
to palette
4 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to paste the
object. See Viewing stitching sequence for details.
Alternatively, use the Color-Object List to locate the required position in the
stitching sequence. See Selecting objects by Color-Object List for details.
Tip You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the copied
object within an object. See Nesting objects for details.
5 Click the Paste icon.
The object is pasted in the design, according to the current paste options.
Alternatively, use the popup menu to override the current paste options.
Override current
paste options
Tip Change the default paste option as required. See Setting paste position
6 Make sure that there is only one copy of an object at any one position.
If an object is pasted twice into the same position, it will be stitched twice.
Note The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly until
the next Copy or Cut command.
431
Duplicating objects
Objects can be duplicated rather than copied. When an object is duplicated, it is
not copied to the clipboard. This leaves the clipboard free for you to cut or copy
other objects. See also Mirroring objects.
To duplicate objects
1 Select the object (or objects) to duplicate.
2 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to place the
You can place the duplicate between other objects in the sequence, or nest
it within an object. See Nesting objects for details.
3 Select Edit > Duplicate.
The duplicate object is placed directly on top of the original, in the specified
position in the stitching sequence.
4 Move the duplicate object to the required position.
Cloning objects
Use Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object to select and clone objects.
The Quick Clone feature lets you quickly duplicate selected objects by
right-clicking, dragging and releasing at a new position. See also Mirroring
objects.
To clone objects
1 Select an object or objects.
2 Holding down the right mouse button, drag the object(s) to a new position.
A black outline of the object appears. The cursor icon includes a plus symbol.
Drag-and-drop
Right-click object
Object duplicated
432
Tip For more precise positioning, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging
movement is thereby constrained to X or Y axes.
3 Release the mouse.
A duplicate object(s) is created at the release point.
Tip Clone objects to another window by the same method. To temporarily
deactivate automatic scrolling, hold down the Shift key while dragging. An
identical copy of the selection is created at the same coordinates as the first
window, no matter where the mouse is released.
Deleting objects
Various methods are available for deleting objects.
To delete objects
Select the object (or objects) to delete, and do one of the following:
Press Delete.
Select Edit > Delete.
Right-click and select Delete from the popup menu.
Nesting objects
EmbroideryStudio lets you nest one object inside another at an exact point of
the stitching sequence. This feature is particularly useful with motifs and other
designs where long connectors may be generated. It also helps reduce the
overall numbers of objects, minimizing trims and tie-offs.
To nest objects
1 Travel through the first object until the needle position marker is positioned
where you want to insert the second object. See Traveling through designs
for details.
Travel to insertion
point and paste object
2 Insert the second object. To do this, either digitize the object, or copy and
paste, or cut-and-paste it.
433
The second object is nested in the stitching sequence of the first object. All
required functions are automatically inserted for the second object.
3 Move the copied object into the required position.
Grouping & locking objects

EmbroideryStudio lets you group objects together for group modifications.
Ungroup whenever you need to work with the component objects. You can also
lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident.
Grouping & ungrouping objects

Click Arrange > Group to group selected objects.
Click Arrange > Ungroup to ungroup selected objects.
You can group selected objects, or an entire design, to keep them together for
moving, scaling and transforming actions. With grouped objects you can also
apply global changes, saving time and ensuring consistency. When you have
finished making changes to a group, you can ungroup and work with the
component objects.
Note You need to ungroup before you can set properties for any individual
object in the group.
To group or ungroup objects
Select the objects. See Selecting and deselecting objects for details.
Click the Group icon or press Ctrl+G.
Select, move, resize, or

transform grouped
objects as single object
Selected objects are combined into a group. This can be selected, moved,
resized and transformed as a single object.
434
To ungroup, select the grouped object and click the Ungroup icon or press
Ctrl+U.
Objects ungrouped
and deselected
Tip To select with a selection marquee, simply drag the mouse over one or
more objects and any objects completely within the selection marquee are
selected when you release the mouse button. See Selecting objects by
selection marquee for details.
Locking & unlocking objects

Click Arrange > Lock to lock selected objects.
Click Arrange > Unlock All to unlock all locked objects in a design.
Lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident. For
example, locking backdrop images holds them in place as you digitize, transform
or reshape the embroidery objects near them. Locked objects can be unlocked
for modification at any time.
To lock or unlock objects
Select the objects to lock and click the Lock icon or press K.
The selection handles disappear, indicating that the object can no longer be
selected or modified.
To unlock objects, click the Unlock All icon.

All locked objects in the design are unlocked.
Grouping & locking with the Color-Object List

Use View > Color-Object List to group and/or lock objects.
The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and
access their properties. You can use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock,
and show and hide objects.
Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, resequence, as well
as branch objects. See also Copying & pasting objects and Resequencing colors
& objects with the Color-Object List.
To group or lock with the Color-Object List
The Color-Object List dialog opens.
435
2 Click a node to open or close a color block and see its component objects.
Click to open
or close node
Group/Lock
objects
3 Select color blocks or objects and right-click to invoke the popup menu.
4 Group and/or lock selected color blocks and objects via the popup menu.
Selecting objects within groups

Use Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object to select individual objects as
well as groups or ranges of objects.
EmbroideryStudio provides a method for you to select individual objects within
object groupings. This is handy if you want to make changes on-the-fly without
first having to ungroup and then regroup objects. See also Selecting and
deselecting objects.
To select objects within groups
Grouped objects
Use Alt + Click to select a single object within a group.
436
Use Ctrl or Shift keys in combination with Alt to select multiple objects or a
range of objects within a group. See also Selecting objects individually.
Use Alt + Drag to select by selection marquee within groups. See also
Selecting objects by selection marquee.
Use Alt + Polygon/Polyline select of objects within groups. See also

Selecting objects with Polygon/Polyline Select.
Within the Color-Object List, use the same techniques to:

Select a single object/color within a group (Alt+Click).
Add/remove a single object/color within a group (Alt+Ctrl+Click).
437
Select a range of objects/colors within a group (Alt+Shift+Click).
Note Once an object (or more) within a group is selected, all its properties,
stitching and otherwise, can be changed directly inside the group, without
the need to ungroup/regroup.
Sequencing embroidery objects

The embroidery objects comprising a design form a stitching sequence. Before
digitizing, it is good practice to analyze and plan design shapes and stitching
sequence in advance. Shapes need to be clearly defined to make them easy to
embroider. The best shapes have relatively constant width, with smooth edges,
no sharp turns and no small, protruding details. Details should always be
stitched last.
1
2
3
4
If you are digitizing manually in Embroidery mode, objects are stitched in the
order in which they were created. If you have converted a design directly from
Graphics mode to Embroidery mode, EmbroideryStudio uses powerful
automatic sequencing to determine the stitching sequence for a visually
appealing stitchout. Auto-sequencing attempts to generate embroidery designs
which are economical to produce, with minimal down-time and accurate
registration of textures and colors. The advantage of EmbroideryStudio
automatic conversion and sequencing of electronic artwork is that less time is
required for planning, allowing more time to be spent on artistic choices.
If you take a mixed mode approach, you may do the bulk of the design by means
of automatic conversion, and touch-ups and edits using the suite of
EmbroideryStudio embroidery digitizing tools. In addition, you can always
manually adjust the stitching sequence to improve the stitchout, for example, to
minimize color changes.
438
Note The entry and exit points should also be checked when you are
resequencing objects in a design. See also Smoothing curves.
Resequencing objects with cut-and-paste

Click Standard > Cut to cut a selected object or objects and place them on the
clipboard.
Click Standard > Paste to paste copied objects in the design.
You can resequence objects by cutting an object from the design and pasting it
back at a different point in the sequence. This does not change the physical
location of the object. See also Nesting objects.
To resequence objects with cut-and-paste
1 Select the object (or objects) to resequence.
2 Click the Cut icon.
The selected object is removed from the design and moved to the clipboard.
Completed design
center stitched first
Object cut to
clipboard
3 Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to paste the
You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the cut object
within another object. See Nesting objects for details.
If you do not move the current needle position marker, the object is pasted
at the end of the sequence.
4 Click the Paste icon.
Cursor inserted at
end of design
Object pasted
The object is pasted back in the design according to the current paste options.
See also Setting paste position options.
Note The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly until
the next Copy or Cut command.
439
Resequencing selected objects

You can resequence objects by selecting them in the required stitching order.
To resequence selected objects
1 Select the first object in the range you want to resequence.
2 Holding down Ctrl, select the subsequent objects to resequence.
Note Select each object in the order you want it to stitch out in.
3 With the objects still selected, select Edit > Resequence > By Selects.
The objects are resequenced in the order they were selected.
Resequencing objects by color

The Resequence By Color feature lets you resequence all objects in a design
by color. This reduces the number of color changes required.
Note This technique resequences all color blocks of the same color in the
stitching sequence. If, for any reason, you want to maintain separate color
blocks, you should use the Color-Object List. See Resequencing colors & objects
with the Color-Object List for details.
To resequence objects by color
1 Select the objects to resequence.
2 Select Edit > Resequence > By Color.
The Sequence By Color dialog opens listing the colors used in the selected
objects.
Select color
block
Use buttons to
resequence
3 Select a color and click Move Up or Move Down to change its position in the
sequence.
4 Click OK.
440
Resequencing colors & objects with the Color-Object List

Use View > Color-Object List to resequence objects.
access their properties. You can resequence color blocks and objects easily by
changing their position in the Color-Object List.
Tip You can also use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and
hide objects. Use it also to cut, copy and paste, as well as branch objects. See
also Grouping & locking objects and Copying & pasting objects.
To resequence colors & objects with the Color-Object List
The Color-Object List opens.
Click-and-drag object
to new position
2 Select the color block or object to resequence.

3 Click-and-drag selected objects to reposition them.
Note You cannot move an object between colors in a manual color change.
However, you can move an object between consecutive members of a
grouped object.
Drop object into new

position
Tip The entry and exit points should also be checked when you are
resequencing objects in a design. See also Smoothing curves.
441
Resequencing objects by number

Use View > Color-Object List to resequence objects.
You can resequence objects numerically in the Color-Object List. Use it to move
an object to a position between consecutive members of a color block. See also
Selecting objects by Color-Object List.
To resequence objects by number
The Color-Object List opens.
2 Select the object to resequence.
3 Right-click the object to resequence in the list.
4 Select Resequence By Number from the popup menu.
Enter number of
target object
5 In the Object # field, enter the number of the object before which you want
to position your selected object.
Note If you prefer to position the selected object after a selected number
e.g. to make it the last object in the list select the After Position option.
6 Click OK.
The selected object will be placed in the new position and all other objects
resequenced accordingly.
Resequencing with automatic branching

The Branching feature lets you digitize like objects e.g. the fingers of a hand,
sections of a custom letter without having to think about the most efficient
stitching sequence and joins. Branching is designed for use with shapes made
up of objects that overlap e.g. complicated letters, Asian characters, etc. Apply
Branching to join selected objects to form a single branched object. Objects
are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects grouped, and
stitches regenerated. All component objects are grouped and selectable as one.
Properties of branched objects
Branching works with any combination of the following object types Run,
Input A, Input B, Input C, Complex Fill and Fusion Fill. Objects with Motif Run
442
and Motif Fill cannot be used. Branched objects preserve their original properties
while sharing the color of the first object in the sequence.
Note When dissimilar objects are selected and branched, any which cannot be
branched are omitted.
Connections between branched objects
The component objects of a branched object are connected by the Closest Join
method used with custom alphabets. All objects are resequenced both externally
(in relation to each other) and internally (by automatic segmentation). See also
Digitizing custom letters.
Editing branched objects
Branched objects remain editable. They can be reshaped. There is only one
entry and one exit point, but all component objects have individual reshape
points. The object properties of a branched object can be accessed via the
Object Properties dialog. Stitch types can also be re-assigned via the toolbar.
Applying automatic branching

Click Generate > Branching to automatically branch selected embroidery objects.
Apply Branching to selected objects. These become a single branched object.
443
To apply automatic branching

1 Select the objects.
Long connectors
between separate objects
Note The function is only available if more than one object of any suitable
type is selected.
2 Click the Branching icon.
EmbroideryStudio will prompt you to digitize entry and exit points.
3 Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults.
Component objects are grouped and share the color of the first branched
object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, and stitches
regenerated.
Objects resequenced,
connectors minimized
4 Travel through the branched object to check stitching. See Traveling through
Branching objects with the Color-Object List

Use View > Color-Object List to branch objects in a design.
access their properties. You can use it to branch like objects in a design.
Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, group and ungroup,
lock and unlock, and show and hide objects, as well as resequence objects. See
also Grouping & locking with the Color-Object List, Copying & pasting objects,
and Resequencing colors & objects with the Color-Object List.
To apply branching with the Color-Object List
2 Select objects in the Color-Object List.
444
3 Right-click and select Branching from the popup menu.
Long connectors
join objects
Branch selected
objects
Note The function is only available if more than one object of any suitable
type is selected.
4 Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults.
Component objects are grouped and share the color of the first branched
object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, and stitches
regenerated.
Selected objects
grouped into single
branched object
Long connectors
eliminated
Applying automatic underlay to branched objects

Right-click Stitch Effects > Auto Underlay to select an underlay type to apply to
branched objects.
Because Branching combines objects to form a single branched object, you can
apply an underlay (single or double) to all.
To apply automatic underlay to branched objects
1 Select the branched object.
Select First Underlay

Select underlay type
445
3 Select the First Underlay checkbox and select an underlay type.

Underlay stitches are automatically generated for the branched object.
Note If component objects are touching or overlapping, the underlay is first
stitched out for the whole branched object followed by the cover stitch.
Whole underlay
stitched first
Cover stitched after

underlay
Applying two-layer run stitching with branching

With run stitching, digitizers frequently aim to have exactly two layers of
stitching on every segment while minimizing jumps and trims. This technique
effectively eliminates the need to have extra travel or jump stitches to get from
one part of the outline to another. It does so by using the stitches themselves
as travel stitches wherever possible, providing a higher quality result in the
process.
To apply two-layer run stitching with branching
1 Select the objects.
One layer of run

outline stitches
2 Click Branching and digitize entry and exit points in the normal way. See
Applying automatic branching for details.
Stitches are regenerated. Component objects are grouped and connectors
minimized no jumps, no extra travels.
Combination of one
and two layers of run
stitches created
3 Travel through the branched object to check stitching. See Viewing stitching
sequence for details.
Tip When the entry and exit point are the same, there are two layers of
outline stitching. If they are different, the path between the entry and exit
446
will have three layers. It is your choice whether to have the extra travel layer
or a trim connection to the next object instead.
Sequencing entry/exit points

Designs stitch out more efficiently when the connectors between objects are
short. This also reduces the number of trims in a design. EmbroideryStudio has
a Closest Join method which is set via the View > Design Options > General
dialog. When activated (the default), entry and exit points of objects are
automatically placed when the user digitizes new objects. However, closest joins
are not automatically maintained when objects are moved, re-sequenced, or
edited. The Apply Closest Join feature allows you to (re-)apply closest join to
objects after editing. See also Setting other general options.
Adjusting entry/exit points

Use Toolbox > Reshape Object to adjust the entry and exit points of selected
objects.
Use Reshape Views > Show Start/End to toggle entry/exit point display when using
the Reshape Object tool.
EmbroideryStudio allows you to change entry and exit points of individual
objects. This is important if you are digitizing manually using the embroidery
input methods. You should always aim to place exit points adjacent to entry
points of adjoining objects in order to minimize connecting stitches and reduce
the number of travel runs. Entry and exit points should also be checked if you
are resequencing objects in a design. See also Sequencing embroidery objects.
Tip If you are digitizing adjoining columns, you can keep or omit the last stitch
in the first column to achieve a smoother join or shorter connecting stitches. See
Keeping or omitting last stitches for details.
To adjust entry/exit points
1 Select the object to change.
2 Click the Reshape Object icon and click Show Start/End to view only the
entry and exit points.
447
3 Select the entry or exit point as required, and drag it to a different position
on the object outline.
Entry point
Exit point
Exit point
Entry point
Entry point
Exit point
Tip To view the next or previous objects, press Tab or Shift+Tab keys.
Pressing these keys also causes all changes to the object to be accepted.
4 Press Enter.
Note In circle/star or ring objects, only the entry point appears. In circle
objects, the stitch angle is perpendicular to the line connecting the entry point
to the circle center point. Thus, changing the stitch entry point changes its
stitch angle.
Applying closest join

Use Generate > Apply Closest Join to (re-)apply closest join to objects after editing.
The Apply Closest Join command may be accessed via:
Toolbar button on the Generate toolbar

Edit menu
Design window popup menu
Color-Object List popup menu
Shortcut key (J)
The Apply Closest Join command is only enabled when two or more
embroidery objects are selected.
To apply closest join
Digitize embroidery objects as required.
448
If the Closest Join method has been activated via the View > Design
Options > General dialog, entry and exit points of objects are automatically
joined at the closest point. See Setting other general options for details.
Objects joined at
closest point
Move, reshape, and/or resequence objects in the design as required.

Closest join is not recalcuated automatically long connectors may result.
Long connectors
may result after
resequencing
Select all objects in the sequence and reapply closest join click Apply
Closest Join or choose the command from the popup menu.
Selected embroidery objects are regenerated with Closest Join applied.
Closest joins
recalculated
449
Caution Any non-sequential embroidery objects in the selection will cause a

message to be displayed:
Note Note also that:

Any non-embroidery objects e.g. bitmaps and vectors are excluded
from the selection.
Selected objects that were previously un-generated will be generated.
Closest join limitations

The Apply Closest Join feature is not applicable to all objects in all
circumstances. Note the following limitations.
Stitch regeneration
Closest Join requires the complete stitch regeneration of the objects the
whole object, not just connectors. Stitch regeneration has its limitations:
Recognized objects i.e. opened from stitch files may generate poor or
incorrect embroidery.
Manual (unrecognized) objects cannot be changed by stitch regeneration.

Thus Closest Join will not work properly for them.
Manual stitch edits to objects will be lost.

Inserted and recognized machine functions may be mistakenly regenerated
on the underlay.
Nested objects are not supported. They will become un-nested and placed
after the object in which they were originally nested. This may not produce
ideal sequence.
Run objects
The Closest Join technique is not as powerful as Branching for run objects.
Closest Join will not produce a nicely-merged double-run, so connectors are
450
only possible at the ends of the run, not in the middle. The best it can do is swap
the ends of the runs.
Branched run objects
Clostest Join run objects
451
Chapter 21
Arranging, Scaling & Transforming Objects
You can change the position, size and orientation of objects in a design by
moving, scaling and transforming them. Group objects together to apply
universal changes, or lock them to avoid unintentional modification. Modify
objects directly on screen or via their object properties. Access commonly used
functions via the Color-Object List.
Note The scalability and stitching quality of a design ultimately depend on its
original source Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or
Imported Stitches. Only EMB designs contain the complete set of design
information required for 100% perfect scaling and transformation. See also
Embroidery design formats.
This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align and
space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects in a
design.
Positioning objects
Position objects in your design using the mouse to drag them to a new position,
nudging them with the arrow keys or by specifying the X:Y coordinates in the
Property bar. EmbroideryStudio lets you align objects to position them
relative to each other, or distribute them evenly in your design.
Moving objects
The simplest way to move an object in your design is to click-and-drag it to a
new position. Use the arrow keys to nudge objects into position.
452
Note If no objects are selected, using the arrow keys moves the current needle
position.
To move objects
Select the objects to move and click-and-drag it to a new position. See

Selecting and deselecting objects for details.
Use cross-hair cursor

to center object
For more accurate positioning, use the arrow keys to nudge the object into
the required position.
For even more accurate positioning, enter the X:Y coordinates in the
Property bar.
Enter exact
coordinates
The object is centered above the coordinates you set.

Tip Zoom in to make small adjustments. The distance the object moves
depends on the current zoom factor. The greater the zoom factor, the smaller
the distance moved.
Aligning objects
Use Arrange > Align Left to left-align selected objects.
Use Arrange > Align Horizontal Centers to align selected objects through their
horizontal centers.
Use Arrange > Align Right to right-align selected objects.
Use Arrange > Align Top to top-align selected objects.
Use Arrange > Align Vertical Centers to align selected objects through their vertical
centers.
Use Arrange > Align Bottom to bottom-align selected objects.
You can align selected objects in a design to the left, right, top, bottom or center
of a specific object. The Arrange toolbar offers a set of buttons to trigger
functions of the same name found in the Arrange menu. The tools all become
enabled when two or more objects are selected.
453
To align objects
1 Select the objects you want to align. See Selecting and deselecting objects
for details.
2 Select the object you want to align with.
Note Objects are aligned with the last object selected. When all the objects
in the design are selected by using Ctrl+A or a selection marquee they are
aligned with the last object in the sequence.
3 Click an alignment tool or select Arrange > Align > ...
Align center
Align left
3
Align bottom
Note The Align Center tool is only accessed via the Arrange menu.
Distributing objects evenly

Use Arrange > Space Evenly Across to distribute selected objects evenly across
the screen.
Use Arrange > Space Evenly Down to distribute selected objects evenly down the
screen.
You can automatically distribute selected objects with even spacing between
them, both vertically or horizontally. The Arrange toolbar offers a set of buttons
to trigger functions of the same name found in the Arrange menu. The tools all
become enabled when three or more objects are selected.
To distribute objects evenly
1 Select the objects you want to space. See Selecting and deselecting objects
for details.
2 Click a spacing tool or select Arrange > Space Evenly > ...
Scaling objects
You can scale objects by dragging selection handles, specifying the exact
dimensions in the Property bar, or by setting the distance between reference
Chapter 21 Arranging, S c aling & Tra nsforming Obje c ts
454
points on the design. As an object is scaled, the stitch count changes to preserve
the current stitch spacing.
Note Only EMB designs contain the complete set of design information required
for 100% perfect scaling and transformation.
Scaling objects interactively

You can change the height and width of an object, or scale it proportionally using
selection handles. Scale objects individually, or select multiple objects and scale
them together.
To scale objects interactively
1 Select the objects to scale.
Eight selection handles appear around the object.
2 Click-and-drag a selection handle to resize the object.
To scale height and width proportionally, use a corner handle.
Scale proportionally
Drag
Scale freely in both

directions
Ctrl + drag
Tip By default, objects scale proportionally. To scale freely in vertical and

horizontal planes, hold down Ctrl as you drag.
To change the height, use the handles at the center-top or center-bottom.
Drag
Scale
vertically
Scale
vertically
Drag
455
To change the width, use the handles at the center-sides.

Scale
horizontally
Drag
To resize proportionally around a central anchor point, hold down Shift as

you drag.
Shift + drag
Scale horizontally in
both directions
Scale proportionally
about center
Shift + drag
Scaling objects numerically

You can scale artwork, selected objects or a whole design by means of object
properties. With normal outline (EMB) files, this allows stitches to be
regenerated while preserving the original stitch density.
Note If you scale a stitch design by more than 5%, changes to stitch density
will affect the design quality. See Embroidery design formats for details.
To scale objects numerically
2 In the Property bar, either:
Enter exact height and width values.

Enter the new height and width as a percentage of the current dimensions.
Enter dimensions as exact
values or as a percentage
Tip To preserve aspect ratio, copy the calculated percentage from one field
to the other.
456
3 Click the Apply button.
Vase scaled
Width: 120% Height: 140%
Shadow scaled
Width: 140% Height: 120%
Note After scaling, the new object size is reset to 100%.
Scaling objects with reference points

You can scale an object or design by marking reference points and specifying the
required length of the line between them. For example, to resize a design to a
specific width, select all objects, then mark the reference points across the width
of the design.
To scale objects with reference points
2 Select Edit > Transform.
The Transform dialog opens.
Select Size
checkbox
Specify size
3 Select the Size checkbox, and enter the required distance between the
reference points.
4 Click OK.
You are prompted to enter the start and end points of the reference line. You
will have already decided which two points in the object or design will form
the reference line.
Click to mark the

reference points
5 Click to mark the reference points on the design.

The object is scaled so that the distance between the points is the value you
entered in the dialog.
Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. Press
Enter twice to use the default reference line.
457
Making objects the same size

Click Arrange > Make Same Width to scale an object or design to the same width
as a reference object.
Click Arrange > Make Same Height to scale an object or design to the same height
as a reference object.
Click Arrange > Make Same Width and Height to scale an object or design to the
same size as a reference object.
You can scale objects to the same size as a reference object. Resize the height
or width separately or both.
To make objects the same size
1 Select the objects to resize.
2 Select the object that is the size you require.
3 Click a sizing tool or select Arrange > Make Same Size > ...
Make same width
Make same height
3
2
Make same width and height
Note Objects are resized with reference to the last object selected. When
all the objects in the design are selected by using Ctrl+A or a selection
marquee they are resized with reference to the last object in the sequence.
Rotating objects
You can rotate objects directly on screen or by setting an exact rotation angle.
Rotating objects by click-and-drag

When you select an object, selection handles display at its extremities. When
you click the object again, the handles change to rotation handles.
458
To rotate objects by click-and-drag

1 Select the objects to rotate.
2 Click the objects a second time.
Rotation handles appear at the corners and an anchor point at the center.
Rotation handle
Anchor point
Click second
time
Skew handle
Note If you click too quickly, the Object Properties dialog opens.
3 Drag the anchor point to any position required.
Drag corner point to rotate

about the anchor point
Anchor point
repositioned
Drag corner point to rotate

about the anchor point
4 Click-and-drag a rotation handle clockwise or anti-clockwise.

An outline displays as you rotate.
Rotating objects by an exact amount

Click Transform > Rotate 45 degrees CW to rotate selected objects by 45 in a
clockwise direction.
Click Transform > Rotate 45 degrees CCW to rotate selected objects by 45 in a
counter-clockwise direction.
Use Transform > Rotate to rotate selected objects by an exact amount (in
degrees).
You can rotate selected objects in 45 increments or by entering an exact value
using the Transform toolbar.
To rotate objects by an exact amount
459
2 To rotate in 45 increments, click one of the Rotate 45 icons.
3 To rotate by an exact amount, enter the exact angle in the Rotate field and
press Enter.
Rotating objects by reference line

The Transform Special tool lets you rotate selected objects with the aid of
reference points alone.
Tip This technique is particularly useful to duplicate and rotate objects around
an anchor point e.g. the petals of a flower.
To rotate objects by reference line
2 Select Edit > Transform Special.
3 Follow the instruction in the prompt line:
Click the first reference point. This becomes the anchor point for the
rotation.
Click a second reference point. An outline attaches to the pointer.
Move the pointer
Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments.

Click the anchor point. The pointer then aligns itself with the second
reference point.
Click a guide point for the required rotation position. Use the coordinates
on the Status bar for exact alignment.
Rotating objects by reference line and angle

The Transform tool provides another method for transforming selected objects
using a combination of reference points and numeric values. This provides a very
accurate technique for rotating selected objects. The technique is particularly
useful when you want to align objects precisely with a common reference line.
460
To rotate objects by reference line and angle

2 Decide which two points in the object or design will form the reference line.
This should be a significant line e.g. one which must be perfectly horizontal
or vertical in the final design.
Enter absolute
rotation angle in
degrees
Select Angle
4 Select the Angle checkbox, and enter the rotation angle of the reference line.
For example, to rotate the image so that it aligns with the horizontal axis,
enter a value of 0.
Select rotation angle

e.g. 0
Digitize reference line align

with base of object
Reference line set to angle

specified in dialog
5 Click OK.
6 Click to mark the start and end points of the reference line.
Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. Press
Enter twice to use a horizontal reference line by default.
Skewing objects
Use Transform > Skew to skew selected objects by an exact amount (in
degrees).
You can skew objects directly on screen or by setting an exact skew angle.
To skew objects
1 Select the objects to skew.
461
2 Click the object a second time.

Rotation and skew handles appear around the object. Skew handles are
diamond-shaped and appear at the center-top and bottom of the object.
Rotation handle
Anchor point
Click second
time
Skew handle
3 Drag the skew handles left or right.

The object skews along the horizontal plane.
Drag skew handle left

or right
Tip To skew by an exact amount, enter the exact angle in the Skew field on
the Transform toolbar and press Enter.
Mirroring objects
In EmbroideryStudio you can mirror objects horizontally or vertically by means
of the Transform toolbar. You can also mirror around a defined axis using a
reference line. The Mirror-Merge tools allow you to duplicate and transform
selected embroidery objects, as well as merge them into a single object. See
also Duplicating objects. See also Cloning objects.
Flipping objects
Click Transform > Mirror Horizontally to flip selected objects in the vertical plane.
Click Transform > Mirror Vertically to flip selected objects in the vertical plane.
You can mirror selected objects horizontally or vertically using the Mirror tools.
462
To flip objects
1 Select the objects to mirror.
2 Click a Mirror icon.
Starting object
Mirrored horizontally
Mirrored in both axes
Mirrored vertically
Mirroring objects around an axis

You can mirror objects around a defined axis using a reference line. Using this
method you mark the start and end points of the line around which the object
mirrors.
To mirror objects around an axis
1 Select the objects to mirror.
Select Mirror
3 Select the Mirror checkbox.

4 Click OK.
Starting object
Mirrored
5 Click to mark the reference points of the mirror axis.
463
After the second click, the selected object is mirrored in the reference line.
Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. If you
just want to mirror your selection around a horizontal axis, press Enter
twice. The mirror axis defaults to zero.
Creating reflected objects

Use Mirror-Merge > Reflect to duplicate and mirror objects or designs.
Use the Mirror-Merge Reflect tool to duplicate and mirror designs
simultaneously. You can use it to quickly create borders. You can also use it
merge duplicates into a perfectly symmetrical object such as a face or heart.
To create reflected objects

1 Select the object or design.
2 Click the Reflect icon.
The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the duplicate
outlines move accordingly.
Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge.
3 Set the number of columns and rows you require.
Set no. of rows
Set no. of columns
464
4 Move the reference line to position the duplicates.
5 For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings.
Set precise row spacing
Set precise column spacing
Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm.
6 Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm.
The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point.
Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge
objects. Use this feature to merge duplicates into a perfectly symmetrical
object such as a face or heart.
Object reflected
Reflected objects merged
Creating wreaths
Use Mirror-Merge > Wreath to duplicate objects around a center point.
UseMirror-Merge > Kaleidoscope to duplicate and mirror objects around a center
point.
465
Use the Mirror-Merge Wreath tool to duplicate objects around a center point.
The Kaleidoscope tool works like Wreath but mirrors objects as well. Because
objects are mirrored, Kaleidoscope works best with an even number.
To create wreaths
2 Click the Wreath or Kaleidoscope icon.
The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the duplicate
3 Enter the number of Wreath points.
Enter no. of wreath points
Note Enter an even number for a kaleidoscope effect.

Five-point wreath
Six-point
kaleidoscope
Tip Hold down Ctrl to constrain the reference line to 45o increments.
5 For more precise positioning, adjust the Distance and Angle settings.
Distance and angle are measured from the center of the original to the center
of the wreath or kaleidoscope.
Set precise distance
Set precise angle
466

The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point.
Five-point wreath
Six-point kaleidoscope
objects.
Creating design arrays

Use Mirror-Merge > Array to duplicate objects or designs.
Use the Mirror-Merge Array tool to create multiple copies of designs, such as
badges, spaced in rows and columns for faster stitchouts. Mirror-Merge
automatically sequences each color block to eliminate unnecessary machine
color changes.
To create design arrays

2 Click the Array icon.
The pointer attaches to a reference line. As you move it around, the duplicate
Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge.
3 Set the number of columns and rows you require.
Set no. of rows
Set no. of columns
467
5 For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings.
Set precise row spacing
Set precise column spacing
The design is duplicated and distributed around the reference lines.
objects.
468
Chapter 22
Reshaping & Converting Objects
EmbroideryStudio offers a number of techniques for reshaping embroidery

objects, all with the one tool. Sometimes you may need to cut, split or break up
complex or compound objects in order to fine-tune them. Various tools are
available for this purpose. As well as reshaping object outlines, you can add and
adjust stitch angles, a property unique to embroidery objects. You can also
change the entry and exit points of individual objects which is important if you
are digitizing manually or resequencing embroidery objects.
This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, how to break
up objects, how to adjust and add stitch angles, as well as how to change entry
and exit points of objects in a stitching sequence. It also covers conversion of
one embroidery object to another.
Reshaping embroidery objects

The reference points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control
points. These vary slightly with the object type. You use control points to edit or
transform objects. Most control points can be added, deleted, or moved. Corner
and curve points can be interchanged. Some control points such as entry and
exit points have a specific function and cannot be deleted. See also Digitizing
Embroidery Shapes.
Entry point
Exit point
Corner reshape node
Curve reshape node
Control handle
Stitch angle points
The Reshape Object tool is an important tool in EmbroideryStudio. Use it to

add or delete reshape nodes on the object outline. For some objects, you can
also change corner reshape nodes to curves. You can click and drag reshape
nodes to reshape object outlines or use Bzier control handles to change outline
469
shapes. EmbroideryStudio also lets you select a range of reshape nodes in

open and closed objects, making reshaping operations quick and simple.
Tip Before modifying any design, it is good practice to save a copy under a new
name and keep the original in case you want to discard changes and start again.
Viewing control points

objects, edit stitch angles, and adjust entry/exit points.
Use Reshape Views > Show Reshape Nodes to toggle reshape node display
when using the Reshape Object tool.
Use Reshape Views > Show Handles to toggle Bzier handle display when using
Use Reshape Views > Show Stitch Angles to toggle stitch angle display when
using the Reshape Object tool.
Use Reshape Views > Show Start/End to toggle entry/exit point display when
The Reshape Object tool is an important tool in EmbroideryStudio. It invokes
its own Reshape Views toolbar which allows you to selectively view reshape
nodes, Bzier control handles, stitch angles, as well as entry and exit points. Use
the tool whenever you want to change object shapes by adding, deleting, or
manipulating reshape nodes or control handles on the object outline. Use it also
to edit stitch angles as well as entry and exit points.
To view control points
Select the object and click the Reshape Object icon.

Control points appear around the object and the Reshape Views toolbar
appears. By default, reshape nodes, stitch angles and entry/exit points
display together.
Entry point
Corner reshape node

Curve reshape node
Stitch angle line

Stitch angle point
Bzier control handle
Exit point
Note Corner and curve points can be interchanged. Most control points can
be added, deleted, or moved. Entry and exit points, however, cannot be
deleted.
Chapter 22 Resha ping & Conver ting Obje c ts
470
Click icons on the Reshape Views toolbar to selectively display control

points depending on what you want to edit.
Show Reshape Nodes
Show Handles
Show Stitch Angles
Show Start/End
Use Show Reshape Nodes to toggle reshape node display. See

Reshaping objects with reshape nodes for details.
Use Show Handles to toggle control handles display works in

conjunction with Show Reshape Nodes toggle. See Reshaping objects
with Bzier controls for details. See also Setting reshape options.
Use Show Stitch Angles to toggle stitch angle display. See Adding stitch
angles in Reshape mode for details.
Use Show Start/End to toggle entry/exit point display. See Smoothing
curves for details.
Tip The Show Reshape Nodes button can be toggled using the hotkey
combination Alt+N. The Show Stitch Angles button can be toggled using
the hotkey combination Alt+A.
To view the next or previous objects, press Tab or Shift+Tab keys.
Shift + Tab
Tab
Note Pressing Tab or Shift+Tab also causes all changes to the object to be
accepted.
Reshaping objects with reshape nodes

objects by means of control points.
471
Change object shapes with the Reshape Object tool. Use it to add, delete, or
move reshape nodes on the object outline. For some objects, you can also
change corner reshape nodes to curves.
Note The Reshape Object tool lets you modify shapes without affecting the
stitch angles and entry and exit points.
To reshape objects with reshape nodes
Select the object to reshape and click the Reshape Object icon.
appears.
Toggle on only Show Reshape Nodes to view these control points and
toggle off other icons.
To add extra nodes on the outline:

Left-click to add a corner reshape node.
Right-click to add a curve reshape node.
Right-click
Left-click
Select reshape nodes as required:
OR
Click to select hold

down Ctrl to select
multiple nodes
Drag selection marquee

around reshape nodes
to select
Hold down Shift and right or

left-click to select range of nodes
Click to select a single reshape node.

Use the Ctrl key to select multiple reshape nodes.
Click-and-drag a selection marquee around a group of reshape nodes to
select.
Use the Shift key to select a range of reshape nodes. Left-clicking or
right-clicking in closed shapes reverses the direction of the selection.
Adjust the position of selected reshape nodes by clicking and dragging them
along the outline. See also Reshaping objects with Bzier controls.
472
Depending on system settings, stitches are generated automatically as soon

as the reshape nodes are moved. See Setting reshape options for details.
Drag reshape
nodes
Tip Use the arrow keys to nudge selected reshape nodes.
Press Delete to delete unwanted reshape nodes.
Delete reshape
nodes and toggle
between corners
and curves
Press Spacebar to toggle between selected corner and curve reshape nodes.
Tip If you make a mistake, press Esc to remove the changes, press Esc
again to exit Reshape mode.
Note You can also adjust stitch angles as required, as well as change entry
and exit points. See Adding stitch angles in Reshape mode for details. See
also Smoothing curves.
Reshaping objects with Bzier controls

Use Reshape Views > Show Handles to toggle Bzier control handle display when
When EmbroideryStudio converts a vector graphic, it preserves the nodes and
control points of the original. CorelDRAW uses Bzier curves in the creation of
vector objects. These are vectors produced according to principles invented by
French engineer, Pierre Bzier. In Embroidery mode you have the option of
473
working with reshape nodes and/or Bzier control handles. See also Reshaping
objects with reshape nodes.
Note The Options > Reshape dialog controls node dragging behavior in
Reshape operations. The Bzier option must be activated for this feature to
work. See Setting reshape options for details.
To reshape objects with controls
1 Select the object to reshape.
2 Click the Reshape Object icon.
appears.
3 Toggle on Show Reshape Nodes together with Show Handles to view both
reshape nodes and Bzier control points.
4 Reshape objects in one of two ways:
Drag the control handle to reshape the curve around the reshape nodes.
Bzier control
handle
Curve point
Drag control handle
to reshape curve
Adjust the position of selected reshape nodes by clicking and dragging

them along the outline.
Original curve
Bzier curve
Traditional curve
Note Depending on the system setting, you can either perform bzier or
traditional node dragging. Generally, bzier node dragging preserves the
shape of the curve more accurately. See Setting reshape options for details.
5 Release the mouse and/or press Enter to finish.
Again depending on system settings, stitches are generated as soon as the
reshape nodes are moved or after Enter is pressed. See Setting reshape
Tip Press Spacebar to toggle between corner and curve reshape nodes.
474
Reshaping circle, star and ring objects

For objects created with the Circle/Star or Ring tools, you reshape using the
existing control points only. You cannot add, change or delete control points in
these objects.
Reshaping circle/star objects

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape circle and star
objects.
You can change circle/star objects from circles to ovals using the Reshape
Object tool. The Show Stitch Angles icon is disabled. Circle/star objects have
two reshape nodes (used to change the radius and orientation of the object), a
center point (used to reposition it), and an entry point.
Tip To scale a circle without changing it to an oval, select it with the Select
Object tool, and use the selection handles to scale it.
To reshape circle/star objects
1 Select the circle/star object.
The Reshape Views toolbar appears.
Entry point
90
Center point
Reshape node
Stitch angle
3 Click a reshape node on the circumference of the circle, and drag it to reshape
the outline.
Click-and-drag
reshape node
Press Enter
475
To reshape without changing the orientation, use the reshape node at the
top of the object.
To reshape and spin the object around its center point, use the reshape
node at the side.
4 To move the circle, click the center point and drag it to a new position.
5 Press Enter.
Reshaping ring objects

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape ring objects.
You can reshape the inner and outer boundaries of ring objects with the Reshape
Object tool. Reshaping rings is similar to reshaping circle/star objects except
that you reshape each boundary individually. Each boundary has two reshape
nodes for changing radius and orientation, as well as a center point for moving
the boundary. The object has a single entry point.
To reshape ring objects

1 Select the ring object.
The Reshape Views toolbar appears.
Entry point
Reshape node
Center point may

not be visible
3 Click a reshape node on either boundary, drag it to change the outline, and
press Enter.
Click-and-drag
reshape node
Press Enter
476
To reshape without changing the orientation, use the reshape node at the
top of the boundary.
To reshape and spin the boundary around its center, use the reshape node
at the side.
4 To offset the boundaries, select the center point of a boundary, drag it to a
new position, and press Enter.
Click-and-drag
center point
Press Enter
Note The center points are generally on top of each other to begin with, and
may not be visible.
Cutting, splitting and breaking objects

EmbroideryStudio lets you split embroidery objects into smaller objects. This
is useful, for example, when you want to split manual objects up in order to
convert sections to outline objects with Stitch Processor. You can also split
branched objects monograms, appliqus, lettering, etc into their component
parts. EmbroideryStudio also provides cutting tools to assist in
semi-automated digitizing of both bitmap and vector artwork. See also Shaping
Splitting embroidery objects

EmbroideryStudio lets you split embroidery objects into smaller objects. This
is useful, for example, when you want to split Manual objects up in order to
convert sections to outline objects with Stitch Processor. Use the Split Object
command to split embroidery objects created with the Input A, Input B, and
Input C tools together with Satin, Tatami, or Program Split as the stitch type.
477
Run objects may also be split but Complex Fill objects cannot. See also Adjusting
stitch densities.
To split embroidery objects

1 Select an object to split.
2 Travel to the stitch where you want it to be split.
You can travel to a stitch inside a Satin, Tatami, Run or Manual object. See
Traveling through designs for details.
Note You cannot split an object at the first stitch.
3 Select Edit > Split Object.
The object is split into two objects at the needle position marker.
Split object
deleted
Split object
Tip You can convert any split Manual objects to outline objects with Stitch
Processor. See Recognizing object/outlines after editing for details.
Breaking apart branched objects

Use Arrange > Break Apart to split branched objects monograms, appliqus,
lettering, etc into component objects.
The Break Apart tool allows you to split branched objects monograms,
appliqus, lettering, etc into their component parts. The effect on these
objects is similar to the ungrouping operation.
Caution When saved into earlier versions of the software, monograms,

appliqus, lettering, and blackwork runs may be subjected to the Break Apart
procedure by default.
478
To break apart branched objects

1 Select the object you want to break apart e.g. branched object, appliqu,
monogram, lettering, etc.
The Break Apart command is activated.
2 Click the Break Apart icon or select Arrange > Break Apart.
The branched object is split into its component objects.
Tip To modify individual objects e.g. to change the stitching sequence of

monogram borders use the Color-Object List to ungroup objects and
resequence.
Cutting shapes manually

Use Toolbox > Edit Tools Flyout > Knife to cut objects along a digitized line,
preserving object type, stitch settings, and colors in resulting objects.
The Knife tool is used to manually cut filled shapes into smaller fragments
without overlaps. Fragment objects are generated with stitching parallel or
turning appropriate to their shape. The Knife tool lets you digitize a cutter
path, allowing multiple cuts curved or straight, open but not closed. The tool
cuts both filled and fillable vector objects as well as embroidery objects.
479
Tip The Knife tool has the advantage over Split Object and Divide tools of
allowing you to digitize temporary cut lines. See also Splitting embroidery
objects and Shaping vector and embroidery objects.
To cut shapes manually
1 Select one or more suitable objects for cutting.
Object needs cutting at this point to

avoid awkward stitch angles
2 Click the Knife tool.

The cursor changes to a knife icon and converts the cutter curve to a thick
line. You are prompted to enter point 1.
3 Enter a curve in the usual manner left-click for corner points, right-click for
smooth points and press Enter to finish.
Objects lying beneath the knife curve are cut into valid fragments. The source
objects stitch type is applied to fragments where applicable.
Source object
separated into two
adjoining objects
EmbroideryStudio orders fragment objects into a closest-join sequence that

preserves the source objects entry and exit points. There are three possible
ways of reordering:
Reorder and create travel runs between objects separated by a gap.

Reorder, trimming between separated objects where necessary, but
creating no travel runs.
Combine fragments into a single branched object corresponding to the

source object.
Choose a preferred alternative via the Options > Reshape dialog. See
Setting reshape options for details.
Tip You may need to manually adjust the overlap between adjoining objects
using the Reshape tool. See Reshaping objects with reshape nodes for
details.
480
Cutting shapes automatically

Toolbox > Edit Tools Flyout > Automatic Knife tool automatically slices
Complex Fill and Fusion Fill embroidery objects into smaller turning stitch and
single angle objects with automatic overlaps.
The Automatic Knife tool assists semi-automated digitizing of both bitmap and
vector artwork.
For each source object, EmbroideryStudio:
Creates turning-stitch objects as well as single-angle objects where

appropriate.
Creates overlaps at junctions between objects.

Branches adjoining objects. See Resequencing with automatic branching for
details.
Although Knife can be manually applied to any shape, it requires some
embroidery knowledge and digitizing skill. Automatic Knife operates on
Complex Fill and Fusion Fill embroidery objects only. When these objects have
clean boundaries, EmbroideryStudio fragments them automatically and
generates good quality stitching in most cases.
To cut shapes automatically
1 Select one or more suitable objects for cutting.
Object needs cutting at this point

to avoid awkward stitch angles
2 Click the Automatic Knife icon.
481
EmbroideryStudio cuts the selected object automatically, discarding any

unwanted fragments. It orders resulting objects into a closest-join sequence
that preserves the source objects entry and exit points.
Overlaps created
between fragment
objects at junctions
Tip The Break Apart tool allows you to split branched objects, including
objects resulting from cutting operations, into their component parts. See
Breaking apart branched objects for details.
Adding and adjusting stitch angles

Stitch angle adjustments depend on the type of object you are working with.
With Complex Fill objects you can set a single stitch angle for the entire object.
You can add multiple stitch angles to objects with the Stitch Angles tool. You
can also adjust stitch angles with the Reshape Object tool.
Note You cannot change the stitch angle of Star, Ring and Input C objects as
the stitches automatically turn to follow the shape. You can, however, change
the stitch angle of Circle objects by moving the entry point. See Reshaping
circle, star and ring objects for details.
Adding stitch angles in Reshape mode

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to add stitch angles to
selected objects.
Use Reshape Views > Show Stitch Angles to toggle stitch angle display when
You can adjust and/or add stitch angles to embroidery objects interactively using
the Reshape Object tool. EmbroideryStudio also lets you add stitch angles to
Input A, Input B or Fusion Fill objects while in Reshape Object mode. Input A
objects thereby convert to Input B. See also Converting between embroidery
objects.
482
You can also use the Reshape Object tool to add individual reshape nodes on
either side of Input A and Input B objects, modifying the shape without
affecting the stitch angles. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Tip You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object
properties. See Adjusting stitch angle properties for details.
To add stitch angles in Reshape mode
1 Select the object.
Input A object
Input B object
Complex Fill object
2 Click the Reshape Object icon and click Show Stitch Angles to view only
these control points.
3 Click-and-drag stitch angle points to their required positions.
4 Select and adjust the end points as required.
Input A object
Input B object
Complex Fill object
Note You cannot add stitch angles to Complex Fill objects in Reshape mode.
See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode for details.
5 Holding down the Ctrl key, click the outline wherever you want to place a
stitch angle line.
Input A object
converted to Input B
Input B object with stitch

angle added
Fusion Fill object with

stitch angle added
Tip Input A objects automatically convert to Input B as soon as you add or

adjust a stitch angle. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode for
details.
483
6 Press Enter.
The stitch angles change accordingly.
Tip You need to convert Input B objects to Input A in order to apply Smart
Corners. To do this, you need to edit the reshape nodes to create reshape
node pairs. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode

Use Toolbox > Edit Tools Flyout > Stitch Angles (or popup menu) to add stitch
angles to selected objects.
Modify the stitch angles of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects with the Stitch
Angles tool. You can also create objects with turning stitches by adding stitch
angles directly to vector objects. Adding stitch angles to Complex Fill or vector
objects converts them to Fusion Fill. See also Converting between embroidery
objects.
Complex Fill object one
stitch angle
Complex Fill converted

to Fusion Fill
To add stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode

1 Select an object.
2 Click the Stitch Angles icon.
Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Stitch Angles from the
dropdown menu. You are prompted to enter stitch angles.
Complex Fill object
Stitch angles added
3 Digitize stitch angles so that they intersect two sides of the object.
484
Make sure that they do not intersect each other. If they do, a warning
message will display.
4 Press Enter.
The object is re-generated with the new angles.
Smoothing curves
Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object in combination with Edit >
Smooth Curves to remove unnecessary reshape nodes from vector graphic
objects.
Both vector and embroidery objects contain reshape nodes on their outlines. On
shapes where the angle changes constantly, the software may insert hundreds
of reshape nodes, making reshaping difficult. The Smooth Curves command
lets you apply curve smoothing to embroidery as well as vector objects.
To smooth curves
1 Select the object (or objects) to smooth.
Note You can only smooth objects that have been ungrouped and selected.
However, you can select multiple objects.
Reshape nodes display around the outline.
3 Select Edit > Smooth Curves.
The Smooth Curves dialog opens.
Enter smoothing
precision value
4 In the Precision field, enter the smoothing precision value.

This value controls how closely the smoothed outline follows the original. The
larger the precision value, the fewer the reshape nodes.
485
5 Click OK.
Converting between embroidery objects

EmbroideryStudio lets you convert vector graphics directly to embroidery
objects using a variety of techniques. Similarly, you can convert embroidery
designs or objects to vector graphics. You can also convert between different
Run and Input C objects. This is useful when scaling designs e.g. for creating
thicker or thinner columns and borders. See also Converting vector and
embroidery objects.
Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by applying
stitch angles directly to vector objects. You can also add turning stitches to
Complex Fill objects with the Stitch Angles tool. See Adding stitch angles in
Stitch Angles mode for details.
Converting vector objects to embroidery

Use Toolbox > Edit Tools Flyout > Stitch Angles (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Fusion Fill objects.
Use Toolbox > Free Shapes Tools Flyout > Complex Fill (or Convert popup menu)
to convert vector objects to Complex Fill objects.
Use Toolbox > Column Shape Tools Flyout > Input C (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Input C objects.
Use Toolbox > Free Shapes Tools Flyout > Fusion Fill (or Convert popup menu)
to convert vector objects to Fusion Fill objects.
Use Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Appliqu objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout >Run to convert vector objects (or Convert
popup menu) to Run objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Triple Run (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Triple Run objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Motif Run objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Backstitch (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Backstitch objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Stemstitch (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Stemstitch objects.
You can convert vector objects to embroidery objects using Complex Fill,
Input C, or an outline input method. The resulting object takes the current stitch
486
type, color and object properties set for that input method. Vector objects can
be converted to appliqu. You can even send them directly to a laser cutter. See
also Cutting appliqu shapes.
Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by applying
stitch angles directly to vector objects. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles
mode for details.
To convert vector objects to embroidery
1 Select a thread color from the color palette.
2 Select the vector object to convert.
Note If you select Complex Fill as the input method, you can select several
vector objects to create an object with multiple boundaries.
3 Select an input method from the Input toolbar.
Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > from the popup menu.
Tip Before you apply an input method, select the correct properties. For
Complex Fill and Input C, select a stitch type and set the desired effects,
otherwise the last selected stitch types and properties are used.
For open shapes and outlines, select Run, Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C.
You can apply these input methods to closed shapes as well if you want to
stitch their outlines.
For closed, filled shapes, use Complex Fill.
Tip You can also create objects with turning stitches by adding stitch angles
directly to vector objects. See Adding stitch angles in Reshape mode for
details.
4 Follow the instruction in the prompt bar:
For Complex Fill objects, enter stitch entry and exit points and the stitch
angle points.
For Input C objects, enter width point1 and width point2.

For Auto Appliqu objects, enter stitch entry and exit points, and follow
other details as prompted. See Creating appliqu objects in Embroidery
Mode for details.
For other Run objects, enter the entry point. Motif Run is converted
automatically.
Tip Press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit the results at
any stage.
5 Press Enter.
487
Stitches are generated according to the current properties of the selected

input method. For fill input methods, the current properties include the stitch
type as well.
Tip The Point & Stitch tools can also be used with vector images created
either in a graphics package or with the EmbroideryStudio drawing tools.
See Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch for details.
Converting embroidery objects to vector objects

Use Convert popup menu to convert embroidery objects to vectors.
You can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector images at any time.
These can in turn be re-converted to any kind of embroidery object. See also
Inserting vector graphics.
To convert an embroidery object to a vector object

1 Select an embroidery object or design.
2 Right-click it and select Convert > Convert to Vector Object from the
popup list.
The selected embroidery objects are converted to vector objects.
3 Convert selected vector objects to embroidery objects as required. See
Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.
Converting between outline objects

Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout >Run (or Convert popup menu) to digitize and
then convert to Triple Run or Input C.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Triple Run (or Convert popup menu) to
digitize and then convert to Run or Input C.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run (or Convert popup menu) to
digitize and then convert to Run or Input C.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Backstitch (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Backstitch objects.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Stemstitch (or Convert popup menu) to
convert vector objects to Stemstitch objects.
Use Toolbox > Free Shapes Tools Flyout > Input C (or Convert popup menu) to
digitize and then convert to Run or Triple Run.
488
You can quickly inter-convert objects digitized with Run, Triple Run, Motif Run,
Backstitch, Stemstitch, or Input C. This is useful for creating thicker or thinner
columns and borders when scaling.
Tip You can convert vector objects to embroidery objects (and vice versa) in
the same way. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery.
To convert between outline objects
1 Select a run object e.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch,
or Input C.
Run object
2 Click a run stitch icon.

Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > from the popup menu
3 Follow the instruction in the prompt bar:
Motif Run is converted automatically.

For Input C, enter width point1 and width point2.
For other run stitches, enter the entry point.
Tip Press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit the results at
any stage.
The object is converted.
Enter width point1 and point2
Converted to Input C object
Note You can convert between any of these object types in the same way.
Converting columns to free shapes

Use Toolbox > Free Shapes Tools Flyout > Fusion Fill (or Convert popup menu) to
convert objects from Input A or B to Fusion Fill.
Use Toolbox > Free Shapes Tools Flyout > Complex Fill (or Convert popup menu)
to convert objects from Input A or B to Complex Fill.
489
You can easily convert objects from Input A or Input B to Complex Fill or
Fusion Fill. This is useful for editing. For example, as curved fill effects can only
be used with Complex Fill objects, you can add them to Input A or B shapes by
first converting to Complex Fill. Also when scaling designs, an Input A or B shape
may become too big for Turning Satin. By converting to Complex Fill or
Fusion Fill, you can apply fixed or turning Tatami or some other fill stitch type.
If the original object has overlapping areas, these are removed. See also Object
interconversion.
Tip You can also convert Complex Fill objects to turning stitches using the
Stitch Angles tool. You can even convert vector objects to embroidery in the
same way. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode and Converting vector
objects to embroidery for details.
To convert columns to free shapes
1 Select the Input A or Input B object.
2 Click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon.
Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Convert to Complex Fill or
Fusion Fill from the popup menu.
3 Follow the instruction in the prompt line:
For Complex Fill objects, enter angle points 1 and 2.

For Fusion Fill objects, enter more than one stitch angle line and press
Enter.
Enter angle
points
Press Enter
Note If the Input A or B object stitch type is not applicable to Complex Fill
e.g. contour stitch Satin will be substituted. If the underlay type is not
applicable e.g. Center Run Zigzag will be used.
4 Adjust reshape nodes and add effects as required.
Tip You can change an Auto Appliqu or vector object to a Complex Fill object
in the same way. You can also convert Complex Fill to Fusion Fill.
490
Converting between free shapes and appliqu

Use Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu (or Convert popup menu) to
convert objects from Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu.
You can convert objects from Complex Fill or
Fusion Fill to appliqu and vice versa with the Auto
Appliqu tool. By adding entry, exit points and
frame-out position, the object is converted to an
appliqu object. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.
To convert free shapes to appliqu
1 Select a free shape or appliqu object.
2 Click the complementary Toolbox icon.
Alternatively, right-click and select Convert and a complementary icon from
the popup menu.
Fusion Fill object selected
Appliqu object selected
3 Follow the instruction in the Prompt Bar:
For appliqu, click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points. Mark
the frame-out position if prompted. See also Appliqu Digitizing.
For Fusion Fill, mark as many stitch angles as required points 1 and 2 for
each and press Enter. See also Digitizing free shapes.
The object is converted and stitches regenerated.
Frame-out position

single stitch angle
Appliqu object

multiple stitch angle
Tip Alternatively, press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit
the results with the Reshape tool.
491
Chapter 23
Optimizing Stitch Quality
When it comes to embroidery production, the current stitch density may not be
perfect for certain fabrics or threads. Or you may want to make production
cheaper by reducing overall stitch count. After scaling operations, for example,
designs may contain small stitches which can damage fabric and cause thread
or needle breakage. Sharp corners may cause stitch bunching which can create
hard spots in the embroidery and damage fabric or needle. Embroidery
machines have a maximum possible stitch length which is determined by the
physical frame movement. If long Satin stitches exceed this, they are broken
into smaller stitches. EmbroideryStudio helps you resolve these issues with a
number of specialized techniques for optimizing stitching quality for different
design types and production requirements.
This section describes how to adjust stitch density as well as eliminate small
stitches. It also explains controlling corner stitching and reducing stitch
bunching. Optimizing long Satin stitches is also covered.
Adjusting stitch densities

You may need to change stitch density in order to stitch on a different fabric or
with a different thread. Or you may want to make production cheaper by
reducing the overall stitch count. The Process feature lets you change the
density of all stitch types (except Manual) across the whole or selected parts of
a design. It also lets you adjust the density of selected stitch types. You can even
use the feature to scale a design. See also Applying Satin stitch with
auto-spacing.
492
Adjusting overall stitch density

Use Generate > Process to adjust stitch density of and/or scale the whole or
selected parts of a design.
The Process tool lets you adjust the overall stitch density across the whole or
selected parts of a design in order to achieve a target number of stitches. You
can adjust density as a percentage to avoid calculating the absolute stitch
spacing and length values for each stitch type.
Tip If a design was originally created in EmbroideryStudio, or was converted
into objects, the changes you make through the Process dialog will change the
properties of the selected objects. You can check any changes via the Object
Properties dialog.
To adjust overall stitch density
1 Select the design or objects you want to process.
2 Click the Process icon.
The Process dialog opens.
Enter target
stitch count
Adjust Pull
Compensation
3 In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches either as
a percentage or absolute value.
This value sets how much the density of each stitch type needs to change to
achieve the target stitch count. The spacing and length settings for each
stitch type automatically adjust according to the new overall density setting.
4 In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to overstitch (or
understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull.
If the design was originally created in EmbroideryStudio, or has been
converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be
applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.
5 In the Dimensions panel, adjust the Width and Height values to scale the
selected objects as required.
Adjust width and

height settings to
scale
493
Enter the new sizes as an absolute value or as a percentage of the current

size. The default 100% for stitch spacing and length adjusts automatically to
reflect the new density. See Scaling objects numerically for details.
6 Click OK.
Stitches for Tatami, Satin, Run, and Program Split objects are regenerated
using the new settings.
100%: 5195 stitches
20%: 987 stitches
Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you specify
design dimensions precisely.
Adjusting individual stitch densities

Use Generate > Process to change the density of selected stitch types in a design.
The Process tool lets you adjust the density of one or more stitch types across
the whole or selected parts of a design. You do not have to select objects
individually, and you can change density as a percentage. Even if the selection
includes objects created with different stitch types, you can change the density
of only one type. For example, you can select the whole design, then change the
density of all Satin objects. The changes are reflected in the properties of the
individual objects.
To adjust individual stitch densities
1 Select the design or objects you want to process.
Select Auto
Spacing
Adjust stitch
densities
Adjust Pull
Compensation
3 In the Stitch Values panel, adjust the density for each stitch type as
required.
Cha pter 23 O p timizing Stitch Qualit y
494
You can select the new spacing or length as a percentage of the original
from 10% to 1000% or as an absolute value (in millimeters).
Note If you do not want to change the density of a certain stitch type, leave
it as 100%.
4 Select the checkbox if you want to use Auto Spacing for Satin stitching.
If the checkbox is cleared, Auto Spacing will be removed from all Satin
elements of the design which will change to fixed spacing. If the checkbox is
dimmed, the original Auto Spacing values are retained. See also Applying
Satin stitch with auto-spacing.
5 In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to overstitch (or
understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull.
If the design was originally created in EmbroideryStudio, or has been
converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be
applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.
Program Split
Tatami stitch spacing reduced

(density increased)
Tatami stitches
Program Split stitch spacing

reduced (density increased)
6 Click OK.
Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you specify
design dimensions precisely.
Eliminating small stitches

Very small stitches can damage fabric and cause thread or needle breakage.
Before you stitch out a design, unwanted small stitches can be automatically
removed.
To eliminate small stitches
1 Select Stitch > Small Stitches.
The Small Stitches dialog opens.
Enter minimum stitch

length to keep
2 Enter the minimum stitch length you want to preserve.

3 Click OK.
All stitches shorter than the specified length are removed from the design.
Check the Status Bar for the new stitch count.
495
Tip If you want small stitches to be removed automatically whenever you

output a design, select the Run Small Stitch Filter on Output checkbox in
the Options dialog. See Setting other general options for details.
Controlling corner stitching

The quality and style of corners is important in borders and appliqu, and Satin
column sewing in general. Sharp corners may cause stitch bunching which can
create hard spots in the embroidery and may damage fabric or needle. The
Smart Corners feature helps you control sharp corners in Input A and Input C
objects. There are three types Lap Corners, Mitre Corners, and Cap
Corners. Smart Corners can be used in conjunction with Input C sharp corner
rounding to give you the option of sharp or round corner points.
Corner handling methods
The following approaches can apply to both appliqu and standard Satin
(Input C) columns.
Method
Sample
Outline
Description
Default
Corner
Stitches curve around

corners default
Input C corner
handling.
Mitre
Corner
Corners are formed by

two segments that join
in a sharp point.
Cap
Corner
Corner is capped by an
extra segment cap
stitching remains
parallel to the column.
Lap
Corner
Corner broken into two

segments.
496
Corner rounding
A Round Sharp Corners option is available for Input C objects and is applied
to sharp corners by default. The option is only available in conjunction with the
Smart Corners effect. It is optional for Cap or Mitre corners, and is not available
for Lap corners. It is typically used with the Cap Corner option.
Method
Sample
Outline
Description
Rounded
Corner
Corner is sewn in one

segment, with turning
stitching, forming a
round corner on the
outer boundary.
Rounded
Cap
Corner
The corner is sewn in

three segments forming
a round corner on the
outside boundary.
Applying Smart Corners

Use Stitch Effects > Mitre Corners to create sharp lines at intersections of two
columns. Right-click to adjust settings.
Use Stitch Effects > Cap Corners with very sharp corners to generate fewer
stitches. Right-click to adjust settings.
Use Stitch Effects > Lap Corners for Tidori style stitching. Right-click to adjust
settings.
Use the Smart Corners feature to reduce the
number of stitches and the risk of bunched, distorted
embroidery, in sharp corners. Mitre Corners create
a sharp line at the intersection of two columns. Use
them primarily for corner angles of 75 to 90. Cap
Corners are suitable for very sharp corners as they
generate fewer stitches. Lap Corners are suitable
for Tidori style stitching. It can be applied to
Input C and appliqu objects. This style of appliqu
stitching typically uses a Zigzag stitch and does not
turn but sews parallel to the object line and crosses
over at the corner point. See also Appliqu
Digitizing.
To apply Smart Corners
Click the Smart Corners icon with or without objects selected.
497
With no objects selected, Smart Corners are automatically generated for all
new objects. For both new or selected objects, Smart Corners are based on
current properties. See Adjusting Smart Corners settings for details.
Lap Corners
Mitre Corners
Cap Corners
Note You can also apply Smart Corners in Input C objects in conjunction
with sharp corner rounding. See Rounding sharp corners for details.
Adjusting Smart Corners settings

Use Stitch Effects > Mitre Corners to create sharp lines at intersections of two
columns. Right-click to adjust settings.
Use Stitch Effects > Cap Corners with very sharp corners to generate fewer
stitches. Right-click to adjust settings.
Use Stitch Effects > Lap Corners for Tidori style stitching. Right-click to adjust
settings.
You can set the angles at which Smart Corners will be applied, and specify the
overlap and stitch length allowances. See Setting corner fractions for details.
Note You can use Mitre Corner and Cap Corner options together. For
example, you may wish a corner with an angle less than 75 to be mitred, but
sharp corners of less than 45 to be capped. The Lap Corners effect is
incompatible with Mitre or Cap corners. When an object is selected which allows
all three effects, turning on Lap Corners will switch off the other two. Turning on
Mitre or Cap corners will switch off Lap Corners.
To adjust Smart Corners settings
1 Right-click any one of the Smart Corners icons.
498
The Object Properties > Smart Corners dialog opens.
Adjust Lap Corner

settings
Adjust Mitre Corner

settings
Select Cap Corner

and adjust settings
2 Click the checkbox to enable Lap Corners and adjust settings as required:
Max Angle: angle below which to apply Lap Corner any corners greater
than this are not lapped.
Max angle: 40
Angle > 40
Angle < 40
Max Extension: extension of corner point from curve as a percentage of

width. This parameter achieves a blunting effect, with similar practical
application as round sharp corners. See Rounding sharp corners for
details.
Max Extention: 100%
Max Extention: 500%
Note The Lap Corners effect is incompatible with Mitre or Cap corners.
Turning on Lap Corners will switch off the other two. Turning on Mitre or Cap
corners will switch off Lap Corners.
3 Click the checkbox to enable Mitre Corners and adjust settings as required:
499
Mitre Below: angle below which to apply Mitre Corner any corners
greater than this are not mitred.
Mitre below
angle: 40
Angle > 40
Angle < 40
Overlap: distance by which stitches are allowed to overlap in the center

of the corner.
Mitre overlap:
0.5 mm
Mitre overlap:
1.5 mm
4 Click the checkbox to enable Cap Corners and adjust settings as required:
Cap Below: angle below which to apply capped corners any corners
greater than this are not capped.
Cap below
angle: 30
Angle > 30
Angle < 30
Tip If Mitre Corners is also selected, the cap angle is usually smaller than
the mitre angle.
Overlap: number of overlapping rows to allow where the sections of the
cap join.
Capping
overlap: 1
Capping
overlap: 8
Capping overlap
500
Max Length: maximum length of cap stitches. Cap Corners with stitches
exceeding this length will become Mitre Corners. This prevents long and
short stitches appearing next to each other.
Tip Fractional stitch spacing calculates the spacing at some point between
the outside and inside edges of the shape. See also Reducing stitch bunching.
Rounding sharp corners

Right-click Toolbox > Column Shape Tools Flyout > Input C to set sharp corner
rounding.
A Round Sharp Corners option is available for Input C objects and is applied
to sharp corners by default. The option is only available in conjunction with the
Smart Corners effect. It is optional for Cap or Mitre corners, and is not available
for Lap corners. It is typically used with the Cap Corner option. See also
Applying Smart Corners.
To round sharp corners
The Object Properties > Special > Input C dialog opens.
Select Round
Sharp Corners
2 Select the Round Sharp Corners checkbox.

This checkbox is only enabled when Smart Corners is turned on in the Object
Properties dialog. See Controlling corner stitching for details.
Sharp corner
Rounded corners
Reducing stitch bunching

Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With sharp
curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside edge may
cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread breakage when
stitching out. The longer the stitches, the worse the problem. Stitch Shortening
501
reduces the length of some stitches in sharp turns so that the needle
penetrations are distributed evenly, creating smoother stitching.
Stitch bunching
reduced on curves
With Fractional Spacing, EmbroideryStudio calculates spacing settings from

a specified point called the offset fraction. This lies between the outside and
inside edges of a shape. Changing it adjusts stitch spacing at inside and outside
edges.
Offset fraction: 0.00
0.33
0.66
Outside edge
1.00
Applying stitch shortening

Use Stitch Effects > Shortening to reduce stitch bunching in tight curves by
shortening some stitches on the inside edge. Right-click to adjust stitch shortening
settings.
Apply stitch shortening to sharp corners to decrease stitch density on the inside
edge.
Default shortening settings suit most designs. However, advanced users can
override the defaults with custom shortening settings. Only change these
settings if you understand how stitch shortening works.
To apply stitch shortening
Click the Shortening icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, stitch shortening is applied to all new objects. For
both new or selected objects, stitch shortening is based on current properties.

To adjust stitch shortening settings
1 Right-click the Shortening icon.
502
The Object Properties > Shortening dialog opens.
Select Shortening
Adjust shortening settings
Access further settings
2 In the If Spacing < field, enter the minimum spacing permitted between
stitches (as % of nominal spacing) before automatic shortening takes effect.
If spacing < 90%
If spacing < 40%
3 In the Max No Of Short Stitches field, enter the maximum number of

consecutive short stitches to allow, up to a limit of five.
Max no. of short stitches: 1
A higher number allows smoother distribution of the needle penetrations in

tight curves, and reduces stitch bunching.
4 Click the Values button.
The Shortening dialog opens.
Define length of short

stitches relative to
original stitch length
Randomize
shortening pattern
503
5 In the Shorten Stitch Length to (%) panel, define the individual lengths of
consecutive short stitches, as a percentage of the original.

Shorten stitch length to: 80%

Note A value of 80% means that the stitch is shortened to 80% of the
original length, not by 80%. The smaller the percentage, the shorter the
stitch.
If you allow three short stitches, you need only fill in the first three rows. If
you allow five short stitches, fill in all five rows.

Row 1: 90
Row 2: 70 60
Row 3: 55 85 55
Row 4: 55 85 75 55
Row 5: 55 70 45 70 55

Row 1: 80
Row 2: 85 70
Row 3: 70 90 70
Row 4: 70 90 80 70
Row 5: 70 85 65 85 70
If only one short stitch is generated between normal stitches, the value in
Row 1 will apply. If two consecutive short stitches are generated, the values
in Row 2 will apply to 1st and 2nd stitch respectively. And so on up the scale.
Tip For best results use a jagged pattern between consecutive stitches.
6 Select the Randomize checkbox to randomize the shortening pattern values.
This will eliminate unwanted lines appearing in regular curves.
Randomize ON
Randomize OFF
7 Click OK.
504
Applying fractional spacing

Use Stitch Effects > Fractional Spacing to reduce stitch bunching in tight curves by
adjusting the point at which stitch spacing is calculated. Right-click to adjust
fractional spacing settings.
Apply fractional spacing to curved shapes to even out stitch density along
outside and inside edges. Fractional spacing is particularly useful for columns of
Satin stitches with sharp turns.
Fractional stitch spacing calculates the spacing at some point between outside
and inside edges of a shape. This point is called the offset fraction. The offset
fraction is entered as a fraction of the column width, where the outside edge is
0.00, and the inside edge is 1.00.
Tip For best results, combine stitch shortening and fractional spacing effects.
See also Applying stitch shortening.
To apply fractional spacing
Click the Fractional Spacing icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, fractional spacing is applied to all new objects. For
both new or selected objects, fractional spacing is based on current
properties.

To adjust fractional spacing settings
1 Right-click the Fractional Spacing icon.
The Object Properties > Smart Corners dialog opens.
Select Fractional Spacing

and enter offset fraction as
fraction of column width
2 Select the Fractional Spacing checkbox.
505
3 In the Offset Fraction field, enter the offset fraction value as a fraction of
the column width, where the outside edge is 0.00, and the inside edge is
1.00.
59 stitches
Offset fraction 0.00
49 stitches
43 stitches
Tip An offset fraction of 0.33 generates fewer stitches than standard spacing,
reducing bunching along the inside edge. An offset fraction of 0.66 eliminates
bunching on the inside edge, but may produce insufficient stitches to cover
the fabric.
Optimizing long Satin stitches

Embroidery machines have a maximum possible stitch length which is
determined by the physical frame movement. If a stitch exceeds this, it is
generally broken into smaller stitches of equal length. The line formed by needle
penetrations can affect the appearance of the embroidery, especially Satin fills.
Auto Split breaks long Satin stitches into shorter ones. It also distributes needle
penetrations in a random pattern so that they do not form a line down the middle
of the shape.
If you want to preserve the Satin effect for example, if only a few stitches are
too long you can use Auto Jump instead. This preserves long stitches in an
object by turning them into a series of jumps. Auto Split must be turned off for
Auto Jump to take effect. Auto Jump is applied by default to connectors. See
also Using jumps as connectors.
506
Note The maximum frame movement is defined in the software by the machine
format values. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.
Splitting long stitches with Auto Split

Right-click Stitch Types > Satin to apply Auto Split to new or selected Satin objects.
While Auto Split is used primarily to prevent long stitches in wide columns, it
can also be used as an alternative to Tatami fill. Auto Split looks more Satin-like
and works well with turning stitches, creating soft lines and a little more depth.
By contrast, Tatami is flat and can show unwanted patterns with tight curves.
To split long stitches with Auto Split
The Object Properties > Fills dialog opens.
Select Auto Split
Adjust max and min stitch lengths
2 Select the Auto Split checkbox.

3 In the Length field, enter the maximum Satin stitch length to allow before
Auto Split is applied.
Stitches that exceed this value will be split into smaller stitches. This value
can be smaller than the maximum stitch generally used in the design.
Length: 5 mm
Length: 4 mm
Length: 3 mm
Tip Use a length of 7.00 mm to preserve the Satin effect.

4 In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the shortest stitch that can be generated
when using Auto Split.
Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 5 mm
Length: 4 mm
Length: 4 mm
507
Tip As an alternative to Auto Split, try a textured Tatami fill or Program Split.
Or, use User Defined Split to manage split lines in Satin fills. See Textured &
Patterned Fills for details.
With Tatami
With Program Split
With User Defined Split
Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump

Use Stitch Effects > Auto Jump to preserve long stitches in new and selected
objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
Apply Auto Jump to objects with stitches that exceed the maximum stitch
length. To create a narrow column with more loft than normal Satin, apply Auto
Jump, in conjunction with a suitable underlay, with the maximum stitch length
set to a small value e.g. 6 mm. If the cover stitches are short, splitting them
with a jump makes them looser and thus more effectively raised off the fabric.
See also Stabilizing with automatic underlays.
NO jump stitches
additional
needle
penetrations
Jump stitches
not trimmed
You can adjust Auto Jump settings to vary the length at which stitches are
converted to jumps, the length of the jumps themselves, and the method of
calculating stitch length.
Note Many machines trim by jumps. Thus, to prevent the trimmers being
activated, usually only one or two jumps between needle penetrations may be
used. See also Setting trim functions.
To apply Auto Jump
Click the Auto Jump icon with or without objects selected.

With no objects selected, Auto Jump is applied to all new objects. For both
new or selected objects, Auto Jump is based on current properties.
508
Tip Auto Jump can be used, for example, with manually digitized underlays.
It can also be used to create quilted effects, for example, by applying it to
Satin areas that are over-stitched with Run stitch or Motif Fill.
To adjust Auto Jump settings

1 Right-click the Auto Jump icon.
The Object Properties > Auto Jump dialog opens.
Select Auto Jump

Enter maximum stitch
and jump length settings
Select
calculation
2 Select the Auto Jump checkbox.

3 In the Maximum Stitch field, enter the maximum stitch length to allow.
Stitches exceeding this value will have Auto Jump applied.
Note This value must be smaller than or equal to the maximum stitch length
possible for the selected machine format. See Adjusting standard machine
format settings for details.
4 In the Jump Length field, enter the length of each jump.
Smaller jumps increase the time required to stitch out, but move the frame
more smoothly across the design.
509
5 In the Length Calculation panel, click the required method of calculating

stitch length:
Method
Purpose
Along Radius Measures the distance between two consecutive needle penetrations.
Along Axis
Measures either the horizontal or vertical movement required for the

stitch.
Y
Measured along
radius
Measured along
axis
Maximum
stitch
Maximum
stitch
X
Maximum stitch
The option you select depends on the way your machine measures stitch
length. See your embroidery machines documentation for details.
510
Chapter 24
Stitches & Machine Functions
EmbroideryStudio automatically generates stitches from design outlines and

properties. This means you can scale, transform, and reshape native designs
without compromising stitch density or quality.
However, EmbroideryStudio also lets you edit
individual stitches. You may need to do this, for
example, when working with stitch files which do not
contain outline data. Like stitches, machine functions
are inserted automatically whenever you digitize
objects and specify object properties. They are stored
with the embroidery object and updated whenever it
is modified. However, EmbroideryStudio also lets
you manually insert machine functions and modify
them. This flexibility allows you to adapt designs to
almost any machine requirement. See also Reading
Files of Different Formats.
Occasionally you may need to digitize individual stitches. Use these sparingly,
for example, to add a few details to a finished design. You can also use manual
stitching together with machine functions for the creation of boring holes. If your
embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can use the
Borers tool to turn needle penetrations into borer holes, regardless of selected
stitch type. Holes are cut in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace.
Caution Stitches or machine functions which are manually inserted into
non-manual objects e.g. Input A, Complex Fill, etc need to be maintained
manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, stitch edits are
lost. Machine functions may be moved to another point in the stitch sequence.
For this reason, only insert functions manually if they cannot be added
automatically.
This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting selected
stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting, checking, editing
and clearing manually-inserted functions. How to edit stitches and functions
using the Stitch List is also covered. It also explains manual digitizing
techniques.
Selecting and deselecting stitches

The Stitch Edit tool lets you select single stitches, several stitches, or a range
of stitches by selecting their needle points, or dragging a bounding box around
them. You can select all stitches in a design, cancel all selections, or remove
individual stitches from a selected group. Selected stitches are highlighted in a
different color. You can also select individual stitches in your design using the
Stitch List.
511
Selecting stitches by needle point

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Stitch Edit to select individual stitches for
editing.
You can select individual stitches in Stitch Edit mode by selecting their needle
points.
Tip Zoom in and display the needle points for easier selection.
To select stitches by needle point
1 Click the Stitch Edit icon.
2 Click a needle point.
The needle point changes color and the needle position marker moves to the
selected stitch. All stitches after the needle position marker in the stitching
sequence appear in black.
Selected
stitch
Hold down
Shift to select
a range of
stitches
To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select.

To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select.
Tip While editing stitches, click the Select Current icon or press Shift+0 to
select the object associated with the current cursor position. See also
Selecting objects individually.
Selecting stitches with a bounding box

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Stitch Edit to select stitches with a
bounding box.
With the Stitch Edit tool activated, you can select stitches by dragging a
bounding box around them.
To select stitches with a bounding box
2 Drag a bounding box around the stitches you want to select.
Chapter 24 Stitches & Machine Fu nc tions
512
Stitches are selected when you release the mouse button.
Stitches selected
Bounding
box
Selecting stitches with the Stitch List

Use View > Stitch List to toggle Stitch List display on and off. Use it to select
individual stitches.
You can view and select individual stitches in your design by means of the Stitch
List. See also Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List.
To select stitches with the Stitch List
1 Click the Stitch List icon.
The Stitch List opens. It shows stitch position coordinates and function
information e.g. whether the stitch is a jump. It also shows the length of
every stitch in the design.
Stitch List shows position

coordinates, function information,
and individual stitch lengths
Change Stitch List text and
background colors
2 Right-click inside the Stitch List to access popup menu options.

For example, display text in black by selecting Black Text or in the
associated stitch color by selecting MultiColored Text. See also Editing
stitch coordinates with Stitch List.
3 Click a stitch in the Stitch List to select it.
Stitches selected in the Stitch List are also selected in the design, and vice
versa.
To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select.
513
To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select.
Selected
stitches
Tip While editing stitches, click the Select Current icon to select the object
associated with the current cursor position. See also Selecting objects
individually.
Selecting a range of stitches

editing.
Click Generate > Selects On to select a range of stitches.
You can select a range of stitches with Selects On activated. The Selects On
tool adds stitches to the selection.
To select a range of stitches with Selects On
2 With the Selects On tool off, travel through the design, stopping just before
the first stitch to select.
Stop before the first stitch

4 Click the last stitch in the range.
The stitches between the needle marker and this stitch are selected.
Click the last stitch in the range
Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.
514
Selecting stitches while traveling through a design

editing.
Click Generate > Selects On to select a range of stitches as you travel through the
design.
You can select a range of stitches by traveling by stitch with Selects On
activated. The Selects On tool adds stitches to the selection as you travel
through the stitching sequence.
To select stitches while traveling through a design
1 With the Selects On tool off, travel to the required stitch or select an
individual stitch.
Travel to the first stitch

Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.
4 Travel through the design. See Traveling through designs for details.
As you travel, stitches are added to the selection.
Travel 10 Stitches tool used
Note If a stitch is already selected, it is deselected when you travel through

it.
Deselecting stitches
You can deselect individual stitches from a group of selected stitches or cancel
all selections in the design.
To deselect stitches
Deselect individual stitches using the following method.

Travel backwards by one stitch.
Note The Stitch Edit and Selects On must be selected.
Deselect all stitches using any of the following methods.

Press Esc.
Deselect Selects On, then select another stitch.
Select Edit > Deselect All.
515
Editing stitches
You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. You can move or delete individual
or clusters of selected stitches.
Caution If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch editing
functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than
individual stitches.
Inserting stitches
Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Stitch Edit to insert stitches in an object.
You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. Inserted stitches are considered
part of the object (rather than independent objects). They will, however, be lost
if the objects stitches are regenerated. Where possible, edit the object
properties rather than individual stitches. For example, to increase stitch
density, reduce spacing rather than insert stitches.
Note Inserting stitches is different from creating stitches using the Manual
input method. Using the Manual tool you create a separate object, with its own
properties and connectors. See Digitizing individual stitches for details.
To insert stitches
2 Zoom into the area you want to edit.
3 Select a needlepoint.
The stitch changes color and the needle position marker moves to the
selected stitch.
4 Move the mouse pointer where you want to insert the new stitch, and
right-click.
Right-click
5 Move the mouse to where you want to insert the next stitch, and right-click.
Right-click
6 Continue right-clicking as required.
516
Moving stitches
moving.
You can move individual or groups of selected stitches.
functions are lost. Where possible, reshape the object rather than move
individual stitches. See Reshaping & Converting Objects for details.
To move stitches
2 Select stitches and drag them to a new position.
The stitch shadow outline shows the new position.
Shadow outline
Drag selected
stitch to new
position
3 Press Enter.
Deleting stitches
deletion.
You can delete individual or groups of selected stitches.
functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather than
individual stitches. See Embroidery Fills for details. See also Adjusting stitch
densities.
To delete stitches
2 Select a stitch or stitches.
517
3 Press Delete.
Select
stitches
Press
Delete
Converting stitches to objects

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Stitch Edit together with Recognize
Object/Outline to turn selected stitches into an embroidery object.
New or revised object outlines can be recognized after stitch edits have been
made. This capability is particularly useful with stitch files which have been
opened without Object/Outline recognition. You may do this to preserve the
original stitching in most of the design, while modifying a single section of it. You
may also want to turn edited stitches into an embroidery object in order to
preserve the edits. See also Recognizing object/outlines after editing.
To convert stitches to objects
1 Click the Stitch Edit icon and select the individual stitches you want to
process. See Selecting and deselecting stitches for details.
Stitches selected
2 Select Edit > Recognize Object/Outline.

The selected stitches are converted to objects.
Objects and
outlines
created
Editing machine functions

Most machine functions are inserted automatically whenever you select
commands or specify object properties. They are stored with the embroidery
object and updated whenever the object is modified. However,
EmbroideryStudio lets you insert machine functions manually. Depending on
your machine, different machine functions are available. The most common
types are described below. See your machine manual for further details.
518
Caution When you insert stitches or machine functions manually, you must
maintain them manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason,
all stitch editing and machine functions are lost. For this reason, only insert
manual functions if they cannot be added automatically.
Machine function types

EmbroideryStudio lets you manually insert color changes, thread trims, jumps,
machine stops, needles in and out, and boring functions, depending on the
selected machine format.
Color Change functions
Color Change functions tell the machine to use the next thread color in the
design. They are automatically inserted when you select a new color from the
color palette. See Using the color palette for details.
You only need to insert manual color change functions if you cannot recolor using
the standard methods, for example, when using multiple colors within a single
object. See Editing machine functions for details.
Trim functions
Trim functions instruct machines with trimmers to cut connecting threads before
moving to the next object. You insert trims automatically by setting connector
values or using the Trim tool. See Adjusting automatic trim after settings and
Adding trims for details.
If you need additional trims, you can insert the functions manually. See Editing
machine functions for details.
Note If a machine does not have a trimmer, the Trim function is ignored.
Depending on the machine format, the Trim function may be a code or a
sequence of jumps. See Setting trim functions for details.
Stop functions
If you want the embroidery machine to stop for any special reason during
stitching, you need to manually insert a Stop function in the stitching sequence.
See Editing machine functions for details.
Tip Because a Stop function may be inserted for various reasons, you should
record the purpose of the stop on the production worksheet to assist the
machine operator.
Jump functions
Jump functions cause frame movements without needle penetrations and are
used to move smoothly from one part of a design to another. There are various
methods for automatically entering Jump functions.
Apply Auto Jump to preserve long stitches. See Preserving long stitches with
Auto Jump for details.
Digitize individual jumps by right-clicking the Manual icon. See Digitizing

individual stitches for details.
Select jumps as connectors. See Using jumps as connectors for details.
Create jump connectors manually by digitizing with Penetrations
deselected. See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.
519
If you need additional jumps, you can insert the functions manually. See Editing
machine functions for details.
Begin/End Jump functions
The Begin/End Jump functions (formerly known as Needle Out/In) instruct the
machine whether or not to use needle penetrations. You insert these functions
automatically using the Penetrations tool (formerly known as Needles In). See
Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.
If you need additional Begin/End Jump functions, you can insert them manually.
Note Remember to insert a End Jump function to instruct the machine to
resume normal stitching.
Borer In/Out functions
Borer In/Out functions are available for embroidery machines equipped with a
borer. They instruct the machine when to use the boring knife or tool instead of
a needle. You insert these functions automatically using the Borers tool
(formerly known as Borers In). See Digitizing boring holes for details.
If you need additional Borer In or Out functions, you can insert them manually.
Sequin On/Off functions
Sequin On and Sequin Off functions are available for embroidery machines that
are equipped with a sequin dispenser. The Sequin On function generally instructs
the machine to physically lower the sequin dispenser into position for sequins to
be placed (fed and cut). These functions are automatically inserted when using
the Sequin tools. See Sequin Digitizing for details.
If you need additional Sequin On or Sequin Off functions, you can insert them
manually. See Editing machine functions for details.
Some machines, notably Schiffli, use only explicit Drop Sequin functions. These
instruct the machine to drop a sequin on the fabric for stitching. Schiffli
machines, for example, do not require Sequin On/Off functions. See the ES
Schiffli User Manual Supplement for details.
Inserting machine functions manually

You can insert machine functions manually by means of the Insert Function
dialog. Depending on your machines requirements, you will either add the
function to the current stitch, or insert it on an empty stitch or empty jump. For
some machines you will also need to add empty stitches or empty jumps on
either side of some functions. See your machine manual for details.
Note The available functions and their options depend on the selected machine
format. See also Selecting machine formats.
To insert machine functions manually
1 Travel to the position in the design where you want to insert a machine
function. See Traveling through designs for details.
2 Select Machine > Insert Function.
520
The Insert Function dialog opens.
Select from functions

available for selected
machine format
Tip It is faster to digitize individual jumps Jump(M) by right-clicking with

the Manual input method selected. If you want the whole object to consist
of jumps, deselect the Penetrations icon. See Adding jumps with
penetrations off for details.
3 From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to insert.
With some functions you can choose whether to insert on the current stitch
or on an empty stitch.
4 If available, choose the insertion method:
Method
Description
Insert on Empty
Stitch
Inserts the selected function on an empty stitch.
Add to Current
Stitch
Inserts the selected function on the current stitch.
Depending on your machine, you may need to insert additional empty

stitches or empty jumps before or after the selected function. For example,
before a particular Stop function, you may want to insert a number of empty
jumps. See your machine manual for details.
5 To insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps, select one or other in the
Component field.
6 Choose the insertion method:
Method
Description
Insert Before
Select if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the selected

function.
Insert After
Select if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the selected function.
7 To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add.
521
The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or jumps,
appears in the Sequence panel.
Additional empty stitches

inserted before and after
selected function
8 Click OK.
The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or jumps,
is added at the current needle position.
Additional empty jumps inserted

before and after selected function
Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for inserting machine
functions manually. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List for details.
Adding empties to machine functions

You can edit the encoding of machine functions by changing the number or
sequence of empty stitches or empty jumps that appear around them. Some
machines require a specific number of empty stitches or empty jumps in
combination with a function in order to interpret it correctly. You may need to
edit functions if they were inserted incorrectly or the machine format has
changed.
Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions.
Functions added by EmbroideryStudio are automatically updated if the
machine format changes.
To add empties to machine functions
1 Travel to the function you want to edit. See Traveling through designs for
details.
When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt Bar.
2 Select Machine > Edit Function.
522
The Edit Function dialog opens. The Sequence panel shows the current
format of the selected function.
Insert empty stitch/jump before or

after the machine function
Select empty stitch or empty jump
Component field.
4 Choose the insertion method:
Method
Description
Insert Before
Select if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the selected

function.
Insert After
Select if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the selected function.
5 To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add.

6 To delete an empty stitch or empty jump from the sequence, select it, then
click Remove.
7 Click OK.
Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine
functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for details.
Clearing machine functions

Manually inserted machine functions are not automatically removed or updated
when an object is modified. If a function is no longer required, it must be
manually cleared from the design. Both automatic and manually-inserted
functions can be removed.
Tip Check the Prompt Bar for the functions name to ensure you clear the
correct one.
To clear machine functions
1 Travel to the function you want to remove. See Traveling through designs for
details.
When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt Bar.
2 Select Machine > Clear Function.
The function is removed.
Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine
functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for details.
523
Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List

You can use the Stitch List to help locate stitches and machine functions for
editing. The Stitch List displays stitch number, stitch coordinates, stitch length,
stitch function, stitch color. When you select a stitch in the list, it is
simultaneously selected in your design.
Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List

Use View > Stitch List to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to edit coordinates
of individual stitches.
Use the Stitch List to edit the coordinates, and therefore position, of individual
stitches.
Note Changes to stitch coordinates are stitch edits and will be lost if the objects
stitches are regenerated.
To edit stitch coordinates with Stitch List
1 Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for details.
2 Double-click the stitch you want to edit.
The Move Stitch dialog opens.
Enter new
coordinates
3 Enter the new coordinates in the X and Y fields.

Note The specified coordinates will change the location of the stitch end
point.
4 Click OK.
The stitch is regenerated in the new position and the Stitch List information
is updated.
Inserting machine functions with Stitch List

Use View > Stitch List to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to insert machine
functions directly into the stitching sequence.
You can use the Stitch List to access the Insert Function dialog. This provides
a convenient means for inserting machine functions manually into the stitching
sequence.
Caution When you insert machine functions manually, you must maintain them
manually. For this reason, only insert manual functions if they cannot be added
automatically.
524
To insert machine functions with Stitch List

2 Locate the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert the
machine function.
Insert machine
functions directly
3 Right-click the stitch in the Stitch List and select Insert Function from the
popup menu.
4 From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to insert.
See Inserting machine functions manually for details.
5 Click OK.
The name of the inserted function appears in the Prompt Bar.
Editing machine functions with Stitch List

Use View > Stitch List to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to edit machine
function encoding and to clear machine functions.
You can use the Stitch List to access the Edit Function dialog. This provides a
convenient means for editing existing machine functions. The Stitch List also lets
you clear machine functions from the stitching sequence.
Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions.
Functions added by EmbroideryStudio are automatically updated if the
machine format changes.
To edit machine functions with Stitch List
525
2 Locate the function you want to edit.
Edit selected
machine function
3 Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Edit Function from the
popup menu.
The Edit Function dialog opens.
4 Edit the function as required. See Editing machine functions for details.
5 To remove the function altogether from the stitching sequence, select Clear
Function from the popup menu.
Filtering stitches by function

Use View > Stitch List to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to display stitches
associated with specific functions.
You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches associated with
specific functions appear in the list.
To filter stitches by function
2 Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Functions from the
popup menu.
The Show Functions dialog opens.
Select functions to show
3 Select the functions you want to show.

Tip Click Select All to show all function types. To select multiple function
types, hold down Ctrl as you select. To select a range, click the first type in
the range, then hold down Shift and click the last type in the range.
4 Click OK.
526
Only the selected functions are displayed in the list.
Only selected functions

are displayed
Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select MultiColored
Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black, select Black Text.
5 To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show All
from the popup menu.
Filtering stitches by stitch length

Use View > Stitch List to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to display only
stitches of a certain length.
You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches of a certain length
appear in the list. The main use of this feature is to find stitches which cause
production problems, such as short stitches (e.g. < 1.0 mm). See also
Eliminating small stitches.
To filter stitches by stitch length
Show specified
stitches
2 Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Stitches from the
popup menu.
527
The Show Stitches dialog opens.
Select stitch
range to show
3 Select the range of stitch lengths you want to show:

Range
Description
Radial
Corresponds to the actual stitch length.
Axial X,Y
Corresponds to the horizontal and vertical frame movements. See also

Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump.
4 Click OK.
Only the selected stitches are displayed in the list.
Only selected stitches

are displayed
Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select MultiColored
Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black, select Black Text.
5 To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show All
from the popup menu.
Creating manual stitching

Occasionally you may need to digitize individual stitches. Use these sparingly,
for example, to add a few details to a finished design. You can also use manual
stitching together with machine functions for the creation of boring holes. If your
embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can use the
Borers tool to turn needle penetrations into borer holes, regardless of selected
stitch type. Holes are cut in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace.
Digitizing individual stitches

Use Toolbox > Manual Tools Flyout > Manual to enter individual stitches.
Use Toolbox > Manual Tools Flyout > Triple Manual to enter triple stitches.
Digitize individual stitches with the Manual method. You can enter single
manual stitches, or enter three stitch layers at a time with the Triple Manual
528
tool. Manual stitches digitized together form a single embroidery object. As each
stitch is individually defined, the only properties of manual objects are general
and connector properties. They are not well suited to scaling and transforming
actions as the stitches have no associated properties. This means they will either
be stretched or pinched during scaling operations. Use them sparingly, for
example to add a few stitches to a finished design.
To digitize individual stitches
1 Click the Manual or Triple Manual icon.
2 Click to mark the start of the stitch and again to mark its end.
The end-point becomes the beginning of the next stitch.
3 Continue marking stitch points until the manual stitch object is complete.
2
6
4
1
Use the left
mouse button
10
11
Tip Stitches that are too long will automatically become jump stitches, but
you can also create jumps manually by right-clicking as you digitize. See also
Using jumps as connectors.
Click for manual

stitches
Right-click for
jumps
Digitizing boring holes

Use Generate > Penetrations together with Borers to digitize boring holes.
Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Run to digitize an outline around the shape
you want to bore.
Use Generate > Borers to activate the boring function.
Use Toolbox > Manual Tools Flyout > Manual to digitize boring holes.
Use Toolbox > Column Shape Tools Flyout > Input A to digitize border stitching
around the holes.
If your embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can
use the Borers tool to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar to lace.
With Borers selected, each needle penetration point becomes a borer hole,
regardless of the selected stitch type. Borer holes are generally stabilized with
Zigzag to prevent fraying and movement, and bordered with Satin stitches.
529
Tip Boring is a difficult digitizing skill to master. You may need to experiment
with your machine and stitch width and spacing settings to achieve the effect
you require.
With Tajima and Barudan machines
Borers inserts a Stop function which
allows the machine to change to the
needle position that uses the boring
attachment. The machine must be
correctly programmed to use the correct
needle position.
Note The default setting for Multihead
borers is for a knife attachment, where
the cutting position is offset 12 mm from
the main needle line. This offset is only
expressed when you save your design to a stitch format like DST. If you are
using a boring needle, you need to change the offset value to 0. See Setting
borer functions for details.
To digitize boring holes
1 Ensure Penetrations is on.
2 Click the Run icon and digitize an outline around the shape you want to bore.
Digitize outline
with Run stitch
This helps prevent the fabric from tearing.

3 Click the Borers icon.
A machine function is inserted to indicate the change from stitching to boring.
4 Click the Manual icon and digitize individual stitches where you want a boring
knife to cut. See Digitizing individual stitches for details.
Each stitch you digitize becomes a boring hole. The borer penetration points
appear as diamonds, connected by dotted lines. These do not appear in
TrueView.
Digitize boring holes with

Manual or Run stitch
530
Alternatively use Run to digitize lines for boring holes. See Creating simple
runs for details.
For a round hole, digitize two intersecting lines.

For an oval hole, digitize one line.
Tip Reduce the Run stitch length e.g. 1.0-1.5 mm to place the borer
penetrations closer together, thereby ensuring the fabric will be cut right
through. See Setting run stitch length for details.
5 Click Borers again to deselect it.
This returns you to normal stitching. You now need to stabilize the fabric and
create borders by stitching around them with Zigzag and Satin cover stitches.
6 Digitize around the hole with Input A together with Zigzag stitch.
Place the inside edge close to the center of the hole so it wraps the fabric.
See Digitizing simple borders for details.
Digitize around hole

with Input A and
Zigzag
Digitize borders with

Input A and Satin
7 Digitize border stitching with Input A together with Satin stitch.

Place the inside edge of the object close to the center of the hole. If you have
used Zigzag stitches for reinforcement, ensure they are covered.
Caution You should not use Satin with a Zigzag underlay because a run
stitch is also generated (to return to the entry point). This can cause thread
breakage.
531
PART VI
ADVANCED DIGITIZING
EmbroideryStudio provides specialized productivity features as well as special
effects and digitizing techniques.
This section describes how to digitize circles, stars and rings as well as how to
reinforce outlines. It also describes removing underlying stitching from
overlapping objects. Creating outlines and filling holes is covered as well as
adding decorative borders to whole designs. See Special Digitizing Techniques
for details.
Textured and patterned fills
This section describes how to apply textures to fills, and how to adjust their
settings to get the results you want. Details of tatami offsets and partition lines
are explained, as well as how to create textures with different stitch splitting
effects. Creating stitch patterns with carving stamps is covered as well as adding
details with user-defined splits. See Textured & Patterned Fills for details.
This section describes how to create jagged or fluffy edges as well as open
stitching with trapunto effect. It also describes how to create stippling and cross
stitching, as well as accordion spacing, and color blending effects. Creating
curved fills with florentine and liquid effects is also covered. See Artistic Stitch
Effects for details.
Motif runs and fills
This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to rotate,
mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including how to
create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to create both motif
runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to motif fills. See Motif
Runs & Fills for details.
Appliqu
This section describes different techniques for creating appliqu including how
to convert vector graphics to appliqu, how to digitize appliqu objects from
scratch, as well as how to convert Fusion Fill objects to appliqu. It also covers
creating partial cover appliqu for overlapping objects as well as how to break
up multiple appliqu and recombine components for efficient stitchout. See
Appliqu Digitizing for details.
Sequin digitizing
This section describes how to set up custom sequin palettes for the creation of
sequin designs. It also describes how to create sequin runs and fills. It covers
the conversion of artwork and other objects to sequins. It also covers setting up
532
twin-sequin designs. Sequin reshaping and editing is described as well as

techniques for digitizing individual sequins. See Sequin Digitizing for details.
Bling digitizing
This section describes how to digitize with rhinestones. It covers setting up bling
palettes and describes creating bling runs and fills. It also deals with modifying
bling objects and bling text. See Bling Digitizing for details.
533
Chapter 25
Special Digitizing Techniques
Specialized digitizing features help to save digitizing time.

EmbroideryStudio provides special input tools for circles,
stars, and rings, as well as methods for creating repeated
or backtracked outlines. Remove underlying layers of
stitching in overlapping objects to reduce stitch counts
and prevent a build-up of stitches.
EmbroideryStudio also provides tools for quickly
creating outlines based on existing filled shapes, and vice
versa filled objects from the outlines of Complex Fill
objects. Add decorative borders such as rectangles, ovals,
and shields to designs or selected objects using the
Borders library.
This section describes how to digitize circles, stars and rings as well as how to
reinforce outlines. It also describes removing underlying stitching from
overlapping objects. Creating outlines and filling holes is covered as well as
adding decorative borders to whole designs.
Digitizing circles, stars and rings

EmbroideryStudio provides special time-saving input tools for digitizing circles,
stars, rings. Use the Ring and Circle tools to digitize circles or rings and the
Star tool for smaller scale star effects. You can use any fill stitch type with circles
and ovals although Contour stitch only looks effective with long, narrow ovals.
Digitizing circles and ovals

Use Toolbox > Circle Tools Flyout > Circle to digitize filled circles and ovals.
534
Digitize filled circles and ovals with a few clicks. You can use any fill stitch type
with circles and ovals although Contour stitch looks most effective with long,
narrow ovals.
Tip To achieve a spiral contour fill effect for a circle, digitize the circle using a
different input method e.g. Ring leaving a small hole in the middle.
To digitize circles and ovals
1 Click the Circle icon.
2 Click to mark the center of the circle or oval. A circle outline attaches to the
pointer.
3 Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to mark the
radius reference point.
This point becomes the entry point for the whole object. The stitch angle will
be perpendicular to the line connecting the center point and the radius
reference point.
4 Either close the circle or create an oval shape:
To create a circle, press Enter.

To create an oval, click again to mark a second radius point, and press
Enter.
Reference point
2
Reference point
90
1 Center
Digitizing stars
Use Toolbox > Circle Tools Flyout > Star to digitize star shapes filled with Zigzag
stitching.
You can digitize circles and ovals which use turning Zigzag stitches to create a
Star or French dot.
Note Stars are only stitched using Zigzag. You cannot select a different stitch
type for this effect. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.
535
To digitize stars
1 Click the Star icon.
2 Click to mark the center of the star. A circle outline attaches to the pointer.
3 Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to mark the
radius reference point. This point becomes the entry point for the whole
object.
4 Either close the circle star or create an oval star:
To create a circular star, press Enter.

2
Reference point
1
Center
To create an oval star, click again to mark the second radius point, then
press Enter.
Digitizing rings
Use Toolbox > Circle Tools Flyout > Ring to digitize circle and oval-shaped rings.
Create rings by digitizing circles and ovals within each other. Use different
combinations of inner and outer boundary shapes to create different effects.
You can digitize rings with a variety of fill stitch types. Contour stitch is well
suited to rings, as it runs stitches around the ring in a spiral pattern. See also
Corresponding stitch types, object types, and effects.
Tip Digitize the inner circle first to ensure that the stitches push outwards.
To digitize rings
1 Click the Ring icon.
2 Digitize the inner boundary of the ring.
Click once to mark the center of the inner boundary. A circle outline
attaches to the pointer.
Chapter 25 Special D igitiz ing Techniques
536
Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, and click to mark
the radius reference point. This point becomes the entry point for the
whole object.
Press Enter to create a circle, or click again to mark a second radius point
for an oval.
The outline of the second boundary now attaches to the pointer.
3 Digitize the outer boundary of the ring in the same way as the first, then press
Enter.
Reference
4 point
Reference
2 point
1 center
3
Reference
point
Reinforcing outlines
Use Toolbox > Create Special Tools Flyout > Backtrack to reinforce an outline,
stitching it in the reverse direction to the original.
Use Toolbox > Create Special Tools Flyout > Repeat to duplicate an outline in the
same direction typically used with closed shapes.
Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines while specifying the direction
of the stitching. Backtrack stitches in reverse direction to the original. It is
typically used to make run stitch outlines thicker without creating unwanted
connecting stitches. Repeat duplicates the original stitch direction and is
typically used with closed shapes.
Note If you use Repeat for open shapes, a connecting stitch is inserted from
the end to the start of the object which will require trimming.
To reinforce outlines
1 Select the outline (or outlines) to reinforce.
2 Click the Backtrack or Repeat icon as required:
Backtrack: use for open shapes.

Repeat: use for closed shapes.
The object is duplicated and placed over the original. It has the same color
and is positioned after the original in the stitching sequence.
Backtrack for open shapes
Repeat for closed shapes
537
3 Check that the object has been duplicated by using one of the following
methods:
Check the stitch count in the Status Bar.

Use Slow Redraw. See Simulating design stitchouts for details.
Travel through the stitches. See Viewing stitching sequence for details.
Reversing stitch direction

Use Image menu > Reverse Curves to reverse stitch direction in vector or closed
embroidery objects.
Stitching direction can affect embroidery quality because of the push-pull effect.
This is especially visible with Input C objects. Reverse Curves lets you control
the push-pull effect by reversing the stitch direction. This in turn affects the
stitching direction of Jagged Edge, Contour Stitch and E Stitch objects. It can
also affect Tatami offsets, Flexi Split pattern orientation, and Motif Run
orientation.
Note Only closed vector and embroidery objects such as Input C can be
reversed. The effect on vector objects will not be visible, convert them to
embroidery objects first.
To reverse stitch direction
1 Select a closed embroidery object.
2 Select Image > Reverse Curves.
Stitch direction is reversed.
Input C object with
Jagged Edge
Reverse Curve
applied
Removing underlying stitching

Use the Remove Overlaps command to remove the underlying layer of
stitching in overlapping objects. This helps to reduce the stitch count and
538
prevent a build-up of stitches where they are not needed. See also Shaping
To remove underlying stitching

1 Select one or more cutters.
Select cutters
2 Select Arrange > Remove Overlaps.

The Remove Overlaps dialog opens.
Set cutter values
Enter amount of overlap

Enter size of smallest
permissible object
3 In the Cutters panel, enter the minimum object width and the maximum
stitch spacing allowed.
These settings are useful if, for example, you choose an entire design as a
cutter and wish to exclude objects, such as borders or details, less than a
certain width. The Maximum Stitch Spacing setting allows you to exclude
background stitches of a certain density.
4 Select Accordion Allowed to include Accordion Spacing objects.
By default, the software treats Accordion Spacing objects as backgrounds and
excludes them from the cutting operation. This option allows you to include
them.
539
5 Enter the amount of overlap required in the Cutting Overlaps field.
Cutting Overlap: 0.5 mm
6 In the Minimum Fragments field, enter the size of the smallest object that
will be produced after cutting.
This eliminates the generation of small objects and unnecessary color
changes.
7 Click OK.
The stitching overlap is removed.
Tip You can use an entire design as a cutter excluding objects, such as
borders or details, less than a certain width.
Creating outlines and filling holes

EmbroideryStudio provides tools for quickly creating outlines and filled areas
based on existing boundaries. The Insert Offset Object feature creates new
outlines (up to eight) from the outlines of selected objects with both fixed and
variable spacings. The Fill Holes feature creates filled objects from the outlines
of selected Complex Fill objects.
Creating offset objects with fixed spacings

Use Toolbox > Create Special Tools Flyout > Insert Offset Object to create
accurate outlines for any filled embroidery object or any closed vector object.
Use the Insert Offset Object tool to quickly create new outlines from selected
objects. Any closed object can be used, including vector objects, runs, or any of
the input types. The generated outline is an independent object that can be
reshaped or modified as required. Use offset objects to highlight design details
e.g. small Satin objects or create seamless borders. You can center
generated objects over the original outline or offset them. Various offset object
types are available Run, Triple Run, Motif Run or Input C, Backstitch,
540
Stemstitch, or vector objects. You can even create offset Complex Fill and
Fusion Fill objects.
To create offset objects with fixed spacings

1 Select the source object.
2 Click the Insert Offset Object icon.
The Offset Object dialog opens.
Enter required offset

Select rounded or
squared corners
Enter offset count
Choose target
object type
Replace the original
object if required
3 Select Fixed Offset and enter the required offset in millimeters.
Source object
Negative Offset
Zero Offset
Positive Offset
To center the generated object over the original, accept the default value
of 0.00.
To position the generated object outside the original, enter a positive offset
(e.g. 1.00).
To position the generated object inside the original, enter a negative offset
(e.g. -1.00).
Note For Complex Fill objects, offset objects are created around all
boundaries. If necessary, select any unwanted objects, and press Delete.
541
4 In the Offset Count field, enter the required number of offset objects.
Source object
Offset Count: 1
Offset Count: 2
Offset Count: 3
Note If the Use Spiral checkbox is selected, the offsets are joined together
to create one or more spirals, according to the geometry of the original
outline. The Offset Count field needs to be set to 2 or more.
Spiral Offset
Object: 2
Spiral Offset
Object: 3
Spiral Offset
Object: 4
5 Select rounded or squared corners as required.
Squared
Squared
Angle limit: 20
Squared
Angle limit: 30
Rounded
Note The squared option allows you to adjust the angle limit first select
Cut Sharp Corners and set required angle value.
6 From the Object Type list, select an object type for the offset object(s).
Note If you select Complex Fill as the outline object type, you get a complete
offset shape, not just an outline.
Tip If you are using Input C, set the column width in the Object Properties
dialog before you start as the default setting is generally too wide.
7 Adjust the Approximation setting as required.
542
This controls the smoothness of the generated object outline the larger the
value, the smoother the curve. The smaller the value, the greater the number
of reshape points.
Approximation: 0 mm
Approximation: 0.3 mm
Approximation: 0.6 mm
Tip If the value is set to zero, there is no approximation and the generated
outline is unsmoothed. This is suitable for use with cutting machines.
8 Choose to replace the original or source object with the offset object as
required.
If this option is selected, the offset object replaces the original in the same
position in the stitching order. The start and end points of the resultant object
will be as close as possible to those of the source object.
9 Click OK.
Caution If angle lines in the offset object cross, they are removed
one-by-one until the object can be generated. If this happens, you are
prompted to continue.
Creating offset objects with variable spacings

Use Toolbox > Create Special Tools Flyout > Insert Offset Object to create
accurate outlines for any filled embroidery object or any closed vector object.
The Offset List allows you to specify up to eight offsets with different spacings.
All objects are created by offsetting from the original selection. Offsets are
cumulative.
To create offset objects with variable spacings
2 Click the Insert Offset Object icon.
543
The Offset Object dialog opens.
Select rounded or
squared corners
Select variable
offset
Choose a target
object type
Replace the
original object if
required
3 Select Use Offset List and click Offset List.

The Offset List dialog opens.
Specify offset
values
Select required
number of
offsets
4 Select the required number of offset objects using the checkboxes.

5 Set the offset values for different spacings and click OK.
The Result column gives you the cumulative total of each offset.
Offset Object: 2
Offset Object: 3
Offset Object: 4
6 Select other options as required. See Creating offset objects with fixed
spacings for details.
7 Click OK.
544
Filling holes in objects

Use Toolbox > Create Special Tools Flyout > Fill Holes to fill holes formed by
existing boundaries, without having to re-digitize the shape choose to fill the hole
exactly or offset it.
Create new objects from boundaries in Complex Fill or Fusion Fill objects using
the Fill Holes feature. This lets you fill holes formed by existing boundaries,
without having to re-digitize the shape. When you fill a hole, a new object is
created using the current fill stitch type. You can choose to fill the hole exactly
or offset it.
To fill holes in objects

2 Click the Fill Holes icon.
The Holes dialog opens.
Enter required
offset
3 In the Offset field, enter the offset value.
Source object
Offset: 0.00
Offset: 1.00
Offset: -1.00
To cover holes exactly, accept the default value of 0.00.

To leave a gap between the filled holes and the original object, enter a
positive offset e.g. 1.00.
To overlap the filled holes and the original object, enter a negative offset
e.g. -1.00. Overlapping the objects prevents gaps appearing between
them.
4 Click OK.
All holes in the object are converted to Complex Fill objects and are filled with
the current fill stitch type and color.
545
You can modify the outlines and object properties of the filled holes in the
normal way.
Note If you do not want to fill all the holes, select the unwanted new objects,
and press Delete.
Adding decorative borders to designs

Use Toolbox > Create Special Tools Flyout > Borders to add borders to designs (or
selected objects) with or without lettering.
Add decorative borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields to designs or
selected objects using the Borders library. When you add a border, it is
automatically sized to fit the current design. Adjust border thickness and size as
required.
To add decorative borders to designs

1 Open a design.
2 Click the Borders icon.
The Select Border dialog opens.
Select border
Adjust border
width
Click to insert
546
Tip By selecting individual objects, you can add borders to these rather than
the entire design. See also Creating outlines and filling holes.
3 Select a border and adjust the Border Width setting as required.
The default is 3.00 mm. This value can be adjusted after insertion in the
design.
4 Click OK.
The Select Border dialog closes and the border is generated to include all
design elements in the design window.
5 Change the thread color as required.
Note Thread color defaults to the last object in the design.
6 Adjust border size as required. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
547
Chapter 26
Textured & Patterned Fills
EmbroideryStudio provides special tools for

creating textured effects from needle
penetrations. Apply offset fractions and
partition lines to tatami fills to create split-line
patterns. Alternatively, use Program Split or
Flexi Split to create decorative fills from
pre-defined patterns of needle penetrations.
Select from the library or create your own.
The Carving Stamp feature allows you to
define a pattern of needle penetrations using a
carving stamp as a template. With
User-Defined Split, create your own split lines
when you want to add detail to filled objects.
This section describes how to apply textures to
fills, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want. Details of
tatami offsets and partition lines are explained, as well as how to create textures
with different stitch splitting effects. Creating stitch patterns with carving
stamps is covered as well as adding details with user-defined splits.
Creating textures with Tatami offsets

Use Stitch Types > Tatami to apply to new or selected objects. Right-click to adjust
settings.
With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to create
patterns formed by needle penetrations. You do this by adjusting either offset
fractions or partition lines. With only two offsets available, the number of
patterns is limited, but even with small offsets, visible lines are produced.
Partition lines, with up to eight offsets, can create more patterns. Using a
random factor you can eliminate patterns formed by regular needle
penetrations and distribute stitches randomly inside the shape.
Tip Auto Split can be used to create special textures in Satin stitches as an
alternative to Tatami fill. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split for details.
548
Setting Tatami offset fractions

Use Stitch Types > Tatami to adjust Tatami offset fractions.
The Tatami offset default settings are designed to create a needle penetration
pattern or texture in the stitched embroidery that is uniformly flat and smooth.
The texture is like a woven Tatami mat without obvious split lines. By
manipulating offset fractions, you can create textured fills where the stitch
penetrations are more clearly visible.
To control the patterns created by needle penetrations you set offset fractions
for both forward and backward rows. Offsets for each row are defined as
fractions of stitch length e.g. 0.3 = 30%.
Tip By adjusting the offsets, you can also improve the quality of turning Tatami
where the pattern may be disturbed by non-parallel stitches. Changing the
offsets can reduce this interference.
To set Tatami offset fractions
Select Offset Fraction

Enter offset fraction values
2 Select the Offset Fraction option.

3 In the A: and B: fields, enter the offset fraction values you require.
549
Different combinations of offset settings create different effects.
A=0.00, B=0.00
A=0.50, B=0.50
A=0.25, B=0.25
A=0.50, B=0.25
A=0.30, B=0.60
A=0.40, B=0.00
Even stitching: set both fields to 0.25.

Strong horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.00 or 1.00. The distance
between each line of needle penetrations is the stitch length.
Light horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.5. Lines are produced at half
stitch-length intervals.
Offset: A=0.3, B=0.6

Stitch length: 4 mm

Stitch length: 3 mm

Stitch length: 2 mm
Diagonal lines: set both fields to any value other than 0.00, 0.50 and
1.00. Diagonal lines are less noticeable than horizontal or vertical lines.
Vary both values to change the angle of the lines and the distance between
them.
Other: set one field to 0.00, and experiment with the other values to
place the needle penetrations on the forward and backward rows close to
each other, but with different effects.
Note If A-B offsets add up to 1.0, the lines will be horizontal. If the sum is
less than 1.0, the lines will slope down, more and they slope up. The mirror
image of A=0.3 and B=0.6 is A=0.7 and B=0.4. That is, the mirror of A and
B is 1.0-A and 1.0-B.
A=0.30, B=0.60
A=0.50, B=0.50
A=0.70, B=0.40
Chapter 26 Tex tu red & Patterned Fills
550
Applying Tatami partition lines

Use Stitch Types > Tatami to adjust Tatami partition lines.
The Partition Line feature provides an alternative method for offsetting needle
penetrations in Tatami fills. Two parameters can be set Sequence and Angle.
Setting the sequence

Partition Line allows you to specify up to eight Tatami offsets. Each stitch length
is split into knots numbered anywhere from 0 up to 7. For example, a typical
partition sequence number might be 20143. This translates to the following
pattern.
Stitch length
Knot 2
Row 1
Knot 0
Knot 0
Row 2
Row 3
Knot 1
Row 4
Row 5
Knot 4
Knot 3
In this partition sequence (20143), there are five rows of stitches indicated by
the five digits. The stitch length is also divided into five knots numbered 0 to 4.
(In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots are
determined by the number of digits in the sequence number.)
The first digit in the sequence, 2, is the knot number at which the needle
penetration will occur in the first row. The second digit, 0, is the knot assigned
to the second row. And so on. Thus, each row in a partition sequence is assigned
a digit which represents a particular knot.
Note Because Partition Line allows you to specify only up to eight Tatami
offsets (0 to 7), the software ignores digits 8 and 9 and nothing appears in the
entry field.
Setting the angle
If you imagine lines drawn through the rows and partition knots, they form a
grid, as seen above. You can skew the grid formed by the partition knots to
551
further vary the needle penetrations. For example, the partition sequence
20143 at a 45 angle produces the following stitch pattern:
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
Row 5
To apply partition lines

Select Partition Line

Enter partition sequence and grid angle
2 Select the Partition Line option.

3 In the Sequence field, enter the partition sequence number.
In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots are
determined by the number of digits in the sequence number. See Setting the
Sequence: 11
Sequence: 012
Sequence: 01
4 In the Angle field, enter the grid angle you require. See Setting the angle for
details.
Sequence: 11
Angle: 135
Sequence: 11
Angle: 45
552
Applying random factors

Right-click Stitch Types > Tatami to apply random factors and eliminate split line
patterns.
Using a random factor you can eliminate the split line patterns formed by regular
needle penetrations and distribute the stitches randomly inside the shape. This
can create interesting mottled effects.
To apply random factors

Enter random factor
2 In the Random field, specify a random factor between 0% and 100%.
Random factor: 10%

Offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25
Random factor: 50%

Random factor: 100%

Tip A value of around 50% generally gives good results.

Creating textures with Program Split

Program Split is a decorative fill stitch where needle penetrations form a tiled
pattern. Select a pre-defined pattern or create your own.
553
Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Program Split Samples.
Applying Program Split

Use Stitch Types > Program Split to create decorative fill stitches where needle
penetrations form a tiled pattern.
You can apply Program Split to a wide variety of objects. The current Program
Split values are set in the Object Properties > Fills dialog. You can adjust
these either before or after applying the effect. See also Corresponding stitch
types, object types, and effects.
To apply Program Split
Click the Program Split icon.

Program Split stitching is applied to new or selected objects, based on the
current Program Split settings.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the
Program Split effect.
Selecting and sizing program split patterns

Right-click Stitch Types > Program Split to select patterns.
You can select a wide variety of program split patterns from the Object
Properties dialog. Select the pattern either before or after digitizing the object.
Set the exact program split pattern size in the Object Properties dialog. See
also Program Split Samples.
To select program split patterns

1 Right-click the Program Split icon.
554
The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.
Pattern preview
Click to expand
pattern list
Click to select
pattern
Select pattern
Enter pattern width

and height
2 Select a pattern from the dropdown list.

Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for TrueView
representations of patterns and select one.
3 In the Size X field, enter the required width of each fill pattern.
4 In the Size Y field, enter the required height of each fill pattern.
Default values
Size X and Size Y

decreased
Size X increased
Selecting Combination Split options

Right-click Stitch Types > Program Split to access Combination Split options.
Standard program split consists of a Satin foreground and background i.e.
Satin-in-Satin. In effect it is a Satin stitch with a complicated user-defined split.
If the patterns do not overlap you may get jump stitches occurring in the
background. In this case, you can select from different combinations of Satin
and Tatami stitches. There are two possible combinations Satin-in-Tatami
and Tatami-in-Tatami. Tatami in combination with Satin also offers a different,
flatter look to standard Satin-in-Satin.
555
To select Combination Split options

Tatami-in-Tatami
Satin-in-Satin
Satin-in-Tatami
2 In the Combination Split panel, click the desired option:
Satin-in-Satin
Satin-in-Tatami
Tatami-in-Tatami
Options include:
Combination
Split
Description
Satin-in-Satin
The needle penetrates the fabric only where the patterns intersect
the stitch rows. This is the standard program split stitch type, which
produces the smallest number of stitches.
Satin-in-Tatami
The foreground of the pattern uses Satin stitching, while the

background is filled with Tatami. Use this option to avoid long
stitches when the patterns are small but the column and row
spacings are wide.
Tatami-in-Tatami
Both foreground and background use Tatami. Select this option for
large objects and patterns to avoid long stitches.
Adjusting column and row spacing settings

Right-click Stitch Types > Program Split to access column and row spacing
settings.
Set the exact row and column spacing in program split objects. Column and row
spacing settings determine the distance between grid lines. Patterns are placed
at intersection points the center of each pattern coincides with an intersection.
556
The initial settings define a simple grid, where the spacing equals the dimensions
of the pattern. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and rows are
perpendicular.
Note Spacing is measured from the start of each pattern. Thus, to define a new
spacing setting, add the distance you require between patterns to the original
setting. Reducing it will cause the patterns to overlap.
To adjust column and row spacing settings
Set column spacing

and offset values
Set row spacing

and offset values
2 In the Column panel, set the spacing and offset settings for columns in the
pattern grid:
Column
setting
Purpose
Spacing
Distance between each vertical column of patterns.
Offset
Distance by which to offset patterns in each column.
3 In the Row panel, set the spacing and offset settings for rows in the same
way as for columns.
Column spacing increased
Row spacing decreased
Adjusting program split stitch settings

Right-click Stitch Types > Program Split to adjust stitch settings.
Specify the stitch length, minimum stitch length and spacing settings for
program split objects, in the same way as for other fill stitch types.
557
To adjust program split stitch settings

Adjust stitch spacing, length

and minimum length
2 In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required spacing.

For Tatami this is the distance between two forward rows of stitches, for
Satin, the distance between each forward stitch.
3 In the Length field, enter the stitch length.
This is the maximum stitch length to be generated in the fill.
4 In the Min Len field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to be generated.
Stitch spacing increased
Stitch spacing decreased
Adjusting program split offset settings

Right-click Stitch Types > Program Split to adjust row and column offset settings.
With all three program split combinations Satin-in-Satin, Satin-in-Tatami
and Tatami-in-Tatami you can vary the pattern by applying offset settings
to rows and/or columns. Using Tatami in combination with Satin offers a
different, flatter look to standard Satin-in-Satin. With these combinations, you
can also provide background texture with Tatami stitch offsets.
Column and row offsets
The column and row offsets determine the angle of the grid lines by shifting rows
and/or columns relative to each other. If both offsets are set to 0, the grid lines
are perfectly vertical and horizontal. As a rule, it only makes sense to use values
558
between 0 and half the pattern size. For example, if the pattern is 8 mm, select
row and column offsets between 0 mm and 4 mm.
Tatami stitch offsets

When using Tatami stitch in the program split combinations Satin-in-Tatami or
Tatami-in-Tatami, you can also control Tatami stitch offsets. In effect, Tatami
stitch becomes the background pattern with the program split superimposed.
Tatami is mainly used to avoid long stitches, so it should not have a distinct
appearance which may obscure the program split pattern. Therefore, typical
offsets are in the range 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. See also Creating textures with
Tatami offsets.
To adjust program split offset settings

Enter column
offset
Enter row offset
Enter stitch
offset
2 Enter an offset for each column of the pattern in the Column > Offset field.
Column offset: 0.00
Column offset: 1.00
Column offset: 2.50
559
Tip As a rule, it only makes sense to use values between 0 and half the
pattern size. For example, if the pattern is 8 mm, select row and column
offsets between 0 mm and 4 mm.
3 Enter an offset for each row of the pattern in the Row > Offset field.
Row offset: 0.00
Row offset: 1.00
Row offset: 2.50
4 Enter a stitch offset in the Stitch > Offset A field.

This offset controls where the needle penetrations line up for each row of
stitching.
Offset A: 0.00
Offset A: 0.25
Offset A: 0.50
Applying program split random factors

Right-click Stitch Types > Program Split to adjust random factor setting.
You can eliminate unwanted patterns and distribute stitches evenly within a
shape using a random factor. Apply random factors to program splits that use
combinations of Satin-in-Tatami or Tatami-in-Tatami.
Note The random factor does not affect the deliberate needle penetrations that
form the pattern.
To apply program split random factors
560
Enter random factor value
2 Enter a value in the Random field specify a factor between 0% and 100%.
Random factor: 0%
Random factor: 25%
Random factor: 90%
Tip Values of around 50% generally give good results.

Laying out program split patterns on-screen

Right-click Stitch Types > Program Split to adjust layout options.
You lay out program splits on-screen in a similar way to Motif Fills by using guide
patterns to scale, space, transform and offset the entire pattern fill. There are
three blue guide patterns. Other sample patterns appear in yellow. Each guide
pattern lets you change different elements of the layout. When you change a
guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly. See also Laying out
motif fills on-screen.
Tip Generally you define the layout of the fill before digitizing the object. If it is
important to align the patterns with the object boundary, digitize the object
using the current settings, and change the layout afterwards.
To lay out program split patterns on-screen
561
Select pattern
Click to change
pattern layout

3 Click Layout.
Sample and guide patterns appear in the design window. When you change
a guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly.
Use top guide pattern to change row
spacing, row offset, and to scale patterns
Use middle guide pattern to
move, rotate, skew, and
scale patterns
Use side guide pattern to change

column spacing, and to scale
patterns
Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide pattern.

4 Adjust the guide patterns to achieve the effect you require.
Move patterns by selecting the middle guide pattern and dragging it to a

new position.
Scale patterns by selecting a guide pattern and resizing it using the

selection handles.
Scale
proportionally
Scale
horizontally
Drag the
pattern
Scale
vertically
Rotate patterns by clicking the middle guide twice to display the rotation
handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate.
562
Skew patterns by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the skew
handles.
Rotate
Anchor
Skew
Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging it left or
right.
Change column offset by selecting the side guide and dragging it up or

down.
Change column
spacing
Change offset
Change row spacing and offsets in the same way as columns.
Change row
spacing
Change offset

The size and layout settings you select become the current Program Split
settings.
Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility.
Alternatively, enter the values manually in the Object Properties > Fills >
Program Split dialog and click Save. See Reverting to factory settings for
details. See also Program Split Samples.
563
6 Digitize the object outline as you normally would.

Note Digitize the stitch angle carefully when creating objects filled with
program split. The needle penetrations are placed where the lines of the
pattern intersect the stitch rows. If the rows are parallel with the lines of the
pattern, they will rarely intersect, and the pattern may not be visible. A 45
stitch angle is suitable for most patterns.
Making program split patterns

Make your own patterns to use in program split fills. Create patterns from the
outlines of embroidery objects or from drawing objects.
Note Patterns you create can also be used for Flexi Split effects.
To make program split patterns
1 Select the object (or objects) you want to use for the pattern.
2 Select Special > Make Program Split.

The Make Program Split dialog opens.
Enter pattern
name
A-My Program Split
3 Enter a name in the Make Program Split dialog.

You are prompted with a confirmation message.
4 Click OK.
The new pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.
Editing program split patterns

Editing a pattern changes the actual pattern, not just the object layout. See also
Laying out program split patterns on-screen.
To edit program split patterns
564
Select pattern
Click to edit pattern
2 Select a pattern and click Edit.
Edit pattern
The pattern appears in the design window.

Tip Press Shift+0 to zoom in on the pattern.
3 Scale, transform or reshape the pattern as required. See Arranging, Scaling
& Transforming Objects for details. See also Reshaping & Converting Objects.
4 Select Special > Make Program Split with the pattern selected.
The Make program Split dialog opens.
Enter pattern
name
A-My New Program Split
5 Enter a name for the pattern in the Make Program Split dialog.
To create a pattern based on the old one, enter a new name.

To overwrite the original pattern, enter the name of the original.
6 Click OK.
The pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.
Creating textures with Flexi Split

Flexi Split is a decorative effect where one or more lines
of a program split pattern are used in the object fill. The
pattern follows the stitch angle and may be scaled to fit the
width of the object. There are four different Flexi Split
effects. Use the existing patterns for Flexi Split or create
your own. See also Making program split patterns.
565
Applying Flexi Split

Use Stitch Effects > Flexi Split to apply a decorative effect to new or selected
objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
You can apply Flexi Split to a wide variety of object and stitch types. It is
intended for use with objects with turning stitches or constantly changing
column width. You can adjust Flexi Split values either before or after applying
the effect. See also Corresponding stitch types, object types, and effects.
To apply Flexi Split
Select an object and click the Flexi Split icon.

The effect is applied based on the current Flexi Split settings.
You can also activate the effect with no objects selected. It then applies to all
newly created objects.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the
effect of Flexi Split.
Selecting Flexi Split patterns and options

Right-click Stitch Effects > Flexi Split to select patterns and options.
You select Flexi Split patterns and options from the Object Properties > Flexi
Split dialog.
To select Flexi Split patterns and options
1 Right-click the Flexi Split icon.
566
The Object Properties > Flexi Split dialog opens.
Pattern preview
Select Flexi Split

Click to expand
pattern list
Click to select
pattern
Select pattern
Select option
2 Select the Flexi Split checkbox.

4 Select one of four Flexi Split options.
5 Adjust size and spacing settings as required. See Adjusting Flexi Split settings
for details.
Adjusting Flexi Split settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Flexi Split to adjust settings.
You can adjust Flexi Split settings to vary size, shape indent, spacing and
pattern offsets.
To adjust Flexi Split settings
1 Right-click the Flexi Split icon.
567
The Object Properties > Flexi Split dialog opens.

Select Flexi Split
Select pattern
Enter
dimensions of
largest pattern
Enter distance
between first pattern
and first stitch line
Enter spacing
and offsets
Select Flexi
Split option
2 Select the Flexi Split checkbox.

representations of patterns and select one. See also Selecting Flexi Split
patterns and options.
4 In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter the dimensions of the largest pattern
in the effect.
5 In the Indent field, enter the distance between the first pattern and the first
stitch line.
Default indent values
Indent: 2 mm
Indent: 4 mm
6 In the Column panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required:
Spacing: the distance between each column of patterns in the effect.

Offset: the distance by which each pattern repeat is offset.
Default column values
Column spacing decreased
Column offset value changed
Note If you selected an option that uses more than one row of patterns, the
fields in the Row panel are available.
568
7 In the Row panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required.
Default column and row

values
Column and row spacing

decreased
Row offset value

changed
Creating stitch patterns with carving stamps

The Carving Stamp feature allows you to define a pattern of needle
penetrations using a carving stamp as a template. A carving stamp can be any
vector and/or embroidery shape or shapes. A needle penetration is placed
wherever a stitch intersects with the vector or embroidery shape.
With the Carving Stamp feature, you can:
Apply pre-defined carving stamps to applicable objects.

Apply selected objects or digitized carving stamps to applicable objects.
Move/rotate/scale/reshape/delete carving stamps associated with an
applicable object while in Reshape mode.
Create and manage your own user-defined carving stamps in a pattern library
for future reference.
569
Carving Stamp docker

The Carving Stamp docker contains four tabs: Use Pattern, Use Object,
Digitize, and Appearance.
Use Pattern
tab
Use Object
tab
The Use Pattern tab lets you select and apply pre-defined stamp patterns to
selected objects only or any applicable objects if nothing is selected. The Use
Object tab allows you to select object outlines in the design window for use as
a temporary stamp to be applied to applicable objects. Selectable objects can
include vector graphics. The Digitize tab allows you to digitize stamp outlines
on the fly. The Appearance tab of the Carving Stamp docker provides
settings which can help to soften or intensify the effect.
Applying pre-defined patterns

Use View > Carving Stamp to define a pattern of needle penetrations using a
carving stamp as a template.
The Carving Stamp docker Use Pattern tab lets you select and apply
pre-defined stamp patterns to selected objects only or to any applicable objects
if nothing is selected.
To apply pre-defined patterns
1 Select an embroidery object or not as required.
Note You can start with or without embroidery objects selected. If one or
more objects is selected, stamps are only applied to selected objects. If no
object is pre-selected, stamps can be applied to any objects.
2 Click the Carving Stamp icon.
570
the Carving Stamp dialog opens. The Use Pattern tab is open by default.
Select a pattern
set
Select a stamp
to use
3 Select a pattern set from the Set list e.g. Monogram Ornaments.
The Set dropdown list contains pre-defined pattern sets as well as
user-defined stamp pattern sets.
Tip The Monogram Ornaments set is shared with the Monogramming
tool. See also Adding ornaments to monograms.
4 Select a pre-defined stamp pattern.
A thumbnail appears in the preview panel and the Use Stamp button is
enabled.
5 Click the enabled Use Stamp button and move the mouse pointer to the
design window.
The pre-defined stamp is attached to the mouse pointer. You are prompted in
the Status Bar to enter an anchor point.
6 Move the mouse pointer to the desired position over the target object/s.
Right-click to mirror the stamp.

Press Shift to prevent Auto Scroll.
7 Click the mouse button to fix the anchor point.
571
You are prompted to enter the guide point.
8 Swivel the pattern about the anchor point to the desired guide point position,
optionally with the Shift key pressed.
EmbroideryStudio resizes the stamp if the Shift key is pressed while moving
the mouse pointer.
9 Click the mouse button.
If you have pre-selected an object or objects, the stamp pattern is only

applied to those objects, whether or not the pattern extends beyond the
object borders.
If no objects are pre-selected, the stamp pattern is applied to any
applicable underlying objects.
Note If there are multiple overlapping objects in the area in which the stamp
is applied, the stamp is applied to every overlapping applicable object.
10 Repeat as many times as necessary.
11 Press Esc to exit the feature.
Note The Rename and Delete buttons are enabled whenever a
user-defined stamp pattern is selected. When the Rename button is clicked,
the Rename Split Pattern dialog opens. Use it to rename user-defined
stamp patterns. See also Adding stamps to a library.
Enter name for

new library set
My new pattern
Tip Use the Softened Stamp and Raised Stamp options on the
Appearance tab to soften or accentuate the effect. See Changing carving
stamp appearance for details.
Using objects as carving stamps

The Carving Stamp docker Use Object tab allows you to select object outlines
from the design window and apply them directly as stamps or save them to a
library for future reference.
Note The Carving Stamp feature can only use vector or embroidery objects
as a basis for stamps. If you want to use a bitmap image, you can convert to
572
vector format in Graphics mode using the Bitmaps > Outline Trace command
set.
To use an object as a carving stamp
1 Choose an embroidery object or vector object to serve as your stamp.
You can start with or without objects selected.
Note CorelDRAW, which is part of your EmbroideryStudio installation,

comes with a complete suit of clipart libraries. Many of these can be used as
input to the Carving Stamp feature. See your CorelDRAW documentation
for details.
2 Click the Carving Stamp icon and select the Use Object tab.
Select Use
Object tab
3 Click the Start Selecting button.

Any pre-selected objects remain selected.
4 Hover the mouse over any object in the design window.
The object outline is highlighted.
Select object outlines to include in the stamp using any existing selection
methods. The selected outlines appear in the preview panel.
Deselect at any time by pressing the Esc key.
Tip Use the Softened Stamp and Raised Stamp options on the
Appearance tab to soften or accentuate the effect. See Changing carving
stamp appearance for details.
573
5 Click the Use Stamp button to apply the selection as a carving stamp. See
Applying pre-defined patterns for details.
6 Optionally, click the Add to Library button to add the selection to the library
for future reference. See Adding stamps to a library for details.
Tip You can also use lettering, embroidery or TrueType, as an input to stamp
creation.
Select charactor to
use as a stamp
Digitizing carving stamps

The Carving Stamp docker contains four tabs: Use Pattern, Use Object,
Digitize, and Appearance. The Digitize tab allows you to digitize stamp outlines
and either directly apply the digitized stamp where it was digitized, or apply it
to applicable objects in the design window.
574
To digitize carving stamps

1 Select an embroidery object or not as required.
If embroidery objects are pre-selected, digitized stamps will apply only to
these objects.
2 Click the Carving Stamp icon and select the Digitize tab of the dialog.
Click to start
digitizing
3 Click the Start Digitizing button.

You are prompted to enter a starting point for the stamp outline.
4 Digitize stamp outlines:
Press Enter once to complete a boundary.

Press Enter again to finish stamp digitizing.
5 Click the enabled Stamp button.
575
Click the Stamp button to apply the stamp to selected applicable objects
only.
Stamp applied with object/s selected
Alternatively, use Stamp to apply the stamp to applicable objects with no

object/s selected.
Stamp applied with no object/s selected
Click the Use Stamp button to position the stamp. You are prompted to
enter an anchor point as with pre-defined patterns. See Applying
pre-defined patterns for details.
6 Optionally, click the Add to Library button to add the selection to the library
for future reference. See Adding stamps to a library for details.
Adding stamps to a library

This procedure starts when you click the enabled Add to Library button either
on the Use Object tab or Digitize tab in the Carving Stamp docker.
To add a stamp to a library
1 Select an object which you want to add to the library as a user-defined
carving stamp.
Digitize carving stamps on the spot using the Carving Stamp > Digitize
tab. See Digitizing carving stamps for details.
576
Define carving stamps using the Carving Stamp > Use Object tab. See
Using objects as carving stamps for details.
Bitmap converted using

Graphic mode Bitmaps >
Outline Trace command
Click to add
to library
Tip The Carving Stamp feature can only use vector or embroidery objects
as a basis for stamps. If you want to use a bitmap image, you can convert to
vector format in Graphics mode using the Bitmaps > Outline Trace
command set.
2 On either of these tabs, click the enabled Add to Library button.
The Create Split Pattern dialog opens.
Select library set

from dropdown list
Enter name for
new stamp
My special pattern
3 Select a set from the dropdown list or click the New Set button to create a
new library.
If you chose to create a new library set, use the New Split Pattern Set
dialog to create a new stamp set. The newly created stamp set is displayed
in the Set list when the Use Pattern tab is selected.
Enter name for

new library set
My custom pattern set
4 Enter a new stamp name and click OK.

You are prompted to digitize the first reference point in the design window.
5 Enter the first reference point:
Press Enter to have the reference point created automatically.
577
Move the mouse pointer to the position you want to use as the anchor
point during manual stamp placement, and left-click.
Enter first
reference point
6 Enter the second reference point:
Press Enter to have the reference point created automatically.

Move the mouse pointer to the position you want to use as the guide
point during manual stamp placement and left-click.
Enter second
reference point
EmbroideryStudio:
creates the stamp

registers the reference points either automatically or manually entered
replaces any same name stamp with the newly created stamp
displays a confirmation message.
7 Click OK.
The newly created stamp is displayed in the stamp list when the Use Pattern
tab is selected.
Note The Rename and Delete buttons are enabled in the Use Patterns tab
whenever a user-defined stamp pattern is selected. When the Rename
button is clicked, the Rename Split Pattern dialog opens. Use it to rename
user-defined stamp patterns. See also Applying pre-defined patterns.
Enter name for

new library set
My new pattern
Changing carving stamp appearance

The Appearance tab of the Carving Stamp docker provides settings which can
help to soften or intensify the effect. These settings are only enabled when one
or more objects containing stamps are selected.
578
To change carving stamp appearance

1 Select an embroidery object with stamps already applying.
2 Click the Carving Stamp icon and select the Appearance tab of the dialog.
Choose an
option
3 Choose an option to modify stamp appearance as desired:
Checking the Softened Stamp checkbox causes any existing stamp/s to

be softened.
Checking the Raised Stamp checkbox cause any splits within the
combined closed boundaries of a carving stamp to be removed.
Self-intersecting boundaries and overlapping boundaries are combined.
579
Note Clicking the Clear All Stamps button will cause all existing stamps to
be removed from selected objects.
Reshaping carving stamps

Carving stamps can be moved, rotated, scaled, reshaped, and deleted
individually in Reshape mode. As you transform carving stamps, needle
penetrations in the underlying object are automatically updated.
To reshape a carving stamp
In Reshape mode, select an embroidery object with carving stamps applied.

A diamond selection handle is displayed at the center of each stamp.
Click a diamond
selection handle
Select the diamond selection handle.

Another set of sizing, stretching and rotation handles appears around the
stamp as shown.
Drag the diamond to move the stamp.
Drag diamond
580
Tip Holding down the Ctrl key will constrain the movement to the horizontal
or vertical axis.
Drag one of the corner sizing handles to scale the stamp.
Drag corner
sizing handle
Holding down the Shift key will scale the stamp from the center.
Holding down the Ctrl key will scale the stamp proportionally.
Holding down both Ctrl and Shift keys while dragging a corner sizing
handle will scale the stamp proportionally about the center.
Drag one of the stretching handles to stretch the stamp.

Top and bottom stretching handles stretch the object vertically.
Left and right stretching handles will stretch the stamp horizontally.
Holding down the Shift key will stretch the stamp from the center.
Drag stretching
handle
Drag the rotation handle to rotate the stamp.
Drag rotation
handle
Click the blue diamond handle to change it back into a green diamond handle
with no nodes displayed.
581
Click the curve of the stamp to display control points. Use these to reshape
or delete the stamp in the same way as for other objects.
Note When an embroidery object with carving stamps is itself transformed,

carving stamps are transformed accordingly.
Creating user-defined splits

User-Defined Split lets you add detail to filled objects
by digitizing lines of needle penetrations called split
lines. Split lines are stored as object properties.
They are preserved when stitches are regenerated
even if you apply a different stitch type.
Note Split lines are not part of the object outline
and cannot be reshaped with the rest of the object.
Creating new objects with User-Defined Split

Use Stitch Effects > User-Defined Split to create your own split line effects.
Right-click to adjust settings.
Select User-Defined Split before digitizing to add split lines to new objects. As
you digitize, you are prompted to enter the split lines. You digitize them in the
same way as Run objects. You can define multiple splits if required.
Tip Satin is the most suitable stitch type for User-Defined Split as there are no
initial needle penetrations inside the shape.
To create new objects with User-Defined Split
1 Select a fill input method and stitch type.
2 Click the User-Defined Split icon.
3 Digitize the object boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle as you
normally would, following the prompts in the Prompt Line.
4 Digitize a split line over the object when prompted, then press Enter.
582
Repeat this step for additional split lines.
Digitize object outline
Digitize split line
Generate stitches
Tip For best results, digitize split lines approximately perpendicular to the
stitch angle.
5 Press Enter.
Applying User-Defined Split to selected objects

Use Stitch Effects > User-Defined Split to apply the effect to selected objects.
Add split lines to an existing object by digitizing
the required line over it, then converting it to a
split line. Digitize the split line using an input
method e.g. Run or a vector graphic tool.
To apply User-Defined Split to selected
objects
1 Select an input method or drawing tool to digitize the split line.
Tip Use any input method including fill input methods as only the outlines
are used to create the split lines.
2 Digitize a split line on top of the filled object, using left and right-clicks to
enter reference points, and press Enter.
To create more than one split line, repeat this step.

Tip To use existing objects to create split lines, simply move the object on
top of the filled object you are creating lines for.
3 Select the split line object (or objects).
4 Select Special > Make Line(s) For > User Defined Split.
5 Press Delete to remove the split line object (or objects).
6 Select the filled object on which you digitized split lines.
583
7 Click the User Defined Split icon.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the
effect.
Splitting alternate lines

Right-click Stitch Effects > User-Defined Split to apply split lines.
The User-Defined Split feature sometimes creates a split line which is too hard
for certain applications such as Schiffli design work. The Split Alternate Stitch
Lines setting softens the split line.
To split alternate lines
1 Select a user-defined split object.
User-defined
split
2 Right-click the User Defined Split icon.

The Object Properties > Decorative dialog opens.
3 Select the Split Alternate Stitch Lines checkbox.
Select to soften split line
Split lines are softened.
Split lines
applied
584
Chapter 27
Artistic Stitch Effects
EmbroideryStudio provides many artistic

effects and stitch types to create textured
and contoured fill stitching. Create designs
with a hand-drawn appearance, something
which is difficult to achieve through
conventional digitizing methods. Create
rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur
and other fluffy textures. Stippling
provides a method for creating textured
fills of run stitching which meanders more
or less randomly within a border.
Move underlying travel runs to the edges of
an object so that they cant be seen
through open stitching. Vary stitch spacing
between dense and open fill, producing
shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. Create
interesting perspective, shading and color effects by blending two colored
layers. Add cross stitching to fill large areas with low stitch counts. Create
interesting curved effects by shaping needle penetrations to follow the contour
of digitized lines.
Tip EmbroideryStudio also provides special tools to create patterns from
needle penetrations. These include Program Split, User Defined Split and
Flexi Split. See Textured & Patterned Fills for details.
This section describes how to create jagged or fluffy edges as well as open
stitching with trapunto effect. It also describes how to create stippling and cross
stitching, as well as accordion spacing, and color blending effects. Creating
curved fills with florentine and liquid effects is also covered.
Creating freehand embroidery

The new Freehand Draw Embroidery feature provides functionality similar to
CorelDRAW Freehand and Polyline tools. Freehand Draw Embroidery has
many benefits. It lets you create designs with a hand-drawn appearance,
something which is difficult to achieve through conventional digitizing methods.
585
The aim is to mimic the fluid and free-flowing effects formed by means of
freehand stitching techniques.
Other techniques include stitching on top of

photographic images or detailed line drawings. For
example, use the tools to manually trace a color
photo-stitch design. This technique requires
accuracy and control of corners, similar to the
CorelDRAW Polyline tool.
Alternatively, designs resembling pencil or
charcoal sketches can be quickly digitized. Use the
tools to create doodle type drawing effects
without following detailed artwork for example,
adding to a basic clipart design or decorative text
and so on.
Note The Freehand Embroidery tools can be
operated with a mouse or WACOM pen.
Creating freehand lines

Use Toolbox > Freehand - Open Object to draw embroidery freehand outlines on
screen.
Use Toolbox > Freehand - Closed Outline Object to draw freehand embroidery
outline objects on screen.
Use Toolbox > Freehand - Closed Fill Object to draw freehand embroidery fill
objects on screen.
Accessed from the Digitize toolbar, the freehand feature is deployed in two
forms: Open Object and Closed Object. As with other digitizing tools, freehand
tools can be used in conjunction with all stitch types currently available. With
these tools, however, you draw objects directly onscreen and, in the case of
outline objects, view a stitch simulation as you draw. It is thus possible to
produce artistic effects similar to free-motion machine embroidery or thread
painting.
Chapter 27 Ar tistic Stitch Effe c ts
586
To create freehand lines
To create closed objects, select the Freehand Embroidery - Closed Object

tool.
If Closed Outline Object is selected, EmbroideryStudio displays the

stitches after each click or as the mouse drags.
Press Enter
If Closed Fill Object is selected, a wireframe outline is displayed after

each click or as the mouse drags.
Press Enter
Note The Freehand Embroidery tools can be operated with a mouse or

WACOM pen.
Release the mouse button and press Enter.

The last point of the curve is joined to the mouse position. EmbroideryStudio
closes and smooths the object outline and, in the case of a fill object,
immediately displays the fill stitches.
To create open objects, select the Freehand Embroidery - Open Object

tool.
The current outline stitch type is selected. EmbroideryStudio prompts you
as follows:
Click, reposition the mouse pointer, then click again for straight segments.
Alternatively, click and drag the mouse for curve segments.
EmbroideryStudio displays the stitches after each click or as the mouse
drags.
587
Tip If you decide to close the object, use the Arrange > Close Object > ...
command with the option of using straight or curved points.
Open object
Close object Curve Line
Close object Straight Line
Adjusting freehand line smoothness

Use Toolbox > Freehand - Open Object to draw embroidery freehand outlines on
screen.
Use Toolbox > Freehand - Closed Outline Object to draw freehand embroidery
outline objects on screen.
Use Toolbox > Freehand - Closed Fill Object to draw freehand embroidery fill
objects on screen.
The Freehand Embroidery tools have a special cursor. This is designed to
provide a spacing guide as you use the tools. The number and spacing of the
concentric circles is controlled by the Freehand Embroidery Smoothing
toolbar. This toolbar can be docked or floating.
To adjust freehand line smoothness
Create a freehand design using outline and/or filled objects. See Creating
freehand lines for details.
Adjust the smoothness of your freehand lines by means of the Smoothing

controls.
The toolbar contains a Smoothing control which lets you specify, as a
percentage, how closely the smoothed outline follows the original. By
adjusting the percentage, you increase or decrease the number of control
points EmbroideryStudio uses to define an embroidery shape.
No smoothing
With smoothing
588
You can view and edit the control points generated by Freehand
Embroidery tools in Reshape mode.
No smoothing
With smoothing
If you want to erase a portion of a line, press and hold the Shift key while
dragging backward over the line before releasing the mouse. On releasing the
Shift key, the edited path is joined with a straight line to the mouse position.
Hold the Shift key

and drag back
Alternatively, press the Backspace key. The last point digitized is removed.
Press Enter to finish the outline at the last point digitized. Or press Esc to
cancel input of the object.
Note Objects created using the Freehand Embroidery tools can be
reshaped in the same way as objects created via conventional methods by
selecting the object and clicking the Reshape Object tool in the Edit toolbar.
See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Creating jagged or fluffy edges

Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and
other fluffy textures. See also Corresponding stitch types, object types, and
effects.
Note Jagged Edge does not work with Contour stitch.
589
Applying Jagged Edge

Use Stitch Effects > Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or
imitate fur and other fluffy textures along one or more sides of selected objects.
Apply Jagged Edge to create a rough edge along one or more sides of an
object. Change settings before or after applying the effect. See Adjusting Jagged
Edge settings for details.
To apply Jagged Edge
Click the Jagged Edge icon.

The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current Jagged
Edge settings.
Side 1 jagged
Side 2 jagged
Both sides jagged
Tip For objects filled with Tatami, use diagonal backstitch for the best results.
See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details.
Adjusting Jagged Edge settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Jagged Edge to adjust Jagged Edge settings.
Adjust Jagged Edge settings to change the side of the object to which the effect
is applied. You can also set the range within which stitches will fall.
To adjust Jagged Edge settings

1 Right-click the Jagged Edge icon.
590
The Object Properties > Decorative dialog opens.
Select Jagged Edge
Adjust Jagged Edge

settings
2 Select the Jagged checkbox.

3 Select the side to apply the effect to Side 1, Side 2, or Both Sides.
Side 2
Side 1
Both Sides
4 In the Roughness field, enter a value between 1 and 10 to indicate the

required degree of jaggedness. The larger the value, the more variation in the
stitch length.
Roughness: 1
Range: 5
Roughness: 5
Range: 5
Roughness: 10
Range: 5
5 In the Range field, enter the margin within which you want the stitches to
fall.
Range: 1.5
Range: 4
Creating stippling effects

Use Stitch Types > Stipple Fill to create stippled fills of run stitching which
meanders more or less randomly within a border.
591
Stippling is a method for creating textured fills of run stitching which meanders
more or less randomly within a border. It can be applied to closed objects with
a single stitch angle. You control stitch density in stipple objects by adjusting
stitch length and loop spacing. Stipple fill objects can be reshaped like any other
complex shape object.
To create a stippling effect

1 Create a closed curve object and select it.
2 Click the Stipple icon.

Stipple fill is applied to the selected object and the The Object Properties
dialog opens.
Adjust stitch
settings
592
3 Adjust the Run Length as required.
Stitch length: 0.25 mm
Stitch Length: 0.75 mm
Stitch Length: 1.5 mm
4 Adjust Min Len (Minimum Stitch Length) and Chord Gap as required.
Min stitch length: 0.1 mm

Chord Gap: 0.01 mm

Chord Gap: 0.03 mm

Chord Gap: 0.05 mm
5 Adjust the Run Count setting for a thicker line.

6 Adjust the Loop Spacing as required.
Loop Spacing: 1.0 mm
7 Set a margin from the object outline by adjusting the Inset value.
Inset: 1.0 mm
Inset: 3.0 mm
Inset: 5.0 mm
8 Click OK.
Tip You can change run stitch type e.g. Stemstitch, Backstitch, etc by
using the Break Apart tool. The stipple fill object becomes a simple run
593
object. Modify run properties as desired. See also Breaking apart branched
objects.
Stipple with Stemstitch
Stipple with Satin
Stipple with Backstitch
Creating open stitching with trapunto

Use Stitch Effects > Trapunto to force underlying travel runs to the edges of a
selected object. Right-click to adjust Trapunto settings.
Trapunto traditionally refers to quilting in which a design is outlined with two or
more rows of running stitches and then padded from the underside to achieve a
raised effect. For a consistent puffed look, rows need to be separated with fixed
spacing. In EmbroideryStudio, the Trapunto effect is typically used in
combination with open stitching to fill backgrounds or for shading effects where
the absence of travels under the fill is more important than exact spacing.
The Trapunto effect automatically moves underlying travel runs to the edges of
an object so they cant be seen. It also applies consistent row spacing and
prevents segments from overlapping, regardless of the Overlapping Rows
setting. Without it, travel runs, spacing variations and overlapping rows between
segments are visible and can spoil the effect of open stitching.
Another major use of Trapunto is with color blending which is created by a
combination of Trapunto and Accordion Spacing. Accordion Spacing extends the
usefulness of Trapunto by providing a simple way to produce variation in a filled
pattern and the illusion of depth in a design. Trapunto and Accordion Spacing
can also be combined with Liquid and Florentine effects to produce curved color
blending. See also Creating color blending effects and Creating curved fills with
Florentine Effect.
Note The Trapunto feature is only available with complex fill objects using
tatami stitching.
To create open stitching with trapunto
1 With or without a Complex Fill object selected, right-click the Tatami icon.
594
Adjust stitch
spacing
2 In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required stitch spacing.

The larger the value, the more open the spacing.
4 With the Complex Fill object selected, click the Trapunto icon.
Travel runs and overlapping rows are removed and consistent row spacing
applied.
Spacing: 5 mm
Spacing: 3 mm
Note Trapunto effect overrides whatever Tatami backstitch settings currently

apply. See also Selecting a Tatami backstitch.
Creating accordion spacing effects

The Accordion Spacing feature varies stitch spacing between dense and open
fill, producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually.
Eight different Accordion Spacing effects are available. When you use it,
current spacing settings including Auto Spacing and Fractional Spacing are
ignored. However, other stitch effects will still apply. See also Corresponding
stitch types, object types, and effects.
Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an
object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Creating open
stitching with trapunto for details.
595
Applying Accordion Spacing

Click Stitch Effects > Accordion Spacing to apply the effect to new or selected
objects.
Use Accordion Spacing to create perspective effects and shading. You can
apply it using the current settings. These can be adjusted and the type of
Accordion Spacing changed either before or after you apply it.
Maximum
spacing
Minimum
spacing
You cannot use Accordion Spacing with Contour stitch or Motif Fill. However,
you can also use it with standard Tatami to create interesting shading effects.
To apply Accordion Spacing
Click the Accordion Spacing icon.

The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current
Accordion Spacing settings.
Adjusting Accordion Spacing settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Accordion Spacing to adjust settings.
Use the Object Properties dialog to select the Accordion Spacing type and
set the minimum and maximum spacings.
Tip Because of the open stitch, Accordion Spacing is best used without Auto
Underlay. See Applying automatic underlay for details.
To adjust Accordion Spacing settings
1 Right-click the Accordion Spacing icon.
596
The Object Properties > Accordion dialog opens.
Select Accordion Spacing
Select spacing effect
Adjust spacing settings
2 Select the Accordion Spacing checkbox.

3 In the Profile panel, click an Accordion Spacing icon.
4 In the Values panel, enter new spacing values as required.
Maximum Spacing: the largest spacing value to allow.

Minimum Spacing: the smallest spacing value to allow.
Max spacing: 3.5 mm
Max spacing: 6 mm
Min spacing: 1 mm
Min spacing: 3 mm
Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an
object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. If necessary, turn
off Auto Underlay. See Creating open stitching with trapunto for details. See
also Applying automatic underlay.
597
Creating color blending effects

From sunsets to wood grains, the Color Blending effect creates interesting
perspective, shading and color effects by blending colored layers. Two colors are
merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and open fill.
The effect is created by duplicating the object, then applying Accordion Spacing
and Trapunto to both layers which are then grouped. There are four Color
Blending effects linear stitch spacing, exponential spacing, convex or concave
spacing, and wavy spacing.
Color Blending can be applied to ungrouped objects filled with Satin, Tatami,
Zigzag, E Stitch, or Program Split stitch, or objects outlined with Satin or
E Stitch.
Applying Color Blending

Use Toolbox > Create Special Tools Flyout > Color Blending to generate color
blends, perspective effects and shading in selected objects.
Use the Color Blending effect to create color blends, perspective effects and
shading. Select which type of Color Blending to use, and set the spacing settings
in the Color Blending dialog.
Maximum
spacing
Minimum
spacing
Note Color Blending cannot be applied to grouped objects. Ungroup, select

the object, then apply Color Blending.
To apply Color Blending
1 Select the object.
2 Click the Color Blending icon.
598
The Color Blending dialog opens.
Select first
Spacing effect
Select first color
Select first
spacing
Select second
Spacing effect
Select second color
Select second
spacing
3 In the Top Layer panel, select a profile and color, and set spacing values.
4 Repeat this step with the Bottom Layer panel.
5 Click OK.
Top and Bottom Layer

Linear Profile

Exponential Profile

Convex Profile

Wave Profile
Tip To prevent underlay stitching from showing through, deselect Auto

Underlay. Trapunto effect is applied by default. See also Stabilizing with
automatic underlays and Creating open stitching with trapunto.
Adjusting Color Blending settings

Objects with Color Blending can be resized, rotated and skewed without losing
the color blending effect. However, reshaping the object is not recommended.
Editing a Color Blending object is limited. The two objects must first be
ungrouped and the separate objects edited according to Accordion Spacing
settings such as color, profile, and spacing. See Creating accordion spacing
effects for details.
To adjust Color Blending settings
1 Select the blended object and ungroup it.
2 Select one of the objects and change the color as required.
3 Double-click the object to open the Object Properties dialog.
599
4 Click the FX button and select the Accordion tab.
Select spacing effect
Adjust spacing settings
5 Select a profile and adjust spacing settings as required.

7 Repeat the process for the second object and re-group the objects.
Creating cross stitch fills

Use Stitch Types > Cross Stitch to fill large areas with low stitch count cross-stitch
fills.
Cross stitching is a popular technique for
filling large areas with low stitch counts. It
can also be used for outlines and borders.
Cross stitch is also sometimes combined
with appliqu. Cross Stitch fill is something
like Motif Fill but it is generated differently
and uses travel runs under and along the
cross stitching. See also Creating motif fills.
Note Cross Stitch fill is a stitch type in its
own right but does not replace the ES Cross
Stitch application available via the Special
menu. See also EmbroideryStudio
Cross Stitch Supplement.
To create a cross stitch fill
1 Click the Cross Stitch icon.
Tip You can digitize the shape before or after selecting the fill.
2 Create a closed-object. See Digitizing Embroidery Shapes for details.
600
The current Cross Stitch settings are applied to the object.
Note Stitch angle has no effect on the pattern layout.

3 To change settings, double-click or right-click the object/s.
The Object Properties > Fills > Cross Stitch dialog opens.
Cross Stitch
settings
4 Adjust cross stitch settings as desired:

Field
Description
Fabric count
Controls the size of cross specified as a counted fabric rather than an

actual cross size.
Threads
Sets thread count e.g. 2, 4 or 6 which determined number of times

thread passes over the same cross in order to make it bulkier.
Stitch style
Full cross (X), diagonal, or upright (+).
Floss direction Controls direction of top leg of the cross forward or backward for
diagonal full crosses, horizontal or vertical for upright full crosses.
601
5 Adjust Fabric Count settings to match the fabric size you are working with.
Fabric Count:
6.0 stitches/inch
Fabric Count:
10.0 stitches/inch
Fabric Count:
14.0 stitches/inch
Tip The cross stitch grid is not displayed but you can set the background grid
to the cross size to get a better idea of how the grid is used to generate the
crosses. Use Snap to Grid to ensure that your object outlines line up with
the cross stitch grid. See Setting grid display options for details.
Stitch Style: Upright Cross
Stitch Style: Full Cross
Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect

Florentine Effect can be applied to Complex Fill objects to create a flowing stitch
effect along a digitized line. The stitches follow the digitized line but maintain
uniform density and needle penetration patterns. The digitizing method varies,
depending whether you are applying the effect to new or existing objects. See
also Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect.
Note For all other object types, use Standard Contour to achieve curved
stitching.
Creating new objects with Florentine Effect

Use Toolbox > Free Shape Tools Flyout > Complex Fill to create an embroidery
object.
Use Stitch Effects > Florentine Effect to create user-defined curved stitching.
602
To apply the effect to new Complex Fill objects, select Florentine Effect before
starting.
Tip For best results, use smaller stitch lengths e.g. 4.00 mm or less.
To create a new object with Florentine Effect
1 Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch.
2 Click the Florentine Effect icon.
3 Digitize the boundaries, and entry and exit points of the Complex Fill object
following the prompts.
4 Digitize the guideline you want the stitches to follow.
The guideline must intersect both sides of the object, have at least three
points, and must not overlap itself. Curves generally give better results than
sharp corners.
5 Press Enter.
Tip Use the Reshape Object tool to change the shape of the curve. See
Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects for details.
Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects

Use Stitch Effects > Florentine Effect to apply curve stitching to existing objects.
603
Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to adjust control points of
the guideline.
Apply Florentine Effect to existing Complex Fill objects in a design. Then use
the Reshape Object tool to adjust the guideline.
To apply Florentine Effect to existing objects
1 Select an object.
Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill objects
using a suitable stitch type.
3 With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon.
A default guideline with three corner control points appears.
4 Reshape the guideline by moving, adding, changing or deleting reference

points.
5 Press Enter.
EmbroideryStudio regenerates the stitches along the new curve.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the
results.
Applying Florentine Effect to multiple objects

Use Stitch Effects > Florentine Effect to apply curve stitching to multiple objects.
Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to adjust control points of
the guideline.
Click Styles > Make Properties Current to make the properties of a selected object
current for the design.
Use Styles > Apply Current Properties to apply current settings to selected objects.
604
You can apply Florentine Effect to multiple objects in a design by copying the
properties of the first object and applying them to other objects.
To apply Florentine Effect to multiple objects

1 Select an object.
Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill objects
using a suitable stitch type.
3 With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon.
A default guideline with three corner control points appears.
4 Reshape the guideline so that it overlaps the objects you want to include.
5 Press Enter.
EmbroideryStudio regenerates the stitches of the first selected object along
the curve.
6 With the first object selected, click the Make Properties Current icon.
The stitch properties of the first object, including the florentine effect, now
become the current settings.
7 Apply the current settings to each of the other objects with the Apply
Current Properties tool. See Making selected properties current for details.
Apply current
settings to selected
object
Tip Turn on TrueView or use the Show Needle Points tool to view the
results.
605
Adjusting Florentine Effect settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Florentine Effect to adjust settings.
In a Florentine Effect fill, stitch lengths vary to adjust the needle point pattern
to the curve of the digitized line. You can specify how EmbroideryStudio
calculates the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum. The
Nominal setting generates roughly the same number of fill stitches as with
normal stitching. The Maximum setting generally produces smoother curves
than Nominal, but the stitch count is higher.
Tip Use Maximum when the curve is tight with respect to the stitch length.
To adjust Florentine Effect settings
1 Right-click the Florentine Effect icon.
The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens.
Select Florentine Effect
2 Select the Florentine Effect checkbox.

3 Select the required stitch length calculation option:
Option
Purpose
Nominal
Average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch Length setting.
Maximum
Longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting.
Nominal
Maximum
Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect

Liquid Effect is similar to Florentine Effect except that you enter twin
guidelines for stitches to follow in Complex Fill objects. This means that stitches
at the top of a shape can follow a different guideline to those at the bottom. The
change between the two guidelines is distributed evenly to produce smooth
stitching.
606
Creating new objects with Liquid Effect

Use Toolbox > Free Shape Tools Flyout > Complex Fill to create an embroidery
object.
Use Stitch Effects > Liquid Effect to create curved stitch effects with two
guidelines.
Unlike Florentine Effect, Liquid Effect guidelines are digitized outside the
object, rather than over it. If any part of a guideline crosses the object
boundary, an error message appears.
Tip You can also apply Liquid Effect to existing objects. To get the required
shapes, select the object and adjust the guidelines using Reshape Object icon.
To create new objects with Liquid Effect
1 Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch.
2 Click the Liquid Effect icon.
You are prompted to enter the first point of boundary 1 of the object.
3 Digitize the boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle of the Complex
Fill object following the prompts.
Note You are not prompted to digitize the stitch angle.
4 Digitize the first guideline around the outside of the object.
You must enter at least three reference points.
Guideline 1
5 Press Enter.
You are prompted to enter the second guideline. Notice that the pointer has
elastic lines attached to it. These lines join each side of the guideline shape.
6 Digitize the second guideline in the same direction of the first, marking at
least three reference points.
607
Note The two guidelines must not overlap or intersect the object outline.
7 Press Enter.
Guideline 2
Guideline 1
Tip To modify the guidelines, select the object and then the Reshape Object
icon. Click-and-drag the guidelines into the required shapes, and press Enter.
Adjusting Liquid Effect settings

Right-click Stitch Effects > Liquid Effect to adjust settings.
As with Florentine Effect fill, you can specify how EmbroideryStudio
calculates the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum.
Tip Use Maximum when the guideline is tight with respect to the stitch length.
To adjust Liquid Effect settings
1 Right-click the Liquid Effect icon.
Select Liquid Effect
2 Select the Liquid Effect checkbox.
608
3 Select the required stitch length calculation option:

Option
Purpose
Nominal
Average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch Length setting.
Maximum
Longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting.
Nominal
Maximum
609
Chapter 28
Motif Runs & Fills
Motifs are pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border

patterns. They generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are stored
in a special motif set. The EmbroideryStudio Motif tools allow you to use motifs
to create ornamental runs and textured fills. Use the ones provided with the
software or create your own. Motifs can be scaled, rotated and mirrored in the
same way as other objects. You can even use them to create interesting three
dimensional effects.
This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to rotate,
mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including how to
create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to create both motif
runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to motif fills.
Creating motif runs

Motif Run is an input method that creates motif repeats along a digitized line.
You can create decorative outlines using any motif from the selection list. You
can modify the rotation angle, orientation and scale, and vary the space between
motifs. See also Creating motif runs.
Selecting motifs for motif runs

Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to select motifs to use with
Motif Run.
You can select motifs to use before or after digitizing a motif run. If you use
Motif Run without selecting a motif, a default will be used. To change a motif
610
after digitizing, use the Object Properties dialog as described here. See also
Selecting and inserting single motifs.
Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Motif Samples.

To select a motif for motif runs
1 Create a motif run or select an existing Motif Run object. See Creating motif
runs for details.
2 Right-click the Motif Run icon.
The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens.
Select motif set

Select motif
3 Select a motif set from the Set list.

There are two pre-defined sets Single Motifs and Two-Part Motifs. Two-Part
Motifs are more appropriate to motif fills but can be used for motif runs as
well. You can also define your own motif sets. See Creating motif sets for
details.
Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView
representations of motifs and select one.
Motif preview
Click to expand
motif list
Select motif
611
The selected Motif Run object is updated according to the motif selected.
Tip Select a motif with no object selected and click Apply to make the
selection current.
Scaling motifs in motif runs to an exact size

Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to scale motifs in Motif Run.
You can set the exact size of motifs in a Motif Run by entering the dimensions in
Note You can enter motif dimensions before or after digitizing the object.
To scale motifs in a motif run to an exact size
1 Select a Motif Run object.
Enter horizontal and

vertical dimensions
3 In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter horizontal and vertical dimensions for
the motifs.
Original run
Scaled in X
Scaled in Y
Tip You can also scale motifs as you digitize Motif Run objects. See Creating
motif runs for details.
Adjusting Motif Run spacing

Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to adjust Motif Run spacing.
C hap ter 2 8 M otif R u ns & Fills
612
Adjust the spacing between each motif in a Motif Run before or after digitizing.
See Saving motifs for details.
To adjust Motif Run spacing

Enter distance between

motif repetitions
3 In the Spacing field, enter the distance between each repetition of the motif.
Initial spacing
Spacing
If they do not fit the baseline exactly, EmbroideryStudio adjusts the spacing
to make them fit:
If the space remaining at the end of the baseline is less than half a motif,
the extra space is spread evenly between the motifs.
If the space is larger than half a motif, EmbroideryStudio inserts an extra

motif, and slightly overlaps the motifs to distribute them evenly along the
baseline.
Tip You can reshape the baseline to achieve the exact spacing you require.
See Reshaping Motif Run objects for details.
Keeping or omitting motifs

Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to select whether to keep or
omit first and last motifs.
613
If you are digitizing adjoining lines with Motif Run, you can omit the last motif
of the current object or the first motif of the next object to avoid an overlap
where the lines join.
First and last

motifs kept
First motif kept,

last motif omitted
Note You can adjust these settings either before or after digitizing the object.
To keep or omit motifs
Choose whether to keep or

omit first and last motifs
3 Choose whether to keep or omit first and last motifs.

Reshaping Motif Run objects

Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape selected Motif
Run objects.
Reshape Motif Run objects in the same way as you reshape lettering objects. See
also Reshaping & Converting Objects.
To reshape Motif Run objects
1 Select a Motif Run object and click the Reshape Object icon.
614
Control points appear around the motifs.
2 Adjust the outline and motif spacings as required:
Reposition and/or change reshape nodes from corner to curve.

Add or delete reshape nodes.
Click-and-drag individual motifs to adjust spacing.
Drag to scale
object height
Select and press

Spacebar to toggle
between corner and
curve reshape nodes
Drag to shift
motif
Drag to scale
object
proportionately
Drag to scale
object width
Right/left-click to
add reshape
node
3 Adjust the size of the whole object as required:
Drag the vertical resize handle to scale the height of the object.
Drag the horizontal resize handle to scale the width of the object.
Drag the proportional resize handle to scale the object proportionally.
4 Click the diamond control point of the motif to activate reshape nodes:
Drag resize handles to scale the motif.

Drag the skew handle to skew the motif.
Drag the rotate handle to rotate the motif.
Click to activate
reshape nodes
Drag to resize motif
Drag to skew
motif
Drag to rotate
motif
615
Creating motif fills

Motif Fill is a decorative stitch used for filling Complex Fill objects. This feature
repeats motifs in parallel rows to fill the shape. You can select different motifs
for forward and backward rows. You can design the motif layout on-screen, or
by adjusting settings in the Object Properties dialog.
Creating Motif Fill objects

Use Toolbox > Free Shape Tools Flyout > Complex Fill to create an object to apply
Motif Fill to.
Digitize Complex Fill objects with Motif Fill or apply it to existing Complex Fill
objects to create decorative fill stitching using current settings. You can select
motifs in the Object Properties dialog before or after digitizing. You can also
adjust scale and spacing settings.
Note The stitch angle has no effect on motif layout.

To create a Motif Fill object
1 Click the Complex Fill and Motif Fill icons.
2 Digitize an object.
As soon as the entry and exit points are entered the Motif Fill stitches are
generated using current settings. See Digitizing free shapes for details.
Tip You can generate layers of colored motifs by duplicating an object and
selecting a different color. For example, after filling a shape with circles, you
can create a second layer, apply a different color and motif, and offset it from
616
the first. You can even apply effects such as Globe Out to the whole motif
fill. See also Applying 3D effects to motif fills.
Selecting motifs for motif fills

t
Select from a wide range of motifs in the Object Properties dialog. You can mix
and match different motifs for forward and backward rows, or use the same
motif for each. See also Using two-part motifs in motif fills.

To select a motif for motif fills
Select motif for

forward row
Select motif for

backward row
Select motif set to select

from for forward row
Select motif set to select

from for backward row
2 In the Motif 1 panel, select a motif set to choose from and select a motif from
the dropdown list.
617
representations of motifs and select one. See also Selecting motifs for motif
runs.
3 If you want different motifs for forward and backward rows, select the
Motif 2 checkbox.
4 In the Motif 2 panel, select the motif to use in the backward row fill using the
same method.
Same motif selected for
forward and backward
rows
Different motif
selected for
backward row
Note You can scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently. See Scaling
motifs to an exact size for details.
Using two-part motifs in motif fills

Click Stitch Types > Motif Fill to select the current motif. Select the Motif Fill object,
and click Properties to change the properties of Motif Fill objects.
EmbroideryStudio provides two pre-defined motif sets. One contains single
motifs for fills which use the same pattern in both forward and backward rows.
The other set is intended for use with two-part motifs which use complementary
patterns for forward and backward rows.

To use two-part motifs in motif fills
618
Select motif for

forward row
Select complementary
motif for backward row
Select two-part motif set to

select from for forward row
Select two-part motif set to

select from for backward row
2 In the Motif 1 panel, select the two-part motif set and select a motif from the
dropdown list.
representations of motifs and select one. See also Selecting motifs for motif
runs.
3 Select the Motif 2 checkbox to add a complementary backward row and
again select the two-part motif set from the dropdown list.
4 In the Motif 2 panel, select a complementary motif to use in the backward
row.
The pre-defined two-part motif set is specially designed to provide
complementary motifs for forward and backward rows e.g. Duet01a and
Duet01b.
Note You can scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently. See Scaling
motifs to an exact size for details.
Adjusting Motif Fill spacing and offset settings

Right-click Stitch Types > Motif Fill to adjust the exact row, column and spacing
settings.
You can adjust the exact row, column and spacing settings for motif fills. The
default settings define a simple grid where the spacing equals the motif
619
dimensions. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and rows are
perpendicular.
Note Spacing is measured from the start of each motif. So to define new
spacing settings, add a distance between motifs to the original spacing.
Reducing the original setting causes motifs to overlap.
To adjust spacing and offset settings
Enter column
spacing
Enter row spacing
and offset
Scale and clip motifs

to fit shape
2 Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for details.
3 Enter column spacing in the Column > Spacing field.
4 Enter row spacing in the Row > Spacing field.
5 Enter row offset in the Row > Offset field.
Offset
changed
Row spacing
changed
6 Select the Scale to fit grid checkbox to scale motifs to exactly fit the grid
squares.
Scale to fit grid ON
Scale to fit grid OFF
620
7 Select the Clip to fit shape checkbox to clip motifs that do not fit the shape.
Clip to fit shape ON
Clip to fit shape OFF
Note If more than half a motif is outside the boundary, it will be omitted.
Scaling motifs to an exact size

Right-click Stitch Types > Motif Fill to scale motifs to an exact size.
You can set the exact size of motifs in a fill. You can also scale Motif 1 and
Motif 2 motifs independently to create special effects.
To scale motifs to an exact size

Enter motif width and

height of forward rows
Enter motif width and

height of backward
rows
621
3 In both panels, enter the dimensions of motif 1 and 2 for the forward and
backward rows:
Size X: Enter motif width.

Size Y: Enter motif height.
Motif 1: default size

Motif 1: size adjusted


Motif 2: size adjusted
Note If you want the same motifs for forward and backward rows, deselect
the Motif 2 checkbox.
Rotating motif fills by an exact amount

t
Right-click Stitch Types > Motif Fill to rotate motifs by an exact amount.
The rotation angle defines the orientation of the entire motif fill pattern. It
overrides the stitch angle you set when digitizing the shape with Complex Fill.
To rotate a motif fill by an exact amount

Enter rotation angle
622
3 In the Rotation field, enter the rotation angle of the fill.
Rotation: 0
Rotation: 30
Rotation: 90
Laying out motif fills on-screen

Right-click Stitch Types > Motif Fill to access layout options.
Lay out motif fills on-screen in a similar way to program splits by using guide
motifs to scale, space, transform and offset the entire motif fill. There are three
blue guide motifs. Other sample motifs appear in yellow. Each guide motif lets
you change a different element of the layout. When you change a guide motif,
all other motifs change accordingly. See also Laying out program split patterns
on-screen.
Motif Fill does not have a column offset since motifs are connected along each
row. Instead you can rotate the layout to achieve a similar effect. See Rotating
motif fills by an exact amount for details.
Tip Generally you define the layout of the motif fill before digitizing the object.
If it is important to align motifs with the object boundary, digitize the object
using current settings, and change the layout afterwards.
To lay out Motif Fills on-screen
Click to lay out

selected motif
623
3 Click Layout.
Sample and guide motifs appear in the design window. When you change a
guide motif, all motifs in the fill change accordingly.
Use top guide motif to change row
spacing, row offset, and to scale motifs
Use middle guide motif to
move, rotate, skew, and
scale motifs
Use side guide motif to change

column spacing, and to scale
motifs
Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide motif.

4 Adjust the guide motifs to achieve the effect you require.
Move motifs by selecting the middle guide motif and dragging it to a new
position.
Scale motifs by selecting a guide motif and resizing it using the selection
handles.
Scale
proportionally
Scale
horizontally
Scale
vertically
Rotate motifs by clicking the middle guide twice to display the rotation
handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate.
Skew motifs by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the skew
handles.
Rotate
Anchor
Skew
624
Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging it left or
right.
Change
column
spacing
Change row spacing by selecting the top guide and dragging it up or down.
Change row offset by selecting the top guide and dragging it left or right.
Change row
spacing
Change
offset

The size and layout settings you select become the current Motif Fill settings.
Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility.
Alternatively, enter the values manually in the Object Properties > Fills >
Motif Fill and click Save. See Reverting to factory settings for details. See
Motif Samples for details.
Applying 3D effects to motif fills

Use the 3D Warp tool with motif fills to create three dimensional effects. You
can make shapes appear concave or convex using Globe In or Globe Out. You
can also create distance effects using Perspective. You can apply 3D Warp as
you digitize, or apply it to existing motif fills.
Tip Small stitches may be generated along the edge of objects using 3D Warp.
You can remove these automatically. See Eliminating small stitches for details.
625
Applying and adjusting 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out

Click Stitch Effects > 3D Warp to apply 3D effects to selected motif fills. Right-click
to change settings.
3D Warp objects.
Using Globe In with 3D Warp gives a concave effect by increasing the motif
size and spacing around a center point. Globe Out gives a convex effect by
decreasing motif size and spacing.
You can apply Globe In and Globe Out to an entire object, or to a specified part
of the fill. You can modify the effect by adjusting the guide frame.
To apply and adjust 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out
1 Select the Motif Fill object.
Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have no
objects selected.
2 Right-click the 3D Warp icon.
Select 3D Warp
Select Globe In or
Globe Out
3 Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Globe In or Globe Out from the
list.
The Globe In or Out effect is applied to the selected object.
OR
Complex FIll object

with Motif Fill
Globe In applied
Globe Out applied
5 To make further adjustments, click the Reshape icon with the object
selected.
A guide frame appears around the object with three control points.
626
6 Adjust the control points to modify the effect as required:
Top point: change frame height

Side point: change frame width
Center point: reposition frame.
Click-and-drag
control point
Click-and-drag
to reposition
frame
Tip You can generate layers of colored
selecting a different color. For example,
can create a second layer, offset it, and
apply effects such as Globe Out to the
motifs by duplicating an object and

after filling a shape with circles, you
apply a different color. You can then
whole motif fill.
Applying and adjusting 3D Warp with Perspective

Click Stitch Effects > 3D Warp to apply 3D effects to selected motif fills. Right-click
to change settings.
3D Warp objects.
Use Perspective with 3D Warp to create a perspective effect by exaggerating
relative sizes.
Note You need to adjust the guide frame for Perspective 3D Warp to specify
the direction in which to make motifs larger and smaller.
To apply and adjust 3D Warp with Perspective
1 Select the Motif Fill object.
627
Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have no
objects selected.
2 Right-click the 3D Warp icon.
Select 3D Warp
Select Perspective
3 Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Perspective from the list.
4 Press Enter or click Apply.
5 Click the Reshape icon.
A guide frame appears around the object.
Select object
and click
Reshape
6 Adjust the frame to move the guidelines closer together or further apart.
Caution The guide frame must not cross the outer boundary of the shape,
and cannot be inside the shape.
The perspective effect is applied.
Adjust frame and

Press Enter
Working with single motifs

You can add motifs to your design one-by-one. Rotate, scale, or mirror motifs as
you add them or edit them like any other object.
Selecting and inserting single motifs

Use Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to select motifs for individual use.
628
Add motifs to your design by selecting them from the Object Properties dialog.
Note If a motif is comprised of two or more objects, these will be automatically

grouped when inserted.
To select and insert a single motif
Select motif set

Select motif
2 Select a motif set from the Set list.

representations of motifs and select one.
5 Select Special > Motif > Use.
The outline of the motif appears attached to the mouse pointer.
6 Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to mark
the anchor point.
7 Move the pointer until the motif is in the position you need, then click again
for a guide point.
Stitches are generated automatically. The outline of the motif appears
attached to the mouse pointer ready for the next motif.
Insert anchor
point
Insert guide
point
Repeat if
required
You can rotate, scale and mirror motifs as you insert them. See Rotating,
mirroring and scaling motifs for details.
8 Repeat the steps to insert the motif again.
Tip Press Enter to accept the default position and settings.
629
Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs

You can rotate, scale, or mirror motifs as you add them to your design using the
keyboard and mouse.
Tip If you find it easier to insert a motif at its original size and orientation, you
can scale, rotate and mirror it later just like any other object.
To rotate, mirror and scale motifs
1 Select a motif to insert. See Selecting and inserting single motifs for details.
2 Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to mark
the anchor point.
Click to mark
anchor point
The motif attaches to the mouse pointer. As you move the pointer, the motif
rotates around the anchor point you marked.
3 Rotate, scale, or mirror the motif with the mouse.
To rotate the motif, move the pointer until the rotation angle is correct,
then click again.
Click to mark
guide point
Motif rotated
To mirror the motif, right-click.

Right-click to mark
guide point and
mirror motif
Motif rotated and

mirrored
To scale the motif, press Shift. Move the pointer until the motif outline
shows the required size, then click again.
Hold down Shift to
resize the motif
Motif rotated and

scaled
Hold down Ctrl to constrain

rotation angles
Tip When mirroring and scaling, make sure the motif is at the required
rotation angle, before clicking or right-clicking.
630

Tip You can create motifs from patterns made in the cross stitch program
and use them to create a cross stitch sampler. See the Cross Stitch User
Manual Supplement for details.
Motifs created in
Cross Stitch program
Managing motifs
EmbroideryStudio provides various ways to manage your motifs including
making motif sets, saving motifs, copying motifs between motif sets, and
deleting motifs.
Saving motifs
The Make Motif function lets you save your own motifs for future use. Motifs
may be saved to different files or motif sets.
To save a motif
1 Select the embroidery object you want to save as a motif.
2 Select Special > Motif > Make.

The Make Motif dialog opens.
Select motif set

Enter motif name
Select to remove unwanted
machine functions
3 Select a Motif Set from the list. See also Creating motif sets.
4 Enter a name in the Motif Name field.
5 If you want to automatically remove machine functions from the motif, select
the Remove Functions checkbox.
6 Click OK.
7 Click to mark two reference points for the motif.
631
These determine the default motif orientation in motif runs and fills.
Reference points also determine the spacing between each motif.
Reference point 2
Reference point 1
Rotation direction
Reference point 1
Reference point 2
Reference point 1 becomes the anchor point in the final motif. Reference point
2 becomes the rotation point.
8 Click OK.
The motif is ready to use.
Creating motif sets

The Make Motif function lets you create your own motif sets to organize and
classify your motifs.
To create motif sets
1 Select an embroidery object.
2 Select Special > Motif > Make.

The Make Motif dialog opens.
Click New to create

new motif set
3 Click New.
The New Motif Set dialog opens.
My New Motif Set
Enter name for

motif set
4 Enter a name for the new motif set and click OK.
632
The Motif Set is ready for use.

Note Motif sets are stored in the folder:
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\Userletw
You can delete or rename these as required.
Deleting motifs
Right-click Toolbox > Outline Tools Flyout > Motif Run to select motifs to use with
Motif Run.
Right-click Stitch Types > Motif Fill to select motifs to use with Motif Fill.
Delete any motifs you no longer want from a motif set.
To delete motifs
1 Access the Object Properties dialog by right-clicking either Motif Run or
Motif Fill icons.
2 Click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView representations
of motifs.
Delete selected
motif
Click to expand
motif list
Select motif
3 Select the motif to delete.

4 Click Delete.
The motif is removed permanently from the motif set.
Tip If you have made changes to the default settings or they have become
corrupted, use the Revert utility to revert to factory settings. See Reverting
to factory settings for details.
633
Chapter 29
Appliqu Digitizing
Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the Auto
Appliqu tool. Up to four layers of stitching guide runs, cutting lines, tack
stitches and cover stitches can be generated for any appliqu object,
depending on current settings. You can also extract appliqu shapes from a
design to output to a cutter or separate file. See Cutting appliqu shapes for
details.
Tip Apply Smart Corners to appliqu objects as required. See Controlling corner
stitching for details.
Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each
appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. See
Printing appliqu patterns for details.
This section describes different techniques for creating appliqu including how
to convert vector graphics to appliqu, how to digitize appliqu objects from
scratch, as well as how to convert Fusion Fill objects to appliqu. It also covers
creating partial cover appliqu for overlapping objects as well as how to break
up multiple appliqu and recombine components for efficient stitchout.
Converting vector graphics to appliqu

Use Universal >Tag as Appliqu to tag a vector object for conversion to appliqu.
Use Universal > Convert to convert vector objects to embroidery objects.
In Graphics mode, the Tag as Appliqu button allows you to tag selected
vector objects for conversion to appliqu. The button is disabled until an
applicable object is selected in the design window. When an object which has
been tagged as an appliqu object is selected in the design window the Tag As
Appliqu button is pressed in. When the Convert tool is clicked, all tagged
634
objects are converted to appliqu using the current appliqu property settings.
See Adjusting appliqu settings for details.
Tip The CorelDRAW Object Manager also indicates which objects have been
tagged as appliqu objects. All objects tagged as appliqu objects have the text
Appliqu in the object name preceding the object description.
To convert a vector graphic to an appliqu object
1 Create a vector object in Graphics mode and select it.
The Tag As Appliqu icon appears.
2 Click Tag As Appliqu.

The object is tagged for conversion to appliqu, appearing with a thick dotted
outline. The original outline and fill color of the object remains unchanged.
Object appears with

thick dotted outline
3 Click Convert.
EmbroideryStudio switches to Embroidery mode and automatically
converts the vector object to an appliqu object.
Red appliqu cover

stitch generated
Fill color remains the
same
635
Note When the Convert command is applied to objects tagged as appliqu,

the vector fill properties are maintained in Embroidery mode, where
possible, to give the appearance of a fabric patch. Where the properties
cannot be maintained e.g. Fountain, Pattern, Postscript or Texture filled
objects a grey uniform fill is applied to the converted appliqu.
Pattern fill
Grey fill
Texture fill
Creating appliqu objects in Embroidery Mode

Use Auto Appliqu to produce the stitching you
require for appliqu objects. Alternatively, you can
convert Fusion Fill objects to appliqu by adding
entry, exit points and frame-out position.
Tip If you want to pre-set appliqu settings,
right-click the Auto Appliqu icon with no objects
selected. When property values are changed,
settings will apply to all newly created appliqu
objects in the current session. Otherwise, if one or more appliqu objects are
selected, settings only apply to those objects. See Working with object
Digitizing appliqu objects

Use Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu to digitize appliqu objects.
Use Auto Appliqu to produce the stitching you require for appliqu objects.
Up to four layers of stitching guide runs, cutting lines, tack stitches and cover
stitches can be generated for each appliqu object, depending on current
settings.
To digitize appliqu objects
1 Click the Auto Appliqu icon.
2 Digitize the boundary of the appliqu. See Embroidery digitizing methods for
details.
Tip Follow the prompts in the Prompt Bar to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point, then continue
digitizing.
C hapter 29 Ap pliq u D igitizing
636
Tip You can create another appliqu object at this stage by digitizing and
pressing Enter.
4 Press Enter again.
5 Click the outline to set the entry and exit points or press Enter to accept the
defaults.
6 If prompted to do so, mark the frame-out position or press Enter to accept
the default. See also Adjusting frame-out positions.
Frame out
position
Note If you select None as the Frame Out option in the Object Properties
> Appliqu dialog for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be prompted
to enter a frame out position. See Adjusting guide run settings or Adjusting
tack stitch settings for details.
7 Press Enter.
Up to four layers of stitching guide run, cutting line, tack and cover are
generated for the appliqu object, depending on the current Auto Appliqu
values.
Satin cover stitch

Zigzag tack stitch
Guide run and cutting line
Tip Run Slow Redraw or the travel tools to check the appliqu stitching
sequence. See Viewing stitching sequence for details.
8 Double-click the appliqu object to check its settings.
637
The Object Properties > Special > Appliqu dialog opens.
Adjust guide run

settings
Adjust tack stitch

settings
Adjust cover stitch

settings
9 Adjust settings as required:
Guide run: See Adjusting guide run settings for details.

Tack stitch: See Adjusting tack stitch settings for details.
Cover stitch: See Adjusting cover stitch settings for details.
Tip When you stitch out an appliqu object, the machine stops between
layers. Before you start, lay the fabric over the design and start the machine.
When the guideline has been stitched, trim the excess appliqu material and
start the machine again for the tack and cover stitch.
Converting Fusion Fill objects to appliqu

Use popup menu or Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu to convert
objects from Fusion Fill to Auto Appliqu.
You can convert Fusion Fill objects to appliqu by adding entry, exit points and
frame-out position. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.
To convert Fusion Fill objects to appliqu

1 Select a Fusion Fill object.
638
2 Click the Auto Appliqu icon.

Alternatively, right-click and select Convert and the icon from the popup
menu.
Select to convert to
appliqu object
3 Click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points or press Enter to
accept the defaults. See also Digitizing appliqu objects.
4 Mark a frame out position or press Enter to accept the default.
The object is converted and stitches regenerated.
Entry and exit

points
Frame-out
position
Fusion Fill
object
Tip Follow the prompts in the Prompt Bar to help you digitize.
Adjusting appliqu settings

Whether you create appliqu from scratch using the dedicated Auto Appliqu
tool, or convert existing vector graphics or Fusion Fill objects,
EmbroideryStudio produces all the stitching you need for the job. Up to four
layers guide runs, cutting lines, tack stitches and cover stitches can be
generated for each appliqu object, depending on current settings.
Satin cover stitch
Zigzag tack stitch
Guide run and cutting line
Each of these layers can be adjusted via the Object Properties dialog. When
you stitch out an appliqu object, the machine stops between layers.
EmbroideryStudio also allows you to pre-set a frame-out movement which
shifts the hoop out from under the needle, making it easier to place and trim
appliqu shapes.
639
Tip If you want to pre-set appliqu settings, right-click the Auto Appliqu icon
with no objects selected. When property values are changed, settings will apply
to all newly created appliqu objects in the current session. Otherwise, if one or
more appliqu objects are selected, settings only apply to those objects. See
Working with object properties for details.
Adjusting guide run settings

Right-click Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu to adjust guide run
settings.
A guide run is a layer of run stitches around the outline of an appliqu object.
This is the first appliqu layer to be stitched and is used to position the appliqu
fabric on the background material. An extra line of stitching can be added if the
appliqu fabric is to be trimmed in position. If it has been pre-cut, this cutting
line is not needed. You can also specify a frame-out movement in order to place
and/or trim the appliqu patch.
To adjust guide run settings
1 Select and double-click the appliqu object.
Select cutting
method
2 If you want to trim the appliqu patch in position, select an appliqu cutting
method:
Option
Purpose
Pre-Cut
No cutting line is generated. This option assumes you have a

pre-cut appliqu patch ready to be placed in position.
Trim in Place
An additional cutting line is generated.
640
Tip A cutting line is only generated if Trim in Place is selected. This allows
you to place the fabric patch after the guide run has been stitched, then trim
after the cutting line has been stitched.
Guide run
Cutting line
Tack stitches
Cover stitches
3 Enter Stitch length and Offset values as required in the Guide Run panel.
A negative offset value moves the guide run within the outline, a positive
value moves it outside.
Offset: 1 mm
Offset: -1 mm
Offset: 0 mm
4 Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function after
the guide run. See also Adjusting frame-out positions.
Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be
prompted to enter a frame-out position. See Digitizing appliqu objects for
details.
Adjusting tack stitch settings

Right-click Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu to adjust tack stitch
settings.
Tacking is used to fix appliqu shapes to a background fabric before cover
stitching is applied. You can change the stitch type and settings used to generate
tacking, or choose to omit this layer altogether.
To adjust tack stitch settings
641

Select tack stitch type
Adjust tack stitch
spacing
2 In the Tack panel, select a tack stitch type from the Stitch dropdown.
If you do not require a tacking layer, select None.
Run tacking
E Stitch tacking
Zigzag tacking
3 Select the tack stitch settings. Depending on the selected stitch type, you can
set different stitch properties:
Option
Purpose
Adjust /
Adjust Stitch
Stitch spacing value for E Stitch and Zigzag. Or stitch length value for
Run stitch.
Spacing
Stitch spacing value for E Stitch and Zigzag.
Count
Number of stitch repetitions for Zigzag only.
Width
Column width value for Zigzag and E Stitch.
Offset
Run stitch only. Negative offset value moves the tack stitching within
the outline, a positive value moves it outside.
No. of Runs
E Stitch only. Number of runs between stitches.
Zigzag spacing: 3mm
Zigzag spacing: 1.5mm
4 Adjust the Inside/Outside offset value as a percentage the sum of both

equals 100%.
Inside: 25% outside: 75%
642
5 Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function after
the guide run. See Adjusting frame-out positions for details.
Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not be
prompted to enter a frame-out position. See Digitizing appliqu objects for
details.
Adjusting cover stitch settings

Right-click Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu to adjust cover stitch
settings.
The cover stitch is the Satin border around the appliqu shape. You can change
the width of the cover stitch, and offset it to the inside or outside of the digitized
outline. An extra line of stitching can be added if you need to trim the appliqu
fabric in position. If the fabric has been pre-cut, this cutting line is not needed.
To adjust cover stitch settings
Adjust cover stitch

settings
2 In the Cover panel, adjust the cover stitch Width as required.

Cover Stitch Width:
3.0mm
Cover Stitch Width:

1.5mm
3 Adjust the Inside/Outside offset value as a percentage the sum of both

equals 100%.
Inside: 10%
outside: 90%
Inside: 90%
outside: 10%
4 If you want to trim the appliqu patch in position, select an appliqu cutting
method. See Adjusting guide run settings for details.
643
Adjusting frame-out positions

Right-click Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu to adjust frame-out
settings.
Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reposition frame-out
marker.
When you stitch out appliqu objects, you can set a frame-out position. This
shifts the hoop out from under the needle, making it easier to place and trim the
appliqu shapes. The frame-out settings determine the distance and direction of
the hoop movement. Depending on the type of machine you are working with,
the frame-out command needs to be specified as either a Stop function
multi-head machine or Color Change function single-head machine.
To adjust the frame-out position
1 Right-click the Appliqu icon.
Set frame out coordinates
2 In the Frame Out panel, set the frame-out coordinates.
X: enter a horizontal distance for the hoop to move.

Y: enter a vertical distance for the hoop to move.
3 Press Enter or click Apply.
Tip If you need to move the frame-out position, you can do so by means of
To change the frame-out position
1 Select the object and click the Reshape Object icon.
Control points appear around the object and the Reshape toolbar appears.
By default, reshape nodes, stitch angles and entry/exit points display
together. Appliqu objects include a special frame-out position marker. See
also Reshaping embroidery objects.
Click and drag frame-out
position marker
644
2 Click and drag the frame-out position marker to the required position.
Creating partial cover appliqu objects

Use Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Auto Appliqu to digitize partial cover
appliqu objects.
You can create appliqu objects with partial cover
stitching to create an overlapping effect without
doubling-up borders.
Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out
fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered
according to the stitching sequence. See Printing
appliqu patterns for details.
To create partial cover appliqu objects
1 Digitize appliqu shapes in the same way you digitize with Auto Appliqu.
See Digitizing appliqu objects for details.
2 Select the appliqu shapes in the group and select Stitch > Partial
Appliqu.
Partial cover
Unstitched part
of boundary
Note The cover stitches are generated in a clockwise direction between the
start and end points, leaving the rest of the boundary unstitched.
Combining appliqu components

Use Toolbox > Appliqu Tools Flyout > Combine Appliqu Components to break
apart multiple appliqu objects into component objects and combine and
resequence them for efficient stitchout.
645
The Combine Appliqu Components tool breaks apart multiple appliqu

objects into their components guide runs, cutting lines, tack stitches and cover
stitches and combines and resequences them for efficient stitchout. The end
result is that the guide run of all appliqu objects is stitched in one pass, followed
by the tack stitch and then cover stitch. A single frame-out movement occurs
after guide run and tack stitch components.
To combine appliqu components
1 Select a group of appliqu objects.
The Combine Appliqu Components tool is activated.
Each appliqu object

digitized and stitched out
in its entirety
Note The Combine Appliqu Components tool is disabled when

non-appliqu objects are included in the selection.
2 Click Combine Appliqu Components.
A message box warns that the appliqu objects will be broken apart and
recommends that you save the design before proceeding.
The selected appliqu objects are broken apart and same components guide
runs, cutting lines, tack stitches and cover stitches are combined and
resequenced.
Thread colors of each

appliqu object recombined
and resequenced for
efficient stitchout
646
Chapter 30
Sequin Digitizing
Some embroidery machines are equipped with a sequin

dispenser that drops sequins onto the garment as it
stitches. EmbroideryStudio allows you to digitize
sequined designs for compatible machines. A dedicated
set of sequin tools lets you digitize sequin fills, outlines,
or individual sequin drops.
EmbroideryStudio also supports the creation of
twin-sequin designs for twin-sequin-capable machines.
EmbroideryStudio also provides a dedicated tool for
automatically converting sequin artwork in the form of a
vector file to sequin runs.
This section describes how to set up custom sequin
palettes for the creation of sequin designs. It also
describes how to create sequin runs and fills. It covers the
conversion of artwork and other objects to sequins. It
also covers setting up twin-sequin designs. Sequin
reshaping and editing is described as well as techniques
for digitizing individual sequins.

Before you can use Sequin mode, you must select a machine format that
supports it. You can then set up a dedicated sequin palette for your design from
a list of pre-defined shapes and sizes.
Barudan BEVY-Z1506C
twin-sequin machine devices
are mounted on right and left
sides of the heads
Selecting a sequin-capable machine

Sequin mode is supported in Schiffli, Tajima, Barudan, and ZSK embroidery
machine formats. Before you can use Sequin mode, you must select a machine
format that supports it via the Select Machine Format dialog. See also Saving
designs for machine.
647
Note Support is provided for the Tajima TBF and Barudan FDR-II Twin
Sequin machines to enable digitizing for twin-sequin designs. One of these
machine formats must be selected before twin-sequin runs can be created in
EmbroideryStudio. See also Setting up twin-sequin designs.
To select a sequin-capable machine
The Select Machine Format dialog opens. See also Selecting machine
formats.
Select
sequin-capable
machine format
Click to adjust
format
2 From the Available Machine Formats list, select a sequin-capable machine

format Schiffli, Tajima, Barudan, or ZSK.
3 Click OK.
Sequin shapes are now available for selection from the Sequin Palette. If
you have selected a twin-sequin-capable machine, sequin shapes and sizes
are displayed in pairs. Otherwise you have access to single sequins only.
Twin-sequin palette
Single-sequin palette
Tip Different machines require different presets. Typical modifiable values

include stitch and jump length, trim functions and color change functions.
C hapter 30 S equin D igitizing
648
Use the Machine Format Values dialog to customize values as required if

outputting to a specific machine format. See also Machine Formats.
Setting up sequin palettes

Use Sequin > Sequin Palette to select from a user-defined palette of
sequin shapes for the current design.
Use Sequin > Sequin Palette Editor to select sequin shapes from a sequin library.
The Sequin Palette Editor lets you prepare a palette of sequins to use in the
current design. Once set up, the palette is available for use from the Sequin
Palette dropdown list.
To set up a sequin palette
1 Click the Sequin Palette Editor icon.
The Sequin Palette Editor dialog opens. Fields are arranged in tabular form
so that parameters for each sequin type can be viewed at once. These include
Sequin, Color, Size (mm), Hole (mm), and Comment.
Click to add
sequin types
Note The precise behavior of this dialog depends on whether you have
selected a single- or twin-sequin-capable machine as your machine type. See
Selecting a sequin-capable machine for details.
2 Click the More button to create a new entry.
Depending on the selected machine type single or twin a single or double
column will be added to the Sequin Palette Editor. See also Setting up
twin-sequin designs.
Select sequin type

from the dropdown
list
3 Select a sequin type from the Sequin dropdown.

4 Repeat as many times as required to define a complete sequin palette for
your design.
Note Click the X button in the column header to remove any unwanted
sequins.
5 Edit sequin colors and sizes as required.
649
Size, Hole and Comment fields are all editable. See Editing sequin palettes
for details.
Sequin shapes are now available for selection from the Sequin Palette. If
you have selected a twin-sequin-capable machine, sequin shapes and sizes
are displayed in pairs. Otherwise you have access to single sequins only.
Twin-sequin palette
Single-sequin palette
Editing sequin palettes

Use Sequin > Sequin Palette Editor to select sequin shapes from a library.
The Sequin Palette Editor lets you prepare a palette of sequins to use in your
design. Set color and size for each sequin, as well as sequin hole size at any
stage.
Note Changing sequins in the sequin palette will cause the design window and
the Object Properties dialog to update automatically.
To edit a sequin palette
1 Click the Sequin Palette Editor icon.
The Sequin Palette Editor dialog opens. Fields are arranged in tabular form
so that parameters for each sequin type can be viewed at once. These include
Sequin, Color, Size (mm), Hole (mm), and Comment. These are all
editable.
Change sequin
types
Click to edit
sequin colors
Adjust sequin
and hole sizes
2 Click the More button to add new entries as required.

3 Use the Sequin dropdown to change sequin types.
4 Adjust sequin Size (mm) and Hole size (mm) as required.
650
5 Click the dropdown button in the Color field to access color controls for the
fill color.
Click to
select color
6 Select a color from the table or More Colors for a wider selection.
you are using.
Click an area to
select color

brightness

known
7 Select from the standard (pre-defined) colors or mix your own.

8 Select or mix a color and click OK.
9 Repeat as many times as required.
Selected sequins are now available for use in the Sequin Palette. Sequin
diameter is indicated beside the sequin shape.
Select sequin to use
651
Creating sequin runs

EmbroideryStudio provides tools to create a string of sequins along a digitized
line according to preset spacings or as marked by the digitizer. When digitizing
sequin runs, you have the choice of exact spacing, for open shapes, or even
spacing, for closed shapes. You can preset sequin type or change it at any stage.
Similarly, you can preset fixing stitches or change them after digitizing. There is
an option to ensure that the stitch before the Drop Sequin function is placed
opposite the feeding direction, as recommended by machine manufacturers.
Note Sequin mode is supported in Schiffli, Tajima, Barudan, and ZSK

embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin mode, you must select
a machine format that supports it. See also Selecting a sequin-capable machine.
Digitizing sequin runs

Use Sequin > Sequin Run Auto to create a string of sequins along a digitized line
according to current settings.
Use Sequin > Sequin Run Manual to manually digitize sequin-drops along a
digitized line.
Use the Sequin Run input method to create a string of sequins along a digitized
line. You have the option of digitizing individual sequin drops with the manual
method, or letting the system automatically generate drops according to current
settings. Digitize lines as you would motif runs. Fixing stitches are generated
automatically according to current settings.
To digitize a sequin run
1 Select a machine format that supports sequin mode via the Select Machine
Format dialog. See Selecting a sequin-capable machine for details.
2 Select the sequin type you want to use from the dropdown list in the Sequin
Palette. See Setting up twin-sequin designs for details.
If you have selected a twin-sequin-capable machine, sequin shapes and

sizes are displayed in pairs.
Select sequin pair
652
Otherwise you have access to single sequins only.
Select single sequin
Tip Twin-sequin mode has several advantages over the standard

single-sequin mode. It allows you to create and visualize predefined patterns
of sequin runs comprised of sequins of multiple size, color, and shape. This
allows you to create twin-sequin designs and output stitch files to
twin-sequin-capable machines. See Setting up twin-sequin designs for
details.
3 Click the Sequin Run Auto icon.
4 Digitize the line along which you want the sequin run to appear by entering
reference points left-click for corner points, right-click for curve points.
Press Enter
Digitize outline left-click

corner points, right-click
curve points
5 When you have finished digitizing the line, press Enter.

Sequins of the selected type are automatically generated along the digitized
line along with their fixing stitches. Spacings can be individually adjusted. See
Reshaping and editing sequin runs for details.
6 To add details or create special spacings, click the Sequin Run Manual icon.
7 Digitize individual sequins again, left-click for corner points, right-click for
curve points.
Connecting and fixing stitches are automatically generated. See Changing
sequins and fixing stitches for details.
Press Enter
Digitize individual sequins

left-click corner points,
right-click curve points
653
Note The Backtrack/Repeat tool is enabled for sequin-run objects. See

Changing sequins and fixing stitches

Use Sequin > Sequin Palette to select from a user-defined
palette of sequin shapes for the current design.
You can select sequins before or after digitizing a sequin run. Similarly, you can
preset fixing stitches or change them at any stage.
Note Sequin Run stitch has potential as a decorative stitch in its own right. For
this purpose you can select None in the Sequin Palette. This option is best
used with the Sequin Drop Direction set to Any. See also Setting drop-stitch
direction.
To change sequins and fixing stitches
1 To change sequins, select the object and select a different sequin type from
the Sequin Palette on the Sequin toolbar.
All sequins in the object are immediately substituted.
2 To change fixing stitches, double-click the object.
654
The Object Properties > Outlines > Sequin Run dialog opens.
Click to open
Fixing Type
Chooser
3 Click the Fixing Type Chooser button in the Fixing field.

The Object Properties dialog extends to reveal a library containing all the
available fixing types.
Fixing stitch
preview
Select fixing
stitch type
Click to change
fixing stitch
Choose method for

setting fixing size
4 Select a fixing stitch type.

A preview of the selected fixing stitch appears in the Preview Pane.
Fixing stitches for the object are regenerated.
655
Note To close the Fixing Type Chooser, click the Fixing Type Chooser
button again.
Adjust automatic or
manual settings
6 To adjust the fixing stitch size, select one of the following methods:
Option
Purpose
Match sequin Sets a margin around the sequin so that fixing stitches dont punch too
close to the sequin.
Set manually
Allows you to set fixing stitch size of the sequin, regardless of its size.
Note The Size field is enabled only if the Set manually fixing size option is
selected. If the Match sequin fixing size option is selected, the Size field is
disabled and the Margin field enabled.
7 If you have chosen the manual option, specify the size of the fixing stitch in
the Size field.
Size is measured from the center of the sequin. You can enter a value from
2.50mm to 30.00mm.
Sequin size: 7 mm
Auto margin: 0.50 mm
Sequin size: 7 mm
Manual size: 5.00 mm
Sequin size: 7 mm
Manual size: 10.00 mm
8 If you have chosen automatic matching, specify a margin for the fixing stitch
in the Margin field.
This sets a margin from the edge of the sequin so that the fixing stitch does
not punch too close to the sequin. You can enter a value from 0.20mm to
2.00mm.
Adjusting sequin run spacing and fixing orientation

You can change the spacing in a sequin run at any stage. If you use the manual
method, you define the spacings between sequin-drops with every click you
make. If you use the automatic method, sequin-drops are calculated according
to the current spacing setting. You have the choice of exact spacing, better for
open shapes, or even spacing, better for closed shapes. You can also manually
656
fine-tune sequin spacings with the Reshape tool. See also Reshaping and
editing sequin runs.
To adjust sequin run spacing and fixing orientation

1 Select a sequin-run object manual or automatic.
Manual sequin
run
Automatic
sequin run
2 Double-click the object.

The Object Properties > Outlines > Sequin Run dialog opens.
Enter nominal
spacing
Select positioning
method
3 In the Spacing field, enter a nominal spacing.

Spacing is measured from the center of one sequin stack to the center of the
next.
When the field is enabled, you can enter a value from 1.5mm to 200mm, but
EmbroideryStudio automatically calculates the minimum spacing allowed.
Note The field is only enabled only if Base is selected in the Layer field of
the same column and the Sequin Run Auto tool selected.
657
4 Select a spacing method using the Positioning dropdown:

Option
Purpose
Exact
Uses the specified Spacing exactly. This may result in an uneven

spacing at the end of the curve.
Expand to fit
Makes the spacing increase from the nominal value until there is a
sequin at the end of the path.
Compact to fit Makes the spacing decrease from the nominal value until there is a
sequin at the end of the path.
Exact
Expand to fit
Compact to fit
Tip If you want the sequins irregular, digitize using the Sequin Run Manual
tool and for fine-tuning of individual sequin spacings, use the Reshape tool.
See also Reshaping and editing sequin runs.
658
5 To adjust fixing stitch orientation, place the first stroke of the fixing stitch in
one of the preset directions left/right, up/down:
Choose fixing stitch orientation

horizontal or vertical
Option
Purpose
Left Orientation
To the left of the sequin run curve.
Right Orientation
To the right.
Vertical
Orientation (Up)
Always in the vertical plane upwards.
Vertical
Orientation
(Down)
Always in the vertical plane downwards.
Orientation: Left
Orientation: Right
Orientation: Vertical
(Up)
Orientation: Vertical
(Down)
6 Adjust minimum, run and maximum stitch lengths when connecting fixing
stitches as required.
Adjust stitch lengths
659
Setting drop-stitch direction

There is an option to ensure that the initial fixing
stitch before the sequin is placed opposite the
feeding direction, as recommended by machine
manufacturers. Otherwise, the sequin may be
deflected by the thread. If the needle then
misses the center of the sequin because of
incorrect placement, the embroidery material,
needles or needle plates may be damaged. In
multihead machines, sequins are fed from the
front or south which means that the initial
fixing stitch should be placed on the north side. In Schiffli machines, the
opposite is the case.
To set the drop-stitch direction
1 Select a sequin-run object and double-click.
2 Select the Special tab and Sequin in the dropdown list.
Select
special tab
Select sequin
Select sequin
drop direction
Select to prevent
multiple penetrations
660
3 Select the required drop-stitch direction:

Option
Purpose
From North
Ensures that the initial fixing stitch is opposite the feeding direction
front or south which is the case in multihead machines.
From South
Ensures that the initial fixing stitch is opposite the feeding direction
the top or north which is the case in Schiffli machines.
Drop direction From

North: initial fixing stitch
always placed above, and
sequin fed from south
Drop direction From

South: initial fixing stitch
always placed below, and
sequin fed from north
Caution With the Any option, direction is not important. This option
generates the least number of fixing stitches but may not be suitable for your
sequin device. It should be used by experienced digitizers only.
4 Enter an angle in the Max Angle field to specify an angular range within
which drop sequin stitch will fall.
You can set the value for either North or South fixing stitches. The default is
90 but this can be increased or decreased depending on the capabilities of
your machine.
Drop stitch direction
set to North or South
Set maximum allowable

angle for placement of
fixing stitch
5 Select the Prevent multiple penetrations option as required.

This option is used to minimize penetrations at the same point, and to
generate Schiffli-compatible fixing stitching. If you select the Schiffli
template, the option is on by default. When set to off, some fixing stitches
661
will have multiple penetrations at the same point, both at the sequin center
and outer edge.
Prevent Multiple Penetrations on
Prevent Multiple Penetrations off
6 Select the Closest Point Join option as required.

By default, this option is off, meaning that the system connects the
predefined exit leg of the fixing stitch motif to the predefined entry leg of the
next fixing stitch motif. That is, unless the connector exceeds the maximum
sequin stitch. Choose the Closest Point Join option if you want to always
connect fixing stitch motifs from the leg closest to the nearest leg of the next
fixing stitch motif.
Creating sequin fills

The Sequin Fill feature provides a means of filling complex shapes with sequins
arranged in a series of columns. The fill can also include a border, with or without
a margin, inset from the digitized object outline. The object border can be made
from a different or same sequin and is a property of the sequin-fill objects.
Sequin fills are tied together by a series of run stitches and travel runs. Travels
between columns are placed along the object outline. Sequins are placed so that
sequin centers do not fall outside the object outline. Sequin fixing stitches,
however, can lie outside the object outline depending on current settings.
Sequin Fill fixings behave like the equivalent settings for Sequin Run.
Digitizing sequin fills

Use Sequin > Sequin Fill to digitize and fill large, irregular shapes with sequins.
Digitizing sequin-fill objects is essentially the same procedure as digitizing
complex fill objects. See also Creating shapes with fixed stitch angles.
662
To digitize a sequin fill

1 Click the Sequin Fill icon.
2 Digitize control points for a closed object outline as you would for a complex
fill object. See also Creating shapes with fixed stitch angles.

You are prompted to create another boundary.
4 To finish the object, press Enter twice.
Tip Fixing stitches are selected in the same way as for sequin runs. For
sequin fills, we recommend you use the simplest fixing stitch available
C01-1.
Use the simplest

fixing stitch
663
Tip If you have a twin-sequin capable machine, you can use the Pattern
control to create patterned fills. See also Setting up twin-sequin designs.
Adjusting sequin line settings

One way to adjust sequin fill column settings is via object properties. Use these
to control fill direction angle, spacings, and sequin offsets. You can also use
object properties to control sequin overlaps or layout, as well as border
margins.
To adjust sequin line settings
Double-click the sequin-fill objects you want to adjust.

The Object Properties dialog opens to the Fills > Sequin Column Fill tab.
Adjust sequin line

settings
Adjust margin
setting
664
Controls available on the Fills > Sequin Column Fill tab for sequin line settings
are summarized in the table below.
Control
Description
Sequin Line
Settings
Use these settings to control the overall layout of the fill grid,
including angle, sequin spacings, and offsets within the grid. See
Adjusting sequin line settings for details.
Layout
Controls the overlapping sequin sequence. Sequin lines will run

either left-to-right (left button) or right-to-left (right button). See
Adjusting sequin line settings for details.
Add Fill Margin
Adds a margin measured from the object outline. See Adjusting

sequin line settings for details.
Add Border
Inserts a border of sequins along the object outline. See Adding

sequin borders for details.
Adjust Direction Angle setting as desired:
Angle: 45
Angle: 180
Adjust Spacing setting as desired:
Spacing: 3 mm
Spacing: 5 mm
Note This spacing setting controls column spacing, not sequin spacing. See
also Adjusting patterns and fixings.
Adjust Offset setting as desired:
Offset: 0 mm
Offset: 2.5 mm
665
Adjust Layout setting as desired. Sequin lines will run either left-to-right (left
button) or right-to-left (right button).
Layout: left-to-right
Layout: right-to-left
Activate Add Fill Margin and adjust margin setting as desired. No sequin is
placed within the fill with its center outside the fill margin.
Sequin fill with fill

margin
Sequin fill with hole

and fill margin
Adjusting patterns and fixings

You can change the spacing in a sequin run at any stage. If you use the manual
method, you define the spacings between sequin-drops with every click you
make. If you use the automatic method, sequin-drops are calculated according
to the current spacing setting. You have the choice of exact spacing, better for
open shapes, or even spacing, better for closed shapes. You can also manually
fine-tune sequin spacings with the Reshape tool. See also Reshaping and
editing sequin runs.
666
To adjust patterns and fixings

1 Select a sequin-fill objects.
2 Double-click the object.

The Object Properties > Fills > Sequin Column Fill dialog opens.
Set up sequin
patterns for fills
and/or borders
Enter nominal
spacing
Adjust sequin
fixing stitching
Controls available on the Fills > Sequin Column Fill tab for patterns and fixing
stitches are summarized in the table below.
Control
Description
Select
Determines what patterns are displayed, where:

Sequin Fill: displays the fill pattern
Sequin Run: displays the border pattern.
All other controls work the same as for Sequin Run. See Adding
sequin borders for details.
Fixing Size
This control works the same as sequin fixing for Sequin Run. See
Changing sequins and fixing stitches for details.
Orientation
Adjust fixing stitch orientation in one of the preset directions

left/right, up/down. See Adjusting sequin run spacing and fixing
orientation for details.
Stitch Lengths
Adjust minimum, run and maximum stitch lengths when connecting

fixing stitches. See Adjusting sequin run spacing and fixing
orientation for details.
3 In the Patterns pane, adjust spacings for fill and/or border as required.
667
Spacing is measured from the center of one sequin stack to the center of the
next.
Fill spacing: 4
Border spacing: 6
Fill spacing: 5.5

Border spacing: 4.5
Fill spacing: 7
Border spacing: 3
Note When the field is enabled, you can enter a value from 1.5mm to
200mm, but EmbroideryStudio automatically calculates the minimum
spacing allowed.
one of the preset directions left/right, up/down:
Choose fixing stitch

orientation horizontal or
vertical
Option
Purpose
Left Orientation
To the left of the sequin run curve.
Right Orientation
To the right.
Vertical Orientation (Up)
Always in the vertical plane upwards.
Vertical Orientation
(Down)
Always in the vertical plane downwards.
Orientation: Vertical (Up)
Orientation: Vertical (Down)
5 Adjust minimum, run and maximum stitch lengths when connecting fixing
stitches as required.
Adjust stitch lengths
668
Tip If you have a twin-sequin capable machine, you can use the Patterns
control to create patterned fills. See also Setting up twin-sequin designs.
Adding sequin borders

Sequin fills can also include a border, with or without a margin, inset from the
digitized object outline. The object border can be made from a different or same
sequin and is a property of the sequin-fill objects. If a twin-sequin capable
machine is selected, the border and fill can also comprise patterns made up of
available sequins.
To add a sequin border

1 Double-click a sequin-fill objects.
The Object Properties > Fills > Sequin Column Fill dialog opens.
Select border
option
Select Sequin Border

to adjust parameters
2 Tick the Add Border checkbox.
669
3 Adjust the fill margin as required. See also Adjusting sequin line settings.
Sequin fill with border

and no fill margin
Sequin fill with border

and fill margin
4 Select Sequin Border from the Select droplist to adjust border parameters
in the same way for sequin fills.
Choose Sequin Fill
Enter nominal
spacing
Click to change
fixing stitch
Adjust fixing stitch
size manually or
automatically
Note The Size field is enabled only if the Set manually fixing size option is
selected.
5 Adjust sequin border settings as required.
Border Spacing: 2.0
Border Spacing: 5.0
6 Adjust sequin border fixing stitches as required.
670
Borders can use a different type of fixing stitch from sequin fills. See also
Adjusting sequin run spacing and fixing orientation.
Fixing stitch: C03-7
Fixing stitch: A04-6
7 Finally, set sequin border fixing stitch direction as required.
Adjust fixing stich

direction
Fixing stitch direction: clockwise
Fixing stitch direction: counter clockwise
Tip bIf you have a twin-sequin capable machine, you can use the Pattern
control to create patterned borders and/or fills. See Creating twin-sequin
patterns for details.
Converting objects to sequins

Most objects in EmbroideryStudio are inter-convertible. Open and closed
sequin objects are no exception. Any open object Run, Stemstitch, Motif Run,
Freehand, Input C, Vector can be quickly converted to sequin run. Similarly,
any closed object Input A/B, Fusion, or Complex can be converted to sequin
671
fill. EmbroideryStudio also provides a dedicated tool for automatically

converting sequin artwork in the form of a vector file to sequin runs.
Converting sequin artwork

Use Sequin > Vectors to Sequins to create a sequin run from a set of sequin vector
objects selected by intersecting line.
Frequently, artwork for sequin designs is independently created by a specialist
designer and supplied to the embroidery digitizer as a vector file. The Vectors
to Sequins tool is available for just this purpose. A sequin run is automatically
created from a set of vector objects representing sequins. The order the line
crosses the sequins determines the sequin order. Fixing stitches are generated
automatically according to current settings. If you are digitizing twin-sequin
runs, EmbroideryStudio will generate sequin drops according to the currently
selected sequin run pattern. See also Choosing twin-sequin patterns.
Note Sequin mode is supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK embroidery

machine formats. Before you can use Sequin mode, you must select a machine
format that supports it. See Selecting a sequin-capable machine for details.
To convert sequin artwork
1 Insert the sequin artwork into the design.
Properly designed artwork will contain vector objects centered on the exact
locations required for sequins in the design.
2 Select the Vectors to Sequins icon.
You are prompted to Enter point 1 on the polyline on the Prompt Bar.
672
3 Click the sequin graphic which will start the sequin run.
Digitize connecting
line passing through
all sequin graphics
4 Digitize a line connecting all sequins to be included in the sequin run.

Tip The line only needs to touch the sequin object somewhere within its
boundary. Left-click for corner points, right-click for curve points.
5 Press Enter.
A sequin run is generated along a curve that passes through the center of
each sequin graphic with sequin objects positioned at these centers. Current
properties are applied and the object is set to manual by default. The
generated curve contains a reshape node at each sequin position.
Sequin Run
automatically generated
Reshape nodes
generated at each
sequin drop
Tip If you are running twin-sequin mode and preset a sequin pattern in
Object Properties, this pattern is applied to the converted sequin objects
while sequin spacing is preserved as per the artwork.
Pattern applied
673
Converting open objects to sequin runs

Convert any open object Run, Stemstitch, Motif Run, Freehand, Input C,
Vector to sequin run.
To convert an open object to sequin run
Select the open object.
Right-click and select Convert > Convert to sequin-fill objects.

Alternatively, click the Sequin Run Auto icon.
Converting closed objects to sequin fills

Convert any closed object Input A/B, Fusion, or Complex to sequin fill.
674
To convert a closed object to sequin fill
Select the closed object.
Right-click and select Convert > Convert to sequin-fill objects.

Alternatively, click the Sequin Fill icon.

EmbroideryStudio supports the creation of twin-sequin designs for
twin-sequin-capable machines. Twin-sequin mode has several advantages over
the standard single-sequin mode. It allows you to create and visualize
predefined patterns of sequin runs comprising pairs of sequins of different size,
color, and shape. This in turn allows you to create twin-sequin designs and
output stitch files to twin-sequin-capable machines.
Wilcom EmbroideryStudio Level 3
Z: 1.00
Twin Sequin_Testing
H: 145.8 mm W: 148.9 mm
Stitches:
Colors:
Color changes:
Stops:
6350
3
2
3
Machine:
Trims:
Tajima TBF
8
Left:
Right:
Up:
Down:
74.5 mm
74.5 mm
72.9 mm
72.9 mm
EndX:
EndY:
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
Max Stitch:
Min Stitch:
Max Jump:
7.0 mm
0.4 mm
7.0 mm
!$*
"*! !
Colorway:
#
N#
Colorway 1
St.
Descr Code
1.
3
1965 Green 3
Brand: Wilcom
2.
5
3383 Red 5
Brand: Wilcom
Sequin: #1 (253)
Sequin: #2 (194)
3.
8
1001 Purple 8
Brand: Wilcom
Sequin: #3 (173)
Sequins:
#
Shape
5.0
253 circle
2.
3.0
194 circle
3.
5.0
173 circle
Total Bobbin:
Author:
Last Saved: 9 Dec, 2009
Printed: 9 Dec, 2009 14:19
Size Count Name
1.
16.25m
Keywords:
Tip Twin-sequin mode also allows you to convert vector objects to twin-sequin
outlines. See also Converting sequin artwork.
675
Choosing twin-sequin patterns

EmbroideryStudio allows you to select twin-sequin patterns from a preset
pattern library. These can be applied to existing twin-sequin objects or to newly
created sequin-run objects.
PeackockPattern1
PeackockPattern2
PeackockPattern3
Alternate Twin Overlap
Group of 3 + Single
Twin Lace
To choose a twin-sequin pattern

1 Select a machine format that supports twin-sequin mode via the Select
Machine Format dialog. See Selecting a sequin-capable machine for details.
Select
twin-sequin-capable
machine format
2 Open the Sequin Palette Editor and create the palette you want to use in
your twin-sequin design.
Default sequin pairs appear in Columns #1 and #2. The only difference when
you set up your palette in twin-sequin mode is that you set up sequin pairs
rather than single sequins. See Setting up sequin mode for details.
Twin sequin pairs

added by default
Click to add
sequin pairs
676
3 Select the sequin pair for which you want to set a twin-sequin pattern.
Select sequin pair
4 Open Object Properties and go to the Outlines > Sequin Run tab.
A Pattern table appears at the top of the dialog. This allows you to set a
pattern of sequin drops for the currently selected sequin pair.
Select preset
patterns from a
pattern library
5 Click the Patterns button to select a preset twin-sequin pattern from the
library.
The Sequin Pattern dialog opens with a default pattern selected.
Click to select
pattern from
dropdown list
Preview of
selected pattern
6 Open the Sequin Pattern dropdown list and choose from a library of preset
patterns a preview appears below.
7 Click Apply Pattern to make the selected pattern current for the selected
sequin pair.
The pattern is preset and ready for use with the selected sequin pair.
Note The pattern is also immediately applied to any selected sequin-run
objects. See Reshaping and editing sequin runs for details.
677
8 Select a sequin pair from the Sequin Palette and, using the Sequin Run
Auto or Sequin Run Manual tools, create your twin-sequin runs as desired.
See Digitizing sequin runs for details.
9 Edit sequins and twin-sequin pattern of the selected object as required. See
Adjusting twin-sequin runs for details.
Adjusting twin-sequin runs

Change sequin patterns applying to twin-sequin runs like any other object
properties. You can apply current properties to selected objects, apply other
sequin pairs, and/or different patterns. You can even define you own patterns.
To adjust twin-sequin runs
Create or select a twin-sequin-run object. See Digitizing sequin runs for

details.
678
Tip You can convert Run objects to Sequin Run by selecting and clicking
the Sequin Run Auto tool. See Creating sequin runs for details.
To change sequin shapes, select another pair from the dropdown Sequin
Palette.
To change twin-sequin patterns, double-click the selected twin-sequin-run

object to open Object Properties.
The current twin-sequin pattern appears at the top of the dialog.
Select preset
patterns from a
pattern library
Click the Patterns button.

The Sequin Pattern dialog opens with the current pattern selected.
Click to select
pattern from
dropdown list
Select alternative
sequin pair
Preview of
selected pattern
Click to apply
selected
sequin pair
679
Open the Sequin Pattern dropdown list and choose from a library of
preset patterns a preview appears below.
Click Apply Pattern to apply the selected pattern.
The pattern is immediately applied to the selected sequin-run object.
Optionally, select another sequin pair from the dropdown list and click
Apply Sequin.
The selected sequin pair is immediately applied to the selected object.
Optionally, use the Pattern table at the top of the Object Properties dialog
to define your own twin-sequin pattern.
This allows you to set a pattern of sequin drops for the currently selected
sequin pair. See Setting up twin-sequin designs for details.
Copy and paste

twin-sequin
patterns from one
object to another
Tip You can make a selected objects properties, including twin-sequin

patterns, current for all new objects or apply them to existing objects. See
Making selected properties current for details.
680
Creating twin-sequin patterns

EmbroideryStudio lets you create custom twin-sequin patterns and, optionally,
save them to a pattern library for later use.
To create a twin-sequin pattern

1 Select a machine format that supports twin-sequin mode via the Select
Machine Format dialog. See Selecting a sequin-capable machine for details.
2 Create a twin-sequin-run object with the Sequin Run Auto tool or Sequin
Run Manual tool. See Digitizing sequin runs for details.
Alternatively, select an existing twin-sequin-run object so that you can
preview your pattern as you create it.
3 Double-click the selected twin-sequin-run object to open Object Properties.

A Pattern table appears at the top of the dialog. This allows you to define a
pattern of sequin drops for the currently selected sequin pair. By default, the
left sequin of the topmost pair in the sequin palette list is displayed in column
#1 of the table.
Add sequins to
pattern
Click to change
sequin
Click to change
fixing stitch
4 Click the Add Sequin (+) button at the right of the column header to add
more slots to the panel as your twin-sequin pattern requires.
681
A new column is added to the table. When a column has focus, it is shaded in
light-yellow.
Define parameters
for each sequin in
the pattern
Tip Delete any unwanted sequins in the pattern by clicking the X at the right
of the column header.
5 From the Sequin field dropdown list, select one or other sequin from the
selected sequin pair. The diameter of each is displayed beside its icon.
6 In the Layer field, set whether the sequin is to be stacked on top of the
preceding sequin or to form a new element in the pattern.
The dropdown list provides two options: Base or On Top. Base is chosen by
default.
Set sequin
placement base
or on top
Tip Click the Apply button or press Enter to preview your settings with the
selected twin-sequin-run object.
7 In the Spacing field, enter a nominal spacing.
Spacing is measured from the center of one sequin to the center of the next.
See Adjusting sequin run spacing and fixing orientation for details.
Enter nominal
spacing
682
8 In the Fixing field, select the type of fixing you want to use with the selected
slot and adjust fixing stitch size as required. See Changing sequins and fixing
stitches for details.
Adjust fixing stitch
one of the preset directions left/right, up/down. See Adjusting sequin run
spacing and fixing orientation for details.
10 When satisfied with the twin-sequin run pattern you have defined, click the
Save icon at the top of the dialog.
The Save Pattern dialog opens.
Enter pattern
name
My Pattern
11 Enter a name for the newly defined pattern and click OK.
The pattern is now available for use in the Sequin Pattern dialog. See
Choosing twin-sequin patterns for details.
Modifying sequin designs

Sequin-fill objects can be reshaped like any other embroidery object. Reshaping
also provides a means for changing object outlines and column layout. The
column layout can be changed in terms of column spacing, angle, and offset.
Reshaping and editing sequin runs

Use Toolbox > Select Tools Flyout > Select Object to resize objects using selection
handles.
sequin-run objects.
683
Use Sequin > Sequin Edit to fine-tune placement of individual sequins.

Sequin editing often requires individual control over sequin positions. Change
sequin shapes and fixing stitch patterns at any stage. You have complete control
over scaling and reshaping sequin-run objects. Scale and reshape sequin run
lines, as well as remove or add individual sequins. You can also manually
fine-tune sequin spacings. You can even edit individual fixing stitches.
Note Performing manual edits to sequin-run objects automatically deselects all
the options. If you set it back to Exact, Compact to fit, or Expand to fit
spacing, all manual edits are lost.
To reshape and edit a sequin run
Scale sequin-run objects in the normal way by clicking and dragging selection
handles, or by adjusting the general properties. See Scaling objects for
details.
If the object is created with the Sequin Run Auto tool, the sequin drops
are automatically recalculated.
Sequin drops
regenerated according
to current settings
If the object is created with the Sequin Run Manual tool, the original
number of sequin drops is preserved.
Original number of
sequin drops
preserved
Reshape sequin run lines with the Reshape tool as you would any run object.
Add reshape nodes by left- or right-clicking the outline. See Reshaping
684
Note When a sequin-run object is in the Reshape mode, the Show Stitch
Angles icon is disabled.
Fine-tune individual sequin spacings with the Reshape tool click-and-drag

a diamond control point.
You can also select a range or multiple control points by holding down Shift
or Ctrl keys. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Click-and-drag
spacing handle
Note The movement of sequin objects is constrained to the sequin run

outline.
Rotate sequins and fixing stitches by clicking and dragging rotation handles.
Click-and-drag
rotation handle
Reshape individual fixing stitches by clicking and dragging fixing stitch

reshape nodes.
Click-and-drag
fixing stitch
685
Delete selected sequins by pressing the Delete.

Click a diamond control
point and press Delete
Add sequins by holding down the Alt key and clicking the sequin run line.
If you are running twin-sequin mode, you have the option of selecting
alternative sequins from the dropdown list.
Hold down Alt key

and click
Select a sequin
type from the
popup menu
If you are running twin-sequin mode, right-click a diamond control point while
modifying a particular sequin. Options include:
Remove sequin:
Remove selected
sequin
Replace sequin:
Replace sequin with

selection from menu
686
Add on Top:
Add on top of selected

sequin with selection from
menu
Add Underneath:
Add beneath selected

sequin with selection from
menu
Reshaping and editing sequin fills

Use Sequin > Sequin Edit to fine-tune placement of individual sequins.
You cannot reshape individual sequins in a sequin-fill objects. However, either
by means of object properties or the Reshape Object tool, you can control the
overall shape of the object as well as the sequin layout. You can also control the
fill margins as well as direction angle, spacings, and offsets with the fill grid. For
fine-tuning, you can individually adjust positioning of sequins along the grid
although, like all manual edits, these adjustments disappear if the object is
687
regenerated. You can also set entry and exit points to avoid excessive needle
penetrations.
To reshape and edit a sequin fill
Select a sequin-fill objects and click the Reshape icon.

Control points for the object outline and column reshape points appear.
Adjust overall shape as desired. See Reshaping embroidery objects for

details.
Use reshape
nodes to reshape
outline
Use the three central control points to adjust the sequin line settings
interactively as desired. These can be used to interactively update Direction
Angle, Spacing, and Offset settings. Pattern spacing is also influenced by
these control points.
Adjust sequin line settings

interactively
Note Pattern spacing is controlled numerically via the Patterns panel. See
also Adjusting patterns and fixings.
688
Adjust sequin layout interactively as desired:
Needle
penetrations
Line Spacing: 3mm

Offset: 1mm
Line Spacing: 5mm

Offset: 4mm
Line Angle: 125

Pattern Spacing: 8mm
Tip Adjustments to sequin line settings can cause needle penetrations to

occur within sequins. Affected sequins are highlighted in pink. Adjust layout
and/or entry/exit points to minimize unwanted needle penetrations.
Adjust entry and exit points as desired. Travels between columns are placed
along the object outline. Placement of entry and exit points affects travel runs
and can be used to minimize excessive needle penetrations.
Set entry and exit points to

minimize excessive
needle penetrations
Note Moving the object moves it in relation to the overall grid that describes
the fill i.e. the grid is generated and then the object is placed on top. The
result may be a changing of the sequin fill at the fill margin (or object
boundary if there is no fill margin).
Sequin fills can

contain holes
Tip Holes can be digitized in sequin-fill objects in the same way as any free
shape. See also Digitizing free shapes.
689

If you require precise control over the positioning and encoding of your sequin
drops, EmbroideryStudio provides manual techniques for this purpose.
Manually digitizing sequin drops

Use Sequin > Manual Sequin to digitize individual sequins.
Use Sequin > Left Sequin to switch to left sequin when digitizing twin-sequin
designs.
Use Sequin > Right Sequin to switch to right sequin when digitizing twin-sequin
designs.
The Manual Sequin input method allows you individual
control over sequin placement and fixing stitches. Create
decorative outlines and patterns manually using sequins
from the selection list. To add a sequin to the stitching
sequence, simply right-click to drop it onto the design, and
secure it with manual stitches. Manual sequin stitching is a
difficult digitizing skill to master and you need to plan the
stitching sequence carefully in order to minimize
unnecessary stitches. Experiment with your machine and
stitch width and spacing settings to achieve the desired
result. See also Sequin On/Off functions.
Note Sequin mode is supported in Schiffli, Tajima,
Barudan and ZSK embroidery machine formats. Before you
can use Sequin mode, you must select a machine format
that supports it. Similarly, before you can use Twin-Sequin mode, you must
select a suitable machine format. See Selecting a sequin-capable machine for
details. See Setting up twin-sequin designs for details.
To manually digitize a sequin drop
2 Click the Manual Sequin icon.
If you have activated Twin-Sequin mode, sequin shapes and sizes will be
displayed in pairs. The Left and Right Sequin icons are both available.
See also Setting up sequin mode.
Select sequin pair
690
Otherwise, you will have access to single sequins. Only the Left icon is
available.
Select sequin to use
3 Right-click to add a sequin to the design.

An outline of the sequin appears.
4 Left-click to digitize fixing stitches around the sequin to secure it.
Three stitches in the shape of a Y are generally used. The needle points of
each stitch must be placed precisely to ensure that sequins are not pierced
by the needle when stitching.
Right-click to drop sequin
Left-click to digitize fixing stitches
Tip Zoom in for more accurate digitizing.

5 If you have activated Twin-Sequin mode, click the Right Sequin button to
switch sequins.
Alternatively, press the Tab key to switch between left and right sequins while
digitizing manual sequin objects.
6 Continue digitizing manually in the same way right-click to add a sequin,
left-click to digitize fixing stitches.
7 Press Enter to finish.
Insert Drop Sequin functions

You can insert machine functions manually by means of the Insert Function
dialog. Depending on your machines requirements, you will either add the
function to the current stitch, or insert it on an empty stitch or empty jump. See
Inserting machine functions manually for details.
To insert Drop Sequin functions
2 Travel to the position in the design where you want to insert a machine
function. See Traveling through designs for details.
3 Select Machine > Insert Function.
691
The Insert Function dialog opens.
Select Drop
Sequin function
Tip Depending on your machine, you may need to insert additional empty
stitches or empty jumps before or after the selected function. For example,
before a particular Stop function, you may want to insert a number of empty
jumps. See your machine manual for details.
4 From the Available Functions list, select the Drop Sequin function.
5 Choose the insertion method Insert on Empty Stitch or Add to Current
Stitch. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.
Component field and click Insert Before or Insert After as required. See
Inserting machine functions manually for details.
7 When your Drop Sequin function has been correctly defined, click OK.
The Twin Device - Select Sequin dialog is displayed.
Choose left or right

sequin on sequin
dispenser
8 Click Left or Right buttons to activate left or right sequins on the sequin
dispenser.
The Sequin Drop function, together with any additional empty stitches or
jumps, is added at the current needle position.
Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for inserting machine
functions manually. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List for details.
692
Chapter 31
Bling Digitizing
Bling refers to decorative objects placed on garments or templates, either on

their own or in combination with other design elements. Bling is supplied in
varying sizes, shapes, colors and materials. It goes under various names such
as diamante, rhinestones, eyelets, ribbons, charms, crystals, glitz, nailheads,
studs, etc. EmbroideryStudio lets you create bling and embroidery
multi-decoration designs with the Bling! toolset. This tool lets you create and
visualize bling embellishments in combination with other decorative elements.
Bling objects have properties like a normal embroidery object. The Object
Properties docker contains two new tabs called Bling Fill and Bling Run to
handle these properties. Editable properties include bling type size, shape
color, facets patterns, fill density, angle and layout. Bling! features include:
Similar functionality to the Sequin tool. See also Sequin Digitizing.

Pre-defined library of rhinestones shapes.
Tools to create outline and fill patterns.
Controls to adjust placement of stones to avoid overlaps.
Tools to convert vector outlines to bling patterns.
Commands to create cut files to send to cutting machine similar to appliqu.
Inclusion of bling count by size and color on production worksheet. See also
Printing Designs.
Note When reshaping, resizing or editing an object/design, the software
automatically recalculates the number of stones but does not resize them.
693
This section describes how to digitize with rhinestones. It covers setting up bling
palettes and describes creating bling runs and fills. It also deals with modifying
bling objects and bling text.
Digitizing with rhinestones

The Bling! feature allows digitizers to create patterns of bling runs or fills with
editing capabilities similar to those of the Sequin toolset. The single biggest
difference between Sequin and Bling! is that individual rhinestones are not
allowed to overlap or be too close together. This is necessary with bling
templates so that holes do not interfere with one another. Another difference is
that there is no stitching associated with bling. See also Sequin Digitizing.
Bling production processes

Bling, rhinestones, crystals, and glitz are interchangeable terms referring to
decorative objects placed on garments or templates. They are supplied in
various sizes, shapes, colors and materials.
There are two basic processes for creating bling designs:
Hot-fix template production

Direct-to-garment production
Hot-fix templates can be produced in two ways:
Bling transfer: In a semi-automatic process, bling is placed directly onto

transfer tape (or sheet) by machine. Examples are IOline CrystalPress and
CAMS machines. The bling design is ready for heat transfer to the final
product e.g. a T-shirt.
Bling template: This is the design layout on which rhinestones are initially
placed prior to transfer. The template is created by cutters or engravers.
Rhinestones are placed onto the template by a manual flood-fill process and
then manually transferred to transfer tape.
Direct-to-garment production
Direct-to-garment production is supported by various machines such as the
RhinestoneMachine.com Libero, Hirsch GemFix, Dairo Machine Company DK
series (in particular the DK2400Auto) and others.
Cutting data
Cutting data sent to machine consists solely of vectors which describe the
location, size, and shape of the bling in the template. There are no connecting
Chapte r 31 Bli ng D igitizing
694
lines or data that do not relate directly to the placement of the bling. For
example:
Original Bling Fill
Result in Graphics mode after

conversion
Bling templates
Bling templates must have holes cut to suit the specific bling size to be used.
Below is a table of bling size to hole size. SS stands for Stone Size.
Bling
Hole Size (mm)
SS04
1.7
SS05
1.9
SS06
SS07
2.3
SS08
2.5
SS09
2.7
SS10
2.9
SS12
3.2
SS16
SS20
SS30
6.5
SS34
7.3
SS40
8.7
SS48
11.4
SS60
14.3
Note A dedicated Ouput Bling Template command sends vectors for any bling
in a multi-decoration design to a supported cutting machine. See also Outputting
bling templates.
Bling! toolset
The Bling! toolbar contains the following tools:
695
Bling! tools include:

Tool
Note
Bling Palette Editor Use Bling > Bling Palette Editor to select bling shapes from a
pattern library.
Bling Manual
Use Bling > Bling Manual to manually digitize bling-drops

along a digitized line. Select from a user-defined palette of
bling shapes.
Bling Run Auto
Use Bling > Bling Run Auto to create a string of rhinestones

along a digitized line according to current settings.
Bling Fill
Use Bling > Bling Fill to digitize complex shapes (with or

without holes) filled with bling.
Automatic Overlap Activate if you want to automatically remove unwanted

Removal
overlapping bling items from a bling object.
No Automatic
Overlap Removal
Activate if you dont want to automatically remove overlapping

bling items from a bling object.
Highlight Bling
Overlaps
Activate if you want to highlight overlapping bling items in a

bling object i.e. if you want to edit manually.
Bling Edit
Use Bling > Bling Edit to edit selected bling items individually
or as a group within an object.
Note Object properties for bling-run and bling-fill objects can be copied and
applied to other objects. This is done via the Make Properties Current and
Apply Current Properties commands.
Setting up bling palettes

Before you can use Bling!, you must set up a dedicated rhinestone palette for
your design from a list of pre-defined shapes and sizes.
Defining bling palettes

Use Bling > Bling Palette Editor to select and configure rhinestone shapes from a
pattern library.
The Bling Palette Editor lets you prepare a palette of rhinestones for use in
your current design. Once set up, the palette is available for use in Object
696
Properties or for direct selection from the Bling Manual palette. See also
Creating bling runs and fills.
To define a bling palette
1 Click the Bling Palette Editor icon.
The Bling Palette Editor dialog opens. Fields are arranged in tabular form
so that parameters for each rhinestone type can be viewed at once.
Click to add
rhinestone types
Adjust bling
dimensions
Note The controls available in the Bling Palette Editor are similar to those
available in the Sequin Palette Editor. See also Setting up sequin palettes.
2 Click the More button to add new entries as required.
3 Use the Bling dropdown to select rhinestone type and size e.g. Round
ss12.
The code actually specifies a size range displayed at the bottom of the popup
e.g. ss12 falls within a size range of 3.00-3.20 mm.
Select rhinestone
shape and size
Indicates size range

for selected bling
4 Adjust bling dimensions Size 1 and Size 2 (mm) as required, depending

on the chosen shape.
Note If the size adjustment falls outside the size range, EmbroideryStudio
automatically selects the nearest matching size code.
5 Define a Production Type for the bling palette.
The production type options allow you to define the production process you
intend to use for the production of the design. See also Bling production
processes.
697
Placement: If you have an automatic or semi-automatic machine, then

you would choose this option.
Cutting: If you have a cutting machine, you will need to cut holes in the
template material a little bigger than the rhinestone size you intend to use.
You can set an Allowance value, say 0.04mm, for rhinestones to easily fit
within the cut holes of the stencil.
Adjust cutting
allowance e.g.
0.04mm
Set an Overcut allowance (as a percentage) as necessary. This

determines extra distance the knife needs to travel to ensure a clean cut.
You may need to experiment with this setting depending on the cutting
machine you are using.
Set overcut
percentage
6 Set the Overlap Tolerance as necessary.

This defines the minimum allowable distance between stones. Once set, the
software will control the placement of the stones such that no stones will be
placed closer together than this value. See also Creating bling fills.
Set overlap
tolerance
7 Click the dropdown button in the Color field to access color controls for the
fill color.
Click to
select color
8 Select a color from the table or More Colors for a wider selection.
698
you are using.
Click an area to
select color

brightness

known
9 Repeat as many times as required to define a complete rhinestone palette for

your design.
Rhinestone shapes are now available for use in Object Properties or for
direct selection from the Bling Manual palette.
Rhinestone shapes
available for Bling Manual
Tip Click Save to save bling palette to the current template. You might
consider setting up a dedicated bling template. See also Working with design
templates.
Editing bling palettes

Use Bling > Bling Palette Editor to select and configure rhinestone shapes from a
pattern library.
The Bling Palette Editor lets you prepare a palette of rhinestones to use in
your design. Modify rhinestone shape, color, and dimensions and at any stage.
Changing rhinestones in the bling palette will cause the design window and
Object Properties dialog to update automatically.
To edit a bling palette
1 Click the Bling Palette Editor icon.
699
The Bling Palette Editor dialog opens. Fields are arranged in tabular form
so that parameters for each rhinestone type can be viewed at once. These
include Bling, Color, Size (mm), and Comment.
Change bling
types
Click to edit
bling colors
Adjust bling
dimensions
Tip Click the X button in the column header to remove any unwanted
rhinestones.
2 Edit bling colors and sizes as required.
The controls are summarized in the table below.
Control
Description
Bling
The droplist displays rhinestones available for use in runs and fills.
Circles, squares, stars, flowers and triangles (equilateral) have editable
width. All other shapes have both editable width and height.
Color
Change colors by clicking the drop-arrow and accessing the color

selection palette. Choose from a range of both standard and
non-standard colors, or mix your own.
Size1/Size2
These are editable fields which control bling dimensions. The units of
measurement are determined by the user. See also Setting
measurement units.
Comment
Comment is a free text field limited to a maximum of 128 characters.
Production
type
If you are using a cutting machine, you can adjust the Cutting Allowance
value for the rhinestones to easily fit in the cut holes in the stencil.
Overlap
tolerance
Adjust the minimum allowable distance between stones so you do not

have to scan through the design to find the overlapping rhinestones and
delete/adjust manually. See also Editing bling-fill objects.
More
Add another rhinestone to the palette.
Save
Save the palette to the file system for use in another session.
OK
Close the dialog, keeping the palette available in the current session.
Cancel
Close the palette without storing any of the changes.
700
Rhinestone shapes are now available for use in Object Properties or for
direct selection from the Bling Manual palette.
Rhinestone shapes
available for Bling Manual
Creating bling runs and fills

The Bling! feature provides tools for creating bling runs as well as fills. There
are two available types of bling run: Simple Run (same size stones) and
Pattern Run (different sizes following a regular pattern). Bling fill types include
Column Fill (straight grid, angled grid) and Contour Fill. The fill can include a
border, with or without a margin inset from the object outline. You even have
the option of digitizing individual rhinestone drops with the manual method.
Tip You can create offset objects from bling-fill objects. All the same options
are available as are available for embroidery objects, plus the ability to create
bling fills and runs.
Digitizing bling runs

Use Bling > Bling Run Auto to create a string of rhinestones along a digitized line
Use the Bling Run Auto method to create a string of rhinestones along a
digitized line. There are two available types of bling run: Simple Run (same size
stones) and Pattern Run (different sizes following a regular pattern). The
701
system automatically generates drops according to current settings. Digitize

lines as you would sequin runs. See also Creating sequin runs.
Simple bling run
Bling outline
Bling pattern run
Note The Backtrack/Repeat tool is enabled for bling-run objects. See

To digitize a bling run
1 Set up the bling palette for your design if you havent already done so. See
Setting up bling palettes for details.
2 Click the Bling Run Auto icon.
3 Digitize the line as you would for a normal run object left-click for corner
points, right-click for curve points. See also Creating outlines and details.
Press Enter
Digitize outline left-click

corner points, right-click
curve points
4 When you have finished digitizing the line, press Enter.

Rhinestones are automatically generated along the digitized line together
with their fixing stitches. Spacings can be individually adjusted. See Editing
bling-fill objects for details.
5 Double-click the object to view object properties.
702
The Object Properties dialog opens to the Bling Run tab.
Select run type

Bling run pattern editor: Hover
over bling row to display full
bling information of type, SS
(stone size) or actual size,
color name, shape and facet
Orient bling to object
outline
Position bling along

curve according to
selected option
View details of bling

used in selected
object
Controls available on the Bling Fill tab are summarized in the table below.
Control
Description
Pattern
Editor
Use to create bling run patterns. Click + in the pattern editor and select
the desired rhinestone shape from the dropdown list.
Positioning
Place rhinestones along the curve and adjust placement slightly in order
to meet selected criteria:
Exact: places bling along the curve at exactly the specified spacing.
Expand to fit: places as many bling as possible along each curve
segment where spacing is never less than specified. With this option
selected, there are always rhinestones at each cusp point.
Compact: non-circular rhinestones are placed in such a manner that the
minimal distance between them is equal to the specified spacing.
Manual: allows manual distribution of rhinestones along the curve.
Orientation
Place rhinestones in the border either relative to the object baseline or

at an absolute (fixed north) orientation.
Statistics
View the following information: type, SS (stone size), color, shape, count
(for the selected object). If multiple objects are selected, then bling
information will be displayed for all selected objects. You can re-order
the columns as needed.
703
6 Use the pattern settings to create simple or variegated bling runs.
7 Set the bling orientation to baseline or fixed angle.
Angle to baseline
Angle to horizontal line
Placing rhinestones manually

Use Bling > Bling Manual to manually digitize rhinestone drops along a digitized
line.
You have the option of digitizing individual rhinestone drops with the manual
method.
To place a rhinestone manually

1 Click Bling Manual and select the bling type you want to use from the
dropdown list in the Bling Palette to add details or create special spacings.
Click Bling Manual
Select rhinestone
704
2 Digitize individual rhinestones using the handle to adjust angles as you

digitize.
Use handle to
adjust angle
Press Enter
3 When you have finished digitizing, press Enter.
Creating bling fills

Use Bling > Bling Fill to digitize complex shapes (with or without holes) filled with
bling.
Activate Bling > Automatic Overlap Removal if you want to automatically remove
unwanted overlapping bling items from a bling object.
Activate Bling > No Automatic Overlap Removal if you dont want to automatically
remove overlapping bling items from a bling object.
Activate Bling > Highlight Bling Overlaps if you want to highlight overlapping bling
items in a bling object i.e. if you want to edit manually.
The Bling Fill feature provides a means of filling complex shapes with bling
arranged in a series of columns. Bling fill types include Column Fill (straight
grid, angled grid) and Contour Fill. The fill can include a border, with or without
a margin inset from the object outline. The object border can be made from
different or same rhinestones and is a property of the bling-fill object.
To create a bling fill

1 Click the Bling Fill button.
705
2 Digitize the control points for a closed object outline in the same way as for
a complex fill object.

You are prompted to create another boundary.
4 Press Enter twice to finish the object.
Bling-fill object with Column Fill type

and Follow Outlines enabled
5 Double-click the object to view object properties.
706
The Object Properties dialog opens to the Bling Fill tab.
Select fill type
Adjust fill angle

Shift fill in relation to
object outline
Select fill pattern type
Force fill to follow

object outlines
Fill pattern editor: Hover over
bling row to display full bling
information of type, SS (Stone
Size) or actual size, color
name, shape and facet
Add border to
selected bling-fill
object
Orient bling to
object outline
Set margin between bling

border and fill
Border pattern editor: Hover
over bling row to display full
bling information of type, SS
(Stone Size) or actual size,
color name, shape and facet
View details of bling

used in selected
objects
Controls available on the Bling Fill tab are summarized in the table below.
Control
Description
Fill type
Available fill types include: Column Fill, Contour Fill. Respectively, these
fill a shape with columns along which patterns are repeated, or contours
where patterns are repeated along a contoured path.
Layout
Bling-fill objects exist in one of two layout states: Auto and Manual. In
the Auto state, bling fills are automatically re-generated whenever an
object is scaled or reshaped. In the Manual state, the bling count does
not change during transformations. See also Modifying bling objects.
Angle
Changes the angle of the column fill. This is only applicable to Column
Fill.
Shift
Moves the entire fill pattern in relation to the object outline. This can be
used to achieve a more even fill placement. Acceptable values are
between 0.5.
Follow
Outlines
Expands the space between bling in each line of fill in order to follow the
object outline. This results in a stronger outline demarcation. It is only
applicable to Column Fill and works in conjunction with borders. See
Adding bling borders for details.
707
Control
Description
Pattern
Editor
Use to create bling patterns as either single-line or multi-line patterns.

Create patterns by clicking + in the pattern editor and selecting bling
from the palette. Multi-line patterns are created similarly, but each time
the number of lines increases, a new tab is added to the pattern editor.
This allows a new pattern to be added.
Line spacing Set the distance between the currently active line tab and the next line
in the pattern. This can be the same or different for each and every line.
By default, this value is the same for each.
Border
When checked, this adds a border to any selected bling-fill object. You
can also create a pattern for the border similarly to single-line patterns
for bling fills.
Margin
Add a margin to rhinestones forming the border. Smaller border margins

result in a larger number of rhinestones in the fill.
Orientation
Place bling in the border either relative to the object baseline or at an

absolute (fixed north) orientation.
Statistics
View the following information: type, SS (stone size), color, shape, count
(for the selected object). If multiple objects are selected, then bling
information will be displayed for all selected objects. You can re-order
the columns as needed.
6 Select the fill type you want to use Column Fill or Contour Fill.
Column Fill type
Contour Fill type
7 Adjust angles and shift as required these settings are only available with
Column Fill.
Angle: 0, Shift: 0.00
8 Use pattern settings to create simple or multiline bling fills:
708
For a simple fill, set the fill type to Simple and adjust pattern as desired.
Simple fill 1 shape
Simple fill 2 shapes
Simple fill 3 shapes
For a more complex, variegated fill, set the fill type to Multiline and adjust
pattern for each line as desired.
Set required number of

pattern lines
Scroll between lines
Edit line pattern as

desired
9 Adjust line spacing settings as required.
Contour Fill
Line Spacing: 1mm
Contour Fill
Line Spacing: 3mm
Contour Fill
Line Spacing: 5mm
10 Add borders as required. See Adding bling borders for details.
709
Tip By default, Automatic Overlap Removal is selected in order to

automatically remove unwanted items from overlapping bling objects.
Choose another option if you want to manually edit rhinestone overlaps.
No Automatic Overlap Removal
Highlight Bling Overlaps
Automatic Overlap Removal
Note Bling overlaps are determined by the Overlap Tolerance setting. This
defines the minimum allowable distance between stones. See also Setting up
bling palettes.
Adding bling borders

Like sequin fills, bling fills can also include a border, with or without a margin,
inset from the digitized object outline. The object border can be made from a
different or same rhinestone type and is a property of the object. You can add
borders to existing bling fill objects or while you are digitizing.
To add a border or changing border properties

1 Select the bling-fill object.
2 Tick the Border checkbox.
Add border to
selected bling-fill
object
Edit border
pattern as desired
710
3 Use pattern settings to create simple or variegated bling borders.

4 Select the bling margin as required.
A border margin is created by adding an offset to each individual bling item
in the border. Smaller border margins result in a larger number of rhinestones
in the fill as shown.
Modifying bling objects

Bling-fill objects can be scaled and reshaped like any embroidery object.
Reshaping also provides a means for curve lines and fill angle. When reshaping
a bling-run object, you can reshape the run line. The Bling! toolset also provides
tools for editing selected rhinestones individually or as a group within an object.
Transforming bling-fill objects

handles.
Bling-fill objects can be scaled and transformed like any embroidery object with
one difference. Bling-fill objects exist in one of two layout states: Auto and
Manual. In the Auto state, bling fills are automatically re-generated whenever
an object is scaled or reshaped. In the Manual state, the bling count does not
change during transformations. See also Arranging, Scaling & Transforming
Objects.
711
To transform a bling-fill object
Select the bling-fill object and check the Layout setting.
Check layout
state
Scale as desired.
Layout: Manual
Bling count unchanged
Layout: Auto
Bling fill regenerated
Similarly, sheer as desired.
Layout: Manual
Bling count unchanged
Layout: Auto
Bling fill regenerated
Reshaping bling-fill objects

handles.
Use Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to reshape selected bling
run objects.
When reshaping a bling-fill object you are able to reshape object outlines in the
normal way. When Column Fill is applied, you can graphically change the fill
angle and curve line as well.
Tip When reshaping a bling-run object, you can reshape the run line like any
other outline object.
712
To reshape a bling-fill object

1 Select the bling-fill object.
2 Click the Reshape icon or press the H key.

Control points appear around the object outline. If column fill is selected, two
other control bars appear one (orange handles) to control fill angle, and the
other (yellow handles) to control curve lines.
Curve line control bar
Reshape control points
Fill angle control bar
3 Use the control points to reshape the outline in the normal way.
In this case, we adjust the outline only slightly to improve the bling fill
coverage.
Adjust outline to
improve fill coverage
4 Adjust fill angle control as desired.
713
The control bar is displayed with orange handles. As you move the bar, the
Object Properties dialog updates accordingly.
Drag orange bar to

adjust fill angle
5 Adjust curve line control as desired.

Right or left-click anywhere along the line to add curve or angle points to the
line and position as desired.
Click to create curve or

angle point
Note Curve line adjustments have no effect on object properties.
Editing bling-fill objects

Use Bling > Bling Edit to edit selected rhinestones individually or as a group within
an object.
Activate Bling > Automatic Overlap Removal if you want to automatically remove
unwanted overlapping bling items from a bling object.
Activate Bling > No Automatic Overlap Removal if you dont want to automatically
remove overlapping bling items from a bling object.
Activate Bling > Highlight Bling Overlaps if you want to highlight overlapping bling
items in a bling object i.e. if you want to edit manually.
The Bling! toolset provides tools for editing selected rhinestones individually or
as a group within an object. The following operations are applicable to bling run,
bling fill, and bling manual objects.
To edit a bling-fill object
1 Select the bling-fill object and click the Bling Edit icon.
714
Selection handles change accordingly.
Select rhinestones individually within the object.

Use the Ctrl key to select multiple rhinestones.
Delete or reposition selected rhinestones as desired.

Select one or more rhinestones and right-click to replace by means of the
popup menu.
Use the same popup menu to delete or add rhinestones to the bling object.
These operations are treated as manual edits. The objects layout status is
automatically changed to Manual. This means that bling count does not
change during object transformations. See Transforming bling-fill objects for
details.
715
Tip By default, Automatic Overlap Removal is selected in order to

automatically remove unwanted items from overlapping bling objects.
Choose another option if you want to manually edit rhinestone overlaps.
No Automatic Overlap Removal
Highlight Bling Overlaps
Automatic Overlap Removal
Note Bling overlaps are determined by the Overlap Tolerance setting. This
defines the minimum allowable distance between stones. See also Editing
bling palettes.
Converting objects to bling

Any fill object Input A, B, Fusion or Complex can be converted to a bling-fill
object. Similarly, any outline object - Run, Triple Run, etc can be converted to
bling-run.
To convert an object to bling
Right-click a selected fill object and select Convert > Convert to Bling Fill.
Alternatively, click the Bling Fill button on the Bling toolbar.
716
Simillary right-click a selected outline object and select Convert > Convert
to Bling Run.
Tip You can also create objects with the Freehand Embroidery tools which
can be converted to bling-fill objects.
Creating bling text

Three techniques exist to create bling text.
To create bling text
Create an embroidery lettering object and convert to Bling Run or Bling Fill.
717
Create a TrueType object and convert to Bling Run or Bling Fill.
Create a lettering object in Graphics mode, change to Embroidery mode,

use Pickout Run to trace the letters, and convert to Bling Run.
Select all objects and

apply Pickout Run
718
PART VII
DESIGN PROCESSING &
PRODUCTION
Design processing and encoding involve all the important, back-end operations
of embroidery design and manufacture. This is where you actually output your
designs to machine, disk, printer, cutter, and so on. For this, you will need an
understanding of embroidery file types as well as different machine formats.
Depending on your setup, you will also need an understanding of traditional
storage media such as embroidery disks.
Printing designs
This section describes how to print designs in Graphics mode as well as how to
create production worksheets and approval sheets. It also explains how to send
designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as images.
Sending appliqu shapes to printer and cutter are also covered. See Printing
Designs for details.
Outputting designs for machine
This section describes how to stitch designs out with the Stitch Manager and with
Connection Manager utilities. It also explains how to save designs for machine,
how to read and write to embroidery disk. See Outputting Designs for details.
Multi-decoration file export
This section deals with exporting multi-decoration files as well as outputting
bling templates. It also covers cutting appliqu shapes. See Multi-Decoration File
Export for details.
Reading files of different formats
This section describes the different conversion options for opening and saving
stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details about the processing
of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as well as reassigning colors
to both stitch and Melco CND files. See Reading Files of Different Formats for
details.
Hooping designs
This section deals with selecting and centering hoops, both manually and
automatically. It also covers defining and editing custom hoops. See Hooping
Designs for details.
719
Machine formats
This section describes how to select a machine format for a design and output it
using other formats. It also explains how to customize machine formats to meet
your machines specific requirements. See Machine Formats for details.
Par t VII Design Processing & Produc tion
720
Chapter 32
Printing Designs
From the same design file, you can output a production worksheet for the
embroidery machine operator. Designers frequently want to distribute their
designs for viewing in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise, with or without
fabric or product backgrounds. EmbroideryStudio allows you to customize
information in the format you require for production worksheets and/or approval
sheets. You can specify the data to print, graphics to include, zoom factor, and
general options such as company name. You can use a color printer or plotter to
produce your worksheets.
The printing capability also allows you to:
Personalize worksheet with company name and logo.

Display assigned hoop.
Visualize on selected fabric/garment.
Include selected colorways.
Print approval sheets with or without the product description. Optionally, email
production worksheets in PDF format with the embroidery file as an attachment
in a specified format e.g. EMB or DST, etc.
This section describes how to print designs in Graphics mode as well as how to
create production worksheets and approval sheets. It also explains how to send
designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as images.
Sending appliqu shapes to printer and cutter are also covered.
721
Printing designs in Graphics mode

To send a multi-decoration design to production, you generally print the digital
art design before stitching the embroidery. To do this, you first need to hide the
embroidery because you dont want it printing on the digital art printer.
menu.
To print a design in Graphics mode
1 Switch to Graphics mode. See Switching design modes for details.
2 Toggle off Show Embroidery to hide any embroidery objects. See Displaying
graphics and embroidery for details.
3 Click the Print icon on the Standard toolbar.
The Print dialog opens.
4 Adjust print settings as required and click Print Preview button to preview.
Otherwise click Print button to print.
The design is printed with or without embroidery objects showing depending
on whether the Show Embroidery button is toggled on or off.
5 To sew embroidery over top of the printed design, switch to Embroidery
mode and toggle off Show Graphics. See Stitching designs with Stitch
Manager for details.
Stitching should align on

garment with digitally
printed part of design
Tip Make sure you align the needle on the machine with a manually digitized
start and end point to ensure that stitching aligns perfectly on the garment
with the digitally printed part of the design. See Setting automatic start and
end points for details.
Chapter 3 2 Printing Designs
722
Printing reports in Embroidery mode

The production worksheet is the link between designer and embroidery machine
operator. It contains a design preview as well as essential production
information, including the design size, the color sequence and any special
instructions. You can customize production worksheets before printing. You can
also print multiple colorways, icons of color blocks, and backgrounds.
Note If certain thread colors are not available on your printer, they may be
mapped to a different color, including white. If a color is mapped to white, it will
be invisible on the worksheet. Print the design in TrueView color, or black and
white, or turn off color mapping. See your printer manual for more information.
Printing or plotting worksheets

Use Standard > Print to print production worksheets for the current design using
the current settings.
Create a hard copy of the production worksheet using a printer or plotter. Set
worksheet and printer options before you print, or use the current options.
Tip Preview the production worksheet before you print to check whether it is
correct. See Previewing production worksheets for details.
To print or plot worksheets
2 Select File > Print.
723
Click to
select/customize
report
Click to preview
worksheet
3 Select the printer or plotter you want to use, and enter the number of copies
of the worksheet you require.
4 To select a report type, click the Options button.
The Print Options dialog opens.
Select tab to
customize
report details
Select report
type
5 Select a report type in the Print pane.

Multiple reports can be batched as part of the same print run. Tick the
checkbox next to each report you require. Options include:
Option
Purpose
Approval Sheet
This report is intended for the customer, not production staff. Its
basic function is to display designs in TrueView with or without a
product or fabric background. Customers can see what they are
ordering and approve accordingly.
Production
Worksheet
This report provides complete production information for

production staff. All production-related information, such as
bobbin length, design size, garment fabric, etc, is provided.
724
Option
Purpose
Product
Summary
This report provides two summary tables of the design and

associated colorways a Colorway Summary table together
with a Design Summary table. You can also include color blocks
in the Colorway Summary table by selecting the Show Colors in
Summary option in the the Stop Sequence tab. See also
Customizing worksheet information.
Color Film
This report provides color block information so that production

staff can see each stitch color in separate blocks according to
the sequence they will be stitched out.
Appliqu Patterns This report shows appliqu patterns cutter information

isolated from the design. This tells the operator which appliqu
pieces are to be included in design. See also Printing appliqu
patterns.
6 Select associated tabs and change default settings as required. Tabs vary with
selected report type. Options include:
Tab
Purpose
General
Click to access report layout settings.
Colorways
Click to access colorway settings for the current design.
Zoom
Click to set the zoom factor for the design preview and physical
printout.
Design
Click to set design appearance on the printout, including

multi-decoration components.
Info
Click to further filter information included on product worksheets.
Blocks
Click to select production information available on the Design

Properties > Information tab for inclusion in the printout.
Stop Sequence
Click to select production information available on the Design

Properties > Stop Sequence tab for inclusion in the printout.
Note The Production Worksheet actually provides a superset of all options

available on these tabs. See Customizing worksheet print options for details.
7 Click OK to close the Print Options dialog.
8 If you are using a plotter, click Properties, and set pen colors to correspond
with the thread colors in the design.
Note Refer to your plotters manual for information on setting up pen colors.
725
9 Click Preview if you want to inspect the document before sending to print.
Design Summary
table
Colorway Summary
table
10 Click OK to proceed.
Customizing worksheet print options

Customize production worksheet options to show the information you want in
the format you require. You can specify the data to print, graphics to include,
zoom factor, and general options such as company name. You can use a color
printer or a plotter to produce production worksheets. If you are using a color
printer, you can print in TrueView, draft or high resolution.
To customize worksheet print options
1 To access the Print Options dialog, select File > Print Preview.
2 Click Options.
Select report
type
Select tab to
customize
3 Select Production Worksheet or other report type as required. See also

Printing or plotting worksheets.
The Production Worksheet actually provides a superset of options available
for all report types.
726
4 Click the General tab to access report layout settings.
Set general
options
Customizable options include:

Option
Purpose
Print in English
Useful when printing to plotters where the device driver does not
support the character set you require. Deselecting the checkbox
prints the report in the language of the operating system.
Print design
filename
Include the filename of the current design in the header of the

product report.
Text/heading font Use to access the system font dialog. Set parameters for all text
and headings appearing in the product report e.g. Arial for print,
Verdana for online reports.
Margins
Add a margin between the edge of the page and the content of the
report. The page size itself is set via the Print dialog. See also
Printing or plotting worksheets.
Company
Includes your company name on the report. Key in the name and/or
attach a company logo.
Customer
Key in the customer name. The name is recorded for future use.
Access it via the dropdown list.
727
5 Click the Colorways tab to access colorway settings for the current design.
See also Setting up colorways.
Set colorway
display for
printout

Option
Purpose
Current
Prints the design in the current colorway only.
All
Scales the design to fill the available space on the worksheet.
Selected
Prints multiple colorways. When selected, available colorways

are selectable from the list. See Printing multiple colorways for
details.
6 Click the Zoom tab to set the zoom factor for the design preview and physical
printout.
Set design zoom

factor for current
printout

Option
Purpose
1.0
Shows design at actual size.
Show All Design
Scales design to fill available space on the printout.
728
Option
Purpose
Show All Product Scales whole product to fill available space on the printout. See
also Visualizing products.
Custom
Sets a specific zoom factor.
7 Click the Design tab to set design appearance on the printout.
Set design
appearance in
current printout

Option
Purpose
Outlines
Include design outlines. See also Viewing outlines and stitches.
Stitches
Include stitches. See also Viewing outlines and stitches.
Needle points
Include needle points. See also Viewing needle points, connectors

and functions.
Connectors
Include connectors used in design. See also Viewing needle

points, connectors and functions.
Functions
Include machine functions. See also Viewing needle points,

connectors and functions.
Note: Use this option to diplay sequins.
Bitmaps
Include bitmaps (backdrops). See also Digitizing with Bitmaps.
Vectors
Include vectors. See also Digitizing with Vectors.
Bling
Include bling objects. See also Bling Digitizing.
Hoop
Include selected hoop. See also Hooping Designs.
TrueView
Print design in TrueView. When selected, the Draft Quality option

becomes available.
Background
Prints design with colored background or fabric color. See also

Customizing backgrounds.
Color behind product: Include background color behind selected
product. See also Visualizing products.
Crop to design: Crop any background to the extends of the design,
rather than the full page.
Extents box
Places an outline around the design to delineate its full extents.
729
Option
Purpose
Start/end
crosshair
Prints a cross hair across the design indicating design start and end
points. See also Setting automatic start and end points.
Standard
Resets printing options to default values.
As Window
Sets printing options as per current settings in the design window.
8 Click the Info tab to further filter information included on product

worksheets. See also Customizing worksheet information.
Set information to
include on
production
worksheets

Option
Purpose
Full
Invokes further tabs allowing a full printout of available design and

production information.
Short
Includes only default header and footer information usually used

in conjunction with full size design in order to visualize on garment.
See also Zoom tab.
Stop sequence
Invokes Stop Sequence tab and includes stop sequence

information on the worksheet. See Stop Sequence below.
None
Eliminates design information altogether and suppresses display of

default header and footer information again, can be used in
conjunction with full size design in order to visualize on garment.
See also Zoom tab.
Use left side
Displays the information column on the left side of the page (rather
than the default right-hand side).
9 Click the Blocks tab to select production information available on the Design
Properties > Information tab for inclusion in the printout. See Viewing
730
design information in EmbroideryStudio for details. See also Customizing

worksheet information.
Set detailed
production
information for
inclusion
10 Click the Stop Sequence tab to select production information available on

the Design Properties > Stop Sequence tab for inclusion in the printout.
See Viewing design information in EmbroideryStudio for details. See also
Customizing worksheet information.
Set stop
sequence
information for
inclusion
Tip Tick Show Colors in Summary option to include actual color samples
in the production colorway summary table. See also Printing multiple
colorways.
731
11 Click OK.
Setting design options

The Print Options dialog allows you to print all types of multi-decoration
supported by EmbroideryStudio, either separately or in combination.
732
Multi-decoration components
Options for selectively showing/hiding multi-decoration components can be
found under the Design tab. These include embroidery components, print
components, sequins, and bling.
Select embroidery
elements to display
Tick to display sequins (and
other machine functions)
Tick to display print
components
Tick to include bling
components
Appliqu patterns
A specific report type exists for selectively showing/hiding appliqu patterns.
See Printing appliqu patterns for details.
733
Embroidery components
To display embroidery components, select from amongst Outlines, Stitches,
Needle Points, Connectors, TrueView in the Design tab. For TrueView to
display, you must also have Stitches selected.
Print only
To display print components only, select between Bitmaps and Vectors in the
Design tab.
734
Sequin components
To display sequin components, select Functions in the Design tab. A sequin
production summary shows color, size and quantities by sequin device as well as
a summary on the first page.
Bling components
To display bling components, select Bling in the Design tab. The bling
production summary shows stone colors, sizes, and quantities as well as a
summary on the first page.
Note When bling is output as multiple files, the production worksheet shows
which bling are in which file. It also shows a bling film (like a color film) for each
of the output files showing which bling is in each. See also Outputting bling
templates.
735
Design backgrounds
The Design tab also provides options to display design backgrounds i.e.
fabrics, garments, and/or hoops. See also Customizing backgrounds. See also
Hooping Designs.
Customizing worksheet information

You can further customize production worksheet information when the Full
Information option is the selected. See also Customizing worksheet print
options.
To customize worksheet information
2 Click Options.
3 In the Info tab, select Full.
736
4 Click the Info tab to further filter information included on product

worksheets. See also Customizing worksheet information.
Further customize
production
worksheet
information
5 In the Blocks tab, select the design statistics to include on the worksheet:
Option
Purpose
Left / right / up /
down
Depending on where the design start/end point has been set, these
figures indicate the distance from that point. See also Hooping
Designs.
End X / Y
The coordinates of the last stitch. See also Setting automatic start
and end points.
Max / min stitch
The maximum and minimum stitch lengths, and maximum jump

stitch length in the design.
Thread chart type The name of the thread chart used in the design. See also
Assigning threads to color palettes.
Thread usage
Metrage of thread required per color.
Total bobbin
Total meterage of bottom (bobbin) thread required to stitch out the

design.
737
Here is a sample production worksheet with all options selected:
Left / Right / Up / Down
End X / Y
Max / Min Stitch
Thread Chart Type
Thread Usage
Total Bobbin
6 In the Stop Sequence tab, select the statistics for each color block:
Option
Purpose
Stitch count
Number of stitches per color.
Needle number
The needle number stitching each color block.
Brand
Brand name of threads used.
Element name
User-defined name to identify each color block. See Naming

design elements for details.
Show colors in
summary
Includes color samples in a colorway summary table. See also

Printing multiple colorways.
738
Here is a sample production worksheet with all options selected:
Stitch Count
Needle Number
Brand
Element Name
Note The Show Colors in Summary option works in conjunction with the
Production Summary option in the Info tab. This option prints color blocks
in a Colorway Summary table. See Customizing worksheet print options for
details.
Colors displayed
in Colorway
Summary table
739
7 Select the Use Left Side checkbox in Info tab to include the full information
column on the left side.
By default, this column displays on the right of the page.
8 Click OK.
Printing multiple colorways

You can print your design in the current or multiple colorways. See also Setting
up colorways.
To print multiple colorways
2 Click Options.
Select Selected
Hold down Ctrl to
select multiple items
3 Select Selected to print multiple colorways.

4 Select one or more colorways from the list.

Alternatively, select All to print out all the colorways in the design.
5 In the Design tab, select Background if you want to include the background
or fabric color with the colorway.
Select to include
background on
worksheet
Tip Select Crop to Design to crop the space around the design.
6 Click OK.
740
7 Click OK in the Print dialog or Print Now in the Print Preview dialog.
Tip If the Production Summary option in the Print Options dialog is

selected, the Colorway Summary table is printed together with the Design
Summary table. You can also print color blocks in the Colorway Summary
table by selecting the Show Colors in Summary option in the Customize
dialog. See also Customizing worksheet information.
Design Summary
table
Colorway Summary
table
Printing color film

The Color Film report option lets you print color blocks in the design as they
appear in the Color-Object List. Consecutive objects of the same color form a
single color block. See also Selecting objects by Color-Object List.
To print a color film
2 Click Options.
741
Select Color
Film checkbox
3 Select the Color Film checkbox.

4 Click OK.
Separate color films are printed for selected colorways on the last page of the
worksheet. See also Printing multiple colorways.
Sending designs as email attachments

Use Standard > Open to send a design as an email attachment.
You can attach designs to emails from the design window or via the Open dialog.
To send designs as email attachments
1 Do one of the following:
With the design open in the design window, select File > Send, or
742
Click the Open icon to display the Open dialog. Select the file to send,
then right-click it. The popup menu appears. Select Send To > Mail
Recipient.
Your default email system is launched and a new email created with the
design file attached.
Select Send To >

Mail Recipient
2 Enter mailing details and send.
Outputting designs as images

Once a design is digitized in EmbroideryStudio, you can output it as a vector
file. This can be downloaded to a laser cutter in Graphics mode through
CorelDRAW. This can serve various purposes such as appliqu cutting,
multimedia, screen printing, and so on. See also Printing designs in Graphics
mode.
Note For a full description of the CorelDRAW tools, refer to the electronic User
Guide available via the Windows Start > Programs group. Alternatively, use
the onscreen help available from the Help menu.
Designers frequently want to distribute their designs for viewing in real colors,
in TrueView or otherwise, with or without fabric backgrounds. This might be for
stock design sales purposes, for approval of digitized designs, or for
presentation on the web or in catalogs. EmbroideryStudio lets you save both
design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct. See also
Sending designs as email attachments.
To output a design as an image
1 Open the embroidery design.
2 Select File > Capture Design Bitmap.
743
The Capture Design Bitmap dialog opens.
Select image
selection option
Select Output
option
Select to include
background color or
fabric
Select Output
format
3 Select a Selection option:

Option
Purpose
Whole Design
(1:1)
Captures the screen image in a ratio of 1:1.
Current design
window
Captures the screen image at the currently selected zoom factor.
Custom
Lets you specify a capture area. After clicking OK, you are
prompted to enter a rectangle origin and rectangle corner to
define the area to capture.
Click to enter
rectangle origin
Click to enter
rectangle corner
Custom option only

specified area is captured
4 Select an Output option:

Option
Purpose
Save to Disk
Lets you save the screen capture to disk. After clicking OK, the
Save Capture Screen dialog opens, allowing you to select a
location, name and format for the captured design image.
Send via Email
Lets you send the screen capture as email. After clicking OK, a
new email message opens with the image attached.
Both Save and

Send
Lets you both save to hard disk and send as an email attachment.
5 Select an output format for the screen image from the dropdown list BMP,
JPG, etc.
6 Select Include Background/Fabric to include the background color or
fabric with the screen capture.
744
7 Click OK.
Image captured as
Whole Design (1:1) with
background fabric
Printing appliqu patterns

Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each
appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. One
copy of the placement outlines is printed to show how their positions relate to
each other. This copy is printed to fit one page. A second copy of the placement
outlines is printed at 100% scaling, with each outline separated for use in cutting
the fabric.
Note Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the Auto
Appliqu tool. See Appliqu Digitizing for details.
Tip You can also extract appliqu shapes from a design to output to a cutter or
to a separate file. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.
To print an appliqu pattern
1 Select File > Print Preview.
2 Click Options icon.
745
Print Options dialog opens.
Select appliqu
patterns report
3 Select Appliqu Patterns report type.

A specific report type exists for selectively showing/hiding appliqu patterns.
This shows fabric, fabric name, and yardage. It also shows a summary on the
first page.
4 Set General options as required. See Customizing worksheet print options
for details.
5 Click OK.
Each appliqu pattern is numbered according to the stitching sequence.
6 Click Print Now.
746
Chapter 33
Outputting Designs
You can output embroidery designs for actual stitchout in a variety of ways
sending directly to machine for stitching, or saving to specific machine formats
and/or to embroidery disk.
EmbroideryStudio provides alternative means for sending designs directly to

embroidery machine for stitching. Depending on your software options, you can
send designs to machine using either Stitch Manager or ES Machine Manager.
Stitch Manager is described in this section. ES Machine Manager is described in
a separate ES Machine Manager Supplement.
Tip From the same design file, you can also output a production worksheet for
the embroidery machine operator. Designers frequently want to distribute their
designs for viewing in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise, with or without
fabric backgrounds. In EmbroideryStudio you can save both design images and
production worksheets to disk or email them direct. See Printing reports in
Embroidery mode for details.
This section describes how to stitch designs out with the Stitch Manager and with
Connection Manager utilities. It also explains how to save designs for machine,
how to read and write to embroidery disk.
Stitching designs with Stitch Manager

Use Standard > Stitch to Stitch Manager to send a design to a machine for
stitching.
747
Once a design is complete, you can stitch it out to any supported embroidery
machine without changing the original design format via Stitch Manager. If a
selected machine does not support a particular function included in the design,
it is simply ignored. When you send several designs in a row, they are
automatically queued and stitched out one at a time. See also Connecting
machines.
Note Some newer machines are supplied with propriety connection software
e.g. Janome MB-4 and Barudan LEM. EmbroideryStudio supports connection to
these machines via the Stitch to Connection Manager option. See also
Setting up machines for direct connection.
To stitch a design with Stitch Manager
1 Ensure that the target machine is correctly connected to your PC see your
machine documentation for details.
Note Before you can send designs for stitching, you must configure the
machine in EmbroideryStudio. See also Setting up machines for direct
connection.
2 Open a design.
3 Click the Stitch to Stitch Manager icon.
The Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog opens.
Select embroidery
machine
Select machine
format
4 From the Machine Identification list, select an embroidery machine.

Click Setup to modify the machines settings as required. See also Setting up
machines for direct connection.
5 From the Output as Machine format list, select the correct machine format.
Click Values to modify the machine format settings as required. See
Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.
Note This field is automatically updated if the target machine format is
different to the current format. Select the Prompt Changing Machine
Format checkbox if you want to be prompted when the Output as Machine
Format field updates.
6 Click OK to return to the Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog.
7 Click OK.
The Stitch Manager dialog opens listing the files to be stitched out.
Cha pter 33 Outputting Designs
748
Tip To delete a design from the queue, select it and click Cancel.
Stitching designs with Connection Manager

Use Standard > Stitch to Connection Manager to connect to supported machines
via proprietary machine software.
Some newer machines are supplied with propriety connection software e.g.
Janome MB-4 and Barudan LEM. EmbroideryStudio supports connection to
these machines via the Stitch to Connection Manager option. To integrate
with EmbroideryStudio, the relevant software needs to be installed on the
same machine. Discuss with your machine supplier for details. See also
Connecting machines.
To stitch a design with Connection Manager
2 Open a design.
3 Click Stitch to Connection Manager.
The Stitch to Connection Manager dialog opens.
Select Connection
Manager
4 From the Connection Manager dropdown list, select the machine type or
relevant propriety connection management software for your particular
machine.
5 Click OK.
The Stitch to Connection Manager dialog closes and the design is passed
with the corresponding machine connection software. For details, refer to
your machine documentation.
Note If you choose to connect to a Barudan LEM server, the Setup button
becomes active. This allows you to set up a Watching Folder which the
Barudan LEM design server monitors for design files (U?? format) and
systematically converts to PRJ for machine communication. When you want
749
to stitch the design, the Stitch to Connection Manager tool saves the
design in Barudan stitch format to the Watching Folder.
Select Watching
Folder
Saving designs for machine

Different embroidery machines understand different languages. Each has its
own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch
a design, it must be in a format which can be interpreted by the machine. Stitch
or expanded designs are low-level formats for direct use by embroidery
machines. They contain only stitch coordinates and machine functions. They are
generally created on-the-fly when sending designs to machine. They can also be
output to embroidery disk. See Reading and writing to embroidery disk for
details. See also Supported Machine, File and Disk Types.
Saving designs in Melco CND format

You can save files to Melco CND format from EmbroideryStudio. Designs
originally created in EmbroideryStudio generally give the best results. Other
file types may not have all the data necessary for successful conversion. Some
stitch quality features, stitch types, and decorative fills and effects do not
convert well to CND format. If you intend to save a file in CND format, you
should only use input methods, stitch types and effects that are compatible with
Melco EDS-III software.
Note For details of how each CND stitch type is converted, see Conversion of
Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB.
EmbroideryStudio has two save as CND output options Superstar
Compatible and Output Tatami as Complex Fill. Superstar-compatible
machines do not have trimmers. The Output Tatami as Complex Fill option is
for controlling Turning Tatami fills.
Trim functions
If you want to stitch a design to a machine without trimmers, then set machine
values to not output Trim codes. Then digitize the design for manual trimming.
Early versions of CND do not support Melco Trim codes. In this case, set the
machine format values to output Trims as Jumps. See also Adjusting standard
machine format settings.
Turning Tatami fills
When you save to CND format, you need to specify how to convert turning
Tatami stitches. Objects with curving Tatami stitches e.g. Input A objects are
not supported by early versions of CND format. For Superstar-compatible
machines, turning Tatami stitches are simply converted to Walk stitches, the
EDS equivalent of Manual. For earlier machines, Turning Tatami fills need to be
converted to normal Tatami i.e. with a single stitch angle then to Normal Fill,
the EDS equivalent of normal Tatami.
750
To save designs in Melco CND format

2 Select Melco (CND) from the Files of Type list.
3 In the File name field, enter a name for the design.
4 Click Options.
The Save Options dialog opens.
Select required
option
5 Select the required option for converting Turning Tatami fills:

Option
Purpose
Superstar Compatible Converts Turning Tatami to Walk (EDS equivalent of Manual).

Complex Fill Tatami is output as Normal Fill (EDS equivalent
of Tatami).
Output Tatami as
Complex Fill
Converts Turning Tatami fills to normal Tatami i.e. with a

single stitch angle then to EDS Normal Fill.
Note These functions are also available when you send a CND design for
stitching.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Save.
Saving designs in CSD format

The CSD Save Option allows you to select between CSD Type I and Type II. Type
II was introduced in CS 1.2B software for the POEM machine. It is also used by
the Singer EU software for the POEM machine. Type II CSD files additionally
store the thread color RGB values and also an icon of the design. See also
Opening stitch files in EmbroideryStudio.
To save designs in CSD format
2 Select CSD from the Files of Type list.
3 In the File name field, enter a name for the design.
4 Click Options.
The Save Options dialog opens.
Select CSD file

type option
751
5 Select the required CSD file type option.

6 Click OK and then Save.
Reading and writing to embroidery disk

Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data format.
Embroidery disks, which have now largely replaced paper tape, are specially
formatted floppy disks used to transfer designs from computer to embroidery
machine. You can format embroidery disks and save designs to them from within
EmbroideryStudio. The format you use will depend on the selected embroidery
machine. You can also open designs from embroidery disk directly into
EmbroideryStudio.
Designs are generally stored in stitch data format, although Melco CND, for
example, is a condensed file format. You can open designs from embroidery
disks of various formats directly into EmbroideryStudio. Once read, you can
output designs without change, modify them and output them in the original
format, or save them as an EMB file. You can optionally convert them into
objects. After conversion, a design can be scaled and changed. See also Opening
stitch files in EmbroideryStudio.
This section describes how to read from and write embroidery design files to
embroidery disk.
Reading designs from embroidery disk

Use Standard > Embroidery Disk Open to open a design from embroidery disk.
You can open designs of other formats from specially formatted 1.44 Mb DS/HD
(Double-Sided High-Density) embroidery disks. See also Supported embroidery
disk formats.
To read designs from embroidery disk
1 Insert the embroidery disk in your computers floppy disk drive.
2 Click the Embroidery Disk Open icon.
752
The Open Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select drive
Select format
3 From the Look In list, select the floppy disk drive.

4 Select the disk format. Either:
Select the format from the Diskette Format list.

Select the Auto Detect checkbox and let EmbroideryStudio
automatically determine the format. This generally takes longer.
5 Click OK.
The Open From Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select design
type
6 From the Designs of Type list, select a design type.

Any designs saved on disk are listed in the panel. If no designs are listed,
make sure that the correct drive and disk format are selected.
Note If the Options button is available, you can set recognition options for
the design. See Opening Melco CND outline files, Opening stitch files with
object/outline recognition and Opening stitch files without object/outline
recognition.
7 Click Open.
Formatting embroidery disks

Embroidery disks must be formatted to suit the embroidery machine you intend
to use or the machine will not be able to read the design. Older computers
generally have a High Density 1.44 Mb drive. Most embroidery machines use
High Density disks so there is usually no problem with transferring designs. See
your embroidery machines manual for details of the appropriate disk type.
To format embroidery disks
1 Insert a 3.5" floppy disk of the correct density in your computers floppy disk
drive.
753
Note Use the disk type required by the embroidery machine, not the
computer.
2 Select File > Embroidery Disk > Format.
The Format Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select drive
Select format
3 From the Drive list, select the floppy disk drive.

4 From the Diskette Format list, select the required disk format.
5 Click OK.
A confirmation message appears.
The Format dialog opens.
Caution This is a Windows system dialog and may vary with the particular
operating system you are using.
7 From the Capacity list, select the disk storage capacity.
8 In the Format Options panel, select the full format option:
Quick Format erases all data from the disk but does not reformat it. Uncheck
the option to reformat a blank disk. See your Windows manual for details.
9 Click Start.
A progress bar appears. You are prompted when formatting is complete.
Note If you have trouble with formatting a Melco embroidery disk, check if
your floppy disk drive can read and write single density floppy disks.
Writing designs to embroidery disk

Use Standard > Embroidery Disk Save As to save a design to an embroidery disk.
754
Save designs to embroidery disk to stitch out on a specific machine. When you
save to a new format, the design is converted to encode the machine functions
and commands supported by the particular machine.
Note Embroidery disks must be correctly formatted before you save designs to
them. See Formatting embroidery disks for details.
To write designs to embroidery disk
1 Insert the embroidery disk in your computers floppy disk drive.
2 Click the Embroidery disk Save As icon.
The Save to Embroidery Disk dialog opens.
Select drive
Select format
3 From the Look In list, select the floppy disk drive.

4 Select the disk format. Either:
Select the format from the Diskette Format list.

Select the Auto Detect checkbox and let EmbroideryStudio
automatically determine the format.
Any designs already saved on disk are listed in the panel.
Note If the disk is not formatted, or its format is not correct, click Format.
See Formatting embroidery disks for details.
5 In the Design Name field, enter a name for the design.
6 In the Filename field, enter a name for the design file.
Enter design name
Enter file number
if required
Enter file name

Click to view or
modify settings
Enter machine
format and
design file type
7 If the Number field is enabled, enter a file number.

Not all machine formats require this information. This option is greyed out if
the file naming mechanism is not supported by the particular embroidery disk
type. Tajima uses a free-form file name, so both a numbering system and a
text file name system are supported, as seen in the dialog.
8 From the Machine Format list, select a machine format.
Some machines can read different formats. For example, some Tajima
machines can read Barudan as well as Tajima.
Tip To view or modify machine format settings, click Values. See Adjusting
standard machine format settings for details.
9 From the Design Type list, select the file type to save to embroidery disk.
Only one file type is generally available.
10 If available, select the Save Icon checkbox to include a thumbnail image of
the design with the design file.
755
This icon appears in the machine control panel during stitch-out.

11 Click Save.
Caution Wait until the light on the floppy disk drive stops flashing before
removing the disk.
756
Chapter 34
Multi-Decoration File Export
The Multi-Decoration File Export (MDFE) capability allows you to efficiently

produce output files for multi-decoration designs. This, in turn, helps to increase
the profitability of quantity 1 articles. MDFE allows you to output components
of a multi-decoration design for the various processes needed to produce a
finished article. It can provide:
Direct input to supported machines, as this is the most efficient method, or

A file format which can be used directly by the machines supporting software.
This section deals with exporting multi-decoration files as well as outputting

bling templates. It also covers cutting appliqu shapes.
Supported decoration processes

Apart from embroidery, EmbroideryStudio supports design output for a number
of related and sometimes complementary decoration processes or technqiues.
Namely, bling (rhinestone) designs, printed designs, as well as appliqu designs.
Bling designs
Bling, rhinestones, crystals, and glitz are interchangeable terms referring to
decorative objects placed on a garment or template. They are supplied in various
sizes, shapes, colors and materials. There are two basic processes for creating
bling designs:

Direct-to-garment
Hot-fix templates can be produced in two ways:
757
Rhinestone transfer: In a semi-automatic process, rhinestones are placed

directly onto transfer tape (or sheet) by machine e.g. IOline CrystalPress
and CAMS machines. The rhinestone design is then ready for heat transfer to
the final product e.g. a T-shirt.
Rhinestone template: This is the design layout on which the rhinestones are
initially placed prior to the actual rhinestone transfer. The template is created
by cutters or engravers. Rhinestones are placed onto the template by a
manual flood-fill process and then manually transferred to the rhinestone
transfer tape.
Direct-to-garment
Direct-to-garment is supported by various machines such as the
RhinestoneMachine.com Libero, Hirsch GemFix, Dairo Machine Company DK
series (in particular the DK2400Auto) and others.
Print designs
In the context of multi-decoration design, a portion may need to be output to a
printing process for inclusion on the article. This component may be referred to
as print or graphics. The most commonly used commercial printing processes
are:
Direct-to-garment (DTG)
Sublimation
Screen printing
Heat-transfer printing
Direct-to-garment
Direct-to-garment printing is handled like most other printing from a PC: The
print image is sent to the DTG printer through the Windows print manager via a
print driver. The image must have a transparent background for DTG printing.
DTG printing requires heat fixing to make the images washable.
Sublimation
Sublimation printing is similar to DTG printing but the process uses solid inks
which give a more even gradation of color compared to the liquid inks used in
DTG printing. With sublimation printing, inks are printed onto a release paper
and then transferred onto a fabric or other surface.
Sublimation means a change from a solid to gaseous state and back to a solid
without becoming liquid. Thus dye particles migrate from the paper as a gas, to
bond with a polymer fabric or other material and become solid again. The
transfer is effected using high heat (205C) and pressure, thus guaranteeing
that the image penetrates and becomes an integral part of the substrate.
Screen printing
Screen printing is a more complex process, requiring the creation of a screen for
each of the spot colors (Pantone) that make up the design. There may be
multiple screens for each spot color, depending on how the design is layered.
Heat-transfer printing
A fourth process, which is less likely to be used in the production of a printed
design for commercial use, employs heat transfer paper to which graphics are
printed. This is then heat-fixed to a garment using an iron or heat-press. The
process falls into the same category as printing. Printers that support heat
transfer media in most cases provide an automatic mirror function in the printer
Chapter 34 Mul ti-Deco ration File Expor t
758
driver as the image must be printed in reverse in order to be heat-transferred

to a garment.
Appliqu designs
Appliqu is a decoration or ornament made from cut pieces of one material being
applied to the surface of another. Pieces may be fixed to one another using an
embroidered border of satin, E or run stitch, depending on the desired effect.
Appliqu cutting is supported in EmbroideryStudio by outputting vectors that
describe the appliqu material. The information can be sent directly to a
supported Windows cutter or output to printed templates for manual cutting of
appliqu shapes.
Accessing the feature

The Multi-Decoration File Export (MDFE) capability allows you to output
components of a multi-decoration design for the various processes needed to
produce a finished article. It can provide:
Direct input to required machines, as this is the most efficient method, or

A file format which can be used directly by the machines supporting software.
The Multi-Decoration File Export feature is accessed via the following menu
item in both Embroidery and Graphics modes:
File > Multi-Decoration File Export

For machines that are supported via direct connection, there are two menu
items:
File > Cut Appliqu

File > Output Bling Template
Tip In order to output all components of a multi-decoration design, depending
on the type and brand of machines used in its production, it may be necessary
to use both the MDFE and one or both of the above commands.
759
Exporting multi-decoration files

EmbroideryStudio allows all components of a design requiring different
production processes to be exported as file formats for use with any software
that controls the process or machine.
Tip Bling designs can be saved to earlier versions of EMB. The resultant files,
however, will convert bling objects to vector objects comprising individual bling
vectors as well as object outlines.
Exporting design components

The Multi-Decoration File Export (MDFE) capability allows you to export the
different file formats involved in a multi-decoration design with a single
command option. The system recognizes whether a design component is
embroidery, graphic, appliqu, or bling. It shows each component in an export
dialog with a list of corresponding file types to choose from.
Note This procedure is carried out when there is no direct support for the target
machine or production process. If the printer, appliqu, or bling machine is
directly supported, this procedure is not required. For example, cutting
appliqus or outputting bling templates have their own associated procedures.
See also Outputting bling templates. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.
To export design components
1 Open or create a multi-decoration design.
Multi-decoration components must exist in the design for one or more
embroidery, graphics, appliqu, or bling components.
2 Select File > Export Multi-Decoration Files.
760
The system displays the Multi-Decoration File Export dialog.
Output all available

design objects
Optionally, select
specific design
components
Adjust export location

as necessary
Name export files if

different to design file
name
3 Select Export Current Design if you want to output all available design
objects.
This is the default option and, unless you have pre-selected certain objects
for inclusion, the only option. See also Exporting selected objects.
4 Optionally, select the specific design components you want to output by
ticking the relevant checkbox in the Elements pane.
5 If you have selected Bling as one of your export components, optionally
select Multiple Files or Single File.
When bling objects are present in a design and Multiple Files is selected,
different bling types i.e. different by size, color, and/or shape will be
output to separate files. Multiple file output is important in the context of the
manual flood-fill method of creating rhinestone templates. See also
Supported decoration processes.
2
1
761
6 Depending on your cutting machine, you may want to export Cutting

Outlines Only, again singly or in multiple files.
Bling objects exported in this way retain color information and have hairline
width.
7 For each selected component, select required file types from the associated
droplist. See Supported file formats for details.
If you select an embroidery format with options that can be set, the
associated Options button is enabled.
Tip For bling, you can choose AI format for semi-automatic machines. For
any other cutting machines, you can save directly to CDR format.
8 Optionally, click the Options button to set available options for each selected
file type.
If no options are set, the system uses default options for each file format.
Tip If a selected file type is PNG, design components need to be exported
with transparency on. Defaults for PNG are as follows:
Color mode: RGB color (24Bit)
Transparency: On
Anti-alias: On
Maintain aspect ratio: On
Resolution: 300 DPI
9 Select an export location for your multi-decoration files:
Select Export to set locations (the default) if you have preset different
locations for different files. In some production environments, each file is
placed in a specific location where it can be used by the operator of that
process. See Setting export locations for details.
Select Export to if you want to specfiy a location for all files e.g. external
USB stick. Folders are rarely changed once established, but occasionally
they may need to be adjusted or temporarily overridden.
10 Optionally, enter a filename to be used for exporting the selected
multi-decoration components in the Design name field.
If no filename is entered, the system will use the design filename by default.
See also File naming conventions.
11 Click the Export button to execute the multi-decoration file export.
The system writes or attempts to write the selected multi-decoration
components of the indicated file types to the selected location/s.
762
If no file types have been selected for the available multi-decoration

components, the Locations dialog will display. You can set default file
types at this stage or cancel out. See also Setting export locations.
If files have the same file extension and location, filenames will be created
with a component suffix and message box displayed. See also File naming
conventions.
If a file/s already exists in the target folder/s, the system will display a
message giving you the option to overwrite, skip the file/s, or cancel the
process.
If the embroidery file output contains team names, the system will display
the team names Output Option dialog. Clicking OK on this dialog
continues the process. See also Outputting teamname designs.
Exporting selected objects

On occasion, you may want to export only selected objects from your
multi-decoration design. The Multi-Decoration File Export (MDFE) capability
allows you to pre-select objects in the design window and then export only
these.
To export selected objects
Multi-decoration components must exist in the design for one or more of
embroidery, graphics, appliqu, or bling.
2 Select the individual objects you want to export.
763
In the example below, we will export only the word DANCE without the
underlying text.

The system displays the Multi-Decoration Files Export dialog.
Select Export
Selected Objects Only
4 Select the Export Selected Objects Only option.

This checkbox will appear if you have selected an object in the design window.
Only available components in the selection will be output to files.
5 Make location adjustments as necessary. See Exporting design components
for details.
6 Click Export.
764
Only selected objects are exported to file.
Setting export locations

In some production environments, each file is placed in a specific location where
it can be used by the operator of that process. For example, the Tajima Machine
Network requires all files to be placed in a specific folder so they can be seen
directly by the machine. Similarly, file formats used in any given process do not
change unless the process changes for example, if a machine is replaced. Use
the following procedure when you want to set export defaults for the
Multi-Decoration Files Export process.
To set export locations
1 Run the Multi-Decoration File Export procedure. See Exporting design
components for details.
The system displays the Multi-Decoration Files Export dialog.
Set or change default
multi-decoration file
export settings
3 To set or change the default multi-decoration file export settings, click the
Locations button.
The Multi-Decoration Files Export Settings dialog opens.
Default file
export locations
4 Select default file locations via the browse (...) button for each design
component.
5 Click OK to finish.
Once set, your settings are remembered for each successive session.
765
Tip Preset locations can be overriden for one-off exports e.g. to USB stick
by means of the Export to setting in the Multi-Decoration Files Export
dialog.
Override preset
locations
File naming conventions

By default, the File name field will take the current design name e.g.
Design1. You can change if you wish. This name is applied to all files exported
using the dialog. See also Supported file formats.
Default file
name
If exported files for any components have the same selected file extension and
location, the file name will be automatically suffixed as follows:
Graphics will be suffixed _GFX.

Appliqu will be suffixed _APQ.
Bling will be suffixed _BLG for a single file.
Where the output file consists of more than one bling shape, size and color, the
suffix will not be displayed in the File name field, but you will be advised that
file names will be changed on export when you click the Export button.
Example
Single multi-decoration file Design1.EMB contains Embroidery, Graphic,
Applique, Bling components. When exported to separate files:
Embroidery filename: Design1_EMB.EMB

Graphic filename: Design1_GFX.CDR
Applique filename: Design1_APQ.DXF
766
Bling filename: Design1_BLG.AI

Lets say you select file types as follows:
EMB: design file for embroidery

AI: Adobe Illustrator for graphics
PLT: HPGL plotter file for both appliqu and bling. (In this example, we
assume bling is output as a single file.)
The resulting filenames will be:
Design1.AI
Design1.EMB
Design1_APQ.PLT
Design1_BLG.PLT
The message dialog will display as follows:
The message will list all modified filenames and path and contain a checkbox to
allow you to suppress the message in the future.
Bling multi-file output
When any bling objects in the design contain bling of the same size and shape
but different colors, and the Multiple Files output option is selected in the
Settings dialog, the files will have a different suffix corresponding to each
output file. Suffixes vary with the bling types and colors represented and may
take suffixes of the following form:
<filename>_SSx_<color>
<filename>_SSx_<color>_<shape_name>
<filename>_<color>_<shape_name>_<XxY>
For example, consider a design with the following bling types:
Bling type
Output filename
Navette 8 x 4mm with color

Emerald
Design1_Emerald_Navette_8x4.PLT
Flower SS16 with color Crystal
Design1_SS16_Crystal_Flower.PLT
SS04 with color Aquamarine
Design1_SS04_Aquamarine.PLT
Note Any non-circular bling must have a shape name entered in the bling
palette. For example, Bling 1, 2 and 3 are set to SS12 (3mm round), with colors
red, green and blue respectively. The file names will be:
Design1_SS12_Red.PLT (Bling 1 only)

Design1_SS12_Green.PLT (Bling 2 only)
767
Design1_SS12_Blue.PLT (Bling 3 only)

Tip The production worksheet shows which bling are in which file. It also shows
a bling film (like a color film) for each of the output files showing which bling is
in each. See Customizing worksheet print options for details.
Outputting bling templates

The Output Bling Template function sends vectors for any bling in a
multi-decoration design directly to a cutting machine. See also Connecting
machines.
Tip Alternatively, you can use the Ouput Bling Template command to print to
file which can then be provided to an operator.
To output bling templates
A cutting or engraving machine must be connected to the PC and configured
to receive data. See Connecting machines for details.
2 Select File > Cut Bling Template.
768
Select bling cutter

or suitable printer
Select if you want

to print to file
Click to preview
printable parts of
design
3 Select your bling cutter from the dropdown list or select a suitable printer.
4 Select the Print to file option if you want to print the design to file.
5 Click Properties and check your output settings.
6 For a realistic view click the Preview button. See also Printing or plotting
worksheets.
Note In multi-bling designs, each color is separated into separate templates

for flood-filling with selected rhinestones.
7 Click OK to send the bling templates to bling cutter or to file.
The bling cutting/engraving information is sent to machine in the required
format. The machine cuts the desired template/s. The cutting data consists
solely of vectors which describe the location, size, and shape of the bling in
the template. There are no connecting lines or data that do not relate directly
to bling placement.
769
Tip A bling production summary shows stone colors, sizes, and quantities as
well as a summary on the first page. See Customizing worksheet print options
for details.
Cutting appliqu shapes

Use the Cut Appliqu feature to send appliqu shapes from a design file to a
laser cutter. EmbroideryStudio extracts outlines from the design and sends
them to the cutter. Only closed outlines are extracted. This procedure is
employed when the cutter is supported directly by a Windows driver and the
design can be sent directly to it. Only shapes defining the actual appliqu fabric
are sent. The procedure has not changed since the previous release and is
actioned via the File > Cut Appliqu command.
Tip EmbroideryStudio Graphics mode also lets you output objects as a vector
file. This can then be downloaded to a laser cutter using CorelDRAW. For a full
description of the CorelDRAW tools, refer to the electronic User Guide available
via the Windows Start > Programs group. Alternatively, use the onscreen help
available from the Help menu.
Note Before you send appliqu shapes to a cutter, make sure it is set up on your
system with the correct Windows (printer) driver. Some cutters e.g. Ioline
use a standard driver for HP-7475 plotters. Once the driver is installed in
Windows, there is no need for a separate hardware setup in EmbroideryStudio.
To output appliqu shapes
1 Open an appliqu design or create appliqu objects. See Digitizing appliqu
2 Select File > Cut Appliqu.
770
The Print Cut Appliqu dialog opens.
Click to preview
worksheet
3 From the Name list, select the appliqu cutter. For more information, refer to
the User Manual for the particular cutter you are using.
4 Click Preview to preview the worksheet.
The Print Preview dialog opens with every appliqu shape in the design in
the order of the stitching sequence.
5 Click Print Now to output the appliqu shapes.

Tip An appliqu production summary on the production worksheet shows
fabric, fabric name, and yardage. It also shows a summary on the first page.
See Customizing worksheet print options for details.
771
Chapter 35
Reading Files of Different Formats
By default EmbroideryStudio saves to its native file format, EMB. This format
contains all information necessary both for stitching a design and for later
modification. When opening designs created or saved in other formats,
EmbroideryStudio converts them internally to EMB format. They can then be
modified using the full range of EmbroideryStudio features. Depending on the
file type, you may need to provide additional information to assist
EmbroideryStudio in the conversion process.
This section describes the different conversion options for opening and saving
stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details about the processing
of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as well as reassigning colors
to both stitch and Melco CND files.
Embroidery design formats

Embroidery designs are saved in one of two formats outline or stitch format.
Note For details of specific formats supported by EmbroideryStudio, see

Supported embroidery file formats.
772
Outline files
Outline or condensed files are high-level formats which contain object outlines,
object properties and stitch data. When you open an outline file in
EmbroideryStudio, corresponding stitch types, object types and effects are
applied.
Complex
Fill object
Outline files can be scaled, transformed and reshaped without affecting stitch
density or quality. After modification, you can choose to save your design to EMB
format, or to a different format altogether.
Note Some outline files, such as Wilcom INP and Gunold PCH, contain
incomplete information. Old format ESD designs are somewhere between an
outline and a stitch file. They contain stitch data, information about selected
stitch types, densities, and machine functions. They do not, however, contain
information about shapes and lines. ESD files require object/outline recognition
if you want to perform object editing in EmbroideryStudio. See Opening stitch
files in EmbroideryStudio for details.
Stitch files
Different embroidery machines understand different languages. Each has its
own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch
a design, it must be in a format which can be interpreted by the machine. Stitch
or expanded designs are low-level formats for direct use by embroidery
machines. They contain only stitch coordinates and machine functions. They are
generally created on-the-fly when sending designs to machine. They can also be
output to embroidery disk. See Reading and writing to embroidery disk for
details. See also Supported Machine, File and Disk Types.
When they are read into EmbroideryStudio, stitch files do not contain object
information such as outlines or stitch types, but present the design as a
collection of stitch blocks called manual objects. Manual objects are created
wherever machine functions e.g. color changes or trims are detected in the
773
design. They have only General and Connector properties. Manual objects, in
turn, consist of individual stitches, called manual stitches.
Manual
object
Stitch designs are generally not suited to modification because stitches are not
regenerated. However, EmbroideryStudio patented Stitch Processor
technology can interpret object outlines, stitch types and spacing from stitch
data with some success. In this way, you can re-constitute old tape format files
and other stitch file format designs for modification in EmbroideryStudio.
These recognized designs can be scaled with stitches recalculated for the new
outlines. Processing is effective for most stitch designs but cannot produce the
same level of quality as original outlines and may not handle some fancy
stitches.
By default, stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon opening but
you can also choose to open them without recognition. Designs opened in this
way can be output for stitching in another format. Or you can edit stitches and
add new elements. For such purposes, you do not need to retrieve information
about how the design was created.
You can scale stitch format designs which have been opened without
object/outline recognition. However, because the stitch count does not change,
the density increases or decreases with the design size. Thus you should not
scale stitch designs by more than 5% or some areas may be too thickly or too
thinly covered.
Original stitch
design
Scaled stitch design

opened without
object/outline
recognition
Note With or without object/outline recognition, stitch files can be saved in EMB
format once they are opened in EmbroideryStudio.
Chapter 35 Reading Files of D ifferent Fo rmats
774
File sources
While embroidery files are broadly classified as outline (condensed) or stitch
(expanded), EmbroideryStudio internally tags files as belonging to one of four
types Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or
Imported Stitches.
Source
Description
Native Design
Designs created in EmbroideryStudio (or equivalent).
Imported Outlines
Designs read from non-EMB outline CND or PCH where stitches

have been generated in EmbroideryStudio (or equivalent) from
original outlines and stitching data.
Processed
Stitches
Designs read from stitch files where stitches have been regenerated
by processing.
Imported Stitches
Designs read from stitch files, where outlines may or may not have
been recognized, but stitches have not been regenerated through
stitch processing.
Note, however, that if you change a stitch design e.g. add a lettering
object the status changes to Processed Stitches even though the
imported stitches may not have been regenerated.
For information about the source of a design file, refer to the Design Properties
dialog. See Viewing design information in EmbroideryStudio for details.
Opening stitch files in EmbroideryStudio

If you want to scale a design, edit an outline or change a stitch type, then the
design or selected elements must be first converted into objects. By default,
stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon opening. If you do not
want to scale the design by more than 5%, or only want to make minor stitch
edits, or output in another format, you can choose to open the stitch file without
object/outline recognition. The design is then presented as a collection of
manual objects. If you only want to convert selected parts of a design, you can
open the file without object/outline recognition and process only the required
stitch blocks.
Tip To ensure object outlines, stitch types, stitch density and colors are correct,
it is always a good idea to check and edit designs after conversion. To improve
the quality of a stitch file, it is often better to edit stitches before conversion.
Object/outline recognition
When you convert a stitch file to outline format, EmbroideryStudio reads stitch
data stitch-by-stitch according to the needle penetration points. It recognizes
stitch types, spacing and length values, stitch effects, and can determine object
outlines. Stitch types are assigned as Satin, Tatami, or Program Split depending
on the pattern of needle penetrations. With Tatami, EmbroideryStudio
recognizes stitch spacing and length, and applies a random factor. If a design is
converted from ESD format, Zigzag and Triple Run objects are also recognized.
If an object is not recognized, it becomes (or remains) a manual object with
general and connector properties only. As such, it will not scale well.
Recognized object outlines and stitch values are stored as object properties in
EmbroideryStudio. This means you can scale and transform recognized designs
in the usual way. You can also change the stitch density of the whole or selected
parts of a design, and/or of certain stitch types.
775
Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition

When you open stitch files with object/outline recognition, you can set open
options to determine how to convert the design. Options vary with the type of
stitch file you select.
Note Open options should reflect how the design was originally digitized, not
how you want it now. Experiment with the settings to get the best results.
To open stitch files with object/outline recognition
1 Open a file from your hard disk, or read it from embroidery disk. See also
Reading and writing to embroidery disk.
Select file
Select format
Click
Options
2 Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to open.
3 Click Options.
The Open Options dialog opens.
Select machine
format
Enter number of
jumps as trims
Select output type
for stop codes
Select
Objects/Outlines
Note Depending on the file type selected, different options are available.
4 Select the Objects/Outlines checkbox.
5 Select a different machine format from the Machine Type list as required.
6 Enter the number of jumps to recognize as trims.
When EmbroideryStudio encounters this number of consecutive jumps, it
will convert them to a trim function.
776
Caution If this value is different from the original design, trim functions will
be not be inserted correctly.
7 Use the Stop Code as panel to select the output type for stop codes as
required:
Option
Purpose
Color Change Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color commands. The next color
is selected from the default color palette.
Stops
Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stop commands. The machine

stops stitching.
Custom
Lets you map thread colors to every stop code in the file. This means
you can color code stitch file designs which do not contain needle
addressing information before opening the file. See Reassigning colors
to stitch and Melco CND files for details.
8 Toggle the Automatic Connectors checkbox as required.

Option
Purpose
On
Open appropriate designs with automatic connectors

without having to use object/outline recognition.
Off
Open designs with connectors recognized as manual

objects. This avoids stitch editing problems caused by
automatic connectors recommended for open fills.
9 Check the status of your embroidery machine as required, then select the
correct setting Speed1 or Speed2 from the list (if available).
Select required speed
On some Barudan machines there is a speed switch. Depending on its

position, fast is assigned as either Speed1 or Speed2. For example, if you
select Speed1, each fast speed function will be translated into a Speed1
command.
10 Click Advanced to set advanced recognition options. See Adjusting advanced
recognition settings for details.
11 Click OK.
12 Click Open.
The selected design is processed and converted to embroidery objects with
fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. If
777
an object is not recognized, it becomes a manual object with general and

connector properties only.
Manual
object
Embroidery
object
Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but does
not change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch densities.
Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition

By opening a stitch file without object/outline recognition, you can output the
design without change, edit individual stitches, and perform minor scaling and
transforming actions without losing the original stitch information. Alternatively,
you can process the whole or selected parts of a design after editing. See also
Recognizing object/outlines after editing.
To open stitch files without object/outline recognition
1 Open a file from your hard disk, or read it from embroidery disk. See also
Reading and writing to embroidery disk.
Select file
Select format
Click
Options
2 Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to open.
3 Click Options.
778
The Open Options dialog opens.
Deselect
Objects/Outlines
4 Deselect the Objects/Outlines checkbox.

5 Set other open options as required.
Depending on the file type selected, different options are available. See
Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition for details.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Open.
The design opens as a collection of manual objects with only general and
connector properties.
Manual
object
Tip At this point, you can output the design without change or perform minor
scaling and transforming actions without losing the original stitch
information.
Recognizing object/outlines after editing

Use Generate > Process to adjust stitch density of the whole or selected parts of
a design.
You can process a stitch file, or selected parts of it, to recognize objects and
outlines, or adjust its size and stitch density. Processing a stitch file is similar to
converting it to an outline file when opening except that you can process only
selected objects or stitches. You can also split larger manual objects into smaller
objects, and process them individually. See also Cutting, splitting and breaking
objects and Converting stitches to objects.
779
Tip You can also use the Process feature to change stitch count and density
for the whole design, or for objects of a particular stitch type only. See Adjusting
stitch densities for details.
To recognize object/outlines after editing
1 Open a stitch file without object/outline recognition. See Opening stitch files
without object/outline recognition for details.
2 Edit parts of the design as required. See Stitches & Machine Functions for
details.
3 Select the part of the design you want to process.
You can select the whole design or individual manual objects.
Manual object

Enter target
stitch count
Click to access
advanced
recognition
options
Adjust stitch
densities
Adjust Pull
Compensation
5 In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches as either
a percentage or absolute value (in millimeters).
6 Adjust the density for each stitch type as required.
You can change the density for selected objects and/or for specific stitch
types only. See also Adjusting individual stitch densities.
Note If a design contains objects created with other stitch types, the target
stitch count will not be achieved as these objects will not change.
780
7 Click Recognition to set advanced recognition options as required. See

Adjusting advanced recognition settings for details.
8 Click OK.
The selected objects are processed and converted to Input A or Run objects
with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and connector
properties. If an object is not recognized, it remains a manual object with
general and connector properties only. In this case, the target stitch count
may not be reached.
Manual object
converted to
Input A and Run
objects, or left as
Manual
Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but does not
change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch densities.
Adjusting advanced recognition settings

You can fine-tune how EmbroideryStudio converts stitch files using the
advanced recognition settings. By default, EmbroideryStudio converts stitches
as Tatami, Satin, or Run stitches according to the settings in the Recognition Advanced Options dialog. You can change these values, or choose not to
convert certain stitch types at all. Generally, the default settings provide the best
results for the most frequently used fill styles Tatami and Satin their
properties stitch length and spacing and edge effects, such as stitch
shortening. Default settings, however, cannot always guarantee the best results
as the variety of embroidery designs is virtually unlimited.
Original design
opened without stitch
recognition
Opened with stitch

recognition pattern splits recognized
as Tatami
Tip When using the advanced object/outline recognition options, select only
those options you want to be recognized. This will minimize the time taken to
process the design and ensure stitches are preserved.
To adjust advanced recognition settings
1 Access the Open Options dialog. See Opening stitch files with object/outline
recognition for details.
2 Click Advanced.
781
The Recognition - Advanced Options dialog opens.
Select to
recognize Tatami
stitches
Select to recognize
random needle
penetrations
Select to
recognize Jagged
Edges
Select to
recognize Satin
stitches
Select to
recognize Splits
Select to
recognize Run
stitches
Select Segments
Resolution and
Merging Factors
Set space and

stitch length
rounding
To adjust Tatami recognition settings
In the Tatami panel, select Recognize Tatami in order to process Tatami

fills, and adjust conversion options as required:
Option
Purpose
Stitch
Spacing
Enter spacing range to recognize. If the row spacing falls outside this
range it will not be converted to Tatami.
Min Stitch
Length
Enter minimum stitch length to recognize as Tatami.
Random
Factor
Select to allow for random needle penetrations. Deselect the

Recognize Splits checkbox to detect Random Factor more accurately.
Tatami Spacing range 0.4 mm
to 1.5 mm, Random Factor not
selected
Tatami Spacing range
0.4 mm to 1.5 mm,
Random Factor selected
782
To adjust Satin recognition settings
In the Satin panel, select Recognize Satin in order to process Satin

stitching, and adjust stitch spacings as required if the row spacing falls
outside the specified range it will not be converted to Satin.
Satin Spacing range
0.5 mm to 5.0 mm
Satin Spacing range

0.1 mm to 2.0 mm
To adjust Run recognition settings
In the Run panel, select Recognize Run in order to process Run stitching,
and adjust conversion options as required:
Option
Purpose
Max Stitch Length Enter maximum stitch length to recognize.

Length Variation
Enter percentage by which stitch length can vary in Run objects.

Run, Max Stitch Length
4 mm Length Variation 10%
Run, Max Stitch Length 4 mm

Length Variation 90%
To adjust Complex Fill recognition settings
In the Parameter Consistency panel, set options for Complex Fill segment
recognition:
Option
Purpose
Spacing Rounding
Enter rounding value for stitch spacings snaps spacing

values in Tatami and Satin fills to specified increments.
Stitch Length
Rounding
Enter rounding value for stitch lengths snaps stitch length

values in Tatami fills to specified increments.
783
For example, if the Tatami minimum stitch length is 4 mm, and the Stitch
Length Rounding is 0.4 mm, stitches from 3.80 to 4.20 mm are snapped
to 4.0 mm, and recognized as Tatami.
Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm,
Spacing Rounding: 0.01 mm,
Stitch Length Rounding: 0.2 mm
Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm,

Spacing Rounding: 0.05 mm,
Stitch Length Rounding:0.5 mm
To adjust stitch effects recognition settings
In the Effects panel, select Jagged in order to recognize the Jagged Edge
effect. Specify a minimum range in millimeters anything variation greater
than this value will be recognized as Jagged Edge.
Jagged not selected, border
object recognized as manual
Jagged selected, border object

recognized as jagged edge
In the Splits panel, select Recognize Splits to recognize splits in Tatami

fills, and adjust conversion options as required:
Option
Purpose
Program Splits as
User Defined Splits
Recognize split patterns as user-defined splits. Note, however,

that user-defined splits are scaled when the design is scaled.
This results in stitch lengths getting longer as the design is
enlarged, thus limiting scaling. With native program splits, on
the other hand, patterns shape, size and spacing remain the
same after objects are scaled.
Recognize Auto
Splits
Recognize Auto Splits in Satin objects. Otherwise, patterns

created with Auto Split will be recognized as Tatami.
Recognition Level
Restrict recognition of Program Splits by increasing percentage.

Decrease to increase recognition. A low percentage number will
detect more areas as Satin with User Defined Split than Tatami.
User Defined Split
Auto Split
Tip Program splits are reliably recognized when patterns are not overlapping.
784
Caution Split patterns can be complex, so the recognition process can take
up to five times longer with this option.
To adjust segment recognition settings
In the Segments Resolution/Merging Factors panel, enter values to

fine-tune the recognition of segments and objects:
Option
Purpose
Spacing
This value expresses the ratio between stitch spacings in adjacent stitch
blocks e.g. adjacent spacings of 0.6 mm and 1.0 mm gives a ratio of 1.67.
A value of 2.0 in the Spacing field means that these stitch blocks will be
recognized as one segment or object. A value of 1.5 means that they will
not. The default value is 3.0. Normal Satin and Tatami stitching ranges in
spacing from 0.3 to 0.6 mm, so most continuous sections of stitching of the
same type will not be split. To preserve spacing variations for color-blended
designs and more artistic designs, you may need to reduce the spacing
factor. In manually punched designs which include stitching with irregular
spacing, segment breaks can be reduced by increasing the factor.
Height
This value expresses the ratio between heights of stitch blocks. It is

important in recognizing Complex Fill shapes, particularly with holes.
Tip Generally, the lower these values, the larger the number of
segments/objects likely to be identified. Normally you want to obtain design
information with a minimum number of identified segments/objects. In
practice there is always a compromise between design recognition quality and
the minimum number of correctly identified segments/objects.
Spacing: 0.5 mm,
Height: 2 mm
Spacing: 3 mm,
Height: 4 mm
Recognized objects
shown in different colors
Click OK.
Tip To revert to the original conversion settings, click Reset.
Opening Melco CND outline files

Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of Melco embroidery digitizing
software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. When you
open CND designs in EmbroideryStudio, these outlines are scaled and stitches
recalculated to preserve density. EmbroideryStudio recognizes all Melco
machine functions and stitch types, including Partition Lines and Complex Fill,
and automatically converts them to EMB format. However, CND files do not
contain specialty features such as Pull Compensation or Auto Spacing, nor do
they include actual stitches, thread colors, or design icons.
There are several versions of CND, all of which can be read by
EmbroideryStudio. While these designs scale accurately, the number and
785
placement of stitches may differ somewhat from the original design. You may
notice some difference (5%) in the stitch counts between original and
converted files. This is because of differences in the software methods used to
calculate stitches. EmbroideryStudio cannot interpret certain specialty features
of CND design objects because there is no direct equivalent. However, stock
designs do not normally use these features and will generally convert without
problem.
Tip Before CND designs are stitched out, an EXP format file is created. The EXP
stores the actual stitches and can be stitched directly. This file too can be opened
in EmbroideryStudio. See Opening stitch files in EmbroideryStudio for details.
When you open Melco CND files, the Melco stitch types used in the design are
converted to EmbroideryStudio stitch types Satin, Run, Tatami, etc. You can
change conversion settings to adjust the spacing, stitch length, effects and
defaults applied to EmbroideryStudio stitch types. You can also set scaling
values to open the design at a different size to the original. See also Saving
designs in Melco CND format.
Note For details of how each CND stitch type is converted, see Conversion of
Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB.
To open a Melco CND outline file
1 Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery disk.
Select file
Select CND
format
2 Select Melco (CND) from the Files of Type list and select the file to open.
3 Click Options.
786
The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens.
Select effects
to apply
Enter scale
values
Adjust stitch
values
Adjust default
values
Select Auto
Color Merge
option
4 In the Scale Factor panel, enter the scale at which you want to open the
design.
New dimensions are expressed as a ratio of the original design size. For
example, to scale to 120% of the original, enter a scale factor of 1.2 in each
field.
Scale Factor
X: 1.00
Y: 1.00
Scale Factor
X: 0.50
Y: 1.00
5 In the Adjust panel, enter the spacing and length values to apply to the
design as a percentage of the original values.
You can adjust Satin spacing, Run stitch length as well as Tatami spacing and
length.
6 In the Auto Color Merge panel, choose whether you want to read thread
color information from CND files.
This ensures that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when converted
to EMB. See Color merging Melco CND files and Reassigning colors to stitch
and Melco CND files for details.
7 In the Effects panel, select the effects you want to apply to the design.
For information about these effects, see the relevant sections of the manual:
Option
Purpose
Auto Spacing
Auto Spacing automatically adjusts stitch spacing wherever a

column changes width. See Applying Satin stitch with auto-spacing.
787
Option
Purpose
Short Stitches
Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape.

With sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on
the outside edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. Stitch
shortening reduces the length of some stitches in sharp turns so
that the needle penetrations are distributed evenly, creating
smoother stitching.
Fractional
Spacing
With Fractional Spacing, EmbroideryStudio calculates spacing

settings from a specified point called the offset fraction. This lies
between the outside and inside edges of the shape. You can
change the offset fraction to adjust stitch spacing at inside and
outside edges.
8 In the Default Values panel, adjust the default values for Satin Spacing,
Stitch Length and Maximum Stitch Length as required.
If the CND design was created with values different to the factory settings,
you can override them in these fields.
To save new settings as defaults, click Save.

To revert to the Melco factory settings, click Reset.
9 Click OK.
10 Click Open.
The selected design opens in the Design window. You can scale the design
directly on screen, or via the Object Properties dialog. You can also rotate,
mirror and skew the design. See Modifying Designs for details.
Color merging Melco CND files

The Auto Color Merge feature reads thread color information for CND files from
an associated TXT file so that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when
they are converted to EMB.
Setting up the color merge TXT file

Auto Color Merge reads and interprets a TXT file that contains color names
from a thread chart. You can create this text file manually with a text editor such
as MS Notepad. The text file must have the same file name as the CND file e.g.
Fish.TXT and Fish.CND. Both files must also reside in the same folder. For the
Auto Color Merge function to work correctly, information in the text file must
be entered in a certain format.
Example text file: Fish
A typical text file might look like this:
Fish
Uses curve effects
File: Fish
55.9mmW X 74.5mmH
ST: 6,780
Colors: 8
1. Tropical Sunset
2. Saffron
3. Pale powder Blue
4. Tropical Sunset
5. Pale powder Blue
Curve effect
6. Tropical White
7. Tropical Sunset
8. Pale powder Blue
788
Text file structure

All text files contain some or all of the following elements.
Text file
element
Mandator
y
Description
Example
Design name
This is the name of the design as it

appears in File > Information > Design
Properties > Subject.
Fish
Comments
Lines inserted here appear under File > Uses curve effects
Information > Design Properties >
Comments.
File name
This is the file name of the CND design File: Fish

file. The file extension should not be
included.
Design size
Enter the expected design size for the

design. The actual design size is
derived from the software.
55.9mmW X
74.5mmH
Stitch count
Enter the expected stitch count for the

design. The actual stitch count is
derived from the software.
ST: 6,780
Number of colors
States the total number of colors in the

design.
Colors: 8
Thread name 1
Enter the first thread name. The name of 1. Tropical Sunset

the thread is searched against the
Thread Chart. The thread name is
shown in the File > Design Properties >
Stop Sequence tab.
Thread name 2
Enter the second thread name.
2. Saffron
Thread name 3
Enter the third thread name.
3. Pale Powder Blue
Thread name 4
Enter the fourth thread name.
4. Tropical Sunset
Thread name 5
Add any extra threads to this list.
5. Pale Powder Blue
Thread
comments
Place comments below the relevant

thread number.
Curve effect
Thread name 6
6. Tropical White
Thread name 7
7. Tropical Sunset
Thread name 8
8. Pale Powder Blue
Reading Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge

When opening a CND file which has a TXT file associated with it, you must
specify the thread chart used when the design was originally created in EDS (or
other design software). The thread colors nominated in the text file will
correspond to the selected thread chart. Alternatively, you can assign colors
manually to every Color Stop code in the file. See also Reassigning colors to
stitch and Melco CND files.
To read Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge
2 Select a CND design.
3 Click Options.
789
The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens.
Select thread
chart
Assign colors
manually
4 Select a color merge option from the Auto Color Merge panel.
If you want to read thread color information for the selected CND file from
an associated TXT file, select From File and follow the steps below.
If you want to assign colors manually to every Color Stop code in the file,
select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence. See Reassigning colors
to stitch and Melco CND files for details.
5 If you have chosen to associate a text file with your CND file, select a
corresponding thread chart from the Auto Color Merge dropdown list.
Note Any thread color named in the text file must correspond to a color in
the selected thread chart. If not, it will default to black.
6 Click OK.
The design opens, the stitches appear in the correct thread colors, and the
color palette displays the selected thread chart.
No chart selected default

colors assigned
One color not correctly matched

defaults to black
Original colors correctly

assigned from text file
Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files

When you open a stitch file or CND file, a design without color code assignment
automatically uses the default color palette. You can, however, map thread
colors to every Color Stop code in the file. This means that before opening the
790
file you can color-code designs which do not contain needle addressing
information.
Without color code
assignment
With color code

assignment
Note In order to assign colors correctly, you need to consult a production

worksheet for the necessary color sequence information.
To reassign colors to a stitch or Melco CND file
2 Select a stitch file or CND design and click Options.
If youve selected a stitch file, the Open Options dialog opens. If CND, the
Condensed File Input Values dialog opens. This procedure is the same.
Stitch file
Select Define Stop
Sequence
CND file
Select Define Stop
Sequence
3 Select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence.
791
The Define Stop Sequence dialog opens. Initially the Building Stop
Sequence grid is empty.
Select thread
chart
Select color
4 Select a thread chart and first color.
Click to
assign color
5 Click Assign Color.

The color and the description are entered at the current Stop in the Building
Stop Sequence grid.
Note The selection moves to the next color in the thread chart. Two
consecutive same colors are not allowed and Assign Color is disabled.
6 Click Assign Stop to enter an explicit Stop code.
Stop is entered in the Description field.
Click to
assign stop
792
Note A Stop Sequence Warning message displays if a redundant color

function is assigned. Press Delete to delete a selected entry in the stop
sequence. Click Reset to delete all the entries.
Choose how
extra stops are
to be interpreted
7 Use the Extra Stop codes as panel to select the output type for extra stop
codes:
Option
Purpose
Color Changes
Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color commands. The

next color is selected from the default color palette.
Stops
Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stop commands. The

machine stops stitching.
Repeat
Sequence
If you select fewer colors than the design requires, the selected
colors are repeated. For example, if your design requires four
colors and youve only selected two in the Building Stop Sequence
list, colors 3 & 4 will be the same as original colors 1 & 2.
8 Repeat the operation as many times as indicated in the production worksheet.

9 Click OK.
The design will have the desired colors and the correct number of Color
Changes.
Note You can convert color changes to an explicit Stop Code. You can also
remove Color Stops by assigning the same color number to consecutive color
blocks.
793
Chapter 36
Hooping Designs
Devices made from wood, plastic, or steel, hoops are used to tightly grip fabric
and stabilizer between an inner and outer ring. Designed to hold fabric taut
against the machine bed for embroidering, they attach to the machines frame.
Fabrics must be hooped before stitching out on the machine. EmbroideryStudio
allows you to select from a wide range of standard factory-supplied hoops. If you
are using a hoop which does not appear in the hoop library, you can define your
own from scratch or based on a standard hoop.
The HoopIt! feature allows you to:
Prompt EmbroideryStudio to select a hoop from a library of pre-defined or

user-defined hoops which can be viewed in the design window.
Show/hide the selected hoop template in the design window and design
preview area of the production worksheet. See also Printing or plotting
worksheets.
Create/edit/delete user-defined hoops with circle, oval, rectangle, round
rectangle, or square shapes.
Zoom-to-hoop in the design window and print preview.
automatically. It also covers defining and editing custom hoops.
Selecting and centering hoops

settings.
Chapter 36 Hooping Designs
794
Click Standard > Zoom To Hoop to view entire hoop in the design window.
The Show Hoop tool allows you to toggle hoop display on or off. When
activated, a hoop template representing the embroidery hoop you connect to
your embroidery machine appears in the middle of the design window. The hoop
can either be centered automatically at the design center or at a fixed position
i.e. center of the design window (default) or a user-defined center point.
A range of hoop sizes is available for a wide variety of design types. From the
hoop sizes available, select the smallest hoop which will accommodate your
design. This will hold the fabric tight while stitching. Alternatively, if you are
using a hoop size that is not in the hoop list, you can define your own hoop and
save it for later use. See also Defining custom hoops.
Note These settings are digitizing functions only as the embroidery machine
itself will always center the design. See also Setting automatic start and end
points.
To select and center a hoop
1 Open your design and click the Show Hoop icon.
The current hoop is displayed. It may be too big or too small for your design.
2 Right-click the Show Hoop icon or select Special > Hoops > Hoop
Options.
795
The Options > Hoop dialog opens.
Choose required
hoop
3 Select a hoop from the My Hoop list.

Note Configure the My Hoop list to include only those hoops you currently
have available for use via the My Hoops function. See Setting up a custom
hoop list for details.
4 In the Position panel, choose how you want the hoop to be positioned.
Automatic Centering: Ensure that design is always centered in the hoop.
Design automatically
centered
Manual: Use the manual option to make sure the hoop display does not
move from its original position. This means it wont automatically center
while youre digitizing.
Manual > Set Hoop Center: Digitize a point on the design that the hoop
will center around. See Selecting and centering hoops for details.
Design remains in
same position
796
Tip Always turn auto-centering back on to check that the design will fit within
the hoop when it gets to the machine.
5 Click OK.
If you selected Set Hoop Center, click the point on the design or design
window where you want to center the hoop.
Note Whenever you choose a new hoop, it becomes the current hoop until
changed in the present or a future session.
6 Optionally, click the Zoom to Hoop icon, select View > Zoom > Zoom to
Hoop or press Alt+0 to view the entire hoop in the design window.
Note The production worksheet will state the selected/recommended hoop.
See Customizing worksheet print options for details.
Setting up a custom hoop list

settings.
Configure the My Hoop list to include only those hoops you currently have
available for use. This list can include commercial brands as well as your own
custom-defined hoops.
Note The Auto HoopIt feature only selects hoops from the My Hoops list thus
only ever suggesting a hoop you have pre-selected as available for use. See
Selecting hoops automatically for details.
To set up a custom hoop list
Options.
Choose to configure
your custom hoop list
2 Click the My Hoops button or select from the droplist itself.
797
The My Hoops dialog opens.
Use the controls to add

available hoops to your
custom list
3 Use the arrow buttons to add or subtract hoops:
Add available hoops to the My Hoops custom list.

Subtract hoops from the custom list if for any reason they are made
redundant or unavailable.
4 Click OK.
Only these hoops will be available for manual or automatic selection. See also
Selecting and centering hoops.
Selecting hoops automatically

Click View > Auto HoopIt to prompt the system to select a suitable hoop
automatically.
The simplest way to hoop a design is to prompt the system to select a suitable
hoop automatically. EmbroideryStudio then finds the hoop with the smallest
stitching area that fits the extents box of the whole embroidery design.
To select a hoop automatically
Open your design and click the Auto HoopIt icon or access the command
from Special > Hoops > ... menu.
798
From amongst its library of pre-defined hoops, EmbroideryStudio looks for

the hoop with the smallest stitching area that can accommodate the whole
embroidery design. The nearest matching hoop is displayed.
If the My Hoops list is empty, the system offers you a choice to create a
custom list. See Setting up a custom hoop list for details.
Note The Auto HoopIt feature only selects hoops from the My Hoops list
thus only ever suggesting a hoop you have pre-selected as available for use.
If the system cannot find a suitable hoop with a stitching area adapted to the
current embroidery design, it displays a message with the option to create a
new hoop, either automatically or manually.
Click Auto Create if you want the system to generate a suitable hoop.
EmbroideryStudio will create either a circular or rectangular hoop to best
799
suit the designs dimensions. It will also name it accordingly e.g.

Circle 100mm.
Click Manual Create/Select if you want to define your own custom hoop to
suit a specific hoop type you may have. See Defining custom hoops for
details.
Optionally, select View > Zoom > Zoom to Hoop or press Alt+0 to view
the entire hoop in the design window.
Tip The current hoop name is displayed in the Current Hoop field on the
Prompt Line.
Defining custom hoops

settings.
If you are using a hoop size that is not in the hoop list, you can define your own
hoops and save them for later use. You can create or edit various types of hoop
rectangular, oval, circle, square. You can, if you wish, define custom hoops to
conform to the dimensions of any physically existing hoops you may be using.
800
Various formats are available to define anything from rectangular, oval, circle, to
square hoops. Each requires slightly different dimensions to be set.
To define a custom hoop

Options.
Create new
hoop
2 Click New Hoop.

The Create/Edit Hoop dialog opens.
Select required
format
3 Select the required format for your hoop from the droplist e.g. rectangle,
circle, etc.
4 In the Stitching Area Dimensions panel, enter the dimensional
characteristics of the stitching area within the hoop:
801
Circle: Circle stitching areas only require the Diameter to be specified.
Enter required
dimensions
Square: Square stitching areas only require the Width to be specified.
Enter required
dimensions
Rectangle: Rectangular stitching areas require Height and Width

dimensions.
Enter required
dimensions
802
Oval: Oval stitching areas require three dimensions Total Height,

Rectangle Height, and Width.
Enter required
dimensions
Round Rectangle: Similar to oval stitching areas, round rectangles

require three dimensions Height, Width, and Corner Radius. The
greater the radius, the rounder the corner.
Enter required
dimensions
5 Click Save Hoop or Save Hoop As.

The Save Hoop As dialog opens.
Rectangle 180x120
6 Give your hoop a meaningful name e.g. Rectangle 180x120.

7 Click Save.
Your user-defined hoop is now available for use together with the
system-defined hoops.
Note If the hoop name already exists and it is user-defined, a message box
prompts you before overwriting the existing same-name hoop.
803
Editing custom hoops

settings.
You can edit and delete custom hoops as required both those you have defined
yourself and those created by the system. Only custom hoops can be modified,
not those from the existing library. Change height and width of custom hoops as
required. When you delete a hoop type, it is removed permanently. Only custom
hoops can be deleted.
To modify a hoop
1 Right-click the Show Hoop icon or select View > Hoop.
Edit selected
hoop
2 Select the hoop you want to edit from the My Hoop list.
3 Click Edit Hoop.
The Create/Edit Hoop dialog opens. The same dialog is used for editing as
for defining hoops. See Defining custom hoops for details.
Edit dimensions
as required
4 Enter the new dimensions.
804
5 Click the Save Hoop button.

To delete a hoop
1 Right-click the Show Hoop icon or select View > Hoop.
Click to delete
hoop
2 Select the hoop you want to delete.

3 Click Delete Hoop then click OK to confirm.
The hoop is permanently removed.
805
Chapter 37
Machine Formats
Different embroidery machines speak different languages. They have their own
control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can stitch a
design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the embroidery
machine. When you select a machine format, EmbroideryStudio uses it to
translate digitized designs into a specific machine-readable form. If required,
you can customize machine formats to meet specific machine requirements.
This section describes how to select a machine format for a design and output it
using other formats. It also explains how to customize machine formats to meet
your machines specific requirements.
Selecting machine formats

When you create a design, you need to select a format corresponding to the
embroidery machine you intend to use. You dont, however, need to change the
designs native machine format in order to output to a different machine. See
Outputting to different machines for details. See also Supported machine types.
Note You can change the machine format itself if machine values do not
correspond precisely to your particular machine. You can even change the
machine format for a particular design. You should, however, only modify
existing formats if you no longer require the original values. See also Creating
custom formats.
To select a machine format
806
The Select Machine Format dialog opens.
Click to create
new format
Select machine
format
Click to adjust
format
2 From the Available Machine Formats list, select the required machine
format.
3 Adjust machine formats as required:
To check or modify settings for the selected format, click Values. See also
Adjusting standard machine format settings.
To create a new format based on the selected one, click Create. See also
Creating custom formats.
4 Click OK.
Note If a selected machine format does not support a particular function in
the design either automatically or manually inserted it is simply ignored.
Outputting to different machines

Use Standard > Stitch to Stitch Manager to send a design to a supported machine
for stitching.
Use Standard > Stitch to Connection Manager to connect to supported machines
via proprietary machine software.
Use Standard > Embroidery Disk Save As to save a design to an embroidery disk.
Once a design is complete, you can stitch it out to any supported embroidery
machine without changing the original design format. If a selected machine
does not support a particular function included in the design, it is simply ignored.
Some newer machines are supplied with propriety connection software e.g.
Janome MB-4 and Barudan LEM. EmbroideryStudio supports connection to
these machines via the Stitch to Connection Manager option. To integrate
with EmbroideryStudio, this software needs to be installed on the same
machine. Discuss with your machine supplier for further details.
807
To output to a different machine
Click Stitch to Stitch Manager, then select a different format from the
Output as Machine Format list. See Stitching designs with Stitch Manager
for details.
Select machine
format
Click Stitch to Connection Manager, then select the machine type or

relevant propriety connection management software e.g. Janome MB-4,
Barudan LEM, etc for your particular machine. See Stitching designs with
Connection Manager for details.
Select connection
manager
Chapter 37 Machine Fo rmats
808
Click Embroidery Disk Save As, then select a different machine format from
the dropdown list. See Writing designs to embroidery disk for details.
Select
machine
format
Adjusting standard machine format settings

Different machines require different settings. When you select a machine
format, you only modify values relevant to that machine. Typical modifiable
values are stitch and jump length, trim functions and color change functions.
Use the Machine Format Values dialog to define values to allow when
outputting to a specific machine format.
Note Not all values described here are available for all machine formats. Use
these instructions to enter values that apply to your selected format. See your
embroidery machine manual for details.
Setting stitch and jump length values

With some machines you can set the maximum frame movement, minimum
stitch length to recognize, and automatic jump length.
To set stitch and jump values
1 Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Adjust stitch and
jump settings
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.
2 In the Maximum Stitch field, enter the maximum stitch length to allow.
The value you enter depends on the tape code used by your machine:
Binary coding system: 12.7 mm e.g. Barudan machines

Ternary coding system: 12.1 mm e.g. Tajima machines.
3 In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the minimum stitch length to allow.
809
This sets the default Small Stitches value. See Eliminating small stitches for
details.
Tip Generally the minimum stitch length is increased for dense materials and
thick threads to prevent thread breakage.
4 In the Maximum Jump field, enter the maximum jump length to allow.
This sets the default Auto Jump value.
Tip Shorter jump values generally improve stitch quality and reduce wear on
the machine but may increase stitch-out time.
5 Click Save then Close.
Setting trim functions

With some machine formats you can specify how to format and interpret trim
commands. Some machines understand specific trim codes. Other machines
interpret multiple jumps as a trim command. Machines without an automatic
trimmer may not know how to interpret trim commands, and may even shift the
design when a trim code is encountered. For these machines you need to
deselect the Output Trims checkbox so that trim functions are ignored when
the design is stitched.
To set trim functions
Select to output
trim functions
Select trim
function format
2 In the Trim panel, select the Output Trims checkbox to include trim
functions when outputting to the selected machine format.
Note If you deselect the Output Trims checkbox, the trim functions are not
removed from the design but simply ignored for the selected machine format.
3 Specify the trim function format to use:
Option
Purpose
Jumps
For machines that interpret multiple jumps as trims. You also need to
enter the required number of jumps.
Trim Code
For machines that require specific trim codes.
810
Setting color change functions

Machines interpret the Color Change function differently either as a Needle
Number or Stop command.
Needle number commands
Needle Number commands tell the machine to move to the next needle
whenever a Color Change function is encountered. Each color in the design
corresponds to a needle number in the order listed in the Colors list. See
Customizing backgrounds for details.
Note The machine must have the correct thread colors loaded for each needle
to stitch out correctly.
For needle addressing machines, you need to specify how many needles are on
the machine. This tells the machine how often it needs to stop for the operator
to change threads. For example, for a design with 25 colors to be stitched out
on a machine with five needles, it must stop after every five color changes in
order for the operator to change threads. Needle Number commands are
sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate color changes.
Stop commands
Stop commands allow the operator to manually change threads whenever a
Color Change function is encountered. They are generally used with machines
that only have one needle or do not support needle addressing. Stop commands
are sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate color changes.
To set color change functions
Select method to interpret
color change functions
Enter number of needles
Select optional
functions as required
2 In the Color Change panel, select a method to use to interpret color change
functions:
Option
Converts color change functions to ...
Needle No
Needle Number commands.
Stops
Stop commands.
Stop & Jump
Stop and Jump commands.
Needle No and Jumps Needle Number and Jump commands.

3 For needle-addressing machines, enter the number of needles on the
machine in the No of Needles field.
811
4 Select the Use Group Addressing checkbox as required.

Some machines can group two heads together so you can stitch a design
using needles from both heads. For example, if a machine has two heads and
nine needles per head, the machine moves the hoop from the first head under
the second head, which allows you to stitch 18 colors without a manual
change.
Note If this is the case, enter the combined number of needles on the
machine in the No of Needles field.
5 Select the First CC required checkbox as required.
Some machines require a First CC code to initialize the machine and bring
the head back to the first color change needle position.
6 Select the Return to Start checkbox as required.
This returns the needle to the start of the design, preparing the machine for
the next run of the same design.
Setting borer functions

Some embroidery machines are equipped with a borer. The borer often replaces
one of the needles. You need to specify the needle position of the borer and its
offset value. Borers are often knife attachments where the cutting position is
offset 12 mm from the main needle. Before the machine starts, the frame moves
so that the borer is in the correct position. This extra frame movement
compensates for the borer offset. Some machines automatically adjust for this
offset when a Borer In function is encountered. These machines should have an
offset value of 0. Similarly, if you are using a boring needle (instead of a knife),
you do not need an offset value. See your embroidery machines manual for
details.
To set borer functions
Enter borer offset

Enter needle number of borer
2 In the Boring panel, enter the required borer offset.
If your machine automatically inserts an offset when a Borer In function

is encountered, enter an offset of 0 mm.
If your machine requires an offset value, enter an offset of 12.0 mm.
3 Enter the needle number to which the borer is attached.
Setting end-of-design functions

Some machines require an explicit End of Design function code in order to
recognize when the end of the design has been reached. Some machines do not
understand the End of Design function code, requiring a Stop code instead. For
812
example, Tajima machines recognize the explicit End of Design function code
while Happy machines require a simple Stop. See also Setting the Start of
Design/End of Design sequence.
To set end-of-design functions
Select end-of-design
option
2 In the End of Design panel, select the appropriate option for your machine:
Option
Purpose
End of Design Some machines require an explicit End of Design function code e.g.
some Tajima machines.
Stop
Some machines require a Stop code instead e.g. Happy machines.
Adjusting advanced machine format settings

The Advanced tab lets you set additional machine format options. Again, the
available settings depend on the selected machine format. You can set the color
change sequence, insert special codes for the start or end of a design, and enter
speed settings. There are also miscellaneous settings, including whether to
change the fabric tension during boring, and whether to rewind tape when
stitching is complete. Use the Machine Format Values dialog to define values
to allow when outputting to a specific machine format.
Note Not all values described here are available for all machine formats. Use
these instructions to enter values that apply to your selected format. See your
embroidery machine manual for more information about machine formats.
Tip Only change Advanced values if you are familiar with the codes used by
your embroidery machine.
Setting the color change sequence

Some machines cannot interpret Color Change commands unless they form
part of a color change sequence made up of empty stitches and empty jumps
before and after each Color Change command. Check the requirements of your
machine to determine whether you need to enter color change sequence values.
In the Advanced tab, the Color Change Sequence panel reads from top to
bottom, in the order the codes appear in the sequence. The first two fields show
the number of Empty Stitches and Empty Jumps to insert before the Color
813
Change command. The other fields show the Empty Jumps and Empty
Stitches to insert after the command.
Color Change Sequence in Stitch List

matches sequence defined in Machine
Format Values Advanced tab
To set the color change sequence

1 Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting
Enter number of Empty

Stitches and Jumps to insert
before Color Change
Jumps and Stitches to insert
after Color Change
2 In the Color Change Sequence panel, enter the color change sequence:
Field
Enter number of ...
First 0:0
Empty stitches to insert before Color Change.
First 0:0 Jump
Empty jumps to insert before Color Change.
Second 0:0 Jump
Empty jumps to insert after Color Change.
Second 0:0
Empty stitches to insert after Color Change.
Setting the Start of Design/End of Design sequence

In addition to any End of Design function, some machines require extra more
empty stitches and empty jumps in order to stitch the start and end of a design.
Other machines require a Stop function. Depending on the machine type, you
may also require commands to initialize the machine or trigger the frame-out
command after stitching.
Note Remember that these fields show the number of extra codes you want to
insert in addition to the default settings.
814
To set the Start of Design/End of Design sequence


Jumps and Stitches to insert
at start of design
Stitches and Jumps to insert
at end of design
2 In the Start of Design panel, enter the start of design sequence:

Field
Enter number of ...
0,0 Jump
Empty jumps to insert at start of design.
0,0
Empty stitches to insert at start of design.
3 In the End of Design panel, do the reverse i.e. enter the end of design
sequence:
Field
Enter number of ...
0,0
Empty stitches to insert at end of design.
0,0 Jump
Empty jumps to insert at end of design.
4 Select the Set Needle Number checkbox as required.

Where available, this option initializes the machine and brings the head back
to the first color change needle position.
Select to initialize machine

and bring head back to first
needle position
5 Select the Frame Out checkbox as required.

Where available, this option triggers the frame to exit after stitching the
design.
Select to trigger frame

to exit after stitch out
Setting speed options

Some machines can stitch at different speeds. Depending on your machine, you
may then be able to select different speeds to use when you start stitching or
815
for when the borer is engaged. You need to first assign the speeds as Speed 1
and Speed 2 in the Machine Format Values dialog.
To set speed options
Select and adjust
speed options
2 In the Speed panel, select the Boring Auto Speed Changes checkbox as
required.
This option slows the machine automatically whenever the borer is engaged.
3 From the Start list, select the preferred starting speed Fast or Slow.
4 From the Fast list, select the faster setting on your machine Speed 1 or
Speed 2. Check your machine manual for details.
Setting miscellaneous advanced options

Depending on the selected machine format, you may also be able to select
whether to reduce the tension on the fabric while boring, and indicate whether
to rewind the tape when stitching is complete.
To set miscellaneous advanced options
Set speed options
2 Select the Tension Control for Boring checkbox as required.

This option reduces the fabric tension when the borer is engaged.
3 Select the Stop before rewind at end checkbox as required.
This option stops the machine at the end of the design and rewinds the tape.
4 Select the Rewind with jump at end checkbox as required.
This option inserts a jump at the end of the design and rewinds the tape.
816
Creating custom formats

EmbroideryStudio provides standard formats for most machines. However, if
your machine is different, you may need to customize the machine format
settings. For example, if you have different models of the same type of
embroidery machine, different functions may require different values. There are
two ways to customize machine formats:
Create a new format, based on the original, and make it available to all
designs. See Creating custom machine formats for details.
Modify the format for a specific design, creating a custom format to use only
with that design. See Customizing machine formats for specific designs for
details.
Note If necessary, you can update the standard machine format itself. However,
you should only do this if the original values are no longer used. See Adjusting
standard machine format settings for details.
Creating custom machine formats

You can create a new machine format based on a standard machine format, and
make it available to all designs.
To create a custom machine format
1 Select a machine format on which to base the new format. See Selecting
2 Click Create.
The Machine Format Values > Standard dialog opens.
Enter format name
Adjust settings
3 In the Format Name field, enter a name for the new format.
The name of the format you based it on and a number appear as the default
e.g. Melco-1.
4 In the Comment field, enter any information that will help you identify the
machine format e.g. No Trim.
5 Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard
machine format settings for details.
6 Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See Adjusting
advanced machine format settings for details.
The new format appears in the Available Machine Formats list.
817
Customizing machine formats for specific designs

You can create a custom machine format for use with the current design. Use
this feature if you need to modify machine format values for a design without
changing the original format. The custom format appears in the selection list.
Note The custom format is based on the selected machine format for the
design. If you want to base it on a different machine format, select it from the
Select Machine Format dialog. See Selecting machine formats for details.
To customize machine format for a specific design
1 Select Machine > Machine Format Values.
The Machine Format Values > Standard dialog opens.
Adjust settings
2 Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard

machine format settings for details.
3 Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See Adjusting
advanced machine format settings for details.
Note You cannot change the Name or Comment fields. The custom
machine format is automatically named using the original machine format
and design name e.g. Melco-Design1.
4 Click OK.
A new machine format is created for the design. It appears in the Select
Machine Format dialog and is saved with the design.
Removing custom machine formats

You can remove custom machine formats from your system when they are no
longer required.
To remove custom machine formats
1 Access the Select Machine Format dialog and select a machine format to
remove. See Selecting machine formats for details.
Note You cannot remove machine formats that come with the software. You
can only remove a custom format which you created.
2 Click Remove.
A confirmation box appears.
3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion, then click OK.
818
PART VIII
HARDWARE & SOFTWARE
SETUP
In order to work with your particular equipment, EmbroideryStudio needs to
be properly configured. You may also want to configure the software to your
particular design requirements.
Setting up hardware
This section describes how to set up digitizing tablets and embroidery machines.
It also describes how to calibrate the monitor. See Setting up Hardware for
details.
Changing system settings
This section describes how to change the TrueView display, grid spacing and
positioning, and design window scrolling options. It also describes how to save
designs automatically as you work. There is also information about how to adjust
the pointer position display, paste position options, and other general options.
See Changing System Settings for details.
819
Chapter 38
Setting up Hardware
You will need to connect peripheral devices for use with EmbroideryStudio.
These may include digitizing tablets, plotters, printers, appliqu cutters,
scanners and embroidery machines. Different devices are set up in different
ways some in Windows, via the Control Panel, others within
EmbroideryStudio itself.
Multi-Port
Serial Card
UTP or STP
cables
UTP or STP
cables
Tip The number of available ports limits the number of devices you can connect.
If additional ports are required, you can add them. Multi-port serial cards can
also be used. See a PC technician about your requirements.
This section describes how to set up digitizing tablets and embroidery machines.
It also describes how to calibrate the monitor.
Calibrating the monitor

You need to calibrate your monitor so that designs at 1:1 scale appear at real
size. Do this when you first install EmbroideryStudio or whenever you change
your monitor.
To calibrate the monitor
1 Special > Hardware Setup.
820
The Hardware Setup dialog opens.
Select Display
Monitor
Click to access
screen calibration
settings
2 From the Type list, select Display Monitor.

3 Click Values.
The Screen Calibration dialog opens.
Measure
height
Measure width
4 Measure the height and width of the dialog box.

5 Enter the measurement in the Width and Height fields.
6 Click OK to return to the Hardware Setup dialog.
7 Click Close.
Peripheral device connection settings

Peripheral devices can be connected to your computer via serial ports, parallel
ports, a specialized network card or an ethernet network. Local area networks
(LANs) commonly use ethernet networks for machine connection.
Note For instructions on connecting devices to your computer and setting up in
Windows, see the documentation for the device as well as your Microsoft
Windows documentation.
Serial port settings

PC serial COM ports are male connectors, and can be either 9-pin or 25-pin. They
are named COM1, COM2, COM3, etc. When you set up a digitizer or machine that
is connected via a serial port, you need to enter the serial port settings in
EmbroideryStudio as part of the setup procedure. See Connecting digitizing
tablets or Connecting machines.
The number of available ports limits the number of devices you can connect. If
additional ports are required, you can add them. Multi-port serial cards can also
be used. See a PC technician about your requirements.
821
The following table provides standard settings for various devices. They are a
guide only. Settings for the same device may vary according to manufacturer.
Check the documentation supplied with the device before setting up.
Device
Port
Baud
Hand shaking
Data
bits
Digitizer *
COM1
9600
None
None
Plotter
COM2
9600
XOn/XOff
None
Tape Punch
COM2
4800
XOn/XOff
None
Tape Reader
COM2
4800
XOn/XOff
None
Embroidery Machine COM2
9600
Hardware
None
Stop bits Parity
* The digitizer applies only to 21D, 45, 65
Note You must be able to identify the ports on your computer. If in doubt,
consult a PC technician.
To enter serial port settings
1 Select Special > Hardware Setup.
Select device
Click to access
device settings
2 Select a device from the Type list and select an item in the Name column,
then click Values.
The <Device> Setup dialog opens.
Click Setup
Select serial port
3 In the Connected To panel, select a serial port from the Port list.
4 Click Setup.
Chapte r 38 S etting up Hardware
822
The Serial Port Setup dialog opens.
Enter port settings for

embroidery machine or
selected device
5 Enter the Baud rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits and Parity and Handshaking
settings for the device.
Note The port settings must match those of the embroidery machine or
selected device. The type of handshaking must match the type of cable you
are using. Check the communications setup section of the documentation
that came with the device.
6 Click OK.
Parallel port settings

Parallel ports are used to connect some embroidery machines. They are named
LPT1, LPT2, etc. When you set up the machine, select the parallel port and the
required protocol, and complete the machine setup procedure. See Connecting
machines for details.
Connecting machines
Before sending designs for stitching via EmbroideryStudio direct connection,
you must first configure the machine to the software. You can add machines,
change settings for existing machines, or delete machines no longer used.
EmbroideryStudio provides alternative means for sending designs directly to
machine. Depending on your software options, you can stitch to machine using
either Stitch Manager or ES Machine Manager. For details about Stitch Manager,
see Stitching designs with Stitch Manager. ES Machine Manager is described in
a separate ES Machine Manager Supplement.
Note Some newer machines are supplied with propriety connection
management software e.g. Janome MB-4 and Barudan LEM.
EmbroideryStudio supports connection to these machines via the Stitch to
Connection Manager option. These machines do not need to be configured in
EmbroideryStudio. See also Stitching designs with Connection Manager.
Setting up machines for direct connection

To set up a machine you need to define a name, the port it is attached to, and
the protocol it uses. You can select whether to download directly to the selected
machine or to receive a confirmation message each time. For every machine,
you need to select the machine formats it supports. You can select from among
standard formats, or create new formats if necessary. See Creating custom
formats for details.
823
Tip See also Connecting Melco Embroidery Machines to Wilcom

EmbroideryStudio software for more information. This document is available
on the Wilcom website http://www.wilcom.com.au. You will need to register and
request access to the support section of the website.
To set up machines for direct connection
2 Run EmbroideryStudio.
The identical port settings must now also be entered in EmbroideryStudio
Hardware Setup.
Select Direct
Machine
Connection
Click to add
machine
Click to access
machine settings
Select machine
connection to
delete
4 From the Type list, select Direct Machine Connection.
To add a new machine, click New.

To change the settings of an existing machine, select it, then click Values.
The Embroidery Machine Connection dialog opens.
Enter machine
name
Select COM
port and
protocol
Click to
access serial
port settings
5 If creating a new connection, enter a name for the machine in the Name field.
6 In the Comment field, enter a comment if desired.
7 From the Port list, select the serial (COM) or parallel (LPT) port to which the
machine is connected. See also Peripheral device connection settings.
8 From the Protocol list, select the protocol for the connection between the
computer and embroidery machine.
See the documentation supplied with the embroidery machine to determine
the appropriate connection.
9 Click Setup to access the serial port settings.
These settings must be the same as those set on the embroidery machine,
or EmbroideryStudio will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port
824
10 Select Auto Download to directly download designs to the assigned

machine. Deselect it to confirm before sending.
11 In the Machine Type panel, select the compatible machine formats.
To do this, select compatible machine types in the Available list, and click >
to move them to the For this machine list.
Select
machine type
Machine types
supported by your
machine
Click arrow buttons to swap

machine types between fields
Note Machine format values can be added or changed if required. See

Creating custom formats for details.
13 Click Close.
Deleting machines from the system

Delete embroidery machines from your system setup if they are no longer
required.
To delete machines from the system
Select Direct
Machine
Connection
Click Delete to
remove the
machine
Select machine
to delete
2 From the Type list, select Direct Machine Connection.

3 Select a machine and click Delete.
4 Click OK.
Connecting digitizing tablets

You can use a digitizing tablet and puck with EmbroideryStudio as an
alternative to digitizing directly on-screen. To use a tablet, you place an
enlargement drawing on the active area, and use the puck to mark reference
825
points. You can also select commands with the puck and menu chart provided
with the software.
WACOM Intuos3 digitizing table

featuring 1024 levels of pressure
sensitivity and pen tilt sensitivity.
Can be used with a normal mouse
or lens cursor
Caution EmbroideryStudio cannot use the Windows-compatible drivers of

some tablets e.g. GTCO and Calcomp tablets. Earlier versions of WinTab do not
free up the COM port, even when it is not in use. This means EmbroideryStudio
is unable to communicate with the digitizing tablet. Check with the tablet
manufacturer to obtain a version of tablet software which will free the port when
not in use. Alternatively, the software may disable or uninstall WinTab, or use
another COM port when working with EmbroideryStudio.
Setting up digitizing tablets

Digitizing tablets generally connect to COM1 but can connect to any available
serial COM port. EmbroideryStudio can only support one tablet at a time. The
format and the preferred pointer display mode must be specified. The display
mode can be set to Point or Stream. If you change this setting on the digitizing
tablet, you must also change it in the software.
Mode
Description
Point
In this mode, the on-screen cursor does not move when you move the digitizer
puck on the tablet. The pointer position on the design window is only updated
when you click a button on the puck.
Stream
In this mode, the pointer position is continuously updated. When you move the
digitizer puck on the tablet, the pointer moves on screen.
To set up a digitizing tablet

1 Connect the digitizing tablet and puck using the accompanying instructions,
and run EmbroideryStudio.
826
Select Digitizer
Click to access
digitizer settings
3 From the Type list, select Digitizer.

4 To change the settings of the existing tablet, select it and click Values.
The Digitizer Setup dialog opens.
Enter name
Select digitizer
format
Select input mode
Click to access
serial port settings
Select COM port
5 In the Name field, enter a name for the digitizing tablet.

6 In the Comment field, enter a comment as required.
7 In the Format panel, select a required digitizer format from the list.
Select from standard digitizer formats or select Auto Detect to automatically
match the format to the connected digitizer.
Note Not all digitizers can be automatically detected by EmbroideryStudio.
For these tablets, you can define a new format or modify existing format
settings. See Customizing digitizing tablet formats for details.
8 From the Input Mode list, select Point or Stream.
This setting must be the same as the one you specified on the digitizing
tablet.
9 From the Port list, select the COM port to which the digitizer is connected.
10 Click Setup to access the serial port settings.
These settings must be the same as those set on the digitizing tablet, or
EmbroideryStudio will not be able to communicate with it. See Serial port
Note If you use Stream mode, you need to set the digitizer to transmit at
20 data packets per second or less. The baud rate for the digitizing tablet and
serial port must both be set to 9600 baud. See Serial port settings for details.
827
Caution To avoid loss of data at high speed, it is important to set up the

digitizer correctly. If it can only transmit at greater than 20 data packets per
second, reduce the baud rate of the digitizer from 9600 baud to 2400 baud.
12 Click Close.
Customizing digitizing tablet formats

If the digitizing tablet format you require is not set up in EmbroideryStudio,
you can create a new format, or modify an existing format to match the output
of your tablet. Before you start, review the documentation provided with the
digitizing tablet, and select a supported format. Use the specified settings to
create the new format in EmbroideryStudio.
Note This functionality is provided for advanced users with knowledge of the
data protocols supported by their digitizing tablet. Only use it if your digitizing
tablet does not work with any existing formats.
To customize a digitizing tablet format
1 Access the Digitizer Setup dialog. See Setting up digitizing tablets for
details.
Select
digitizer
format
Modify existing
format
Create new format
2 In the Format panel:
To modify an existing format, select the format and click Modify.

To define a new format, click New.
The Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog opens.
Enter format
name
Enter format
string for tablet
Enter digitizing
scale
3 In the Format Name field, enter a name for the new or modified format.
4 In the Format String field, enter the format string your digitizing tablet
outputs.
Obtain this information from the digitizing tablet documentation.
5 In the Scale field, enter the scale at which you are digitizing.
828
For example, a scale of 3.0 means your on-screen design will be one third of
the size you digitized.
6 Click OK to return to the Digitizer Setup dialog.
7 Click OK.
Note To set up the digitizing tablet with the new or modified format,
complete the standard setup procedure. See Setting up digitizing tablets for
details.
Registering menu charts

The menu chart provided with the software lets you select commands directly
on the digitizing tablet. Before you can use it, you need to register it. A copy of
the menu chart is provided in this manual together with a key to the menu chart
icons. See Quick Reference for details.
Tip If you prefer to use a bigger or smaller menu chart, scale it e.g. on a
photocopier and register the scaled version.
To register the menu chart
1 Select Special > Tablet.
The Tablet Setup dialog opens.
Select Register
Menu
2 In the Menu Chart panel, select the Register Menu checkbox.

3 Deselect all other checkboxes and click OK.
4 Place the menu chart on the digitizing tablet, leaving room for the
enlargement drawing.
829
5 Click the three menu chart reference points with Button 1 of the digitizing
puck.
Menu Chart Ref
Point 1
Menu Chart Ref
Point 2
Menu Chart Ref
Point 3
Menu Chart
Digitizing Puck
Button 1
Note Unless you move the menu chart, you do not need to register it again.
Preparing enlargement drawings

When you digitize with a tablet, you use an enlargement drawing to trace the
shapes and outlines of the design in the same way you use backdrops on-screen.
Before you start, you need to prepare the enlargement drawing.
To prepare an enlargement drawing
1 Convert the artwork to a technical drawing.
Generally the drawing will be three times larger than the final embroidery.
Tip If the drawing is in hard copy, scale it using a transparency projector or
photocopier. If you used a graphics application to create the artwork, scale it
before you print it out.
2 Modify the drawing to make it suitable for embroidery:
Define shapes that can be easily filled with stitches.

Overlap and distort shapes to compensate for push-pull.
Draw digitizing guidelines e.g. stitch angle lines.
3 Draw origin and rotation reference points.
These points set the position and orientation of the enlargement drawing on
the digitizing tablet.
Tip If the drawing is bigger than the digitizing tablet, enter additional points
to help you shift the drawing as you digitize. See also Shifting enlargement
drawings.
830
4 Write the name and scale of the enlargement drawing for future reference.
Rotation reference
point
Name
Scale
flower
3:1
Origin
Registering enlargement drawings

When you place an enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet, you need to
register it so EmbroideryStudio can interpret the design. To register an
enlargement drawing, enter the scale, and digitize the origin and rotation points
on the tablet. The origin and rotation points should be marked on the
enlargement drawing. If they are not, you need to draw them in.
Note The menu chart and enlargement drawing should not overlap. If they do,
you may need to shift the design as you digitize, or move and re-register the
menu chart. See Shifting enlargement drawings and Registering menu charts.
To register an enlargement drawing
Enter drawing
scale
Select Register
Drawing
Deselect Register
menu
Select Save as
defaults
2 In the Drawing Scale panel, enter the scale of the enlargement drawing.
Tip To calculate the scale, divide the height of the enlargement drawing by
the required height of the final embroidery. Enlargement drawings are
generally prepared at a scale of 3.00.
3 In the Drawing Position panel, select the Register Drawing checkbox.
4 In the Menu Chart panel, deselect the Register Menu checkbox.
831
5 In the Default panel, select the Save as defaults checkbox.

This saves the registration information for this drawing so you do not have to
re-register each time you resume digitizing.
6 Click OK.
7 Place the enlargement drawing on the digitizing tablet.
8 Click the origin and rotation points of the drawing with Button 1 of the
digitizing puck.
This completes the registration.
Rotation reference
point
flower
Origin
3:1
Changing drawing scales

You can change drawing scale during digitizing. When you change the scale,
EmbroideryStudio automatically resizes the object outlines and regenerates
the stitches.
To change the drawing scale
Enter new
drawing scale
Select Resize Design
to Match Drawing
Select Register
Drawing
2 In the Drawing Scale panel, enter the new drawing scale.

Tip To calculate the scale, divide the height the enlargement drawing by the
required height of the final embroidery. Enlargement drawings are generally
prepared at a scale of 3.00.
3 Select the Resize Design to Match Drawing checkbox.
4 In the Drawing Position panel, select the Register Drawing checkbox.
5 Click OK.
6 Digitize the origin and the rotation reference points to re-register at the new
size.
The design is resized to the new scale.
832
Shifting enlargement drawings

If the drawing is bigger than the digitizing tablet, you can move it across the
tablet and continue digitizing. To move a drawing you need to draw, and digitize,
two additional reference points. These points must be over the active part of the
digitizing tablet, both before and after the move.
Note If the enlargement drawing overlaps the menu chart when you shift it,
move the chart and register it again. See also Registering menu charts.
To shift an enlargement drawing
1 Draw additional reference points on the enlargement drawing.
Position the points so that they will be on the active part of the digitizing
tablet both before and after the move.
Tip If you are shifting the drawing up or down, draw the additional reference
points horizontally. If you are shifting the drawing left or right, draw the
reference points vertically.
Deselect Register Drawing

Select Shift Drawing
Deselect Register Menu
3 In the Drawing Position panel, select the Shift Drawing checkbox.

4 Deselect the Register Drawing and Register Menu checkboxes, and click
OK.
5 Click the additional reference points with Button 1 on the digitizing puck.
6 Move the drawing so that the part you want to digitize next is over the active
area of the digitizing tablet, and click the additional reference points again.
833
The drawing is re-registered in the new position.
Using digitizing pucks

With a digitizing tablet, you generally use a puck instead of a mouse to mark
reference points and select commands from the menu chart.
To use a digitizing puck
Position the cross-hairs of the puck over a point on the enlargement drawing
or menu square, then press one of the four buttons.
Butto
n
Mouse or
keybd
equivalent
Digitize corner
point
Digitize corner reference point when digitizing

outlines.
Digitize curve
point
Digitize curve reference point when digitizing

outlines.
Terminate
omitting last stitch
Terminate input omitting last stitch i.e. the

fill is terminated on the opposite side as the
last input point.
Toggle between selected fill stitch type and
input method, and the Run input tool.
Terminate
including last
stitch
Terminate input including last stitch i.e. the

fill is terminated on the same side as the last
input point.
Toggle between selected fill stitch type and
input method, and the Manual input tool.
Function
Description
Selecting preset spacing values

Use the menu chart to select preset spacing values for Satin and Zigzag stitch
types as well as preset stitch lengths for Run and Triple Run objects.
To select preset spacing values
1 Select the stitch type you want to use.
Note For Satin stitch, turn off Auto Spacing.
2 Move the puck over the Spacing 1/2/3/4 menu chart icon and click the
button that corresponds to the preset value you require.
834
Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style with different spacing
values. For example, if the stitch type is Satin, clicking Button 1 accesses
<PRESET_SATIN_1>. Button 2 accesses <PRESET_SATIN_2>, and so on.
Tip The spacing value displays in the Status Bar next to the stitch type.
835
Chapter 39
Changing System Settings
EmbroideryStudio lets you adjust various system settings controlling the

appearance of designs on screen, display of design information, the behavior of
the design window, and other settings.
This section describes how to change the TrueView display, grid spacing and
positioning, and design window scrolling options. It also describes how to save
designs automatically as you work. There is also information about how to adjust
the pointer position display, paste position options, and other general options.
Setting view options

EmbroideryStudio lets you preset options to show or hide design elements such
as stitches, outlines, and background fabric. You can also change TrueView
settings for different viewing effects. Also, adjust display colors and image
viewing options as desired. See also Viewing outlines and stitches.
Setting design element view options

EmbroideryStudio lets you preset options to show or hide design elements such
as stitches, outlines, and background fabric. You can also toggle TrueView on/off
from the Options dialog.
To set design element view options
1 Select View > Design Options.
836
The Options > View Design dialog opens.
Select design
elements to display
2 Select the options to display:

Option
Purpose
TrueView
Shows what the embroidery will look like. See Setting TrueView
Stitches
All stitches in the design are visible.
Outlines
All outlines in the design are visible. See also Viewing outlines and
stitches.
Needle Points
All needle points in the design are visible.
Connectors
All connectors in the design are visible.
Function
Symbols
All function symbols in the design are visible. See also Viewing
needle points, connectors and functions.
Setting TrueView options

Right-click View > TrueView to set options.
Change TrueView settings for different effects. You can:
Change the thickness of the pictured thread

Change the direction of the light source
Set the maximum number of colors to use.
To set TrueView options
1 Right-click TrueView.
Select
TrueView
Click to access
TrueView 0ptions
2 Select the TrueView checkbox and click TrueView Options.
837
The TrueView Options dialog opens.
Select thread thickness

Select light source
Select maximum number of colors
3 Select a thread thickness from the Thread Thickness list.

If you display a design at a zoom factor larger than actual size, select thick
thread for good coverage. This only affects the TrueView display, not the
actual thread thickness values. See also Modifying threads in charts.
4 Select the lighting direction from the Light Source list.
TrueView thick thread, light above
TrueView thin thread, corner light
5 Enter the maximum number of colors to display in TrueView from the Max
Number of Colors list.
6 Click OK.
Setting image viewing options

Use View > Show Bitmaps to show and hide bitmap images. Right-click to set
Use View > Show Vectors to show and hide vector graphics. Right-click to set
You can dim bitmap image backdrops on your screen to make it easier to view
stitches when they are the same color as the image. You can also show colored
vector graphics as outlines only. Dimming, however, only applies to bitmap
images you cannot dim vector graphics. Similarly, you cant show bitmap
images as outlines only.
To set image viewing options
1 Right-click either the Show Bitmap or Show Vectors icon.
Chapter 3 9 Changing System S ettings
838
The Options > View Image dialog opens.
Dim bitmap image

Show vector outlines
2 To dim a bitmap image backdrop, select the Dimmed checkbox.
Original bitmap
image
Dimmed bitmap
image
3 To view a colored vector graphic as outlines, select the Show Wireframe

checkbox.
Original vector
graphic
Vector outlines
only
4 Click OK.
Setting grid display options

You can change grid spacing, select a reference point and turn Snap to Grid on
or off in the Options dialog. By default, rulers and guides are switched on. When
they are switched off, guides are hidden but are stored in the design and will
reappear when switched back on.
Note Each design has its own set of guides and its own zero point for the rulers.
When a design is saved, the ruler zero point and positions of the guides, if any,
are saved with it.
Setting grid display

Right-click View > Show Grid to set grid reference point and spacing.
You also adjust grid spacing as required depending on the size of design you are
working with. Use the Snap to Grid feature to align objects in your design with
the nearest grid lines. You can also align the grid with to a reference point in the
839
design for example, when you want a grid line to intersect the center of the
design, or to sit under a particular object. See also Changing display colors. See
also Displaying the grid.
To set the grid display
1 Right-click Grid.
The Options > Grid and Guides dialog opens.
Select to
display grid
Enter grid
spacing
Click to save for
current template
Select to snap
design points
to grid
2 Select the Show Grid checkbox to turn the grid on if not already activated.
3 Enter Grid Spacing values for horizontal and vertical grid lines.
Grid spacing: 5 mm
Grid spacing: 20 mm
Tip To use these settings as defaults for the current template, click Save.
4 Select the Snap to Grid checkbox as required.
Reference points, control points or leading edges of objects snap to grid
during digitizing, sizing, reshaping, or positioning operations. When any of
840
these operations is taking place, grid lines change color temporarily to

indicate that snap to is active.
Snap to Grid
in X only
Snap to Grid
in X and Y
5 Choose a snap method in the Method list:

Option
Purpose
In X and Y
Snaps objects to the nearest horizontal and vertical grid line

intersection.
In X
Snaps objects to the nearest horizontal grid line.
In Y
Snaps objects to the nearest vertical grid line.
Tip To temporarily disable Snap to Grid as you digitize, hold down Alt.
6 Select the Set Reference Point checkbox to align a significant point of the
design with a grid line or grid point.
For example, you can set the grid reference point to the design center. This
is easier and faster than moving the whole design.
7 Click OK.
If you selected Set Reference Point, mark the reference point on your
design. The grid aligns so that horizontal and vertical grid lines intersect at
this point.
Setting ruler and guides display

Right-click View > Show Grid to set the Snap to Grid and Snap to Guides options.
Right-click View > Show Rulers and Guides to set the Snap to Grid and Snap to
Guides options.
Rulers are located to the top and left side of the design window. The unit of
measurement mm or inches depends on the regional settings in the Windows
Control Panel. The ruler scale, illustrated with numbers and ticks, depends on
the zoom setting. Guides are dotted vertical and horizontal lines placed across
the design window to help you align objects. Rulers must be displayed before a
guide can be created. See also Displaying rulers and guides.
To set the ruler and guides display
1 Right-click Grid or Rulers and Guides.
841
The Options > Grid and Guides dialog opens.

Select to show
rulers and guides
Select to snap
design points to
guides
2 Select the Show Rulers and Guides checkbox if not already activated.
3 Select the Snap to Guides checkbox as required.
Reference points, control points or leading edges of objects snap to guides
during digitizing, sizing, reshaping, or positioning operations.
4 Select the Show Input C Width Guide checkbox as required.
This option activates a special cursor with the
Input C tool. When digitizing an Input C shape, a
circle appears at the cursor position corresponding
to the current width setting in the Object
Properties dialog. This is useful when digitizing a
border based on a background image. The width
guide shows you where the two sides of the border
will be located when the final stitching is generated.
When the offset is biased, two circles are shown,
one for each side. See Digitizing simple borders for
details.
Note To gain the benefit of the width guide, you
must accept the current width setting by pressing Enter, rather than
digitizing reference points after finishing the centerline.
5 Click OK.
Tip To temporarily disable Snap to Guides as you digitize, hold down Alt.
Setting scrolling options

The Options > Scrolling tab allows you to control the behavior of both mouse
and mouse wheel within EmbroideryStudio. Use Auto Scroll to scroll
automatically within the design window while digitizing. This can be more
convenient than using panning or scroll bars, especially when working on large
designs. The dialog also allows you to set four different mouse wheel behaviors
based on your selection of default options. Whenever a setting is changed, the
system will recommend the other mouse wheel behaviors, but you have
complete control to change as desired.
To set scrolling options
842
2 Select the Scrolling tab.
Select Auto Scroll and Move

Pointer After Scroll
Adjust auto-scroll speed

and pointer position
Select desired action for

your mouse wheel
3 Adjust Auto Scroll options as required:

Option
Purpose
Auto Scroll
Tick checkbox to enable automatic scrolling while digitizing.
Move Pointer After Tick checkbox to force pointer to move with the current cursor
Scroll
position after each scroll.
Response Time
Enter smaller values to increase scrolling speed.
The effect of the Auto Scroll setting only becomes apparent when you start
to digitize. The design window automatically scrolls to follow the current
cursor position.
4 Select the pointer position after scrolling from the Move Pointer To list:
Option
Purpose
Center
Center of the window. Use this setting for large movements.
Midway
Halfway between the original pointer position and the center of the
window. Use this setting for smaller movements e.g. when zooming
into a small area of the design.
Corner
The edge of the screen. Use this setting for slow scrolling.
5 Set the precise behavior of your mouse wheel action as desired.

The same four options are available for use when deploying the mouse wheel
on its own or in combination with Alt, Ctrl, and Shift keystrokes. That is, you
can program the wheel to scroll horizontally, vertically, or zoom by preset
factors.
6 Tick Center Pointer when Zooming to ensure that the pointer stays
centered on screen at all times.
7 Click OK.
843
Tip Hold down the Shift key to temporarily deactivate Auto Scroll.
Setting reshape options

Right-click Toolbox > Reshape Tools Flyout > Reshape Object to set reshaping
options.
Stitch generation during reshaping operations can slow down your system,
depending on your computer specification. The Reshape options let you choose
whether stitches are generated immediately or only after Enter is pressed. This
tab also controls node dragging behavior in Reshape operations as well as
resequencing behavior in cutting (Knife tool) operations.
To set automatic stitch generation options
1 Right-click the Reshape Object icon.
The Options > Reshape dialog opens.
Select object types for

immediate stitch
generation
2 Select options for generating stitches immediately after reshaping operations

i.e. for lettering objects, motif runs, and/or other objects.
3 Click OK.
If left unchecked, any reshaping changes made are not updated until Enter
is pressed.
To set drag node behavior
1 Right-click the Reshape Object icon.
Select preferred drag

node behavior
2 Select your preferred left mouse drag node behavior Traditional or Bzier.
844
Generally, bzier node dragging preserves the shape of the curve more
nearly on both sides of the node. See Reshaping objects with Bzier controls
for details.
Original curve
Bzier curve
Traditional curve
To set object cutter reordering behavior

1 Right-click the Reshape Object or Knife icon.
Select preferred
object cutting
reordering behavior
2 Select your preferred object-cutting reordering behavior.

EmbroideryStudio orders fragment objects resulting from cutting (Knife
tool) operations into a closest-join sequence that preserves the source
objects entry and exit points. There are three possible ways of reordering
fragment objects:
Reorder and create travel runs between objects separated by gap.

Reorder, trimming between separated objects where necessary, but
creating no travel runs.
Combine fragments into a single branched object corresponding to the
source object.
The option you choose will affect all Knife tool cutting operations. See Cutting
shapes manually for details.
Tip The Break Apart tool allows you to split branched objects, including
objects resulting from cutting operations, into their component parts. See
Breaking apart branched objects for details.
Setting automatic save and backup options

Save your work automatically at regular intervals using Auto Save. This
protects you from losing work in the event of hardware or software failure. Auto
Save creates a temporary file with the extension EMA in the RECOVER folder.
This is automatically restored when EmbroideryStudio is loaded after a
computer crash. It contains the last changes made to any design open at the
time. With the Always Create Backup Copy option selected, a backup copy of
the current design file is also automatically created in its previously saved
form. This protects you from overwriting the design with unintended changes
845
e.g. using the Save option instead of Save As to save a modified design while
preserving the original.
To set automatic save and backup options
2 Select the General tab.
Select to
auto-save designs
Select to
auto-backup designs
3 Select the Auto Save Design Every checkbox if not already activated.
4 Enter the auto-save frequency in the Minutes field.
Tip Current designs are saved to the RECOVER folder with the extension
EMA. You can access these files manually by browsing to the folder
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\RECOVER and
renaming files from EMA to EMB.
5 To create a backup every time you save a design, select the Always Create
Backup Copy checkbox.
The design will be saved in the BACKUP folder of your Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0 installation. It has the same name as the original file
with the extension BAK. Access backup files manually by browsing to the
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\BACKUP folder
and renaming the file from a BAK to EMB.
Caution Backup files remain in the BACKUP folder until you delete them. To
prevent the folder from using too much hard disk space, delete unwanted files
regularly.
6 Click OK.
Tip Backup files should be kept in a separate physical location, preferably
off-site.
Setting pointer position display

When you move the mouse or digitizer puck, the pointer position is displayed in
the Status bar at the bottom of the screen. You can optionally display the
pointer position relative to the last digitized point or stitch point, or as an
absolute value from the first needle point of the design.
846
Interpreting pointer position values

The X and Y values show the horizontal and vertical distance of the pointer from
the relative or absolute point. The L value is the length of the line connecting
two points, while A is the angle of that line, relative to the horizontal.
Length = 33.47 mm
Length = 33.47 mm
Y = -17.38 mm
Y = 17.38 mm
X = 28.61 mm
X: horizontal
X = - 28.61 mm
2
Y: vertical
L: length
A: angle
Status bar
A negative X value indicates that the second point was placed to the left of the
first point, while a negative Y value displays when the second point is below the
first. Negative angles indicate angles of more than 180 e.g. an angle of -60
is equal to 300.
90
2
135
45
180
A = 30
1
-135
-45
-90
Tip You can measure onscreen distances using the values in the Status Bar.
See Measuring distances on screen for details.
Setting pointer position display options

You can optionally display the pointer position relative to the last digitized point
or stitch point, or as an absolute value from the first needle point of the design.
To set pointer position display options
Select relative or
absolute pointer
position
847
3 Select a Relative or Absolute setting for the pointer:

Option
Purpose
Relative
Shows pointer position relative to the last digitized point or stitch point.
Useful while digitizing or editing stitches.
Absolute
Shows pointer position as an absolute value from the first needle point
of the design. Useful for checking that the design fits a given area.
4 Click OK.
Tip You can change the appearance of the pointer, so it displays as a
cross-hair. See Setting other general options for details.
Setting inserted embroidery file options

Whenever you copy and paste or insert an embroidery design or element from
one file to another, the respective color palettes are merged. You have the option
of adding the source palette to the target palette or of matching the source
palette to the nearest colors in the target palette.
To set inserted embroidery file options
Select inserted
embroidery file option
3 Select an inserted embroidery file option:

Option
Purpose
Add to Palette
Unique colors in the design are added to the current color palette.
Match to Palette When you insert a design, colors are matched to the current color
palette. The system finds the nearest match based first on RGB
values, and then on Brand and Code.
Colors added
to palette
Colors matched
to palette
4 Click OK.
848
Setting paste position options

You can control where an object is positioned when pasted into a design. If you
are pasting within the same design, the default is the same position from which
the object was copied or cut. Other paste position options are available.
Note Paste options control the physical position of the object in the design, not
its position in the stitching sequence.
To set paste position options
Select paste position

setting
3 Select a Paste position setting:

Option
Purpose
Object Property
Position
Objects are pasted according to the coordinates in the Object

Properties dialog.
Shift Pasted Objects
Objects are pasted slightly offset from their original position.
Center at Current
Stitch
Objects are centered at the current needle position marker.
Start at Current Stitch Objects are positioned after the current needle position
marker.
4 Click OK.
Shift Pasted Objects pasted object offset

from original
Setting Object Property apply options

The most important dialog in EmbroideryStudio is the Object Properties
dialog. This is a modeless dialog, meaning that it stays in the design window as
long as you need it. By default, modified object properties to take effect
immediately. Alternatively, set the default to apply settings by means of the
control buttons at the bottom of the Object Properties dialog.
849
To set Object Property apply options

1 Select Special > Options.
Select object
properties default
3 Select the required Object Properties option. See also Accessing object
properties.
Option
Purpose
Apply Changes
Immediately
Any changes made to selected objects via the Object Properties

dialog take effect immediately.
Use Apply Button Any changes made to selected objects via the Object Properties
dialog take effect after pressing the Apply button.
4 Click OK.
Setting other general options

Use the View > Design Options > General dialog to:
Set the embroidery object join method to use while digitizing.

Set stitch counts to display as cumulative totals
Turn the small stitch filter on and off
Change cursor type
Check design integrity
Display design source when opening designs that may not scale well
Display measure tooltip when using the Measure command.
To set other general options
Select other
general options
850
3 Select one or more of these options:

Option
Purpose
Closest Join
The Closest Join method (the default) automatically calculates

closest join between objects while digitizing. When deactivated,
entry/exit points of all newly digitized objects are set manually.
See Embroidery digitizing methods for details.
Play Button Sounds Enables beeping sounds made by the software in response to
mouse clicks and pressing Enter or Spacebar keys while
digitizing.
Cumulative Stitch
Count
Displays stitch count as a cumulative total in the Stop Sequence

tab of the Information dialog. See also Viewing design
information in EmbroideryStudio.
Run Small Stitch

Filter on Output
Automatically removes small stitches when the file is output to

disk or machine.
Cross Hair Cursor
Changes the default cursor pointer to cross-hairs for more

precise positioning. It is best used together with the grid.
Always Check
Design Integrity
Checks design integrity when opening a design and during

digitizing.
Show Auto-Fabric
Assistant
When activated, the Auto-Fabric Assistant dialog displays

whenever File > New is selected. See Creating and opening
Show Measure
Tooltip
Shows length and angle in a tooltip when measuring distances

on screen. See Measuring distances on screen for details.
Show Design
Source
Issues a warning dialog when opening designs that may not

scale well i.e. where the design is a converted stitch or
non-EMB outline format.
Tip Use the tooltip with the crosshair cursor on for a more accurate
measurement.
4 Click OK.
851
PART IX
DESIGN MANAGEMENT
ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and browsing
embroidery designs. With this tool, you can browse design files stored on your
computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk. It recognizes all design file formats
used by EmbroideryStudio.
Embroidery Clipart
This section describes how to view, search and sort embroidery clipart. It also
explains how to record it and manage keywords. See Embroidery Clipart for
details.
ES Design Explorer basics
This section describes how to use ES Design Explorer to access and view designs
in folders. It also covers cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting designs in
folders. See ES Design Explorer Basics for details.
ES Design Explorer advanced functions
This section describes the more advanced workings of ES Design Explorer from
sorting files to stitching, punching, and converting designs. It also describes how
to print and publish catalogs of designs, as well as how to archive dormant or
unused designs. See ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions for details.
Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage designs in folders. It is not a
multi-user database for company-wide design management. Wilcom
DesignWorkflow is a central design storage and management application. Any
design format that can be read by EmbroideryStudio can be stored in
DesignWorkflow. DesignWorkflow uses Microsoft SQL technology and is a true
multi-user tool, allowing far greater control of designs throughout your
company. For this type of requirement, refer to the DesignWorkflow User
Manual.
852
Chapter 40
Embroidery Clipart
The Embroidery Clipart feature is a powerful productivity tool which allows you
to recycle commonly used elements and improve the process of creating new
designs. Use the clipart library to permanently store useful elements and assign
keywords to them. Summary information such as width and height, number of
stitches and colors is automatically recorded.
The library displays all design elements currently recorded to your personal
database. Behind this functionality is the powerful Microsoft Database Engine or
MSDE. Sort and search functionality is provided to filter your list according to
name, keywords, number of colors, or number of stitches. Once a suitable
design element is located, simply drag-and-drop it as embroidery clipart into
the current project. Automatically find the nearest match between selected
clipart element colors and the current palette.
Note Used in conjunction with DesignWorkflow, the Embroidery Clipart library
allows you to share embroidery elements between multiple users. Available as
a cost option, DesignWorkflow is an embroidery design centralization and
management solution for businesses that share embroidery files across a
network. It can serve as the repository for your designs and design elements
making the task of securing, searching for, and managing your assets much
easier.
This section describes how to view, search and sort embroidery clipart. It also
explains how to record it and manage keywords.
Viewing and selecting embroidery clipart

Click Clipart > Show Clipart to open the embroidery clipart.
Use Embroidery Clipart dialog > Add/Match to Palette to find the nearest match
between the selected clipart element colors and the color palette.
The Embroidery Clipart library displays all design elements currently recorded to
your personal database. You may want to put together a design such as a wreath
with components such as ribbons, leaves, fruit and flowers. With the Clipart
Library this becomes a simple task.
To view and select embroidery clipart
1 Click the Show Clipart icon.
853
The Embroidery Clipart dialog opens. The design elements currently

recorded are displayed.
Search for names or

keywords
Click to sort by name,

color or stitches
Scroll to browse
Toggle Match to Palette on or off
The dialog consists of three main sections:

Section
Purpose
Search For panel Allows you to specify either names or keywords to search the
library for a specific design. There is also a dropdown list to specify
the sorting order.
Clipart panel
Contains thumbnail images of designs in the clipart library, ready to

be dragged and dropped onto the design window.
Toolbar
Contains three icons Properties, Add/Match To Palette, and

Search Web Clipart.
2 Click-and-drag the dialog to any position you require.

The dialog is modeless and can stay on screen while you work.
3 Browse the library using the scroll bar.
You can use the search and sort functions. See Searching and sorting
embroidery clipart for details.
4 Click a clipart thumbnail to select, or hover your mouse over it to view
summary information.
Hover cursor
over thumbnail
Chapter 40 Embroider y C lipar t
854
Note Before using the clipart in your design, decide whether to toggle Match
to Palette on or off:
Option
Purpose
On
When you insert your clipart, its colors are matched to the current color
palette.
Off
Unique colors in the clipart are added to the current color palette.
See also Setting inserted embroidery file options.
Colors added
to palette
Colors matched
to palette
5 Drag-and-drop the design element into the design window to open.

Alternatively, right-click the thumbnail and select Insert from the popup
menu.
Right-click and
select Insert
Searching and sorting embroidery clipart

There are more efficient ways of finding an appropriate design element than
scrolling and browsing through your entire library. Depending on what you
intend to do, it is helpful to narrow the search for design elements which best
suit your purpose.
Sorting the clipart library

You can sort the clipart thumbnails by different criteria.
To sort the clipart library
The Embroidery Clipart dialog opens.
855
2 Click the Sort by list.

Select to sort by name
and number of colors or
stitches
3 Select:
Option
Ascending or Descending ...
Name
To sort by names alphabetically from A to Z or in reverse order.
Colors
To sort by number of colors.
Stitches
To sort by number of stitches.
Searching the clipart library by name

You can search the clipart thumbnails by names.
To search the clipart library by name
deer
Enter name
Click to search
2 Type in the name you want to find in the Names field.

Tip You can use a wildcard if unsure of the exact name:
Use asterisk (*) at the end of a string of letters. The asterisk (*) must be
placed at the end of the string it cannot appear at the beginning or in the
middle of the string.
Use a question mark (?) if you are not sure of an individual character in a
name e.g. T?re will return both Tyre and Tire. The question mark (?)
must be used as a substitute for a single character in a name.
856
3 Click Search.
Searching the clipart library by keyword

You can search the clipart thumbnails by keywords.
To search the clipart library by keyword
Click to select keywords
deer
Click to search
2 Click the Browse button next to the Keywords field.

The Keywords dialog opens.
Key in letters
to filter list
Select keyword
to search
Animals
Aquatic
Architecture
Food
Household
Plants
Science
Shapes
Sport
Transport
Click to move to selected

keywords list
Click to remove from
selected keywords list
Click to remove all from
selected keywords list
Note Alternatively, simply enter keyword(s) in the Keywords field with a

space between them.
3 Key in required letters to filter the keywords list as required.
4 Select a keyword and click the Move button or double-click to move it to the
Selected Keywords column.
Note To remove a keyword from the Selected Keywords list, select it and
double-click or click the Remove button. To remove all the selected keywords
click the Remove All button.
857
5 Click OK to transfer selected keywords to the Keywords search field.

6 Click Search.
All clipart elements associated with the selected keywords are displayed in
the list.
Recording embroidery clipart

Use the Record to Clipart function to record design elements or even an entire
design to the clipart library. Assign a name and keywords to each design element
you record.
Recording designs to the clipart library

Use Clipart > Record to Clipart to record a design to the embroidery clipart.
The Record to Clipart option is enabled when at least one embroidery object
is selected. Use it to record design elements or even an entire design.
To record a design to the clipart library
1 Select a design you want to record.
2 Click the Record to Clipart icon.
The Record to Clipart dialog opens.
Assign name
Preview
Click to move to assigned

keywords list
Animals
Aquatic
Architecture
Food
Household
Plants
Science
Shapes
Click to remove from

assigned keywords list
Click to remove all from
assigned keywords list
Click to add keyword
Note Design information, such as number of colors and stitches, height,

width, and date and time created, cannot be modified. You can, however,
overwrite the default numeric name.
3 Enter a meaningful name for the design in the Name field.
4 Assign one or more keywords. See Assigning keywords to clipart for details.
5 Click OK.
Assigning keywords to clipart

858
Click Embroidery Clipart dialog > Clipart Properties to set properties for selected
objects.
Keywords play an important part in organizing the clipart library. This is
especially so as it grows in size and diversity. Finding a suitable design element
can take time but searching on keywords speeds up the process by narrowing
the selection. Any number of keywords can be assigned to the same clipart
element.
To assign keywords to clipart
2 Select a clipart thumbnail.
3 Open the clipart properties dialog by any of the following means:
Double-click the thumbnail.

Click the Object Properties icon on the Embroidery Clipart dialog.
Right-click the thumbnail and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Clipart Properties dialog opens.
Select keyword
Animals
Aquatic
Architecture
Food
Household
Plants
Science
Shapes
Assign keywords to
design element
Click to add
keyword
4 Click New to create a new keyword.

The Add Keyword dialog opens.
Nature
Type in new
keyword
5 Click OK.
6 Select a keyword and click the Move button or double-click to move it to the
Selected Keywords column.
Note To remove a keyword from the Selected Keywords list, select it and
double-click or click the Remove button. To remove all the selected keywords
click the Remove All button.
859
7 Click OK.
Selected keywords are associated with the clipart. These can now be used
during clipart searches. See Searching and sorting embroidery clipart for
details.
Managing keywords
Managing keywords is an essential part maintaining the clipart library efficiently.
You can add keywords to your list for future use without having to assign them
to a particular design. You can also remove keywords and modify them with the
Manage Keywords feature.
Adding, modifying and deleting keywords

Use Clipart > Manage Keywords to manage keywords for the clipart.
Manage keywords by adding, modifying or deleting keywords.
To add, modify and delete keywords
1 Click the Manage Keywords icon.
The Manage Keywords dialog opens.
Animals
Aquatic
Architecture
Food
Household
Plants
Science
Shapes
Sport
Transport
Click to add
Click to modify
Click to delete
2 Click Add or press Alt+A to add a keyword.

The Add Keyword dialog opens.
Balloon
Type in keyword
3 Enter a keyword and click OK.

The keyword is added to the list.
4 To modify a keyword, select and click Modify or press Alt+M.
860
The Modify Keyword dialog opens.
Baboon
Enter new Kekeyword

Animals
Aquatic
Architecture
Food
Household
Plants
Science
Shapes
Sport
Transport
5 Enter a new keyword or select a replacement keyword from the list.

6 Click OK.
The old keyword is replaced with the new one in the Manage Keywords
dialog.
7 To remove a keyword, select and click Delete or press Alt+D.
You are prompted to confirm deletion.
8 Click OK.
The keywords list is updated. Clips using old keywords will be updated with
any modified keywords.
Importing and exporting keywords

Use Clipart > Manage Keywords to manage keywords for the embroidery clipart.
Aside from adding, modifying and deleting keywords, you can manage your
keyword collection by exporting to a text file. You can later restore keywords by
re-importing the text file.
To import or export keywords
1 Click the Manage Keywords icon.
861
The Manage Keywords dialog opens.
Animals
Aquatic
Architecture
Food
Household
Plants
Science
Shapes
Sport
Transport
Click to import
Click to export
2 To import keywords, click Import or press Alt+I.

Browse proper location
Select to import
Only Text (TXT)

format available
3 Browse and select the text file you want to import.

4 Click Open.
Keywords are imported to the Manage Keywords dialog.
Note When you import keywords, only unique keywords are appended to any
existing list. Duplicates are ignored.
5 To export the keywords in the list, click Export or press Alt+E.
Browse proper location
Type in file name
6 Browse and type in a filename.

7 Click Save.
862
The keywords are saved to a text file where each keyword is written to a
separate line.
Animals
Aquatic
Architecture
Food
Funiture
Household
Nature
Plants
Science
Shapes
Sport
Transport
Setting DesignWorkflow as an Enterprise Engine

When you install EmbroideryStudio, the Embroidery Clipart feature is installed
with the Microsoft Database Engine or MSDE together with a sample clipart
library. When you first open the library, it displays all the design elements
currently recorded to your personal sample database installation. However, if
you are running DesignWorkflow on a company-wide network, you may want to
share the Embroidery Clipart library across the entire organization. It is a
relatively simple matter for the DW Administrator to configure a dedicated
Embroidery Clipart database and provide all users with a Microsoft Database
Engine file shortcut to connect to the database.
Note Used in conjunction with DesignWorkflow, the Embroidery Clipart library
allows you to share embroidery elements between multiple users. Available as
a cost option, DesignWorkflow is an embroidery design centralization and
management solution for businesses that share embroidery files across a
network. It can serve as the repository for your designs and design elements
making the task of securing, searching for, and managing your assets much
easier.
To set DesignWorkflow as an Enterprise Engine
1 Select Special > Clipart > Set Design Workflow as Enterprise Engine.
Browse to network
location
Select UDL to
connect to
Only UDL format

available
2 Browse to the location of the supplied UDL file.

3 Select and click Open.
863
Your clipart library will be linked to the enterprise clipart database. This
means that any design elements you record to the clipart library can be
accessed by all other users of the clipart database.
Note If you do not have the DesignWorkflow option activated on your
dongle, the menu will display a Learn Design Workflow Engine option.
This explains the benefits of using the engine across the enterprise.
864
Chapter 41
ES Design Explorer Basics
ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for viewing and managing

embroidery designs. With this design management tool, you can browse design
files stored on your computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk, as well as cut,
copy, paste and delete them. It recognizes all design file formats used by
EmbroideryStudio. See also Supported Machine, File and Disk Types.
Note ES Design Explorer helps you manage designs in folders. It is not a
multi-user database for company-wide design management. For this type of
requirement, refer to the DesignWorkflow User Manual.
This section describes how to use ES Design Explorer to access and view designs
in folders. It also covers cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting designs in
folders.
Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing designs

ES Design Explorer does not require a separate installation. It works as an
integral part of Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 and is easy to set up and get
started. ES Design Explorer displays thumbnails and limited design information
whenever a design folder is accessed. You can filter the contents of the display
window to show only certain file types. You can also rename folders, add
sub-folders and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer.
Opening ES Design Explorer

Double-click the desktop icon to open ES Design Explorer. EmbroideryStudio
will open by default.
Navigating to design folders with ES Design Explorer is very similar to browsing

with Windows Explorer. Your access to design folders on your network is only
limited by network access rights determined by your System Administrator.
ES Design Explorer lets you view any supported design file type residing in
design folders. See also Supported Machine, File and Disk Types.
Note If you start ES Design Explorer from the desktop or from the Windows
Start button, EmbroideryStudio will also open. If your computer is slow or you
have many applications running, ES Design Explorer may not open.
To open ES Design Explorer
1 Double-click the ES Design Explorer icon on the Windows desktop.
ES Design Explorer and EmbroideryStudio open in separate windows.
ES Design Explorer defaults to the Samples - EmbroideryStudio_e2.0
folder, showing all of your EMB designs as thumbnails.
865
Tip If EmbroideryStudio is hiding ES Design Explorer from view, switch

between them using the Windows Alt+Tab function.
Change Design View
Menu bar
Toolbar
Files dropdown
Folder listing
Design thumbnails
contained in
selected folder
Split bar
Status bar
Note The thumbnail image generation process can be very slow on older
machines or if there are a lot of designs in the selected folder. Holding down
the Alt key will abort the redraw. The thumbnail will be drawn using a default
yellow exclamation mark. This does not mean that the design is missing. See
also Locating missing files.
2 Drag the split bar between the folders and thumbnails to the left or to the
right to resize the window sections.
3 To find a design which is not in the current folder e.g. C:\Designs use
the folder listing to locate the required folder.
Tip If not all drives or folders are displayed, click the + to the left of My
Computer to show all local and network drives available to your PC.
4 Click a folder in the folder listing to display its contents in the display window.
You can list the folder contents in different ways. See Viewing design
Tip Close ES Design Explorer in View > Design List mode so that it opens
more quickly next time. See Displaying design thumbnails and summary
information for details.
Displaying design thumbnails and summary information

Click Change Design View to select thumbnails only, thumbnails with stitching
details, or summary information only.
The designs in ES Design Explorer can be listed as thumbnails only (the default),
thumbnails and summary information, or design information only.
Tip Designs can also be displayed full screen using EmbroideryStudio. See
Opening designs in EmbroideryStudio for details.
Chapter 41 ES Design Explorer Basics
866
To display design thumbnails and summary information

1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a folder. See Viewing design properties
for details.
2 Use the viewing options to view designs in the display format you require:
To display the designs as thumbnails only, click the Change Design View
icon and select Thumbnails from the dropdown menu. Or, select View >
Design Thumbnails.
To display the designs as thumbnails with stitching details, click the

Change Design View icon and select Summary from the dropdown
menu. Or, select View > Design Thumbnails and Summary.
To display the designs in a detailed list, click the Change Design View
icon and select List from the dropdown menu. Or, select View > Design
List. By default, designs are listed showing design name, file size, file
type, version, etc. See also Customizing design lists.
Note The number of selected designs is displayed in the status bar at the
bottom of the ES Design Explorer window.
Viewing designs in the whole window

Click Show/Hide folders to hide the folder listing.
867
It is often more convenient to view designs in folders and databases in the whole
window. When doing so, you can always browse for designs using the Look In
list or Browse Location option.
To view designs in the whole window
1 Click the Show/Hide folders icon.
Designs are now viewable across the window.
Click to run in
full-screen mode
2 To view designs in another folder, select from the Look in dropdown list.
Tip Alternatively, select View > Browse Location to open the Browse for
Folder dialog.
Viewing zipped designs in folders

ES Design Explorer lets you archive and view design files in folders which have
been archived by means of the popular WinZip utility. This is a software program
which bundles files into a single compressed file with the extension *.ZIP. This
can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. See also Archiving
design files.
868
To view zipped designs in folders

1 Open ES Design Explorer and browse to the folder containing the zipped
design files.
Zipped design
file appears in
folder listing
Zipped design
names appear in
italics
If the folder contains individually zipped designs, these will appear directly
in the display window. The file name will appear in italics.
If the folder contains zipped files containing multiple designs, these will
appear in the folder listing.
2 Select the zipped file to view its contents.
Locating missing files

If users incorrectly move files, the normal design thumbnail is usually replaced
by a missing design thumbnail when ES Design Explorer is next opened. Each
color indicates the likely cause:
Icon
Description
This means that ES Design Explorer cannot find the design file. Replace
missing files from backup or another source. If this is not possible, delete the
record or refresh the directory. See also Refreshing the display.
This means that ES Design Explorer has found an up-to-date thumbnail but
doesnt recognize the format. Use Validate and Refresh to update the
display. ES Design Explorer will try to make a replacement next time the
folder is opened or refreshed. See also Refreshing the display.
ES Design Explorer recognizes a pre-determined set of file types as per the
file type dropdown list. If it sees a design that has the required file suffix
EMB, BMP, etc but it is unable to read the file, it will display the green
question mark. Locate the file and delete it.
Adjusting view settings

ES Design Explorer allows you to customize window settings. It lets you
customize the toolbar layout. You can switch between locales English, French,
German, etc at any time. Occasionally you may need to refresh the display.
869
You can also change the way selected designs are highlighted, whether
thumbnail files are created, and so on. ES Design Explorer even lets you
customize design lists to display only the fields you require in any order you
prefer.
Changing locale
During installation of the ES Design Explorer software, optional languages
(locales) can be selected for dialogs and messages e.g. English, French,
German, etc. You can switch between these locales at any time after installation.
Caution If the default locale is not the same as the language of the Operating
System, then this option will not work properly. See also locale in Windows Help
for information about changing Windows to suit different locales.
To change locale
1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer for details.
2 Select View > Change Locale to open the locale required.
The Choose Locale dialog opens.
Note Only those locales selected when ES Design Explorer was installed will
be listed.
3 Select the locale required, and click OK to make the change.
Tip See also locale in Windows Help for information about changing
keyboards, fonts and so on to suit different locales.
Refreshing the display

Occasionally, your screen will not show changes you have made until you refresh
the display. Changes to folders may not display either until you refresh the folder
listing. If graphics and thumbnails still do not appear correctly, or if you have
updated your Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 software, you may need to
validate and refresh.
To refresh the display
To refresh the display window, select View > Refresh, or press F5.
To refresh folders in the folder listing, select View > Refresh Folder.
Alternatively, select the node or folder you want to refresh, right-click and
select Refresh Folder from the popup menu.
To validate and refresh a folder, select View > Validate and Refresh.
870
Tip Occasionally, ES Design Explorer displays red, blue or green question

marks and a short description instead of a graphic thumbnail. See Locating
missing files for details.
Modifying user preferences

Select User Preferences (View menu) to set design view user preferences.
You can change several default settings in ES Design Explorer:
the way selected designs are highlighted

what happens when you double-click designs.
To modify user preferences
2 Select View > User Preferences.
The User Preferences dialog opens.
Set user
preferences
3 In the Options panel, select Highlight in Full to fully highlight each

thumbnail as it is selected.
If you only require selected thumbnail borders to be highlighted, clear
Highlight in Full.
Tip The color and intensity of highlights can be changed in the Windows
Control Panel to suit each user. See Windows Help for details about Display
Settings.
4 In the Double-click Options panel, select either:
Open Design: if you want the normal Windows action when you
double-click a design name or thumbnail, or
Show Properties: if you want to open the Properties dialog for designs
that you double-click.
5 Click OK to save the settings.
Tip If you need more space in the display window for viewing thumbnails,
click the Hide/Show folder listing button.
Customizing design lists

ES Design Explorer lets you customize design lists to display only the fields you
require in any order you prefer.
871
To customize design lists

1 To display the designs in a detailed list, click the Change Design View icon
and select List from the dropdown menu. Or, select View > Design List.
By default, designs are listed showing design name, file size, file type,
version, etc.
Select Customize
Column
2 Right-click the column header and select the Customize Column from the
popup menu. Alternatively, select View > Customize Columns > Design
List.
The Columns dialog opens.
Click to reorder
selected fields
Select/deselect fields
to include/exclude in
listing
Click to hide
selected fields
3 Exclude a field from the listing by deselcting the associated checkbox.

Alternatively, highlight the field and select Hide.
4 Adjust the order of selected fields with the Move Up and Move Down
buttons.
Alternatively, select the column header in list view and drag-and-drop to a
new location.
Drag-and-drop
header to new
location
872
Browsing designs in folders

Information about designs in folders can be viewed in the Properties dialog.
Designs can then be browsed using navigation buttons and slide show buttons
on this dialog.
Tip You can also filter the contents of any design folder to show only certain
types of file e.g. EMB only. See Sorting files in folders for details.
Viewing design properties

Click Design Properties to view information about selected designs.
Information about designs in folders can be viewed in the Properties dialog.
The data is extracted directly from design files created in EmbroideryStudio.
You cannot add, delete and edit these fields.
Tip Designs in folders can be browsed using navigation buttons and slide show
buttons on the Properties dialog. See Sorting files in folders for details.
To view design properties
1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Viewing design
2 Double-click a design or click the Design Properties icon.
The Properties dialog opens showing all stitch information derived from the
design file together with user-defined information.
Stitch information from the design file appears grayed out and cannot be
edited. The Design, Description, and Selected fields are ranged across the
top of the dialog. Use the Selected field at the top of the dialog to select or
deselect designs in the main window as you move between designs. See
Sorting files in folders for details.
873
Tip If not all text is visible in a field, select the field and use the Arrow, Home
and End keys to scroll. Alternatively, resize the dialog.
3 Click OK to close.
Browsing through designs in folders

Navigation buttons on the Properties dialog allow you to move forwards,
backwards, as well as to the start and end of all designs in the selected folder.
Similarly, you can move forward and back through selected designs. As you
browse, the Properties dialog displays a thumbnail together with relevant
design information.
Tip When you find the design you want, right-click the name or thumbnail and
select Open with Wilcom EmbroideryStudio to open it in EmbroideryStudio.
Or choose File > Open to open bitmap images in a third-party graphics
program.
To browse through designs in a folder
1 Open ES Design Explorer and select a design folder. See Opening ES Design
Explorer for details.
2 Select or sort the designs as required. See also Sorting files in folders.
3 Open the Properties dialog. See Viewing design properties for details.
Navigation buttons
Click to select
or deselect
designs
4 Browse through the entire folder or a selection of designs as required.

Folder navigation
start
end
Selection navigation
start
end
If you want to browse the entire folder, use the red navigation buttons.
These allow you to move to the first design, last design, previous design
and next design in the folder.
If you want to browse through selected designs, use the blue navigation
buttons.
These allow you to move to the first selected design, last selected design,
previous selected design and next selected design in the folder.
5 Click OK.
Browsing designs using slide show buttons

All designs in folder can be displayed as a slide show. The slide show is run from
the Properties dialog which displays each designs thumbnail together with
relevant information. You can control the speed and direction of the slide show.
874
To browse designs using slide show buttons

2 Select or sort the designs as required. See also Sorting files in folders.
3 Open the Properties dialog. See Viewing design properties for details.
Slide show buttons
Stop
Backwards
Fast/Slow
Forwards
4 Click the Forwards or Backwards button to start the slide show.

The slide show automatically scrolls through every design in the folder.
5 Click + or - to increase or decrease the speed.
6 Click the Stop button to stop.
Accessing designs in folders

ES Design Explorer lets you select designs residing in folders. Once selected, you
can manipulate them in a variety of ways e.g. cutting, copying, pasting, editing
the record, and converting designs to other formats. You can also open designs
in EmbroideryStudio directly from ES Design Explorer for viewing or editing.
Tip With the file selected, right-click to open a popup menu which includes
frequently used commands.
Selecting designs in folders

Designs must be selected before an action can be performed e.g. view, open
or copy a design. A group of designs, a range, or all the designs in a database
can be selected. A group is made up of any selected designs. A range is a series
of consecutive designs.
To select designs in a folder
2 Display designs as thumbnails or as a details list. See Displaying design
thumbnails and summary information for details.
Tip The thumbnail image generation process can be very slow on older
machines or if there are a lot of designs in the database. Holding down the
Alt key will abort the redraw. The thumbnail will be drawn using a default
yellow exclamation mark.
3 Sort designs by required category e.g. sort by customer to list each
customers designs consecutively. See Sorting files in folders for details.

875
To select all designs in the current folder, select Edit > Select All or click
Ctrl+A.
5 To deselect all selected designs, select Edit > Deselect All, or click any
unselected design.
Tip To deselect a single design amongst a group of selected designs, click it
again while holding down the Ctrl key.
Opening designs in EmbroideryStudio

Click Open Design to open a selected design or designs into EmbroideryStudio.
Any designs selected in the ES Design Explorer display window can be opened
in EmbroideryStudio for viewing or editing.
To open designs in EmbroideryStudio
Tip If you want to open several designs at once, select the details list view.
See Displaying design thumbnails and summary information for details.
3 Click the Open Design icon.
All selected files are opened.
4 Alternatively, if displaying designs as thumbnails, double-click a single design
thumbnail.
Make sure Double-click Options > Open Design is selected in the User
Preferences dialog. See Modifying user preferences for details.
The selected design or designs are displayed in the EmbroideryStudio
window ready for editing.
Tip To switch between EmbroideryStudio and ES Design Explorer:
Hold down the Alt key, then tap the Tab key until the EmbroideryStudio
icon is highlighted. Release the Alt key.
Alternatively, click the EmbroideryStudio icon on the Windows taskbar.
Creating new designs

You can open a new design in EmbroideryStudio from within ES Design
Explorer.
876
To create a new design

1 Select File > New.
EmbroideryStudio opens and the Auto-Fabric Assistant dialog displays.
2 Choose whether you want to work with or without pre-defined fabric settings.
See Creating and opening designs for details.
3 Click OK.
Reconnecting ES Design Explorer to EmbroideryStudio

Occasionally ES Design Explorer may encounter a problem preventing it from
connecting with EmbroideryStudio. Follow the instructions below (in the same
order as they are listed) to find the solution.
To reconnect ES Design Explorer with EmbroideryStudio
Check that your dongle security device is connected.

Open EmbroideryStudio, then open ES Design Explorer.
If none of the above correct the problem, re-install EmbroideryStudio.
Check that the version of EmbroideryStudio you are running is the same as
that registered in ES Design Explorers Shortcut Properties.
Right-click the ES Design Explorer icon on your Windows Desktop, then

select Properties. The Design Explorer Properties > Shortcut dialog
opens.
Shortcut
Read the last text item in the Target field e.g. ...version=e2.0.
877
This version should be identical to the version of EmbroideryStudio you

are running. If it is not, change it to the correct version and click OK.
Install EmbroideryStudio again.
878
Chapter 42
ES Design Explorer Advanced Functions
Designs in ES Design Explorer folders can be sorted in various ways, for

example, when you want to find designs for stitch-out, printing, archiving, and
so on. Use it also to batch-convert your EMB and other design files to and from
other file formats. Create design catalogs containing thumbnail images and/or
summary information. These can be sent to printer, published on a website or
intranet, and exported for spreadsheet or database use, or integration with
third-party e-commerce solutions. Archive design files in folders with the built-in
WinZip utility.
This section describes the more advanced workings of ES Design Explorer from
sorting files to stitching, punching, and converting designs. It also describes how
to print and publish catalogs of designs, as well as how to archive dormant or
unused designs.
Sorting files in folders

The simplest way to sort files in ES Design Explorer folders is by file type e.g.
EMB files only. Designs can be further sorted in the following ways:
As simple sorts using View > Sort by (Design Name, File Type, File Size,
or Last Changed). The designs are arranged according to the sort selection.
The designs can be sorted whether they are displayed as thumbnails or as a
details list.
As simple sorts using details list headings: by Design Name, File Size, File
Type, Version, Last Changed, Stitches, or Description. Designs are
arranged according to the heading selected, and repeating the sort reverses
the order. Designs must be displayed as a details list.
As a complex sort in up to two levels in ascending or descending order: by
File Type, First Designed, Height, Last Changed, Stitches, Version,
Width or None. Designs can be displayed as thumbnails, thumbnails with
stitching details, or details lists.
Limiting file types displayed

With ES Design Explorer you can filter the contents of any design folder to show
only certain types of file e.g. only EMB files.
To limit file types displayed
Explorer and viewing designs for details.
879
2 Click the Files dropdown on the toolbar.
3 Select:
All Files to show every file type in the folder.

All Image Files to all supported image file types.
Any other option to display only files of that type e.g. templates.
Running simple sorts using the View menu

You can sort your thumbnails or details lists by any of four types.
To run a simple sort using the View menu
2 List the designs as either thumbnails or as a details list. See Displaying design
thumbnails and summary information for details.
3 Select View > Sort by Design Name, Sort by File Type, Sort by File
Size, or Sort by Last Changed.
The designs will be sorted according to the option selected.
Running simple sorts using the details list

You can sort details lists by clicking the column headings.
To run a simple sort using the details list
2 List the designs as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and
summary information for details.
Click column
heading to sort
3 Click the heading at a column to be sorted e.g. Design Name.

The designs will be sorted in the order of the selection.
4 Click the heading again to reverse the order.
Chapter 42 ES Design Explorer Advanced Fu nc tions
880
Running complex sorts

Use ES Design Explorer > Sort to run a complex sort using the Sort dialog.
You can sort designs by various criteria such as Colors, Design Date, Design
Name, File Type, etc. ES Design Explorer lets you sort them by up to two levels,
in ascending or descending order.
To run a complex sort
2 List the designs as a details list. See Displaying design thumbnails and
summary information for details.
3 Click Sort icon.
The Sort dialog opens.
Select Level 1
criterion
Select Level 2
criterion
4 Select the first sort criterion:
Select the main category you want from the Sort By list e.g. Colors.
Select Ascending to sort letters from A to Z and numbers from lowest to
highest, or Descending to sort in the reverse order.
5 Select the second level sort criterion:
Select a different category from the And Then By list e.g. Stitches.
Select Ascending or Descending.
6 Click OK.
In the above example, the details list will display all designs by color, together
with number of stitches used.
Emailing designs direct

Use Email Selected Designs to email design information direct.
ES Design Explorer lets you email design information direct. This includes all
files associated with the design record, including design files, TrueView,
thumbnail, artwork and stitchout images as well as stitch files.
881
To email designs direct

Email
selected
designs
2 Select one or more design records and either:
Click the Email Selected Designs icon on toolbar, or

Right-click the design record and select Email Design from the popup
menu.
The Email Design Options dialog opens.
Select files to
include
3 Select the files you want to include in the email.

Note If all options are grayed out, your administrator must configure the
email settings for your user account.
4 Click OK.
The selected files are attached to an email and the subject line populated with
the names of the selected designs.
Stitching and punching designs direct

Once a design is selected in a folder, you can:
send it direct to any embroidery machine connected to the

EmbroideryStudio system.
send it direct to any punching machine and punch the tape.
882
Tip When a file is selected, right-click to open a popup menu which includes the
commands Open, Print, Convert, Punch to Tape, Stitch to Machine, and
Delete.
Stitching designs direct

Use Stitch Selected Designs to stitch a design directly to machine.
Select one or more designs in a folder using ES Design Explorer. You can then
stitch to any embroidery machine connected to your EmbroideryStudio system.
To stitch a design direct
2 Select and sort the design(s) to be stitched using Sort or Search. See
Sorting files in folders and Selecting designs in folders for details.
3 Click the Stitch Selected Designs icon.
The Stitch Options dialog opens.
Select machine type

and format
4 Select a machine type and format from the lists.

To define or modify the machines settings, see Setting up machines for direct
connection for details.
5 Click OK.
The ES Machine Manager window opens. See the ES Machine Manager
Supplement for details.
Punching designs direct

Use Punch Selected Designs to punch a design directly to a punching machine.
Select one or more designs in a folder using ES Design Explorer. You can then
punch to any paper tape punching machine connected to your
EmbroideryStudio system.
To punch a design direct
2 Select and sort the design(s) to be punched using Sort or Search. See
Sorting files in folders and Selecting designs in folders for details.
3 Click the Punch Selected Designs icon.
883
The Punch Options dialog opens.
Select machine type
4 Select a machine type from the list and click OK.

The Tape Manager dialog opens.
Select tape punch

Select to label tape
Select to automatically
rewind tape before stitching
Select to punch in
reverse direction
Printing and publishing designs

Catalogs of designs in a folder contain thumbnails and/or summary information.
These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or intranet, and
exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database programs, and for
integration with third-party e-commerce solutions.
Tip Before printing, publishing or exporting, sort the designs into useful groups.
For example, sort by Type or search by Customer. See Sorting files in folders
for details.
Printing production worksheets

Use Print Selected Designs to print production worksheets.
You can print production worksheets for selected groups of designs in folders,
and include thumbnails of each design in the worksheet.
Note Unlike Print Designs, this option can provide all of the design and sewing
information available, but it uses far more paper to do so. See also Printing
design catalogs.
To print a production worksheet
2 Sort the designs to be printed using Sort. See Sorting files in folders for
details.
3 Select the design(s) and click the Print Selected Design icon.
4 Select the printer you want to use, and enter the number of copies of the
worksheet you require.
5 To customize the worksheet, click Options.
884
Select worksheet
or appliqu
Set zoom factor
for design
preview
Select
information type
to include
Select other
general options
Select graphical
features to
include
6 Set production worksheet options to show the information you want in the
format you require. See Customizing worksheet print options for details.
7 Click OK when finished, then ensure that your printer settings are correct in
the Windows Print Setup dialog.
Note The dialog and the settings available will vary from printer to printer.
See your printer manual for details.
8 Click OK.
Printing design catalogs

Printed catalogs of your designs are a handy sales and marketing tool. They
contain thumbnails of the designs plus limited text details. You can prepare
catalogs of all your designs, and others to suit specific markets, types of design,
and individual customers.
To print a design catalog
2 Filter the file types to display as required. See Limiting file types displayed for
details.
3 Sort the designs to be printed in the catalog using Sort. See Sorting files in
folders for details.
4 Select File > Print Catalog.
The Print Catalog Options dialog opens.
Change the scale

Select for design
details
Click to preview
5 Change the Scale (%) amount if you want your thumbnails bigger or smaller.
885
6 Select Summary if you want design details to be printed.

7 Click Preview as required.
Click to set
printer settings
8 Click Printer to select a printer, paper size and other options in the Windows
Print dialog for the printer attached to your PC.
9 Click OK to print the catalog.
Tip If the catalog requires more than one page, you can select which page
to print in the Windows Print dialog.
Publishing design catalogs for browser viewing

You can convert your designs to the HTML and PNG formats suitable for viewing
by any browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. This allows you to publish
designs throughout the company via an intranet, or throughout the world via the
internet. You can also attach catalogs to emails and send them as design
samples.
To publish a design catalog for browser viewing
details.
4 Select File > HTML Catalog.
The HTML Catalog Options dialog opens.
Change the scale

Adjust numbers of
rows and columns
Enter filename and location
5 Change the Scale (%) amount if you want your thumbnails bigger or smaller.
886
6 Adjust the number of rows and number of columns for the final output, which
will appear as a table.
7 Deselect Summary if you dont want design details to appear.
8 Enter a filename and location in the File Name field e.g.
C:\Designs\Catalogs\Crests.htm or accept the default settings.
Tip Make a separate folder for each catalog the catalog conversion will
generate a PNG file for a thumbnail of each design, another PNG file for a
TrueView of each design, and an HTML file for each page.
9 Click OK to start converting the designs.
Your browser e.g. Windows Internet Explorer will open automatically at
the first page of designs when the conversion is finished.
If your browser does not open automatically:
Open your browser e.g. Windows Internet Explorer via the Windows
Start button.
Click the Address field, browse to the selected folder, and double-click the
first HTM file containing thumbnails e.g. Crests1.htm.
There will be at least two HTM files with similar names e.g. Crests.htm,
Crests1.htm, etc. The filename without a number is the index to all of the
HTM files.
Your browser will display one or more design thumbnails in the window.
10 Examine the contents of the page.
Click Next Page to view the next screen of thumbnails.
Tip Double-click a thumbnail to view its TrueView image in real size.
11 Repeat the procedure to adjust thumbnail size and table layout as required.
Exporting design catalogs

Design details can be converted to Tab and CSV (Comma Separated Value files)
formats suitable for use by most spreadsheets. See your spreadsheet program
for details.
887
To export a design catalog

details.
4 Select File > Export Design List.
The Export to File Options dialog opens.
5 Click either Comma Separated Value File or TAB Delimited Text File,
depending on your spreadsheet programs recommended format.
6 Select a folder and filename to store the CSV or TXT file.

7 Click Save.
The designs will be generated and saved in the selected format.
Converting design files in folders

Use Convert Selected Designs to convert from one design file type to another.
You can convert your EMB and other design files to and from other file formats
directly from ES Design Explorer.
Tip You can use this capability in conjunction with the Auto Color Merge
feature. The Auto Color Merge feature reads thread color information for CND
files from an associated TXT file so that stitches are displayed in the correct
colors when they are converted to EMB. See Color merging Melco CND files for
details.
888
To convert design files in folders

2 Select the file(s) to be converted. See Selecting designs in folders for details.
3 Click the Convert Selected Design icon.
The Convert Options dialog opens.
4 Select the file types you want to convert to.

5 Browse to the folder where you want to store the converted designs, using
the Browse button.
The Browse for Folder dialog opens.
6 Click OK to start the conversion.

The converted designs will be stored in the nominated folder.
Note Embroidery disks must be formatted to suit the embroidery machine
you intend to use or the machine will not be able to read the design. Select
File > Format Embroidery Disk to format a disk to required format. See
Formatting embroidery disks for details.
Archiving design files

ES Design Explorer lets you archive and view design files in folders which have
been archived by means of the popular WinZip utility. This is a software program
which bundles files into a single compressed file with the extension *.ZIP. This
can be useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email.
889
Saving design to an archive file

Use WinZip to archive selected designs to a single compressed file.
ES Design Explorer provides a shortcut to the WinZip utility via the toolbar.
To save design to an archive file
2 Select a folder and select the design or designs you want to archive.
3 Click the WinZip icon or right-click the design(s) and select Create Zip
Archive from the popup menu.
4 If you have selected one design file, the system will create a ZIP file. Enter a
name for the file and choose a location.
5 If you have selected more than one design file, choose whether to archive the
selected files individually or as a single file.
Create one archive containing multiple designs: creates a single ZIP

file for all designs. Enter a name for the file and choose a location.
890
Create individual archives for each design: opens the Browse for
Folder dialog. Choose a location and click OK. The ZIP files automatically
take the name of the design.
Tip You can view zipped files in the specified folder. See Viewing zipped
designs in folders for details.
Extracting design files from a zipped archive

ES Design Explorer allows you to extract design files from a zipped archive. This
is useful, for example, if you are receiving zipped designs via email.
To extract design files from a zipped archive
2 Select the folder which contains the design or designs you want to extract.
Zipped design
name appears in
italics
Select to extract
zipped file

3 Select Extract Zip Archive from the File or popup menu.
891
The Browse for Folder dialog opens.
4 Choose a location and click OK.

The designs are extracted to the selected location. See Opening ES Design
Explorer and viewing designs for details.
Organizing designs in folders

You can rename, duplicate and edit database information without opening
designs. You can also rename folders, add sub-folders and delete folders without
leaving ES Design Explorer.
Renaming, adding or deleting folders

You can rename, add and delete folders without leaving ES Design Explorer.
To rename, add or delete folders
1 Open ES Design Explorer. See Opening ES Design Explorer and viewing
2 Browse to the folders you want to rename, delete or add folders to. See
Browsing designs in folders for details.
3 Add, rename, or delete folders as required:
To add a sub-folder to another, select the folder and right-click. Select Add
Folder and type in the name when the new sub-folder appears.
To rename a folder, select it and right-click. Select Rename from the
popup menu, and type in the new name.
To delete a folder, select it and right-click. Select Delete Folder from the
popup menu. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.
Copying and pasting designs

Once a selected design is copied, it can then be pasted to another location using
Paste. A copied design can be pasted any number of times.
To copy and paste a design
2 Select any number of designs. See Selecting designs in folders for details.
3 Select Edit > Copy.
4 Change to another folder using the directory if required.
892
A design can be pasted to the same folder as the original design.

5 Select Edit > Paste.
If the selected design e.g. Bear.EMB is pasted into the current folder, and
the current folder contains the original design, or a file of the same name, the
new design is automatically named Copy of Bear.EMB. You can then change
the name of the new file by right-clicking its name, selecting Rename and
typing the new name. Press Enter to complete the name change.
Note If you rename the file, ensure that the three letter extension e.g. EMB
is not altered.
Cutting and pasting designs

When a selected design is cut, the design is removed from the current folder.
The design can then be pasted at another location using the Paste command.
To cut and paste designs
3 Select Edit > Cut.
A confirmation dialog opens.
4 Click Yes to cut the design.
5 Browse to the folder where you want to paste the file or files.
6 Select Edit > Paste to paste the selected design into the new folder.
If a design of the same name already exists, each pasted copy is renamed.
Renaming designs in folders

Duplicate designs, designs with misleading names, and designs with misspelled
names can be quickly renamed without opening them.
To rename a design in a database or folder
2 Ensure that the design you select is not currently open in EmbroideryStudio.
893
3 Right-click and select Rename from the popup menu.
Rename
selected design
The Rename Design dialog opens.
Bear
Enter new name
4 Enter the new name.

5 Click OK.
The original design name is overwritten.
Deleting designs
Delete designs to remove them permanently from your PC.
To delete designs from ES Design Explorer
3 Select Edit > Delete.
A confirmation dialog opens.
4 Click Yes to remove the design permanently from the folder.
894
PART X
PRODUCT DIFFERENTIATION
TABLE
895
Product Differentiation Table

Capability
Feature
Basics
Reference in Onscreen Manual

Basic Procedures
Switch design modes

Undo/redo commands
Create new designs based on fabrics
Create new designs based on templates
Save designs
Display the grid
Display rulers and guides
Graphics Mode/
Embroidery Mode
Undo/redo
New
Save
Show Grid
Show Rulers and
Guides
Display measurements
Set measurement units
Switching design modes

Undoing and redoing commands
Creating designs based on fabrics
Creating designs based on templates
Saving designs
Displaying the grid
Displaying rulers and guides
Measuring distances on screen
Setting measurement units
View designs
Viewing Designs
Show/hide backdrops (bitmaps/vectors)
Produc t Diffe rentiation Table
Show design outlines and stitches

Zoom and pan designs
Show design in Overview window
Show / hide selected objects
Show objects by color
Show design needle points, connectors and functions
Show multiple colorways
Change background
Travel through designs
Simulate design stitchouts
Show design information in Windows Explorer
Show design properties
Estimate total thread usage
Name design elements
Preview production worksheet
Show
Bitmaps/Vectors
View tools
Zoom
Overview Window
Current Colorway
Display Options
Travel Tools
Slow Redraw
Color-Object List
Print Preview
Select objects
Showing and hiding backdrops

Viewing outlines and stitches
Zooming and panning designs
Working with the Overview Window
Viewing selected parts of a design
Viewing design objects by color
Viewing needle points, connectors and functions
Changing colorways
Displaying backgrounds
Traveling through designs
Simulating design stitchouts
Viewing design information in Windows Explorer
Viewing design information in EmbroideryStudio
Estimating total thread usage
Naming design elements
Previewing production worksheets
Select multiple objects

Select individual objects
Included as standard
Cost option
Select Object
New/improved feature/option R Restricted functionality
Selecting multiple objects

Selecting objects individually
896
Capability
Feature
Select objects by selection marquee

Select objects with Polygon/Polyline Select
Select Object
Polygon Select/
Polyline Select
Select Object
Select Object
Selects On
Select objects while traveling through a design

Select next or previous object
Select objects with Selects On
Select objects by color
Select objects by stitch type
Select objects by Color-Object List

Selecting objects by selection marquee
Selecting objects with Polygon/Polyline Select
Selecting objects while traveling
Selecting next or previous object
Selecting objects with Selects On
Selecting objects by color
Selecting objects by stitch type
Selecting objects by Color-Object List
Color-Object List
Digitize embroidery shapes
Switch between fill and outline methods

Digitize shapes with fixed angle
Digitize shapes with turning angles
Digitize objects with holes
Digitize columns and borders
Digitize columns of varying width
Digitize shapes with turning stitches
Generate Stitches
Complex Fill
Fusion Fill
Input C
Input A
Input B
Digitize outlines & details
Switching between fill and outline

Adding holes to free shapes
Creating columns and borders
Digitizing columns of varying width
Digitizing asymmetrical columns of turning stitches
Digitizing Outlines & Details
Wilcom Embroid er y Stud io e2.0 Onscreen Manual
Digitize simple runs

Create motif runs
Backstitch and Stemstitch
Run
Motif Run
Backstitch
Create embroidery fills
Creating simple runs

Creating motif runs
Creating decorative outlines
Embroidery Fills
Satin stitch
Tatami stitch
Create motif fills
Create spiral and contoured stitching
Zigzag stitch
E Stitch
Satin
Tatami
Motif Fill
Contour
Zigzag
E Stitch
Creating Satin fills

Creating Tatami fills
Creating Motif fills
Creating Contour fills
Manage threads & colorways
Threads & Colorways
Select colors
Preset backgrounds
Visualize products
Assign threads to color palettes
Match image colors to threads
Edit thread colors
Set up colorways
Name elements of color blocks
Using the color palette

Presetting backgrounds
Visualizing products
Assigning threads to color palettes
Matching image colors to threads
Editing thread colors
Setting up colorways
Naming color blocks
Cost option
897
Capability
Feature
Split color blocks

Customize thread charts
Change display colors
Splitting color blocks

Customizing thread charts
Changing display colors
Properties, fabrics, styles & templates
Properties, Fabrics, Styles & Templates
Modify current property settings

Change object properties
Make selected object properties current
Modifying current settings

Changing object properties
Making selected properties current
Change default properties

Change and manage fabrics
Apply styles
Defining new styles
Assign favorite styles
Merge styles
Modify styles
Create design templates
Make Properties
Current
Auto-Fabric Assistant
Apply Style
Underlays & pull compensation
Changing default properties

Working with fabrics
Applying styles
Deleting styles
Assigning favorite styles
Merging styles
Modifying styles
Creating design templates
Underlays & Pull Compensation
Apply automatic underlay

Apply pull compensation
Auto Underlay
Pull Compensation
Manage automatic connectors
Stabilizing with automatic underlays

Compensating for fabric stretch
Embroidery Connectors
Apply automatic connectors

Add tie-offs and trims manually
Keep/omit last stitches
Set automatic start/end points
Tie Off
Keep/omit last stitch
Use Auto Start and
End
Using automatic connectors

Adding connectors manually
Keeping or omitting last stitches
Setting automatic start and end points
Digitize with bitmaps
Digitizing with Bitmaps
Insert/paste bitmap images

Crop bitmap images
Edit bitmap images in third-party applications
Smooth bitmap images
Prepare non-outlined images
Prepare outlined images
Inserting bitmap images

Cropping bitmap images
Editing bitmap images in third-party applications
Smoothing bitmap images
Preparing non-outlined images
Preparing outlined images
Reduce Colors
Sharpen Edges
Digitize with vectors
Digitizing with Vectors
Create vector outlines open, polygon, squares, circles, etc

Insert / paste vector graphics
Color vector objects
Cost option
Drawing Tools
Creating vector outlines

Inserting vector graphics
Coloring vector objects
898
Capability
Feature
Shape vector/embroidery objects merging, splitting, trimming, Shaping Tools

etc

Shaping vector and embroidery objects
Semi-Automatic Digitizing
Convert vector and embroidery objects

Convert artwork to vector graphic
Convert artwork to embroidery objects
Match palette colors to an image
Create embroidery from photos
Convert/Retain
Graphics
Auto Trace
Point & Stitch
Match to Palette
Smart Design
Photo Flash
Converting vector and embroidery objects

Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace
Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch
Matching palette colors to an image
Digitizing designs with Smart Design
Creating embroidery from photographs
Embroidery lettering
Embroidery Lettering
Create lettering in Graphics mode

Universal Tools
Create lettering in Embroidery mode
Lettering
Add baselines horizontal, vertical, arc, circle, custom
Format lettering italic, bold, justified
Adjust letter spacing overall, individual, line spacings
Edit lettering text
Lettering
Scale lettering
Skew and rotate lettering objects
Adjust individual letters reposition, transform, reshape, recolor
Adjust and reshape baselines
Set lettering stitch types Satin, Tatami, Zigzag
Stitch Types Tools
Adjust lettering stitching sequence
Change lettering join method
Set lettering underlay
Auto Underlay
Add special characters and symbols
Automatic letter kerning
Auto Kerning
Set automatic letter spacing
Auto Letter Spacing
Team name templates
Create special effects with envelopes
Envelope
Add multiple names to designs
Team Names
Output team-name designs
Team Names
Create monogram designs
Monogramming
Creating lettering in Graphics mode

Creating lettering in Embroidery mode
Working with lettering baselines
Formatting lettering
Adjusting letter spacing
Editing lettering text
Scaling lettering
Transforming lettering objects
Adjusting individual letters
Adjusting baselines
Setting lettering stitch types
Adjusting letter sequencing
Changing lettering join method
Setting lettering underlay
Adding special characters and symbols
Setting automatic letter kerning
Setting automatic letter spacing
Custom alphabets
Custom Alphabets
Convert TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets

Create custom alphabets
Merge alphabets
Cost option
Convert TTF
Creating special effects with envelopes

Creating teamname designs
Outputting teamname designs
Creating monogram designs
Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets
Creating custom alphabets
Merging alphabets
899
Capability
Feature
Combine & sequence objects

Combining & Sequencing Objects
Combine objects and designs copy, paste, clone, etc

Group and lock objects
Resequence embroidery objects
Automatic object sequencing
Change entry / exit points
Apply closest join
Group
Branching
Show Start/End
Closest Join
Combining objects & designs

Grouping & locking objects
Sequencing embroidery objects
Resequencing with automatic branching
Adjusting entry/exit points
Applying closest join
Arrange & transform objects
Arranging, Scaling & Transforming Objects
Position, align and distribute objects

Scale objects
Rotate objects
Skew objects
Mirror objects
Mirror-merge objects
Create wreath objects
Create design arrays
Positioning objects
Scaling objects
Rotating objects
Skewing objects
Mirroring objects
Creating reflected objects
Creating wreaths
Creating design arrays
Rotate
Skew
Mirror
Mirror-Merge
Mirror-Merge
Mirror-Merge
Reshape & convert objects
Reshaping & Converting Objects
Reshape embroidery objects

Reshape circle, star and ring objects
Split embroidery objects
Break apart branched objects
Cut shapes manually
Cut shapes automatically
Add/adjust stitch angles
Smooth curves
Convert between embroider objects Run, Input C, etc.
Reshape Object
Reshape Object
Break Apart
Knife
Automatic Knife
Show Stitch Angles
Convert
Stitch quality
Optimizing Stitch Quality
Adjust stitch density

Remove small stitches automatically
Control corner stitching
Reduce stitch bunching
Split long stitches
Preserve long stitches
Process
Small Stitches
Smart Corners
Shortening
Auto Split
Auto Jump
Edit stitches & machine functions

Select and deselect stitches
Insert, move or delete individual stitches
Convert selected stitches to objects
Reshaping embroidery objects

Reshaping circle, star and ring objects
Splitting embroidery objects
Breaking apart branched objects
Cutting shapes manually
Cutting shapes automatically
Adding stitch angles in Reshape mode
Smoothing curves
Converting between embroidery objects
Cost option
Adjusting stitch densities

Eliminating small stitches
Controlling corner stitching
Reducing stitch bunching
Splitting long stitches with Auto Split
Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump
Stitches & Machine Functions
Stitch Edit
Selecting and deselecting stitches

Editing stitches
Converting stitches to objects
900
Capability
Feature
Insert/edit/clear machine functions

Edit stitches and functions with Stitch List
Digitize individual stitches
Digitize boring holes
Stitch List
Manual

Editing machine functions
Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List
Digitizing individual stitches
Digitizing boring holes
Special Digitizing Techniques
Create circles, stars and rings

Reinforce outlines
Remove underlying stitching
Create offset outlines and filling holes
Fill holes in Complex Fill objects
Add decorative borders to designs
Circle Tools
Backtrack / Repeat
Remove Overlaps
Offset Object
Fill Holes
Borders
Textured fills
Digitizing circles, stars and rings

Reinforcing outlines
Removing underlying stitching
Creating outlines and filling holes
Filling holes in objects
Adding decorative borders to designs
Textured & Patterned Fills
Create textures with Tatami offsets

Create textures with program splits
Create textures with Flexi Split
Create stitch patterns with carving stamps
Create user-defined split effects
Tatami Offset
Program Split
Flexi Split
Carving Stamp
User-Defined Split
Creating textures with Tatami offsets

Creating textures with Program Split
Creating textures with Flexi Split
Creating stitch patterns with carving stamps
Creating user-defined splits
Artistic Stitch Effects
Create freehand embroidery

Create jagged edges
Create textures with stippling
Create open stitching with trapunto
Create accordion spacing effects
Create color blending effects
Create cross stitch fills
Create curved fills with Florentine Effect
Create curved fills with Liquid Effect
Freehand
Embroidery
Jagged Edge
Stipple
Trapunto
Accordion Spacing
Color Blending
Cross Stitch
Florentine Effect
Liquid Effect
Creating freehand embroidery
Motif Run
Motif Fill
3D Warp
Motif Run
Creating motif runs

Creating motif fills
Applying 3D effects to motif fills
Working with single motifs
Saving motifs
Creating motif sets
Motif runs & fills
Creating jagged or fluffy edges

Creating stippling effects
Creating open stitching with trapunto
Creating accordion spacing effects
Creating color blending effects
Creating cross stitch fills
Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect
Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect
Motif Runs & Fills
Create motif runs

Create motif fills
Create 3D effects with motif fills
Insert and manipulate single motifs
Create motifs
Create motif sets
Digitize appliqu
Appliqu Digitizing
Convert vector graphics to appliqu

Cost option
Convert
Converting vector graphics to appliqu
901
Capability
Feature
Create appliqu designs

Create partial appliqu shapes
Recombine and resequences multiple appliqu for efficient
stitchout
Auto Appliqu
Partial Appliqu
Combine Appliqu
Components

Creating appliqu objects in Embroidery Mode
Creating partial cover appliqu objects
Combining appliqu components
Sequin digitizing
Sequin Digitizing
Set up custom sequin palette

Create sequin runs
Convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run
Create sequin fills
Digitize twin-sequin designs
Scale and reshape sequin runs
Digitize individual sequins
Sequin Manual

Digitizing sequin runs
Converting sequin artwork
Creating sequin fills
Reshaping and editing sequin runs
Bling!
Bling!
Bling!
Bling!
Bling!
Setting up bling palettes

Creating bling runs and fills
Placing rhinestones manually
Modifying bling objects
Adding bling borders
Sequin Run
Sequin Fill
Bling digitizing
Bling Digitizing
Set up bling palettes

Create bling runs and fills
Place rhinestones manually
Modify bling objects
Add bling borders
Print design files
Printing Designs
Print designs
Print / plot production worksheets
Customize worksheet information
Print multiple colorways
Print color blocks
Send designs as email attachments
Save designs as bitmap images
Print appliqu patterns
Printing designs in Graphics mode

Printing reports in Embroidery mode
Customizing worksheet information
Printing multiple colorways
Printing color film
Sending designs as email attachments
Outputting designs as images
Printing appliqu patterns
Output design files
Outputting Designs
Stitch designs with Stitch Manager

Stitch designs with Connection Manager
Save designs for different machine formats
Read/write embroidery disk
Stitch designs to machine with ES Machine Manager (1-4
machines only)
Stitching designs with Stitch Manager

Stitching designs with Connection Manager
Saving designs for machine
Reading and writing to embroidery disk
ES Machine Manager Supplement
Multi-decoration file export
Multi-Decoration File Export
Export multi-decoration files

Output bling templates
Exporting multi-decoration files

Outputting bling templates
Cost option
902
Capability
Feature
Cut appliqu shapes
Cutting appliqu shapes
Read design formats
Reading Files of Different Formats
Convert stitch files to EMB format

Open/save designs in Melco CND format
Color merge Melco CND files
Reassign colors to stitch/CND files
Opening stitch files in EmbroideryStudio

Opening Melco CND outline files
Color merging Melco CND files
Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files
Design hooping
Hooping Designs
Select and center hoops

Select hoops automatically
Define custom hoops manually
Edit custom hoops
HoopIt!
Selecting and centering hoops

Selecting hoops automatically
Defining custom hoops
Editing custom hoops
Change machine formats
Machine Formats
Output to different machine formats

Modify standard machine formats
Adjust advanced machine format settings (color change
sequence, start/end design, speed)
Create custom machine formats
Outputting to different machines

Adjusting standard machine format settings
Adjusting advanced machine format settings
Set up hardware
Setting up Hardware
Calibrate monitor
Connect embroidery machines
Connect digitizing tablets
Calibrating the monitor

Connecting machines
Connecting digitizing tablets
System settings
Changing System Settings
Set design element view options

Set TrueView options
Set image viewing options
Set grid options
Mouse scroll/zoom control
Set reshape options
Set automatic save and backup options
Set pointer position display
Set inserted embroidery file options
Set paste position options
Set Object Property apply options
Set other general options
Setting design element view options

Setting TrueView options
Setting image viewing options
Setting grid display options
Setting scrolling options
Setting reshape options
Setting automatic save and backup options
Setting pointer position display
Setting inserted embroidery file options
Setting paste position options
Setting Object Property apply options
Setting other general options
Creating custom formats
Embroidery clipart
Embroidery Clipart
View and select embroidery clipart

Search and sort embroidery clipart
Viewing and selecting embroidery clipart

Searching and sorting embroidery clipart
Cost option
903
Capability
Feature
Record designs to the clipart library

Assign keywords to clipart
Add, modify and delete keywords
Import and export keywords
Recording embroidery clipart

Assigning keywords to clipart
Adding, modifying and deleting keywords
Importing and exporting keywords
Design management
Design Management
View design thumbnails and summary information

View zipped designs in folders
Change locales
Modify user preferences
Customize design lists
View design properties
Browse designs in folders
Browse with slide show
Open designs in EmbroideryStudio
Create new designs with custom templates
Run simple and complex sorts
Limit file types displayed
Email designs direct
Stitch and punch designs direct
Print production worksheets
Print design catalogs
Publish design catalogs for browser viewing
Export design catalogs
Convert design files in folders
Archive design files
Rename, add and delete folders
Copy and paste designs
Rename designs in folders
Delete designs
Displaying design thumbnails and summary information

Viewing zipped designs in folders
Changing locale
Modifying user preferences
Customizing design lists
Viewing design properties
Browsing through designs in folders
Browsing designs using slide show buttons
Opening designs in EmbroideryStudio
Creating new designs
Sorting files in folders
Limiting file types displayed
Emailing designs direct
Stitching and punching designs direct
Printing production worksheets
Printing design catalogs
Publishing design catalogs for browser viewing
Exporting design catalogs
Converting design files in folders
Archiving design files
Renaming, adding or deleting folders
Copying and pasting designs
Renaming designs in folders
Deleting designs
Cost option
904
PART XI
QUICK REFERENCE
905
Quick Reference
There are two fundamental design modes in

EmbroideryStudio:
Note For a detailed description of the
Graphics: This mode allows you to create and CorelDRAW interface, refer to the electronic
edit vector objects using the CorelDRAW
toolset.
Embroidery: This mode allows you to create
and edit embroidery objects using the
embroidery digitizing toolset.
User Guide available via the Windows Start >

Programs group. Alternatively, use the
onscreen help available from the Graphics mode
Help menu.
Menu bar
Universal toolbar
Standard toolbar
View toolbar
Floating toolbar
Modeless dialog
Toolbox
Design window
Docker tabs
Toolbox flyout
Color palette
Status / Prompt bars
Embroidery mode
File menu
EmbroideryStudio Embroidery mode offers

digitizing methods or tools specifically suited to
the creation of embroidery shapes or objects.
New
EmbroideryStudio menu bar

The EmbroideryStudio design window menu bar
contains the pulldown menus described below.
Some commands are also available as toolbar
buttons.
Note Standard MS Windows Alt key shortcuts
apply. Use the Alt key with the letter underlined
in the menu. To cancel an operation, press Esc
twice.
New from
Template
Open
Close
Save
Save As
Record in
Database
Scan
Create new blank design based on a

fabric or template.
Create new design from a template.
Open existing design.
Close current design window.
Save current design.
Save current design with a different
name, location or format.
Add design and information directly
to database from within
EmbroideryStudio.
DesignWorkflow opens
automatically if not already open.
Scan images directly into
EmbroideryStudio.
Q uic k R eference
906
Scanner Setup Set up scanner.

Import
Insert one design into another to
Embroidery
create combined design. Color
palettes are also combined. Colors
with same RGB values are
automatically identified as having the
same thread color.
Embroidery
Open from, save to, or format
Disk >
proprietary embroidery disks.
Export
Export all design components
Multi-decoration requiring different production
Files
processes as file formats for use by
control software or machine.
Design
Display design information such as
Properties
size and number of stitches, and add
comments to print to worksheet.
Print Preview
Display design worksheet in a
separate window and print as
required.
Print
Print design.
Cut Appliqu
Send appliqu shapes from design
file to laser cutter.
Output Bling
Send vectors for any bling in a
Template
multi-decoration design to a
supported cutting or engraving
machine.
Capture Design Save design image as bitmap.
Bitmap
Resulting image is as it appears on
screen.
Send
Send design as email attachment.
Stitch to
Send designs to machine from within
Machine
EmbroideryStudio or
Manager
DesignWorkflow and view or
manage job queues.
Stitch to Stitch Send design to machine for stitching.
Manager
Stitch to
Connect to supported machines via
Connection
proprietary machine software.
Manager
Exit
Close all open designs and exit
program.
Recent File
Most recently used files listed
select to open file.
Apply Closest
Join
Set Color
Select All
Deselect All
Select By >
(Re-)apply closest join to objects

after editing.
Set up color.
Select all objects in design.
Deselect all objects in design.
Select all objects of same color or
stitch type.
Selects On
Select a range of objects as you
travel through the design.
Process
Adjust stitch density of and/or scale
whole or selected parts.
Recognize
Recognize new or revised object
Objects/Outlines outlines after stitch editing use with
stitch files opened without
object/outline recognition.
Split Object
Split embroidery objects into smaller
objects.
Reverse Curves Control push-pull effect by reversing
stitch direction affects stitching
direction of Jagged Edge, Contour
Stitch and E Stitch objects. Can also
affect Tatami offsets, as well as Flexi
Split and Motif Run orientation.
Smooth Curves Apply curve smoothing to both
embroidery and vector objects.
Transform
Transform selected objects using
combination of reference points and
numeric values.
Transform
Rotate selected objects with aid of
Special
reference points alone.
Envelope >
Apply Bridge, Pennant, Perspective,
and Diamond effects to lettering
objects.
Auto-Fabric
Change current fabric.
Assistant
Manage
Modify existing fabric definitions and
Auto-Fabrics
create new ones.
Apply Fabric
Apply fabric settings to selected
Settings
objects in order to return them to
default values.
View menu
Edit menu
Zoom to All
Design
Measure distance between two

points on screen.
Zoom in to selected area of the
design.
Display design at actual size.
Set precise viewing scale.
Display design at twice current size.
Display design at half current size.
Display whole design or only
selected embroidery objects in
design window.
Zoom to
Selected
Objects
View selected objects in the design

window.
Measure
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Duplicate
Delete
Resequence >
Branching
Undo preceding action.

Redo preceding action.
Remove selected objects to
clipboard.
Copy selected objects to clipboard.
Paste copied objects to design.
Duplicate selected objects within a
design (rather than copy to
clipboard).
Delete selected objects.
Resequence selected objects in
order selected, or resequence all
objects by color in order to reduce
color changes.
Automatically branch selected
embroidery objects.
Zoom
Zoom 1:1
Zoom Factor
Zoom In 2X
Zoom Out 2X
entire product in the design

Zoom to Product View
window.
Zoom to Hoop
View entire hoop in the design

window.
907
Previous View
Pan
Center Current
Stitch
Redraw
Return to previous view.

Pan current design.
Center design in design window
around current stitch.
Refresh screen display.
Simulate embroidery design
Slow Redraw
stitchout on screen.
Toggle grid and guidelines on/off
Grid and Guides use for accurate sizing and
alignment of objects.
embroidery objects by color
View By Color View
e.g. when resequencing objects.
View By
View machine Chenille and Schiffli
Machine
functions Chain/Moss, Stepp/Blatt,
Function >
etc.
Duplicate outline in the same
Repeats
direction typically used with closed
shapes.
Overview
View thumbnail of current design.
Window
Toggle Stitch List display on/off use
Stitch List
to view, filter and select stitches.
Color-Object
Toggle Color-Object List on/off use
List
to view, filter and select objects.
Toggle Team Members display on/off
Team List
use to view and edit individual team
names.
Toggle Object Properties dialog
Object
on/off use to adjust properties of
Properties
selected objects.
Toggle Color Palette Editor on/off
use to assign thread colors to color
palette.
Enable collaborative creation and
Wilcom
of designs between
ConceptShare approval
designers, digitizers, and clients.
Show/hide toolbars to optimize
Toolbars >
working area.
current settings for design
Design Options Access
window object display.
design background presets
Display Options Change
for the current colorway.
Color Palette
Editor
Stitch menu
Generate
Stitches
Stitch Type >
Stitch Effects
Define Style
Apply Style
Object
Properties
Apply Current
Properties
Generate stitches for new or

selected objects.
Apply stitch types to selected
objects. See Stitch Types toolbar for
details.
Access settings related to Stitch
Effects toolbar.
Define new styles.
Apply style from template to new or
selected objects.
Display Object Properties dialog
use to adjust properties of selected
objects.
Apply current settings to selected
objects.
Auto Start and

End
Small Stitches
Access automatic design start/end

settings.
Automatically remove unwanted
small stitches.
Special menu
Motif >
Add individual motifs to a design.

Save own motifs for future use.
HoopIt >
Access all HoopIt functions. See
Hooping Designs for details.
Make Program
Turn embroidery or drawing objects
Split
into patterns for use in Program
Split fills.
Makes Line(s) for Make lines for User Defined Split,
Florentine Effect, and Liquid Effect.
>
Carving Stamp
Define a pattern of needle
penetrations using a carving
stamp as a template.
Alphabet >
Access assortment of commands
used in custom alphabets. See
Custom Alphabets for details.
Stitch Angles
Add stitch angles to selected
objects.
Clipart >
Access assortment of commands
used in Clipart feature. See
Embroidery Clipart for details.
Cross Stitch
Access Cross Stitch application.
Security
Show/set security device.
Tablet
Set up digitizing tablet.
Hardware Setup Configure any device connected to
PC via a serial port.
Arrange menu
This menu provides access to the same tools
available on the Arrange toolbar. See Arrange
toolbar for details. See Shaping toolbar for
details.
Image menu
Insert File
Draw Vector >
Insert vector graphic file.

Draw lines, polylines, polygons,
ellipses, or rectangles.
Make Complex Combine any number of vector
Shape
curves into a single complex shape
i.e. a shape with holes in it. Can
then be converted to embroidery.
Edit Bitmap
Edit bitmaps using Paint, Corel
Using >
PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro.
Crop Bitmap
Crop bitmap images.
Crop Bitmap
Crop bitmap images with the
With Polygon
Polygon tool.
Reduce Colors Reduce number of colors and
remove image noise in non-outlined
images.
Sharpen Edges Sharpen jagged edges.
Q uic k R eference
908
Machine menu
Penetrations
Tag as Turning Satin Lettering: Tag

vector lettering for conversion to Satin
embroidery lettering with turning
stitching.
Tag as Parallel Tatami Lettering: Tag
vector lettering for conversion to
Tatami embroidery lettering with
parallel stitching.
Tag as Wilcom Lettering: Tag vector
lettering for conversion to native
Wilcom embroidery lettering.
Retain the original vector objects
during conversion.
Create jumps with needles or borers

out.
Activate boring function.
Insert Stop function.
Insert stitch function.
Clear stitch function.
Edit stitch function.
Select machine format corresponding
to embroidery machine you intend to
use.
Define values to allow when
outputting to a specific machine
format.
Borers
Stop
Insert Function
Clear Function
Edit Function
Select Machine
Format
Machine
Format Values
Access online support.
Window menu
New Window
Cascade
Tile Horizontally
Tile Vertically
Split Window
More Windows
Open new window.

Align open windows.
Tile open windows horizontally.
Tile open windows vertically.
Split window into multiple views.
View more open windows.
Help menu
EmbroideryStudio provides various ways to
access information about the software and how
to use it via the Help menu. See Resources and
support for details.
Show and hide vector objects in

Embroidery mode.
Show and hide embroidery objects in
Graphics mode.
Standard toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains commonly used
tools and commands which are specific to and
only visible in Embroidery mode.
New
Open new empty design.
Open
Open existing design.
Save
Save current design.
EmbroideryStudio toolbars
The design window contains the toolbars
described below. Some are shortcuts to the
pulldown menu commands.
Universal toolbar
This toolbar contains the universal tools and
icons which are visible in both Embroidery and
Graphics modes. It also contains tools which are
only available in a particular mode but in some
way influence how objects behave in the
alternate mode.
Switch to Graphics mode.

Switch to Embroidery mode.
Convert between vector and
embroidery objects.
Tag as Appliqu: Tag vector lettering
for conversion to appliqu embroidery
lettering with turning stitching.
Embroidery Open design from embroidery disk.

Disk Open
Embroidery
Disk Save Save design to embroidery disk.
As
Print
Print design using current print

settings.
Print
Preview
Show design worksheet print

worksheet from this window.
Stitch to
Stitch
Manager
Stitch to
Connection
Manager
Send design to machine for

stitching.
Cut
Remove selected objects to

clipboard.
Copy
Copy selected objects to clipboard.
Paste
Paste copied objects into design.
Undo
Undo an action.
Connect to supported machines via

proprietary machine software.
909
Redo
Redo an action.
Zoom
Invoke zoom mode zoom in/out

via left/right mouse clicks.
Zoom 1:1
Display design at actual size.

Zoom Factor: select a Zoom Factor
from the dropdown list to display
design at particular scale.
Zoom to All Display whole design in design

Design
window.
Zoom to
Product
Zoom to
Hoop
Status and Prompt bars

The Status and Prompt bars provide continuous
display of current cursor position status as well
as instructions for use of selected tools. See
Embroidery mode for details.
Property bar
Adjust general object properties width, height,
position by means of the Property Bar.
Changes to the values are applied by pressing
Enter on the keyboard. They are discarded when
you press Esc or click anywhere outside the
fields. See Accessing object properties for
details.
Color Palette
Editor
Assign thread colors to slots in

color palette.
Current Colorway: choose
different color schemes for
design display.
Change design background

Display Options presets for the current
colorway.
View toolbar
The View toolbar commands for viewing
embroidery designs e.g. as design outlines, by
stitches, by machine functions, as they will stitch
out on the fabric either separately or in
combination. See Viewing Designs for details.
TrueView
Change between normal view and

TrueView.
Show
Stitches
Show/hide stitches.
Show
Outlines
Show/hide object outlines.
Show needle Show/hide the needle points in a

Points
design.
Show
Connectors Show/hide the connectors.
Show
Functions
Show/hide the function symbols.
Show Grid
Show/hide grid. Right-click to

adjust settings.
Show Rulers Show/hide rulers and guides.

and Guides Right-click to adjust settings.
Toolbox toolbar
The Toolbox contains the creation/editing tools
specific to and visible in Embroidery mode. See
Toolbox flyout bars for details.
Show
Bitmaps
Show/hide bitmap images.
Show
Vectors
Show/hide vector graphics.
Show Bling Toggle bling display on/off.
Color Palette
The Color Palette contains a palette specific to
and only visible in Embroidery mode. See
Threads & Colorways for details.
Add Color To
Palette
Add new color slot to palette

edit by means of Color Palette
Editor.
Remove Color
From Palette
Remove unused last color slot

from palette.
all unused colors from

Compact Palette Remove
palette.
Split Palette
Color
Create new color slot with

same thread spec as selected
slot.
bling display on/off.

Show Hoop Toggle
Right-click to access settings.
the system to select a
Auto HoopIt Prompt
suitable hoop automatically.
Overview
Window
View a thumbnail of the design.
Toggle Stitch List on/off use to

view, filter, and select individual
stitches and machine functions.
Color-Object List on/off
Color-Object Toggle
use to select and view design
List
objects.
Toggle Team Members on/off
Team List
use to view and edit individual
team names.
Stitch List
Q uic k R eference
910
Carving
Stamp
Toggle Object Properties on/off

use to adjust properties of selected
objects.
Define a pattern of needle
penetrations using a carving
stamp as a template.
Slow
Redraw
View stitching and color sequence

of design in slow motion.
Object
Properties
automatic underlay. Right-click to adjust

settings. See Embroidery Fills for details.
Satin
Apply to narrow columns and

shapes.
Tatami
Apply to large, irregular shapes.
Zigzag
Apply to long, narrow columns of

slanted, side-by-side stitches in a
zigzag pattern.
E Stitch
Use for a comb effect with long,

narrow columns.
Program
Split
Create decorative fill stitches where

needle penetrations form a tiled
pattern.
automatic underlay for

Auto Underlay Generate
selected objects.
Motif Fill
Apply to large, irregular shapes.
Pull
Use to automatically
Compensation compensate for fabric stretch.
Contour
Create curved fills where stitches

follow the contours of the shape.
Stitch Effects toolbar

The Stitch Effects toolbar contains tools for
modifying or improving stitch quality, including
applying automatic underlay to selected objects.
Auto Jump
Shortening
Fractional
Spacing
Preserve long stitches in new

and selected objects.
Reduce stitch bunching in tight
curves by shortening some
stitches on inside edges.
Reduce stitch bunching in tight
curves by adjusting the point at
which stitch spacing is
calculated.
sharp lines at
Mitre Corners Create
intersections of two columns.
Cap Corners
Use with very sharp corners to

generate fewer stitches.
Lap Corners
Use for Tidori style stitching.
Jagged Edge
Create rough edges, shading

effects, or imitate fur and other
fluffy textures along one or more
sides of selected objects.
Trapunto
large areas with low stitch count

Cross Stitch Fill
cross-stitch fills.
Stipple Fill
Create stippled fills of run stitching

which meanders more or less
randomly within a border.
Point & Stitch toolbar

The Point & Stitch tools provide everything
necessary to digitize shapes in bitmap images
automatically without using manual input
methods. See Digitizing shapes with
Point & Stitch for details.
Turning
Satin
Digitize narrow column shapes.
Tatami Fill
Digitize large areas, preserving any

holes.
Force underlying travel runs to

the edges of selected objects.
Tatami Fill
without
Holes
Digitize large areas, ignoring any

holes.
User Defined
Split
Create user-defined split-line

effects.
Pickout Run Digitize center-lines.
Accordion
Spacing
Vary stitch spacing between

dense and open fill.
Outline Run Digitize boundaries of shapes.
Flexi Split
Apply decorative Flexi Split

effect to selected objects.
Match to
Palette
3D Warp
Apply 3D effects to selected

motif fills.
Florentine
Effect
Create user-defined curved

stitching.
Liquid Effect
Create curved stitch effects with

two guidelines.
Stitch Types toolbar

The Stitch Types toolbar contains a group of
tools which determine the stitch types which can
be applied to embroidery objects, including
Find the nearest match between

the selected image color and the
color palette.
Generate toolbar
The Generate toolbar contains a number of tools
traditionally associated with stitch generation
and machine functions.
Generate
Stitches
Generate stitches for new or

selected objects.
Branching
Automatically branch selected

embroidery objects.
911
(Re-)apply closest join to objects

Apply
Closest Join after editing.
Align Left
Left-align selected objects.
Select
On/Off
Align
Horizontal
Centers
Align selected objects through

horizontal centers.
Align Right
Right-align selected objects.
Align Top
Top-align selected objects.
Select a range of stitches.
jumps with needles or

Penetrations Create
borers out.
Borers
Activate boring function.
Use Auto
Start and
End
Toggle Auto Start and End

function on/off according to
current settings. Right-click to
adjust settings.
Adjust stitch density of and/or
scale the whole or selected parts
of a design.
Process
Styles toolbar
Use the Styles toolbar to apply pre-defined
styles to a design. The tools let you:
Apply current settings to selected objects

Change current settings, and
Apply styles to selected objects.
The styles you select as favorites are each
assigned a tool icon on the toolbar. See Working
with styles for details.
Make
Properties
Current
Apply
Current
Properties
Make the properties of a selected

object current for the design.
Favorite
Style
Apply favorite styles to new or

selected objects.
Use Style
Use a style from the template to

new or selected objects.
Align Vertical Align selected objects through

Centers
vertical centers.
Align Bottom Bottom-align selected objects.
Space Evenly Distribute selected objects evenly
Across
across design window.
Space Evenly Distribute selected objects evenly
Down
down design window.
Make Same Scale object or design to same
Width
width as reference object.
Height
height as reference object.
Width and
size as reference object.
Height
Transform toolbar
The Transform toolbar contains tools for
mirroring, rotating and skewing objects. See
Arranging, Scaling & Transforming Objects for
details.
Apply current settings to selected

objects.
Arrange toolbar
The Arrange toolbar contains tools for moving,
aligning and distributing objects, including
grouping and locking tools. See Arranging,
Scaling & Transforming Objects for details.
Group
Group selected objects.
Ungroup
Ungroup selected objects.
Break Apart
Split branched objects

monograms, appliqus, lettering,
etc into component objects.
Lock
Lock selected objects.
Unlock All
Unlock all locked objects in

design.
Mirror
Flip selected objects in horizontal
Horizontally plane.
Mirror
Vertically
Flip selected objects in vertical

plane.
Rotate 45
Degrees
CCW
Rotate 45
Degrees
CW
Rotate selected objects by 45 in

counter-clockwise direction.
Rotate selected objects by 45 in
clockwise direction.
Rotate: rotate selected objects by
exact amount (in degrees).
Skew: skew selected objects by
exact amount (in degrees).
Shaping toolbar
When working with overlapping vector or
embroidery objects, you can merge, trim or split
Q uic k R eference
912
them using the Shaping tools. See Shaping

vector and embroidery objects for details.
Distance: set precise distance.

Angle: set precise angle.
Weld
Merge overlapping objects into a

single flattened object.
Intersect
Trim overlapping areas so that only

those intersected by all selected
objects remain.
Exclude
Trim overlapping objects and

preserve their individual properties.
Trim overlapping objects so that

Front-Back only non-overlapped areas of the
topmost object remain.
Trim overlapping objects so that
Back-Front only non-overlapped areas of the
bottommost object remain.
Flatten
Trim all overlaps while retaining the

original objects.
Divide
Split selected objects into separate

adjoining objects wherever they
intersect with other selected
objects.
Combine
Merge the properties of overlapping

objects and trim overlapping areas.
Keep
Source
Objects
Keep the source objects after

shaping.
Overlap: adjust overlaps of objects
resulting from Flatten or Divide
shaping operations.
Mirror Merge toolbar

Special Mirror-Merge tools allow you to
duplicate and transform selected embroidery
objects, as well as merge them into a single
object. See Mirroring objects for details.
Array
Reflect
Duplicate objects or designs.

Duplicate and mirror objects or
designs.
Rows: set no. of rows.
Row Spacing: set precise row
spacing.
Sequin toolbar
The Sequin toolbar provides a dedicated set of
sequin tools which allow you to digitize sequined
designs for compatible machines. There are also
tools for creating boring holes. See Sequin
Digitizing for details. See also Generate toolbar.
Sequin
Palette
Editor
Select sequin shapes from a sequin

library.
Sequin Palette: select from a
user-defined palette of sequin
shapes for the current design.
Manual
Sequin
Digitize individual sequins.
to left sequin when digitizing

Left Sequin Switch
twin-sequin designs.
Right
Sequin
Switch to right sequin when

digitizing twin-sequin designs.
a string of sequins along a

Sequin Run Create
digitized
line according to current
Auto
settings.
Sequin Run Manually digitize sequin-drops
Manual
along a digitized line.
Sequin Fill
Digitize and fill large, irregular

shapes with sequins.
placement of individual
Sequin Edit Fine-tune
sequins.
Vectors to
Sequins
Create a sequin run from a set of

sequin vector objects selected by
intersecting line.
Bling toolbar
The Bling toolbar contains tools for creating
bling runs as well as fills. There are two available
types of bling run: Simple Run (same size
stones) and Pattern Run (different sizes
following a regular pattern).
Columns: set no. of columns.

Column Spacing: set precise
column spacing.
Wreath
Duplicate objects around a center

point.
Kaleidoscope Duplicate and mirror objects
around a center point.
Wreath Points: enter no. of wreath
points.
Bling Palette Select bling shapes from a

Editor
pattern library.
digitize bling-drops
Bling Manual Manually
along a digitized line.
Bling Run
Auto
Create a string of rhinestones

along a digitized line according
to current settings.
Bling Fill
Digitize complex shapes (with or

without holes) filled with bling.
Automatic
Overlap
Removal
Activate if you want to

automatically remove unwanted
overlapping bling items from a
bling object.
913
No Automatic
Overlap
Removal
Highlight
Bling
Overlaps
Bling Edit
Activate if you dont want to

automatically remove
overlapping bling items from a
bling object.
Activate if you want to highlight
overlapping bling items in a
bling object i.e. if you want to
edit manually.
Edit selected bling items
individually or as a group within
an object.
Chenille toolbar
If you have a Chenille option installed with your
EmbroideryStudio system, the design window
will include a Chenille toolbar containing specific
Chenille stitch types and machine functions. See
Chenille User Manual Supplement for details.
Stitch narrow shapes or columns
where each stitch traverses the
column width.
Create stitching similar to Tatami
suitable for narrow column
Straight
shape objects filled with Chain or
Complex Fill objects filled with
Moss.
Use with large with Complex Fill
filled with Moss
Perpendicular objects
comprises two layers of Straight
Fill
stitch typically perpendicular to
each other.
Fill large Complex Fill objects with
concentric rows of coil stitching,
Island Coil
simulating the circular motion of
hand-chenille embroidery.
Create decorative stitching
resembling links of a chain used
Chain
for outlines and borders as well as
monograms.
Create dense cover using looped
stitch typical of Chenille raised
Moss
stitching best with simple
shapes.
Control height of loop formed
Needle
when sewing Moss stitch as well
Height
as width of Chain stitch.
Use with Complex Fill to
automatically generate Moss or
Compound
Chain stitch run-arounds for
Chenille
complex shapes. Right-click to
adjust offsets.
View Chenille objects in special
to allow easy identification
View by Chain mode
of
Chain
and Moss elements
Moss
lockstitch in green, Chain in blue,
Moss in red.
Coil
Manual Supplement for details. See also Sequin

toolbar.
View Schiffli designs with any
number of repeats. Right-click to
adjust settings.
Insert command to cause active
End Jump tool (needle or borer) to be pushed
in, thereby penetrating the fabric.
Insert command to cause active
Begin Jump tool (needle or borer) to be
extracted.
Show
Repeats
Slow
Insert command to decrease

machine speed.
Fast
Insert command to increase

machine speed.
Borer In
Insert command to cause borer

attachment to be lowered so that it
penetrates the fabric.
Borer Out
Insert command to cause borer

attachment to be raised.
Set depth of borer attachment to
control how large a hole the borer
makes valid Borer Depths are 1
through 13 for Plauen and 0 to 12
for Saurer.
RPM-
Insert command to decrease the

turning speed of machine.
RPM+
Insert command to increase the

turning speed of machine.
machine to decrease
Fadenleiter- Instruct
Fadenleiter stroke one increment.
Fadenleiter Instruct machine to increase
+
Fadenleiter stroke one increment.
Thread
Brake -
Insert command to decrease

application of thread brake.
Thread
Brake+
Insert command to increase

application of thread brake.
Drop
Sequin
Insert command to cause sequin to

be dropped.
Clear
Function
Remove all functions at current

stitch position.
Toolbox flyout bars

The Toolbox contains the embroidery
digitizing/editing tools specific to and visible only
in Embroidery mode. Related tools are grouped
into flyouts. By default, the Toolbox docks
vertically to the left of screen but can be floated,
re-configured, and docked like any other toolbar.
Schiffli toolbar
If you have a Schiffli option installed with your
EmbroideryStudio system, the design window
will include a Schiffli toolbar which contains
specific Schiffli functions. See Schiffli User
Q uic k R eference
914
Appliqu tools flyout

The Appliqu Tools Flyout contains tools
specific to appliqu work. See Appliqu Digitizing
for details.
Auto
Appliqu
Digitize appliqu objects.
Combine
Appliqu
Components
Break apart multiple appliqu

objects into component objects
and recombine and resequence
for efficient stitchout.
Partial
Appliqu
Create partial cover stitching for

overlapping appliqu objects.
Circle tools flyout

The Circle Tools Flyout provides special
time-saving input tools for digitizing circles,
stars, rings. See Digitizing circles and ovals for
details.
Circle
Digitize filled circles and ovals.
Star
Digitize star shapes filled with

Zigzag stitching.
Ring
Digitize circle and oval-shaped

rings.
Color
Blending
Borders
Backtrack
Reinforce an outline, stitching it in

the reverse direction to the original.
Repeat
Duplicate an outline in the same

direction typically used with
closed shapes.
Drawing tools flyout

The Drawing Tools Flyout contains tools to let
you draft shapes and outlines on screen. Vector
objects can then be converted to embroidery
objects with the application of manual input
methods and stitch types. See Creating vector
outlines for details.
Line
Create straight line vector objects.
Polyline
Create open-ended vector objects.
Polygon
Create closed vector objects.
Ellipse
Create circular or elliptical vector

objects.
Rectangle
Create rectangular or square

vector objects.
Column Shape tools flyout

The Column Shape Tools Flyout contains tools
for creating column shapes for borders of fixed or
varying width. Right-click to adjust settings for
new or selected objects. See Digitizing simple
borders for details.
Input A
Create columns of varying width

and stitch angle.
Input B
Create asymmetrical columns of

turning stitches, where opposite
sides are different shapes.
Input C
Use to digitize columns or borders

of fixed width.
Create Special tools flyout

The Create Special Tools Flyout provides
specialized digitizing features to help save
digitizing time. See Special Digitizing Techniques
for details.
Generate color blends, perspective

effects and shading in selected
objects.
Add borders to designs (or
selected objects) with or without
lettering.
Edit tools flyout

The Edit Tools Flyout contains tools for object
editing operations. See Reshaping & Converting
Objects for details.
Knife
Automatic
Knife
Stitch
Angles
Cut objects along a digitized line,

preserving object type, stitch
settings, and colors in resulting
objects.
Automatically slice Complex Fill
and Fusion Fill embroidery objects
into smaller turning stitch and
single angle objects with automatic
overlaps.
Add stitch angles to selected
objects.
Freehand tools flyout

The Freehand Tools Flyout contains tools for
drawing embroidery outlines and fills directly on
accurate outlines for any

Insert Offset Create
filled embroidery object or any
Object
closed vector object.
Fill holes formed by existing
boundaries, without having to
Fill Holes
re-digitize the shape choose to fill
the hole exactly or offset it.
915
screen. See Creating freehand embroidery for

details.
FreehandOpen
Object
FreehandClosed
Outline
Object
FreehandClosed Fill
Object
Draw embroidery outlines directly

on screen.
Stemstitch
Draw freehand outline embroidery
objects on screen.
Draw freehand filled embroidery
objects on screen.
Free Shape tools flyout

The Free Shape Tools Flyout provides tools for
you digitize complex shapes with turning stitches
or with fixed stitch angles. By digitizing further
internal boundaries, you can create complex
shapes with holes in them. Right-click to adjust
settings. See Digitizing free shapes for details.
Fusion Fill
Digitize filled shapes with turning

stitches.
Complex
Fill
Digitize filled shapes with a single

stitch angle.
Manual tools flyout

The Manual Tools Flyout provides tools for
digitizing individual stitches with the Manual
method. Enter single manual stitches or three
stitch layers at a time. See Digitizing individual
stitches for details.
Manual
Enter individual stitches.
Triple
Manual
Enter triple stitches.
Outline tools flyout

The Outline Tools Flyout provides tools for you
create simple run stitching as well as decorative
outlines using motifs from the motif library. See
also Creating outlines and details.
Run
Triple Run
Motif Run
Backstitch
Place row of single run stitches

along digitized line. Right-click to
adjust settings.
Place a triple row of run stitches
along a digitized line. Right-click to
adjust settings for new or selected
objects.
Place a row of motifs along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust
settings for new or selected
objects.
Place a row of back-stitches along

a digitized line. Right-click to adjust
objects.
Place a row of stem-stitches along
a digitized line. Right-click to adjust
objects.
Reshape tools flyout

The Reshape Tools Flyout tools let you reshape
objects with control points as well as edit
individual stitches. See Reshaping embroidery
objects for details. See also Stitches & Machine
Functions.
Reshape
Object
Stitch Edit
Reshape selected objects, edit

stitch angles, and adjust entry/exit
points.
Select individual stitches for
editing.
Select tools flyout

The Select Tools Flyout tools let you to select
all embroidery objects in a design, cancel all
selections, or remove individual objects from a
selected group. See Selecting and deselecting
Select
Object
Select
Current
Polygon
Select
Polyline
Select
Select individual objects as well as

groups or ranges of objects.
Select object associated with
current cursor position.
Select objects with a bounding box.
Draw a line through the object to
select.
Smart Design tools flyout

The Smart Design Tools Flyout provides a
range of complementary tools and techniques for
semi-automatically digitizing suitably prepared
artwork. See Semi-Automatic Digitizing for
details.
Reduce number of colors and
remove image noise in
non-outlined images.
Sharpen
Sharpen outlines and reduce noise
Edges
in outlined images.
Smart
Create embroidery designs directly
Design
from imported images.
Convert artwork to vector objects
Auto Trace for conversion to embroidery
objects.
embroidery designs directly
Photo Flash Create
from photographs.
Reduce
Colors
Q uic k R eference
916
Stitch/Function tools flyout

The Stitch/Function Tools Flyout provides
tools for manually adding tie-offs and trims to a
design. While generally not recommended and
less efficient than using automatic connectors,
this method does give you more control over the
final design. See Adding connectors manually for
details.
Note For Schiffli work, you are advised to add
connectors manually rather than rely on the
automatic settings. Automatic connectors are
turned off by default in the Schiffli template.
Tie Off
Insert a tie-off.
Trim
Insert a trim.
Empty
Stitch
Function
Empty
Jump
Function
Keep Last
Stitch
Omit Last
Stitch
Insert an empty stitch.
any stitch in a design. See Viewing stitching

Start/End
Design
Travel by
Object
Travel by
Segment
Travel by
Color
Travel by
Function
Travel by
Trim
Travel 1000
Stitches
Travel 100
Stitches
Travel 10
Stitches
Travel 1
Stitch
Travel to start of design. Right-click

to go to end of design.
Travel to previous or next object.
Travel to previous or next segment.
Travel to previous or next color
change.
Travel to previous or next machine
function.
Travel to previous or next trim
function.
Travel backwards or forwards 1000
stitches at a time.
stitches at a time.
stitches at a time.
stitch at a time.
Insert an empty jump.

Keep last stitch in a column.
Omit last stitch in a column.
Team Name tools flyout

The Team NameTools Flyout contains a
complete set of tools for the creation of team
lettering designs. See Team Lettering for details.
Team
Names
Associate multiple names with a

design.
Team
Names
Matrix
Toggle team members display

on/off. Use it to view and edit
individual team names.
Automatically create a matrix of all
names in a team-name object
together with their corresponding
design.
Create
Layout
Create multi-line lettering layouts.
Team List
Travel tools flyout

The Travel Tools Flyout contains tools for
viewing the stitching sequence of a design
color-by-color, object-by-object, or
stitch-by-stitch. Traveling can be initiated from
917
Keyboard Shortcuts
Selecting objects
General functions
To ..
Press
select all objects

deselect all objects
activate Select Object tool
deactivate Select Object tool
select object at current needle
position
select multiple objects
select range of objects
select next object
select previous object
select object beneath
add next object to selection
add previous object to selection
activate Polygon Select tool
toggle Selects On/Off
group selected objects
ungroup selected objects
lock selected object
unlock all locked objects
C+A
E or X
o
E
V+O
To ..
Press
start new design

open design
C+N
C+O or
A+F+O
A+F+C
C+S
A+f+A
C+P or
A+f+p
C+E
V+G
V+V
V+L
V+J
A
M
C+i
C+Z
C+Y
E
1
A+4
close design
save design
save as
print design
record select object to clipart
show/hide Grid
show/hide Overview window
show/hide Color-Object List
show Stitch List
open Lettering dialog
measure distance on-screen
show measure tooltip
undo command
redo command
cancel command
open online help
exit application
Digitizing functions
To ..
Press
activate Fusion Fill

activate Complex Fill
activate Input A
activate Input B
activate Input C
activate Appliqu
activate Single Run
activate Triple Run
activate Motif Run
activate Backstitch
activate Stemsitch
apply Satin stitch
apply Tatami stitch
finish digitizing object (keep last
stitch)
finish digitizing object (omit last
stitch)
finish digitizing free shape
boundary
delete last input point
generate stitches
switch between fill and run stitch
switch between fill and manual
stitch
toggle Auto Underlay on/off
activate Auto Trace
activate Branching
make combined vector object
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
V+I
V+M
R
s
R
B
G
s
R
u
C+M
I
V+H
or
V+A
V+N
C+[
V+[
T
V+T
2+[
C+T
C+V+T
C+L
Q
C+G
C+U
K
V+K
Viewing designs
To ..
Press
toggle TrueView on/off

show/hide stitches
show/hide outlines
show/hide needle points
show/hide connectors
show/hide function symbols
fit design to window
fit selected objects to window
hide others
show bitmaps
show vectors
zoom in 2X
zoom out 2X
zoom to 1:1 scale (100%)
specify zoom factor
zoom box
zoom box in Overview window
activate panning
deactivate Auto Scroll
T
S
L
. (period)
V+C
V+F
0 (zero)
V+0 (zero)
V+s
D
V+D
Z
V+Z
1
F
B
V+B
P
V (hold
down)
C
center current stitch in design

window
return to previous view
redraw (refresh) screen
activate Slow Redraw
V
r
* V+R
* Turn TrueView off

To travel ..
Press
or
to start of design
to end of design
to next color
h
e
d
7
1
3
* Stitch Edit tool selected ^ No object selected Keypad, Num

Lock off
Keyb oa rd Shor tcu ts
918

To travel ..
to previous color
to next segment
to previous segment
to next object
to previous object
100 stitches forward
100 stitches backward
10 stitches forward
10 stitches backward
1 stitch forward
1 stitch backward
select/deselect stitches
Press
u
* C+r
* C+l
C+T
V+T
^
^
^b
^t
^r
^l
*T
or
9
C+6
C+4
+
2
8
6
4
* Stitch Edit tool selected ^ No object selected Keypad, Num

Lock off
Cutting & pasting objects
To ..
Press
or
cut object
copy object
paste object
duplicate object
delete selected objects or last
object
C+X
C+C
C+V
C+D
D
V+D
C+Z
V+Z
Modifying objects & stitches

To ..
Press or click
move selected object horizontally or * C+:

vertically
nudge selected object
[+t b l r
maintain proportions while resizing V+:
activate Reshape Object tool
H
activate Show Stitch Angles tool
A+a
activate Show Reshape Nodes tool
A+N
change reshape node type
^ [+M
activate Stitch Angles tool
C+H
activate Stitch Edit tool
E
add stitch angles (Fusion Fill)
C+H
check design integrity
!
* Drag object Drag handle ^ Select control point
Schiffli functions
To ..
Press
insert Blatt/Stepp function

insert Fadenleiter Plus/Minus
insert Boring Tension Start/End
insert RPM Plus/Minus
change Schiffli borer depth
show Schiffli repeats
[]
<>
/\
:"
;
W
919
PART XII
MENU CHART
920
e2.0
7),#/-E
e2.0
1
X
1
3D
STOP
A 1000
100
10
1
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
not in all models; no en todos los modelos; nao em
todos os modelos; non in tutti i modelli; pas dans tous
les modles; nicht verfgbar fr alle Modelle
5HY$XJ
&RS\ULJKW10
:LOFRP3W\/WG
921
Menu Chart Key

Pressing a different button on your digitizing puck can affect a command on your
Menu Chart in different ways:
Generally, a command will simply be executed e.g. Save file, Undo

command, Generate stitches, etc.
Some commands toggle a function on or off e.g. Auto Jump On/Off,

TrueView On/Off, etc. The same or different puck buttons may toggle the
command.
Other commands affect sequence e.g. Travel to Start/End of Design, Travel
to Next/Previous Function. Different buttons generally control direction i.e.
forward / backward.
Some commands let you select options or adjust values which affect the
command e.g. Program Split display options, Fractional Spacing values.
The key at the bottom of the table explains the action that a particular button
press performs in combination with a given command icon.
Icon
Command
Save
Icon
Command
Information
Undo
Redo
Select All
Deselect All
Start / End
Design
Show Rulers &

Guides
Remove Small
Stitches
Exit
Show All
Previous View
Pan
Center Current
Stitch
Redraw Screen
Zoom Box
Zoom 1:1
Zoom In 2X
TrueView
toggle on/off
activate
Zoom Factor
Zoom Out 2X
Show Stitches
deactivate
change values
view options
backward
forward
922
Icon
Command
Icon
Command
Show Outline
Show Needle
Points
Show
Connectors
Show Function
Symbols
Show Grid
Show Repeat
Show Drawing
Show
1. Chain/Moss
2. Stepp/Blatt
3. Needle In/Out
Satin
Tatami
Zigzag
E-Stitch
Program Split
Motif Fill
Contour
Flexi Split
Florentine Effect
Liquid Effect
Auto Jump
Stitch Shortening
Pull
Compensation
Fractional
Spacing
Automatic
Underlay
Jagged Edge
Trapunto
1/4. User
Defined Split
2/3. Split
Alternate
Accordion
Spacing
3D
Straight
Perpendicular
Fill
Island Coil
activate
deactivate
change values
3D Warp
Coil
toggle on/off
view options
backward
forward
923
Icon
Command
Icon
Compound
Chenille
Command
Needle Height
Chain
Moss
Select Object
Polygon Select
Reshape Object
Stitch Edit
Tie Off
1. Keep Last
Stitch
2/4. Omit Last
Stitch
Trim
1. Empty Stitch
2/4. Empty Jump
Stitch Angles
1. Backtrack
2/4. Repeat
Next Color
Input A
Input B
Complex Fill
Fusion Fill
Auto Appliqu
Lettering
Input C
Run
Triple Run
Motif Run
Backstitch
Stemstitch
Travel to Start /
End
Travel by Object
Travel by
Segment
Travel by Color
toggle on/off
activate
deactivate
change values
view options
backward
forward
924
Icon
Command
Icon
Command
Travel by
Function
1000
10
Travel 1000
Stitches
100
Travel 10
Stitches
Travel 100
Stitches
Travel 1 Stitch
Circle
Ring
Star
Stipple
Manual
Triple Manual
Sequin Manual
Sequin Run Auto
Sequin Run
Manual
Make Motif
Select Motif
Use Motif
1
Smart Corners
Preset Spacing
1/2/3/4
Auto Spacing
Auto Split
Cut
Copy
Paste Options
1/2/3/4
Move
1. Penetrations
on
4. Penetrations
off
1. Borers in
4. Borers out
1. Insert Fast
2/4. Add Fast
1. Insert Slow
2/4. Add Slow
1. Insert Stepp
2/4. Add Stepp
1. Insert Blatt
2/4. Add Blatt
toggle on/off
activate
deactivate
change values
view options
backward
forward
925
Icon
Command
Icon
Command
1. Insert Auto
Frame
2/4. Add Auto
Frame
STOP
Drop Sequin
Sequin Palette
1. Insert Stop
2/4. Add Stop
1. Insert Function
2/4. Clear
Function
Shift Drawing
Shift Menu
Tab
Backspace
Cancel
Delete
No
Yes
Spacebar
Enter
toggle on/off
activate
deactivate
change values
view options
backward
forward
Paste Options: 1. Paste - Object Property Position, 2. Paste - Shift Pasted

Objects, 3. Paste - Center at Current Stitch, 4. Paste - Start at Current Stitch.
Add / Insert functions: See Machine function types for details.
926
PART XIII
APPENDICES
927
Appendix A
Supported Machine, File and Disk Types
This section provides details of the file and disk types supported by
EmbroideryStudio. Details are also provided about the conversion of Melco
CND, Wilcom INP, and Gunold PCH design formats to and from EMB. The section
also provides details of vector and bitmap (raster) formats.
Note There are many additional Schiffli file formats to suit specific Schiffli
machines. EmbroideryStudio supports the most important of these. See the ES
Schiffli User Manual Supplement for details.
Supported machine types

The table shows the machine types supported by EmbroideryStudio. Make sure
you first check the recommended connection settings for your particular
machine. If you dont have a record of the connection settings required to set
up your embroidery machine, a list can be found at the Wilcom Support Center.
This provides connection information for all the machines listed in this table. See
also Connecting machines.
Machine Format
Description
Tajima
This format is used for main types of Tajima machines.
Tajima TBF
This is used for Tajima needle addressing capable machines. TBF

(Tajima Binary Format) file format is a more intelligent machine
format which holds needle addressing information. The design needs
to be digitized using this machine format for it to run on Tajima
machines with a twin-sequin attachment.
Tajima TMCE-100
This format is used for Chenille-enabled Tajima machines.
Tajima TMCE-600
This format is used for Chenille-enabled Tajima machines.
Barudan
This format is used for many Barudan machines. It supports up to 9

needles. The Barudan format is suitable for paper tape, FMC disks,
and the DSB file format.
Barudan FDR-II
Lockstitch
This format is currently used for BED* series lockstitch machines and
is the standard for all new Barudan lockstitch machine models. It
supports up to 15 needles and optional sequin attachments.
Barudan FDR-II
Chenille
Combination
This format is used for newer models of Barudan Chenille machines

supporting 6 chenille colors such as the BEDYH and BEDSH. Using
this format, you can digitize pure Chenille or even a combination of
Chenille and Lockstitch in the one design.
Barudan Chenille
This format is used only for the older BELM - A3C series of Barudan
Chenille Machines with 5 Chenille colors. Newer models use
Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination.
Barudan FDR-II
Twin Sequin
This is a Barudan twin sequin machine. The design needs to be

digitized using this machine format for it to run on Barudan machine
with a twin-sequin attachment.
928
Machine Format
Description
Barudan FDR-II
Twin Sequin
Chenille
Combination
This is a Barudan twin sequin and Chenille combination machine.

The design needs to be digitized using this machine format for it to
run on Barudan machine with a twin-sequin and chenille attachment.
Barudan Z Series
This format is used for Barudan Z series machines with 10 or more

needles.
SWF
This format is used for main types of SWF machines.
Melco
This format is used for main types of Melco machines.
Melco Chenille
This format is used for Melco-enabled Chenille machines.
Pfaff
This format is used for main types of Pfaff machines.
Toyota
This format is used for main types of Toyota machines.
Zangs
This is the format for Zangs and Marco brand machines and pre-1988
ZSK machines without trimmers.
ZSK 1
This format is for ZSK machines that have 7 or fewer needles

generally those older than 1991.
ZSK 2
This format is for ZSK machines that have more than 7 needles and
those characterized by a single top thread trimmer.
ZSK TC
This format is for ZSK machines that accepts Transport Code Disks
(DOS format disks).
Inbro
This format is used for main types of Inbro machines.
Schiffli
This format is used for Schiffli machines.
Note If not already a member of the WSC, you will need to register as a licensed
user of Wilcom software. See www.wilcom.com.au/support for details.
Supported file formats

In conjunction with CorelDRAW, EmbroideryStudio reads and writes a wide
variety of related and sometimes complementary decoration processes or
techniques. See also Multi-Decoration File Export.
Supported graphics formats

Artwork can be imported into EmbroideryStudio in both vector and bitmap
(raster) formats. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for details.
Supported vector graphic formats
EmbroideryStudio supports the following vector graphic formats:
Extension Format
Read
AI
Adobe Illustrator
CDR
CorelDRAW
CDT
CorelDRAW Template
CGM
Computer Graphics Metafile
CLK
Corel R.A.V.E.
Write
929
Extension Format
Read
CMX
Corel Presentation Exchange

5.0
CSL
Corel Symbol Library
DES
Corel Designer
DWG
AutoCAD
DXF
AutoCAD
EMF
Enhanced Metafile
EPS
Encapsulated Postscript
FMV
Frame Vector Metafile
PLT
HPGL Plotter File
PS
Postscript
SVG
Scalable Vector Graphics
WMF
Windows Metafile
Write
Supported bitmap image formats

EmbroideryStudio supports the following bitmap image formats:
Extension Format
Read
BMP
Windows Bitmap
EPS
Encapsulated Postscript
GEM
GEM file
JPEG
JPEG Group
JPG
JPEG File Interchange
PAT
Pattern File
PCT
Macintosh PICT
PCX
PC Paintbrush
PNG
Portable Network Graphics
PNG
Portable Network Graphics
SVGZ
Compressed SVG
TIFF
Tagged Image Format
WMF
Windows Metafile
WPG
Corel WordPerfect Graphic
Write
Note For a full description of image file formats supported by CorelDRAW,

refer to the CorelDRAW electronic User Guide available via the Windows Start
> Programs group. Alternatively, use the onscreen help available from the
Help menu. See Digitizing with Bitmaps for details.
Appendix A Su ppor ted Machine, File and Disk Ty pes
930
Supported embroidery file formats

There are two types of embroidery file format:
File format
Description
Outline
Outline or condensed files usually contain digitized shapes and lines,

selected stitch types and stitch values and effects.
Stitch
Stitch or expanded files generally contain stitches and machine functions

and are only suited to specific embroidery machines.
Wilcom file formats

EmbroideryStudio uses its own native EMB embroidery file format which
combines the advantages of outline files and stitch files. Outlines, stitches,
thread colors, and other data are stored together. Outlines mean the file can be
scaled and manipulated on an object basis while the stitch data preserves
manual stitch-by-stitch edits and touchups. Features of most third-party formats
are supported. Variants and precursors of the EMB file format are also shown in
the table below.
Extension
Format
Read
AMT
artista V4.0 template
AMT42
Explorations template
ART
artista V4.0 design files
ART42
Explorations project file
ART50
BERNINA Embroidery Software file
EMB
Wilcom EmbroideryStudio design file (up to &

including e2.0)
EMB
Wilcom DecoStudio design file (up to & including

e1)
EMC
Clipart Files
EMT
Wilcom ES templates
ESD
Wilcom DOS format
INP
Wilcom condensed format
Write
Note ESD is the native file format of DOS ES, the precursor to the current
EmbroideryStudio. It is actually a stitch file format with stitch blocks, stitch
types and parameters, and an icon. It has few of the advantages of the current
EMB file format.
Note Wilcom INP is the native file format of Wilcom Computer Embroidery
Design software. It is an outline file format but it contains no stitch data. Wilcom
INP designs can be directly converted to EMB files although EmbroideryStudio
interprets some of the stitch types differently. See Conversion of Wilcom INP
format to Wilcom EMB for details.
931
Supported outline file formats

EmbroideryStudio supports the following outline file (condensed) formats:
Extension Format
Read
CND
Melco condensed file
PCH
Gunold APS
Write
Note See below for conversion details when reading these files into EMB format
or writing to CND format. See Melco CND format and Conversion of Gunold PCH
format to Wilcom EMB.
Supported stitch file formats
EmbroideryStudio supports the following stitch file (expanded) formats:
Extension
Format
10O
Toyota
ARX
artista cross stitch files
BRO
Bits & Volts
CSD
POEM/Singer/Huskygram
DAT
Hiraoka DAT
DSB
DST
Read
Write
Barudan
Tajima
DSZ
ZSK Tajima machine format
EMX
Wilcom Cross Stitch
ESL
Wilcom ESL
ESS
Wilcom ESS
EXP
Melco
HUS
Husqvarna/Viking
INB
Inbro Files
JEF
Janome/Elna/Kenmore format
(V1.0)
KSM
Pfaff
MJD
Time & Space MJD
PCD
Pfaff
PCQ
Pfaff
PCS
Pfaff
PEC
Deco, Brother, Babylock
PES
Deco, Brother, Babylock
PMU
Proel
PUM
Proel DOS
includes needle addressing data Two options ZSK1 and ZSK2 (see note) Can only be
written by ES Cross Stitch application TAP and MON files are written together TAP is the
stitch file, MON the header file. Used with Transport Code Disks (see note)
932
Extension
Format
Read
SAS
Saurer SLC
SEW
Janome/Elna/Kenmore
STC
Gunold
STX
Datastitch
T01
Tajima Wilcom DST format
T03
Barudan Wilcom DSB format
T04
Zangs
T05
ZSK Wilcom DSZ format
T09
Pfaff Wilcom KSM format
T10
Wilcom Plauen
T15
Wilcom Saurer
Write
TAP / MON Happy

TBF
Tajima
U01
Barudan (TBD)
VEP
Hiraoka VEP
XXX
Compucon
Z??
ZSK TC machine format
includes needle addressing data Two options ZSK1 and ZSK2 (see note) Can only be
written by ES Cross Stitch application TAP and MON files are written together TAP is the
stitch file, MON the header file. Used with Transport Code Disks (see note)
Note ZSK1 format is used with older ZSK machines, generally those older than
1991 which have no more than 7 needles. ZSK2 is for newer ZSK machines,
those characterized by a single top thread trimmer. The trim is the most
significant differentiating factor between the two types. If the ZSK machine
accepts Transport Code Disks, then ZSK TC Machine Format must be used.
Melco CND format

Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of the Melco embroidery
digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values. See
also Opening Melco CND outline files.
Conversion of Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB

When you open CND designs in EmbroideryStudio, outlines are scaled and
stitches recalculated to preserve density. EmbroideryStudio recognizes all
Melco machine functions and stitch types, including Partition Lines and Complex
Fill, and automatically converts them to EMB format. This table details how
Melco features are converted.
Melco CND
EMB
Notes
Stitch Types
Column Stitches
Input A, Satin stitch
933
Melco CND
EMB
Notes
Simple Fill
Complex Fill,
Tatami
The stitch angle is determined by the

longest stitchline.
Complex Fill
Complex Fill
Melco EDS Complex Fill are

recognized and converted to
EmbroideryStudio Complex Fill.
Column Fill
Input A, Tatami fill
Walk
Run
Bean Stitch
Triple Run
Singleline Column Input,

Centerline
Input C
Singleline Column Input, Left

Line / Right Line
Input C
Side 1 / Side 2
Partition Lines
Tatami partition
lines
Underlays
Complex Underlay
Tatami underlay in
Complex Fill object
Edge Walk
Edge Run
Center Walk
Center Run
Narrow Column
Zigzag
Column Stitches only
Machine functions
Needle Up
Jump, Begin Jump
Reset Stitch
End Jump
Manual Lock Stitch
Added in Tie Off
Automatic Lock Stitch
Tie In, Tie Off
Chain
Chain
Moss
Moss
Needle Height
Needle Height
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Borer In/Out
Borer In/Out
Sequin On/Off
Sequin On/Off
If Automatic Lock Stitch is set for

every Color Change, and at the start
and end of the design, tie off and tie
in stitches are inserted in the EMB
design.
Conversion of Wilcom EMB format to Melco CND

You can save files to Melco CND format from EmbroideryStudio. Designs
originally created in EmbroideryStudio generally give the best results. Other
file types may not have all the data necessary for successful conversion. This
table details how EmbroideryStudio stitch types and effects are converted to
CND format.
934
Tip When you convert to CND, many EmbroideryStudio effects will be lost. If
it is important to preserve the effects, save in Melco EXP stitch format instead.
Alternatively, turn off all effects before saving to CND format. See also Best
EmbroideryStudio input methods for Melco CND output.
EMB
Melco CND
Notes
Stitch types
Manual
Walk
Run
Walk
Triple Run
Bean Stitch
Only if the design is an original Wilcom

EMB design
Triple Run
(run count > 3)
Bean Stitch
Reverts to Triple Run (run count = 3).
Satin stitch
Column Fill
Tatami - standard
Fill Stitch
Use Complex Fill to make sure that the

stitch lines are parallel.
Tatami - with random factor Walk

applied
Tatami - with sharply turning Walk or Complex
stitches
Fill
Changes to Walk if Superstar

compatible, otherwise Complex Fill
with a fixed angle.
Tatami - with slightly turning Fill Stitch, several

stitches
sections
The shape is divided into several

sections, filled with parallel Fill Stitch.
There may be small gaps between
these sections.
Zigzag
Walk
Density is not preserved when the

design is scaled.
E Stitch (Inputs A, B & C)
Column Stitches
E Stitch (Complex Fill)
Walk
Stitch settings
Run length
Set length
CND Walk stitch length is the same as

EMB Run stitch length.
Tatami length and spacing
Fill or Complex Fill

settings
The length and density of Fill Stitches

will be the same as EMB Tatami length
and spacing.
Walk
Uses CND Auto Underlay.
Underlays
Center Run
Edge Run
Zigzag
Double Zigzag
Zigzag (for objects with
Satin cover only)
Narrow Column
Effects
Accordion Spacing
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
Motif Fill
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
935
EMB
Melco CND
Notes
Contour Stitch
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
Flexi Split
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
Auto Split
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
Jagged Edge
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
Trapunto style
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
Program Split
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
User Defined Split
Not preserved
The effect is lost.
Photo Flash
Walk
Density is not preserved when the

design is scaled.
Pull Compensation
Not preserved
The original shape is preserved. The

effect is lost.
Fractional Spacing
Not preserved
In EmbroideryStudio, turn on
Fractional Spacing and set it to 0.5mm.
Although there is no direct equivalent
in CND, effectively it uses a fixed
fractional spacing with a value equal to
0.5.
Stitch Shortening
Not preserved
Outlines are more accurately

recognized if Stitch Shortening is
turned off.
Auto Spacing
Not preserved
Auto Spacing is converted to fixed

spacing, based on the average space
value. It is best to turn off Auto Spacing
when digitizing a design for CND.
Smart Corners
Not preserved
Avoid digitizing pointed ends.
Color Change / Stop

functions
Color Change /
Stop
Functions inserted on stitches inside

objects are not converted.
Empty
Walk
Two MK1 points are repeated at the

current position.
Jump
Needle Up
Needle Up
Needle Up
Tie In (Lettering)
Walk
Tie Off
Walk
End Jump
Reset Stitch
Begin Jump
Needle Up
Needle Height
Needle Height
Moss
Moss
Chain
Chain
Trim
Trim
Quality features
Machine functions
The ability to output without Trim

function does not apply to this version.
936
Best EmbroideryStudio input methods for Melco CND output

This table details which input methods give the best results when digitizing a
design for Melco EDS-III CND output.
Input method
Compatibility
Notes
Input A, B, C
OK
Use with Satin only.
Complex Fill
OK
Only use with Tatami fill. Do not digitize pointed

ends as they will be squared off during
conversion. Cut off pointed ends with a straight
line, parallel to the stitch angle, to avoid conversion
problems.
Fusion Fill
Not
recommended
Fusion Fill objects are separated into a single

object per segment. Conversions may produce
undesired results.
Circle
OK
Ring
Not
recommended
The exit point will be on the wrong side of the

shape.
Star
Not
recommended
The stitches are output as Walk.
End - Keep Last

Stitch
OK
The exit point should always be on the opposite

side to the entry point.
End - Omit Last

Stitch
Do not use
Start digitizing the next shape on the opposite side

instead.
Conversion of Gunold PCH format to Wilcom EMB

PCH Punch and Stitch is the native file format of the Gunold Embroidery Design
software. Gunold PCH designs can be directly converted to EMB files although
EmbroideryStudio interprets some of the stitch types differently. This table
details how Gunold PCH features are converted to EMB format.
Gunold PCH
EMB
Outline types
Parallel
Input A
Serial
Input C
Block Outline
Complex Fill
Run
Run
Incline
Run
Manual
Manual
Stitch types
Satin
Satin
Ceding
Tatami
Random
Ceding
Tatami with random factor applied
Step
Tatami
Piping
Contour
OBI
Tatami
937
Gunold PCH
EMB
Zigzag
Zigzag
Cross
not supported
Photo
not supported
Satin underlays
none
none
Single
Center Run
Edge
Edge Run
Zigzag
Zigzag
Cross
Zigzag
Edge Zigzag
Edge Run + Zigzag
Edge Cross
Edge Run + Zigzag
Netting
Double Zigzag
Double Zigzag
Double Zigzag
Triple Zigzag
Double Zigzag
Step / block fill levels

Complex Fill
Holes in Complex Fill
Form Fill
User Defined Split in Complex Fill
Vector Fill
User Defined Split in Complex Fill
Block Fill
Program Split in Complex Fill
Miscellaneous
Branches
Grouped object (uses lettering

sequence algorithm)
Random side 1 / side 2
Jagged Edge effect
Pitch
Stitch Spacing
Length
Stitch length
Stitch angle
Complex Fill stitch angle
U turn
Backtrack
Compensation
Pull Compensation
Corner mode
Smart Corners
Short / Long
Stitch Shortening
Square
backstitch
Satin
Step
Straight stitch
Trapunto
Styles
Motifs
Patterns
none
Conversion of Wilcom INP format to Wilcom EMB

Wilcom INP is the native file format of Wilcom Computer Embroidery Design
software. Wilcom INP designs can be directly converted to EMB files although
938
EmbroideryStudio interprets some of the stitch types differently. This table

details how Wilcom INP features are converted to EMB format.
Wilcom INP
EMB
Notes
Auto Spacing
Auto Spacing
Values are different. Can be changed

before stitching.
Backtrack/Repeat
section/marked
Separate objects are Functions are supported correctly.

added.
Backup Lock
Satin tie off
Borderline Tatami
Borderline Tatami
Borer In/Out
Borer In/Out
CED Block lettering
Block2 alphabet
Font can be changed after conversion.
CED Block, Jump out
Block2 alphabet
Manual edits and trimming
Circle
Circle
ES Cross Stitch
Paths imported as
Run objects only
Delete Stitch
Manual only, ignored Can be edited

for other stitch types
Family of Curves Split
Satin, single curve as Noticeably different from Satin. You can

split line
copy imported curve to get multiple
curves.
Alternating number is ignored.
Geflecht
Standard Tatami
Can be edited
Matching Tatami
Non-matching
Tatami
Complex Fill will have matching Tatami.
Motifs
Patches
Normal objects
Needle In/Out
End/Begin Jump
Change the stitch type to Motif Run to

generate cross stitch.
Other Multihead Machine Stop (with info label) For example, Insert Appliqu is
Functions
converted to Stop.
Program Stitch
Manual stitch
Ring
Ring
Scattered Tatami
Tatami with random

factor applied
Schiffli Functions
Stepp/Blatt only,
others are ignored
Slow/Fast
Slow/Fast
Split Alternate
Tatami
Split Stitch
Standard Tatami
Looks different but can be edited
Tajima style Lock
Tajima tie off
OK most of the time
Tourenblat
E Stitch
Looks different, so that it is easy to

locate and edit
Trim/Tie In/Tie Off
Connector properties
Turn fill (spacing

measured along shape
boundary)
Will look different but can be re-digitized

Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e in smaller sections
2.0 turn fill (generally
fewer stitches)
Underlays slant
Zigzag underlay
Will look slightly different
Can be added manually
939
Wilcom INP
EMB
Notes
Underlays, 3 or 4 layers
Two underlays only
Can be edited
Supported embroidery disk formats

You can write a design to a disk which is formatted for a specific embroidery
machine. The disk can then be read through the machiness Floppy Disk Reader.
The following disk formats are supported:
Format
Density
Barudan 2HD
DS/HD
Barudan S-FMC
DS/HD
DOS
DS/HD
Happy
DS/HD
Tajima
DS/HD
Toyota
DS/HD
ZSK TC
DS/HD
Read
Write
940
Appendix B
Object Types, Stitch Types, and Effects
Not all stitch types can be applied to all object types. Nor can all stitch effects
be applied to all stitch types or objects. The tables below describe the
relationships between the various object and stitch types supported by
EmbroideryStudio, as well as the stitch effects which can be applied to them.
Note Not all object types, stitch types, and effects are supported in every level
of product. For a complete feature listing, see Product Differentiation Table in the
Object interconversion
This table describes the relationship between object types and interconversion
options. See Converting between embroidery objects for details.
Run
Ring
Circle
Auto Appliqu
Fusion Fill
Complex Fill
Input C
Input B
Input A
Vector
Object Type
Vector
Input A
Input B
Input C
Complex Fill
Fusion Fill
Auto Appliqu
Circle
Ring
Run
Lettering
Run in this case refers to all outline input types Run, Triple
Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch. All are considered both
object types and stitch types and all are interconvertible.
941
Corresponding object and stitch types

This table describes the relationship between object types and stitch types. See
Digitizing Embroidery Shapes and Embroidery Fills for details.
Stitch Type
Run
Stipple
Contour
Motif Fill
Program Split
E Stitch
Zigzag
Tatami
Satin
Object Type
Vector
Input B
Input C
Complex Fill
Fusion Fill
Auto Appliqu
Circle
Star
Ring
Run
Lettering
Strictly speaking, Stipple is not a stitch type. It is an
operation that converts filled objects into run stitches.
Run in this case refers to all outline input types Run,
Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch, Backstitch. All are
considered both object types and stitch types and all are
interconvertible.
Corresponding stitch types, object types, and effects

This table describes the relationship between stitch types, object types, and
effects supported by EmbroideryStudio. Note that, in some cases, stitch type
and object type are one and the same e.g. run stitch.
Stitch Effects
Liquid Effect
Florentine Effect
Flexi-Split
3D Warp
Accordion Spacing
Carving Stamp
User Defined Split
Trapunto
Jagged Edge
Cap Corners
Mitre Corners
Lap Corners
Auto Underlay
Fractional Spacing
Pull Compensation
Shortening
Auto Jump
Object Type
Satin
Input A
Input B
Input C
Complex Fill
Appendix B Ob jec t Types, Stitch Types, and Effe c ts
942
Stitch Effects
Liquid Effect
Florentine Effect
Flexi-Split
3D Warp
Accordion Spacing
Carving Stamp
User Defined Split
Trapunto
Jagged Edge
Cap Corners
Mitre Corners
Lap Corners
Auto Underlay
Fractional Spacing
Pull Compensation
Shortening
Auto Jump
Object Type
Fusion Fill
Auto Appliqu
Circle
Ring
Tatami
Input A
Input B
Input C
Complex Fill
Fusion Fill
Circle
Ring
Zigzag
Input A
Input B
Input C
Complex Fill
Auto Appliqu
Circle
Star
Ring
E Stitch
Input A
Input B
Input C
Complex Fill
Auto Appliqu
Circle
Ring
Program Split
Input A
Input B
Input C
Complex Fill
943
Stitch Effects
Liquid Effect
Florentine Effect
Flexi-Split
3D Warp
Accordion Spacing
Carving Stamp
User Defined Split
Trapunto
Jagged Edge
Cap Corners
Mitre Corners
Lap Corners
Auto Underlay
Fractional Spacing
Pull Compensation
Shortening
Auto Jump
Object Type
Fusion Fill
Circle
Ring
Motif Fill
Complex Fill
Fusion Fill
Contour
Input A
Input B
Input C
Circle
Ring
Run
Run
Triple Run
Triple Run
Motif Run
Motif Run
Appendix B Ob jec t Types, Stitch Types, and Effe c ts
944
Appendix C
Standard Alphabets
The table below includes all alphabets that are standard with your
EmbroideryStudio software. For best results when stitching, do not exceed the
recommended maximum or minimum sizes. Note, however, that recommended
maximum and minimum heights refer to UPPER CASE letters. Most embroidery
fonts are digitized from an original TrueType Font (TTF), some of which have
lower-case letters e.g. a and c which are about 70% the height of a capital
letter. As a result, these letters may be too small to embroider neatly. You may
need to increase the size of the lower-case characters to suit the embroidery.
TrueType Font
Embroidery Letters
You can create special characters in each alphabet by holding down the Alt key
on your keyboard and typing 0 (zero), its code, using the numbers on the
keypad. For example, to type with the code 234, type Alt+0234. The
accented letter will appear when you release the Alt key. See also Adding special
characters and symbols.
Note Not all characters are available in all alphabets.
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
2 Col Arial
Shadow
0.6
15
2.0
50
AD
2 Col Plain Script
0.5
13
2.0
50
AD
Agatha
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
945
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Algerian
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Anaconda
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Angle Block
0.4
10
4.0
100
CJ
Architect
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Arial Rounded
0.3
1.8
45
CJ
Arnold
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Art Block
0.4
10
3.0
75
CJ
Athletica
0.4
10
3.0
75
CJ
Avant Garde
0.2
2.4
60
CJ
Ballantines Script
0.5
12
2.0
50
CJ
Bauhaus
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Ap pen dix C Stan da rd Alp h abe ts
946
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Blacklight
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Block Caps
0.2
2.0
50
CJ
Block1
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Block2
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Block2-Aoto
0.2
2.2
55
CJ
Bodoni
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Book Script
1.0
25
2.2
55
CJ
Border Block 2
0.5
13
1.6
40
AD
Carla
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Castle
0.25
2.0
50
CJ
Casual Serif
0.5
13
2.2
55
CJ
947
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Cayman
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Centurion
0.5
13
2.4
60
CJ
Chancery
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Cheltenham Tall
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Cheshire
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
City Medium
0.25
3.0
75
CJ
City Script
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Civic
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
College
0.25
1.4
35
CJ
College Appliqu
1.0
25
3.2
80
AD
948
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Columbo
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Comics
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Copperplate
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Croissant
0.25
2.0
50
CJ
Curly
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Dauphin
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Detex Normal
0.4
2.0
50
CJ
Dextor
0.4
10
2.0
50
AD
Discoteque
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Easy Script
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Edwardian Script
0.6
15
3.0
75
CJ
949
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Enchantment
0.4
10
1.6
40
CJ
Energy
0.3
2.4
60
CJ
Enviro
0.5
13
3.0
75
CJ
Fancy Monogram
1.0
25
5.0
125
CJ
Felt Tip
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Flair Script
0.75
10
3.2
80
CJ
Flares
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Flash
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Folio Condensed
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Formal Script
0.3
1.4
35
CJ
Free Style
0.4
10
1.6
40
CJ
950
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Futura
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Futura Border 2 C
0.65
16
2.0
50
AD
Futura Outline
0.6
16
2.0
50
CJ
Gaelic
0.44
11
2.0
50
CJ
Garamond
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Glory Appliqu
1.2
30
4.0
100
AD
Goudy Sans
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Greek
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Greek Script
0.48
12
4.0
100
CJ
Greek Spionic
0.4
10
2.4
60
CJ
Hana
0.5
13
2.0
50
CJ
Handel Gothic
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
951
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Handicraft
0.3
2.5
65
CJ
Handy Script
0.5
13
3.0
75
CJ
Hebrew Chaya
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Helvetica
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Helvetica Small
0.2
0.3
CJ
Hobo
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Impress
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Informal
0.25
1.2
30
CJ
Italian Script
0.4
10
4.0
100
CJ
Kabel
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Karin Script
CJ
952
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Kids
0.5
12
1.2
30
CJ
Kindergarten
Block
0.4
10
3.6
90
CJ
Krone
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Lariat
0.48
12
1.2
30
CJ
Lazer
0.24
2.0
50
CJ
Legal Block
0.24
2.0
50
CJ
Lublik
0.4
10
3.0
75
CJ
Lydian
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Mandarin
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Matisse
0.4
10
1.6
40
CJ
Matrix
0.4
10
1.6
40
CJ
953
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Meister Block
0.4
10
2.2
55
CJ
Memo Script
0.24
1.0
25
CJ
Micro Block
0.2
0.3
CJ
Microgramma
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Microscan
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
Minature Block
0.2
0.25
CJ
Narrow Block
0.6
15
4.0
100
CJ
News Outline
1.2
30
3.0
75
CJ
Octagon
Monogram
0.7
18
6.0
150
CJ
Old English
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Olivia
0.3
1.6
40
CJ
954
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Orient Express
0.4
10
3.0
75
CJ
Outline Block
0.75
18
4.0
100
CJ
Point Monogram
0.7
18
6.0
150
CJ
Pixie
0.5
13
1.2
30
CJ
Poetic Script
0.6
15
3.1
80
CJ
Racer
0.3
1.4
35
CJ
Round Block
0.8
20
1.4
35
CJ
Royale
0.5
13
2.4
60
CJ
Run Block
0.2
0.25
CJ
Run Script
0.2
0.25
CJ
955
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Schoolbook
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Script1
0.5
12
3.0
75
CJ
Script2
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Script3
0.5
12
4.0
100
CJ
Script4
0.8
20
3.2
80
CJ
Seagull
0.3
1.8
45
CJ
Seal Monogram
0.7
18
6.0
150
CJ
Serif1
0.25
1.2
30
CJ
Serif2
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Serif3
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Slim Block
0.8
20
8.0
200
CJ
956
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Sm Cooper
2.4
2.0
50
CJ
Sm HighTower
0.2
0.25
CJ
Sm Script
0.2
0.25
CJ
Small Block1
0.2
0.25
CJ
Small Block2
0.2
0.25
CJ
Small Serif 1
0.2
0.25
CJ
Souvenir
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Speedy
0.3
1.2
30
CJ
Staccato
0.4
10
0.6
15
CJ
Stencil Block
0.4
10
3.0
75
CJ
Super Block
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
957
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Swiss
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Swiss Run Hollow
0.6
15
4.0
100
AD
Swiss Run Satin
1.0
25
3.0
75
AD
Tahoma
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Text Block
0.3
1.8
45
CJ
Thriller
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Times Roman
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Times Small
0.2
0.25
CJ
Toon
0.4
10
2.0
50
CJ
Typewriter
0.5
13
2.0
50
CJ
Upright Script
0.5
13
2.0
50
CJ
958
Alphabet
Sample
Recommended Sizes
Stitch
Min
Max
Method
in.
mm
in.
mm
Urbane
0.25
1.6
40
CJ
Utility Block
0.3
4.0
100
CJ
Verdana
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Victorian
0.3
1.0
25
CJ
Viking
0.35
2.0
50
CJ
Western
0.4
10
1.4
35
CJ
Western Serif
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
Westminster
0.25
2.4
60
CJ
Woodstock
0.3
2.0
50
CJ
959
Appendix D
Motif Samples
Motifs available in Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 can be one of two types

single or two-part. Single motifs can be used on their own in a Motif Run or
Motif Fill. Two-part motifs consist of two separate motifs combined to form a
single pattern for Motif Fills.
This section contains samples of the motifs available in Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0. Use these tables to see what a particular motif looks
like. The table also includes recommended size and layout specifications. If they
have changed for any reason, revert to the settings using the values in these
tables. See Creating motif runs and Creating motif fills for details.
Single motifs
The following table shows single motifs available in Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0 together with their size values. It also shows the
spacing values for Motif Runs, and column, row and offset recommended
values for Motif Fills.
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Arrow01
3.9
3.1
3.9
3.9
3.1
0.0
Arrow02
4.4
3.3
4.4
4.4
3.3
0.0
Arrow03
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
3.0
0.0
Arrow04
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
3.0
0.0
Arrow05
4.0
2.5
4.0
4.0
3.5
0.0
Arrow06
10.1
10.0
10.6
10.1
10.0
0.0
Arrow07
5.0
4.0
5.2
5.0
4.0
0.0
960
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Arrow08
5.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
0.0
Block01
3.0
5.0
2.0
2.0
5.0
1.0
Block02
3.2
5.0
2.3
2.3
6.0
0.0
Blockk03
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
0.0
Block04
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
0.0
Block05
4.0
5.5
3.0
3.0
6.0
0.0
Block06
2.6
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.8
1.2
Block07
6.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
4.0
0.0
Block08
6.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
4.0
0.0
Block09
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Block10
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Block11
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Block12
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
961
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Block13
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
Block14
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Block15
3.8
5.0
3.8
3.8
5.0
0.0
Block16
3.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
0.0
Block17
10.1
10.0
10.2
10.1
10.0
0.0
Block18
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Block19
12.0
3.0
12.1
12.0
3.0
0.0
Block20
3.0
6.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
0.0
Block21
8.9
3.6
9.0
8.9
3.6
0.0
Block22
6.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
0.0
Block23
4.0
6.5
4.0
4.0
6.5
0.0
Block24
6.0
6.0
6.1
6.0
6.0
0.0
Block25
6.8
8.9
6.8
6.8
8.9
0.0
Appendix D Motif S amples
962
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Block26
7.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
8.5
0.0
Block27
4.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
0.0
Block28
6.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
0.0
Block29
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Block30
8.0
10.0
8.0
8.0
10.0
0.0
Block31
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
0.0
Block32
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Bow01
10.0
3.1
10.0
10.0
3.1
0.0
Bow02
8.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
4.0
0.0
Circle01
4.2
4.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
2.5
Circle02
9.6
13.1
9.1
9.6
13.1
0.0
Circle03
10.7
9.1
10.7
10.7
9.1
0.0
Cloud01
7.2
6.1
7.2
7.2
6.1
0.0
Cloud02
8.3
5.7
8.2
8.3
5.7
0.0
963
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Cross01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Cross02
5.7
5.7
5.8
5.7
5.7
0.0
Cross03
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
0.0
Cross04
8.0
8.0
8.0
10.0
8.0.0
5.0
Cross05
6.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
0.0
Cross06
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Cross07
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Cross08
8.0
8.0
8.1
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross09
6.0
6.0
6.1
6.0
6.0
0.0
Cross10
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
0.0
Cross11
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross12
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross13
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
964
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Cross14
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Cross15
8.0
7.0
8.0
8.0
7.0
0.0
Curve01
8.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
5.0
4.0
Curve02
15.0
6.9
15.0
15.0
6.8
0.0
Curve03
7.5
5.0
3.9
3.9
5.0
0.0
Curve04
7.5
3.8
7.5
7.5
4.1
2.5
Curve05
14.0
10.0
14.7
14.0
10.0
0.0
Curve06
19.1
20.5
19.4
19.1
20.5
0.0
Curve07
10.0
5.0
10mm
10.0
5.0
0.0
Curve08
9.1
5.1
9.1
9.1
5.1
0.0
Curve09
3.4
6.6
2.9
3.4
6.6
0.0
Curve10
10.3
10.0
10.2
10.3
10.0
0.0
Curve11
10.0
5.6
9.9
10.0
5.6
0.0
Curve12
5.3
4.0
5.3
5.3
4.0
0.0
965
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Curve13
8.2
5.9
7.8
8.2
5.9
0.0
Curve14
9.0
7.0
9.0
9.0
7.0
0.0
Curve15
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Curve16
8.0
28.0
8.0
8.0
28.0
0.0
Curve17
8.0
6.0
8.0
8.0
6.0
0.0
Curve18
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Curve19
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Heart01
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Kite01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite02
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite03
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite04
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite05
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
966
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Kite06
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite07
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite08
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite09
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Kite10
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.0
Kite11
8.0
10.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
4.0
Kite12
10.0
10.0
10.1
10.0
10.0
0.0
Kite13
4.7
5.0
4.8
4.7
5.0
0.0
Kite14
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Kite15
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Kite16
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
0.0
Leaf01
8.6
6.8
6.0
6.0
6.7
1.8
Leaf02
8.7
7.2
6.2
6.2
7.3
0.0
Leaf03
6.5
3.0
6.6
6.5
3.0
0.0
967
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Lines01
3.8
5.6
2.8
2.8
6.5
0.0
Lines02
2.2
3.6
1.3
1.2
3.6
0.0
Lines03
6.8
2.0
6.8
6.8
2.0
3.4
Lines04
6.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
0.0
Lines05
19.9
20.3
20.0
19.9
20.3
0.0
Lines06
20.3
20.5
21.0
20.3
20.5
0.0
Lines07
5.0
4.0
5.1
5.0
4.0
0.0
Lines08
10.0
8.0
9.9
10.0
8.0
0.0
Lines09
6.0
1.4
6.0
6.0
1.4
0.0
Lines10
8.6
7.7
8.6
8.6
7.7
0.0
Lines11
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Lines12
9.0
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Lines13
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Lines14
10.0
12.5
10.0
12.5
12.5
0.0
968
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Lines15
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Lines16
4.0
10.0
4.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Music01
6.1
9.8
3.9
6.1
9.8
0.0
Scroll01
6.0
4.8
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Scroll02
6.5
5.6
6.5
6.5
4.3
2.8
Scroll03
10.0
5.0
10.0
10.0
6.3
0.0
Scroll04
10.0
5.0
10.0
10.0
6.3
0.0
Scroll05
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Scroll06
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes01
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes02
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes03
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes04
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes05
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
969
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Shapes06
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes07
8.5
8.0
8.5
8.5
8.0
0.0
Shapes08
9.0
8.5
9.0
9.0
8.5
0.0
Shapes09
7.0
8.0
7.0
7.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes10
7.0
9.0
7.0
7.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes11
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes12
10.0
8.5
10.0
10.0
8.5
0.0
Shapes13
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes14
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes15
7.5
9.0
7.5
7.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes16
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes17
10.4
9.5
10.4
10.4
9.5
0.0
Shapes18
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
970
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Shapes19
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes20
9.0
9.5
9.0
9.0
9.5
0.0
Shapes21
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes22
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes23
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes24
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes25
12.0
10.0
12.0
12.0
10.0
0.0
Shapes26
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes27
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes28
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes29
8.5
9.0
8.5
8.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes30
10.0
12.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes31
12.0
10.0
12.0
12.0
10.0
0.0
971
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Shapes32
8.5
9.0
8.5
8.5
9.0
0.0
Shapes33
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes34
9.0
10.5
9.0
9.0
10.5
0.0
Shapes35
4.0
7.5
4.0
4.0
7.5
0.0
Shapes36
8.0
8.5
8.0
8.0
8.5
0.0
Shapes37
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes38
7.0
4.0
7.0
7.0
4.0
0.0
Shapes39
8.0
9.5
8.0
8.0
9.5
0.0
Shapes40
9.0
8.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
0.0
Shapes41
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
Shapes42
7.5
7.0
7.5
7.5
7.0
0.0
Shapes43
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Shapes44
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
972
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Square01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square02
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square03
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square04
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Square05
4.0
4.1
4.0
4.0
4.1
0.0
Square06
4.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
Star01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Star02
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
Star03
6.0
4.0
7.0
7.0
4.0
3.5
Star04
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Star05
6mm
8.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
3.0
Star06
6.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Star07
5.0
4.4
5.3
5.0
4.4
0.0
Star08
10.0
10.0
10.1
10.0
10.0
0.0
973
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Star09
20.1
20.6
20.6
20.1
20.6
0.0
Star10
8.7
10.0
8.7
8.7
10.0
0.0
Star11
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
Star12
8.0
7.8
8.0
8.0
7.8
0.0
Star13
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Star14
9.6
9.0
9.6
9.6
9.0
0.0
Star15
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Star16
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Star17
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Star18
10.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
9.0
0.0
Star19
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
Star20
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
Star21
9.5
9.0
9.5
9.5
9.0
0.0
Star22
8.0
9.5
8.0
8.0
9.5
0.0
974
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
Star23
8.0
11.0
8.0
8.0
11.0
0.0
Star24
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
Wave01
10.0
7.0
8.0
8.7
7.0
0.0
Wave02
15.0
10.0
15.8
15.0
10.0
0.0
Wave03
10.9
7.8
10.9
10.9
7.8
0.0
Wave04
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
Xmas01
7.3
8.8
7.4
7.3
8.8
0.0
ZigZag01
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
ZigZag02
8.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
5.0
0.0
ZigZag03
4.6
4.6
4.6
5.0
0.0
ZigZag04
7.0
4.0
7.0
7.6
3.0
0.0
ZigZag05
4.0
4.0
4.0
2.0
5.0
1.0
ZigZag06
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.0
4.1
0.0
ZigZag07
10.0
10.0
10.2
10.0
10.0
0.0
975
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
ZigZag08
10.0
10.0
10.7
10.0
10.0
0.0
ZigZag09
12.0
12.0
12.3
12.0
12.0
0.0
ZigZag10
9.9
10.0
10.3
9.9
10.0
0.0
ZigZag11
18.5
19.1
19.2
18.5
19.1
0.0
ZigZag12
20.2
20.1
20.4
20.2
20.1
0.0
ZigZag13
19.5
8.1
19.8
19.5
8.1
0.0
ZigZag14
18.0
9.1
18.4
18.0
9.1
0.0
ZigZag15
12.1
11.1
12.4
12.1
11.1
0.0
ZigZag17
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag18
14.0
7.0
14.0
14.0
7.0
0.0
ZigZag19
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
0.0
ZigZag20
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag21
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag22
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
976
Size in mm
Name
Motif
Sample
Motif
Motif Fill
Run
Row
Spacing Column
Offset
ZigZag23
9.0
10.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
0.0
ZigZag24
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
ZigZag25
10.0
7.5
10.0
10.0
7.5
0.0
ZigZag26
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag27
12.0
8.0
12.0
12.0
8.0
0.0
ZigZag28
8.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
9.0
0.0
ZigZag29
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
Two-part motifs
The following table lists the two-part motifs that are available in Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0, and the resulting pattern. It also shows the size,
column, row and offset values for Motif Fills.
Size in mm
Motif A
Motif B
Motif Fill
Sample
X
Col
Row
Offset
Duet01a
Duet01b
a=7.0
b=7.0
a=5.0
b=3.0
7.0
3.5
0.0
Duet02a
Duet02b
a=12.0
b=12.0
a=6.0
b=9.0
12.0
6.0
0.0
Duet03a
Duet03b
a=12.0
b=12.0
a=6.0
b=9.0
12.0
6.0
0.0
977
Size in mm
Motif A
Motif B
Motif Fill
Sample
X
Col
Row
Offset
Duet04a
Duet04b
a=9.0
b=9.0
a=8.0
b=3.0
9.0
4.5
0.0
Duet05a
Duet05b
a=6.4
b=6.4
a=4.8
b=3.2
6.4
3.2
0.0
Duet06a
Duet06b
a=4.4
b=4.4
a=2.2
b=2.4
4.4
1.9
1.1
Duet07a
Duet07b
a=4.8
b=4.8
a=4.4
b=4.2
4.8
2.2
1.3
Duet08a
Duet08b
a=11.6
b=11.6
a=4.4
b=4.4
11.2
2.9
0.0
Duet09a
Duet09b
a=6.5
b=6.5
a=5.0
b=5.0
6.5
3.4
3.3
Duet10a
Duet10b
a=8.0
b=8.0
a=4.0
b=4.0
8.0
4.0
0.0
Duet11a
Duet11b
a=5.2
b=12.0
a=3.8
b=9.0
5.2
3.8
0.0
Duet12a
Duet12b
a=15.0
b=13.5
a=8.4
b=7.8
13.5
3.9
0.0
978
Appendix E
Program Split Samples
This section contains samples of the program split patterns available in Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0. Use the table to see what a particular program split
looks like. The table also includes the recommended size, column, row and offset
settings. If they have changed for any reason, revert to the settings using the
values in this table. See Adjusting program split stitch settings for details.
Size in mm
Name
Pattern
Column
Row
Sample
X
Spacing
Offset
Spacing
Offset
Arrowhd
6.0
6.0
4.5
0.0
6.0
0.0
Bars
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
Basket
9.0
7.5
9.0
0.0
4.5
4.5
Basket2
9.0
9.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Bird
6.0
4.9
6.0
0.0
4.9
0.0
Blocks1
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
8.0
8.0
Blocks2
12.0
12.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
8.0
Breaker
10.0
6.0
10.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Brick
6.0
3.0
6.0
0.0
3.0
3.0
Brick2
6.0
6.0
4.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
979
Size in mm
Name
Pattern
Column
Row
Sample
X
Spacing
Offset
Spacing
Offset
Chain
10.0
6.0
6.7
0.0
7.0
3.3
Chevron
6.0
3.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
3.0
Chevron2
2.5
6.0
2.5
0.0
6.0
0.0
Chevron3
7.0
3.0
7.0
0.0
3.0
0.0
Crosstile
7.0
7.0
5.5
-5.5
5.5
5.5
Cube
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
6.0
1.4
Diadem
10.0
6.7
10.0
0.0
6.7
5.0
Diamond2
4.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
0.0
Diamond
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Driver
8.0
4.0
8.0
0.0
4.0
1.5
Ellipse
4.0
6.0
4.6
0.0
5.0
2.3
Flame
6.0
3.7
6.0
0.0
3.6
3.0
Greekey
6.0
4.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
2.0
Heart
6.0
6.5
6.0
0.0
6.4
3.0
Appendix E Program Split S amples
980
Size in mm
Name
Pattern
Column
Row
Sample
X
Spacing
Offset
Spacing
Offset
Herringbone
8.0
4.0
8.0
0.0
4.0
0.0
Hexagon
6.0
7.0
6.0
0.0
5.2
3.0
Hexagon2
7.0
6.0
7.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Jem
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
9.5
5.0
Keyhole
4.0
2.7
5.3
0.0
2.7
2.7
10.0fr
5.0
10.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
Melody
10.0
6.0
10.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
Metal
5.0
9.4
5.0
0.0
8.5
2.5
Passage
10.0
10.0
10.0
0.0
10.0
0.0
Piccolo
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
Roma
10.0
5.5
10.0
0.0
6.0
5.0
Rope
7.5
5.0
3.8
0.0
5.5
1.9
Scale
6.4
3.5
6.4
0.0
3.5
3.2
Scale2
3.5
6.4
3.5
3.2
6.4
0.0
Seville
6.7
5.6
6.7
0.0
4.5
4.5
Leaf
981
Size in mm
Name
Pattern
Column
Row
Sample
X
Spacing
Offset
Spacing
Offset
Star5
6.0
5.7
6.0
0.0
5.7
3.0
Steps
8.0
8.0
6.0
-6.0
6.0
6.0
Suncross
10.0
10.0
4.0
-6.0
4.0
6.0
Suncross2
11.0
11.0
6.8
-1.3
6.8
1.3
Swing
6.0
8.2
4.5
0.0
8.2
0.0
Tick
6.8
7.9
6.8
0.1
6.0
6.0
Tile1
8.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
Tile2
12.0
12.0
12.0
0.0
12.0
0.0
Tile3
10.1
10.0
10.0
0.0
10.0
0.0
Tile4
6.0
6.0
6.0
0.0
6.0
0.0
Triangle
6.0
5.2
6.0
0.0
5.2
3.0
Triangle3
7.5
6.5
7.5
0.0
6.5
0.0
Vine
8.5
2.8
8.5
0.0
3.5
2.0
Appendix E Program Split S amples
982
Size in mm
Name
Pattern
Column
Row
Sample
X
Spacing
Offset
Spacing
Offset
6.0
1.3
6.0
0.0
4.0
3.0
Wave2
9.9
3.2
9.9
2.9
3.2
0.0
Wave3
10.0
4.5
10.0
0.0
4.5
0.0
Whirl
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.0
7.5
0.0
Wild
8.5
8.0
8.5
0.0
7.5
4.5
Xmastree
16.0
16.0
13.3
8.0
16.0
0.0
Ziggy
5.0
8.0
4.0
0.0
8.0
0.0
Wave
[
983
Appendix F
Troubleshooting
This section provides advice for solving problems in EmbroideryStudio. If you

encounter a problem, refer in the first instance to the following references:
EmbroideryStudio User Manual select Help > Online Manual (or printed
version)
EmbroideryStudio Online Help select Help > Help Topics

Windows Online Help select Start > Help or Help and Support
Microsoft Windows knowledge base
Documentation supplied with your hardware, if the problem is
hardware-related.
For information about other Wilcom products, check the relevant Supplement or
Online Help. For the most up-to-date support information about
EmbroideryStudio and other Wilcom products, visit the Wilcom Support Center
at www.wilcom.com.au/support. You will need to register in order to obtain
access.
Caution Check that your PC meets the system requirements required of
EmbroideryStudio. Check CPU/RAM as well as hard disk space. See System
Security device problems

This section describes the messages related to the EmbroideryStudio security
device. Most security device messages are caused by incorrect connection,
access codes, interference or conflict with other hardware devices.
Security device messages

To prevent security device errors, enter all access codes as soon as you receive
them. If you miss any, some features may become unavailable, or
EmbroideryStudio may stop working altogether. Consult your computer
technician if more assistance is required.
Tip If you need to provide security device information to Wilcom Support or
your reseller, send a screengrab of the Security Device dialog. This saves you
transcribing the information and ensures that accurate details are sent.
Invalid Access Code
Message
Invalid Access Code
Cause
The access codes you are trying to enter are incorrect for your security
device.
You are missing a set of codes.
984
Suggestion
Check the Identity Code provided against the Identity Code in the
Security Device dialog of EmbroideryStudio. If they dont match, note
the security device Serial Number and current Identity Code and contact
your distributor. See Changing security device options for details.
Hardware key driver not found

Message
Error 14: Hardware key driver not found
Cause
The dongle driver is not installed, or an incorrect driver is installed.
Suggestion
1. Click on OK to close the error message window.

2. Reinstall the Hasp HL device drivers using the command line
Haspdinst.exe /i /kp from the installation bin directory. The driver
installation program will inform you if a reboot is required.
3. Run the embroidery software again.
Please attach your dongle and restart your software

Message
Error 7: Please attach your dongle and restart your software.
Cause
The dongle can not be detected by the computer or the dongle is faulty.
Suggestion
Log on to the Wilcom Support Center and download the latest dongle
driver and install. If this does not solve the problem, the dongle maybe
faulty. Please contact your local Wilcom reseller / disturbutor. See also
Installing the dongle driver.
Invalid Product when starting EmbroideryStudio

Message
Invalid Product displays when starting EmbroideryStudio.
Cause
The dongle is faulty or incorrect access codes have been entered.
Suggestion
Note your security device numbers Serial Number and Identity Code
and contact your distributor or reseller. New codes can normally be
provided to re-enable your dongle. If the dongle is faulty, you will need a
replacement.
Timeout warning
Message
Your Security Device will time out in xx days.
Cause
New access codes are required or sent codes have not been entered.
Suggestion
If you have not received new access codes, note your security device
numbers Serial Number and Identity Code and contact your
distributor or reseller.
Missing Files
Message
Some files may be missing.
Cause
Corrupted hard disk, virus attack or security violation
Suggestion
Re-install the software. If the problem persists, further diagnose the

problem. For example, run a virus checking program and scan the disk to
check that the hard disk is not corrupted.
985
Correcting security device driver problems

When you attach the security device (dongle) and run EmbroideryStudio, the
system will normally launch the software if the device is detected properly.
However, if you attached the device before installing EmbroideryStudio or
restarting PC, it may have been added to Windows as an Unknown USB Device.
EmbroideryStudio will then not be able to detect it. Use the following procedure
to solve the problem.
Caution If you are using Windows98 or WindowsME, contact your dealer for
instructions.
To correct security device driver problems
1 From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Control Panel.
2 Double-click the System icon.
The System Properties dialog opens.
3 Select the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button.
The Device Manager dialog is displayed.
4 Select the Unknown USB Device and delete.
5 Close Device Manager.
6 Unplug and then re-plug the security device.
Unrecoverable errors
The system may generate unrecoverable errors when opening designs or
EmbroideryStudio itself.
Unrecoverable error when opening design
Problem
When opening a design, the message unrecoverable error, shutting

down displays.
Cause
The design is corrupt.
Solution
Email the design to your local reseller/distributor for further analysis.
Unrecoverable error when starting EmbroideryStudio

Problem
When starting EmbroideryStudio the message unrecoverable error,

shutting down displays.
Cause
A design in the Recover folder is corrupt.
Solution
Use the Purge Recovery utility to delete any corrupted files. Alternatively,
delete them manually using Windows Explorer. See also Deleting files
with Purge Recovery.
ES Design Explorer problems

The following section relates to any ES Design Explorer connection problems you
may experience.
Timeout warning when starting ES Design Explorer
Message
The connection to EmbroideryStudio has timed out.
Ap pen dix F Trou blesh o otin g
986
Cause
ES Design Explorer requires EmbroideryStudio to be running in order to

verify security. If ES Design Explorer is started without
EmbroideryStudio already running and it takes too long to load, an error
message will appear. This can happen on a slow PC, or a PC that is low
on resources.
Suggestion
Start EmbroideryStudio before starting ES Design Explorer.
Unknown Format in ES Design Explorer

Message
Unknown Format (in place of design thumbnails)
Cause
Your ES Design Explorer program shortcut has the wrong ES Designer

version specified in the Target Path field of the shortcut.
Suggestion
Right-click the relevant ES Design Explorer icon and select Properties.

Change the statement to match the version you are running with
ES Design Explorer, e.g.
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\DE2006\WilcomDesignExplorer.exe might
become:
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\DE2006\WilcomDesignExplorer.exe
version=e1.0x
where x is the software version revision found under Help > About ES
Select the 'Unknown Format' thumbnails and select View > Validate &
Refresh to regenerate the thumbnails.
Thumbnails slow to generate in ES Design Explorer

Problem
Thumbnails are slow to generate in ES Design Explorer.
Cause
The first time ES Design Explorer accesses a folder containing design

files, it has to generate each design's thumbnail image. If the folder
contains many files, it can take time to generate the thumbnails.
Suggestion
Note: Thumbnails only have to be generated once, after which accessing

folders is significantly faster.
Design files not showing up in ES Design Explorer

Problem
Design files not showing up in ES Design Explorer.
Cause
You have chosen to display only one type of embroidery file.
Suggestion
Check which file types you have chosen to display in ES Design

Explorer. Select 'All Files' to display all available files.
Device connection problems

The following section relates to any embroidery machine and digitizing tablet
connection problems you may experience in EmbroideryStudio.
Problem connecting to Melco embroidery machine
Problem
Problem connecting to Melco embroidery machine from

EmbroideryStudio
Cause
Direct connection to Melco machines is not supported under Windows

XP/ Vista.
987
Suggestion
View the document Melco Connect Support Notes.pdf either at

C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\Support Notes\Melco
Connect Support Notes.pdf or at the online Wilcom Support Center in the
Wilcom Library section.
Machine/digitizer connection suddenly stops working

Problem
The machine connection suddenly stops working. Nothing has changed

on the PC or the embroidery machine, and no machine connection
settings have changed in EmbroideryStudio.
Cause
The physical connection from the PC to the embroidery machine has

been broken, or there is a conflict with another device.
Suggestion
Check that the cable connections are all properly set. Check that the
cable has not been damaged. For digitizing tablets, run the connection
test. See Testing digitizing tablet connections for details.
If you have recently installed new hardware e.g. a soundcard disable
or remove the device. If that resolves the problem, consult a PC
technician to determine how to assign Windows resources so that they
dont conflict with the machine connection setup.
Machine/digitizer connection stops working after reinstallation of

EmbroideryStudio
Problem
Machine and/or digitizer connection has stopped working.

EmbroideryStudio recently reinstalled.
Cause
Reinstallation of EmbroideryStudio over an existing installation using

the 'Typical or Compact installation method will overwrite existing
machine and digitizer connection settings with the default settings.
Suggestion
To ensure settings from the existing installation are merged into the new
installation, select the 'Custom Install' option. You will be prompted to
merge existing settings into the new installation.
Tip: Always keep a note of any custom settings machine or digitizer
connection, user-defined split settings, etc for use in case of
emergency. For instance, your hard drive may crash and you may need
to install EmbroideryStudio on a different PC.
Missing connection settings

Problem
You dont have a record of the connection settings required to set up your
embroidery machine or digitizing tablet.
Suggestion
See Setting up Hardware for details of how to set up the device. Visit the
online Wilcom Support Center. This lists connection information for most
popular devices. If not already a member of the WSC, you will need to
register as a licensed user of Wilcom software.
Digitizing tablet is not listed in EmbroideryStudio

Problem
The digitizing tablet is not listed in the list of formats in

EmbroideryStudio, and 'Auto Detect' is not detecting the tablet.
Cause
If your connection settings are correct, you may need to set up a custom
'format string'. This is a string of letters or characters which tells the
software how to interpret the format of the data coming from the digitizing
tablet.
988
Suggestion
Use the DigiTest utility to determine the digitizing tablets format string.
See Testing digitizing tablet connections for details.
Enter the string in the The Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup dialog.
See Customizing digitizing tablet formats for details.
Windows-compatible digitizing tablet not recognized

Problem
A Windows-compatible digitizing tablet is installed but

EmbroideryStudio doesn't recognize it.
Cause
EmbroideryStudio is not capable of utilizing Windows drivers for

digitizing tablets.
Suggestion
You need to set up the tablet in EmbroideryStudio. See Connecting

digitizing tablets for details.
Note: Some Windows-compatible tablets install software that runs in the
background, constantly checking the serial ports for the presence of the
tablet. Sometimes this software takes control of the port, making it
unavailable to any other applications such as EmbroideryStudio that
need to use it.
If you have a Windows-compatible tablet, check the software (usually
running in the Windows taskbar) for 'auto detect' settings. You may need
to disable auto detect when using the tablet within EmbroideryStudio.
Note: Some tablet software does not have a disable option and must be
uninstalled to free up the serial port.
General problems
The following section relates to general problems you may experience in
EmbroideryStudio.
Units of measurement in EmbroideryStudio
Problem
Units of measurement in EmbroideryStudio are not what you expect

them to be e.g. measurements are in inches instead of millimeters, or
vice versa.
Cause
The units of measurement are set in Windows Regional options.
Suggestion
Change the units of measurement via the Windows Control Panel >
Regional/Language options. See your MS Windows documentation for
details.
Designs appearing distorted

Problem
Designs arent displayed at actual size on screen or appear distorted.
Cause
Your screen needs to be calibrated to match your monitor.
Suggestion
Go to Special > Hardware Setup > Display Monitor and customize your
settings to match your monitor. When pressing 1 on the keyboard,
designs should then appear at actual size. See Calibrating the monitor for
details.
Inconsistent output results

Problem
There are problems when reading and punching paper tapes, or sending
designs to embroidery machines for stitching.
989
Cause
These are caused by serial communications problems. Inconsistent

reading and writing may be caused by wrong port settings in the
operating system or by incorrect settings In ES in the connection setup
for the device.
Suggestion
Change the port settings in EmbroideryStudio and/or the device. See

Peripheral device connection settings for details.
Stitches not displaying

Problem
No stitches are displayed in a design even though there is a stitch count

in the status bar. Only the shape outlines are shown for the whole design,
or for some objects.
Cause
The View option Show Stitches is turned off, or stitches were not
generated for the design or for some objects during digitizing, or the
stitches were removed subsequently from selected objects.
Suggestion
Select the Show Stitches tool. If an object still has no stitches, select it
and re-generate using the keyboard shortcut G. Slight reshaping of the
object will also cause stitches to be regenerated. See Reshaping
TrueView always turned on or off

Problem
TrueView is always turned on or off.
Cause
The TrueView display setting is saved when closing EmbroideryStudio

in the mode you are currently using.
Suggestion
Open any design and click the TrueView button on or off as required and
exit (File > Exit) with the design still open. When you restart
EmbroideryStudio, all designs will open in the mode you selected when
you closed EmbroideryStudio. See also Setting TrueView options.
Missing toolbars 1
Problem
Some toolbars are missing.
Cause
Toolbars have been closed or set not to display.
Suggestion
Select View > Toolbars and select the toolbar you want to display.
Missing toolbars 2
Problem
Some toolbars are missing.
Cause
The Windows Display Settings are set to Secondary Display.
Suggestion
Right-click the Desktop and select the Settings tab. Select Monitor 1 in
the dropdown list under Display.
Missing toolbar buttons

Problem
Buttons are missing from toolbars.
Cause
The screen resolution is set too low.
Suggestion
Change the screen resolution to 1024x768 or higher.
990
Control points missing

Problem
The control points on selected objects are missing.
Cause
This problem is related to the display adapter.
Suggestion
Check the display adapter manufacturer's website or a software driver

download site for the latest display adapter driver for your display
adapter. If there is a more recent driver available, download and install it.
These are normally free. For a listing of popular display adapter
websites, see Locate the latest display adapters.
Unwanted trims
Problem
Unwanted trims sometimes appear in embroidery objects.
Cause
You may be using the connectors After Object' or Inside Object' settings
incorrectly.
Suggestion
Check the connector settings. See Using automatic connectors for

details.
Design integrity errors

Problem
Some designs generate Design Integrity errors.
Cause
In most cases the problem is caused by a resequencing error in the

design, caused when stitches become 'unsequenced' from their objects.
This normally happens only when grouped objects are resequenced.
Suggestion
Avoid resequencing grouped objects. Leave the Design Integrity checker

on when digitizing designs. Whenever you receive a Design Integrity
error message, click Undo and work around the problem. Even if a
design does generate errors, EmbroideryStudio will continue to work
normally in most cases.
Beeping sound when digitizing

Problem
EmbroideryStudio generates a beeping sound when digitizing.
Cause
This is normal behavior and is a feature of EmbroideryStudio.
Suggestion
To disable the beeping sounds, Go to View --> Design Options and

Choose the General Tab in the Options dialog; next, Untick Play Button
Sounds in that dialog.
Problem recovering design files from backup folder

Problem
You cannot find your backup design e.g. DesignName.BAK in the

backup folder or you need to change the file extension.
Cause
If you have the EmbroideryStudio 'Auto Save' option enabled, backups

of EMB design files will be saved to the C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\BACKUP folder. This is a basic
way of backing up your files although manual backups are highly
recommended through File > Save or Save As.
991
Suggestion
Start Windows Explorer and browse to the C:\Program

Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\BACKUP folder. Select the file and
select File > Rename. Change the file extension to EMB e.g.
DesignName.EMB. Move the EMB file to your c:\design folder. You can
now open the file normally in EmbroideryStudio.
Note: If you cannot see the file extension BAK, you need to change your
view settings in Windows Explorer. Refer to Windows Help for more
details.
Embroidery lettering problems

The following section relates to embroidery lettering problems you may
experience in EmbroideryStudio.
Problem embroidery letters
Problem
Some embroidery letters display or stitch badly.
Cause
You may be using the particular alphabet incorrectly.
Suggestion
Ensure you are using the alphabet within Wilcom's recommended sizes
and sequence settings as specified in Standard Alphabets.
Incorrect number of lettering connectors

Problem
There are too many/too few connectors in my lettering.
Cause
The connector settings and/or stitch method are incorrectly set.
Suggestion
Check you are using 'Inside Object' as the connector properties within
your lettering object. Also check you are using the recommended stitch
method for your lettering. See Using automatic connectors for details.
See also Setting stitching sequence and join method.
Installed optional alphabets not available I

Problem
Some installed optional alphabets dont show in the alphabet dropdown

list.
Cause
This occurs when there is more than one copy of the alphabet in one of
the subfolders of the Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 installation folder
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\. For example, there is
a copy of the alphabet S324.esa in both the C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\wletter and C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\userletw folders.
Suggestion
Search the hard drive for multiple copies of the alphabet file in
question.
Search the C: drive for *.ESA files.
If there is more than one copy of any file, delete the extra copy from the
hard drive.
Ensure the remaining copy of the file is in the C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\wletter folder.
Restart EmbroideryStudio.
992
Installed optional alphabets not available II

Problem
An optional alphabet which is present in C:\Program

Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\wletter or C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\monogram folder does not appear
in alphabet dropdown list.
Cause
You are using an incorrect security device for the installed alphabets.
Suggestion
If you have changed security device (without a brain transplant) since you
received your optional alphabets e.g. gone from a Trysoft or Blue,
Yellow or Black dongle to a Red dongle these will need to be re-created
for your new security device. Contact your reseller to order a replacement
alphabet disk. Note: dongles which have had a brain transplant will not
cause this problem.
Installing the dongle driver

If your dongle driver was not installed correctly or you have an updated version
of the driver, you will need to reinstall it. Use the following procedure to install
or reinstall your dongle driver. Adding extra switches to the command line as
shown below may help.
Note To install the dongle driver under WinXP or Win Vista, you need to be
logged into Windows with Administrator privileges. If not, you will receive an
error message User has no access to the registry.
To install the dongle driver
1 Close all Wilcom applications.
2 From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Run.
The Run dialog opens.
Enter command line
3 In the Open field, enter the following command line, including quotation
marks and any spaces:
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\ES2006\bin\haspdinst.exe -kp -i -av
Note If you installed EmbroideryStudio to a different folder than
C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0, modify the command line
accordingly. If you have downloaded a newer dongle driver from the Wilcom
Support Center site, copy the file to the appropriate folder.
4 Click OK.
If the installation is successful, the message The operation was completed
successfully or HASP driver successfully installed appears.
5 Restart your PC, if prompted.
993
6 Start EmbroideryStudio.
Reverting to factory settings

If you have made changes to the default settings or they have become
corrupted, use the Revert utility to revert to factory settings.
Caution Reverting to the original settings removes any changes you have made
to styles, templates and hardware settings. Note down any settings you want to
preserve e.g. machine connection settings before running the utility.
To revert to factory settings
2 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs >
Wilcom e2.0 > Wilcom Tools > Revert.
The Revert to Factory Settings dialog opens.
Select items to be
restored
3 Select the items you want restored to factory defaults.

4 Click OK.
The selected items are restored to factory settings.
Note There is no confirmation message.
Deleting files with Purge Recovery

On rare occasions a corrupted design may prevent EmbroideryStudio from
starting up. Delete corrupt files using the Purge Recovery utility. Purge
Recovery deletes files in the Recover and Backup folders.
To use Purge Recovery
2 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button and select Programs >
Wilcom e2.0 > Wilcom Tools > Purge Recovery.
The Purge Recovery and Backup Directories dialog opens.
Tip To delete backup files as well, select Delete Backup files.

3 Click OK.
994
If some files cannot be deleted, a message will display. Using Windows

Explorer, delete any remaining files from the C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\Recover and \Backup folders.
Tip If the errors persist, try reverting to factory settings. See Reverting to
factory settings for details.
Testing digitizing tablet connections

If you experience difficulties with your digitizing tablet, first check that it is
correctly connected, and that the hardware settings are correctly configured in
EmbroideryStudio. If you are still experiencing problems, you can confirm that
the tablet is communicating correctly with the PC using the DigiTest utility. See
also Serial port settings.
Note This utility will not recognize multiport serial cards e.g. COM1 or COM2.
Always connect your digitizing tablet to a standard PC COM port for testing
purposes. Once you have confirmed that communications are correct, replace
the connection to your multiport serial card and configure the port settings as
described.
To test digitizing tablet connections
1 On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, and select Run.
The Run dialog opens.
2 In the Open field, enter C:\Program
Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\bin\digitest.exe where C is
the drive where Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0 was installed.
3 Click OK.
The DigiData - DigiTest window opens.
4 Select Digitizer > Setup.
The Digitizer Setup dialog opens.
Select digitizing
tablet
Select Point
or Stream
Show tablet data as
recognized by
software
Enter connection
settings
5 From the Digitizer Format field, select a digitizing tablet to check.

If it is not in the list, select Auto Detect.
995
6 From the Input Mode list, select Point or Stream.

This setting must match the one on the digitizing tablet.
7 Select Interpret Digitizer Data to display digitizing tablet data as
recognized by EmbroideryStudio.
During the test, this shows which puck button is pressed and the X, Y
coordinates at the point clicked.
8 Enter required information in the Connected To panel fields. See Peripheral
device connection settings for details.
9 Click OK.
10 Click the Start/Stop Digitizer icon.
11 Place the digitizing tablet puck on the tablet and press each of the buttons on
the puck.
Data appears on screen representing the X, Y coordinates and corresponding
button number. If the test is not successful, or you get unformatted garbage
data, click the Start/Stop Digitizer icon to stop the digitizing tablet.
12 Check the settings.
If the data is not mostly numeric, the port is in a corrupt state. Close all
applications, shutdown your PC and repeat the test.
If the data appears to be correct, switch to EmbroideryStudio and
configure the port with the settings you used successfully in DigiTest. See
Connecting digitizing tablets for details.
Resolving Exception Access Violation errors

The error message Exception Access Violation can appear when zooming, using
lettering, printing or scanning, saving designs, or viewing the Color-Object List.
This problem generally relates to the display adapter driver and/or the display
adapter itself. Try each of the following solutions in sequence.
Error messages
Exception access violation when starting EmbroideryStudio
Problem
An Exception Access Violation error message appears when starting

EmbroideryStudio.
Cause
A corrupt design file in the Recover folder or a corrupt C:\Program

Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\res\defaults.dfl file.
Suggestion
Delete any files in the C:\Program

Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\recover folder. If
EmbroideryStudio still will not start, use Windows Explorer to copy the
default C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\bin\defaults.dfl
file to the C:\Program Files\Wilcom\EmbroideryStudio_e2.0\res folder,
overriding the corrupt defaults.dfl file. This will reset EmbroideryStudio
to new installation.
996
Other exception setting violations

Problem
An Exception Access Violation error message appears when zooming,

using lettering, printing or scanning, saving designs, or viewing the
Color-Object List.
Cause
This problem generally relates to the display adapter driver and/or the
display adapter itself.
Suggestion
Try each of the listed solutions in sequence. See Resolving Exception

Access Violation errors for details.
Check the display adapter

Use the System utility in the Control Panel to check your display adapter and
drivers.
Use the following procedure to determine which display adapter make and model
you have, and what drivers are installed for the display adapter.
To check the display adapter
1 From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Control Panel.
2 Double-click the System icon.
3 Select the Device Manager option for Windows XP / Vista by selecting the
Hardware tab and clicking Device Manager.
4 Click to open the Display Adapters node.
Note display
adapter
5 Note down the display adapter listed.

6 Right-click the adapter and select Properties.
7 Select the Driver tab and note the date of the driver.
8 Click Driver Details.
997
9 Note down Provider and File Version details.
Note provider and

file version
10 Cancel out of the dialogs and close the Control Panel window.
11 Check the display adapter manufacturers website for a more recent version
of the driver. See Locate the latest display adapters for details.
Locate the latest display adapters

Some common problems are related to your PCs display adapter. These occur
more frequently with on-board graphics chipsets. Check the display adapter
manufacturers website or a software driver download site for the latest display
adapter driver. If there is a more recent driver available, download and install it.
These are normally free from the provider. Some popular display adapter
websites are:
www.ati.com
www.nvidia.com
www.matrox.com
www.diamondmm.com
www.download.com
www.intel.com
www.helpdrivers.com
www.neomagic.com
www.oaktech.com
www.s3graphics.com
www.sis.com
www.tridentmicro.com
www.tucows.com
www.windrivers.com
If your video card is integrated to your system board, please check the system
board manufacturers website.
Reduce graphics acceleration

If you already have the latest driver installed, or if installing a newer driver does
not solve the problem, you can reduce the Windows graphics acceleration.
To reduce graphics acceleration
1 Access the Hardware Acceleration option in your settings in your Windows
XP or Vista system:
998
Right-click the Desktop and select Properties or Personalization

depending on the OS.
Select the (Display) Settings tab and click Advanced (Settings).
2 Select the Troubleshooting tab and, if running Vista, click the Change
Settings button.
The Hardware Acceleration option displays.
Reduce hardware
acceleration
3 Reduce the hardware acceleration a notch.

4 Click OK.
You will be prompted to restart your computer.
5 When Windows has restarted, see how the software runs. If it has not
improved, try dropping the acceleration another notch.
Usually you should not need to reduce the acceleration by more than two
notches to correct the problem. However, in extreme cases, you may need to
reduce it to None.
Install a different model display adapter

In a very few cases updating the display adapter driver and/or reducing graphics
acceleration will not solve the problem. The only solution is to install a different
brand/model of display adapter. Wilcom can advise on the type of display
adapter to use. If you have another computer with a different display adapter,
we recommended swapping the two. Often a problem display adapter will work
fine in another computer.
999
Glossary
10O: Stitch file format native to

Toyota machines.
3D Warp: 3D Warp is used with
Motif Fill to create three
dimensional effects. You can
make shapes appear concave or
convex using Globe In or Globe
Out. You can also create
distance effects using
Perspective.
ABC Pattern Arrangements:
See Pattern Arrangements
(ABC).
Accordion Spacing: artistic
stitch effect that gradually
varies stitch spacing between
dense and open fill along an
embroidery object, producing
shading and color effects which
are difficult to achieve manually.
Acetate: A salt or ester of acetic
acid of cellulose made into a
synthetic filament, yarn, or
fabric.
Active window: The active
window is one to which the next
command or action will apply. If
a window is active, its title bar
changes color to differentiate it
visually from other open
windows.
Aetze: The breaking down or
dissolving of a base fabric on
which a lace pattern has been
stitched, leaving only the
stitched threads. 2) Lace
processing; may be 'wet aetze'
involving a caustic soda bath or
'dry aetze' involving heat.
Aetzing: The process of
eliminating the base fabric to
make Schiffli laces, leaving only
the threads remaining.
Allover: Continuous
embroidery which covers all of
the goods from selvage to
selvage.
Alphabet: A set of characters of

the same design or style
including letters, numbers and
typographical symbols.
Anchor point: A fixed point
used when rotating, scaling,
skewing or mirroring a design.
Anti-aliasing: A software
technique similar to dithering
which is used to soften hard
outlines where color blocks
intersect. It produces smoother
outlines by blurring the pixels
where colors join.
Appliqu: Decoration or
trimming cut from one piece of
fabric and stitched to another to
add dimension and texture.
Designs with appliqu can be
more economical than
embroidery alone, if appliqu
occupies a significant amount of
the design, thereby lowering
stitch count. In Schiffli
embroidery, appliqu refers to
an embroidered motif, hand-cut
or aetzed away from base
fabric.
Appliqu cutter: A device that
can cut fabric along a line,
somewhat like old pen plotters.
It requires a vector file as input.
In MS Windows they can be set
up as a type of printer device.
ARQ: BERNINA Quilter format.
ART: BERNINA format.
Artistic View: A realistic, three
dimensional preview of a
stitched embroidery design.
Artwork: Bitmap image or
vector graphic used as a
digitizing template. See also
Bitmap image and Vector
graphic.
Artwork preparation: See
Image preparation.
Aufsatz: The last stitch of a
design before it repeats itself.
ARX: Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0 Cross
Stitch format.
Auto Appliqu: Auto Appliqu
is an embroidery object
associated with an appliqu
which provides automatic
stitching to place it, tack it
down, and cover its edges.
Auto Center: Auto Center
automatically centers the start
and end points of a design.
Auto Kerning: For lettering
objects, auto-kerning involves
looking up in a kerning table.
This specifies the spacing
adjustments for each pairwise
combination of letters so that
whenever a pre-defined pair
occurs, the letter spacing is
automatically adjusted.
Auto Scroll: The Auto Scroll
feature automatically scrolls the
screen while you are digitizing.
Auto-sequencing: The
Auto-sequencing feature lets
you digitize like objects e.g.
the fingers of a hand without
having to think about the most
efficient stitching sequence and
joins.
Auto Spacing: Auto Spacing
only affects Satin stitch. It
adjusts stitch spacing according
to column width.
Auto Split: Auto Split only
affects Satin stitch. When
applied, it breaks any long Satin
stitches into shorter ones. It
also distributes needle
penetrations in a random
pattern so that they do not form
a line in the middle of the shape.
Used primarily to prevent long
stitches in wide columns, it can
also be used as an alternative to
Tatami fill. Auto Split looks more
Satin-like and works well with
1000
turning stitches, creating soft

lines and a little more depth.
Auto Start and End: Before
stitching, some embroidery
machines require you to
position the starting needle
exactly above the first needle
penetration point. Use Auto
Start and End to connect the
first and last stitches in the
design. This makes it easy to
position the needle before
stitching, and reduces the
chance of the needle hitting the
side of the frame.
Automatic color change: Ability
of multi-needle embroidery
machine to follow a command to
change to a specified needle
with a different thread color.
Automatic pull compensation:
Embroidery stitches pull the
fabric inwards where the needle
penetrates. This can cause the
fabric to pucker, and gaps to
appear in the embroidery.
Automatic pull compensation
counters this effect by
overstitching outlines of filled
shapes on the sides where the
needle penetrates. This means
the design can be optimized for
different fabrics. See also Pull
compensation.
Automatic stitch shortening:
Reduces stitch bunching at
sharp corners. See also Stitch
shortening.
Auto Trace: Auto Trace is used
to convert bitmap images to
vector drawings.
Back appliqu: A fabric piece
used behind a design where the
front fabric will be cut away to
reveal the fabric beneath it.
Backdrop: An electronic image
used as a guide for digitizing
designs on screen. Two types
are used vector or bitmap.
Insert them from various file
sources, or copy and paste
them via the Windows
clipboard.
Background:
EmbroideryStudio lets you
change the background color of
the design window to match the
color of your fabric. Or you can

select a background fabric for
more realistic previews and
presentations. The background
is saved with the colorway.
Backing: Also known as
stabilizers, backings are woven
or non-woven materials placed
beneath the item or fabric being
embroidered for stability and
support. A backing can be
hooped with the item or placed
between the machine throat
plate and hooped garment. The
more stitches a design has, the
heavier the backing required.
Backings are available in
various weights and types such
as cut-away, tear-away and
wash-away (soluble).
Professional embroiderers use
tear-away stabilizers for woven
fabrics and cut-away stabilizers
for knits. See also Topping.
Backstitch: Backstitch is an
input method which can be used
for delicate outlines. This stitch
follows intricate curves well. It
is also is the term used for every
second row of stitches in a
Tatami fill. See also Standard
backstitch, Borderline
backstitch, and Diagonal
backstitch.
Backtrack: Use Backtrack and
Repeat to reinforce outlines
while specifying the direction of
the stitching. Backtrack stitches
in reverse direction to the
original. It is typically used to
make run stitch outlines thicker
without creating unwanted
connecting stitches. Repeat
duplicates the original stitch
direction and is typically used
with closed shapes.
Backup: The copying of files
onto floppy disk or other
storage media in order to
duplicate and secure data.
Usually two copies are made
and kept separately.
Batting: A layer of padded
material between the front and
back fabric to add thickness and
substance.
Begin Jump function: Begin
Jump functions instruct the
machine not to use needle

penetrations. When encoded in
an output file, it normally
converts to a Needle In
function. See also End Jump
function.
Bzier curve: Vector shape
produced according to principles
invented by French engineer,
Pierre Bzier. A Bzier curve
consists of a series of segments
with shapes generated by cubic
functions. Each segment is
bounded by nodes, and its
curvature is affected by a
control point associated with the
node at each end. The
displacement and direction of
the control point from the node
are parameters from which the
cubic curve shape is derived.
Bitmap: Also known as raster
images, bitmaps are electronic
images made up of dots or
pixels, in contrast to vector
outlines. Each pixel is mapped
to a location in an image and
has numerical color values.
Typically created in paint
programs, bitmaps have file
extensions such as BMP, JPG,
GIF, TIF and PCX. When
enlarged or scaled down, vector
drawings preserve image
quality while bitmap images
generally cause problems of
pixelation and image
degradation. See also Pixels.
Blackwork: Blackwork gets its
name from the black silk thread
traditionally used in this form of
embroidery. It can be used to
decorate articles such as
hankies, table napkins, table
clothes, and doilies.
Blatt stitch: Schiffli term
meaning to feed the yarn,
thereby producing a long zigzag
stitch with threads lying close
together. Adapted for Multihead
use. See also Satin stitch.
Blending: See Color Blending.
Bling: Refers to decorative
objects placed on a garment or
template. They are supplied in
various sizes, shapes, colors
and materials. Often referred to
as rhinestones.
1001
Block: The basic unit of a quilt

top.
BMP: Windows bitmap image
format. See also Bitmap.
Bobbin: Spool or reel that holds
the bobbin thread, which helps
form stitches on the underside
of the fabric.
Bobbin embroidery: Designs
worked with the fabric hooped
facedown and a specialty thread
or ribbon wound onto the
bobbin. Most effective for
simple designs such as leaves
and vines, or special effects with
threads too heavy to be
threaded through the needle.
Bonding: Permanently joining
two fabrics together with a
bonding agent. Heat sealing.
Border: Single closed-curve
object which can be optionally
added to a monogram. Also, a
strip of fabric that is joined to an
inner quilt to enhance it.
Borderline backstitch: The
rows are approximately parallel.
With lower density fills,
borderline backstitch creates a
smooth, well-defined edge.
Borderline backstitch is also
called Trapunto style. See also
Backstitch.
Borer: Borer is a sharp
instrument attached to
embroidery machines to
puncture fabrics. Schiffli
machines have built-in borer
knives under the needle line
which can cut different sized
holes in fabric.
Borer depth: You can choose
the numbering system for
specifying the Borer depth:
Plauen where one is the base
and seven (7) the normal
middle position and Saurer
where the base is zero and the
normal middle position is six
(6).
Borer Depth function: The
Borer Depth function controls
the size of the boring hole. The
deeper the borer cuts, the
larger the hole. The borer depth
on Schiffli machines is changed
one value at a time. Thus a

change in depth of three (3)
units will be automatically
distributed by ES Schiffli to
three (3) stitches.
Borer functions: Borer In/Out
functions are available for
embroidery machines equipped
with a borer. They instruct the
machine when to use the boring
knife or tool instead of a needle.
Boring: Open-work
incorporated into embroidered
designs. A sharp-pointed
instrument punctures, or bores,
the fabric, and stitches are
made around the opening to
enclose the raw edges.
Boring Tension functions:
Start/End Boring Tension
functions instruct servo thread
machines to feed less thread for
stitching in boring holes. For
Hiraoka TNS Ein, it
overrides/restores Stepp/Blatt
tension.
Bounding box: The dotted
rectangle that appears when
you select a range of items.
Branching: The Branching
feature lets you digitize like
objectse.g. the fingers of a
handwithout having to think
about the most efficient
stitching sequence and joins.
BRO: Bits & Volts file format.
Candlewicking: A traditional
white-on-white embroidery
technique, usually done on
white linen or cotton fabric with
heavy cotton threads.
CED: A data condensed file

format.
Center at Current Stitch: The
object will be placed with its
center at the needle position
marker.
Center Run underlay: Center
Run underlay places a row of
stitches along the center of a
column. It is used to stabilize
narrow columns (e.g. 2-3 mm
wide).
Chain stitch: Stitch that
resembles a chain link, formed
with one thread fed from the
bottom side of the fabric. Done
on a manual or computerized
machine with a hook that
functions like a needle.
Checkbox: A small square box
that appears in a dialog box and
that can be selected or cleared.
When selected, a tick or a cross
appears. A checkbox represents
an option that you can set.
Chenille: Form of embroidery in
which a loop (moss) stitch is
formed on the top side of the
fabric. Uses heavy yarns of
wool, cotton or acrylic. Created
by a chain stitch machine that
has been adjusted to form this
stitch type. Also known as loop
piling.
Click: Press and release the left
mouse button. See also
Right-click.
Click-and-drag: Click to select,
hold down the left mouse
button, move the cursor and
release.
Card: A paper tape to control

the frame. Various sizes for
Schiffli machines, 7 channel for
multihead. See also Jacquard
card.
Clipboard: A temporary storage

area in PC memory for what was
last cut or copied. Images on
the clipboard can be pasted into
designs any number of times.
Cap Corner: A type of Smart

Corner. Cap corners are used for
very sharp corners as they
produce fewer stitches.
Close button: Used to close a

window or an application. In MS
Windows, it appears as a small
box with an X in it at the
top-right of the title bar.
Cascade: A way of arranging

open windows on the desktop so
that they overlap each other,
with the title bar of each window
remaining visible.
CND: Melco Condensed (CND)

is the native file format of the
Melco embroidery digitizing
software. CND files store only
Glossa r y
1002
digitized outlines and stitch

values.
stitched. See also Thread

chart.
Condensed file: See Outline

file.
Color blending: Digitizing

technique which creates
interesting perspective, shading
and color effects by blending
colored layers. Two colors are
merged smoothly from one to
another using a mixture of
dense and open fill.
Color Reduction: See Image

Preparation.
Configuration: The size and

type of computer hardware. Can
also be used to mean the
options provided with your
software.
Color block: A color block or

element corresponds to a color
change in the design. It may be
comprised of one or more
same-color objects. These may
form a single group e.g.
ropes or more e.g. ropes
and birds. Each color block, or
element, can be given a
descriptive name for easy
identification. These then
appear on the production
worksheet. The operator
generally uses them to ensure
correct colors are used during
production. The Color-Object
List provides a sequential list of
objects as digitized, grouped by
color block. This list shows a
separate icon for all color blocks
and objects used in the design.
The Color Palette Editor also
shows a list of color blocks.
Color Change function: Color
Change functions tell the Schiffli
machine to change thread color.
In RCC/INC machines, the
command also moves the frame
under the next selected needle.
They are automatically inserted
when you select a new color
from the color palette.
Color depth: Color depth, also
called pixel depth, refers to the
amount of color information
available to each pixel in an
image. An image with a color
depth of 1-bit can display only
two colors. As the color depth
increases, more colors are
available 16 Colors (4 bit),
256 Colors (8 bit), High Color
(16 bit), True Color (24 bit).
Color palette: The color palette
contains a selection of thread
colors tailored for each design.
This color scheme, or colorway,
represents the actual thread
colors in which a design will be
Colorways: Colorways are

multiple color schemes for the
same design. They are made up
of colors defined in color books
which may be created in Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio or similar
design program, or may be
selected from a patent color
system such as Chromatone or
Pantone.
Column: Narrow, long, curving
shape.
COM port: A standard serial
port used as a connection point
for peripherals. Other ports may
be present if the appropriate
internal option cards have been
installed. The computer must be
informed which port is being
used by which peripheral e.g.
COM1, COM2, etc.
Combination Split: Use of
different combinations of Satin
and Tatami stitches in Program
Split to create various effects
with the same pattern. There
are three Combination Split
optionsSatin in Satin, Satin in
Tatami and Tatami in Tatami.
Command: An instruction
issued to the software in order
to carry out an action. It may be
as simple as paste an object or
as complex as regenerate
stitches. It is usually activated
via a menu item, toolbar icon, or
command button in a dialog.
Command button: A button in a
dialog which executes or
cancels the selected action. Two
common command buttons are
Cancel and OK.
Complex Fill: Input method,
used to digitize large and
complex shapes. Allows holes to
be designated at the same time
the object outline is digitized.
The object is thus digitized as
one fill area, instead of being
broken down into multiple
sections. Objects so created are
known as Complex Fill objects.
Confirmation message: A
message displayed by the
software asking you if you are
sure you want to proceed e.g.
when you want to delete a
design.
Connector stitches: Connector
stitches link objects in a design.
They can be run stitches or
jumps. You can use automatic
settings to generate connectors,
trims and tie-offs, or add them
manually.
Connector stitches: Connector
stitches link objects in a design.
They can be run stitches or
jumps. You can use automatic
settings to generate connectors,
trims and tie-offs, or add them
manually. However, automatic
connectors are not
recommended for Schiffli
designs because machine
functions cannot be placed on
connector stitches (stitches in
the Needle Out position).
Connectors: Hardware devices
to connect cables to ports. If the
connection is male, the port is
female, and vice versa. The
wiring configuration of each
device is determined by its
function.
Copy: To place a copy of a
selection onto the clipboard.
See also Duplicate.
Control points: Control points
are used to modify object
shapes, stitch angles and entry
and exit points. You can change
the shape of an object by
moving, adding or deleting
control points on the outline. For
most objects, you can also
change control points from
corner points to curves.
Contour stitch: Contour is a
curved fill stitch typestitches
follow the contours of a shape,
creating a curved, light and
1003
shade effect. It only works on

columnar shapes. There are two
typesStandard and
Spiralboth of which can be
applied to Input A, Input B,
Input C or Ring objects.
Standard Contour can also be
applied to Circle objects.
Copyright: A right granted by
the government or by
international agreement giving
the owner the exclusive
privilege to publish and sell
artistic work during the life of
the creator plus 50 years.
Cord functions: Cord In/Out
functions tell the machine to
engage or disengage the cord
device.
Cording: Cording is a technique
which employs a single
decorative cord laid on fabric
and attached with transparent
zigzag stitches. It forms
relatively simple,
low-stitch-count designs
featuring lots of swirls and
curves. Raised cording is
achieved by sewing the garment
around the cord from the wrong
side. The result is a self-fabric
raised effect. Different widths of
cording are available to provide
a wide range of looks. A special
attachment is required for the
embroidery machine.
Cord-in-lay: A special
apparatus to automatically lay
on cord or ribbons on a Schiffli
machine.
Cover stitch: Cover stitch is the
border around an appliqu
shape. You can control various
settings including cover stitch
type Satin or E Stitch width,
stitch spacing, as well as the
offset.
Conversion software: Programs
that read information, other
than from a card, and translate
it from one sewing machine
format to another.
Converter box: A converter box
acts like a translator from one
memory card format to another,
via computer. Various
companies offer this technology
under names like the Magic

Box from Oklahoma
Embroidery. They translate
designs from memory cards in
other formats or from a hard
drive, disk, or CD and write the
design to a blank card.
Crest: An embroidered motif
like an emblem, an insignia or a
Coat of Arms.
Crystals: See Bling.
CPU: Central Processing Unit.
CSD: POEM/Singer/Huskygram
file format
Current property settings:
Current property settings
override the template defaults.
Unless you deliberately change
them, these take the default
values. You generally change
them to save time when
digitizing. For example, you
may preset Tatami stitch
spacing to use a specific density
for all new Tatami objects you
create. See also Object
properties.
Custom alphabets: Custom
alphabets are made up of
letters, numbers or symbols you
digitize.
Custom designs: Designs
created by digitizing artwork or
manipulating existing patterns.
Cut: An editing function. To
remove a selection from a
design. The cut selection is
stored in memory (on the
clipboard) and can be pasted
into the same or different
design.
Cut appliqu: See Back
appliqu.
Cutter: See Appliqu cutter.
Cutting lines: A second line of
run stitches that forms a guide
when trimming the fabric of an
appliqu patch.
DAT: DAT is the stitch file
extension used with Hiraoka,
Laesser, and Wilcom SPES
formats.
Default object properties: See
Default values.
Default values: Pre-defined

settings which determine object
properties such as stitch
spacing, as well as certain
system settings. These are
stored in the design template.
They are automatically applied
to any newly created objects.
They remain current unless
you override them with new
settings. See also Current
property settings.
Defects: See Stitching
defects.
Density: See Stitch density or
Thread density.
Design: A design is a file in the
native embroidery format e.g.
EMB, JAN, ART of embroidery
digitizing software. The design
source may be a stitch format
design. The design contains
stitching information such as
fabric type in addition to
stitched shapes.
Design card: Disk containing
computerized embroidery
designs read by the embroidery
machines computer.
Design elements: The
decorative design components
that make up a monogram
(including ornaments and
borders).
Design file: See File.
Design object: See Objects.
Design properties: Designs
themselves have properties,
some of which can be modified,
others not. The most important
design property is its source
Native Design, Imported
Outlines, Processed Stitches, or
Imported Stitches. Other
properties include the software
version number, stitch count,
and so on. Colorways too are
properties of the whole design.
Design repeat: A Schiffli design
is repeated horizontally as many
times as it fits across the frame.
Repeat values increment in
multiples of 4 to a maximum of
96. For example, the design can
be stitched by every needle
(Repeat=4/4), every second
Glossa r y
1004
needle (Repeat=8/4), or every

third needle (Repeat=12/4),
and so on.
Design source: While
embroidery files are broadly
classified as outline
(condensed) or stitch
(expanded),
EmbroideryStudio internally
tags files as belonging to one of
four typesNative Design,
Imported Outlines, Processed
Stitches, or Imported Stitches.
See also Design properties.
Design template: See
Template.
Design window: The design
window is where designs are
displayed for viewing and
modification.
DesignWorkflow
Administrator: It is the DW
Administrator who is generally
responsible for the high-level
setup of DesignWorkflow
databases. The DW
Administrator determines who
gets access to databases, what
users can see and do, and who
defines the categories under
which information will be
stored. The DW Administrator is
generally the manager of the
companys design section. This
person has the necessary
background knowledge and
authority to control what goes
into databases and how the
information is to be used.
Desktop: MS Windows
terminology for the screen
background on which program
icons are displayed.
gives good results with Jagged

Edge. See also Backstitch.
Dialog: An onscreen box that
either requests or provides
information. Many dialogs
present options to choose
among before a command is
carried out. Some dialogs
present warnings or explain why
a command cannot be
completed.
Digitizer: Usually refers to the
person punching or digitizing
the design. Digitizer can also
refer to the digitizing tablet
used by the digitizer. See also
Digitizing tablet.
Digitizing: Process of encoding
a design. Artwork is converted
into a series of embroidery
objects to be read and
manipulated by a specialist
CAD/CAM application. Before
outputting to embroidery
machine, it is converted into
stitch data. See also Punching.
Digitizing puck: With a
digitizing tablet, you generally
use a puck instead of a mouse
to mark reference points and
select commands from the
menu chart.
Digitizing tablet: Design
device used by digitizers to plot
needle penetrations for
embroidery designs. Sometimes
used as an alternative to
digitizing directly on-screen.
Typically, a pencil drawing of the
design is enlarged and then
taped to this tablet. The
digitizer then uses a device
known as a puck to indicate
stitch types, shapes, underlay
and actual needle penetrations.
Destination folder: The folder

(directory) where you intend to
copy or move one or more files. Digitizing tool: Digitizing tools,
sometimes referred to as input
Detail: An outline, a border, a
methods, are similar to drawing
pickout run, or a small area of
tools except that the end result
the design you want to be
is an embroidery object rather
stitched out last when using
than a vector object. Different
Smart Design.
digitizing tools are suited to
creating different shapes or
Diagonal backstitch: The
design elements.
backward rows are diagonal,
directly connecting the forward Direct-to-garment printing:
rows. Diagonal backstitch is
DTG is performed like most
suitable for turning shapes, and
other printing from a PC. The
print image is sent to the DTG

printer through the Windows
print manager using a print
driver. The image must have a
transparent background for DTG
printing. DTG printing requires
heat fixing to make the images
washable.
Disk: See Floppy disk.
Disk drive: Computers usually
have three types of disk drive: a
hard disk (or fixed disk) which
usually supports the mass
storage of information and
applications, a floppy disk drive,
and a CD ROM drive.
Display: A screen used to
display the output of a
computer. Also known as the
monitor.
Dithering: A software
technique which combines
existing colors in a
checkerboard arrangement of
pixels. It is typically used to
simulate colors that are missing
from an image palette. A type of
optical illusion created by
placing two pixels of different
color next to each other. The
human eye automatically
resolves the two colors into a
third color.
Dongle: A security hardware
device required to run protected
software. Some are attached to
a parallel port, others to a USB
port.
Dots Per Inch (DPI): A
measurement of screen or
printer resolution; the number
of dots in a line of 1".
Double Split Alternate: A
variant of Tatami split. See User
Defined Split.
Double-click: Click the left
mouse button twice without
moving the mouse.
Double-clicking carries out
actions such as opening a
program from an icon.
Download: The process of
transferring a copy of a file from
a remote computer or the
internet to a computer or other
1005
device such as an embroidery

machine.
Drag: An operation of the
mouse. Holding the (left) mouse
button while moving the mouse.
Typically used for moving
something on the screen.
Drawing object: See Vector
object.
Drawing package: Software
application that creates or
allows you to edit vector
graphics made up of separate
individual vector objects. Vector
graphics can be scaled with no
loss of sharpness. Examples of
vector editing programs are
Adobe Illustrator, MacroMedia
Freehand and Corel Draw. See
also Graphics application.
Dropdown list : A single-line
dialog box control that opens to
display a list of choices.
Drop Sequin function: The
Drop Sequin function is
available for embroidery
machines equipped with a
sequin dispenser. It instructs
the machine when to drop a
sequin on the fabric for
stitching.
DSB: Barudan file format.
Basically the same as the T03
tape file but wit a header in
front so that it can be written to
floppy disk i.e. it is the floppy
disk version of the T03 file.
DST: Stitch file format native to
Tajima machines.
DSZ: ZSK stitch or expanded
file format.
Duplicate: When an object is
duplicated, it is not copied to
the clipboard. This leaves the
clipboard free for you to cut or
copy other objects.
DXF: AutoCAD vector graphic
format.
E Stitch: Widely used for
tacking down appliqus as a
decorative border. The stitches
form a comb pattern.
Editing: Changing aspects of a
design via a computerized
editing program. Most programs
allow you to scale designs up or

down, edit stitch-by-stitch or
block-by-block, merge lettering
with the design, move aspects
of the design around, combine
designs and insert or edit
machine commands.
Elastic Lettering: Special
effects applied to lettering
objects to make them bulge,
stretch or compress.
Electronic artwork: There are
two broad categories of artwork
file, both of which can be
imported into
EmbroideryStudio for use as
digitizing backdrops vector
and bitmap. To create good
quality embroidery, you need to
choose or create suitable
artwork of either format.
Element: An element, in
software terms, is a color block
consisting of sequential,
same-color objects. You can
assign names to elements which
then appear on the production
worksheet. The operator
generally uses these to make
sure colors are correct during
production. See also
Production worksheet.
EMB: Outline file format native
to Wilcom ES. EMB designs
contain a complete set of design
information in a single
all-in-one file object outlines
and properties, actual stitches
and machine functions, thread
colors, a picture icon and
comments. Even the original
design bitmap image can be
included in EMB format. Only
native EMB files provide 100%
perfect scaling and
transformation.
Emblem: Embroidered design
with a finished edge, applied to
a garment after stitching,
commonly an insignia of
identification. Also known as a
crest or patch.
Emblem work: Many Schiffli
machines are used for creating
emblems or logos. This work,
however, uses only a small
subset of the available functions
of the Schiffli machine.
Typically, for example, emblem

work does not contain the bored
holes or long Satin stitches
which occur in lace designs.
Emblem work is also stitched on
Multihead machines.
Embroidery: Decorative
stitching on fabric. Generally
involves non-lettering designs,
but can also include lettering
and/or monograms. Evidence of
embroidery exists during the
reign on Egyptian pharaohs, in
the writings of Homer and from
the Crusaders of the 12th
century. Has evolved from
hand-work to manual sewing
machines and from hand-looms
and Schiffli machines with
hundreds of needles to
high-speed, computerized
multihead machines.
Embroidery disk: Embroidery
disks are specially formatted
floppy disks used to transfer
designs from computer to
embroidery machine. You can
format embroidery disks and
save designs to them from
within EmbroideryStudio. The
format you use will depend on
the selected embroidery
machine. You can also open
designs from embroidery disk
directly into
EmbroideryStudio.
Embroidery objects: In
embroidery design, you build
designs from basic shapes or
embroidery objects. They are
called objects because they are
discrete entities which can be
selected and manipulated
independently of each other.
They are like ordinary vector
objects in that they have certain
characteristics or properties
such as color, size, position, and
so on. They also have properties
unique to embroidery such as
stitch type and density. See also
Vector objects.
Embroidery thread: See
Thread.
Emery Roller: The Schiffli roller
on which the threads are
twisted and part of the control
of tensions.
Glossa r y
1006
Empty function: An empty

stitch, or non-data stitch, is an
industry term for any stitch with
a zero movement (0, 0).
However, Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0
distinguishes between
intentional empty stitches
related to the machine
functioning, and unintentional
empty stitches, which can occur
in small or pointed parts of
shapes. An empty function is an
empty stitch that the system
processes as a machine
function. It is not removed by
the small stitch filter and is
preserved when stitches are
regenerated or the design is
resized. See also Empty stitch.
Empty jump: You create empty
jumps (0,0) manually in
EmbroideryStudio by digitizing
with Penetrations Out. This
prevents the needle from
penetrating the fabric, forcing
the machine to move across the
design in a series of jumps.
Also, use empty stitches or
empty jumps when required by
the selected machine format.
See also Empty stitch.
End Jump function: End Jump
functions instruct the machine
to use needle penetrations.
When encoded in an output file,
it normally converts to a Needle
In function. See also Begin
Jump function.
Empty stitch: Empty stitch is a
tight (zero length) lockstitch,
used together with, or as an
alternative to, tie-in and tie-off
stitches, particularly in objects
filled with light density stitching
where standard tie-ins and
tie-offs may be visible. Also, use
empty stitches or empty jumps
when required by the selected
machine format. See also
Empty jump and Empty
function.
EMX: Wilcom Cross Stitch file
format.
End X/Y: The coordinates of the
last stitch.
Enlargement drawing: The
technical drawing, usually six
times larger than the original

design, indicating the stitches to
be digitized. When you digitize
with a tablet, you use an
enlargement drawing to trace
the shapes and outlines of the
design in the same way you use
backdrops on-screen. Before
you start, you need to prepare
the enlargement drawing. See
also Digitizing tablet.
Enlarger: The draftsman or
designer who draws the
technical drawing for the
puncher to follow.
Entry point: The entry point is
the point where the thread
enters the embroidery object.
This should coincide with the
exit point of the preceding
object.
Envelope: Special effect which
makes objects bulge or arch,
stretch or compress. Elastic
Lettering is typically applied to
lettering objects, but can also
be applied to other types of
embroidery object.
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript):
A standard file format for
importing and exporting
PostScript language files among
applications in a variety of
environments. An ESP file is a
PostScript file which describes a
single page, usually an
illustration. In general, the
purpose of the EPS file is to be
included (encapsulated) in
another PostScript file and can
contain any combination of text,
graphics and images. EPS files
normally include a small,
low-resolution TIFF, or
vector-based Windows metafile
image preview, as it will appear
on a printed page.
ESD: Native DOS format of
Wilcom DOS EScontains stitch
data, like stitch types and
densities, which permits better
processing. ESD in later
versions contains lettering
objects with outlines.
ESL: ESL is a file used to
produce any Wilcom Schiffli Tnn
file from EmbroideryStudio. It
is read but not written by the
Schiffli Converter to produce

RCC Tnn files.
ESS: ESS is the primary
machine file format for
Wilcom-developed Schiffli servo
control systems. When the ESS
file is read directly by a Wilcom
Electronic Servo System
(WESS), high data resolution
and stitch accuracy are
possible.
Exit: To leave a current window
or application.
Exit point: The exit point is the
point where thread leaves the
embroidery object. This should
coincide with the entry point of
the next object.
EXP: Stitch or expanded file
format native to Melco
machines.
Expanded file format: See
Stitch file.
Expanded tape: An expanded
tape which has every stitch of
the design punched.
Extension: See File extension.
Fabrics: Fabrics have many
properties, the main one being
elasticity or fabric stretch.
Surface texture, if present, is
another property that requires
different underlay types. When
you choose a fabric for use with
a particular design, the system
pre-loads settings optimized for
that fabric. These can be
overridden on an
object-by-object basis. See also
Fabric settings.
Fabric settings: Pre-defined
fabric settings include settings
for all full-coverage stitch types.
For each stitch type, spacing is
preset. Additionally, the quality
effects of pull compensation and
underlay are also preset for
each stitch type. Push, warping,
and shearing are reduced by
suitable underlay for the stitch
type and fabric. Decorative
effects such as Motif Fill are not
affected when fabric settings
are changed.
Fabric stretch: Embroidery
stitches pull the fabric inwards
1007
where the needle penetrates.

This can cause the fabric to
pucker, and gaps to appear in
the embroidery. Use automatic
pull compensation to counter
this effect by overstitching
outlines of filled shapes.
Facing: See Topping.
Factory settings: These are the
initial system settings as
installed. They are a standard
known setting that you can
return to. Some customers want
to create custom settings
tailored to the exact fabric they
are using most frequently. The
My Fabric settings are those
retained in the design and can
be saved to the template file.
Fadenleiter: Fadenleiter is a
mechanism on some Schiffli
machines for controlling the
feed and tension of yarns.
Fadenleiter functions:
Fadenleiter +/- functions
instruct the machine to increase
or decrease Fadenleiter stroke
one increment. This means
increasing or decreasing thread
feed because the section is
getting wider/narrower.
FDR: An embroidery disk
format native to Barudan
machines.
Festoon: Festoon is a
machines for reinforcing edges
on scallops, etc, for a strong
cutting edge. It is also the name
of a stitch type.
Festoon functions: Festoon
In/Out functions instruct the
machine to engage or
disengage the festoon device.
File: A named collection of
specifically related information
stored on a disk. Designs that
have been saved are stored as
files.
File extension: The dot and
three letters at the end of a
filename such as .BMP. The
extension identifies the file as a
certain type, readable by
certain applications.
Filename: The name of a file,

including the extension, e.g.
Cat.BMP.
FMC: An embroidery disk

format native to Barudan
machines.
Fill stitch: Series of running

stitches commonly used to
cover large areas. Different fill
patterns can be created by
altering the angle, length and
repeat sequence of the stitches.
Also known as Geflect stitch.
Folder: A collection of files and

subfolders that are stored
together on a disk. Part of
structure for organizing files on
a disk.
Finishing: Processes done after

embroidery is completed.
Includes trimming loose
threads, cutting or tearing away
excess backing, removing
facing or topping, cleaning any
stains, pressing or steaming to
remove wrinkles or hoop marks
and packaging for sale or
shipment.
FIXPAT: The FIXPAT (Fix
Pattern) utility is a conventional
Schiffli visual-editing program
which displays the tape file in
the Jacquard card format with
holes. The program is good for
safety-checking designs and
can be useful as a fast editor for
known problem patterns as well
as direct function editing.
Flagging: Up and down motion
of fabric under action of the
needle, so named because of its
resemblance to a waving flag.
Often caused by improper
framing of goods. Flagging may
result in poor registration,
unsatisfactory stitch formation
and birdnesting.
Floppy disk: A flexible disk
permanently sealed in a square
plastic jacket e.g. HD/DD 3.5"
floppy disk. Used for
information storage off-line for
security and/or infrequently
used data. Also used for
transferring punched
embroidery design (stitch file)
data from computer to
embroidery machine.
Florentine Effect: With
Florentine Effect you can curve
Complex Fill along a digitized
line to create flowing stitch
effects. The stitches follow the
digitized line but maintain
uniform density and needle
penetration patterns.
Font: A set of characters,

including letters, numbers and
other typographic symbols, of
the same design and style. Also
called Alphabet, even if it
includes non-letter characters.
See also Alphabets and
Lettering.
Following: The directions
drawn on the enlargement by
the designer as a guide for the
puncher's advancement and
sequence in punching.
Fox test: Method of testing
thread tension and soundness
of timing. Sew the word FOX in
one-inch Satin stitch block
letters with each needle bar,
then examine the reverse side
for skipped stitches and
correctly balanced ratio of top
thread to bobbin thread. The
correct balance is generally
considered to be a on-third ratio
of bobbin thread to two-thirds
top thread. These letters are
used because they require the
movement of the pantograph in
all directions, increasing the
likelihood that the beginnings of
timing irregularities will be
discovered.
Fractional spacing: Fractional
spacing is used to place stitches
more evenly in curved shapes,
producing better quality
embroidery with fewer stitches.
Fractional spacing is particularly
useful for columns of Satin
stitches with sharp turns.
Frame: Holding device to
secure fabric under an
embroidery head for stitching.
May employ a number of means
to maintain stability during the
embroidery process, including
clamps, vacuum devices,
magnets, or springs. See also
Hoop.
Glossa r y
1008
Frame boy: A helper in a frame

shop to help load and unload
frames of a Schiffli machine.
Frame-out position: When you
stitch out appliqu objects, you
can set a frame-out position.
This shifts the hoop out from
under the needle, making it
easier to place and trim the
appliqu shapes. The frame out
settings determine the distance
and direction of the hoop
movement.
Free Line baseline: Free Line is
the only type of baseline which
does not have a fixed or
pre-determined length. When
you choose Free Line, the
baseline will extend as long as
you keep adding letters. You
only need to mark its start
point. See also Baseline.
French inch: The French inch is
a measurement used for
spacing needles on the Schiffli
machines (c. 27mm). See also
Needle spacing.
Fringe: Threads that are cut
and hang loosely from the edge
of a design.
Function: See Machine
Function.
Fusion Fill: Fusion Fill is an
input method used to digitize
complex shapes with turning
stitches. Many shapes can be
digitized with this tool. Create
objects using left and right
clicks to mark reference points
to form the boundary outlines.
By digitizing boundaries within
shapes, you can create filled
objects with holes.
Ceeding or Tatami. See also Fill

stitch.
Generic Shiffli machine format:
Because there are many types
of Schiffli machine, individual
settings can be quite different
even though the capabilities are
the same. To deal with this,
ES Schiffli uses the concept of
the Generic Schiffli Machine.
The ES Schiffli generic machine
format supports functions
required for a wide range of
machine types.
Glitz: See Bling.
Graphics application: Software
allows you to edit bitmap
images and/or vector graphics.
See also Paint package and
Drawing package.
Graphics Mode: An operating
mode in which the CorelDRAW
application is active.
information on the hard disk it

will remain there until you
delete it. As it has a finite
capacity, file management is
required.
Hardware: Computer
componentry, including monitor,
keyboard, digitizing tablet,
printer, scanner, sewing
machine, etc.
Heat transfer printing: A
process which is sometimes
used in the production of a
printed design for commercial
use employs heat transfer paper
to which graphics are printed.
This is then heat-fixed to a
garment using an iron or
heat-press. The process falls
into the same category as
printing. Printers that support
heat transfer media in most
cases provide an automatic
mirror function in the printer
driver as the image must be
printed in reverse in order to be
heat-transferred to a garment.
See also Direct-to-garment
printing.
Gradient Fill: An artistic stitch

effect that gradually varies
stitch spacing between dense
and open fill along an
Heinzle: Heinzle is a Schiffli
embroidery object, producing
shading and color effects which disk format.
are difficult to achieve manually. Heirloom embroidery:
Embroidered goods designed to
Grayscale: A grayscale picture
be passed down from
is made up of 254 different
shades of gray, plus solid black generation to generation.
and solid white for a total of 256
Hiraoka DAT: Hiraoka DAT is a
different tones. Black and white
Schiffli disk version of the
photographs are grayscale.
Plauen card format for Hiraoka
machine.
Grid: Grid lines provide visual
cues to help you accurately
Hoop: Device made from wood,
place a design. When you start
plastic or steel used to tightly
the software for the first time,
grip fabric and stabilizer
grid lines appear by default.
between an inner and outer
Fusion Fill Trapunto: Fusion Fill

Trapunto is open fill stitching
that turns according to
user-defined stitch angles. As
with Complex Fill, Trapunto
effect forces travel runs to the
edges of objects so they do not
show through open or loose
stitching.
Guide runs: Series of stitches

used to align embroideries in
multi-hooping situations or to
assist in fabric placement for
appliqu. It is the first appliqu
layer stitched and is used to
position the pre-cut appliqu
patches on the background
material. See also Appliqu.
Geflect stitch: Geflect refers to

light or heavy stitching used to
fill in an area of a design with
run stitches. It is also known as
Hard disk: A device for mass

information storage. Usually the
disk is fixed inside the system
unit, and a second hard disk can
be added. When you store
ring. Designed to hold fabric

taut against the machine bed
for embroidering, it attaches to
machines frame.
Hooping: The process of

placing the fabric and/or
stabilizer into the embroidery
hoop. One of the most common
reasons for a poorly stitched
design is improper hooping.
I-beam: One shape taken by
the PC pointer, it indicates that
text can be input at the point
1009
selected. The shape is like the

capital letter I.
Icon: Miniature picture used in
the screen display instead of, or
as well as, text. The file list can
be displayed as icons with the
filenames underneath; the
toolboxes which appear in the
left of the screen are composed
of icons.
Image editing program: See
Graphics application.
Image preparation: Cleaning
up scanned images as input to
embroidery digitizing. This may
involve any one or a
combination of the following
techniques: reducing the
number of colors, adding or
emphasizing outlines, removing
noise, dithering or anti-aliasing,
eliminating unnecessary detail,
cropping sections or eliminating
backgrounds.
Imported outlines: Designs
read from non-EMB
outlineCND or PCHwhere
stitches have been generated in
EmbroideryStudio (or
equivalent) from original
outlines and stitching data.
Imported stitches: Designs
read from stitch or expanded
files, with or without outline
recognition, but stitches have
not been regenerated through
stitch processing. Note that if
you change a stitch designe.g.
add a lettering objectthe
status changes to Processed
Stitches even though the
imported stitches may not have
been regenerated.
INC: Individual Needle Control
(INC) was a mechanism
originally developed for Saurer
Pentamat machines whereby
each needle/borer position
across the whole machine could
be activated or de-activated
individually, either under
program or manual control.
INP: Wilcom condensed file
format.
Input A: An input method used
to digitize columns of varying
width and stitch angle. Digitized
pairs of reference points define

the outline, while lines
connecting the pairs define the
stitch angles.
Input B: An input method used
to digitize shapes where one
side is different to the other,
especially where one side
requires more reference points
than the other. Stitches turn
evenly throughout the entire
shape. You can use any fill stitch
type except Motif Fill.
Input C: An input method used
to digitize columns of fixed
width. It is typically used for
digitizing borders and outlines
of larger shapes. You can
digitize columns to create thick
lines or borders. Input C is
typically used with Satin stitch.
Input method: See Digitizing
tool.
Jacquard card: Historically
Schiffli designs were stored on
Jacquard cards of which there
are two typesPlauen and
Saurer. Named after Joseph M
Jacquard, inventor of the
Jacquard loom, Jacquard cards
contain a stitch-by-stitch
interpretation of the design
together with machine
functions, exactly as the
embroidery machine will read it,
encoded as a series of holes.
Later applied to 68 mm tape
used to program automated
embroidery machines. See also
Tape code.
Jagged Edge: Technique for
creating rough edges, to create
shading effects, or to imitate fur
or other fluffy textures in your
design.
JPG: JPEG file interchange
bitmap image format.
Jump: A frame or hoop
movement without a needle
penetration, commonly used to
get from one point in a design to
another.
Jump: A frame or hoop
movement without a needle
penetration, commonly used to
get from one point in a design to
another. In Schiffli terms a Jump
stitch means a frame movement

in Needle Out mode.
Jump function: Jump(M)
functions cause frame
movements without needle
penetrations and are used to
move smoothly from one part of
a design to another.
Justification: The position of
lettering on the embroidery
baseline.
Lacework: Lacework involves
the use of threads to produce
overall embroidery of full-length
fabrics. Most often used to
embellish women's apparel and
home fashions. Such work
typically uses boring. It is the
most widely used application for
Schiffli machines.
Letter spacing: The space
between adjacent letters.
Letters: Initials or name
making up a monogram. Letters
of an alphabet or font.
Lettering: Embroidery using
letters or words. Lettering
commonly called keyboard
lettering may be created from
pre-defined alphabet styles or
fonts, allowing variance of size,
height, spacing, density and
other characteristics.
Line art: A drawing with only
two colors usually black and
white.
List box: A single-line dialog
that opens to display a list of
choices.
Lockstitch: Commonly referred
to as a lock-down or tack-down
stitch, a lockstitch is formed by
three or four consecutive
stitches of at least a 10-point
movement. It should be used at
the end of all columns, fills and
at the end of any element in
your design where jump
stitches will follow, such as color
changes or the end of a design.
May be stitched in a triangle,
star or in a straight line. Lock
stitch is also the name of the
type of stitch formed by the
hook and needle of home
sewing machines, as well as
Glossa r y
1010
computerized embroidery
machines.
Lockstitch machines: Both
Schiffli and Multihead machines
are lockstitch machines,
forming stitches in the same
way as a home sewing machine.
Lockstitch operations involve
two threadstop and bottom.
The top thread is driven by a
needle, the bottom by a shuttle.
The bottom thread locks the
top thread in place, hence the
name lockstitch. See also
Multihead lockstitch
machine.
Logical machine functions:
ES Schiffli makes a distinction
between logical and physical
machine functions. The logical
machine function is what you,
the digitizer, want to
performfor example, start or
stop boring. Logical functions
are saved as object properties
in the native Wilcom EMB design
file.
Logo: Name, symbol or
trademark of a company or
organization. Short for
logotype.
Looms: See Schiffli.
Loom run: The stitching of one
complete pattern in one row on
a Schiffli machine.
Looping: Loops on the surface
of embroidery generally caused
by poor top tension or tension
problems. Typically occurs when
polyester top thread has been
improperly tensioned.
Machine format: Different
embroidery machines
understand different languages.
They have their own control
commands for the various
machine functions. Before you
can stitch a design, it must be in
a format which can be
understood by the target
machine. Common formats
include Barudan, Brother,
Fortran, Happy, Marco,
Meistergram, Melco, Pfaff,
Stellar, Tajima, Toyota,
Ultramatic and ZSK.
Machine function: Machine

functions are commands for a
specific embroidery machine.
These include color changes,
thread trims, jumps, machine
stops, needles in/out, and
boring begin/end. ES Schiffli
makes a distinction between
logical and physical machine
functions. See also Logical
machine functions and
Physical machine functions.
Machine unit: The machine
unit is the smallest frame
movement which the
embroidery machine can
perform. In Schiffli machines
there are three typesPlauen
(1/6 mm or 0.1667mm), Saurer
(0.1mm), and hi-resolution
WESS.
Machine setup: Before you can
send designs for stitching, you
must configure the machine in
EmbroideryStudio. You can
add machines, change settings
for machines already set up, or
delete machines that are no
longer required.
Magic Wand: Technique for
creating embroidery designs by
automatically digitizing color
blocks in electronic images.
Manual object: When you open
a stitch format file without
outline recognition, it becomes
a single manual object. This
object consists of a series of
individual needle penetration
points and has only general and
connector properties. When you
transform (scale, rotate, mirror)
a manual object, the original
stitch density does not change.
Max/Min stitch length: The
minimum and maximum stitch
lengths allowable in a design
determine the outside limits as
measured between needle
penetration points. They are
governed by the minimum and
maximum frame movements
that the machine can make.
Maximize button: For
Windows, the small box in the
center of the group of three at
the right of the title bar. Click
the Maximize button to enlarge

a window to its maximum size.
Memory: The place in the
computers system unit that
stores information while you are
working with it. If you exit
without saving information in
memory, it will be lost.
Menu bar: The menu bar
contains dropdown menus of
commands. Some of the same
commands are available on the
toolbar.
Menu chart: The menu chart
provided with the software lets
you select commands directly
from the digitizing tablet using
the puck. You need to register
it before use.
Minimize button: For Windows,
the small box to the left of the
group of three at the right of the
title bar. Click the Minimize
button to reduce a window to its
minimum size.
Minimum stitch length: The
minimum movement of the
hoop. It is measured between
needle penetration points. See
also Max/Min stitch.
Mirror: Duplication of an object
in the Y and/or X axis. The
location and orientation of the
mirrored stitches are
determined by location and
angle of the axis of reflection
relative to the position of the
original stitches.
Mirror-merge: Mirror-Merge
Array can create multiple copies
of designs, such as badges,
spaced in rows and columns for
faster stitchouts. Mirror-Merge
Reflect can duplicate and mirror
designs simultaneously. You can
use it to quickly create borders
or merge duplicates into a
symmetrical object such as a
heart. Mirror-Merge Wreath can
duplicate objects around a
center point. The Kaleidoscope
tool works like Wreath but
mirrors objects as well.
Mitre Corner: A type of Smart
Corner. Mitre Corners create a
sharp line at the intersection of
the two columns. They are
1011
designed primarily for corners

between 75 and 90. See also
Smart Corners.
Modal dialog: A dialog which,
while open, prevents the user
from selecting any control or
object outside it. Changes made
to settings inside the dialog are
not effective until it is closed.
Modeless dialog: A dialog
which, while open, allows the
user to select objects freely.
Controls in the dialog change to
conform to the values of
selected objects, or show
relevant system information
when no object is selected.
Changes made to settings in the
dialog may be applied while it
remains open. Other dialogs
and commands may be opened
and used while the modeless
dialog remains open.
Modem: Unit to telegraphically
send computer information
from one computer to another.
Monitor: In computer terms, a
device that accepts video
signals from a computer and
displays information. Monitors
generally employ cathode-ray
tubes or flat-panel displays to
project images. In practice, the
terms monitor and display are
used interchangably. In
digitizing terms, the monitor is
where digitizing or stitching
progress can be followed,
stitch-by-stitch.
Monogram: Embroidered
design composed of one or
more letters, usually the initials
of a name. Can also consist of
borders or designs to mark
ownership of items such as
clothing, caps, handkerchiefs,
etc.
Moss Stitch: Chenille-type
stitch. See Chenille.
Motif: Pre-defined design
elements, such as hearts,
leaves or border patterns, that
can be quickly inserted into a
design. Motifs generally consist
of one or more simple objects,
and are stored in a special motif
set.
Motif Fill: Motif Fill is a

decorative fill stitch with which
you can fill larger shapes.
Depending on your softwares
capabilities, you can also create
special or three dimensional
effects.
Motif Run: Motifs which are
linked together along a digitized
line. You can create decorative
outlines using any motif from
the list.
Motif set: Motifs in
EmbroideryStudio are stored
in motif sets similar to
alphabets of characters. ES
Designer provides two
pre-defined motif sets. One
contains single motifs for fills
which use the same pattern in
both forward and backward
rows. The other set is intended
for use with two-part motifs
which use complementary
patterns for forward and
backward rows. You can also
define your own motif sets to
organize and classify motifs of
your own creation.
Mouse: A device, equipped with
control buttons and designed to
roll about on the table next to
the keyboard. As the mouse
moves, its circuits relay signals
that move a pointer on the
screen.
MST: MST is a Laesser file type.
It includes same stitch data as
Laesser DAT. (Not supported in
ES Schiffli e1.0.)
Multicolored designs:
Multicolored designs contain
more than one color. Most
Schiffli machines do not support
automatic color change. That is,
there is no mechanism to
activate individual or groups of
needles. Thus multicolored
designs are expensive to
produce because operators
need to manually trim the
threads and re-thread the
needles.
Multihead lockstitch machine:
Multihead lockstitch machines
have a horizontal frame. The
needles are vertical, and are
grouped in heads. They are
mainly used for stitching

individual itemse.g. badges,
garments, which are stretched
in separate hoops attached to
the frame under each head. A
multihead machine can have up
to 24 heads, and each head can
have up to 20 or more needles.
Thread change and trims can be
done automatically. See also
Lockstitch machine.
Multi-appliqu: A type of
appliqu object composed of
more than one piece of fabric
and bordered by various types
of embroidery objects.
Native designs: Native designs
refer to designs created in
EmbroideryStudio software (or
equivalent).
Native file format: A design
saved in the original format of
the application you are working
with is said to be the native file
format. It can also refer to the
stitch file format required by a
specific embroidery machine.
When saved to another format,
it is known as a non-native
format.
Needle: Small, slender piece of
steel with a hole for thread and
a point for piercing fabric. A
machine needle differs from a
handwork needle; the machine
needles eye is found at its
pointed end. Machine
embroidery needles come with
sharp points for piercing heavy,
tightly woven fabric; ball points
which glide between fibers of
knit; and variety of specialty
points, such as wedge points,
which are used for leather.
Needle In/needle Out function:
The Needle In and Needle Out
functions instruct the machine
whether or not to use needle
penetrations. You can enter
these functions automatically
using the Penetrations tool.
Needle points: You can view
needle points in a design to
check density or, for instance, to
select stitches for editing.
Nesting: Nesting lets you
create or insert an object at an
Glossa r y
1012
exact point of the stitching

sequence. You can nest an
object in the middle of another
objects stitching sequence to
prevent long connectors being
generated.
Network: To link embroidery
machines via a central
computer and disk-drive
system, usually via a modem or
network card. A group of
machines linked via a central
computer.
Noise filtering: Noise filtering
means restoring the solid color
blocks of original artwork in
scanned images. This is
achieved by merging different
shades into one solid color.
Noise filtering is important for
automatic digitizing because it
makes it easier for the software
to identify solid color blocks
which become embroidery
objects in the resulting design.
It also cleans up blurred or
mottled areas of color.
Needle spacing: Needle spacing
is the distance between
adjacent needles of a Schiffli
embroidery machine. Typical
values are 27.07 mm and
27.04mm. The software lets you
set up and adjust this value to
suit the type of machine which
will stitch the design.
NORMAL template: The
NORMAL template is the default
template supplied with the
software. It contains current
property settings as well as a
selection of preset styles. These
styles include variations on the
current property settings. For
example, <PRESET_SATIN_1>
and <PRESET_SATIN_2>
contains different stitch spacing
settings for Satin stitches. You
can view and modify the
settings for these styles at any
time. See also Templates.
Objects: In computer science,
objects are regarded as any
discrete item that can be
selected and manipulated, such
as an onscreen graphic. In
object-oriented programming,
objects include data and the
procedures necessary to
operate on that data. See also

Embroidery objects.
stitch density or quality. See

also Stitch file.
Object outline: See Outline

file.
Outline recognition: When you

convert a stitch file to outline
format, EmbroideryStudio
reads the data stitch-by-stitch
according to the needle
penetration points. The
software then recognizes stitch
types, spacing and length
values, stitch effects, and can
determine object outlines.
Object properties: All

embroidery objects in
EmbroideryStudio contain
defining settings or values. The
values stored with an object
become its properties. All
objects have certain properties
in common such as size and
position. There are other, more
specific properties of objects
which depend on the object
type. The most important
property of all embroidery
objects is stitch type.
Object recognition: See
Outline recognition.
Object type: An object has a
type, shape, thread type and
color, stitching settings and a
position in the stitching order.
The object type may or may not
determine the intended final
appearance of the stitching.
Offset Object: Software
function used to create new
outlines from the outlines of
selected objects.
Ornament: A grouped
embroidery design which may
consist of one or more objects of
any type and one or more
colors. Ornaments may be
placed in up to eight positions
around letters, or centered
behind letters.
Options: Options provide
software with extra functionality
that can be purchased by
registered owners of the
product.
Outline file: Outline or
condensed files are high-level
formats which contain object
outlines, object properties and
stitch data. When you open an
outline file in
EmbroideryStudio,
corresponding stitch types,
input methods and effects are
applied. Outline files can be
scaled, transformed and
reshaped without affecting
Outline stitch: Stitch such as

Run or Satin used to outline an
embroidery object.
Overall embroidery: Overall
embroidery is embroidery which
covers the entire fabric. This
includes lacework where the
backing fabric is actually
removed after manufacture.
Overall embroidery is typical of
Schiffli manufacture, less
common with Multihead.
Overshoot: Overshooting is a
technique used by Schiffli
punchers to reduce distortion of
fabric by pulling more thread
from the cone and reducing the
pulling force of the thread.
Overview window: Use the
Overview window to view a
thumbnail of the design. The
window is updated whenever
you make a change, and can be
used to zoom in or pan across
the design window.
Paint package: Software
allows you to edit image files.
You can create lines and filled
areas as well as edit the image
pixel-by-pixel using
paintbrushes, erasers and
spraypaint tools. Examples of
image editing programs are
Adobe Photoshop, Jasc
PaintShop Pro and Corel
PHOTO-PAINT. See also
Graphics application.
Pan: Use Pan to view parts of a
design which are not currently
visible in the design window.
Paper tape: Traditional
recording media used in the
embroidery industry is the
paper tape. The tape coding
1013
process produces the final

design in stitch formata
stitch-by-stitch interpretation of
the designexactly as the
embroidery machine will read it.
Now largely replaced by floppy
disk, tapes are still used by
older machines. More
specifically, stitch data paper
tapes are eight-channel paper
tapes which, in effect, are hard
copies of 8 bit binary code.
Parallel port: A connection on a
computer, usually LPT1, where
you plug in the cable for a
parallel printer and/or a dongle.
Parallel ports are used to
connect some embroidery
machines. They are named
LPT1, LPT2, etc. When you set
up a parallel machine
connection, select the parallel
port and the required protocol,
and complete the machine
setup procedure.
Partial appliqu: Technique to
create appliqu objects with
partial cover stitching to create
an overlapping effect without
doubling-up borders.
Partition Lines: Partition Lines
is a method for offsetting needle
penetrations in Tatami fills,
used, like Tatami Offset
Fractions, to create needle
penetration patterns or textures
in stitched embroidery.
Paste: To insert an object,
which has previously been
placed on the clipboard by
cutting or copying selected
objects, into a design. You can
paste from the clipboard as
many times as you like.
PAT: PAT is a Saurer SHC file
type.
Patch: The fabric piece use in
appliqu.
Pattern: The design, card,
punching, tape, disc, or
enlargement.
PCH: Gunold Outline Design or
condensed file format.
PCX: PC Paintbrush bitmap
image format.
PDF: Portable Document

Format. Used to view the Online
Manual in Acrobat Reader.
is to some degree controlled by

the computer e.g. an
embroidery machine or printer.
Patchwork: The composite of

pieces sewn together to form a
large piece, such as a quilt.
Physical machine functions:

When outputting designs,
ES Schiffli translates design
data into stitches and machine
functions that the target
machine will understand. The
functions that the machine
understands are called
physical machine functions.
Patchwork block: A collection

of patches sewn together,
usually forming a regular shape
such as a rectangle. These are
then sewn together to make a
quilt.
Pattern Arrangement (ABC):
Some Schiffli embroidery
machines can read designs in
which repeated parts are stored
only once in the design file and
only the repeat instructions are
given to the machine.
EmbroideryStudio provides
tools to define pattern
arrangements and output to
specific formats which support
the feature.
Pattern outline: See Motif
Run.
Pause function: The Pause
function is a conditional Stop,
always on an empty stitch. It is
interpreted by the machine
according to the machine
operator preferences.
PEN: PEN is a Saurer Pentamat
Station file type. (Not supported
in ES Schiffli e1.0.)
Pencil rub: Low-cost way of
producing an embroidery design
sample. Consists literally of a
piece of tracing paper placed
over a stitchout and rubbed
lightly with a pencil to produce
an impression of the
embroidery.
Penetrations: The Needle In
and Needle Out functions
instruct the machine whether or
not to use needle penetrations.
You can enter these functions
automatically using the
Penetrations tool.
Pentamat: An advanced Schiffli
individual needle and borer
switching system available on
Saurer and Laesser Machines.
Peripheral: Any device
connected to a computer which
Piecing: The business of sewing

patches together into
patchwork blocks.
Pixel: A dot. For example, dots
of light that make up the image
on a computer screen. The more
pixels in a given area that is,
the smaller and closer together
they are the higher the
resolution.
Pixelation: An effect which
occurs when a bitmap image is
enlarged so that the individual
pixels are obvious to the eye.
Placement lines: See Guide
runs.
Plauen: Plauen is the area in
Germany where Schiffli
machines originated. It now
identifies a type of Schiffli
machine and Jacquard punched
card encoding. It is also known
by the names of other
manufacturers such as Hiraoka,
Comerio, Zangs, etc, who
copied and modified the original
design. The Plauen machine
requires the hook to be held in
the right hand for threading.
PLS: PLS is a Saurer SLC file
type.
PMU: PMU is a Proel stitch or
expanded file format.
PNG: Portable Network
Graphics vector graphic format.
PNN: PNN is a Plot file used in
SPES. (Not supported in
ES Schiffli e1.0.)
Point & Stitch: Toolset used to
create embroidery designs by
automatically digitizing blocks
of color in electronic images, or
converting vector outlines
Glossa r y
1014
directly to embroidery objects.

See also Smart Design.
design size, the color sequence

and any special instructions.
Pointer: A part of the screen

display, the pointer can take
various shapes. It is moved by
moving the mouse and can be
used to point to anything on the
screen to make selections and
indicate points for input. It also
indicates when the computer is
working and no input is
possible.
Program: A computer program

or application is generally used
for a particular kind of work,
such as word processing or
database management.
Point: Unit of measurement,

with 10 points equal to 1 mm.
Port: A connection on a
computer where you plug in the
cable that carries data to
another device. Ports which are
used to attach peripherals have
names like COM1 or LPT1 so
that you can specify where the
peripherals are attached.
Position: The Position indicator
shows position of the design (X,
Y) in the design window.
Print Preview: Use to preview
design and design information
before printing a Production
Worksheet. The design is
displayed as it will be printed.
Process: The Process feature
lets you adjust the density of
one or more stitch types across
the whole or selected parts of a
design. Change stitch density in
order to stitch on a different
fabric or with a different thread.
Alternatively, you may want to
make production cheaper by
reducing the overall stitch
count. Processing a stitch file is
similar to converting it to an
outline file when opening except
that you can process only
selected objects or stitches.
Processed stitches: Designs
read from stitch or expanded
files where stitches have been
regenerated by processing.
Production worksheet: The
production worksheet is the link
between the designer and the
embroidery machine operator. It
contains a design preview as
well as essential production
information, including the
Program Split: A decorative fill

stitch which can be applied to
various object types where
needle penetrations form a tiled
pattern. Different preset
patterns are available for use.
Properties: See Object
properties.
Protocol: The communications
protocol depends on the
connection type between the
computer and the embroidery
machine. This will be one of:
standard serial, parallel, serial
to parallel converted (DCi), or
interface card.
PS: Postscript vector format.
Puck: See Digitizing puck.
Puckering: Result of the fabric
being gathered by the stitches.
Many possible causes include
incorrect density, loose hooping,
lack of backing, incorrect
tension or dull needle.
holes representing stitches,

pantograph movements and
other commands. While still
capable of producing paper
tape, many digitizing systems
now store this information on
disk formats. See also
Digitizing.
Push-Pull: When any stitch is
sewn into fabric, the tension in
the thread between needle
penetrations can build up and
result in a push-pull effect.
This can cause distortions in
your sewn designs, poor stitch
registration and even the
bunching of the fabric. The
degree of distortion can be
affected by the following
factors: stitch density, fabric
type, underlay, backing type,
thread type and garment
orientation. See also
Stitch-Pull.
Quilting: In general, the
process of making a quilt; in
specific, the stitching of
patterns into the quilt layers to
add strength and decoration to
the quilt - top, batting and
backing -- to form decorative
patterns on the surface of the
quilt and to hold the layers
together.
Pull compensation: Digitizing

technique that takes into
account the distortion of a
design that will occur because of
the interaction of thread with
fabric. Push and pull will cause
a circle digitized perfectly round
to sew with the sides pushed
out, resulting in an egg shape.
Generally, it is necessary to
extend horizontal elements and
reduce vertical elements. See
also Automatic pull
compensation.
RAM: Random Access Memory,

computer chip maintaining
memory.
Punching: Conversion of
artwork into a series of
commands to be read by an
embroidery machines computer
or controller. The term refers to
an earlier method of machine
embroidery whereby designs
are punched to paper tape. A
part of the machine, called an
automat, reads the paper tape
or Jacquards punched with
Raster image: See Bitmap

image.
Random factor: You can

eliminate unwanted patterns
and distribute stitches evenly
within a shape using a random
factor. Apply random factors to
Tatami Partition lines or
Program Splits. You can use this
effect to imitate different
textures such as fur, grass,
leaves, etc.
Read: To open a design which

has been written on a design
card or to an embroidery
machine.
Reader/Writer: A device that
allows you to download/upload
designs to and from a design
card. Cards can be purchased
1015
from your dealer or from

designers on the net. Cards can
have designs on them or are
blank for you to read/write
from/to. The cards are inserted
into the embroidery module
attached to a sewing machine.
The R/W will allow you to have
the PC and sewing machine
quite separate from one
another.
Recognition: See Outline
recognition.
Redraw: The screen display is
refreshed. This is useful when
parts of the display have
become obscured in the course
of editing. See also Slow
Redraw.
Reduce colors: See Image
preparation.
Reference point: A point that
can be aligned with the grid. For
example, you can set the grid
reference point to the design
center. This is easier and faster
than moving the whole design.
Resequence: You can change

the position of a selected object
by cutting it, then pasting it
somewhere else in the stitching
sequence, or by using the
Resequence command. You can
also resequence objects by color
or using the Color-Object List.
Resizing: See Scaling.
Resolution: Resolution
determines the number of dots
per inch (dpi) used to create an
image. The higher the value,
the clearer the image, but the
more storage space required. A
resolution of 75 dpi generally
produces good results.
RGB: RGB stands for red,
green, and blue. It is the system
used by computer monitors to
create color.
Rhinestones: See Bling.
Refresh: See Redraw.
Rhinestone template: This is

the design layout on which
rhinestones are initially placed
for creation of a rhinestone
transfer. This is what is created
from the cutters or engravers.
Registration: Correct
registration is achieved when all
stitches and design elements
line up correctly.
Rhinestone transfer: This is the

rhinestone design ready for
heat transfer to the final
product e.g. a T-shirt.
Relative Pointer Setting: This

setting shows the pointer
position as an absolute value
from the first needle point of the
design. Useful for checking that
the design fits a given area.
RPM functions: RPM +/functions instruct the machine

to increase or decrease machine
speed in increments from
current or normal.
Relative: The distance the

pointer is from a previously
marked point, or from the
previous stitch point.
Repeat: Layout used for making
emblems or designs on a fabric
span that are repeated at
regular intervals. The design
repeat is defined by the distance
between needlesthe point at
which the design repeats itself.
Repeat Color Change (RCC): A
Repeat Color Change (RCC) is a
machines to change the pattern
of active needles in order to
modify the repeat pattern
and/or thread color.
Right-click: To press and

release the right mouse button.
See also Click.
Rollover: The point at which the
fabric is shiftedloosened and
resetvertically to continue
stitching. Common on long
fabric Schiffli machines.
Rotation handles: When you
select an object, selection
handles display at its
extremities. If you click the
object again, rotation and skew
handles appear around the
object. Rotation handles appear
at the corners of the object and
an anchor point displays at the
objects center. Skew handles
are diamond-shaped and
appear at the center-top and

bottom of the object. See also
Selection handles.
Run stitch: Run stitch, also
known as Walk stitch, places a
single row of stitches along a
digitized line. The needle
penetrations are placed in
consecutive order. Run is
generally used for stitching
outlines and connector stitches.
Run stitch length can be set to
automatically vary in order to
follow tight curves.
SAS: SAS is a Saurer SLC,
Saurer SLC RCC, Saurer SLC
Standard or Saurer Pentamat
file format.
Sash: A fabric strip that
separates blocks in a setting,
framing them and making the
quilt larger.
Satin stitch: Type of fill stitch.
Formed by closely arranged
zigzag stitches, it can be
stitched at any angle and with
varying lengths. The thread is
laid across a shape with a zigzag
sewing action where two
stitches form a column. Hence it
is only suitable for small or
narrow shapes. As the stitches
are almost parallel, Satin
provides good coverage. It is
often used for lettering,
outlining, and details. Because
there are generally no needle
penetrations breaking up the
fill, Satin stitch creates a glossy
effect.
Saurer: Saurer is a Schiffli
machine brand and type as well
as a Jacquard card encoding
format. The format has three
variants with support added for
more modern RCC and
Pentamat machines. Sometimes
it is referred to as the left hand
machine because the threading
requires the hook to be held in
the left hand.
Saurer SHC: SHC is a high level
code format which is designed
to be machine independent in
order to control both Saurer and
Plauen type mechanisms. The
format supports thread
trimming.
Glossa r y
1016
Saurer SLC: SLC is a Saurer low

level code format for Schiffli
designs.
Save: To store (design)
information in a file. Each time
you save a design, you replace
the previous version using the
filename. You should save your
design frequently.
Scalability: Ability to enlarge or
reduce a design. In expanded
format, most scaling is limited
to 10 to 20%, because the stitch
count remains constant despite
final design size. In condensed
formats, on the other hand,
scale changes may be more
dramatic, because stitch count
and density may be varied.
Scale factor: This option allows
you to automatically scale CND
designs as you load them. For
example, to scale the imported
design to 120% of the original,
you would enter a scale factor of
1.2.
Scaling: Ability to enlarge or
reduce a design in size. In stitch
or expanded format, most
scaling is limited to 5%
because the stitch count
remains constant despite final
design size. In outline or
condensed formats, scale
changes may be more dramatic
because stitch count and
density are recalculated.
Scanner: A device that converts
physical images into digital form
so that they can be stored and
manipulated by computer.
Scanning allows you to take
scanned images as a basis for
embroidery design.
Scanning resolution: Most
scanners require you to enter
scanning resolution
information. Resolution
determines the number of dots
per inch (dpi) used to create a
drawing. The higher the value,
the clearer the image but larger
the file. For digitizing purposes,
use a maximum resolution of
300 dpi (dots per inch). A
resolution of 72 dpi (screen
resolution) will usually be
sufficient. Generally speaking,
the smaller the source image

and/or more detail it contains,
the higher the resolution needs
to be.
Schiffli card: Plauen or Saurer
type Jacquard card.
Schiffli card image: Jacquard
card electronic encoding
produces a tape file which is
essentially an electronic image
of the card. ES Schiffli outputs
two tape file formatsT10 (for
Plauen) and T15 (for Saurer).
See also Tape code.
Schiffli disk: Schiffli disks
include Saurer SLC/SHC,
Heinzle, Hiraoka, and Laesser.
Schiffli machine: Commercial
embroidery machine that
utilizes the combination of
needle and shuttle to form a
stitch. Massive in size. Some
schiffli machines also known
as looms weigh 10 tons and
have up to 1024 needles. Most
Schiffli machines do not have
automatic thread trim or
automatic color change.
Excellent for emblem
production, the creation of lace,
embroidery production on
oversized items and production
orders of very large quantities.
Screen calibration: You need to
calibrate your monitor so that
designs at 1:1 scale appear at
real size. Do this when you first
install EmbroideryStudio,
whenever you change your
monitor, or adjust your
monitors horizontal or vertical
controls.
Screen printing: Screen
printing is a more complex
process than direct-to-garment,
requiring the creation of a
screen for each of the spot
colors (Pantone) that make up
the design. There may be
multiple screens for each spot
color, depending on how the
design is layered. See also
Direct-to-garment printing.
Screen resolution: See Pixels.
Scroll bar: The bar at the
bottom and right edge of a
window whose contents are not
entirely visible. Each scroll bar

contains a small box, called a
scroll box, and two scroll arrows
to allow different types of
scrolling.
Security code: Options in
EmbroideryStudio are
controlled by a security device
installed on the computer.
Security access codes entered
into the software are sent to this
security device. Each security
device has a unique serial
number and identity code.
Security Device: See Dongle.
Segments: Filled embroidery
objects are generally built as
several discrete segments.
Travel runs are typically used to
connect them. All segments,
however, form part of the same
object. Where they meet, the
push-pull effect on the fabric
during stitchout may cause gaps
to appear.
Select: To highlight an object or
group of objects for the purpose
of editing. Only selected items
can be edited.
Selection handles: Eight small
squares that appear
symmetrically at the corners
and edges of a selected object.
Use them to position and resize
objects. See also Rotation
handles.
Sequence: See Stitching
Sequence.
Sequins: Sequins, also known
as spangles, are small plastic
disks with a hole in the center.
The spangles are stored on rolls,
each one joined to the next by a
weak link. They are stitched
onto fabric by placing a spangle
in front of the needle whilst
needles are out of the fabric.
Sequin attachment: Sequin
attachments are computerized
or manual machine devices
which apply sequins by
stitching, glue or heat.
Sequin mode: Sequin mode
enables quick digitizing of Drop
Sequin functions. See also Drop
Sequin functions.
1017
Serial port: A connection point

on a computer where you plug a
serial communications device
such as a modem. PC serial
COM ports are male connectors,
and can be either 9-pin or
25-pin. They are named COM1,
COM2, COM3, etc. The number
of available ports limits the
number of devices you can
connect. If additional ports are
required, you can add them.
Multi-port serial cards can also
be used.
Serial Port Setup: Here you can
adjust Baud, Data Bits, Stop
Bits, Parity values. These
settings must be identical to
those of the embroidery
machine. The type of
handshaking must match the
type of cable you are using.
Sharpen Edges: Tool used to
prepare outlined images for
automatic digitizing. Sharpen
Edges automatically sharpens
outlines and reduces noise.
Areas enclosed by a black
outline are reduced to a single
color. Outline sharpening makes
it easier for the software to
recognize distinct areas in the
artwork. These areas then
become the embroidery objects
of the finished design. Use it
particularly if the outlines are
blurry, fuzzy or indistinct.
Short stitch: Digitizing
technique that places shorter
stitches in curves and corners to
avoid an unnecessarily bulky
build-up of stitches.
Shortcut key: A key stroke or a
series of keystrokes you can use
to perform a task instead of
using the mouse. For example,
Ctrl+C actions the Copy
command.
Side movement: The distance
the frame can move horizontally
on a Schiffli machine, measured
in quarters.
Side stick: Adjustable bars with
pins on each end of the Schiffli
frame to hang or pin the ends of
the goods being spanned.
Sizing handles: See Selection

handles.
Skew handles: See Rotation
handles.
Slow Redraw: Use to redraw
your design slowly. Slow Redraw
lets you view the stitching and
color sequence of a design in
slow motion.
Small stitches: Use the Small
Stitch Filter to remove
unwanted small stitches from a
design automatically.
Smart Corners: Sharp points in
a shape may cause a bunching
of stitches and needle
penetrations which can create a
hard spot in the embroidery and
may damage the fabric or
needle. Smart Corners helps
you control sharp corners in
Input A and Input C objects.
See also Mitre Corner and Cap
Corner.
Smart Design: Toolset used to
create embroidery designs by
automatically digitizing
electronic images. Smart
Design automatically converts
bitmap images to fully digitized
embroidery with little or no
intervention. See also
Point & Stitch.
Software: Programs, such as
MS Windows and Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0, which
run your computer.
Span: The prepared goods
ready to load the Schiffli
machine. It may contain many
yards of goods.
Span cloth: Fabric attached
permanently to the roller of the
Schiffli machine with pins onto
which the fabrics are attached.
Spangles: See Sequins.
Spanning: The loading of the
goods on the frame, placing it
under tension preparatory for
embroidery.
Specialty fill: A fill stitch
capability that produces a fill
with a relief or motif design
within the fill-stitch area, e.g.
Pattern Fill.
Specialty threads: Threads

designed for effects such as
shine, glitter, iridescence or
thickness. The threads often are
made from synthetic materials
including rayon, mercerized
cotton, metallics and textured
nylon.
Spiral Contour: Spiral Contour
creates a single, continuous line
of stitching that spirals around
to fill the shape. Typically, it is
used for rings and borders, but
it is also suitable for other
closed shapes. See also
Contour stitch.
Split Alternate: Split Alternate
is a variation of Tatami split. See
also User Defined Split.
Split object: You can split
embroidery objects that were
created with the Input A, Input
B, and Input C tools, if Satin or
Tatami, or Program Split is the
selected stitch type.
SPI: Stitches per inch; system
for measuring density or the
number of Satin stitches in an
inch of embroidery.
SPM: Stitches per minute;
system for measuring the
running speed of an embroidery
machine.
SR/SD: Melco Star format. Star
and Superstar are types of
Melco machine (quite old now).
Stabilizer: See Backing.
Standard backstitch: The rows
are approximately parallel, with
every backstitch row slightly
shorter than the forward row.
Because the rows are different
lengths, there are fewer small
stitches at the edge of the
shape, reducing possible
damage to the fabric. Standard
backstitch is suitable for high
density fills. See also
Backstitch.
Standard Contour: Standard
Contour creates rows of stitches
across the shape, perpendicular
to the digitized stitch angle. The
number of stitch lines is
constant, so the stitching is
denser where the shape is
Glossa r y
1018
narrower, and more open where

the shape is wider. See also
Contour stitch.
Start/End Boring Tension
functions: See Boring Tension
functions.
Station: See Repeat Color
Change (RCC).
Status bar: Provides
information about the whole
design: number of stitches,
position of the design (X, Y),
number of colors (C), number of
stops (S), etc.
STC: Gunold stitch or
Stemstitch: A detail stitch that
can be used to outline items or
fill in areas. It is used for stems
and vines with other decorative
stitches, or as an outline for
Satin or Motif fills.
Step stitch: Series of parallel
stitches commonly used to
cover large areas. Different step
altering the angle, the length
and repeat sequence of the
stitches.
Stippling: A method of creating
a fill made of run stitches which
meander around within a
border. Often used in quilting.
Stitch: A stitch is one needle
penetration; also used to refer
to the thread laid down from
one needle penetration to the
next.
Stitch angle: The stitch angle is
the angle the overall stitching
follows within a shape. The
shape may have a fixed stitch
angle e.g. 45 to the
horizontal or multiple stitch
angles.
Stitch bunching: Standard
stitch spacing is calculated at
the outside edge of a shape.
With sharp curves, spacing
which provides adequate
coverage on the outside edge
may cause bunching along the
inside edge. This may cause
thread breakage when stitching
out.
Stitch count: Stitch count

refers to the number of stitches
in a design. In
EmbroideryStudio one stitch is
considered one machine
revolution. See also Design
properties.
Stitch density: The number of
stitches per given area (or stitch
lines per distance in a fill).
Stitch editing: Digitizing
feature that allows one or more
stitches in a pattern to be
deleted or altered.
Stitch file: Stitch or expanded
designs are low-level formats
for direct use by embroidery
machines. They contain only
stitch coordinates and machine
functions. Stitch designs are
generally not suited to scaling
because stitches are not
regenerated during rescaling.
See also Outline file.
Stitch length: The distance
between two needle penetration
points. For maximum stitch
length, the length is measured
according to the X and Y
co-ordinates, whichever is
greater. Run stitch length can be
set to automatically vary in
order to follow tight curves. See
also Max/Min stitch length.
Stitch List: The Stitch List
displays stitch number, stitch
coordinates, stitch length, stitch
function, stitch color. When you
select a stitch in the list, it is
simultaneously selected in your
design.
Stitch processing: The
calculation of stitch information
by means of specialized
software, allowing scaling of
expanded format designs with
density compensation.
Stitch Processor: A patented
software feature developed by
Wilcom International P/L. Stitch
Processor is a function of the
software which interprets raw
stitch data and converts it into
objects that the software can
recognize.
Stitch-Pull: When any stitch is
sewn into fabric the tension in
the thread between needle

penetrations can build up and
result in Stitch-Pull. Stitch-Pull
can cause distortions in your
sewn designs, poor stitch
registration and even the
bunching up of fabric. The
amount of Stitch-Pull that
results in your design can be
affected by the following
factors: Stitch Density, Fabric
Type, Underlay, Backing Type,
Thread Type and Garment
Orientation. See also
Push-Pull.
Stitch type: Three basic stitch
types are available with
lockstitch machines Run,
Satin and Tatami (Weave).
Wilcom
EmbroideryStudio e2.0
provides many variants of
these.
Stitch shortening: When a
shape takes a sharp turn, the
spacing of stitches on the inside
of the shape decreases rapidly.
This results in bunching on the
inside and gaps on the outside
of the shape; the longer the
stitch, the worse the problem.
Automatic Stitch Shortening
solves this problem by
eliminating thread bunching.
The embroidery has smooth,
even stitch spacing throughout.
It also reduces thread
breakages during production.
Stitch spacing: Spacing
between two consecutive
needle penetrations on the
same side of a column. The
smaller the value, the greater
the stitch density. For more
open stitching, use larger
values.
Stitching defects: Stitching
defects may appear in the form
of gaps between filled areas,
fabric show-through and thread
breaks. These are often caused
by incorrect stitching settings
e.g. setting pull compensation
too small for the fabric
stretchiness.
Stitch-To-Machine: The
software lets you send a design
directly to the embroidery
1019
machine for stitching if it is

connected to your computer.
Stitching direction: Stitching
direction can affect embroidery
quality because of the Push-Pull
effect. Only closed embroidery
objects can be reversed.
Stitching sequence: The
embroidery objects in a design
form a stitching sequence.
Initially, objects are stitched in
the order in which they were
created or the design
assembled. You can change the
position of a selected object by
cutting it, then pasting it
somewhere else in the
sequence, or by using the
Resequence command. You can
also resequence objects by color
or with the Color-Object List.
Stock designs: Embroidery
designs readily available on disk
or proprietary embroidery card.
Digitized embroidery designs
that are commercially available
for general use by
embroiderers.
Stop code: Stop codes are
interpreted as explicit stops.
The machine stops stitching.
machine when to switch to the

Stuepfel device from the borer.
Borer In engages both the borer
and the Stuepfel.
Styles: A style is a group of
property settings stored under a
unique name. You can save any
combination of settings to a
style. This makes it easy to
apply these settings to selected
embroidery and lettering
objects. When you apply a style
to an object, the style settings
replace its current properties.
Any properties not specified in
the style, retain their current
settings.
Sublimation: Sublimation
means a change from a solid to
gaseous state and back to a
solid without becoming liquid.
Thus dye particles migrate from
the paper as a gas, to bond with
a polymer fabric or other
material and become solid
again. The transfer is effected
using high heat (205C) and
pressure, thus guaranteeing
that the image penetrates and
becomes an integral part of the
substrate.
Stop function: If you want the

embroidery machine to stop for
any special reason while
stitching a design, you need to
insert a Stop function in the
stitching sequence. If there are
Stops in a design, these can be
read into EmbroideryStudio as
either a Color Change function
or a Stop function.
Sublimation printing :
Sublimation is similar to DTG
printing but the process uses
solid inks which give a more
even gradation of color rather
than the liquid inks in DTG
printing. With sublimation
printing, inks are printed onto a
release paper and then
transferred onto a fabric or
other surface.
Straight stitch machine:

Machine, which features
needles that move up and down
in one spot. The pantograph
pushes the design along. The
majority of commercial
embroidery machines use this
type of needle movement.
Supported machine type: A

machine is supported by the
software either via a direct
implementation in the software
for a specific machine or via the
Windows operating system
e.g. a Windows supported
printer or Windows supported
cutter.
STX: Datastitch stitch or

Stuepfel: Stuepfel is a Schiffli
machine attachment for
cleaning out holes after boring.
Stuepfel functions: Stuepfel
In/Out functions instruct the
Swiss embroidery: Satin stitch

embroidery. Also recalls the
origins of automated
embroidery in Switzerland,
where the Schiffli embroidery
machine was developed in the
1800s by Isaak Groebli.
Embroidery remains a
government-supported industry
in Switzerland today.
System Administrator: The
System Administrator is
responsible for the entire
Enterprise Network and
security. In smaller enterprises,
the System Administrator is also
usually responsible for database
administrations.
System requirements: What
your computers hardware and
software, operating together,
can support. System
requirements are printed on
software packages, design disk
cards and packs, CDs and other
computer accessories. You need
to know what your system can
and cannot support, as
sometimes a system is not
capable of handling new
software without adding
memory or disk space.
T03: T03 is an old paper tape
version of Barudan file.
T10: T10 is a Wilcom Plauen
Schiffli format used to punch
cards or as input to Electrocard
or converted to floppy disk
formats.
RCC Zangs Schiffli format.
T12: T12 is a Wilcom Plauen RCC Hiraoka Schiffli format.
T13: T13 is a Wilcom Plauen RCC Comerio Schiffli format.
T15: T15 is a Wilcom Saurer
Schiffli format used to punch
cards or as input to Electrocard
or converted to floppy disk
formats.
T16: T16 is a Saurer B Schiffli
format.
RCC Schiffli format.
T19: T19 is a Wilcom Saurer B RCC Schiffli format.
Pentamat Schiffli format.
T21: T21 is a Wilcom Saurer B
Glossa r y
1020

Tablet: See Digitizing tablet.
Tackdown: Zigzag stitch,
placed after placement and
cutting lines, and used to fix
appliqu patches to the
background fabric before cover
stitching is applied.
Tape: See Paper tape.
Tape code: More recently, the
recording media used in the
embroidery industry has been
the paper tape. Jacquard card
electronic encoding produces a
tape file which is essentially an
electronic image of the card.
ES Schiffli outputs two tape file
formatsT10 (for Plauen) and
T15 (for Saurer). As the newer
Schiffli machines can read
floppy disks, there are various
Schiffli machine floppy disk
formats. You therefore need to
convert the basic tape file to the
required disk format.
Tatami stitch: Series of run
stitches, commonly used to
cover large, irregular shapes.
Stitches are laid in rows
traversing back and forth across
the shape. These can be parallel
or slightly turning. Different fill
varying the stitch length, angle
or sequence. Also known as
Weave stitch.
Tatami offset fractions: With
Tatami fills you can specify how
each row is offset in order to
create patterns formed by
needle penetrations. You do this
by adjusting either offset
fractions or partition lines. By
adjusting offset fractions, you
can create textured fills where
the stitch penetrations are more
clearly visible.
Tatami partition lines: With
Tatami fills you can specify how
each row is offset in order to
create patterns formed by
needle penetrations. Partition
lines, with up to eight offsets,
can create more patterns.
Tatami underlay: Tatami
underlay is used to stabilize
large, filled shapes. It

resembles an extremely open
Tatami fill stitch, where rows of
stitches are placed across the
object to create the underlay.
Team Names: The Team Names
feature lets you create designs
with multiple names. For
example, you can use the same
logo with different names for
sports teams or corporate
uniforms without having to
create multiple copies of the
same design.
Templates: Templates are
special files used for storing
styles and default property
settings. The NORMAL template
packaged with the software
provides a selection of preset
styles. You can modify these as
required and save them back to
the NORMAL template or to your
own custom templates. Use
these when digitizing
frequently-used design types to
save time re-adjusting the
current property settings. For
example, a custom template
may include standard objects
and sample lettering. It may
simply have preferred stitch
settings, lettering font and size,
and colors set as current
settings. Or it may have special
density, pull compensation or
underlay settings to suit
different fabrics.
Tension: Tautness of thread
when forming stitches. Top
thread tension, as well as
bobbin thread tension, need to
be correctly set. Proper thread
tension is achieved when about
one third of the thread showing
on the underside of the fabric on
a column stitch is bobbin
thread.
Textured Edge: Use Textured
Edge to create rough edges, to
create shading effects, or to
imitate fur or other fluffy
textures in your design.
Thread: Fine cord or natural or
synthetic material made from
two or more filaments twisted
together and used for stitching.
Machine embroidery threads
come in rayon (high sheen),
cotton (duller finish), polyester

(strong and colorfast), metallics
(synthetic core wrapped with
metal foil or thin slivers of metal
foil) and acrylic (sheen similar
to rayon).
Thread Brake functions:
Thread Brake +/- functions
instruct the machine when to
increase or decrease tension
one increment by Thread Brake.
Thread chart: Thread charts
are lists of pre-defined thread
colors. They may be based on
commercially available thread
charts, or charts you define
yourself. You can copy colors
between different thread charts
to create your own charts from
existing colors. See also Color
palette.
Thread code: Code is the
identification number of a
thread color in a brand.
Thread Roller functions:
Thread Roller +/- functions
instruct the machine when to
increase or decrease tension
one increment by Thread Roller
Feed (2S-55 RCC).
Thread cutting: The removal of
floats, by hand or by machine.
Thread density: Different
thread density systems are
used by different thread
manufacturers. Density A is
normal embroidery thread
(density 120/2, or 40). Density
B is thicker, Density C is finer,
and Density D is very fine.
Thread thickness: See Thread
density.
Thread type: Embroidery
thread varies in thickness.
Types are A, B, C and D. Stitch
density should be set according
to the thread type. See also
Thread thickness.
Tie-ins: Tie-in stitches are
inserted at the start of objects
to prevent stitches from
unraveling. They are inserted
inside the shape on the second
stitch. You generally use them
when the previous connector is
trimmed.
1021
Tie-offs: Tie-offs are generally

placed before trims to prevent
stitches from unraveling. You
can adjust connector settings to
automatically add tie-offs under
certain conditions, or add them
manually. You can also include
trim functions so machines with
trimmers cut the thread
automatically.
Title bar: The horizontal bar
located at the top of a window
and containing the title of the
window. On many windows, the
title bar also contains the
Control menu box and Maximize
and Minimize buttons.
Toolbar: Toolbars provide quick
and easy access to
EmbroideryStudio commands.
Click a toolbar button to activate
a command or, where
applicable, right-click to view
and adjust its settings.
Topping: Material hooped or
placed on top of fabrics that
have definable nap or surface
texture, such as corduroy and
terry cloth, prior to embroidery.
The topping compacts the wale
or nap and holds the stitches
above it. It includes a variety of
substances, such as plastic
wrap, water-soluble plastic foil
and open-weave fabric that has
been chemically treated to
disintegrate with the application
of heat. Also known as facing.
See also Stabilizer.
Trapunto: Trapunto is a general
term for very open fill stitching,
often used as a background or
for filling large shapes. In
EmbroideryStudio, Trapunto
effect forces travel runs to the
edges of objects so they do not
show through open or loose
stitching.
Travel runs: Travel runs are
typically used to connect
segments of complex shapes.
They can also connect adjacent
objects. Because runs are not
trimmed, they may be visible in
the final embroidery. For this
reason, they are less commonly
used as connectors between
objects than jumps. If objects
are adjacent and connectors will

be hidden, they can be used.
Traveling: You generally check
a designs stitching sequence by
traveling through it by stitches,
segments, functions or objects.
Trim function: If you are using
a machine with an automatic
trimmer, the trim code causes
the thread to be cut after a
tie-off. In the software, trims
are represented by a triangle
with a small circle at the point
where stitching starts again.
The trimmed connector appears
as a dotted line. You can adjust
connector settings to
automatically add trims, or add
them yourself.
Trimmers: Devices built into an
embroidery machine to
automatically trim or cut
remaining thread when the
design jumps from one area to
another or performs a color
change.
Trimming: Action of cutting
loose thread, removing backing,
etc, from the final embroidered
product.
Triple Run stitch: Triple Run
repeats each Run stitch three
(or more) times for a thick line.
Typically used to add borders
and pickout runs to designs.
Triple Satin: Triple Satin is
often used for folk designs to
mimic handmade embroidery
that uses thicker thread. If you
require thicker stitches, set the
Satin stitch to repeat itself
multiple times.
stitches which turn to follow the

path defined by the object
outline. By contrast, parallel
stitching traverses the shape in
one direction only e.g. at 90
to the horizontal, 45, or
whatever is set. Objects can be
created with turning stitching
already applying, or multiple
stitch angles can be added later.
Turning stitches are best used
with designs containing
complicated, turning shapes
such as trees, animals, or large
filled areas. Turns generally
occur at points where a shape
changes significantly in
direction or width.
TWAIN: Industry standard
which allows devices (such as
scanners) to communicate
directly with design and layout
programs. Both device and
program must be
TWAIN-compliant. This lets you
use any TWAIN-compliant
scanner with your software.
U?? Stitch file format native to
Barudan machines.
UDL file: DesignWorkflow uses
the Microsoft Data Link (UDL)
format to link to its databases.
UDL files are similar to Windows
shortcuts, but they contain
more information about where
the actual database and all of its
attendant files are located.
Copies of UDL files can be
shared, renamed and relocated
so that many people can use the
information. In effect, every
user with DesignWorkflow can
have their own UDL link to the
same database.
TrueType Font: Digital font

technology designed by Apple
Computer and now used by both
Apple and Microsoft in their
operating systems.
Underlay: Stitches sewn before

other design elements to help
stabilize fabrics. The stitching
action that will attach the
backing to the fabric being
embroidered. It also supports
TrueView: TrueView provides
you with a preview of how your the top embroidery for a more
lofty, dimensional look.
embroidery will look when
stitched out. It gives the screen Underlay stitches are made up
image a three dimensional look. of a series of single run stitches,
usually with a very short stitch
Turning stitches: Embroidery
length, and are digitized
objects can be filled with
manually or placed
parallel or turning stitching.
automatically under the column
Turning stitches are columns of
Glossa r y
1022
(satin) or fill stitch areas of your

embroidery design.
Underlay margin: The distance
between an object outline and
the edge of the underlay.
Increase this margin to prevent
underlay stitches from
extending outside the cover
stitches.
USB port: Universal Serial Bus
Connector, a connection on a
computer where you plug in the
dongle.
User Defined Split: User
Defined Split lets you add detail
to filled objects by digitizing
lines of needle penetrations
called split lines. Split lines are
stored as object properties.
They are preserved when
stitches are regenerated even if
you apply a different stitch type.
Values: The actual settings
letters and numbers that you
enter into dialogs. See also
Object Properties.
Variable sizing: Ability to scale
a design to different sizes.
Variable stitch length: The
software can automatically
calculate the best length for
each stitch with the Variable
Run Length option. A chord gap
value controls how closely the
stitches follow the digitized
lines.
VDT: VDT is a Hiraoka Schiffli
format.
Vector graphic: Unlike raster
images, vector graphics contain
vector data. This is a collection
of geometric shapes and lines
that combine to make an image.
Rather than pixels, such data is
recorded as a set of
mathematical formulas defining
shapes such as rectangles,
ellipses, curves, polygon stars,
etc. These are created using
vector graphics programs such
as CorelDRAW. Vector
graphics are scalable without
distortion, and are usually much
smaller than bitmap images.
See also Bitmap image.
Vector object: Vector objects

are derived from vector
graphics and can be created in
EmbroideryStudio or
imported. In
EmbroideryStudio they can be
converted to and from
embroidery objects. You can set
general properties such as size
and position, and arrange and
transform them in the same way
as other objects. See also
Vector graphics.
Vector text: A text object
created using the CorelDRAW
Text tool.
VEP: Hiraoka VEP file format is
used extensively for Pattern
Arrangements (ABC) on existing
machines. VEP uses a small
arrangement file which splits
the different design partsA is
one file, B is a second file, C is a
third file.
Watcher: The operator of the
Schiffli machine who sets the
pattern, twists the yarns,
maintains the shuttles, loads
and unloads the machines,
performs the rollovers and
watches for thread and needle
breakage. The machine
operator.
Wave Effect: With Wave Effect
you can curve Closed Fill
stitches along a digitized line to
create flowing stitch effects. The
stitches follow the digitized line
but maintain uniform density
and needle penetration
patterns.
Weave stitch: See Tatami
stitch.
WECS: WECS (Wilcom
ElectroCard System) eliminates
the need for Jacquard cards.
WECS reads Wilcom stitch files
T10 and T15 and runs the
Schiffli Automat directly. You
therefore only need to save the
design as a stitch file to floppy
disk.
Weight: When referring to
T-shirts, the three standard
weight divisions are
mid-weight/value,
heavyweight/premium, and
super heavyweight.
WESS: WESS (Wilcom
Electronic Servo System)
replaces the Schiffli Automat
and controls the frame
movements directly by servo
motors. It requires Wilcom ESS,
Hiraoka DAT, Saurer SAS, T10
or T15 files on floppy disk as
input and its method of
operation is similar to WECS.
WMF: Windows Metafile vector
format.
Write: To send design
information to an embroidery
disk, design card or embroidery
machine for immediate
stitchout or storage.
X/Y coordinates: The horizontal
(X) and vertical (Y) distances on
a graph or computer screen.
Use X values to measure width,
and Y values to measure height.
XXX: Compucon stitch or
expanded file format in the
professional market.
Zigzag stitch: Zigzag stitch is
similar to Satin but is generally
used where fewer stitches are
required. The needle penetrates
each side of the column, laying
the thread across in an open
zigzag pattern. The density is
determined by the stitch
spacing setting. The settings for
Zigzag fill stitches are stored
separately from Zigzag and
Double Zigzag underlay
settings.
Zigzag underlay: Zigzag and
Double Zigzag underlay
stitching is used to support wide
columns.
Zoom factor: The scale at which
the design is currently
displayed.
ZSK: ZSK1 format is for older
ZSK machines, generally those
older than 1991. ZSK2 is for
newer ZSK machines, those
characterized by a single top
thread trimmer. The trim is the
most significant differentiating
factor between the two types.
1023
Index
Numerics
3D Warp tool 626627
A
access codes
entering 18
entering manually 18
importing 19
accessing designs, databases and
folders 875
Accordion dialog 596, 599
Accordion Spacing
Accordion Spacing tool 596
applying 596
overview 595
selecting types 596
setting values 596
spacing values 596
Active Thread Charts dialog 164, 176,
178
Add
Add To Palette tool 853
Add Color To Palette tool 163
Add Keyword dialog 859860
Add Thread dialog 181
Add To Favorites dialog 208
Add Team dialog 363
adding
Empty Stitch/Empty Jump 236
folders 892
stitch angles to Complex/Fusion
Fill 484
tie-offs 234
trims 235
adjusting
column width 121
E stitch outline spacing 158
Motif fill width and height 151
Satin stitch spacing with
auto-spacing 142
Satin stitch spacing with fixed
spacing 143
stitch angles 482
Tatami stitch length 148
Tatami stitch spacing 148
Zigzag outline spacing 157
Align
Align Bottom tool 453
Align Horizontal Centers tool 453
Align Left tool 453
Align Right tool 453
Align Top tool 453
Align Vertical Centers tool 453
alphabets 350
converting TrueType 409
converting TrueType fonts 405
converting TrueType to embroidery
fonts 405
creating new 420
digitizing from artwork 416
letter kerning 352
merging files 425
modifying 422
modifying custom letter 424

preparing drawings 417
user-refined 412
See also lettering
anchor points, rotation 458
angles
rotating by exact angle 459
rounding sharp corners, Input C 501
setting for partition lines 551
skewing by exact angle 461
Tatami underlay stitch angle 221
See also stitch angle
anti-aliasing 244
appliqu
adjusting settings 639
combining components 645
converting Fusion Fill objects 638
converting vector graphics 634
cover stitch values 643
cutting shapes 770
digitizing 636
guide run values 640
outputting 745
partial cover 645
printing patterns 745
splitting 478
tacking values 641
using Input C Offset 122
Appliqu Tools Flyout
Auto Appliqu 486, 491, 636645
Combine Appliqu Components 645
Apply
Apply Style tool 206
Apply Current Properties tool 197,
604
Apply Closest Join tool 448
archived design files, handling 889
Arrange > Close Object command 128
Arrange menu, Embroidery mode 908
Arrange toolbar
Align Bottom 453
Align Horizontal Centers 453
Align Left 453
Align Right 453
Align Top 453
Align Vertical Centers 453
Break Apart 478
Group 434, 912
Lock 435
Make Same Height 458
Make Same Width 458
Make Same Width and Height 458
quick reference 912
Space Evenly Across 454
Space Evenly Down 454
Ungroup 424, 434
Unlock All 435
arranging objects
grouping 434
locking 434
arrays
Array tool 467
creating 467
artwork
anti-aliased images 244
choosing 242
converting bitmaps to vectors 285

converting to vector drawings 283
dithered images 243
enlargement drawings 830
preparing for scanning 244
scanned images 243
sequins 672
vector drawings 262
Auto Appliqu
Auto Appliqu tool 486, 491, 636645
Auto Appliqu converting to Complex
Fill 491
Auto Center 238
Auto HoopIt tool 798
Auto Jump
Auto Jump tool 508
Auto Jump dialog 509
overview 508
Auto Scroll 842
Auto Spacing
setting values 142
spacing offset 145
stitch length 145
stitch spacing 145
auto spacing values 180
Auto Split 507
Auto Start and End dialog 239
Auto start/end method, team
names 383
Auto Trace tool 283
Auto Underlay
Auto Underlay dialog 217223
Auto Underlay tool 217223, 357,
445
Center Run 219
Double Zigzag 220
Edge Run 219
setting margins 223
Tatami 221
Zigzag and Double Zigzag 220
automatic
Automatic Knife tool 481
backup 845
borders 546
branching 442
color matching 163
connectors, see connectors
jumps, see Auto Jump
letter kerning 352
pull compensation 224
save 845
spacing, see Auto Spacing
split, see Auto Split
trims 233
underlay 216
borders, see also lettering
automatic digitizing 281
Auto Trace 281
converting grayscale images 295
cropping images 253
image preparation tools 249
Photo Flash 281
Point & Stitch 281
Smart Design 281
automatic stitching 289
Automatic Stitching Values
1024
dialog 292294
adjusting shape tracing options 292
creating embroidery designs 289
object sequencing 294
B
backdrops 20
dimming 838
displaying 61
smoothing bitmap images 255
smoothing vector drawings 485
using bitmap images 252
Back-Front tool 276
background
colors, changing 72
fabrics, changing 72
image, toggle on/off 186
images, changing 183
printing on production
worksheets 740
products, changing 72
backstitch
Backstitch tool 106, 128, 135136
Borderline 150
Diagonal 150, 151
selecting for Contour fill 154
selecting for Tatami 150
Standard 150, 150151
types 150
Backtrack tool 537
backtracking objects 537
Barudan twin-sequin-capable
machine 675
baselines
adjusting 332
any shape 312
arc 310
changing 306
circular 311
custom 312
horizontal 308
moving letters along 317
reshaping 332
vertical 309
bitmap images
anti-aliasing 244
converting to vectors 285
dimming 838
displaying 61
dithered 243
output designs as 743
scanned 243
smoothing 255
using as backdrops 252
Blackwork runs, splitting 478
Bling Edit tool 714
Bling Palette Editor dialog 697, 699
Bling Palette Editor tool 696, 699
bling palettes 696
editing 699
setting up 696
Bling Run Manual tool 704
bling runs
automatic 701
manual 701
Ring Run Auto tool 701
Bling toolbar
Bling Edit 714
Bling Manual 704
Bling Palette Editor 696, 699
Bling Run Auto 701
Borderline backstitch 150
borders
Borders tool 546
digitizing with Input C 118, 123
Monogramming dialog 389
offset objects 540
offsetting Input C stitches 122
setting width 121
with monograms 388
Borers tool 529
boring
changing borer display color 189
digitizing boring holes 529
oval holes 530
round holes 530
boundaries
digitizing for appliqu 636
digitizing for rings 536
branching 442
Branching tool 443
applying two-layer outline
stitching 446
using auto underlay 445
using Color-Object List 444
brands, thread 181
Break Apart tool 478
Browse for Folder dialog 868, 889
browsing
designs, slide show 874
for designs 867
bunching, reducing with stitch
shortening 501
C
Cap Corners tool 497498, 911
Capture Design Bitmap dialog 743
Carving Stamp dialog
Appearance 579
Digitize 575, 576
Use Object 573
Use Pattern 570
carving stamps
adding to library 576
changing appearance 578
creating stitch patterns 569
digitizing 574
pre-defined 570
reshaping 580
using objects 572
catalogs
exporting in CSV format 887
exporting in Tab delimited
format 887
printing 885
publishing 886
Center Out, letter sequencing 349
Center Run underlay 219
centering object, with cross-hair
cursor 452
changing
entry point 485
exit point 485
locale (language) 870
Character Map dialog 344
charts, see thread charts
checking sequence 75
Choose
Fabric Color dialog 201, 205
Locale dialog 870
chord gap 131
circle objects
moving 475
reshaping 475
Circle tool 105, 534
Circle Tools Flyout
Circle 105, 534

Ring 106, 536
Star 106, 535
circles
digitizing 534
drawing 265
in circles (Ring) 536
in ovals (Ring) 536
clearing, machine functions 523
clipart
link to Design Workflow 863
recording 858
search and sort 855
view / select 853
Clipart Properties
Clipart Properties dialog 859
Clipart Properties tool 859
Clipart toolbar
Manage Keywords 860861
Record to Clipart 858
Show Clipart 853858
cloning objects 432
Close Object command 128
closed shapes, drawing 264
CND
CND files, color merging 788
compatible input methods 937
conversion options 785
conversion tables 933
saving as 750
saving to 934
codes
entering security codes 18
thread 181
Color Blending
Color Blending dialog 598
Color Blending tool 598
applying 598
color blocks
printing 741
split 173
viewing in Color-Object List 80
color change functions 811
Color dialog 182, 190, 650
color film, printing 741
color matching 163
automatic 166
Color Merge utility 788
Color Palette 161, 910
Add Color To Palette 163
Color Palette Editor 55, 71, 82,
161180
Compact Palette 161
Current Colorway 71
Display Options 47, 72, 161189
Remove Color From Palette 163
selecting thread colors 162
Split Palette Color 173
Color Palette Editor dialog 55, 164
Color Palette Editor tool 55, 71, 82,
161180
Change Background 47, 72, 161189
Delete Colorway 169, 170
Edit Thread 167
New Colorway 169
Rename Colorway 170
color reduction 247
images 291
Color-Object List
Color-Object List tool 55, 80, 99, 435,
441444
Color-Object List dialog 55, 80, 99,
435, 441
grouping/locking objects 435
1025
locating objects 80
printing color film 741
resequencing objects 441, 442
resequencing objects by number 442
selecting objects 99
viewing color blocks 80
colors
adding to thread charts 180
changing borer display 189
changing for an object 161
changing grid display 189
changing object outlines 189
changing stitch display 189
copying across thread charts 179
creating thread charts 176
deleting thread charts 178
display colors 189
matching images to threads 166
merging Melco CND files 788
modifying colorways 170
modifying thread charts 176
modifying thread values 167, 178
removing from thread charts 167,
178
resequencing by 440
selecting for an object 161
selecting objects by color 98
selecting the current color 161
setting for consecutive objects 162
thread colors 160
traveling by 75
Colors dialog 73
colors, changing backgrounds 72
colorways 168
basing on existing 169
changing display colors 189
changing display settings 70
Colorway Options dialog 740
creating 169
Current Colorway 71
default settings 170
modifying 170
multiple 168
printing 740
viewing 71
Column Shape Tool Flyout
Input A 106, 124125, 529
Input B 126
Input C 106, 119123, 501, 915
Column Shape Tools Flyout
Input B 106
Input C 486, 488
column spacing, Program Split 556
column width
adjusting 225
Pull Compensation tool 225
columns
digitizing with Input A 124
digitizing with Input C 118, 123
offsetting Input C 122
setting width 121
sorting 871
combination splits
Satin in Satin 556
Satin in Tatami 556
selecting 555
Tatami in Tatami 556
types 555
Combine Appliqu Components
tool 645
Combine tool 274
combining
objects (nesting) 433
objects and designs 428
styles 209
Comma Separated Value files, see CSV
files
commands
popup menus 51
registering the menu chart 829
Split Window 64
undo/redo 58
using 50
using menus 51
using toolbars 52
Compact Palette tool 161
compensating for stretch, see pull
compensation
Complex Fill
Complex Fill tool 105, 110115, 602,
607, 616
adding stitch angles 484
converting to Auto Appliqu 491
creating borders 540
digitizing objects 114
digitizing the stitch angle 110
entry and exit points 110
filling holes 545
Motif Fill 616
offset objects 540
open stitching 594
stitch angle 115
Trapunto 594
complex shape
drawing objects 270
complex shapes
adding holes 114
digitizing 109
component objects, splitting 478
composite objects, splitting 478
condensed files 785
See also outline files
Condensed File Input Values
dialog 786789
Connection Manager, using 749
connection settings
parallel ports 823
peripheral devices 821
serial ports 821
connectors
add Empty Stitch/Empty Jump 236
adding tie-offs and trims 234
After Object 229233
automatic 228
Connectors dialog 229233
digitizing with Needles Out 236
displaying 70
hiding 70
inside objects 230
jumps 227
jumps (automatic) 228
Runs 227
runs (automatic) 230
setting automatic tie-in values 231
setting automatic tie-off values 232
setting automatic trim values 233
tie-ins 228
tie-offs 228
travel runs 237
trims 228
types 227
consecutive objects
selecting 93
setting colors 162
Contour
applying 154
Contour stitch overview 153
Contour tool 140, 153, 154155
offset fraction 155
selecting a backstitch 154
selecting a type 154
setting stitch values 155
Spiral 153
Standard 153
control points 107
reshape objects 469
viewing 470
conversion tables
digitizing for CND format 937
opening CND files 933
opening Gunold PCH files 937
saving to CND format 934
supported stitch file formats 931
Conversion Values dialog 411
Convert
Convert Options dialog 889
Convert tool 281, 299, 634
Complex Fill 486, 489
Convert Selected Designs tool 888
Drawing 488
Fusion Fill 486, 489
Input C 486, 488
Motif Run 486, 488
Run 486, 488
Stemstitch 486, 488
Stitch Angles 486
Triple Run 486, 488
Convert TrueType Font
command 409
dialog 409
converting
designs 879
drawing objects to embroidery 486
embroidery > drawing 488
file types 888
photos to designs 295
See also conversion tables
See also converting file formats
vector objects to embroidery 281
converting file formats
CND conversion options 785
CND conversion tables 933
PCH conversion table 937
converting objects 486
Auto Appliqu 486, 491
Backstitch 486, 488
bitmaps to vectors 285
Run and Input C 486
sequin artwork 672
converting outline designs
EMB conversion limitations 750
EMB to CND 750
EMB to CSD 751
converting stitch designs
recognize Jumps as Trim 776
recognize Objects/Outlines 776
coordinates
length 47
setting for objects 452
Copy From dialog 180
Copy tool 430
copying
and pasting designs 892
cloning objects 432
colors across thread charts 179
designs 892
duplicating objects 432
object properties 197
objects 430
corner fraction value 123
corner points 107
corners
cap 496
corner fractions, Input C 123
mitre 496
rounding, Input C 501
smart corners 496
corrupt files, deleting 994
In dex
1026
cover stitches
digitizing appliqu 636
setting values 643
CPU/RAM specifications 984
Create a Zip Archive dialog 890
create lettering
letter height 416
letter shapes 416
letter width 417
Create Special Tools Flyout
Backtrack 537
Borders 546
Color Blending 598
Fill Holes 545
Insert Offset Object 540543
Repeat 537
Create Stamp Pattern dialog 576
Create/Edit Hoop dialog 801805
creating baselines
any shape 312
arc 310
circular 311
horizontal 308
vertical 309
cross stitch fills 600
Cross Stitch tool 600
cross-hair cursor 452
crystals 694
CSD format, saving as 751
CSV files
Comma Separated Value files 887
exporting catalogs as 887
current
color, changing 161
needle position marker 75
current object properties
changing 194
make current 197
Curve dialog 606608, 626627
curve points 107
curved fills
applying to existing objects 603
applying to multiple objects 604
Contour 153
creating 602
creating fills with two curves 606
creating new objects 602607
custom alphabets
saving 420
selecting 421
custom hoops
rectangular 800
custom letters
deleting 423
renaming 423
reshaping 424
saving 418
custom templates, selecting 876
Customize dialog 736
cut and paste
objects 430
resequencing 439
Cut tool 430, 439
cutting
cutting lines, digitizing appliqu 636
designs 893
threads 235
D
Decorative dialog 584, 590
default
design view 871
object details 193
Define Stop Sequence dialog 791

Delete Colorway tool 169, 170
deleting
colors from thread charts 167, 178
designs 894
folders 892
motifs 633
objects 433
styles 211
templates 214
thread charts 178
density, applying fractional spacing 505
deselecting
objects 92
stitches 515
design components, export 760
design elements, naming 82, 172
Design Explorer
icon 865
opening 865
toolbar, Show/Hide folders 867
design formats
Gunold PCH 773
old format ESD 773
Wilcom INP 773
design lists, customizing 871
Design Properties
Design Properties tool 873
Information 85
Stop Sequence 89
design templates, see templates
Design Workflow, link embroidery
clipart 863
designs
accessing 875
archiving 890
Auto Start and End 238
browsing 867
browsing with slide show
buttons 874
combining 428
converting 879
converting formats 31, 719, 772
converting formats (tables) 928
converting to other file types 888
creating new 40
emailing 881
information 85
managing 865
opening 41, 875, 876
opening multiple 41
opening stitch designs 776
organizing 892
outputting 747, 879
planning a design 20
redrawing slowly 78
renaming 893
resequencing 439
saving 44
selecting 875
sorting 879
sorting using Navigation buttons and
Slide Show buttons 879
starting 40
stitching and punching 882
viewing 879
viewing in databases 879
viewing records 873
details lists, sorting 880
device connections,
troubleshooting 987
Device Manager dialog 997
devices, security messages 984
Diagonal backstitch 150, 151
dialogs
Accordion 599
Active Thread Charts 164, 176, 178

Add Keyword 859860
Add Team Member 364
Add Thread 181
Add To Favorites 208
Auto Jump 509
Auto Start and End 239
Automatic Stitching Values 292294
Bling Palette Editor 697, 699
Browse for Folder 868, 889
Capture Design Bitmap 743
Carving Stamp > Appearance 579
Carving Stamp > Digitize 575, 576
Carving Stamp > Use Object 573
Carving Stamp > Use Pattern 570
Character Map 344
Choose Fabric Color 201, 205
Choose Locale 870
Clipart Properties 859
Color 182, 190, 650
Color Blending 598
Color-Object List 80, 99, 435, 441
Colors 73
Colorway Options 740
Condensed File Input Values 786,
789
Connectors 229233
Conversion Values 406411
Convert Options 889
Convert TrueType Font 409
Copy From 180
Create a Zip Archive 890
Create Stamp Pattern 576
Create Teamname Layout 373
Create/Edit Hoop 801805
Curve 626627
Customize 736
Decorative 590
Define Stop Sequence 791
Design Properties > Information 85
Design Properties > Stop
Sequence 89
Device Manager 997
Digi Test 995
Digitizer Setup 822828, 995
Digitizer User-Defined Format
Setup 828
Display 73, 183190
Display Options 183, 187
DXF File Options 266
Edit Function 522
Edit Thread 167, 179
Embroidery Clipart 853857
Embroidery Machine Connection 824
Fabric Settings 202205
Fills 142158, 194213, 295, 345,
346, 348, 549553, 554564, 594,
617623
Flexi Split 566567
Format 753
Format Embroidery Disk 753
Group Name 363
Guide Position 46
Hardware Setup 820, 822826
Holes 545
Insert Function 520, 691
Kerning Table 353
Keywords 857
Layout 335340
Layouts 369
Length Calculation 88
Letter Spacing Table 355
Machine Format Values >
Advanced 814816
Machine Format Values >
1027
Standard 809818
Make Letter 419424
Make Motif 631632
Make Program Split 564
Manage Fabrics 202, 203, 204, 205
Manage Keywords 860861
Manage User-Refined Lettering 414
Match Drawing Color 166
Merge With Style 209
Modify Alphabet 422423
Modify Keyword 860
Modify Thread Chart 167181
Monogramming > Borders 389, 401
Monogramming > Lettering 389393
Monogramming >
Ornaments 389400
Move Stitch 524
Multi-Colorway Box 169174
Multi-Decoration File Export 760
My Hoops 797
Name Order 367
New 877
New Alphabet 420
New Colorway 169
New Fabric 202, 203, 204, 205
New Layout Set 373
New Motif Set 632
New Object Style 207
New Stamp Set 576
New Thread Chart 176
Object Properties > Fill Stitch > Cross
Stitch 600
Offset List 543
Offset Object 541543
Open 41, 252, 266, 398, 742, 776,
786, 861863
Open Embroidery Disk 752
Open From Embroidery Disk 752
Open Options 776778, 791
Options 68, 801805
Options > General 125, 846850
Options > Grid and Guides 840841
Options > Hoop 795, 797
Options > Reshape 844
Options > Scrolling 842
Options > View Design 836, 837
Options > View Drawing 838
Organize Favorites 208
Organize Styles 207211
Outlines 131132, 133, 136, 137,
611614, 629, 633, 654
Print 723
Print Designs Options 885
Print Options 726745, 884
Process 493494, 780
Properties 873, 874
Properties (Windows Explorer) 84
Publish Options 886
Pull Comp 225226, 314
Punch Options 883
Purge Recover and Backup
Directories 994
Quick Names 365
Recognition - Advanced Options 781,
782, 783, 784, 785
Record to Clipart 858
Reduce Colors 256
Remove Overlaps 539
Rename Alphabet 422
Rename Letter 423
Rename Object Style 211
Rename Split Pattern 570
Rename Thread Chart 178
Resequence By Number 442
Revert to Factory Settings 215, 994
Save As 44, 214, 861, 888890

Save Hoop As 801805
Save Options 751
Save Options > Team Names 384,
386
Save Pattern 681
Save to Embroidery Disk 755
Save User-Refined Letter 413
Screen Calibration 820
Security Device 18, 19
Select Border 401, 546
Select By Color 69, 98
Select By Stitch Type 98
Select Fabric Pattern 183
Select Machine Format 59, 648, 676,
806
Sequence 349351
Sequence By Color 440
Sequin Palette Editor 649, 650, 676
Sequin Pattern 672, 678
Serial Port Setup 822
Set Color 162
Set Security Device Options 18
Sharpen Outlines 258
Shortening 502
Show Functions 526
Show Stitches 527
Slow Redraw 79
Small Stitches 495
Smart Corners 498505
Smart Design 289292
Smooth Curves 485
Sort 881
Special 116123, 237, 255, 268,
302318, 321340, 343, 349,
377379, 406421, 501, 636643
Stipple 592
Stitch List 513527
Stitch Manager 748
Stitch Options 883
Stitch to Connection Manager 749
Stitch to Stitch Manager 748
Symbol Selection 343
Tablet Setup 829833
Tape Manager 883
Tatami 148
Team Members 377, 381
Team Names 363, 367
Team Names Matrix 382
Teamname List 375381
Tie In Values 231
Tie Off Values 232
Toolbars 54
Transform 457463
TrueView(TM) Options 837
Twin Device - Select Sequin 691
Underlay 217223, 445
Use Object Style 206
User Preferences 871
Windows Properties 877
Zoom Factor 64
Digi Test dialog 995
Digitizer Setup dialog 822828, 995
digitizer tablets
changing drawing scale 832
Point mode 826
puck actions 834
registering enlargement
drawings 830
registering the menu chart 829
shifting the drawing 833
Stream mode 826
using 834
using preset spacing 834
Digitizer User-Defined Format Setup
dialog 828
digitizing
appliqu objects 636
boring holes 529
circles and ovals 534
columns and borders 118, 123
columns with Input A 124
complex shapes 109
individual stitches 528
input methods 104, 128
Motif Run 134
new motifs 631
ring boundaries 536
shapes with Auto Trace 283
shapes with Input B 126
split lines 582
turning stitches 602607
using a digitizer tablet 834
with Needles Out 236
with User Defined Split 582
digitizing artwork
Outline Run 288
Pickout Run 288
Tatami Fill 286
Tatami Fill without Holes 286
Turning Satin 286
digitizing methods
Input C 118, 123
selecting 104
digitizing tablets, testing
connections 995
dimming backdrops 838
direct-to-garment production 694
display
Display Options tool 47, 72, 161189
changing display colors 189
changing display settings 70
Display dialog 73, 183190
grid 45
setting display options 67
display adapters
checking 997
locating drivers 998
Display Options dialog 183, 187
distances, measuring on-screen 47
dithering 243
Divide tool 277279
dongles, entering security codes 18
DOS disks, opening designs 752
Double Zigzag, setting values 220
drawing objects
apply input method 486
apply stitch type 486
circles 265
closed shapes 264
coloring 268
coloring fills 268
coloring outlines 268
converting bitmaps to vectors 285
converting to embroidery 486
creating complex shapes 270, 272
creating enlargement drawing 830
drawings creating 262
ellipses 265
ovals 265
polygons 264
rectangles 265
scaling, changing 832
See vector objects 262
smoothing vectors 485
squares 265
Drawing Tools Flyout
Drawing 488
Ellipse 265
Line 263
In dex
1028
Polygon 264
Polyline 263
Rectangle 265
Drop Sequin functions, inserting 691
drop-stitch direction, sequin runs 660
duplicating
cloning objects 432
objects 432
DXF File Options dialog 266
E
E Stitch tool 140, 158, 911
Edge Run
setting values 219
underlay 219
edges, applying Jagged Edge 590
Edit Function dialog 522
Edit menu
Embroidery mode 907
Envelope > Delete 360
Edit Thread
Edit Thread dialog 167, 179
Edit Thread tool 167
Edit Tools Flyout
Automatic Knife 481
Knife 479
Stitch Angles 484, 486
editing lettering
on-screen 320
with Lettering dialog 321
editing objects 469
reshaping 469
editing stitches 517
deleting stitches 517
inserting stitches 516
moving stitches 517
removing small stitches 495
using Stitch List 524
editing, machine functions 518
EDS-III
conversion table 933
digitizing for 937
saving to CND format 934
effects
Accordion Spacing 595
Auto Jump 508
Auto Underlay 216
Color Blending 598
Jagged Edge 589
smart corners 496
stitch shortening 501
Trapunto 594
Effects dialog
Accordion 599
Auto Jump 509
Auto Underlay 217223
Curve 606608, 626627
Decorative 590
Flexi Split 566567
Shortening 502
elements, naming 82, 85, 172
ellipse
Ellipse tool 265
digitizing 534
drawing 265
email
Email Selected Designs tool 881
attachments 742
designs 881
embroidery
Embroidery Disk Open tool 752
Embroidery Disk Save As tool 754,
807
embroidery clipart, recording 858
embroidery clipart
link to Design Workflow 863
search and sort 855
view / select 853
Embroidery Clipart dialog
Add/Match to Palette 853
Clipart Properties 859
Embroidery Clipart dialog 853857
embroidery disks
formats 753
formatting 753
opening designs 752
embroidery machine
Embroidery Machine Connection
dialog 824
automatic download 823
connections 823
Embroidery mode
Embroidery Mode tool 39
36
Arrange menu 908
Arrange toolbar 912
Color Palette toolbar 910
creating lettering 301
Edit menu 907
File menu 906
Help menu 909
Machine menu 909
quick reference 906
Special menu 908
Standard toolbar 912
switching 39
Toolbox 914
View menu 907
embroidery objects
convert to vector 281
creating complex shapes 272
displaying 60
inter-converting 486
Embroidery Studio
starting 35
Empty Jump Function tool 236
Empty Stitch Function tool 236
EMT files 214
End of Design functions 812
enlargement drawings
changing scale 832
creating 830
preparing 830
registering 831
shifting 833
entry/exit points
adjusting 447
changing 485
envelopes
Delete command 360
distorting lettering objects 359
types 359
ES Design Explorer problems
troubleshooting 986
Exception Access Violation, resolving
errors 996
Exclude tool 276
exporting
catalogs as CSV files 887
catalogs as Tab delimited files 887
F
Fabric Settings dialog 202, 203, 204,
205
fabric stretch, see pull compensation
fabrics
managing 202
pull compensation guidelines 225
show/hide 836
fabrics, changing backgrounds 72
fabrics, changing colors 72
fancy fill stitches
Motif Fill 616
Program Split 553
favorites, assigning favorite styles 208
File menu, Embroidery mode 906
file tree, refresh 870
file types
EMT 214
stitch files 931
Fill Holes tool 545
fill stitches
switching between fill and
outline 109
types 140
filling holes, Complex Fill 545
fills
adjust curved fill settings 608
adjusting curved fill settings 606
adjusting textured fill settings 567
applying curved fills 603, 604
creating curved fills 602
creating fills with two curves 606
cross stitch 600
Satin 142
selecting textured patterns 566
Tatami 148
Fills dialog 142158, 194213, 345,
348, 507, 549567, 594, 617623
Contour 155
E Stitch 158
Motif Fills 617623
Program Split 554564
Satin 142151, 194199, 345
Tatami 148, 346, 549553, 594
Zigzag 157, 348
fills, with sequins 662
filtering stitches
by function 526
by stitch length 527
fixing orientation, sequin runs 656
fixing stitches, sequins 654
Flatten tool 277279
Flexi Split tool 566567
Florentine Effect tool 602606
folders
adding 892
deleting 892
masking file types 879
organizing designs 892
refreshing/validating 870
renaming 892
searching 879
viewing zipped designs 868
Format Embroidery Disk dialog 753
formats, machine types 928
Fractional Spacing tool 505
frame movement, Auto Jump 508
Free Shape Tools Flyout
Complex Fill 105, 110115, 486, 489,
602, 607, 616
Fusion Fill 105, 112117, 486, 489
Freehand - Closed Fill Object tool 586,
588
Freehand - Closed Outline Object
tool 586, 588
Freehand - Open Object tool 586, 588
freehand embroidery 585
freehand lines, creating 586
freehand lines, smoothing 588
French dots, digitizing 535
Front-Back tool 276
1029
functions
displaying 70
End of Design 812
hiding 70
Stop 812
functions, Drop Sequin 691
Fusion Fill
Fusion Fill tool 105, 112117
adding stitch angles 484
converting to appliqu 638
nominal stitch angle 115
offset objects 540
G
gaps, offsetting filled holes 545
General Properties
dimensions 456
positioning using coordinates 452
General toolbar
Show Hoop 72, 794, 795, 797, 800,
804
General, Options 125, 846850
Generate
Apply Closest Join 448
Generate Stitches tool 109, 302
Generate toolbar
Borers 529
Branching 443
Generate Stitches 109, 302
Penetrations 236, 529
Process 493494, 779
Selects On 97, 514
Use Auto Start and End 238
glitz 694
graphics
displaying 60
graphics acceleration, reducing 998
Graphics mode 37
Graphics Mode tool 39
creating lettering 299
switching 39
graphics packages, linking 254
grayscale images, converting to
designs 295
grid
changing display color 189
display 45
rulers and guides 45
setting options 839
snap to 841
Group
Group tool 434, 912
group name, creating 363
grouping objects 434
with the Color-Object List 435
groups
selecting objects 436
guide patterns
Motif Fill 623
Program Split 561
Guide Position dialog 46
guide runs
offsetting 640
setting values 640
guides and rulers 45
Gunold, opening PCH files 937
H
handles, see selection handles
hard disk space, checking 8
hardware
Hardware Setup dialog 820822
peripheral device settings 821
setting up display monitor 19, 820
hardware acceleration, reducing 998
height, make objects same size 458
help
Help menu, Embroidery mode 909
viewing the onscreen manual 3
hidden objects, display 99
hiding
backdrops 61
bitmap images 61
graphics 60
outlines 62
holes
adding to complex shapes 114
digitizing boring holes 529
digitizing rings 536
filling holes 545
Holes dialog 545
hoop centers,setting 794
hoop list, setting up a custom list 797
hoops
selecting 794
hoops, frame out (Auto Appliqu) 644
hot-fix template production 694
creating offset objects 540

digitizing columns and borders 119
Input C tab 122
input side 122
offsetting stitches 122
reversing stitch direction 538
round sharp corners 501
input methods
applying to drawing objects 486
Circle/Star 535
digitizing 104, 128
Input A 124
Input B 126
Motif Run 610
selecting 104
Inputs A and B, converting to Complex
Fill 486491
Insert Function
Insert Function dialog 520, 691
Insert Offset Object tool 540543
inserting
one design into another 429
one object inside another 433
stitches 516
inter-converting objects 486
Intersect tool 276
italics, lettering 314
icons, menu chart 922

identity code 18
image colors, matching threads 166
Image menu
Reverse Curves 538
image preparation 246
cropping 253
non-outlined images 256
outlined images 258
using tools 249
images
bitmaps 252
cleaning up 247
color reduction 247
cropping 253
dimming bitmaps 838
displaying 60
displaying bitmaps 61
editing 254
noise filtering 249
non-outlined 256
outline sharpening 248
outlined vs non-outlined 246
output designs as 743
preparation 246
preparation tools 249
sharpening 246
smoothing bitmaps 255
images, changing backgrounds 183
Information, Design Properties 85
information, design properties 85
initials, monogram lettering 391
Input A
Input A tool 106, 124125, 529
digitizing columns 124
offset objects 540
Input B
Input B tool 106
digitizing columns 126
offset objects 540
Input C
Input C tool 106, 119123, 501, 915
corner fractions 123
Jagged Edge
Jagged Edge tool 589, 590
applying 590
Jagged Edge tab 590
setting values 590
joining
columns with underlay 223
creating smooth joins 125
objects, see connectors
jumps
adding 236
adding Empty Jumps Empty
Stitches 236
Auto Jump 508
automatic connectors 228
overview 227
using 519
justification, lettering 314
K
kaleidoscope
Kaleidoscope tool 465
using with wreath 465
Keep Source Objects tool 278
keep/omit last stitch
Input A 124
Input B 126
Keep Last Stitch tool 238
Omit Last Stitch tool 238
keep/omit motif (Motif Run) 613
kerning letters 352
Kerning Table dialog 353
Keywords dialog 857
Knife tool 479
L
Lap Corners tool 497498
last stitch, keep or omit 124126
layers
In dex
1030
removing extra stitching layers 538

layout
Layout dialog 335340
Motif Fills 623
Program Split patterns 561
length
automatic split 507
Contour stitch 155
Edge Run and Center Run
stitches 219
Length Calculation dialog 88
nominal 606, 608
preserving long stitches 508
Program Split stitch length 557
Run and Triple Run 131
Tatami stitches (underlay) 221
travel runs 237
variable (Run and Triple Run) 132
Zigzag and Double Zigzag
stitches 220
letter kerning 352
letter spacing
adjusting 316
changing 318
individual letters 317
Letter Spacing Table dialog 355
letter spacing, automatic 355
lettering
Lettering tool 302306, 320337,
342360, 379, 406421
2-color alphabets 350
Lettering tool 349350
adding to designs 27
adjusting individual letters 328
adjusting Satin stitch settings 345
adjusting spacing 316
adjusting Tatami stitch settings 346
adjusting Zigzag stitch settings 347
applying lettering art 359
art, applying 359
As Digitized join method 351
automatic borders 546
Bottom Join method 351
changing line spacing 317
Closest Join method 351
color changes between letters 303
coloring 331
coloring on-screen 331
converting TrueType letters 406
creating embroidery fonts from
TrueType 405
creating in Embroidery mode 301
creating in Graphics mode 299
creating monograms 388
edit envelopes 360
editing 320
formatting 314
generating stitches 109
I-beam 331
individual letter spacing 317
join methods 350
keeping original stitch values 350
letter spacing 318
line spacing 318
Monogramming dialog 389
names, see names
removing envelopes 360
reshaping baseline 332
reshaping curved baselines 332
reshaping on screen 329
rotating with Reshape tool 327
scaling with Select Object tool 326
selecting symbols 342
special characters and symbols 342
splitting 478
stitching sequence 349
transforming with Reshape Object

tool 329
transforming with Select Object
tool 326
troubleshooting 992
word spacing 318
See also alphabets
See also baselines
Line tool 263
lines
drawing 263
spacing, adjusting lettering 317
split lines 582
Liquid Effect tool 607608
locale
changing languages 870
locate
missing files 869
Lock tool 435
locking objects 434
lockstitches, see Empty Stitch
M
machine connections, testing
tablets 995
Machine Format Values dialog
Advanced 814816
Standard 809818
machine formats
advanced values 813
changing 807
color change sequence 813
creating custom 817
creating custom format 817
customizing for specific designs 818
modifying values 812
removing 818
selecting 806
start of design/end of design 814
machine functions
borers in/out 518
boring 520
clearing 523
color change 518, 519
displaying 70
editing 523
hiding 70
inserting manually 520
jumps 518519
sequins on/off 518
speed 815
Stops 519
thread trim 519
trims 518
types 519
using 520
Machine Manager 747
Machine menu
Embroidery mode 909
machine types, supported formats 928
machines, sequin-capable 647
Make Letter
Make Letter dialog 419424
command 424
Make Motif dialog 631632
Make Program Split dialog 564
Make Properties Current tool 197, 604
Make Same
Height tool 458
Width and Height tool 458
Width tool 458
Manage
Manage Fabrics dialog 202, 205, 202,
203, 204
Manage Keywords dialog 860861
Manage Keywords tool 860861
Manage User-Refined Lettering
dialog 414
managing designs 865
manual
Left Sequin tool 690
Manual Sequin tool 690
Manual tool 107, 528, 529
Right Sequin tool 690
manual objects splitting 477
right-clicking 529
manual digitizing, sequins 690
Manual Tools Flyout
Manual 107, 528, 529
Triple Manual 107, 528
margins
Jagged Edge 590
setting for underlays 223
masking files in folders 879
Match Drawing Color dialog 166
Match To Palette tool 853
Match to Palette tool 285286
matrix of team names 381
maximum stitch length 606608
measurement units, setting 48
measuring distances on screen 47
Melco
CND conversion tables 933
CND files, color merging 788
CND format, saving as 750
digitizing for CND (tables) 937
menu chart
icons 922
registering 829
menus
Embroidery mode 906
selecting commands 51
Merge With Style dialog 209
minimum stitch, Tatami 148
Mirror
Horizontally tool 462
Vertically tool 462
mirroring
motifs 630
with kaleidoscope 465
mirroring objects
around a specified axis 463
around X or Y axis 462
creating wreaths 465
horizontally 462
vertically 462
Mirror-Merge
for reflecting objects 464
Mirror-Merge toolbar
Array 467
Kaleidoscope 465
Reflect 464
Wreath 465
missing files, locating 869
mitre corners 496
Mitre Corners tool 497498
mode
Embroidery 36
Graphics 37
switching 39
Modify
Modify Alphabet dialog 422423
Modify Keyword dialog 860
Modify Thread Chart dialog 167181
modifying designs 29
moving objects 452
modifying objects
aligning 453
changing entry point 485
1031
changing exit point 485

changing radius of Circle 475
changing size of Ring 476
grouping 434
locking 434
mirroring 462
moving Ring object boundary 476
resequencing objects by number 442
resequencing with Color-Object
List 442
reshaping Circle objects 475
reshaping Ring objects 476
reshaping Star objects 475
rotating 458
scaling 454
skewing
spacing evenly 454
using envelopes 359
viewing by color 69
monitor, setting up 19, 820
Monogramming dialog
Borders 389, 401
Lettering 389393
Ornaments 389400
Monogramming tool 388392
monograms
creating 388
lettering with initials 391
monogram borders 401
splitting 478
motif fill
Motif Fill tool 140, 151, 616623, 633
applying 151, 616
filling shapes with 151, 616
layout motifs 623
modifying layouts on-screen 623
motif size 621
offsets 619
rotating 622
selecting motifs 617
spacing 619
two-part motifs 618
values 619
Motif Run
Motif Run tool 106, 128, 134,
610613, 628633
keep/omit motifs 613
overview 610
reshaping 614
scaling 612
selecting motifs 610
spacing 612
using 134
motif sets making 632
motifs
adjusting offsetting on-screen 625
adjusting spacing on-screen 625
creating new 631
deleting 633
inserting 628
laying out on-screen (Motif Fill) 623
mirroring 630
modifying 630
overview 610
reference points 631
remove functions 631
rotating 630
rotating patterns on-screen 624
saving 631
scaling 630
scaling (Motif Fill) 621
scaling (Motif Run) 612
scaling patterns on-screen 624
selecting 628
selecting (Motif Fills) 617
selecting (Motif Run) 610

single 960
skewing patterns on-screen 624
spacing (Motif Run) 612
two-part 977
See also Motif Fill
See also Motif Run
mouse wheel, preset behavior 842
Move Stitch dialog 524
moving objects
moving circles 475
nudging 452
positioning with X:Y coordinates 452
with click-and-drag 452
Multi-Colorway Box dialog 169174
Multi-Decoration File Export dialog 760
multiple colorways, see colorways
My Hoops dialog 797
N
name groups
adding individual members 363
adding multiple members 365
creating 363
names
creating groups of 363
monogram lettering 391, 392
outputting designs 380
needle penetrations
applying partition lines 551
decorative (Program Split) 553
digitizing split lines 582
offsetting (Tatami) 549
random factor 553
random factor, Program Split 560
needle points
displaying 70
hiding 70
offsetting for Contour 155
needle position marker 75
new
New Colorway tool 169
New tool 42, 43
creating new design 40, 876
New Alphabet dialog 420
New Colorway dialog 169
New dialog 877
New Fabric dialog 202204, 205
New Motif Set dialog 632
New Object Style dialog 207
New Thread Chart dialog 176
starting new design 20
New Stamp Set dialog 576
noise filtering, images 249
nominal stitch length 606608
non-outlined images 256
NORMAL template
overview 212
reverting 215
use 42
nudging objects into position 452
O
object outlines
hide/show 62
Object Properties
Outlines > Sequin Run 657, 667, 676
Special > Sequin dialog 660
object properties
Object Properties tool 5557, 194,

268, 353, 676, 681
accessing 57
applying/managing 206
changing 195
changing defaults 199
changing stitch type 140
connectors 227
current 192, 193
default 192, 193
existing 192, 193
Fills 148
Flexi Split 567
lettering 302
make current 197
Outlines 629
overview 140
presetting 194
saving current 194
saving new defaults 199
saving to a template 213
styles 206
templates 212
Object Properties dialog 55, 57
Accordion 596599
Auto Jump 509
Auto Underlay 217223, 445
Connectors 229233
Curve 606608, 626627
Decorative 584, 590
Fill Stitch > Cross Stitch 600
Fills 142158, 194199, 295,
345348, 507, 549564, 594,
617623
Flexi Split 566567
Outlines 131137, 611614,
629633, 654
Pull Comp 225226, 314
Shortening 502
Special 116123, 194, 237, 255, 268,
302318, 321340, 343, 349,
377379, 406421, 501, 636645
Underlay 358
object sequencing, automatic
stitching 294
objects
applying underlay 217
backtracking 537
changing colors 161
circles 534
cloning 432
connecting 227
converting 486
copying and pasting 430
creating duplicates 537
deleting 433
deselecting 92
duplicating 432
editing 469
French dots 534
locking and unlocking 435
mirror-merging 462
moving 452
nesting 433
ovals 534
positioning 452
reflecting 464
repeating 537
resequencing 438
reshaping 469
rings 534536
rotating 458
selecting 22, 92
selecting colors 161
In dex
1032
shaping 272
skewing 461
splitting 477, 478
vector 262
See also modifying objects
Offset List dialog 543
Offset Object
Offset Object command 540
Offset Object dialog 541543
offsetting
Auto Spacing (Satin) 145
Contour needle points 155
filled holes (Complex Fill) 545
Motif Fill patterns 619
objects 540
offset fractions (Tatami) 549
offsets setting for Input C
objects 122
Program Split columns and rows 558
Program Split patterns
on-screen 563
Program Split stitches 558
random factor (Tatami) 553
using partition lines 551
omit/keep last stitch
Input A 124
Input B 126
omit/keep motifs (Motif Run) 613
online help 2
open
Open Design tool 876
Open Embroidery Disk dialog 752
Open tool 41, 742
Design Explorer 865
Open dialog 41, 252, 266, 398, 742,
776, 786, 861863
Open Embroidery Disk dialog 752
Open Options dialog 776778, 791
shapes, drawing 263
stitching, see color blending
stitching, Trapunto 594
opening designs 875, 876
converting stitch designs 776
from DOS disk 752
object/outline recognition 775
other formats 752
preview window 41
scaling 775
Options
Options dialog 68
General 125, 846850
Grid and Guides 840841
Reshape 844
Scrolling 842
View Design 836, 837
Options dialog
Hoop 795, 797, 801805
organize
designs 892
Organize Favorites dialog 208
Organize Styles dialog 207211
ornament layouts 398
multi-ornaments 399
Ornaments, Monogramming 389400
outline files 773, 785
Outline Run
digitizing artwork 288
Outline Run tool 285, 288
Outline Tools Flyout
Backstitch 106, 128, 135136, 486,
488
Motif Run 106, 128, 134, 486488,
610613, 628633
Run 106, 128132, 486488, 529
Stemstitch 106, 128137, 486488
Triple Run 106, 128133, 486, 488

outlined images, sharpening 258
outlines
control points 107
creating borders around objects 540
displaying 62
Sequin Run 654
show/hide 836
stitches, Motif Run 610
switching between fill and
outline 109
Outlines > Sequin Run 657, 667
Outlines dialog
Backstitch 136
Motif Run 611614, 629, 633
Outlines dialog 131136, 137,
611614, 629633, 654
Run 131132
Stemstitch 137
Triple Run 133
to different formats 807
ovals
boring oval holes 530
digitizing 534
drawing objects 265
in circles (Ring) 536
in ovals (Ring) 536
reshaping circles to ovals 475
overlap stitching
removing 538
overlap tolerance, between
rhinestones 696
Overlap tool 279
overlapping
color blending 598
stabilizing segments 116
overstitching, pull compensation 224
Overview Window tool 66
P
palette
match to drawing 286
see also color palette
panning designs 64
parallel ports
connection settings 823
partial cover appliqu 645
partition lines 551
angle 551
sequence 551
paste options
Center at Current Stitch 849
Object Property Position 849
Shift Pasted Objects 849
Start at Current Stitch 849
Paste tool 430, 439
patterns
creating patterns 564
editing 564
laying out on-screen (Motif Fill) 623
laying out on-screen (Program
Split) 561
pre-defined 570
Program Split 553
scaling for Motif Fill 621
selecting (Program Split) 554
selecting for Motif Fills 617
setting up twin-sequins 676
using objects 572
See also motifs
Penetrations tool 236, 529
peripheral devices
connection settings 821

setting up 820
See also hardware
perspective effects
Color Blending 598
Photo Flash tool 295
photos, converting to embroidery 295
Pickout Run
digitizing artwork 288
tool 285, 288
planning
design shapes 22
stitching sequence 22
PNG format 760
Point & Stitch toolbar
Match to Palette 285286
Outline Run 285, 288
Pickout Run 285, 288
Tatami Fill 285, 286
Tatami Fill without Holes 285, 286
Turning Satin 285, 286
Point mode, digitizer tablets 826
pointer position display 847
Polygon
Polygon Select tool 95
Polygon tool 264
Polyline
Polyline Select tool 95
Polyline tool 263
popup menu
using popup menu 51
Convert Auto Appliqu 486, 491
Convert Backstitch 486, 488
Convert Complex Fill 486, 489
Convert Drawing 488
Convert Fusion Fill 486, 489
Convert Input C 486, 488
Convert Motif Run 486, 488
Convert Run 486, 488
Convert Stemstitch 486, 488
Convert Stitch Angles 486
Convert Triple Run 486, 488
ports
parallel 823
serial 821
position coordinates 47
preparing, enlargement drawings 830
preserving long stitches 508
preset spacing values 834
preset styles, NORMAL template 212
Print
Print Preview tool 90
Print Selected Designs tool 884
Print tool 723
Print Designs Options dialog 885
Print dialog 723
Print Options dialog 726745, 884
printing
backgrounds 740
catalogs 885
multiple colorways 740
production worksheets 884
Process
Process tool 493494, 779
Process dialog 493494, 780
product templates, selecting 186
production information 90
production type, bling 696
production worksheets
color printing 723
customizing 736
printing 722, 723, 884
printing backgrounds 740
viewing 90
products, changing backgrounds 72
1033
Program Split
adjusting spacing on-screen 563
applying 554
applying random factors 560
combination splits 555
creating patterns 564
editing patterns 564
filling shapes with 554
layout patterns 561
modifying layouts on-screen 561
offsetting 558
offsetting patterns on-screen 563
Program Split tool 554561
random factor 560
rotating patterns on-screen 562
scaling patterns on-screen 562
selecting patterns 554
skewing patterns on-screen 563
stitch values 557
properties
lettering 302
See also object properties
Properties dialog 874
ES Explorer 873
Windows Explorer 84
properties, vector objects 268
Property Bar 57
Publish Options dialog 886
publishing catalogs 886
puck, digitizer 834
Pull Comp dialog 225226, 314
pull compensation
applying 224
overstitching amount 225
overview 224
recommended values 225
reversing stitch direction 538
punch
Punch Options dialog 883
Punch Selected Designs tool 883
designs 882
from ES Explorer 883
Purge Recover and Backup Directories
dialog 994
push-pull effect, compensating for 116
R
random factor
Program Split 560
reassigning colors, to stitch files 790
Recognition - Advanced Options
dialog 781, 782, 783, 784, 785
recoloring objects 161
record
Record to Clipart tool 858
Record to Clipart dialog 858
viewing 873
Rectangle tool 265
rectangles, drawing 265
rectangular hoops
creating 800
Redo tool 58
redoing commands 58
redrawing designs slowly 78
Reduce Colors
Reduce Colors tool 256
Reduce Colors dialog 256
reference lines
mirroring objects 463
rotating by specified angle 460
rotating relative to 460
reference points
motifs 631
origin 830, 831
rotating using 460
rotating using (exact angle) 460
rotation point 830831
scaling objects with 457
See also control points
Reflect tool 464
reflecting objects
using Mirror-Merge 464
refreshing display/folders/tree
node 870
registering
the menu chart 829
Remove
Remove Color From Palette tool 163
Remove Overlaps dialog 539
Rename
Rename Colorway tool 170
Rename Alphabet dialog 422
Rename Letter dialog 423
Rename Object Style dialog 211
Rename Thread Chart dialog 178
Rename Split Pattern dialog 570
renaming
designs 893
folders 892
styles 210
Repeat tool 537
repeating
motifs (Motif Run) 625
objects 537
resequencing
appliqu components 645
by color 440
by selection 440
objects 438
objects by Color-Object List 442
objects by number 442
Resequence By Number dialog 442
using cut and paste 439
using the Color-Object List 441
Reshape Object tool 316317, 323,
327332, 354412, 424, 447,
470476, 482485, 604, 614,
626627, 644, 683, 712, 844
reshape options 844
Reshape Tools Flyout
Reshape Object 316317, 323,
327332, 354412, 424, 447,
470482, 604, 614, 626627, 644,
683, 712, 844
Stitch Edit 512, 514518
Reshape Views toolbar
Show Handles 470, 473
Show Reshape Nodes 470473
Show Start/End 447, 470
Show Stitch Angles 470, 482
Reshape, Options 844
reshaping objects 469
bzier control handles 473
circles 475
lettering 332
Motif Run 614
reshape nodes 471
Ring 476
Sequin Run 683
Star 475
Retain Graphics tool 281
Reverse Curves command 538
reverse stitching
Backtrack and Repeat 537
direction 538
Revert
Revert to Factory Settings dialog 215
Revert to NORMAL template 215

Revert to Factory Settings dialog 994
rhinestones
overlap tolerance 696
production type 696
rhinestones, digitizing 694
Ring objects
changing size 476
moving boundary 476
reshaping objects 476
Ring tool 106, 536
Rotate
Rotate tool 459
Rotate 45 degrees CCW tool 459
Rotate 45 degrees CW tool 459
rotating
motifs 630
motifs in Motif Fills 622
patterns on-screen 624
on-screen 562
rotating objects 458
by an exact amount 459
by click-and-drag 458
on screen 458
using a reference line 460
using a reference line and angle 460
roughness, Jagged Edge values 590
rounding corners, Input C 501
row spacing, Program Split 556
rulers and guides 45
Run
Run tool 106, 128132, 529
Backtrack and Repeat 537
Center Run values 219
chord gap 131
setting stitch length 131
stitch length 131
underlays 219
values 131
variable stitch length 132
runs
creating 130
overview 227
sequins 652
setting Center Run and Edge Run
values 219
travel runs 237
S
same size, objects 458
sample motifs, Motif Fill 623
sample patterns, Program Split 561
Satin
Satin tool 140147, 345, 507
appliqu cover stitch 643
applying Auto Split 507
automatic spacing 142
overview 142
setting stitch count 147
splitting long stitches 507
Triple Satin 147
Save
Save tool 44
Save As dialog 44, 214, 861, 888, 890
Save Options > Team Names
dialog 384, 386
Save Options dialog 751
Save to Embroidery Disk dialog 755
Save User-Refined Letter dialog 413
Save Hoop As dialog 801805
Save Pattern dialog 681
In dex
1034
saving
CSD format 751
designs 44
Melco CND format 750
object properties to a template 213
scaling objects
enlargement drawing scale 832
make same size 458
on screen 455
to an exact size 456
using Object Properties panel 456
using reference points 457
scanning
color mode 244
preparing artwork 244
resolution 244
sharpening 246
tips 245
Screen Calibration dialog 820
scrolling, set automatic scrolling 842
security
device messages 984
entering access codes 18
security device 18
Security Device dialog 1819
identifying 18
serial number 18
segments
adjusting overlap 116
Complex Fill objects 114
Select
Select Current tool 93
Select Object tool 9397, 323, 326,
432436, 683, 711, 712
Select Border dialog 401, 546
Select By Color dialog 69, 98
Select Machine Format dialog 59, 806
Select Tools Flyout
Select Object 432
Select Fabric Pattern dialog 183
Select Machine Format dialog 648, 676
Select Tools Flyout
Polygon Select 95
Polyline Select 95
Select Current 93
Select Object 9397, 323, 326, 436,
683, 711, 712
selecting objects
by color 98
by selection marquee 94
by stitch type 98
current object 96
grouping 434
resequencing by selection 440
selecting a range 96
selecting all 92
selecting first and last 97
selecting the next or previous
object 97
using point and click 93
using Selects On 97
while traveling 96
with Polygon Select 95
within groups 436
selecting stitches 511
by needle point 512
cancelling a selection 515
selecting a range 514
several stitches 512
single stitch 512
using outline 512
using Selects On 514515
while traveling through a design 515
with a bounding box 512
with the Stitch List 513

selection
handles, scaling 452
marquee, selecting objects 94
Selects On tool 97, 514
seqin fills
converting to sequin fill 674
sequence
Sequence dialog 349351
appliqu components 645
automatic stitching 294
checking 75
partition lines (Tatami) 551
resequencing 439
Sequence By Color dialog 440
traveling 75
sequin drops, digitizing manually 690
Sequin Edit tool 684, 687
Sequin Fill tool 662, 664, 674
sequin fills
adding borders 669
adjusting line settings 664
adjusting pattern settings 666
creating 662
digitizing 662
reshaping 687
sequin functions, inserting 691
sequin mode 647
Sequin Palette Editor dialog 649, 650,
676
sequin palettes
editing 650
Sequin Palette Editor tool 649681
Sequin Palette tool 649654
setting up 649
Sequin Pattern dialog 672, 678
sequin runs
adjusting spacing and fixing
orientation 656
automatic 652
changing sequins and fixing
stitches 654
creating 652
drop-stitch direction 660
manual 652
scale/reshape 683
Sequin Run Auto tool 652, 674, 678
Sequin Run Manual tool 652
twin-sequin runs 678
twin-sequins 675
Sequin toolbar
Left Sequin 690
Manual Sequin 690
Right Sequin 690
Sequin Edit 684, 687
Sequin Fill 662, 664, 674
Sequin Palette 649654
Sequin Palette Editor 649, 650, 676,
681
Sequin Run Auto 652, 674, 678
Sequin Run Manual 652
Vectors to Sequins 672
sequin-capable machine, selecting 647
sequins
changing 654
converting artwork 672
digitizing individual 690
serial devices, recommended
settings 821
serial number
identifying 18
security device 18
Serial Port Setup dialog 822
Set Color dialog 162
Set Security Device Options dialog 18
settings
adjusting view 869
Always Check Design Integrity 850

changing display 70
Cross Hair Cursor 849, 850
Cumulative Stitch Count 850
design view defaults 871
other options 850
pointer position display 846, 847
Run Small Stitch Filter on Output 850
Show Design Source 850
user preferences 871
shading effects
Color Blending 598
shapes
baselines, reshaping 332
drawing lines 263
with turning stitches 112
Shaping toolbar
Back-Front 276
Combine 274
Divide 277279
Exclude 276
Flatten 277279
Front-Back 276
Intersect 276
Keep Source Objects 278
Overlap 279
Weld 274
Sharpen
Sharpen Edges tool 258
Sharpen Outlines dialog 258
Shortcut to Windows Properties
dialog 877
Shortening
Shortening tool 502
Shortening dialog 502
shortening, see stitch shortening
Show
Bitmaps tool 61
Show Bitmaps tool 838
Show Clipart tool 853858
Show Connectors tool 70
Show Drawing tool 272
Show Embroidery tool 60
Show Functions dialog 526
Show Functions tool 70
Show Graphics tool 60
Show Grid tool 45, 839841
Show Handles tool 470, 473
Show Needle Points tool 70
Show Outlines tool 63
Show Reshape Nodes tool 470473
Show Rulers and Guides tool 45, 841
Show Start/End tool 447, 470
Show Stitch Angles tool 470, 482
Show Stitches dialog 527
Show Stitches tool 63
Show Vectors tool 838
Show/Hide folders icon 867
Vectors tool 61
Zoom to All Design tool 64
Show Background Image toggle 186
Show Hoop tool 72, 794, 795, 797, 800,
804
Skew tool 461
skewing objects
by exact angle 461
patterns on-screen 624
on-screen 563
with rotation handles 461
slide show
browsing designs 874
running 874
thumbnails and properties 874
1035
viewing designs 874

Slow Redraw
Slow Redraw tool 78
Slow Redraw dialog 79
Small Stitches dialog 495
smart corners
Cap Corners tool 497498, 911
Lap Corners tool 497498
Mitre Corners tool 497498
round corners, Input C 501
setting values 498
Smart Corners dialog 498505
Smart Design
Smart Design dialog 289292
Smart Design tool 289
Smart Design Tools Flyout
Auto Trace 283
Photo Flash 295
Reduce Colors 256
Sharpen Edges 258
Smart Design 289
smooth
joins, creating 125
Smooth Curves command 447, 485
Smooth Curves dialog 485
smoothing freehand lines 588
snap to grid 841
Sort
Sort tool 881
Sort dialog 881
sorting
design lists 871
designs 879
using details lists 880
using Sort 881
using View menu 880
Space
Space Evenly Across tool 454
Space Evenly Down tool 454
spacing
lettering 316
objects evenly 454
offset, Auto Spacing 145
open spacing (color blending) 598
open spacing (Trapunto) 594
preset 834
Program Split stitches 557
Tatami underlay 221
using Auto Spacing 142
Zigzag and Double Zigzag
stitches 220
Special > Sequin dialog 660
Special dialog 121123, 194, 237, 255,
268, 295, 302318, 321340, 343,
??379, 406421, 501, 636643
Appliqu 194, 636643
Bitmap 255
Complex Fill 116
Fusion Fill 116118
Input C 121123, 501
Lettering 302318, 321340, 343,
349, 377379
406421
Photo Flash 295
Travel Run 237
Vector 268
Special menu
Alphabet > Make Letter 424
Convert TrueType Font 409
Embroidery mode 908
Spiral Contour 153
in circles 534
Split Palette Color tool 173
Split Window command 64
splitting
combination splits 555

lines 582
objects 477
using Auto Split 507
using split lines 582
squares, drawing 265
stabilizing, with auto underlay 216
Standard backstitch 150
Standard Contour 153
Standard toolbar
Copy 430
Cut 430, 439
Embroidery Disk Open 752
Embroidery Disk Save As 754, 807
New 42, 43
Open 41, 742
Paste 430, 439
Print 723
Print Preview 90
quick reference 912
Redo 58
Save 44
Show Drawing 272
Stitch to Connection Manager 749,
807
Stitch to Stitch Manager 747, 807
Undo 58
Zoom 64
Zoom 1-1 64
Zoom Factor 64, 910, 913
Zoom to All Design 64
Zoom to Product 72, 186
Star objects
digitizing 535
reshaping 475
Star tool 106, 535
Start/End Design tool 75
starting new designs 40
starting the software 35
Status Line, measurements 47
Stemstitch
Stemstitch tool 106, 128, 135137
stipple
Stipple Fill tool 591
creating textures 591
Stipple dialog 592
stitch
Stitch to Connection Manager
tool 749, 807
Stitch to Stitch Manager tool 747,
807
runs, creating 130
Stitch Options dialog 883
Stitch Selected Designs tool 883
Stitch to Connection Manager
dialog 749
Stitch to Stitch Manager dialog 748,
808
stitch angles
Stitch Angles tool 484
adding 482
adding to Complex/Fusion Fill 484
adjusting 482
Complex Fill/Fusion Fill 115
defining for Complex Fill 110
turning stitches, Input A 124
stitch density
adjusting 493
adjusting for certain stitch types 494
stitch designs
conversion options 776
opening 776
processing into objects 776
stitch recognition 776
stitch direction, reversing 538
Stitch Edit tool 512, 514518

Stitch Effects toolbar
3D Warp 626627
Auto Jump 508
Auto Underlay 217223, 357, 445
Cap Corners 497498, 911
Flexi Split 566567
Florentine Effect 602606
Fractional Spacing 505
Jagged Edge tool 590
Lap Corners 497498
Liquid Effect 607608
Mitre Corners 497498
Pull Compensation 224225
Shortening 502
Trapunto 594
User Defined Split 582584
stitch files
overview 773
reassigning colors 790
supported formats 931
Stitch List
Stitch List tool 513, 524527
editing stitch coordinates 524
filtering by function 526
Stitch List dialog 513527
using 524
Stitch Manager
Stitch Manage dialog 748
deleting embroidery machines 825
stitch patterns, with carving
stamps 569
stitch recognition 776
advanced options 781
stitch shortening
applying 502
overview 501
stitch types
Backstitch 136
changing 140
Contour 153
fill 140
Motif Fill 616
Motif Run 610
overview 140
Program Split 553
Satin 142
selecting 140
Stemstitch 137
Tatami 148
Triple Satin 147
Stitch Types toolbar
Contour 140, 154155
Cross Stitch 600
E Stitch 140, 158, 911
Motif Fill 140, 151, 616623, 633
Program Split 554561
Pull Compensation 911
Satin 140147, 345, 507
Stipple Fill 591
Tatami 140, 148150, 346, 548553
Zigzag 140, 157, 347
stitch types, cross stitch 600
stitch values
Auto Spacing (Satin) 142
backstitch 150
guide runs (appliqu) 640
length (Tatami) 148
setting Tatami offsets 548
setting Tatami values 148
tacking (appliqu) 641
Stitch/Function Tools Flyout
Empty Jump Function 236
Empty Stitch Function 236
Keep Last Stitch 238
In dex
1036
Tie Off 234

Trim 235
stitches
adjusting density 494
appliqu cover 643
appliqu tacking 641
Contour stitch values 155
create turning stitches 112
deselecting 515
Edge Run and Center Run length 219
editing 517
estimating total 88
generating 109
keep/omit last stitch 124126
Manual 528
multiple stitch counts (Triple
Run) 133
preserving with Auto Jump 508
selecting 511
selecting a stitch type 140
shortening 501
show/hide 836
stitch types 140
Tatami underlay 221
travel runs 237
traveling by 75
Zigzag and Double Zigzag length 220
See also editing stitches
See also selecting stitches
stitching
removing layers 538
sequence 75
sequence, see also sequence
stitching designs
selecting machine and options 883
using Connection Manager 749
using Stitch Manager 747
See also Stitch Manager
Stop Sequence, Design Properties 85,
89
Stream mode, digitizer tablets 826
strengthening auto underlays 216
styles
applying 206
applying favorites 206
assigning favorites 208
creating new style 207
deleting 211
make object properties current 197
merging 209
modifying 210
monogram lettering 391
overview 206
renaming 210
Styles toolbar 206
Apply Current Properties 197, 604
Apply Style 206
favorite styles 206
Make Properties Current 197, 604
switching modes 39
switching, between fill and outline 109
system preferences
automatic backup 845
automatic save 845
enabling 18
setting 836
viewing options 837
system security, see security
T
Tab delimited files, exporting
catalogs 887
Tablet Setup dialog 829833
tacking
setting values 641
Tag
Tag as Appliqu tool 634
Tag as Parallel Tatami Lettering
tool 299
Tag as Turning Satin Lettering
tool 299
Tag as Turning Satin tool 281
Tag as Wilcom Lettering tool 299
Tajima twin-sequin-capable
machine 675
Tape Manager dialog 883
Tatami
Tatami Fill tool 285, 286
Tatami Fill without Holes tool 285,
286
Tatami tool 140, 148150, 346,
548553
backstitch 150
Borderline backstitch 150
density 148
Diagonal backstitch 151
offset fractions 549
offsets 548
partition lines 551
random factor 553
setting underlay stitch angles 221
setting underlay values 221
Standard backstitch 150
stitch length 148
stitch spacing, length and minimum
length 148
values 148
Team List tool 375, 377380
Team Members dialog 381
team names 362
Team Names tool 363366, 369
Add Team Member dialog 364
Create Teamname Layout dialog 373
creating 366
creating separate designs 380
Layouts dialog 369
Name Order dialog 367
New Layout Set dialog 373
Quick Names dialog 365
See also names
Team Members dialog 377
Team Names dialog 363365
Team Names Matrix 381
Teamname List dialog 375381
Teamname Matrix dialog 382
Team Names dialog 367
Team Names Flyout
Team Names 363366, 369
Team Names Flyout > Team List
Team List 375, 377380
Team Names Flyout > Team Names
Matrix 369, 372, 381
Team Names Matrix tool 369, 372, 381
team names, auto-alignment 385
Team-name designs, saving 383
templates
creating 214
deleting 214
modifying 214
NORMAL 212
reverting to original 215
saving object properties 213
using custom templates 876
using the NORMAL template 42
templates, selecting products 186
text, editing lettering 320
textured fills

creating 565
selecting patterns and options 566
textures
stippling 591
third-party applications 254
thread brand, adding to charts 180
thread charts
adding colors 180
copying colors 179
creating 176
deleting 178
modifying 176
modifying threads 167, 178
renaming 178
thread codes, adding to thread
charts 180
thread colors 160
adding to charts 180
copying across thread charts 179
creating thread charts 176
matching 163, 166
matching to image 166
mixing your own 182
modifying threads 167, 178
See also colors
thread description, adding to
charts 180
thread thickness, adding to charts 180
threads
brands 181
code 181
color matching 166
density 181
thickness 145
type 181
types 145
Tie In Values dialog 231
Tie Off
Tie Off tool 234
Tie Off Values dialog 232
tie-ins
overview 228
setting automatic tie-ins values 231
tie-offs
adding 234
methods 232
overview 228
setting automatic tie-off values 232
setting automatic trim values 233
toolbars
Toolbars menu 54
selecting commands 52
showing/hiding 54
Styles toolbar 206
Toolbox
Auto Appliqu 486, 491, 636645
Auto Trace 283
Automatic Knife 481
Backstitch 106, 128, 135136, 486,
488
Backtrack 537
Borders 546
Borers 529
Circle 105, 534
Color Blending 598
Combine Appliqu Components 645
Complex Fill 105, 110115, 486, 489,
602, 607, 616
Drawing 488
Ellipse 265
Empty Jump Function 236
Empty Stitch Function 236
Fill Holes 545
Freehand - Closed Fill Object
tool 586, 588
Wil com Embroider ySt udio e 2.0 Onscreen Manual
1037
Freehand - Closed Outline Object

tool 586, 588
Freehand - Open Object tool 586,
588
Fusion Fill 105, 112117, 486, 489
Input A 106, 124125, 529
Input B 106, 126
Input C 106, 119123, 486, 488, 501,
915
Insert Offset Object 540543
Knife 479
Lettering 302306, 320337, 342,
349352, 360, 379, 406421
Line 263
Manual 107, 528, 529
Monogramming 388392
Motif Run 106, 128, 134, 486, 488,
610613, 628633
Photo Flash 295
Polygon 264
Polygon Select 95
Polyline 263
Polyline Select 95
quick reference 914
Rectangle 265
Reduce Colors 256
Repeat 537
Reshape Object 316317, 323,
327332, 354412, 424447,
470476, 482485, 604, 614,
626627, 644, 683, 712, 844
Ring 106, 536
Run 106, 128132, 486, 488, 529
Select Current 93
Select Object 9397, 323, 326,
432436, 683, 711, 712
Sharpen Edges 258
Smart Design 289
Star 106, 535
Start/End Design 75
Stemstitch 106, 128, 135137, 486,
488
Stitch Angles 486
Stitch Edit 512, 514518
Tie Off 234
Travel 1 Stitches 76
Travel 1000 Stitches 76, 916
Travel by Color 75, 915
Travel by Function 76
Travel by Object 75, 916
Travel by Segment 75
Travel by Trim 76
Trim 235
Triple Manual 107, 528
Triple Run 106, 128133, 486, 488
total stitch count, estimating 88
Transform dialog 457463
Transform toolbar
Mirror Horizontally 462
Mirror Vertically 462
Rotate 459
Rotate 45 degrees CCW 459
Rotate 45 degrees CW 459
Skew 461
transforming objects
letters on screen 329
mirroring (reference line) 463
rotating (reference line and
angle) 460
scaling (reference points) 457
Trapunto
Trapunto tool 594
overview 594
Travel
1000 Stitches tool 916

Travel 1 Stitches tool 76
Travel by Color tool 75, 915
Travel by Function tool 76
Travel by Object tool 75, 916
Travel by Segment tool 75
Travel by Trim tool 76
travel runs 237
Travel Tools Flyout
Start/End Design 75
Travel by Color 75
Travel by Function 76
Travel by Object 75
Travel by Segment 75
Travel by Trim 76
traveling
selecting objects while traveling 96
selecting stitches 515
tree node, refresh 870
Trim tool 235
trims
adding 234
overview 228
trims functions 810
Triple Manual tool 107, 528
Triple Run
tool 106, 128133
repeating stitches 133
variable stitch length 132
Triple Satin 147
troubleshooting 984
beeping sound 991
deleting files with purge
recovery 994
design integrity 991
device connections 987
digitizer connections 995
embroidery lettering 992
ES Design Explorer problems 986
exception access violations 996, 997
general problems 989
invalid access code 984
invalid product 985
Missing files 985
missing toolbars 990
output 989
recovering backups 991
reverting to factory settings 994
security device messages 984
stitch display 990
Timeout warning 985
Timeout warning when starting ES
Design Explorer 986
TrueView 990
units of measurement 989
Unrecoverable error when opening
design 986
Unrecoverable error when opening ES
Designer 986
unrecoverable errors 986
unwanted trims 991
True View
TrueView Options dialog 837
TrueType fonts 405
conversion stitch methods 410
converting complete alphabets 409
converting to embroidery fonts 405
TrueView
tool 62, 837

selecting options 837
show/hide 836
thread thickness 837
viewing designs 62
turning Satin digitizing artwork 286
Turning Satin tool 285, 286
turning stitches
applying fractional spacing 505
applying stitch shortening 502
Contour 153
corner fractions 123
digitizing with Input A 124
digitizing with Input B 126
Input C 123
turning stitches, creating shapes 112
turning-off
automatic tie-ins 231
automatic tie-offs 232
automatic trims 233
fractional spacing 505
Twin Device - Select Sequin dialog 691
twin-sequins
adjusting runs 678
creating runs 675
setting up patterns 676
two-color alphabets 350
two-part motifs 618
U
underlay
Underlay dialog 358, 445
Center Run 219
choosing suitable underlays 219
Edge Run 219
setting Auto Underlay margins 223
See also Auto Underlay
Undo tool 58
undoing commands 58
Ungroup tool 424, 434
ungrouping objects 434
Universal toolbar
Convert 281, 299, 634
Embroidery Mode 39
Graphics Mode 39
quick reference 909
Retain Graphics 281
Show Embroidery 60
Show Graphics 60
Tag as Appliqu 634
Tag as Parallel Tatami Lettering 299
Tag as Turning Satin 281
Tag as Turning Satin Lettering 299
Tag as Wilcom Lettering 299
Unlock All tool 435
unlocking objects 435
unrecoverable errors,
troubleshooting 986
Use Auto Start and End
tool 238
Use Object Style dialog 206
User Defined Split
User Defined Split tool 582584
applying 583
digitizing objects with 582
User Preferences
User Preferences command 871
User Preferences dialog 871
User Preferences setting 871
user-refined alphabets 412
In dex
1038
setting options 837

TrueView options 837
zooming 64
V
validating folders 870
values
Run and Triple Run 131
selecting stitch types 140
Tatami underlay 221
travel runs 237
See also object properties
variable stitch length (Run and Triple
Run) 132
vector drawings
automatic digitizing 262
convert to embroidery 486
converting artwork 283
digitizing 486
importing and exporting 266
reshaping 485
smoothing 485
vector graphics
manipulating 268
vector objects
coloring 268
convert to embroidery 281
creating 262
open shapes 263
straight lines 263
Vectors to Sequins tool 672
View Design, Options dialog 836, 837
View Image, Options dialog 838
View menu
in Embroidery mode 907
User Preferences 871
View toolbar
Auto HoopIt 798
Color-Object List 55, 80, 99, 435,
441442, 444
Object Properties 5557, 194, 199,
213, 228233, 237, 268, 353, 676,
681
Overview Window 66
Show Bitmaps 61, 838
Show Connectors 70
Show Functions 70
Show Grid 45, 839841
Show Needle Points 70
Show Outlines 63
Show Rulers and Guides 45, 841
Show Stitches 63
Show Vectors 61, 838
Slow Redraw 78
Stitch List 513, 524527
TrueView 62, 837
viewing
backdrops 61
colorways 71
control points 470
design properties 873
graphics 60
information online 2
objects by color 69
options, see user preferences
properties 873
slide show 874
viewing designs 62
connectors 70
displaying hidden objects 99
functions 70
needle points 70
outlines 62
panning 64
redrawing slowly 78
setting display options 67
W
Weld tool 274
width, make objects same 458
WinZip tool 890
word spacing, changing 318
worksheets, see production worksheets
wreath
Wreath tool 465
creating 465
kaleidoscope effect 465
X
X and Y coordinates, setting 452
Z
Zigzag
Zigzag tool 140, 157, 347
underlay, setting 220
using with boring holes 529
zipped designs
extracting 891
viewing in folders 868
Zoom
Zoom 1-1 tool 64
Zoom Factor tool 64, 910, 913
Zoom tool 64
in/out 64
Zoom Factor dialog 64
Zoom to Product tool 72, 186
1039

A Complete Setup by Setup Guide For Embroidery Digitizing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Complete Setup by Setup Guide For Embroidery Digitizing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Copyright 1998-2010 Wilcom Pty Ltd. All rights reserved.

trademarks of Bitstream Inc. SWiSH miniMax2 and the

Welcome to Wilcom EmbroideryStudio e2.0, the

upon the others to provide for the whole gamut

While EmbroideryStudio supports

EmbroideryStudio product range

Incorporating a blend of powerful digitizing tools

Wil com Embroider yStudio e 2.0 Onscreen Manual

to give you maximum power. Take charge of your

selected, see Product Differentiation Table in the

Registering the product

 Information about product updates, events

Resources and support

Onscreen documentation is provided in two

interface, refer to the electronic User Guide

Wilcom ES Chenille Supplement

Onscreen Help provides quick access to general

User Manual supplements

 ES Machine Manager Direct Connect

 Manual and automatic cross stitch digitizing

 Setting up sequin mode

This supplement documents the following

 ES Chenille features within

This supplement is supplied with the ES Chenille

 ES Schiffli features within EmbroideryStudio

Viewing onscreen documentation

This supplement is supplied with the ES Sequin

Wil com Embroider yStudio e 2.0 Onscreen Manual

You will find the following onscreen

EmbroideryStudio Help. See

Alternatively, access onscreen documentation

 Click the Reader Zoom dropdown and

Accessing onscreen help

2 Select the EmbroideryStudio Onscreen

 In Graphics mode you have sub-menus

 In Embroidery mode you are presented

3 Select the topic you want by clicking on its

 Click the Actual Size, or Fit in Window,

 Select the Zoom In tool, then click

2 Choose Help Topics from the dropdown list.

Topics are grouped under high-level headings

 Alternatively, select Help > Wilcom on the

4 Double-click a book to view the list of topics,

Tip Context-Sensitive Help is available for

Accessing online support

Note You must have a correctly configured

 Click the Quick Launch button on the

Conventions used in the documentation

 Select an option from the dropdown list:

Resource Center web page which includes

Click the left mouse button.

Wil com Embroider yStudio e 2.0 Onscreen Manual

While holding down the Control key

Installation & Setup

If you havent yet installed Wilcom

 The current EmbroideryStudio installation

 After you install the EmbroideryStudio

Intel Pentium 4, AMD Athlon 64 or

Wil com Embroider yStudio e 2.0 Onscreen Manual

Support for Highest Color (32bit) and

Support for DirectX 9 graphics with:

Supported operating systems

Information about product updates, events

ES Machine Manager Direct Connect

Manual and automatic cross stitch digitizing

Setting up sequin mode

ES Chenille features within

ES Schiffli features within EmbroideryStudio

Click the Reader Zoom dropdown and

In Graphics mode you have sub-menus

In Embroidery mode you are presented

Click the Actual Size, or Fit in Window,

Select the Zoom In tool, then click

Alternatively, select Help > Wilcom on the

Click the Quick Launch button on the

Select an option from the dropdown list:

The current EmbroideryStudio installation

After you install the EmbroideryStudio

If there is a motif in the new version which

If there is a motif in the old version which

If there is a template in the new version

If there is a thread chart in the new installation